Nus Spec

TENDER DOCUMENT
PROPOSED ADDITION AND ALTERATION TO EXISTING 4-STOREY

BUILDING AT 11 LOWER KENT RIDGE ROAD TO A NEW MEDICAL-
SCIENCE LIBRARY WITHIN NATIONAL UNIVERSITY OF SINGAPORE
ON LOTS 03891P, 03894K, 04340V, 04342T, 05023L, 05025M, 05112L,
MK03, SINGAPORE 119083 (QUEENSTOWN PLANNING AREA)
TENDER REFERENCE NO : NUSDEP/OED/
EMPLOYER NATIONAL UNIVERSITY OF SINGAPORE

Office of Estate Development
Ventus 8 Kent Ridge Drive
Singapore 119246
SUPERINTENDING OFFICER, CPG CONSULTANTS PTE LTD

/ ARCHITECT 1 Gateway Drive #23-01
Westgate Tower
Singapore 608531
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL ECAS CONSULTANTS PTE LTD

(STRUCTURAL) ENGINEER 16 Jalan Kilang, #03-01
Hoi Hup Building
Singapore 159416
MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL WSP CONSULTANCY PTE LTD

ENGINEER 300 BEACH ROAD
#05-00 The Concourse
Singapore 199555
QUANTITY SURVEYOR CPG CONSULTANTS PTE LTD

1 Gateway Drive #23-01
Westgate Tower
Singapore 608531
VOLUME 3 OF 4
PROPOSED ADDITION AND ALTERATION TO EXISTING 4-STOREY BUILDING AT 11
LOWER KENT RIDGE ROAD TO A NEW MEDICAL-SCIENCE LIBRARY WITHIN
NATIONAL UNIVERSITY OF SINGAPORE ON LOTS 03891P, 03894K, 04340V, 04342T,
05023L, 05025M, 05112L, MK03, SINGAPORE 119083 (QUEENSTOWN PLANNING
AREA)
VOLUME 3 OF 4
2602542S/ME
PROPOSED ADDITION AND ALTERATION TO EXISTING 4-STOREY BUILDING AT 11 LOWER
KENT RIDGE ROAD TO A NEW MEDICAL-SCIENCE LIBRARY WITHIN NATIONAL UNIVERSITY
OF SINGAPORE ON LOTS 03891P, 03894K, 04340V, 04342T, 05023L, 05025M, 05112L, MK03,
SINGAPORE 119083 (QUEENSTOWN PLANNING AREA)
INDEX
DESCRIPTION PAGE
VOLUME 3
PART IV-1 : TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

(AIR-CONDITIONING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION INSTALLATION)
SECTION 1 : GENERAL PS/M/S1/1 to

PS/M/S1/31
SECTION 2 : NOT USED -
SECTION 11 : DUCKWORK TS/M/S11/1 to

TS/M/S11/19
SECTION 12 : AIR DIFFUSING EQUIPEMNT AND DAMPER TS/M/S12/1 to

TS/M/S12/21
SECTION 13 : AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHU) AND FILTERS TS/M/S13/1 to

TS/M/S13/13
SECTION 14 : FAN COIL UNITS (FCUS) TS/M/S14/1 to

TS/M/S14/3
SECTION 15 : AIR FILTERS TS/M/S15/1 to

TS/M/S15/12
SECTION 16 : CONTROLS TS/M/S16/1 to

TS/M/S16/17
SECTION 17 : PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROL SYSTEM TS/M/S17/1 to

TS/M/S17/30
SECTION 18 : AUTOMATION & MONITORING SYSTEM TS/M/S18/1 to

TS/M/S18/52
SECTION 19 : INSTRUMENTATION & SENSOR SYSTEM TS/M/S19/1 to

TS/M/S19/15
1 2602542S/ME
INDEX
DESCRIPTION PAGE
VOLUME 3
SECTION 20 : VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE (VSD) TS/M/S20/1 to

TS/M/S20/7
SECTION 21 : ELECTRONIC CONTROL SOFT STARTER TS/M/S21/1 to

TS/M/S21/4
SECTION 22 : AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHU) AND FILTERS WITH HEAT TS/M/S22/1 to
PIPE TS/M/S22/16
SECTION 23 : 100% FRESH AIR BUILD UP AIR HANDLING UNITS TS/M/S23/1 to

(AHU) AND FILTERS WITH HEAT RECOVERY UNIT TS/M/S23/18
SECTION 24 : 100% FRESH AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHU) AND TS/M/S24/1 to

FILTERS WITH HEAT RECOVERY UNIT TS/M/S24/14
SECTION 26 : MECHANICAL VENTILATION AND FANS TS/M/S26/1 to

TS/M/S26/4
SECTION 30 : PIPE AND FITTINGS TS/M/S30/1 to

TS/M/S30/19

SECTION 39 : DEHUMIDIFIERS TS/M/S39/1 to
TS/M/S39/3
SECTION 40 : WATER DETECTION SYSTEM TS/M/S40/1 to

TS/M/S40/4
2 2602542S/ME
INDEX
DESCRIPTION PAGE
VOLUME 3
SECTION 42 : AIR-COOLED MULTI-SPLIT VRV UNITS TS/M/S42/1 to

TS/M/S42/10
SECTION 44 : AIR-COOLED MULTI-SPLIT VRV UNITS TS/M/S44/1 to

TS/M/S44/10
SECTION 48 : ULTRA VIOLET EMITTER TS/M/S48/1 to

TS/M/S48/4
SECTION 49 : VIBRATION ISOLATION AND NOISE CONTROL TS/M/S49/1 to

TS/M/S49/11
SECTION 50 : WATER FLOW METER AND BTU METER TS/M/S50/1 to

TS/M/S50/7
SECTION 51 : DIGITAL POWER METER TS/M/S51/1 to

TS/M/S51/11
SECTION 55 : DEHUMIDIFIER HEAT PIPES TS/M/S55/1 to

TS/M/S55/4
SECTION 56 : FIRE RESISTANT SYSTEM TS/M/S56/1 to

TS/M/S56/6
SECTION 60 : INTELLIGENT BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM TS/M/S60/1 to

TS/M/S60/15
SECTION 61 : MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (MMS) TS/M/S61/1 to

TS/M/S61/14
3 2602542S/ME
INDEX
DESCRIPTION PAGE
VOLUME 3
SECTION 64 : ELECTRICAL TS/M/S64/1 to

TS/M/S64/50
SECTION 67 : INTERFACE FOR BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM TS/M/S67/1 to

TS/M/S67/3
SECTION 68 : PAINTING TS/M/S68/1 to

TS/M/S68/6
SECTION 69 : BALANCING, TESTING & COMMISSIONING OF AIR- TS/M/S69/1 to

CONDITIONING & VENTILATION TS/M/S69/5
SECTION 70 : SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACT TS/M/S70/1 to

TS/M/S70/3
4 2602542S/ME
INDEX
DESCRIPTION PAGE
VOLUME 3
PART IV-2 : TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

(ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION)
SECTION 1 : GENERAL REQUIREMENT TS/1/1 to TS/1/43
SECTION 5 : LOW VOLTAGE MAIN AND SUB SWITCHBOARD TS/5/1 to TS/5/17
SECTION 6 : LOW VOLTAGE AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS TS/6/1 to TS/6/2
SECTION 7 : LOW VOLTAGE AUTOMATIC TRANSFER TS/7/1 to TS/7/4

SWITCHES (ATS)
SECTION 8 : MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCB) FOR TS/8/1 to TS/8/3

MAIN SWITCHBOARD, SUB-SWITCHBOARDS AND
MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
SECTION 9 : MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB) FOR TS/9/1 to TS/9/2

DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
SECTION 10 : RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS (RCCB) TS/10/1
SECTION 11 : MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARDS (MDB) TS/11/1 to TS/11/4
SECTION 12 : THREE PHASE DISTRIBUTION BOARDS FOR TS/12/1 to TS/12/5

LIGHTING AND POWER CIRCUITS
SECTION 13 : SINGLE PHASE COMBINED LIGHTING AND TS/13/1 to TS/13/4

POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
SECTION 14 : ALTERNATIONG CURRENT (A.C.) CONTACTORS TS/14/1 to TS/14/2

FOR LIGHTING CIRCUIT
SECTION 15 : ISOLATOR (NON-AUTOMATIC MOULDED CASE TS/15/1 to TS/15/2

CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE)
SECTION 16 : LOW VOLTAGE CABLES AND INSTALLATION TS/16/1 to TS/16/4
SECTION 17 : LUMINAIRES TS/17/1 to TS/17/42
SECTION 18 : ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES TS/18/1 to TS/18/12
5 2602542S/ME
INDEX
DESCRIPTION PAGE
VOLUME 3
SECTION 19 : TIME SWITCHES TS/19/1
SECTION 22 : CABLE TRAYS AND LADDER INSTALLATION TS/22/1 to TS/22/5
SECTION 23 : STEEL CABLE TRUNKING INSTALLATION TS/23/1 to TS/23/3
SECTION 24 : CONDUIT INSTALLATION (CONCEALED OR EXPOSED) TS/24/1 to TS/24/5
SECTION 25 : FLOOR TRUNKING INSTALLATION FOR POWER, TS/25/1 to TS/25/6

TELEPHONE AND DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 : EARTHING TS/26/1 to TS/26/5
SECTION 27 : NOT USED
SECTION 28 : SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES TS/28/1 to TS/28/3
SECTION 29 : SMART CARD ACCESS WITH COMPUTER TS/29/1 to TS/29/22

AND SOFTWARE SECURITY SYSTEM
SECTION 30 : POWER METER TS/30/1 to TS/30/9
SECTION 31 : TELEPHONE CABLINGS (CAT 5 UTP) SYSTEM TS/31/1 to TS/31/9
SECTION 32 : LIGHTING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM TS/32/1 to TS/31/21
SECTION 33 : LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM TS/33/1 to TS/33/8
SECTION 34 : MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM TS/34/1 to TS/34/15
SECTION 37 : POWER QUALITY MANAGEMENT TS/37/1 to TS/37/2
SECTION 38 : EMERGENCY VOICE COMMUNICATION / PUBLIC TS/38/1 to TS/38/25

ADDRESS / BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEM (EVC/PA)
6 2602542S/ME
INDEX
DESCRIPTION PAGE
VOLUME 3
SECTION 41 : CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) SYSTEM TS/41/1 to TS/41/104
SECTION 42 : COMPUTER CABLINGS SYSTEM TS/42/1 to TS/42/70
SECTION 43 : FANS TS/43/1 to TS/43/7
SECTION 45 : EMERGENCY CALL BELL TS/45/1 to TS/45/3
SECTION 46 : MOTION SENSOR DETECTION SYSTEM TS/46/1 to TS/46/4
SECTION 56 : NOT USED
SECTION 58 : HIGH VOLUME LOW SPEED FAN SPECIFICATION TS/58/1 to TS/58/4
SECTION 60 : LOCALISED LIGHTNING WARNING SYSTEM TS/60/1 to TS/60/6
SECTION 64 INDUCTION LOOP HEARING ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM TS/64/1 to TS/64/7
SECTION 65 COMPUTER CABLINGS (CAT 6A / CLASS EA – TS/65/1 to TS/65/15

UTP) COPPER AND OM3/OS2 FIBRE SYSTEM
7 2602542S/ME
INDEX
DESCRIPTION PAGE
VOLUME 3
SECTION 66 COMPUTER CABLINGS TS/66/1 to TS/66/17

(CAT 6A / CLASS EA – F/FTP) COPPER
SECTION 67 LIGHTING AND ROOM MANAGEMENT SYSTEM TS/67/1 to TS/67/30
SECTION 73 : PAINTING TS/73/1 to TS/73/6
SECTION 74 : DOCUMENTS TS/74/1 to TS/74/2
SECTION 75 : MAINTENANCE DURING DLP TS/75/1 to TS/75/6
8 2602542S/ME
AREA)
PART IV-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR

AIR-CONDITIONING AND
MECHANICAL VENTILATION
INSTALLATION
2602542S/ME
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
1. Scope of Works
1.1 The Contract comprises the supply, installation, testing, commissioning

and maintenance of the following mechanical services as shown on,
described or inferred from the Drawings and Specifications. The
maintenance shall be for a period of fifteen (15) months from the Date
of Substantial Completion the Contract.
1.2 The scope of works for mechanical services shall include but not
limited to the following:
a) Air-conditioning System
b) Mechanical Ventilation System
c) Building Automation System and Building Management System
d) Facility Booking system
1.3 The Sub-Contractor shall have to price for Option items as specified in
the Specifications and Drawings. The validity of the pricing for the
Option shall remain valid throughout the duration of the Contract
Period plus up to six (6) months of the Defects Liability Period. The
Employer reserves the right to exercise the Option in part or in whole,
and the Contractor shall not be entitled to claim for loss of profit, etc
should the Employer decide not to proceed with Option whether in part
or in whole.
1.4 The above works shall be executed by specialist contractors who has a
minimum of 5 years track record of commercial and institutional
experience, and of registered with BCA in the appropriate workhead
and Financial Grade as follows:
Item of Work Workhead Financial Grade
Air-conditioning, Refrigeration ME01 L4 and above

&Ventilation Works
1.5 The Sub-Contractor shall engage firms registered with BCA ME02 L4 and
above for BAS works; and with BCA ME01 L3 or ME06 L3 and above for
the Engineered Smoke Control System.
PS/M/S1/1 2602542S/AC
1.6 Air-conditioning System
The works involved are defined in this Particular Specification,

Technical Specification and indicated on the accompanying tender
drawings. It shall include but not limited to the following:
a) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot

of AHUs and FCUs complete with variable speed drives,
dampers, mixing plenum, filters, heat recovery nits, stainless
steel drip tray, insulations, supports, plinths, paintings, controls
including electrical connection and all other accessories as
shown in the tender drawings and specifications to form a
complete system.
b) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot

of heat recovery units complete with compressors, condensers,
pumps, heat exchanger, standby electric heaters, pre-insulated
pipe works, hot water tanks, pumps, heater coils, controls,
panels, wiring, variable speed drives, valves, fittings,
insulations, ductworks, supports, plinths, paintings, water
treatment and all other accessories as shown in the tender
drawings and specifications to form a complete system.
c) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot

of pre-insulated hot-dipped galvanised chilled water pipe work
complete with valves, strainers, fitting, gauges, sensors,
insulations, supports, painting and all other accessories to form
a complete system.
d) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot

of pre-insulated underground hot-dipped galvanised chilled
water pipe work complete with HDPE jacketing, valves and
accessories
e) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot

of pre-insulated condensate drain pipe work complete with
valves, fitting, supports, painting and all other accessories to
form a complete system.
f) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot

of variable refrigerant split units complete with filters, refrigerant
and condensate piping, insulations, supports, plinths, paintings
and all other accessories as shown in the tender drawings and
specifications to form a complete system.
g) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot

of pre-insulated ductworks complete with fire dampers,
motorised dampers, manual dampers, low leakage dampers,,
air tight dampers, flexible ducts, fire-rated ducts or enclosure,
insulation, hangers and all other accessories to form a
complete system.
h) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot

of air diffuser equipment complete with diffusers, grilles,
registers, volume control dampers, insulation, hangers and all
other accessories to form a complete system.
PS/M/S1/2 2602542S/AC
i) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot
of air control equipment include VAV boxes, venturi valves
complete with damper actuators, plenum boxes, insulation,
power supply, supports and all other accessories to form a
complete system.
j) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot

of DB, MCC, Local Control panels, DDC, VSD complete with
controls, wirings, conduits and all other accessories to form a
complete system.
k) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot

of control and automation including field controllers, panels,
thermostats, field devices, sensors, smoke detectors, control
panels, wirings, conduits, programming and all other
accessories to form a complete system.
l) Supply, install, testing, commissioning one lot of indoor air

quality test after completion of building with third party's
accredited laboratory report.
1.7 Mechanical Ventilation System

a) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot
of mechanical ventilation fans including but not limited to
pressurization fans and purge air fans, complete with wiring,
controls, variable speed drive, silencers, supports, plinths and
all other accessories to form a complete system.
b) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot
of vertical high plume mechanical ventilation fans complete with
wiring, controls, variable speed drive, plinths, supports and all
other accessories to form a complete system.
c) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot
of ductwork complete with fire dampers, motorised dampers,
manual dampers, low leakage dampers, flexible ducts air filters,
insulation, fire-rated ducts or enclosure, hangers and all other
d) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot

of air diffuser equipment complete with diffusers, grilles,
registers, volume control dampers, hangers and all other
e) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot
of DB, MCC, Local Control panels, DDC, VSD complete with
controls, wirings, conduits and all other accessories to form a
complete system.
of control and automation including field controllers, panels,
field devices, sensors, control panels, wirings, conduits,
programming and all other accessories to form a complete
system.
PS/M/S1/3 2602542S/AC
g) Supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one lot
of remote control panels at FCC room for all fire and essential
fans including wirings, conduits, fire rated cables, supports and
all other accessories to form a complete system.
h) Hook Up, Testing, Commission And Maintenance one lot of
ductwork connectors and all other accessories to user’s
equipment during DLP.
1.8 Engineered Smoke Control System

a) Design, supply, install, testing, commissioning and

maintenance one lot of engineered smoke control system
include but not limited to high temperature mechanical
ventilation fans, complete with wiring, controls, variable speed
drive, supports, smoke damper, plinths and all other
b) Design, supply, install, testing, commissioning and

maintenance one lot of fire rated ductwork complete with fire
rated motorised dampers, hangers and all other accessories to
c) Design, supply, install, testing, commissioning and

maintenance one lot of air diffuser equipment complete with
diffusers, grilles, registers, volume control dampers, hangers
and all other accessories to form a complete system.
d) Design, supply, install, testing, commissioning and

maintenance one lot of DB, MCC, Local Control panels, DDC,
VSD complete with controls, wirings, conduits and all other
e) Design, supply, install, testing, commissioning and

maintenance one lot of control and automation including field
controllers, panels, field devices, sensors, control panels,
wirings, conduits, programming and all other accessories to

of remote control panels at FCC room for all engineering smoke
control fans including wirings, conduits, fire rated cables,
supports and all other accessories to form a complete system.
PS/M/S1/4 2602542S/AC
1.9 Laboratory Equipments (NOT USED)

a) Design, supply, install, testing, commissioning and

maintenance one lot of cold room installations complete with
Variable Refrigerant Volume Units c/w fan coil units, condenser
units, wiring, controls, refrigerant pipes, conduit, trunking etc
and all other accessories to form a complete system.
1.10 Building Automation System (BAS) and Building Management System

(BMS)
The BAS and BMS shall be provided to integrate the control and
monitoring of the ACMV, electrical, lighting, lifts, plumbing, sanitary,
card access, security and all other building services together with the
IT infrastructure. It shall comprise of, but not limited to the following:
Design, supply, install, testing, commissioning and maintenance one

lot ofworkstations, servers, sensors, transmitters, controllers, cabling,
optical fibre cables for LAN, software, necessary testing and
commissioning, instrumentation, and etc for WSB.
1.11 Tenders are also required to price for the optional items as specified in
the tender drawings and specification. The S.O. reserves the right to
award the Sub-Contract with or without the optional item. Should the
S.O. decide not to carry out the optional item, the entire sum as
entered in the cost breakdown shall be omitted. If the optional item is
to be exercised, the Sub-Contractor shall execute the entire works
within the Sub-Contract period specified. No extension of time is
allowed.
The respective services shall be carried out by the respective Sub-

Contractors with minimum five (5) years experience in the trade and
registered with BCA unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this
Particular Specification.
Fan and Ductworks
All laboratory exhaust and return ductworks shall be made of SS316

stainless steel material. All stainless steel ductworks, HEPA filter
housing and portions of gas tight ductwork and filter system shall be
subjected to pressure test of up to 1000Pa. Acceptance shall be no
detected leaks in excess of 1 x 10-t cc/sec.
Ductwork of galvanized steel shall complete with lock seam and TDF
joints, constructed in accordance to practice recommended in latest
editions of guides by SMACNA and SS 553.
All ductworks serving offices and educational spaces shall be

subjected to pressure test of up to 500Pa. All ductworks serving
laboratory shall be subjected to pressure test of 1000 Pa.
Air risers serving multiple floors need to be constructed to meet at

least SMACNA 1500 Pa duct construction.
PS/M/S1/5 2602542S/AC
Wet exhaust air ductworks serving autoclaves and washers shall be
made of SS316 stainless steel material.
All HEPA filter housing shall be tested in accordance with ASME N509
and N510 standards. All HEPA filter housing shall be factory tested and
supplied with a certificate of conformance and test report each.
For G.I. ductwork, the degree of zinc coating shall be in accordance

with Clause D of B.S. 2989-1965. Galvanising shall be such that zinc
coating remains continuous when folded or seamed. Where G.I. sheet
is cut or trimmed, cold galvanizing treatment shall be given to the
edges stripped of the zinc coating to prevent bare metal from
corrosion. For greater degree of air tightness in G.I. ductwork
construction, duct sealant shall be applied at all seams and joints both
internally and externally.
Where ductwork penetrates a wall or partition into a space, the

penetration shall be provided with duct sleeve of gauge not less than
duct and penetration proper caulked and sealed to maintain air
tightness integrity. Penetration seals shall be flush and offer similar
smooth finishing as wall or partition.
Plenums need to be constructed of minimum 18 gauge stainless steel
SS 316. These panels need to be insulated.
General lab exhaust discharge shall be minimum 3m above the roofline
and any roof element within a horizontal distance of 4m. Upward
velocity shall be a minimum of 15m/s at the point of discharge.
Drainage at ductworks shall be provided to prevent rainwater ingress
into ductworks. .
All fans serving laboratory, chemical stores, fume hood exhaust shall
be chemical and corrosion resistant with temperature rated up to 250
degree Celsius. All stainless steel ductwork shall serving these area
shall be internally coated with chemical resistance telfon TEFE
(polytetrafluoroethylene) coating.
Air Handling Unit (AHU)

For single-pass laboratory, air-handling system shall be provided with
N + 1 reliability and maintain 100% capacity in the event of lead
component failure.
The back-up AHU shall be running in event of failure of duty AHU. The
control of temperature and humidity shall be by hot water reheat coil in
the AHU with back-up electric heater in the hot water storage tank. The
Sub-Contractor shall ensure sizing of the all tanks, pumps and electric
heater able to meet the room design requirements during operation
and failure mode.
All re-circulating AHUs shall come with CO2 sensor to regulate the
fresh air intake and smoke detector for supply air cut-off during fire
mode.
PS/M/S1/6 2602542S/AC
All laboratory AHUs shall be installed with min. primary filter (MERV 8)
and secondary filter (MERV 14). All AHUs serving office and
educational spaces shall have min. primary filter (MERV 8) and
secondary filter (MERV 14). The filter rating shall be based on the most
stringent of either above-mentioned or Technical Specification and
code requirements.
1.12 The Sub-Contractor shall get the manpower, equipments, material etc.
to ensure that the works are completed as scheduled. The Sub-
Contractor shall note that any shutdown to the existing services (ie
water supply, air-conditioning system, etc) can only be carried out after
office hours and over the weekends subjected to the S.O. approval. All
costs to meet the schedule shall be included in the tender price.
1.13 All works shall be carried out in minimum disturbances to the User.
Works may be carried out after normal working hours, holidays,
weekends etc. The Sub-Contractor must obtain written permission
from the S.O. prior to carrying out of the abovementioned works. All
costs incurred in respect of any of the above shall deem be included in
order to facilitate the completion of the works.
1.14 All new Systems / devices installed shall be of Year 2000 Compliance.
1.15 The Sub-Contractor shall provide the interfacing point in the DDC
through protocols for the BAS/IBMS Sub-Contractor to monitor and
control functions such as remote programmed start / stop, run status,
trip alarm, high / low level alarm, run-time totalisation, etc. for the
following item:
Run-time shall be tracked to provide maintenance staff with a

maintenance alarm, after a pre-determined run-time, to perform
preventive maintenance.
The Sub-Contractor shall provide interfacing for the BAS/IBMS Sub-

Contractor to monitor high and low level alarm in storage water tanks.
The BAS/IBMS Sub-Contractor shall be able to pick up the signals from
NO / NC contacts.
Where the level probes are linked to a DDC, interfacing with the DDC
by BAS/IBMS Sub-Contractor shall be done via the open protocols.
2. Design Conditions of Air Conditioning
2.1 With full sun load and maximum shade temperature of 33.8oC DB
(93oF DB) and 31.1°C WB, (88oF WB) the plant shall be capable of
maintaining a temperature of 22 - 25oC (71.6 - 77oF) and a relative
humidity of (55% - 65%) within the occupied space and other
temperatures and relative humidity as shown in the Tender Drawings.
2.2 Air movement at sedentary occupant levels generally shall not exceed
0.25 m/s.
PS/M/S1/7 2602542S/AC
2.3 Laboratory Airflow Control System
The Sub-Contractor shall submit detailed proposal of laboratory air-flow
control system with control schematic for acceptance.
The controller shall able to monitor following temperature and CO2

sensors and use as control functions
a) Outside Air Temperature

b) Outside Air Relative Humidity
c) Return Air Temperature (for re-circulating AHU). Alarms shall
be provided for high and low return air temperature.
d) Relative Humidity. Alarm shall be provided for high supply and

return air humidity (more than 70%).The controller shall able to
control the humidity control system to control discharge air
temperature and relative humidity to achieve desired room
conditions.
e) Mixed air temperature (for re-circulating air system)
f) Reheat leaving air temperature
g) Cooling coil leaving air temperature
h) Discharge air temperature. Alarms shall be provided for high

and low discharge air temperature.
i) CO2 sensor (for all re-circulating AHU). The CO2 sensor shall
provide control to the outside air damper. The minimum
position for CO2 control shall be configured to meet minimum
ventilation to the space to control non-occupant related sources
in the space or to meet minimum ventilation to the space to
control non-occupant related sources in the space or to meet
minimum occupied and unoccupied ventilation requirements for
laboratory as specified in the specification, ASHRAE and
drawings. The maximum position shall be set equal to design
ventilation rate.
j) Temperature sensors on roof. The rain sensors shall provide

signal to the BAS and to the DDC for all AHU to raise the off-
coil temperature by 1 to 2oC during raining periods.
k) Smoke detector
Alarm shall be provided for smoke detector and interlock with
AHU supply air cut-off.
l) Chilled water supply and return temperature
m) Monitoring points as specified in BAS Schedule and others as

deemed necessary to complete the system as a whole
PS/M/S1/8 2602542S/AC
For single pass laboratory, the control shall maintain minimum 8 ACH
for occupied period and 4 ACH for unoccupied period. For re-
circulating system for laboratory, the control shall be able to maintain
min. 6 ACH for occupied with at least 2 Outdoor ACH and emergency
purging of min.10 to a max.15 ACH.
The unoccupied setting shall be through the Facility Booking and

interlock with lighting and motion detection system in the building. All
the costs for the interlocking and control shall be deemed inclusive in
the Contract.
2.4 Temperature and Humidity Control
a) When zone temperature rises above cooling setpoint, the room

controller shall disable the room heating. Cooling shall reset to
maximum while supply airflow stays at minimum ventilation
CMH/ fan speed setpoint. A by-pass switch shall also be
incorporated to disable minimum and enable maximum CMH if
required by user.
b) The room controller shall increase supply airflow setpoint from

min. to max. CMH. The room controller shall increase the
general exhaust air volume to maintain a constant offset. Room
controller shall adjust offset if room pressure differential
deviates from setpoint.
c) Reverse shall occur as zone temperature drops below cooling

setpoint. The room controller shall decrease supply air volume
to minimum setpoint. The room controller shall decrease the
room exhaust to maintain constant offset. If space still cool, the
room controller shall open reheat valve until temperature
returns to setpoint.
d) For unoccupied mode:
a. The control shall be interlock with motion or lighting

system.
b. Allow + 3 °C drift from cooling setpoints.
2.5 Re-Heat Temperature Control
The controller shall control and modulate humidity control system (if
available in the system to sub-cool and reheat. Room heating will be by
hot water reheat coils to maintain room temperature and RH set point.
Sub-Contractor shall provide detailed pipe routing and control
schematic for approval. All pre-insulated pipeworks, balancing valve
and modulating valve to each room supply air hot water reheat coils
shall be deemed inclusive in the contract.
Cooling Coil Control
a) The controller shall monitor discharge air temperature sensor

and use as required for cooling coil control.
b) The chilled water valve shall modulate to maintain the setpoint.
c) The controller shall monitor cooling coil leaving temperature.
PS/M/S1/9 2602542S/AC
2.6 Zone Variable Air Volume (VAV/ Venturi Valve (VV) /Fast Respond
Variable Air Volume (FVAV) Air Terminal Unit Interface
All VAV/VV/FVAV terminal units shall be linked to room DDC controller

and AHU controller to perform following functions:
a) Zone occupancy: The VAV/VV/FVAV and AHU shall be

interlocked with motion sensor or lighting to switch from
unoccupied mode to occupied mode and User defined from
BAS to select Occupied or Unoccupied operating mode.
b) Duct static pressure reset
c) Discharge air temperature setpoint
d) Ventilation control. The controls shall monitor and satisfy the

minimum ACH of 8 for occupied and 4 (unoccupied) for all
single-pass laboratory spaces. Higher ACH shall be kept for
those intensive heat load driven rooms (I,e. Freezer ).
e) Emergency purging: Activation of emergency purging switch will

open the fresh air damper, close the return damper. The
controller shall control the supply and exhaust air to each room
according to setpoint. Push button shall install at door exit for
this activation
f) If actual duct static pressure exceeds the maximum duct static

pressure setpoint with fan at minimum speed, then disable
VAV/VV/FVAV terminal unit airflow minimums to 0 and maintain
at normal minimum occupied airflow.
2.7 Fan Control
a) The supply fan speed shall be modulated to maintain duct static

pressure setpoint which shall be automatically reset to meet
zone airflow demands. The outside air, return and exhaust
dampers must be integrated with supply air to ensure proper
pressure relationship and maintain minimum ventilation airflow.
b) Fan speed control: The controller shall measure duct static

pressure and modulate supply fan VSD speed to maintain
optimized duct static pressure setpoint.
c) Each AHU controller shall be networked with all room DDC

controllers to obtain airflow requests, derived from damper
position and meeting airflow and space requirements.
d) An air-flow station shall continuously monitor total supply air fan
volume and main branch in CMH and send output to BMS.
e) Emergency purging: The purging fan shall be activated by

activation of manual switch and shall maintain min. 10 ACH and
max 15 ACH for recirculation lab.
PS/M/S1/10 2602542S/AC
2.8 AIRFLOW TRACKING CONTROL
Total system return air shall continuously track supply air CMH
according to following relationship. RA (CMH) = SA (CMH) – (EA
(CMH) + PA (CMH) + TA (CMH))
a. Supply airflow (SA) is measured continuously by airflow
measuring station.
b. Exhaust airflow (EA)
i) Occupied period: Sum of exhaust
ii) Unoccupied period: 0
c. Pressurisation Air/ Exfiltration (PA)
The controller shall maintain pressure zoning and

directional airflow as required.
d. Transfer air (TA)
e. Return airflow control: The Return Air fan (if available in

the system) shall be enabled in unison with supply fan
and its speed shall be controlled in sequence along with
mixing dampers to maintain lab supply/ return CMH
tracking offset to keep to area desired airflow/ pressure
relationship with respect to ambient and adjacent
spaces.
Airflow measuring station shall continuously monitor

total system return volume in CMH and send output to
BAS.
Unoccupied mode:
The unit shall normally be off and be enabled as

necessary to satisfy user definable minimum number of
cooling requests(based on motion or lighting interlock).
Fan speed control and pressure monitoring alarms:
High supply air static pressure: If the supply air static

pressure is 25% greater than maximum limit of DP
setpoint.
Low supply air static pressure: If supply air static

pressure is 25% less than effective setpoint.
All laboratory rooms shall have differential pressure

monitoring with respect to adjacent room.
PS/M/S1/11 2602542S/AC
2.9 FUME HOOD EXHAUST (NOT USED)
a) All fume hoods shall be linked to room controller. When fume

hoods is operating (fume hood sash raised), the room controller
shall reduces/closes the general exhaust. If does not return
offset to its setpoint, room controller shall increase supply air
until balance. Room controller adjusts offset if room pressure
differential deviates from setpoint.
b) When fume hood sash lowered, the hood controls decrease

exhaust flow to maintain face velocity. The room controller
reduces supply to min. volume. If does not return to setpoint,
room controller increases the general exhaust air volume until
offset is achieved and lab balanced. Room controller to adjust
offset if room pressure differential deviates from setpoint.
c) For re-circulation labs with separate make-up air, the make-up

air for fume hood or BSC shall be through laminar flow diffuser
and interlock with the fume hood exhaust without affecting the
room ventilation.
d) All fume hood exhaust duct shall be internally coated with

chemical resistance telfon TEFE (polytetrafluoroethylene)
coating.
3. Rules and Regulations
3.1 The works and all plant, equipment and materials forming part of this
Contract shall comply in all respect with any relevant Statutory
Regulation, Bye-Laws and other Regulations currently in force. In
addition, current Rules and Requirements of the following bodies (the
latest edition) shall be complied with:
a) The Electricity Act ( Electricity Installations) Regulations.
b) National Environment Agency and PUB, Environmental

Protection and Management Act, The Water Pollution Control
and Drainage Act, Environment Public Health Act and
Regulations.
c) Building and Construction Authority.
d) The Ministry of Manpower, ie., The Workplace Safety & Health

Act
e) Fire Safety and Shelter Department
f) The latest Code of Practice: SS 638, CP 10, SS 530 SS 553,

SS554, SS 575, CP 636, SS 608, CP 52, SS 551.
i) SS SS 638 : code of practice for electrical installations
ii) CP 10 : Code of practice for the installation and

servicing of electrical fire alarm systems
iii) SS 530 : Code of practice for energy efficiency standard

for building services and equipment
PS/M/S1/12 2602542S/AC
iv) SS 553 : Code of practice for air-conditioning and
mechanical ventilation in buildings
v) SS 554 : Code of practice for indoor air quality for air-

conditioned buildings
vi) SS 575 : Code of practice for fire hydrant, rising mains

and hose reel systems
vii) SS CP 636: Code of practice for water services
viii) SS 608 : Code of practice for manufactured gas pipe

installation
ix) SS CP 52 : Code of Practice for Automatic Fire

Sprinkler System
x) SS CP 551: Code of practice for earthing
xi) SS 641: Code of practice for fire safety for laboratories

using chemicals
g) All other Authorities having jurisdiction over the installation of

equipment and carrying out this contract works in the locality.
3.2 The Contractor shall obtain and complete all notices required by the
above Authorities as necessary and shall obtain all consents necessary
for the various works to be executed and shall pay all fees in
connection therewith.
3.3 The work shall also be carried out strictly in accordance with the
current editions of all applicable British Standards or other National
Standard acceptable to the S.O.. All electrical installations and
materials supplied shall comply with Singapore Standard SS 638, Code
of Practice for Wiring of Electrical Equipment of Building and to be
approved by the PUB.
3.4 All Codes, Acts, Standards and regulations shall be the latest
published edition.
3.5 Where discrepancy arises, the provisions in the Singapore Standards

shall take precedence on all matters relating to the works.
3.6 The equipments that offered and selected shall comply with SS 530 for
the energy efficiency. S.O. shall have the final approval on the
equipment that offer for base on the energy consumption and efficient.
4. Noise Level and Sound Control
4.1 All installed plants are to be reasonably quiet in operation. Preference

will be given to equipment operating at low noise level.
4.2 Vibration isolators shall be installed where necessary so as to eliminate

the transmission of vibration.
4.3 During initial testing operation of the installation, the Contractor is to

correct for any undue noise and to make any adjustment and
modifications necessary for this purpose.
PS/M/S1/13 2602542S/AC
4.4 The noise/sound level in the various areas due to operation of
equipment shall not exceed the recommended standard by local
Authority or ASHRAE whichever is the lowest.
4.5 Special care is to be exercised in the manufacture of equipment and

installation of ductwork and outlets to keep air borne noise down to a
practical minimum.
Spaces dBA NC RT60 at 500 Hz (s)

Research/ working laboratories 45 40 0.5-0.7
Teaching laboratories 35 30 0.8-1.0
Office areas/ College rooms 45 40 0.5 – 0.7
Meeting/ Conference Room 35 30 0.5 – 0.7
Multi-function room 35 30 0.8-1.0
Common areas 55 50 < 1.0
5. Permits and Fees
The Contractor shall procure all permits and pay all fees and charges incurred
in connection with this Contract.
6. The Specification
6.1 This Specification is intended to set out in general outline the minimum
requirements and standards of installation for the various units of
equipment and works it covers. Provision set out, or claim made in the
successful Tender which are in excess of, or improved upon the basic
requirements of the Specification shall unless otherwise determined by
the S.O. become part of the requirements of the Specification whether
or not they are subsequently incorporated in addenda to the
Specification.
6.2 The S.O. shall be the sole judge of what constitute an improvement
upon or exceeds the requirements of the Specification.
6.3 The Specification shall be read in conjunction with the Tender

Drawings (as per Schedule of Drawings) and are intended to be
mutually explanatory and complementary to one another. All works
and specification called for by one, i.e. Specification or Drawings even
if not by the other shall be fully executed and complied with in total.
PS/M/S1/14 2602542S/AC
7. Materials and Workmanship
7.1 Unless expressedly stated to the contrary, all materials, and equipment
supplied by the Contractor shall comply with the applicable Singapore
Standards (S.S.) or British Standards (B.S.) Specifications approved by
the S.O.
7.2 Where a standard is referred to, that standard shall be the latest
published edition thereof, unless otherwise stated.
7.3 All materials and equipment supplied shall be new and of the best type
for each particular purpose and of the first quality with regard to design,
manufacture and performance.
7.4 The equipment and materials shall be suitably designed and

constructed for safe, proper and continuous operation under all
conditions described or implied in this Specification without undue
heat, strain, vibration, corrosion or other operating difficulties.
7.5 Unless otherwise specified, the equipment and material within the
scope of this Specification shall be of a standard proven design.
Design incorporating components which may be considered prototype
in nature will not be accepted.
7.6 Equipment and equipment components shall be designed and

supported to permit free expansion and contraction without causing
excessive strains, distortion or leakage.
7.7 Parts subject to wear, corrosion or other deterioration, or requiring

adjustment, inspection or repair shall be accessible and capable of
reasonably convenient removal, replacement and repair. All such parts
shall be of suitable material for keeping maintenance to a minimum.
7.8 The equipment shall be designed to permit replacement of parts and

ease of access during inspection, maintenance and repair.
7.9 Vibration, noise, mechanical and thermal stresses and susceptibility to

corrosion and erosion shall not be greater than with similar plant of first
class design and workmanship operating under similar conditions.
7.10 All works shall be carried out in accordance with the best engineering
practice by experience tradesmen of appropriate grades to the
approval of the S.O..
7.11 Where disagreement occur between the Drawings and the

Specification or within either document itself, the item or arrangement
of better quality, greater quantities, or higher cost shall be deemed to
be included in this Contract.
PS/M/S1/15 2602542S/AC
8. Site Climatic Conditions
All equipment and works installed shall be capable of operating effectively and
efficiently under the following site conditions:
Maximum Temperature : 35oC dry bulb

28oC wet bulb
Average Temperature : 32oC dry bulb

26.5oC wet bulb
Relative Humidity : 70% to 98%
9. Shop Drawings
9.1 The Contractor shall immediately upon the award of the Contract
prepare and submit to the S.O. for approval all plant and equipment
layout drawings showing full details within four weeks. Detailed
calculations shall be submitted where applicable. All equipment and
materials proposed shall be submitted for approval.
9.2 Shop drawings shall cover complete details for the following but not
limited to:
a) Operation loading of all items of plant, equipment and

accessories.
b) Dimensions of all plant, equipment and accessories which

include the details drawings of superstructure construction
necessary to finalise the structural requirements.
c) Equipment room layout, showing all clearances for operating

and servicing.
d) Control equipment and system, wiring and control diagrams

and power requirements.
e) Vibration Isolation Equipment
f) Hangers and supports
g) Foundations
h) Chases, drains, openings in walls, floors, roof slabs and

beams.
i) Piping, ducting and electrical cable runs.
j) Existing services layout.
k) All other items as is reasonably required by the S.O.
PS/M/S1/16 2602542S/AC
9.3 These layout drawings shall be based generally on the S.O.'s
drawings, modified only as required to suit the specified materials and
equipment to be provided, to fit in with the latest available information
on building construction details and the requirements of other services
and equipment and also to incorporate any improvements proposed by
the Contractor.
9.4 The drawings shall be drawn by fully qualified draftsman with

experience in relevant Installation Works. The drawings shall be done
in ink, and shall be neat and clearly legible.
9.5 The drawings shall be drawn in the same scale as the S.O.'s drawings.
Details shall be drawn in larger scales. Where applicable, symbols the
same as those in the S.O.'s drawings shall be used and all other
symbols shall conform with the acceptable local drafting practice.
9.6 Legend for all symbols shall be shown on every drawing.
9.7 Three (3) copies of each drawing shall be submitted for approval not
later than four weeks after award of the Contract. Drawings with
inadequate details and not conforming to the requirements as stated
above will not be considered.
9.8 Upon approval of the drawings, the Contractor shall deliver seven (7)
copies of each approved drawing to the S.O. for the purpose of
Contract administration.
9.9 The drawings shall be submitted in ample time for review and approval
by the S.O. and no work shall be carried out until such drawings are
approved. The Contractor shall allow a period of not less than three
(3) weeks for the S.O. to study the drawings for approval.
9.10 It is the onus of the Contractor to ensure that his drawings conform to
the requirements of the Specification and that they are approved by the
S.O. early.
9.11 Inspection of shop and working drawings is not to be considered as a

guarantee of measurements or building conditions. Where drawings
are inspected and approved by the S.O. such approval does not in any
way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility nor from the
necessity of furnishing material or performing work required by the
Drawings and Specification which shall in the event of a dispute, take
precedence over shop drawings.
9.12 Schedule of submission of shop drawings shall be submitted for

approval not later than 2 weeks after award of the Contract.
PS/M/S1/17 2602542S/AC
10. Tender Submission
The Sub-Contractor shall complete the following schedules (completed in full)

together with all additional technical submission etc.:
· Schedule of Rates
· Schedule of Technical Data (with full catalogues)
· Schedule of Asset Capitalisation
· Schedule of Deviation from Specifications
· Schedule of Proposed Comprehensive Maintenance
· Schedule of Spares
· Schedule of Tenderer’s Particulars
Failure to submit all the above items in full will render the tenderer to be liable
for disqualification and consequent void and rejection. All information is to be
filled in completely. All technical submission (catalogues and technical data)
are to be submitted (4 sets) before the award of tender
11. Programme
11.1 The Contractor shall immediately upon the award of the Contract
prepare and submit to the S.O. for approval the detailed time schedule
for the progress of the work within 2 weeks.
11.2 The schedule shall be submitted with ample time for review and
approval by the S.O. The Contractor shall allow a period of not less
than 2 weeks for the S.O. to study the schedule for approval.
11.3 The schedule shall also indicate the dates of:
a) submission of shop drawings
b) delivery of materials
c) installation programme and cleaning up, etc.
d) testing and commissioning and completion
12. As Installed Drawings and Manuals
12.1 Prior to the completion of the works, and not later than 3 weeks of the
date of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall submit to the
satisfaction of the S.O. five (5) hard cover bound sets of
Comprehensive Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Data Sheets
published by the equipment manufacturers, five (5) hard cover bound
sets of "As-Installed" drawings and five (5) sets of "As-Installed"
drawings in AutoCad (latest release), Building information modeling,
"As-Installed" drawings in Pdf and Scanned copies of Comprehensive
Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Data Sheets published by
the equipment manufacturers (latest release) burn into CD-R disks
subject to S.O.'s approval.
PS/M/S1/18 2602542S/AC
12.2 These instruction manuals shall be typed in good quality paper and
neatly bound into a manual having rigid covers. A draft shall be
approved before final submission.
12.3 The operation manual and As-Built drawings shall be bound with hard
covers.
12.4 All "As-Installed" electrical single line drawings and control diagram
shall be endorsed and signed by the Contractor's Professional
Engineer.
12.5 The manuals shall contain and be set out as follows:
a) Description of System
This section shall simply but clearly describe the operation of

the system and the equipment.
b) Summary of Equipment List
This section shall include all major equipment complete with

makes, models, serial number with technical catalogues (at
least one set to be original and others in legible print).
c) Spare Parts, Special Tools and Equipment List
Include manufacturer's list of all recommended spare parts for

replacement and special tools and equipment for maintenance
used.
d) Operational Procedure
This section shall fully described start and stop sequence of

operation; programme for alternate running of plant to even out
wear and testing procedures for all sections of the plant,
including emergency procedures and breakdown trouble-
shooting.
e) Manufacturer's Handbook
Include Manufacturer's technical literature on all components of

the installation, particularly as applying to operation and
maintenance. The technical literature shall include all major
equipment, control instruments and equipment used and other
related materials
f) Installation Instruction
g) Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Instruction
Include manufacturer's technical literature on all components of

maintenance.
h) Equipment Operation Instruction
PS/M/S1/19 2602542S/AC
i) Hang-up Instructions
j) Equipment Suppliers
This section shall comprise a full list of names, addresses and

telephone numbers (including after office hours numbers) of all
Contractors and Suppliers of equipment (local and overseas)
incorporated in the installation.
k) Maintenance & Breakdown Service
This section shall comprise a list of the names and telephone

numbers of the Company's Maintenance and Servicing Section
personnel for normal maintenance and breakdown request.
12.6 Operating Instruction
The Contractor shall mount in glazed frames permanently fixed in

suitable positions at all plants that require to be operated, the following
information:
a) Safety precautions to be observed before start-up
b) Star-up sequence of operation
c) Shut-down sequence of operation
d) Instruction on emergency shut-down
e) Safety precautions to be observed if any equipment is to be

shut-down for any extended periods.
f) Programme for alternating the operation of parallel or standby

equipment to even out wear.
g) Functional diagram or mimic display to explain graphically

operating instructions
h) Steps to be taken in case of plant failure
12.7 In the event of the Contractor failing to fulfill the aforesaid

requirements, the S.O. shall reserve the right to obtain all of the
required operating and maintenance manuals by other means and shall
deduct all cost incurred thereof from monies due to the Contractor. In
addition the S.O. shall forfeit the rights of the Contractor in relation to
further payment and the issue of the Certificate of Substantial
Completion will also be withheld until he has so complied accordingly.
PS/M/S1/20 2602542S/AC
13. Fixing to Building
13.1 Suitable metal expansion devices shall be used where plugs are
necessary for securing equipment, pipes, conduits and other fittings.
Wooden plugs will not be allowed. Holes shall be drilled by electrical/
pneumatic rotary drills wherever possible. Electrical and/or pneumatic
percussion drills and tools are not permitted.
13.2 Any fixing device may on the roof struts shall not be acceptable unless
certified by the structural Professional Engineer and approved by the
S.O..
14. Metrification
All gauges and indicators shall be provided with scales marked in SI units as
well as in relevant Imperial units.
15. Tropicalised
All materials and equipment to be supplied and installed shall be tropicalised.
16. Samples
16.1 Samples to be submitted by the Contractor shall be for the following

but not limited to:
a) Ductwork
b) Duct insulation
c) Diffusers and grilles
d) Pipes and joints
e) Hangers
f) Sealants
g) Pipe insulation
h) VAV box
i) Venturi Valve
j) Fast respond variable air volume box
k) Duct heater
l) Bubble-tight damper (BTD)
m) Air-tight damper (ATD)
n) Low-leakage damper (LLD)
o) Filters
p) Hot water heater coil
16.2 In addition, the Contractor shall also submit any other samples as may
be required by the S.O..
PS/M/S1/21 2602542S/AC
17. Jointing of Pipes
17.1 The method of jointing for the various pipes shall be as described
hereafter in the appropriate sections of the Specification.
17.2 Where differential movement may occur between two sections of a

system or where excessive expansion and contraction may take place,
flexible connections shall be used, irrespective of whether they are
shown in the Drawings or not.
17.3 Flexible connections shall be of stainless steel bellow type to suit the
duty and temperature requirement of the fluid conveyed in the pipe.
They shall be complete with restraining tie-rods and shall be of
approved make.
17.4 Adequate number of flanged or unison connections shall be provided

especially in plant rooms, service ducts and adjacent to fixtures so as
to facilitate removal of the pipe and equipment for inspection or repair.
17.5 Where pipes cannot be jointed by standard fittings they shall be jointed
using mechanical coupling system.
18. Fixing of Pipes
18.1 All piping installed under this Contract shall be sufficiently supported
with hangers, supports, beams clamps, slips, inserts and mounting
devices suitable for the type of pipework. Provision for expansion of
piping shall be allowed when locating pipe hangers.
18.2 In general, hangers shall be of individual type with provision for vertical
adjustment.
18.3 Where structural members are pre-stressed, hangers shall be installed

in the structural members before the pouring of concrete.
18.4 If this is not practicable due to site condition, the hangers shall be
secured to the structure by means of anchor bolts or power driven
bolts at locations where the prestressed tensions are not affected.
18.5 All piping from pumping equipment shall be effectively isolated from
vibration. Spring isolator type of supports shall be installed within 5
metres from the pumping equipment and neoprene isolation pad insert
shall be provided between the fixing clamp or holder-bat and the type
for the remaining pipeline.
18.6 The type of vibration isolators to be used shall be submitted together

with the shop drawings of the pumping equipment to the S.O. for
approval.
18.7 Where pipes pass through walls or floors G.I. pipe sleeves shall be
provided. These shall be extended through the full finished thickness
of the wall or floor and be secured against movement.
18.8 Gaps between the pipe sleeve and the pipe shall be filled up with high
density fiberglass and caulked with fire-rated compound and finish
flush to the face of the pipe sleeve.
PS/M/S1/22 2602542S/AC
18.9 All fixings, hangers, holder-bats, brackets, etc. shall be hot dipped
galvanised to BS 729 or equivalent. In addition, for outdoor
applications, two coats of epoxy paints shall be applied.
18.10 The spacing of fixings or brackets shall be as specified in other

sections of this Specification.
18.11 All fixings shall be carefully aligned and spaced. In the case of
horizontal piping, the fixings shall be so constructed as to enable
proper adjustment in the height of the pipeline to be effected.
18.12 Typical details of piping supports required are as shown in the

drawings. These shall be complied with unless otherwise approved by
the S.O..
19. Mock-Ups
19.1 The Contractor shall be required to construct mock-ups of typical

installation of services and common items of equipment in conjunction
with other trades on site as and when directed by the S.O..
19.2 The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in his tender price for
these mock-ups.
19.3 Apart from the above provision of mock up units specified above the
Contractor shall where required submit samples where specified to
S.O. for review and approval before commencement of construction
and installation work.
19.4 Mock-ups shall be constructed to ensure proper installation and co-

ordination of all services on site. The Contractor shall replace and
modify such mock-up and sample at his own cost, if deemed
necessary by the S.O. whose decision shall be final and conclusive.
The approved mock-up and sample shall be used as the basis of
actual/permanent work.
19.5 Any approval granted by the S.O. shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility in ensuring that all works executed conform to the
Contract terms and conditions. The Contractor shall bear all cost
arising out of errors/omissions in samples and mock-ups.
19.6 The Contractors shall remove at his own cost all mock-up and samples
when no longer required as directed by the S.O..
20. Identification and Labelling
20.1 Complete identification and labelling shall be provided for the various
sections of the work in accordance with Building Control Division and
other relevant Authority's requirements and to the approval of the S.O..
20.2 Additional requirements as requested by the Fire Safety Bureau to suit

local conditions shall also be complied with.
PS/M/S1/23 2602542S/AC
20.3 All equipment, valves, etc. shall be clearly and legibly labelled using
engraved aluminum plates of minimum dimensions of 75 x 50 x 2 mm
thick.
21. Co-ordination of Work
21.1 The Contractor shall check and ensure that all equipment provided are
suitable for the space allowed. The Contractor shall, if necessary,
locate these equipment before the erection of the walls and doors. All
abortive work arising from failure to comply with the above shall be
paid for by the Contractor.
21.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper and accurate setting
out of his work. He shall furnish all necessary information on the
installation to the S.O. and the Contractor for work co-ordination
purposes. The Sub-Contractor shall also obtain information on routes
of other services from the Contractor before commencing any works to
any floor of the building. He shall co-operate with the Contractor and all
other contractors on the job and his work shall be suitably planned to
ensure proper co-ordination with other contractors.
21.3 The Contractor shall be held solely responsible for making necessary
arrangements and/or co-ordinating with all relevant authorities,
specialists, other Contractors, etc, to ensure satisfactory completion of
this Contract such as TFP, CSC, etc.
21.4 The Contractor shall inform the S.O. of any discrepancies in

construction details installed on site (eg pipe size, etc) as compared
with "approved" drawings owing to unforeseen site conditions. The
Contractor shall bear the full cost of rectification if the failure to comply
with the above clause leads to a malfunction of the system.
21.5 The Sub-Contractor shall check on all building works (such as holes,
openings, grooves, required on floors, walls, etc) that are required to
be done as early as possible in order that holes, openings, etc. may be
formed as the building work proceeds.
21.1 The Sub-Contractor shall allow for the co-ordination and interfacing of
his work in line with the works of other contractors. Such co-ordination
and interfacing shall include for permitting other contractors to
complete their work before proceeding to complete the balance of
works under this Sub-Contract. In the event of failure by the Sub-
Contractor to allow for such co-ordination and interphasing, no claim
whatsoever would be entertained for taking out and re-installing works
to accommodate the installation of equipment and works by other
contractors. The Sub-Contractor shall obtain the programmes and work
schedules of other contractors and include them in his programme
chart.
21.2 The Sub-Contractor shall allow for the services of a Professional

Engineer (PE) to provide consultation with the S.O. and relevant
authority throughout the duration of the Sub-Contract Works and shall
be authorised to act on behalf of the Sub-Contractor.
PS/M/S1/24 2602542S/AC
21.6 The Sub-Contractor shall inform the S.O. of any discrepancies in
construction details installed on site (e.g. pipe size, etc) as compared
with approved drawings owing to unforeseen site conditions. The Sub-
Contractor shall bear the full cost of rectification if the failure to comply
with the above clause leads to a malfunction of the system
21.7 Ceiling pattern as shown in Tender Drawing is given as a guide only,

exact position of ceiling suspended equipment has to be verified on
site and adjusted, if necessary, without additional cost to the Contract.
22. Other Requirements
22.1 The Contractor is to confirm the existing services to be dismantled and

terminated and to be incorporated in the shop drawings. The
Contractor is particularly requested to ensure that there is no damages
to existing and other services as any damages shall be rectified
immediately within the same day by the Contractor at their own cost.
22.2 Liaison with clients/building maintenance team for M&E services

isolation for the proposed retrofitting works shall deem to be included.
22.3 The Contractor shall be deemed to have inspected and examined the
site and its surroundings and acquaint himself as to the nature of the
existing works, buildings and the site, the extent and nature of the
works and materials, article or equipment required for the necessary
completion of the Contract Works, the means of communication and
access to the Site, and in general obtain for himself all necessary
information as to risks, contingencies and all other factors that will
influence or affect his tender. No claim whatsoever of any of the
aforesaid will be entertained. Existing services as shown on tender
drawings are indicative only.
22.4 The Contractor shall ensure that while carrying out works at the
renovations area, the M & E services serving the non-renovation area
shall be functional at all times. The Contractor shall deem to have
included all necessary temporary diversion & protection works to
ensure the continuous functioning of non-renovation areas.
22.5 Diversion and alteration works to the existing services shall be carried
out after office hour or weekends, if deem necessary, to facilitate the
continuous operation of the building.
22.6 All major existing equipment, materials, panels and fittings that are not
in use shall be dismantled in good condition and returned to
clients/building maintenance team.
22.7 The Contractor shall give minimum 2-week notice to the S.O. for any
shutdown of existing M&E Services.
PS/M/S1/25 2602542S/AC
23. Testing
23.1 The Contractor shall allow in his Tender price for the cost of all
acceptance tests required as hereinafter specified or as required by the
authorities having jurisdiction over the installation.
23.2 All water and electricity used during the testing and commissioning of
the systems in this Contract shall be borne by the Contractor including
the supply, installation and dismantling of necessary pipework meters
and associated works.
23.3 All pipework which are to be encased or concealed shall be tested and
approved before they are finally enclosed.
23.4 The Contractor shall give the S.O. seven (7) days notice of his
readiness to carry out acceptance test and shall submit for his
approval a complete and detailed schedule of his tests to be carried
out.
23.5 Before the commencement of acceptance tests, the Contractor shall

have brought the installation to a state of substantial completion and
shall have completed all of his preliminary testing and adjusted the
equipment to its proper running order.
23.6 During the testing period, no modifications, adjustment or other work

on the installation shall be carried out without the permission of the
S.O.. Should there be any contravention of this requirement, the
results of all tests completed may be rejected and a retest ordered.
23.7 No acceptance test shall be carried out except in the presence of the
S.O. or the representative appointed for the purpose.
23.8 Should the installation fail to perform in accordance with the

requirements of the Specification and/or authorities, the S.O. may
reject the whole or any part of it.
23.9 The testing period shall form part of the Contract period and no
extension of the time will be granted by reasons of any extension of the
testing period to permit rectification, modification, adjustment or
retesting of the installation except where testing has been delayed or
retesting has been necessitated by circumstances beyond the control
of the Contractor.
23.10 The Contractor shall make all arrangements and supply all labour,
equipment, instruments and tools for necessary tests to be carried out
as required by the BCD, the Fire Safety Bureau and other relevant
Authorities, in addition to all those tests as specifically called for in this
Specification.
23.11 The Contractor shall also be required to conduct all tests as and when
requested by the Authorities during the Maintenance and Guarantee
Period.
PS/M/S1/26 2602542S/AC
24. Certification by Contractor
24.1 On completion of all performance testing as required in the

Specification, the Contractor shall be required to submit all test reports
to the S.O. for approval prior to acceptance of the installation. The
Contractor shall also be required to certify in writing to the S.O. that the
installation is in full compliance with the requirements of the
Specification and the Codes to which they are designed by a
Professional Engineer/Licensed Electrical Worker.
24.2 The Contractor shall engage his own Professional Engineer to endorse
and submit four (4) sets of the original `Certificate of Supervision' and
drawings for the respective installation works one month before system
handing over date. All tests and inspections required by the relevant
authorities for his installation works for obtaining of TFP/TOP/CSC of
the building shall be carried out by the Contractor. The Contractor's
PE/LEW shall be present during the TFP/TOP/CSC inspection.
24.3 The Contractor is to note that his Tender price shall deem to include
for all testing requirement.
24.4 The Certification of Substantial Completion will not be issued unless

the clauses as stated above are complied with to the satisfaction of the
S.O..
25. Operation and Maintenance
25.1 The Contractor shall train the Employer's operating personnel in the
operation and maintenance of the plants.
25.2 The period of instruction shall be not less than three (3) weeks and
with the plant in continuous normal operation suitable and competent
instruction representing the Contractor/Manufacturer shall be required
full time on site during the said period.
26. Maintenance and Guarantee
26.1 The whole of the work to be performed under the Contract shall be
completed and left in running order to the satisfaction of the S.O..
26.2 The performance of the whole installation shall be guaranteed to

conform with the requirements of this Specification. The Contractor
shall, without additional charge replace any works which prove faulty
from workmanship or materials and fully maintain the whole installation
for a period of fifteen (15) months after the commencement of the
Defects Liability Period.
26.3 The Defects Liability Period shall commence from the date of issuing of
the Certificate of Substantial Completion.
26.4 During the Defects Liability Period the Contractor shall be responsible
for all costs involved in balancing, setting and adjustment of controls,
and supplying, during the period stipulated, all test equipment and
instruments deemed necessary by the S.O.. During the Defects
Liability Period, the Contractor shall also carry out the maintenance
work as shown in the Schedules.
PS/M/S1/27 2602542S/AC
26.5 All tests if required by the relevant Authorities shall be carried out by
the Contractor.
27. Star Rates
27.1 Where the Contractor contends that work is not of a similar character
or executed under similar conditions as priced in the Schedule of Rates
he shall give to the S.O. a written notice within seven days from the
time of receipt of the instruction from the S.O. with regard to such work
for the S.O. consideration. Unit rates for such items shall be termed
"Star Rates" and will be indicated thus, if so decided by the S.O..
27.2 The Contractor shall declare that the prices quoted in the supporting
vouchers/invoices are nett of trade discounts when calculating
variation.
27.3 The S.O. may request for documentary evidence of the amount paid by
the Contractor to his suppliers and/or Contractors.
28. Quality Assurance
28.1 The Contractor shall establish, document and maintain a quality

system to demonstrate his commitment to quality in construction. As
far as possible, the quality system shall be formulated in accordance
with the requirements of SS 308 : Part 2 : 1988 - Specification for
Quality Assurance in Production and Installation.
28.2 Specifically, the Contractor shall plan, establish, implement and

maintain a project quality plan setting out, as a minimum, the following
:
a) the quality objectives to be attained;
b) the specific allocation of responsibilities and authority during the

different phases of the project;
c) the specific quality procedures, methods and work instructions

to be applied, including detailed procedures for each of the
major work activities;
d) suitable testing, inspection, examination and audit programmes

at the appropriate stages;
e) a method of changes and modifications in a quality plan as the

project proceeds; and
f) other measures necessary to meet the objectives.
28.3 The Contractor's project quality plan shall be documented in the form
of a project quality manual and project operating procedures which
shall be submitted to the S.O. within 30 days from the date of letter of
acceptance of tender. The quality control procedures shall be
submitted at least 14 days before the commencement of the activity.
PS/M/S1/28 2602542S/AC
28.4 Four copies of the project quality manual and project operating
procedures shall be submitted to the S.O.. A further copy shall be
retained on the site.
28.5 Any comment, advice or acceptance of the project quality plan by the
S.O. shall not, in any way, alter or diminish the Contractor's obligations
under the Contract for the quality of the Work.
28.6 The Contractor shall adequately price for the above provision in the
Preliminaries.
29. Instruction Manual for Essential Facility Provision in Building
Beside the training, operation and maintenance manual that need to be

submitted. The sub-contractor shall required to prepare the instruction manual,
respond instruction and recommended maintenance regimes on the system
which being installed in the building and submit to the SO and Engineer for
approval. This information shall be the extract and overall summary with
equipment detail for those fire related and critical provision essential provision
The manual shall include the emergency respond action to be taken in which
when the building is in fire or other critical condition. The documentation shall
be a controlled copy with all the amended revision recorded.
The Sub-contractor shall coordinate and compile with the builder and other
M&E specialist Sub-contractor for the instruction manual
The instruction manual shall consist of the following:
a) Project Title, all the consultant firm, Qualified Person, Contractors, etc.
b) Content , Revision and controlled sheet on amendments
c) Description of the building, type of system that being installed in the

building, system compliance
d) Summary of the equipments and the its operation procedure during

emergency
e) Emergency respond, such as Locating, Identifying, Checking, Respond

and Recovery.
f) Flow chart on the procedure. ( One set to be paste at the Fire

command Centre and at the relevant equipment)
g) Recommend Maintenance Regime
PS/M/S1/29 2602542S/AC
The system shall include but not limited to the followings:
a) Architectural - Escape staircase location and the routing
b) PWD -Location, emergency respond and the recommended procedure

on evacuation
c) Two way EVC - Type of system, Fireman intercom, PWD intercom,

Emergency respond, 3-way conferencing ( Satellite FCC, Local FCC
and Local PWD handset)
d) Emergency Secondary Power Supply – Generator location, fuel tank

detail, Underground fuel detail.
e) Fire alarm system - Stage of Alarm, Location, emergency respond and

the recommended procedure on evacuation
f) Sprinkler – Classification of System, Stage of sprinkler, Location,

emergency respond and the recommended procedure on evacuation
g) Gas Suppression system- Type of system, Stage of Alarm, Location,

h) Medical Gas/ Laboratory Gas - Type of system, Type of Alarm,

Location, emergency respond and the recommended procedure on
evacuation
i) Petroleum and Flammable Materials - recommend good practice,

emergency respond and recommended procedure during emergency
j) Lab ACMV, Exhaust, equipment exhaust and Purging system - Type of

system, Type of Alarm, Location, emergency respond and the
recommended procedure on evacuation
k) Smoke Control system and car park ventilation system - Type of

l) Kitchen Exhaust - Fan and air cleaner location and equipment detail,
Hood detail, Gas suppression system
m) One way EVC - The setup, type of messages, emergency respond and
recommended procedure during emergency
n) Fire Command Centre and Fire fighting facility location - Type of

system, emergency respond and the recommended procedure on
evacuation
o) Lift - Type of system, Location, emergency respond and the

recommended procedure on evacuation, PWD evacuation.
PS/M/S1/30 2602542S/AC
p) Others – System that affect the building fire safety and its
recommended procedure on evacuation.
Sub-contractor shall liaise with the main-contractor for the final compiling and
combine of the instruction manual into a copy. 5 set of softcopy (including
editable copy) and hardcopy shall be submitted during the handing over of
building or after the training.
PS/M/S1/31 2602542S/AC
SECTION 11 - DUCTWORK
1. General
1.1 This section covers the supply, delivery, installation, painting, testing and
commissioning, and fifteen (15) months free maintenance and warranty of
all ductwork, diffusers, grilles, registers, insulation, controls and balancing
dampers, fire dampers and sheet metal work associated with the air-
conditioning and ventilating equipment.
1.2 Air quantity as shown in the drawings is only given as a guide. The Sub-
Contractor shall adjust it on site to suit the space, temperature and NC
level required.
1.3 The selection and location of the diffusers shall also achieve an Air
Diffusion Performance Index (ADPI) of not less than 80% according to
the definitions and parameters as found in the ASHRAE Fundamentals
Handbook.
1.4 Ductwork shall be pre-fabricated and assembly before delivery to site.
2. Ductwork
2.1 All ductwork and fittings shall be constructed strictly in accordance with
practical recommendation in the current editions of the Sheet Metal & Air-
conditioning Sub-Contractor National Association Incorporated
(SMACNA), in USA and DW 142, Specification for Sheet Metal
Ductwork , in UK, unless otherwise specified in this Specification.
2.2 The ductwork dimensions shown are clear internal sizes. The degree of
zinc coating on sheet steel shall be in accordance with Clause D of B.S.
2989 - 1965.
2.3 The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that no other services are allowed to be
suspended from the ductwork, unless otherwise approved by the S.O..
TS/M/S11/1 2602542S/AC
2.4 Duct Construction
a) All ductwork shall be fabricated in the Sub-Contractor's own

workshop prior to delivering to site for assembly and installation.
All ductwork and its fittings and accessories shall be fabricated and
run in sizes shown and in positions as indicated on the Drawings
and shall be constructed of the following materials:
i. Galvanised sheet metal for all supply and return air ducts.
ii. Grade 316L stainless steel sheet metal for laboratory, fume
Cupboards, biological safety cabinets, radio isotope room
exhaust, 100% laboratory exhaust air ducts. The finish
shall be 2B mill finish. The thickness shall be in
accordance with Uniform Mechanical Code
b) All ducts shall conform accurately to the dimensions indicated in

the Drawings and shall be straight and smooth on the inside with
all joints neatly finished. Duct sizes indicated on the Drawings are
clear internal dimensions.
c) All ducts shall be free of waves of buckles and shall be machine

bent. Ductwork in which the galvanising of the inside surface has
been damaged will not be accepted.
d) All ducts shall be installed and anchored accurately to the building

in an approved manner as to be completely free from vibration
under all conditions of operation.
e) The Sub-Contractor is to take all precautions to ensure that the air

distribution system is silent in operation and does not create
draught.
f) No free or cut edges of ductwork shall appear within ducts, and

where seams or joints protrude into duct air stream, they shall be
arranged in the direction of the air flow.
g) No ductwork joints, bends or other fittings will be permitted

within the thickness of the wall, floor or ceiling structures and
below structural beams.
h) Sheet metal ducts shall be properly braced and reinforced. The

internal ends of all slip joints shall be installed in the direction of
the flow. All ducts shall be constructed with the minimum possible
number of seams.
TS/M/S11/2 2602542S/AC
i) Curved elbows shall have a centre line radius equal to 1½ times
the radial width of the duct. Air turns shall be installed in abrupt
elbows. The air turns shall consist of curved metal blades or vanes
arranged so as to permit the air to make abrupt turns without
appreciable turbulence.
j) Double thickness aerofoil turning vanes shall be provided for all

right angle elbows extending over at least 50% of the whole
curvature of the elbow. The turning vanes shall have a flange
covering the whole base and shall be rivetted to the duct at not
more than 60 mm centres. The double thickness aerofoil vanes
shall be constructed of the same material of the duct enclosing
them and shall be of two gauges heavier than the duct material.
k) Ductwork longitudinal joints shall be of an approved air-tight self-

locking type.
l) All ductwork cross joints shall be of an approved flanged joints.

Flanges shall be of rolled structural angles welded at the corner
and shall be rivetted to the duct. Spot welding is not acceptable.
The downstream end of the duct shall be bend round the face of
the flange. The upstream end of the duct shall be inserted 50 mm
into the down stream duct so that the overlap is in the direction of
the flow. Flanges shall be jig drilled or drilled to template to
minimum clearance over bolt diameter. A 5 mm rubber insertion
gasket shall be used.
m) Rivets shall be spaced at not more than 65 mm centres. All ducts

joints shall be airtight.
n) All ductwork shall be pressure tested to an internationally

acceptable standard. The method statements and standards shall be
submitted for approval.
o) Sleeves
Where ducts pass through walls or partitions, suitable galvanised

sheet steel sleeves of a gauge not less than the duct concerned
shall be supplied and located into place and shall not protrude
more than 13 mm over the finished wall surface. In the case of
insulated ductwork the sleeves shall be over-sized to allow the
insulation and vapour seal to be continuous through them.
TS/M/S11/3 2602542S/AC
p) Fitting of Ductwork
The Sub-Contractor shall take note of the positioning of the

ductwork and associated fittings in areas where space is limited. If
necessary, additional costs should be included for prefabricating,
assembling, and insulating sections of the ductwork in lengths
suitable for installation as shown. No further allowances will be
made at any later date for negotiation of additional space than that
generally shown on the Drawings.
q) Longitudinal Seams
Where the perimeter of the duct does not exceed the width of the
sheet metal, ducts shall be constructed with one longitudinal seam
only. Flat double longitudinal seams shall be used in all ducts.
2.5 Hangers and Supports
a) The Sub-Contractor shall furnish and install hangers, hanger

brackets and miscellaneous support as are required for the
installation of all ductwork, pipework, equipment, etc. Supports,
hangers, brackets, etc. shall be attached to concrete and masonry
walls, ceilings and floors in an approved substantial manner by
means of inserts of expansion shields of adequate size and number
to support the loads to be imposed thereon. All hangers, brackets
and miscellaneous support shall be hot dipped galvanised steel.
b) All rectangular ductwork shall be hung with rod hangers. Where

angle stiffeners have been provided on the underside of the duct,
the hanger rods may pass through the ends of those angled
stiffeners for supporting the duct. If these angle stiffeners are not
located properly for the hangers, angle across the underside of the
duct shall be furnished and installed for fastening to rods. The size
of angles shall be the same as the stiffening angles. Spacing shall
not exceed 3 metres. All hanger rods shall be supported from the
floor above. Hanger rods for horizontal duct shall be spaced as
follows:-
Cross-sectional Perimeter Maximum Spacing

Between of duct (m) hangers (m)
Less than 1.5 2.4
1.6 to 2.5 1.8
Exceeding 2.5 1.2
Vertical Ducts shall be rigidly supported at not exceeding 1.8 m

spacing.
TS/M/S11/4 2602542S/AC
c) Support Rod and Angle Size
The support rod sizes shall be as follows:
Duct Width (Longest Side)/Diameter Minimum Rod Size
Up to 300 mm 6 mm diameter
325 mm to 750 mm 6 mm diameter
Above 2125 mm 12 mm diameter
d) Support Angles
The support angles shall be as follows:
Duct Width (Longest Side)/Diameter Minimum Angle Size
Up to 300 mm 19 x 19 x 3 mm
325 mm - 750 mm 25 x 25 x 3 mm
775 - 1500 mm 38 x 38 x 5 mm
1525 - 2100 mm 51 x 51 x 6.5 mm
Above 2125 mm 51 x 51 x 6.5 mm
All angle supports shall be rolled steel sections.
e) Support for fire rated duct shall be protected by approved fire

rated material.
2.6 Duct Construction and Sheet Metal Gauges
a) Duct construction shall be in accordance with the

recommendations for duct construction as set forth in the Sheet
Metal and Air Conditioning Sub-Contractors' National
Association's (SMACNA) Guide and DW 142, Specification for
Sheet Metal Ductwork. The stringent standard will be applied.
b) The Drawings do not attempt to show all off-sets in the

ductworks. The Contractor shall make such off-sets as necessary
for the installation cost. Where off-sets are required, the angle of
the off-sets shall be as small as possible.
TS/M/S11/5 2602542S/AC
c) Duct construction and sheet metal thickness shall be as shown in
the following table:
Maximum British Type of Transverse Type of Bracing

Size of SWG Sheet Joint Connection
Duct
Up to 300mm 24 25mm x 25mm x 25mm x 25mm x 3mm

(0.60mm) 3mm angle 1.7m from joints
angle iron joints
301mm to 24 25mm x 25mm x 25mm x 25mm x 3mm
460mm (0.60mm) 3mm angle 1.7m from joints
angle iron joints
angle iron joints
angle iron joints
1071mm to 20 (1.0mm) 38mm x 38mm x 38mm x 38mm x 4mm
1400mm 4mm angle 1.7m from joints
angle iron joints
1401mm to 20 (1.0mm) 38mm x 38mm x 38mm x 38mm x 4mm
2151mm 4mm angle 0.7m from joints
angle iron joints
Above 2151 mm 18 38mm x 38mm x 38mm x 38mm x 4mm
(1.20mm) 4mm angle 0.7m from joints
angle iron joints
For ductwork used for smoke control purposes, the thickness of the sheet
metal shall be minimum 1.2 mm (SWG 18).
2.7 Flexible Ducting
a) Flexible ducting shall be supplied and fitted where shown on the

Drawings.
b) Flexible ducting shall be of 50 mm thickness fibreglass of

density 32 kg/cu.m. A relatively smooth internal finish is
preferred.
TS/M/S11/6 2602542S/AC
c) For connection to the linear diffusers, the length of the flexible
ducting shall be long enough to connect to either side of the light
fittings, but not less than a minimum of 1.5 meters of its natural
length so as to allow for relocation of the diffusers at a later date.
d) Flexible ducting shall be continuous between connections and shall

be capable of bending, twisting, stretching under installation
conditions, without denting or cracking.
e) Flexible ducting shall be constructed of a flame-retardant vinyl

coated, woven fibreglass fabric bonded to a vinyl coated spring
steel wire helix.
f) Flexible ducting shall comply with the requirements of all statutory

authorities approved by BCA and must be approved by the S.O..
g) Flexible ducting shall be fixed to the sheet metal duct and diffusers
or linear diffusers by means of an approved self-locking worm-
drive stainless steel clips. Each point shall be taped with 50 mm
self-adhesive, and fire resisting PVC tape to ensure complete air-
tight joint.
2.8 Rectangular High Velocity Duct
a) Rectangular high velocity ducts shall be constructed in accordance

with the SMACNA High Velocity Duct Construction Standards or
approved equivalent standards.
b) Longitudinal seams in ducts shall be Pittsburgh lock or approved

equivalent or grooved seams sealed with fire resisting sealant and
centre punched at no greater than 300 mm intervals.
c) Rectangular duct take-offs from rectangular ducts shall be

radiused branch fittings with a square back edge and front edge
with a radius of not less than the duct width. Approved gusseted
branch fittings may be used as an alternative to radiused branch
fittings. Take-offs from circular ducts shall be conned type with an
angle of 120 degrees.
d) Plenum to duct connections shall be fitted with a conned or

tapered section to reduce entry losses.
TS/M/S11/7 2602542S/AC
2.9 Duct Insulation
a) All insulation materials used shall satisfy FSSD and local code
flame spread test or approved equivalent standards. Vapour barrier
used shall comply with the requirements of the Fire Safety and
Shelter Department.
b) All air conditioning ductwork shall be insulated with fibreglass or

mineral wool with field applied or factory applied vapour barrier.
The vapour barrier shall consist of double sided aluminium foil
with glass fibre reinforcements and kraft paper.
c) All ductwork exposed to weather shall be insulated with 50 mm

thick cork insulation which shall be protected by hybrid plaster or
other equivalent that having the same function and painted to
approval.
d) The insulating material shall have a K factor of not more than

0.0332 W/ok at 24o mean temperature. The insulation thickness
shall be 50 mm for supply and 25 mm for return ducts and shall be
of 32 kg/m3 (2 lb/cu ft) nominal density. For return duct located
below the roof and pass through non-air conditioned areas, the
insulation thickness shall be 50 mm.
e) All duct surfaces shall be cleaned and given one coat of flinkote
before the application of the insulation material. A further layer of
flinkote shall be applied on the insulation before they are wrapped
with the vapour barrier which shall have a minimum of 75 mm
overlap at all joints and securely sealed with cover strips and
adhesive duct tape to form a perfect vapour barrier. Anti-corrosion
treated steel tape shall be strapped around the insulated ductwork
at 1 m centres to prevent the insulation from sagging.
f) Where indicated in the Tender Drawings, the materials used for

internal insulation shall be mineral wool of 50 mm thick and
112 kg/cu m (7 lb/cu ft) density. The material shall be protected
by a layer of fibrous cloth to prevent the shedding of the mineral
wool or fibre glass particles into the air stream and wrapped in
perforated aluminium sheet which shall be securely fastened to the
ductwork.
g) The internal insulation shall be supplied around the inside of the

duct such that the insulation in continuous. The insulation and the
duct corners shall be either butt joint or mitred and the aluminium
lamination shall overlap but not less than 10 mm and glued
securely by an approved adhesive. The studs shall be brazed to the
ducts at spacing specified hereinafter, and shall have a length of
not more than 1½ times the thickness of the internal insulation
which it holds.
TS/M/S11/8 2602542S/AC
h) The clips shall be galvanised and of the self-locking type of not
more than 25 x 25 mm in size. The centre to centre spacing of
studs shall be as follows:
Duct Wall Centre Spacing (mm)
Top Side 150 mm
Vertical Side 200 mm
Bottom Side 300 mm
i) Internally line ducts shall be inspected before installation. Duct

walls shall not be punctured when securing the internal insulation.
j) Where the internal insulation terminates, the insulation shall be

tapered in ratio of 1 in 3. The aluminium lamination shall extend,
over by 100 mm and taped securely to the duct. An overlap of 300
mm (12") shall be provided where the insulation changes from
internal to external
k) The supply ducts leaving air handling units and return duct to the
AHU shall be lined internally for a minimum distance of 5 m.
2.10 Exhaust Systems Extracting Cold Air
a) Where the Tender Drawings indicate that an exhaust system is

extracting a portion or full amount of cold air (27oC and below)
from an air-conditioning space, that part of the exhaust system, i.e.
from the point(s) of extraction to the exit of the exhaust fan shall
be externally insulated with fibreglass or mineral wool.
b) The thickness of insulation shall be 25 mm thick and 32 kg/cu m

density. Insulation details shall be similar to air conditioning duct.
c) Where the Tender Drawings indicate a ceiling plenum return of the

cold air, the fresh air supply system shall be insulated from the fan
entry to the supply grille. The thickness of insulation and details
shall be as above.
TS/M/S11/9 2602542S/AC
2.11 Cleaning of Ductwork
a) During installation, properly fitted sheet metal covers shall be

provided at all times to prevent ingress of rubbish. Rags,
newspaper and like materials will not be accepted as a suitable
covering.
b) Should existence of rubbish be found in air ducts, the ductwork

shall be dismantled as necessary to ensure complete removal of
rubbish.
c) All ducts shall be cleaned of dust before starting of fans.
2.12 Laboratory Exhaust Air Duct
a) Laboratory exhaust air duct shall be of Stainless Steel ducting

(SS316L) and all relevant BS, SS and local fire code. Material
shall have excellent resistance to acids, alkalines and solvents. Full
technical detail shall be submitted to S.O. approval before
installation.
b) Where stainless exhaust duct serving chemistry fume cupboard and

chemical all chemical exhaust and chemical store, the internal
surface on the duct shall be treated with chemical resistance teflon
TEFE (polytetrafluoroethylene) coating. Coating shall not be
less than 280 microns.
c) The exhaust duct and hood indicated in Drawings shall be

constructed from stainless steel of minimum thickness 18 British
SWG (1.22 mm) and the joints shall be fully welded and air tight.
d) Ductworks shall be installed pitched towards drain points at a

gradient of 1 in 200. Hangers shall be fabricated of hot-dipped
galvanised steel. Bolts, angle bar supports and nuts shall be of 304
stainless steel. Duct support shall be an interval of approximately
1.5 m apart.
e) All stainless steel duct flange joint shall be made of stainless angle
bar of not less than 5mm thick with welding and assembly using
stainless steel bolt, washer and nut at 100mm interval. Joint that
made use of stainless steel sheet metal and bending together with
duct to form flange will not be acceptable. All gasket used shall be
chemical resistance.
TS/M/S11/10 2602542S/AC
2.13 Duct Test Openings
a) Openings shall be provided in ducts for testing purposes with a

velometer or Pitot Tube on the supply and discharge side of air
handling units major ducts and other necessary positions to be
indicated to the Sub-Contractor in accordance with B.S. 848.
b) The test openings are to be 150 mm centres across one side of the
duct. Each opening shall consist of a 25 mm trap screw brazed into
a 40 mm x 5 mm bar. The bar shall be rivetted to the duct across
its width and each trap screw is to be fitted with a plug.
c) Where test openings are fitted to internally insulated ducts, the

duct insulation is to be protected with perforated metal internally
for a distance of 600mm ahead of and 150mm past the test
opening position.
2.14 Flexible Connections
a) Flexible connection shall be provided at all ductwork connections

to the suction and discharge openings of fans, FCUs, AHUs and
where shown on the Drawings. These shall be made of approved
flame retarded fabric or shall consist of Sleeve joints with packing
of non-combustible material of not less than 100 mm long.
b) Flame retardant fabric connections shall be made of fibre glass

cloth impregnated with a lead loaded vinyl. The surface density
shall not be less than 5 kg/m2. They shall be to the approval of the
FSSD, BCA and the S.O..
c) Flexible connections shall be so constructed to ensure that there is

no air leakage. Connections shall have 50 mm to 100 mm length
free of stress so as to permit renewal of fabric without disturbing
ductwork or other part of equipment.
d) Final connection duct connected to fume hood, safety cabinet,

flammable cabinet, bio-safety cabinet etc shall be of stainless steel
connection with chemical resistance .
TS/M/S11/11 2602542S/AC
2.15 Access Doors
a) The Sub-Contractor shall provide access doors on all ductwork

connections, either upstream or downstream of coils, upstream of
fans, fire dampers, filters etc. for inspection, cleaning and
maintenance purposes in accordance with SMACNA
recommendations.
b) Access doors shall be of double skin construction with insulation

of the same general character as adjacent sections of ductwork.
The door panel shall be of not less than 1.0 mm sheet metal and
shall have not less than 12 mm wide neoprene rubber gasket
around their entire perimeter. It shall have the same fire ratings as
the adjacent construction.
c) Access doors shall be hung on heavy brass plated flat hinges and
shall be secured in the closed position by means of wedge type
catches. All hinges shall be so placed to enable the doors to remain
open without additional support. All doors will be hinged with two
hinges and two catches will be required on doors over 40 mm x
400 mm. Where it is impractical to use hinged doors, the access
doors may be fixed in position with wedge type catches on two
opposite sides, with a minimum of 4 catches per door.
TS/M/S11/12 2602542S/AC
3. Pre-fabricated Pre-Insulated Duct
a) The pre-fabricated pre-insulated duct shall be used only if it is indicated in

the drawing only.
b) The pre-fabricated pre-insulated duct shall be used in all ducted fan coil
unit, fresh air to air handing unit, branch duct to offices, seminar room,
lecture theatre with low pressure. All Laboratory and high pressure
application are not to be used.
c) All pre-fabricated pre-insulated duct materials used shall comply and

satisfy with the requirements of the Fire Safety and Shelter Department
FSSD and local code flame spread test or approved equivalent standards.
The pre-fabricated pre-insulated duct fire rating must be Class 0 according
B.S. 476 parts 6&7, and Class B-s1,D0 according to EN13501-1. The
product shall not generate opaque or toxic fumes and flaming droplets.
d) The pre-fabricated pre-insulated duct shall comply to the composite

material as stipulated in the fire code with non-combustible core material.
e) The pre-fabricated pre-insulated duct shall be able to form in different

shapes and preferably a green product certified by Singapore Green
Building Product.
f) The stiffness of the pre-fabricated pre-insulated duct shall be greater than

90,000Nmm2and tested according to EN13403. Particles emission by the
duct material shall not exceed 0.006 μg/m3 for 0.5 μm particles and 0.003
μg/m3 for 5μm particles.
g) Pre-fabricated Pre-insulated duct shall be made of fibre glasswool rigid

panel or other form of non-combustible rigid panel, suitable for the
construction of ductwork for air conditioning, distribution, ventilation
systems. The system shall be able to withstand temperature from -10oC to
+90oC and pressure of not less than 750Pa. Duct shall be designed for
greater installation productivity with on or off site fabrication and
installation.
h) All air conditioning pre-fabricated pre-insulated ductwork shall be made

with rigid double facing fibreglass wool, mineral wool or other non
combustible material with good optimal thermal, acoustical properties,
high mechanical resistance material facing in the air stream. The material
shall be field applied or factory applied vapour barrier. The vapour barrier
shall consist of double sided aluminium foil with glass fibre reinforcements
and kraft paper.
i) Internal of the pre-fabricated pre-insulated duct shall have a layer of

aluminium foil or black tissue, subjected to engineer approval, shall not
tear off during operation. .
TS/M/S11/13 2602542S/AC
j) Pre-fabricated Pre-insulated Duct shall have its air tightness tested and
comply in accordance to EN12237 Class D. All site testing shall meet to
DW143 duct leakage test standard.
k) All ductwork exposed to weather shall be insulated with 50 mm thick cork

insulation which shall be protected by hybrid plaster or other equivalent
that having the same function and painted to approval.
l) The insulating composite material shall have a K factor of not greater than
0.0332 W/ok at 10 oC mean temperature. The insulation thickness shall be
50 mm for supply and 25 mm for return ducts and shall be of not less than
70 kg/m3 (4.37 lb/cu ft) nominal density. For return duct located below the
roof and pass through non-air conditioned areas, the insulation thickness
shall be 50 mm.
m) The Pre-fabricated Pre insulation Duct shall be suitable for ducted ceiling
return environment. Sub-Contractor shall ensure no condensation at the
pre-insulation duct surfaces. The thickness of the insulation were to be
below 50mm, calculation shall be submitted for engineer approval based
Thickness of insulation shall not be less than 40mm.
n) If fiberglass or mineral wool materials being used, a layer of flinkote shall

be applied on all the pre-fabricated pre-insulated duct before they are
wrapped with the fibre glasswool and vapour barrier which shall have a
minimum of 75 mm overlap at all joints and securely sealed with cover
strips and adhesive duct tape to form a perfect vapour barrier. Anti-
corrosion treated steel tape shall be strapped around the insulated
ductwork at 1 m centres to prevent from sagging.
o) Where indicated in the Tender Drawings, the materials used for internal
insulation shall be mineral wool of 50 mm thick and 112 kg/m3 (7
lb/cu ft) density. The material shall be protected by a layer of fibrous
cloth which to be of high mechanical resistance with good acoustical and
sound absorption properties prevent the shedding of the mineral wool or
fibre glasswool particles into the air stream and wrapped in perforated
aluminium sheet which shall be securely fastened to the ductwork. This
section of duct shall be of galvanised duct if pre-fabricated pre-insulated
duct is not able to take the pressure.
p) The internal insulation shall be supplied around the inside of the duct such
that the insulation in continuous. The insulation and the duct corners shall
be either butt joint or mitred and the aluminium lamination shall overlap
but not less than 10 mm and glued securely by an approved adhesive. The
studs shall be brazed to the ducts at spacing specified hereinafter, and shall
have a length of not more than 1½ times the thickness of the internal
insulation which it holds.
TS/M/S11/14 2602542S/AC
q) The clips shall be galvanised and of the self-locking type of not more than
25 x 25 mm in size. The centre to centre spacing of studs shall be as
follows:
Duct Wall Centre Spacing (mm)
Top Side 150 mm
Vertical Side 200 mm
Bottom Side 300 mm
r) If shiplap joint method is being used, sample of joining shall be submitted

and approved by engineer.. The join shall not cause any dislodge of duct
that being joined. All the joint shall apply with sealant and with aluminiun
clip stapled or angles or to manufacturer recommendation. All joint shall
be taped with aluminium tape
s) Internally lined ducts shall be inspected before installation. Duct walls shall
not be punctured when securing the internal insulation.
t) Where the internal insulation terminates, the insulation shall be tapered in

ratio of 1 in 3. The aluminium lamination shall extend, over by 100 mm
and taped securely to the duct. An overlap of 300 mm (12") shall be
provided where the insulation changes from internal to external
u) The supply ducts leaving air handling units and return duct to the AHU
shall be lined internally for a minimum distance of 5 m.
v) Sleeves
Where ducts pass through walls or partitions, suitable galvanised sheet

steel sleeves of a gauge not less than the duct concerned shall be supplied
and located into place and shall not protrude more than 13 mm over the
finished wall surface. In the case of insulated ductwork the sleeves shall be
over-sized to allow the insulation and vapour seal to be continuous
through them.
TS/M/S11/15 2602542S/AC
w) Fitting of Ductwork
The Sub-Contractor shall take note of the positioning of the ductwork and
associated fittings in areas where space is limited. If necessary, additional
costs should be included for prefabricating, assembling, and insulating
sections of the ductwork in lengths suitable for installation as shown. No
further allowances will be made at any later date for negotiation of
additional space than that generally shown on the Drawings. All the fitting
that form up by the pre-fabricated pre-insulated duct, losses shall comply
to relevant SMACNA duct construction method or better.
Where the pre-fabricated pre-insulated duct joined to dampers or

accessories, all the joining shall be of rigid sheet meet of 1.2mm thick and
insulated. Method of joining shall comply to the fire code. Access panel
framing that provided at the pre-fabricated pre-insulated duct shall be
insulated to prevent any condensation. Any rigid duct that that being used,
It shall comply to clause 2 of this section.
x) Longitudinal Seams
Where the perimeter of the duct does not exceed the width of the pre-
fabricated pre-insulated duct, ducts shall be constructed with one
longitudinal seam only. Flat longitudinal seams with enforcements and high
strength sealant shall be used in all ducts. All the longitudinal construction
shall be enforced with aluminium clip stapled, angle or to manufacturer
recommendation. All joint shall be taped with aluminium tape
y) Hangers and Supports
a) The Sub-Contractor shall furnish and install hangers, hanger

brackets and miscellaneous support as are required for the
installation of all ductwork, pipework, equipment, etc. Supports,
hangers, brackets, etc. shall be attached to concrete and masonry
walls, ceilings and floors in an approved substantial manner by
means of inserts of expansion shields of adequate size and number to
support the loads to be imposed thereon. All hangers, brackets and
miscellaneous support shall be hot dipped galvanised steel.
TS/M/S11/16 2602542S/AC
b) All rectangular ductwork shall be hung with rod hangers. Where
angle stiffeners have been provided on the underside of the duct, the
hanger rods may pass through the ends of those angled stiffeners for
supporting the duct. If these angle stiffeners are not located properly
for the hangers, angle across the underside of the duct shall be
furnished and installed for fastening to rods. The size of angles shall
be the same as the stiffening angles. Spacing shall not exceed 3
metres. All hanger rods shall be supported from the floor above.
Hanger rods for horizontal duct shall be spaced as follows:-
Cross-sectional Perimeter Maximum Spacing

Between of duct (m) hangers (m)
Less than 0.9 2.4
0.9 to 1.5 1.8
Exceeding 1.5 1.2
Vertical Ducts shall be rigidly supported at not exceeding 1.8 m

spacing. When a vertical wall supports the duct, the anchoring must
be coincide with the reinforcement. A sheet metal shall be used and
attached to the reinforcement.
11.1. Support Rod and Angle Size
The support rod sizes shall be as follows:
Duct Width (Longest Side) Diameter Minimum Rod Size
Up to 300 mm 6 mm diameter
Above 2125 mm 12 mm diameter
TS/M/S11/17 2602542S/AC
11.2. Support Angles
a) The support angles shall be as follows:
Duct Width (Longest Side) Minimum angle channel

Size
Up to 300 mm 19 x 19 x 3 mm
325 mm - 750 mm 25 x 25 x 3 mm
775 - 1500 mm 38 x 38 x 5 mm
1525 - 2100 mm 51 x 51 x 6.5 mm
Above 2125 mm 51 x 51 x 6.5 mm
All angle channel supports shall be rolled steel sections without

slots.
b) Support for fire rated duct shall be protected by approved fire

rated material.
c) The Drawings do not attempt to show all off-sets in the

ductworks. The Contractor shall make such off-sets as necessary
for the installation cost. Where off-sets are required, the angle of
the off-sets shall be as small as possible.
TS/M/S11/18 2602542S/AC
d) Duct construction and Joint shall be as shown in the following
table:
Maximum Size of Type of Transverse Type of Bracing

Duct Joint Connection
Up to 300mm 25mm x 25mm x 3mm 25mm x 25mm x 3mm

angle iron joints angle 1.7m from joints
301mm to 460mm 25mm x 25mm x 3mm 25mm x 25mm x 3mm
Above 2151 mm 38mm x 38mm x 4mm 38mm x 38mm x 4mm
e) Reinforcement on Pre-fabricated Pre-Insulation Duct construction

shall be as shown in the following table:
Maximum Size of Type of Reinforcement and Bracing

Duct
Up to 600mm Reinforcement every 600mm

601mm to 750mm Reinforcement every 600mm
1201mm to 1500mm 38mm x 38mm x 4mm angle iron joints
or to manufacturer recommendation
Above 1501 mm 38mm x 38mm x 4mm angle iron joints
or to manufacturer recommendation
TS/M/S11/19 2602542S/AC
SECTION 12 - AIR DIFFUSING EQUIPEMNT AND DAMPER
1. General
1.1 This section covers the supply, delivery, installation, painting, testing
and commissioning, and fifteen (15) months free maintenance and
warranty of all diffusers, grilles, registers, insulation, controls and
balancing dampers, fire dampers and sheet metal work associated with
the air-conditioning and ventilating equipment.
1.2 Air quantity as shown in the drawings is only given as a guide. The Sub-
Contractor shall adjust it on site to suit the space, temperature and NC
level required.
1.3 The selection and location of the diffusers shall also achieve an Air
Diffusion Performance Index (ADPI) of not less than 80% according to
the definitions and parameters as found in the ASHRAE Fundamentals
Handbook.
2. Air Diffusing Equipment
2.1 General
a) All grilles, diffusers, louvres and registers used for the purposes
of supply and return of conditioned and/or unconditioned air and
associated accessories (hereby defined as air diffusing
equipment) required for the complete air conditioning and
mechanical ventilation systems shall be provided under this Sub-
Contract. All diffusers, registers, grilles and louvres shall be of
16 gauge extruded anodised aluminium.
b) All air diffusing equipment shall be selected for quiet operation

when handling the specified volume of air and shall be arranged
to provide uniform velocity across the face of the air diffusing
equipment. Supply air diffusing equipment shall be selected to
achieve the required air mixing but shall give air velocities of the
occupied level of not more than 0.25 metres per second. When
the finish of the air diffusing equipment is unspecified, the finish
shall be taken to be spray painted with quality enamel paint of
colour which shall be nominated by the Superintending Officer
on site. All internal surfaces of air diffusing equipment and any
parts of the ductwork thereof which is visible shall be painted
matt black.
c) All diffusing equipment shall be subjected for approval and

samples shall be submitted for inspection.
TS/M/S12/1 2602542S/AC
d) Openings in ducts to receive air diffusing equipment shall be
reinforced around the perimeter. Reinforcement shall be in the
form of welded bar frames or double folded seams. Care shall be
taken and gaskets shall be used for all diffusers and grilles to
ensure that leaks do not occur at the necks or from around the air
diffusing equipment. Air diffusing equipment shall be fixed to
the ceiling, wall or any other building structure and no fixing
screws shall be visible.
e) Air quantity as shown in Drawings is only given as a guide, the

Sub-Contractor shall adjust it on site to suit the space temperature
and NC level requirement.
f) Supply diffuser for Library, compactor, Tissue culture and cell

culture lab shall have filter to provide cleaner air.
2.2 Construction
a) For the side discharge register, the front set of blades shall be
vertical and rear set of blades shall be horizontal. Concealed
sheet metal screw fixing shall be used through the register collar
into the duct spigot. Screw-fixing through the register face flange
shall be rejected. Maximum neck velocities shall not exceed 2.5
m/s.
b) Louvres shall be of the recessed, flanged or removable frame

type with one set of fixed horizontal blades. The method of fixing
shall be as specified for side discharge registers.
c) Side extract air grilles shall be supplied and installed as specified

for louvres. Ceiling extract/return air grilles shall have 13mm x
13mm x 25mm aluminium grids (egg crate type) and shall be of
recessed, flanged or removable type.
d) Outdoor air louvre shall be weatherproof type, extruded

aluminium complete with gasket seal, bronze birdwide mesh
screen, opposed blade damper and removable air filter with
frame. Screening shall not be larger than 10mm mesh.
e) Correct performance of all air diffusing equipment shall be the

full responsibility of the air conditioning and mechanical
ventilation Sub-Contractor. All diffusers and grilles shall be of
reputable make and their performance shall be tested and
certified. Full performance data shall be supplied at the time of
Tender.
TS/M/S12/2 2602542S/AC
All performance data submitted shall be tested in accordance to
the following standards:
(i) International Standard Organization code ISO 5219.Air

distribution and air diffusion – laboratory aerodynamic
testing and rating of air terminal devices
(ii) International Standard Organization code ISO 5135

Acoustics - Determination of sound power levels of
noise from air terminal devices, high/low velocity,
pressure assemblies, dampers and valves by
measurement in a reverberation room.
2.3 Linear Diffusers
a) Linear diffusers shall be provided at locations and of capacities

as shown on the Tender Drawings. All ducted return and supply
air linear diffusers shall be complete with an insulated air plenum
box for connection to flexible duct.
b) Plenum box for linear diffuser shall be constructed of galvanised

steel of minimum 22 gauge. Each plenum box shall have an inlet
collar for connection to flexible duct. The plenum shall be
purposely designed with equalizer to provide uniform
distribution of airflow and minimized regenerated noise. The
internal surfaces of the plenum box shall be acoustically and
thermally insulated with minimum 25 mm thick, 32 kg/m3
density fibreglass or scrimed mineral wool. The fibreglass or
scrimed mineral wool shall also be covered with double sides
aluminium foil. The Internal surfaces shall be treated to prevent
corrosion. The exterior surfaces shall be suitably prime etched to
prevent rusting. The S.O. shall reserve the right to reject the
diffusers where rust is detected.
c) Volume control dampers shall be provided for all supply air

linear diffusers at the air inlet collar of the plenum box. In
addition, the supply air linear diffusers shall come with 2-way
directional louvres.
d) Suitable diffuser with correct number of slots shall be selected to

ensure that the NC level comply to the specified requirement.
e) Diffusers shall be of minimum 3 slots linear diffuser, high

induction ratio type and shall operate from design air flow of
100% to 10% without air dumping. Performance of diffuser shall
be based on actual factory tests and published catalogue data.
The Sub-Contractor shall ensure all diffusers operate at low noise
level at all conditions. Diffusers shall be selected to supply 120%
of design flow rate at low noise as well.
TS/M/S12/3 2602542S/AC
f) Diffuser shall be of anodised aluminium, not less than 1.5 mm
with finishing colour as specified. Approximate length of each
diffuser shall be shown on the Tender Drawings. However final
length of the linear diffuser shall be co-ordinated with the ceiling
system. For the purpose of Tender, the Tenderer shall assume
that the length may vary by ± 100 mm from that indicated and all
incidental cost for such adjustment to the diffuser length shall be
included in the Sub-Contract price.
g) The Sub-Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer a noise

level guarantee in writing before placing the order and submit it
to the S.O. for approval.
h) The Sub-Contractor shall submit air flow characteristic of the

diffusers showing clearly the diffusion air pattern for each type of
diffuser for 100%, 75%, 50% and 40% of the designed air
quantities.
i) The Sub-Contractor shall make available within four weeks from

the date of award of the Sub-Contract, the size, shape and
constructional details of the diffusers. All details shall be
provided to ensure an accurate co-ordination with the ceiling grid
system.
j) Exposed surfaces of slot(s) shall be finished to a colour approved

by the S.O..
2.4 Ceiling Diffusers
a) Ceiling diffusers shall be of anodised aluminium construction

and of the louvre face type suitable for surface mounting. The
diffusers shall be rigidly constructed, and unless otherwise
specified shall have not less than four (4) louvre vanes per
150mm.
b) For top inlet ceiling diffusers,

(for office, library, Laboratory and general area application)
i) Ceiling diffuser shall be extruded aluminum construction

and of the louver face type suitable for surface mounting.
The diffuser shall be rigidly constructed, and unless
otherwise specified shall have not less than four (4)
louver vanes per 150mm
TS/M/S12/4 2602542S/AC
ii) 2 blade vertical type butterfly worm gear volume control
dampers shall be provided for all ceiling diffusers at the
air inlet collar of the engineered plenum box. Ceiling
diffuser shall be completed with thermal acoustic
engineered plenum box. The plenum box shall be design
to provide uniform distribution of airflow and minimized
regenerated noise. The plenum box shall be internally
lined with 12.5mm thick flame-retardant materials with
aluminum foil meeting Class Ó’ rating to British Standard
BS 476 part 6 and 7. The insulation shall be constructed
to achieve good noise absorption and low thermal
conductivity. Thermal conductivity shall not exceed 0.035
W/mK.
c) For side inlet ceiling diffuser;

(for laboratory area and other area)
i) Aluminum construction with baked white enamel finish.
ii) Diffuser shall be 4-way blow Louvre face type of

extruded aluminum construction.
iii) Diffuser shall be complete with thermal acoustic

engineered plenum box.
iv) Thermal acoustic engineered plenum shall be provided to

each supply diffuser with inlet size for air velocity not
exceeding 4.0meter per second through the flexible duct.
The plenum shall be purposely design with internal
stabilizer to provide uniform distribution of airflow and
minimized regenerated noise. Tested performance data
for each diffuser terminal unit consisting of the diffuser
and the engineered plenum shall be submitted for
approval. Calculated data are not acceptable. Butterfly
damper to each terminal unit shall be provided upstream
so the damper generated noise may be subsequently
attenuated.
v) For better indoor air quality, the plenum shall be lined

with 25mm thick flame-retardant materials aluminum foil
meeting Class Ó’ rating to British Standard BS 476 Part 6
and 7. The insulation shall be constructed to achieve good
noise absorption and low thermal conductivity. Thermal
conductivity shall not exceed 0.035 W/mK.
TS/M/S12/5 2602542S/AC
vi) All performance data submitted shall be tested in
accordance to the following standards
· International Standard Organization code ISO

5219. Air distribution and air diffusion-laboratory
aerodynamic testing and rating of air terminal
devices.
· International Standard Organization code ISO

5135. Acoustic-Determination of sound power
levels of noise from air terminal devices, high and
low velocity, pressure, assemblies, dampers and
valves by measurement in a reverberation room.
d) Unless otherwise stated, ceiling diffusers mounted directly on the

underside of the ductwork shall be provided with a multi-blade
stream splitter damper. The stream splitter damper shall be
constructed as specified in this section.
e) Air velocities at neck of ceiling diffusers shall not be less than

2.5m/s unless otherwise shown.
2.5 Laminar Flow Diffusers
The laminar flow diffuser shall be constructed of galvanized steel with

internal equalizers and face pull down to ensure uniform air flow across
the face of the diffuser. The plenum shall be constructed of 1.0mm thick
material and the faceplate of 0.7mm thick, 304 stainless steel perforated
plate of minimum 50% open area. The perforated face of the diffuser
shall have 4.76mm holes spaced at 6.35mm centre in triangular pattern.
Face shall be easily removed for cleaning. It shall be incorporated with
straightener to remove air turbulence from the discharge air. The laminar
flow diffuser perforated face shall be able to pull down at least 50mm for
side air flow.
The diffuser shall be designed such that its frame is not visible after
installation. Gasket seal of 14 X 5 mm thick neoprene shall be provided
around the frame to prevent any air leakages to ceiling space.
For better indoor air quality, the plenum shall be lined with 25mm thick
flame-retardant foam meeting Class ‘O’ rating to British Standard BS
476 Part 6 and 7. The insulation shall be constructed of fine cellular
structured open-cell foam to achieved good noise absorption and low
thermal conductivity. Thermal conductivity shall not exceed 0.035
W/mK.
TS/M/S12/6 2602542S/AC
The visible area of the diffuser after installation shall be powder coated
finish. To prevent damage or scratches to the diffuser, it shall be
properly packed in carton boxes before delivery.
Air velocity measured at 150 mm from the face of the diffuser shall not
exceed 1.0 m/s. Pressure loss through the laminar flow diffuser shall not
exceed 25 Pascal.
2.6 Damper and Splitters
a) All dampers shall be as specified below. All screw and

adjustment mechanism shall be of galvanised steel. All blades for
dampers shall be constructed at minimum gauge 18 extruded
aluminium in double streamlined sections.
b) The volume control dampers shall be of aluminium, opposed

blade type and consist of self-lubricating nylon bushings and
actuator parts assuring smooth operation of blades and capable of
being adjusted externally and fixed in position with screw.
c) Splitters shall be used as shown on the Drawings or where

necessary for balancing of air distribution. Splitter damper shall
be fitted with a hand level and quadrant in accessible positions
capable of being locked in any position. The OPEN and SHUT
positions shall be stamped on the quadrant or marked on the duct
by means of engraved labels. When an adjustable quadrant is
fitted over the vapour seal, a 16 gauge galvanised steel plate of
sufficient size shall be provided to avoid breaking the vapour
seal.
d) Except where it is specifically stated on the Drawings, all duct

branches take offs and supply air collars or take offs of more than
1.0 metre in length shall be fitted with a fixed blade air stream
splitter dampers. The Sub-Contractor shall take special care to
ensure that all dampers are free from vibration and rattles under
all operating conditions.
e) All opposed blade dampers shall be of proprietary make or of

approved local make. Dampers shall be of steel frame
construction and with extruded aluminium opposed operating
blades.
f) The damper unit shall be complete with soft rubber sponge

gaskets of not less than 6 mm thickness for connection to
ductwork and grilles.
TS/M/S12/7 2602542S/AC
g) Damper adjustment mechanism shall be of approved type and
shall be or rigid construction with no slack when opening or
closing of the damper. The adjustment mechanism shall be
concealed.
h) The multi-blades splitter damper shall be of steel frame

construction with extruded aluminium, right angle curved blades,
suitably spaced.
i) Dampers shall be adjusted by an adjustment mechanism
2.7 Low Leakage Volume Control Damper
a) All low leakage dampers shall be of the parallel blade louver

type. All parallel blade dampers shall be of high quality hot-
dipped pre-galvanised steel. They shall be suitable for a working
differential pressure of 1000 Pa across it without permanent
distortion or structural failure. Leakage through the damper
should not exceed 0.10m3/s/m2 of net damper face area at rated
velocity of 10.2 m/s and the static pressure drop across the
damper should not exceed 40 Pa. The maximum unsupported
blade length shall be 900mm.
b) The damper casing is constructed of high quality from 1.0 to 2.0

mm thick corrosion resistant galvanised steel. Frame is
constructed of cold-formed “C” channel 150 x 38 mm welded at
each corner.
c) Blades shall be constructed of 150mm width by 1.2mm thick,

rolled-formed, hot-dipped pre-galvanised steel with 3-grooves
profile.
d) Blades axles shall be constructed of 12.7 x 12.7 mm square shaft

externally mounted to linkage mechanism to prevent slipping.
Round axles are not acceptable. The blades axles shall pivot on
the two-part nylon bearings to prevent seizure over prolong
period of operation.
e) Blade linkage is externally mounted on the shaft, out of the air

stream.
f) Dampers must be completed with jamb seals and blade edge seals
to ensure leakage is meet.
g) Each damper shall be equipped with electric modulating or

on/off, 24Vac or 230Vac, single phase and 50Hz-power supply.
Control and feedback signal shall be of 0V to 10V or 4mA to
20mA.
TS/M/S12/8 2602542S/AC
h) All performance data submitted shall be tested in accordance to
Air Movement and Control Association – AMCA 500. Local
factory test shall be conducted and witness by engineer to verify
the leakage
2.8 Return, Supply and Exhaust Air Grilles
a) All return air grilles material and shape shall be the same as the
supply air diffuser.
b) Exhaust and supply grilles shall be of anodised aluminium

construction and of the fixed front blade type.
All supply, exhaust grilles and registers shall be of fitted with an

opposed blade volume control dampers of approved construction
2.9 Pressure Release Damper
a) Pressure release damper shall be installed in the pressurisation

staircase as shown in the Drawings. The damper shall be able to
be set at the required specified static pressure. It shall be
normally closed, however, if the static pressure of the
pressurization staircase exceed the specified value, the damper
shall automatically open to release the air and to maintain the
specified static pressure in the staircase at all times. The damper
sample shall be submitted to S.O. for approval before purchasing
or fabrication. The Sub-Contractor shall check the dimension of
the damper to ensure that the performance meets the specified
requirement.
b) The frame shall be of galvanised steel and blades be of

aluminium.
2.10 Non-Return Dampers
All non-return dampers shall be of light gauge galvanised sheet steel and
of sturdy construction with spindles running freely in oil impregnated
bronze or other approved type of bearings. Damper blades shall be
tipped with 6.35mm felt to ensure silent operation.
2.11 Outside Air and Exhaust Air Louvres
a) Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, all outside air and

exhaust air louvres for air intake and air exhaust shall be supplied
and fixed by the Sub-Contractor to the S.O.'s details.
TS/M/S12/9 2602542S/AC
b) Louvre blades shall be horizontal and constructed of or extruded
aluminium set in a rigid frame. Blades shall be set of
approximately 50 mm apart and of an angle of 30o to the
horizontal. The louvre shall be of weatherproof type.
c) All fresh and exhaust louvres and openings shall be fixed with 12
mm mesh matt black painted galvanised insect screen, on the
inside in such manner so as to facilitate easy removal for periodic
cleaning.
d) All outside air louvres shall have insect screens, air filters and
adjustable volume control dampers. All exhaust air louvres shall
have insect screens.
2.12 Fire Dampers
a) Fire dampers shall be installed as specified on the Drawings and

at locations required by the Fire Safety and Shelter Department.
Fire Dampers shall be approved by third party accredited testing
laboratory in Singapore and comply to SS 333. The Sub-
Contractor shall be professionally responsible for any letter of
undertaking as required by FSSB/BCA that the fire dampers are
installed correctly and bear the certification by third party
accredited testing laboratory 's label sticker.
b) In general, where air conditioning ducts pass through floors or

fire walls other than party walls, fire dampers with fusible links
as specified hereinafter shall be installed. Such fire dampers shall
be so arranged that the disruption of the duct will not cause
failure to protect the duct opening. Access panels shall be
installed in such a location so that inspection and resetting of the
fire damper is possible. All fire dampers shall be installed so as
to meet the requirements of the Fire Safety and Shelter
Department.
c) Fire dampers shall be constructed and tested in accordance with

the requirement of authority, code of practice and shall be
suitable for a fire rating equipment to the surrounding
construction, but not less than two hours and shall be installed in
strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
d) Fire dampers shall be of the multi-blade type except for ducts

less than 350 mm (height) where single-blade type may be used.
e) The blade(s) shall have self aligning sintered bronze bearings

actuating or pivoting on stainless steel stubs shafts. Any
interconnecting linkages required for louvre type dampers shall
have brass self aligning linkage brackets and dampers shall be
held open by one or more fusible links which shall fuse at 70oC.
TS/M/S12/10 2602542S/AC
f) Access doors shall be provided to each fire damper for
replacement of fusible links, resetting of dampers and for
periodical inspection.
g) Dampers shall be designed to eliminate any gap between the end

of each blade and its associated rebated frame in the closed
position.
3. Variable Air Volume Boxes
3.1 The Sub-Contractor shall supply and install single duct, variable air
volume (VAV) boxes of the sizes and capacities as shown in the
Drawings.
3.2 The VAV boxes shall be a proprietary line specialising in the field.
Boxes performance shall be rated in accordance with ASHRAE STD.
36B and ARI STD. 880.83 and ISO 5220, IAO 5135 & ISO 3741. The
minimum static pressure required at the inlet shall not exceed 15 mm
W.G. at wide open position. The VAV boxes selected shall be able to
cope with additional of 30% of spare air flow capacity for future
requirements.
3.3 Casing shall be constructed of double skin construction with 25mm thick
fibreglass insulation material in between and having U.L. approved
meeting NBFU 90A and NFPA. The casing material shall be minimum
22 gauge galvanised steel.
3.4 Where indicated in the tender drawings, the VAV box shall be coupled
with an acoustic and internally insulated terminal box (multiple outlet
spigots). The terminal box shall be internally lined with 80 kg/cu.m
rockwool laminated with aluminium foil. The box shall have proper
opening, with collar to enable connection of flexible ducts. All single
outlet and multiple outlet shall be installed with VCDs (volume control
dampers) for air flow adjustment.
3.5 Damper blades shall have extruded rib which key into grooved shaft fix
of damper position and the damper blades shall be able to travel
continuously from range of 0 to 60 degree. Nylon bush shall be used for
all internal damper pivot points for quiet operation and no lubrication is
required. The blade shall be constructed of double skin galvanised steel
plates with felt all round. They shall be designed with pressure balancing
feature.
3.6 Only damper actuator shall be mounted externally on the VAV box for
ease of maintenance.
TS/M/S12/11 2602542S/AC
3.7 VAV equipment manufacturer shall submit a computerised programme
for the sizing of his equipment and the air distribution system. Terminal
units designated shall conform to CFM, static pressure and designated
noise criteria.
3.8 The noise level in the air conditioned areas shall not exceed that as
specified.
4. Airflow Sensors For VAV boxes
4.1 Airflow sensors if required shall be of the multiple-point, true averaging

type with signal amplification function for accurate flow measurement.
4.2 Accuracy of the flow measurement shall be better than 2.5 % at a

velocity of 2.0 m/s or higher, even with irregular duct approach.
4.3 Airflow sensors shall be constructed of special aluminum profile capable

of amplifying the velocity signal by at least 2.5 times to improve reading
accuracy at low air velocity.
4.4 The airflow sensors shall have a minimum of 24 test points and the
position of the test points shall be arranged to ensure a true average
measurement signal.
4.5 The airflow sensors shall have 100% repeatability on-site measurements.
4.6 There shall be only one (1) calibration point required for the full range of
airflow measurement and the accuracy shall be maintained throughout
the full airflow range.
4.7 Test reports/certificates shall be submitted to verify the air flow sensor
accuracy. Local factory test shall be conducted to verify the accuracy.
4.8 Air flow sensor shall be constructed so that it can be easily removed for
servicing and maintenance.
5. Air Extractor
Air extractors are constructed of aluminium vanes assembled at 25mm centre to

provide smooth efficient turning of air flow from one duct to another; single and
multi-blade volume damper is not acceptable device for balancing. The extractor
vanes shall be gang-operated and synchronized to remain parallel with the
airflow irregardless of the extractor angle. The air extractor shall be furnished
with appropriate worm-gear operator for adjustment after installation. Installed
at the take-off on the downstream side, the air extractor extracts, equalizes and
provides volume control of air flow to the main branch duct &, reducing air
turning pressure loss and ensuring a quieter system operation
TS/M/S12/12 2602542S/AC
6. Air Tight Damper (For Laboratory) – Supply/Exhaust
Rectangular/ Square Type
6.1 All dampers shall be of the parallel blade louver type and constructed of
stainless steel type 316L or unless otherwise specified. The dampers
shall be suitable for a differential pressure of 2000 Pa across it without
permanent distortion or structural failure.
6.2 The damper frame shall be constructed of 2mm thick cold-formed “C”
channel of 200 mm depth with 38 mm flange all round. To prevent
external leakages, axle seal shall be provided at the damper frame which
shall be full welded at each corner.
6.3 Blades shall be constructed of airfoil shape double-skinned of 1.2 mm

thick stainless steel with blade edge seal to prevent air leakage across the
damper when the blades are closed.
6.4 Blades axles shall be constructed of minimum 15 mm diameter shaft

externally mounted to linkage mechanism to prevent slipping. The
blades axles shall pivot on external bronze bearing.
6.5 Blade linkage is externally mounted on the shaft, out of the air stream.
6.6 Dampers must be completed with jamb seals and blade-edge seals to
ensure leakage is met
6.7 Internal leakage across the damper, when closed, shall not exceed 0.05
m3/s per square meter of damper face area at approach velocity of 10 m/s
and pressure differential of 1000 Pa. There shall be no external leakage
through the damper frame and bearing under all conditions. The static
pressure drop across the damper should not exceed 40 Pa. The maximum
unsupported blade length shall be 1500mm.
6.8 Each damper shall be equipped with electric modulating or on/off

actuator with spring return, auxiliary switch, 24Vac or 230Vac, single
phase and 50Hz-power supply. Control and feedback signal shall be of
0V to 10V or 4mA to 20mA.
6.9 Actuators shall be sufficient capacity to operate the damper under all
conditions, and to guarantee tight closure against system pressure
encountered and blade seals. Actuators shall provide at least minimum
torque of 15Nm per m2 damper area.
6.10 Damper actuators shall be designed for repeated actuation without

overheating or damage, with no minimum period between actuation and
to have an external manual gear release to allow manual positioning of
the damper when the actuator is not powered.
TS/M/S12/13 2602542S/AC
6.11 Damper actuators shall be mounted outside of the duct where appropriate
with support plates that are completely outside of the insulation or
covering.
6.12 All performance data submitted shall be tested in accordance to Air

Movement and Control Association – AMCA 500. Local factory test
shall be conducted and witness by engineer to verify the leakage
6.13 Damper that serving chemistry fume cupboard, the internal surface on
the duct shall be treated with chemical resistance teflon TEFE
(polytetrafluoroethylene) coating. Coating shall not be less than 280
microns
Circular Type
The circular damper shall be of heavy-duty construction to [3, 4.5 6 or 7.5] kpa
design pressure. Unless otherwise specified, damper parts shall be constructed
of type [304 or 316] stainless steel material.
6.14 Frame is constructed of heavy gage stainless steel with flanges fully
welded to both ends with minimum flange distance of 200mm. Holes are
pre-cut on the flanges with maximum distance of 100mm.
6.15 Blade is constructed of double skin heavy-gage stainless steel with

stiffeners as required for larger dampers and higher pressure.
6.16 Blade shaft is constructed of stainless steel continues through the damper
frame. Diameter of blade axle ranges from 12.5mm to 50mm depending
on size and design pressure. The blade shaft is fastened to the blade with
special-designed U bracket that prevent slippage between the two
components.
6.17 Blade seal is constructed of EPDM extrusion; other types of seal such as
neoprene or silicon may be available upon request.
6.18 Shaft seal is constructed of comparison type packing gland continuously

welded to damper frame; packing is of Teflon material and may be
replaced without removal of bearing.
6.19 Bearing is of the ball bearing type with flange for outboard mounting.
Bearing housing is constructed of die-cast iron with epoxy painted finish.
6.20 Internal leakage across the damper, when closed, shall not exceed 0.05
m3/s per square meter of damper face area at approach velocity of 10 m/s
and pressure differential of 1000 Pa. There shall be no external leakage
through the damper frame and bearing under all conditions. The static
pressure drop across the damper should not exceed 40 Pa.
TS/M/S12/14 2602542S/AC
6.21 Each damper shall be equipped with electric on/off actuator with spring
return, auxiliary switch, 230Vac, single phase and 50Hz-power supply.
6.22 Actuators shall be sufficient capacity to operate the damper under all
conditions, and to guarantee tight closure against system pressure
encountered and blade seals. Actuators shall provide at least minimum
torque of 15Nm per m2 damper area.
6.23 Damper actuators shall be designed for repeated actuation without

overheating or damage, with no minimum period between actuation and
to have an external manual gear release to allow manual positioning of
the damper when the actuator is not powered.
6.24 Damper actuators shall be mounted outside of the duct where appropriate
with support plates that are completely outside of the insulation or
covering.
6.25 All performance data submitted shall be tested in accordance to Air

Movement and Control Association – AMCA 500. Local factory test
shall be conducted and witness by engineer to verify the leakage
7. Rectangular Air flow measuring stations Guide Specifications
7.1. General - Applications
a. Rectangular air flow measuring stations shall be provided for

accurate measurement of airflow in air duct systems as shown on
the tender drawings.
b. The signal provided by the measuring stations shall be able to be

read manually through a differential pressure-gauge or can be
relayed to any building management systems to be used to
control and balance air volumes.
c. Sound performance data shall be determined in a reverberation

room rated in accordance with ISO 3741 and ISO 5135.
7.2. Airflow sensors
a. Airflow sensors used for the measuring station shall be of the

multiple-point, true averaging type with constant signal
amplification of at least 2.5 times for accurate flow measurement.
Airflow sensors shall have a minimum of 24 (2 x 12) test points.
b. Accuracy of the flow measurement shall be better than 2.5% at a

velocity of 2.0 m/s or higher, even with irregular duct approach.
TS/M/S12/15 2602542S/AC
c. The airflow sensors shall have 100% repeatability on-site
measurements and arrangement of the test points shall be in
accordance to the “Tchebycheff rule” to ensure a true average
measurement signal.
d. There shall be only one(1) calibration point required for the full
range of airflow measurement and the accuracy shall be
maintained throughout the full airflow range.
7.3. Construction
a. Casing shall be air-tight construction made of galvanized steel

not less than 1.0mm thick and fitted with 30 mm wide flanges.
316 Stainless steel casing shall be constructed for the installation
at the 316 stainless steel exhaust duct.
b. The Flo-cross® sensor shall be constructed of high precision

extruded aluminum profiles.
c. The measuring port shall be made of twin polyurethane flexible

tubes, internal Ø4.00 mm and external Ø6.00 mm, red color for
high pressure and yellow/blue color for low pressure.
d. The flo-cross section shall be easily removable for cleaning and

checking.
8. Induction VAV Guide specifications
8.1. General
a) Induction VAV boxes shall be provided for areas as indicated on

the tender drawings. The throttling range shall be from 100% -
15% without the requirement for special diffusers or assisting
fans.
b) During cooling mode, induction VAV boxes induce room air and
mix it with the conditioned primary air to maintain a near
constant air volume to the room. This provides sufficient air
movement necessary to maintain occupant comfort even at low
turn-down ratio.
TS/M/S12/16 2602542S/AC
c) Where indicated in the tender drawings, the induction VAV box
shall be coupled with an acoustic and internally insulated
terminal box (multiple outlet spigots). The terminal box shall be
internally lined with 80 kg/cu.m rockwool laminated with
aluminum foil. The box shall have proper opening, with collar to
enable connection of flexible ducts. All single outlet and multiple
outlets shall be installed with VCDs (volume control dampers)
for airflow adjustment.
8.2. Induction VAV unit operation
a) Primary air (air from AHU) enters the unit at the inlet and the
unique design of the damper creates a negative pressure in the
entrance of the induction chamber. This causes air to be induced
through the induction ports into the induction chamber where it is
mixed with the primary air. The mixed airflow is equally
distributed by the multiple outlets to the diffusers.
b) During low thermal load condition, the specially designed air

damper would throttle to reduce the cold primary air to maintain
the room set point temperature. This action creates a “Venturi
Effect” which enables the Induction VAV to induce the warmer
room air and mixed with the conditioned primary air before
supplying to the room, thus providing sufficient air movement
necessary to maintain occupant comfort.
c) During high thermal load condition, the specially designed air

damper would open to increase the cold primary air to maintain
the room set point temperature. This action reduces the “Venturi
Effect” to the minimum and the Induction VAV boxes operate
similar to a conventional single duct VAV.
8.3. Induction performance curve
a) The induction VAV shall be suitable to operate with a minimum

inlet static pressure of 150 Pa.
b) The primary air curve for the induction VAV unit is a straight
line and it is the same as a conventional VAV. The rate of
induction is a function of induction is a function of the inlet static
pressure, the inlet velocity and the downstream pressure drop.
c) Under normal operating conditions, the minimum induction ratio

shall be between 1.15 at maximum flow and 1.7 at minimum
flow.
d) The use of induction VAV units makes it possible to turn down

the VAV to 15% without the loss of air movement.
TS/M/S12/17 2602542S/AC
8.4. Construction
a) Induction VAV casing shall be air-tight construction made of

galvanized steel not less than 1.0mm thick with only two
longitudinal lock form seams, circular inlet, single oval induction
opening and rectangular outlet or with multiple outlet adaptor as
indicated on the drawings.
b) Units shall be internally insulated and insulation material shall be

tested to BS476 part 6/7 Class ‘0’ fire regulation and shall be
erosion proof up to 20 m/s air velocity.
c) Insulation material shall not be of the loose fibre type. Fibre glass
insulation must not be used in the internal lining of the induction
VAV due to IAQ requirements.
d) Induction VAV boxes shall be fitted with specially designed air

volume control damper to regulate the primary airflow and
induce the room air.
e) The damper shaft shall made of Ø12 mm aluminum and rotating

in self-lubricating, permanently impregnated nylon bearings.
f) Inlet and outlet spigots shall be suitable for duct sleeve

connection suitable for DIN 24 145 or DIN 24 146 respectively.
g) Induction VAV shall be suitable for use with analogue electronic

or DDC controllers.
8.5. Acoustic Performance
a) Induction VAV boxes sound performance data shall be

determined in a reverberation room at an independent sound
laboratory according to ISO 3741 and ISO 5135 standards.
b) Performance of units shall be rated to ARI Standard 880-98 and

Addendum for Variable Air Volume Terminal Units.
c) The unit design and selection shall give adequate considerations

to ensure that noise levels within the space do not exceed NC35
with an inlet pressure of 150 Pa.
d) The maximum permissible sound power levels of the VAV boxes

shall be as follows, when operated at inlet static pressure of 150
Pa.
TS/M/S12/18 2602542S/AC
Sound Power Level 125 250 500 1k 2k 4k
Discharge 60 65 55 49 44 32
Radiated 63 58 54 43 39 31
8.6. Induction VAV with Pressure dependent Control
a) Induction VAV boxes designed for pressure dependent control

shall be provided as per the drawings and schedule or as
specified by S.O..
b) When the room temperature sensor sensed a change in space

temperature, it will transmit a reset signal to the controller and
regulate the volume damper to maintain the right amount of
primary air to the space to maintain room set point temperature.
c) Pressure dependent induction VAV shall come complete with a

DDC-VAV controller with built-in direct coupling actuation.
d) The DDC-VAV controller shall be open protocol, for easing

connection into the Building Aautomation and Monitoring
System (BAS) if required.
e) The integral damper actuator shall be minimum 6-Nm torque,

over the shaft mounting type. Stroke shall be fully adjustable
from 0-90 degree rotation with visible position indicator.
Actuator shall be equipped with manual position override. The
actuator stroke time shall be between 95 seconds to 3.6 minutes
for 90 degrees rotation at 50Hz operation.
8.7. Induction VAV Installation
a) Induction VAV boxes shall be adequately support by means of

anchor bolts, rods and angle-bars. The suspension system shall be
capable of withstanding the weight of the induction VAVs as
indicated on the drawings/specifications.
b) For ducted return systems, an egg-crate/return air grille shall be

provided for connection into the induction port by means of
flexible ducts fixed with volume control damper.
TS/M/S12/19 2602542S/AC
8.8. All VAV equipment shall be randomly tested in factory and on site.
8.9. Control and flow measurement
a) The airflow measuring station shall come complete with

differential pressure flow transducer.
b) The transducer shall be capable of measuring a differential

pressure as small as 1 Pa and shall be of the self-calibrating type.
Flow transducer that requires periodic re-calibration will not be
acceptable.
c) The transducer shall be capable of transmitting an input signal to

a DDC controller which is compatible to the Building
Automation System (BAS).
d) All control components shall be factory tested, assembled and

programmed prior to delivery to site.
e) LCD display shall be provided for easy direct reading o f

the flow values.
9. Thermally Powered VAV Diffusers
9.1. Thermally powered variable air volume modules shall be manufactured

by a reputable manufacturer specialized in VAV Diffuser, with no less
10 years’ experiences in supplying the equipment with good track
record. Each module shall be a complete VAV terminal and thermostat
self-contained in a nominal 595mm x 595mm diffuser. They shall be
thermally powered with one room thermostat/ actuator for cooling only
and one changeover thermostat/ actuator for heating & cooling
application. The thermal powered VAV diffuser shall be able connected
to remote thermostat for adjustment, monitor and control by BAS. All
wiring shall be internal wired. Pneumatics shall not be accepted.
9.2. The VAV diffuser shall have a thumbwheel and temperature scale to
adjust the cooling set point and another thumbwheel and temperature
scale for the heating set point. The adjustment shall be right above the
hinge down panel. Each set point shall be separately adjustable between
21°C and 26°C. Initial set point shall be factory set at 23°C.
9.3. The VAV Diffuser shall be able to maintain room temperature within+/-
0.83°C of set point.
TS/M/S12/20 2602542S/AC
9.4. All VAV diffusers shall have a dial and scale to adjust the minimum
flow between 10 cmh and 50% of maximum flow without tools.
Minimum flow shall be factory set between 5% to 15% depend on the
VAV diffusers size to achieve temperature without affecting air
movement of not less than 0.25 m/s. A fixed maximum flow stop shall
be factory set for the fully open air flow of the specified inlet size.
9.5. All VAV diffusers shall have a lever which will open the damper for
balancing without tools. The balancing lever shall be accessible from the
outside of the diffuser without folding down the appearance panel or
removing any part of the diffuser.
9.6. The manufacturer shall warrant that the VAV diffuser shall be free from
defects in materials and workmanship for a period of five years from
date of installation.
9.7. The VAV diffusers shall have a solid (no holes or slots) appearance
panel which unlatches and hinges down to allow hands to be free for
adjusting temperature set point or minimum flow. The appearance panel
shall have dual latch clips for a safety backup. Instructions for the
diffuser shall be on the inside of the panel. The complete control
mechanism shall be visible when the panel is hinged down.
9.8. The VAV diffusers shall have positive induction of secondary room air
over the room thermostat at all flows from fully closed to fully open. The
damper shall slide up and down on ball bearings.
9.9. Supply air to the VAV diffuser shall be constant temperature. Supply air
shall be no lower than 10°C and no higher than 17°C for a cooling only
HVAC system.
TS/M/S12/21 2602542S/AC
SECTION 13 – AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHU) AND FILTERS
1. General
1.1 This section covers the supply, delivery, installation, testing, commissioning
and fifteen (15) months free maintenance and warranty of the air han-
dling units (AHU) and the associated accessories.
1.2 The Air Handling Unit (AHU) shall be factory fabricated, tested and of
efficient design and construction. The AHU shall be of single zone central
station type. The AHU shall be draw-through type and operate a low noise
level. The AHU shall be supplied and installed with reference to the tender
drawings and details as described in the Schedule of Equipment Data. Each
AHU shall consist of but not be limited to the following components:
a) casing made of frameless modular sandwiched panels or prefabricated

modular sandwiched panels with rigid extruded aluminium frame
(complete with insulation);
b) fan assembly consist of fan wheel, fan motor, tapered-lock pulleys and
adequate number of belts for transmissions;
c) coil section with cooling coil of copper tubes and aluminium fins;
d) filter section with filter housing and air filters;
e) insulated grade 304 stainless steel drain pans;
f) removable panels and access door for servicing;
g) mixing chamber for filtered fresh air and return air; and
h) vibration-isolating bases, vibration isolator and other accessories

necessary for operation.
i) Section for UV-C Emitter light
1.3 The AHUs and accessories shall be of compact design and construction and
so selected to meet the space and height constraints.
1.4 Each AHU cooling coil shall be provided with it individual modulating flow
control valve irregardless sharing the same header
1.5 Each AHUs in specified areas as indicated in the tender drawings, spare
motors shall be installed ready for operation in an emergency.
1.6 Air Handling Units shall comply to BCA green mark requirement in kW/RT
and W/CMH.
TS/M/S13/1 2602542S/AC
2. AHU Casing
2.1 It shall be formed by standard set of sandwiched panels. All panels shall be
easily removed for the inspection, cleaning and servicing of internal
component such as fan assembly and cooling coil.
2.2 The sandwiched panel shall be double-sided skin type with insulating foam
being totally encased by high grade galvanised sheets of at least gauge 22 in
compliance with DIN standard or approved equal. No welding shall be
required during site assembly.
2.3 Besides the cooling coil and fan assembly, the air passage of the AHU shall be
free of support to ensure smooth air flow. All exposed sheet metal edges shall
be filed or concealed as much as possible.
2.4 The internal and external surfaces of the panels shall be smooth to reduce the
possibility of bacteria growth and dust accumulation. All joints and mating
surfaces shall be air tight and insulated throughout to prevent the forming of
cold bridge. The external surface of the panels shall be powder painting
to provide resistance to atmospheric ageing and ultra violet light
2.5 The panel shall provide high noise damping characteristic of 32 dB reduction.
The insulation of the panels shall be injected polyurethane with thermal
conductivity (k value) of no more than 0.037 W/(m/K). The minimal
thickness and density of the insulation shall be 25 mm and 60 kg/cu.m. The
minimum thickness and density of the insulation shall be 50mm and 60kg/m3
for outdoor (weatherproof) unit. The waterproof unit shall be completed with
a pitch roof.
3. Fan Assembly
3.1 General
The entire fan assembly shall be mounted on a steel structure with vibration
isolating base and housed within the casing of an AHU. The minimal
deflection for the spring of the vibration isolating base shall be 50 mm.
Mechanical power transmission from the motor to the fan shall by means of
tapered pulleys and V-belts of adequate size and number.
Two access panel or doors complete with approved gaskets & Nylon handles,
shall be provided for easy maintenance and servicing of the fan assembly &
coil. Each access door shall have a minimum of 900 mm (height) x 600 mm
(width). Compression type of door handles that made of Nylon PA6 material;
the screw is being concealed completely in the door handle without exposing
it to the outside. The handle will be able to hold the door to the door panel
firmly to prevent air leakage
TS/M/S13/2 2602542S/AC
3.2 Fans Section
a) Centrifugal Fan
The fan shall be of forward or backward curved (aerofoil) types as

specified on the Schedule of Equipment Technical Data. Fan wheels
and shafts shall be statically balanced prior to assembly and
dynamically balanced as an assembly in the factory at design speed
prior to delivery. Fan shafts shall be selected to operate well below
the first critical speed. Fan wheels and shafts shall be designed for
continuous operation at the maximal rated speed and motor capacity.
All fans shall be selected to operate at air flow and pressure efficiency
of not less than 80%.
All fan housings, shafts and impellers (wheels) shall be from the same
fan manufacturer. Any mix matching of fan components or
modifications by party other than the fan manufacturer shall be
prohibited.
Fan rods shall be made of high grade solid steel supported by self
aligned bearings with an expected life expectancy of 200,000 hours at
designed operating conditions.
Backward curve fans shall be selected to operate stably within the

range of 30% to 110% of the specified air flow rate. The impeller
shall be constructed by mild steel , weld & paint with epoxy paint.
Fans shall be selected to provide high static efficiency but low sound
level and power consumption at specified air flow rate. Selection of
fan shall be subject to S.O.'s approval. The fan performance shall
comply to BS 848, BS EN ISO 5801or DIN standard while the
certification of quality assurance shall comply to BS EN ISO 9001.
a) Plug Fan
Fans shall be high efficiency backward curve plug fans or centrifugal

fans. The plug fans shall be direct driven with external variable speed
drive. . Motor speeds shall not exceed 1500 rpm or exceed 50Hz as
noted on the Tender Drawings. All fans shall be selected to operate at
air flow and pressure efficiency of not less than 80%.
Where dual plug fans are specified, each fan shall provided with
separate variable speed drive Each fan shall be sized to deliver 100%
of rated flow rate unless specified otherwise in the Equipment
Schedule. The fan section shall be compartmented to enable
maintenance on one fan without the need to shut down the AHU.
TS/M/S13/3 2602542S/AC
The operating limit of each fan type is designed to meet the
requirement of Class I, II and III limit as defined in AMCA standard
99-2408. Bearing shall have minimum life L10 of 40,000 hours at
maximum rpm and power certified in accordance to Anti-Friction
Bearing Manufacturer Association (AFBMA) standards. The fans
shall be placed in the unit with an even inflow and outflow is
achieved. Distance on the suction side with minimum 0.5 x impeller
diameter from component or walls in axial direction. Fan in radial
flow configurations shall have a minimum 1.5 x impeller diameter or
flow intake device. Fan distance from the pressure side shall be free
running impellers minimum 1 x impeller diameter and other fans
outflow angle minimum α = 45° from components.
b) Axial Fans
Axial fans shall be supplied and fitted, generally as shown on the

Tender Drawings. The fans shall be selected with direct driven
motors giving non-loading characteristics. Motor speeds shall not
exceed 1500 rpm or 50Hz as noted on the Tender Drawings. Fans
shall be balanced and free from vibration and the blades of adjustable
type.
Casings shall be of standard length designed to protect both the motor

and impeller, continuously welded throughout and hot-dipped
galvanised after manufacture. Inspection doors to enable direction of
rotation to be checked shall be provided. Terminal boxes welded to
the casing shall be provided for electrical connection to fan motor.
Lubrication of bearing shall be possible from outside the fan casing.
Impellers shall be of die cast aluminum coated with epoxy and low
frictional losses.
Axial shall designed to meet the requirement of Class I, II and III

limit as defined in AMCA standard. Bearing shall have minimum life
L10 of 40,000 hours at designed operating conditions.
The fan performance shall comply to BS 848, BS EN ISO 5801. All

fans shall be selected to operate at air flow and pressure efficiency of
not less than 80%. Fans shall be selected to provide medium or high
static efficiency as specified but low sound level and power
consumption at specified air flow rate. Selection of fan shall be
subject to S.O.'s approval. The fan performance shall comply to BS
848, BS EN ISO 5801 or DIN standard while the certification of
quality assurance shall comply to BS EN ISO 9001.
TS/M/S13/4 2602542S/AC
c) Fan Array
For multiple fan assembly, AHU shall provide a redundant fan such
that should a single fan fails, the remaining fans will still deliver 100%
of the specified airflow. The complete fan assembly together with
motor and drive shall have an overall efficiency of minimum not less
than 85%.
Each fan shall be driven by a separate external variable speed drives.

spacing of fans shall follow fan manufacturer’s instruction to ensure
achievement of highest performance. Low leakage back draft damper
shall be provided for every fan to prevent recirculation through a non-
operational fan.
3.3 Fan Motors
The fan motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type with IP55
protection and class F insulation for copper windings. The motor shall be of 4
pole and wound for standard 3 phase electrical supply of 415 V and 50 Hz.
Motor frame shall be made of durable aluminium alloy in compliance with
IEC 60034 and BS EN 13195 for squirrel cage motors. Fan motor control by
VSD shall be designed to operate between 10 HZ to 50 HZ. All fan motor
shall comply to IEC 60034-30, energy efficiency shall be class premium IE3
and above with test standard comply to IEC 60034-2-1or IEEE 112.
3.4 Cooling Coils
The cooling coil for the AHU shall be suitable for chilled water application.
The coil shall be constructed of copper tubes with mechanically bonded
corrugated aluminium fins to enhance heat transfer. The coil frame shall be of
304 stainless steel formed to provide structural strength. Suitable provision
shall be made to facilitate adequate draining and cleaning through removable
plugs at both ends of each tubes. Each set of coil shall be fitted with
automatic air vent at the highest point.
The coil shall be fitted with supply and return headers (manifold), made of
copper pipes, to ensure even distribution of chilled water throughout the coil.
All copper to copper joints shall be brazed with copper brazing alloys or
silver solder. Soft solder is strictly prohibited.
Cooling coil for up to 30 % fresh air AHU shall be coated with approved
corrosion resistant material such as Hydrophilic coating.
TS/M/S13/5 2602542S/AC
The coil, designed with the following characteristics shall have a performance
rating no less than that of the AHRI standard.
No. Characteristics Specifications
1 Depth of coil min 6 rows,
2 Minimum working pressure 1400 kPa

3 Maximum air side face velocity 2.5m/sec
without moisture carry over
4 Fin spacing 10 fins per 25mm
5 Maximum pressure drop of water 30 kPA
at rated flow
6 Maximum air resistance across coil 20mm w.g.
4. Drain Pans & Drain Pipes
All drain pans shall be made of grade 304 stainless steel of gauge 18. The drain pans
shall be of double bottom type as per specifications with the primary drain pan being
installed right below the cooling coil while the secondary extends from coil to fan
section. The drain pans shall be of slope type. Drain pipes shall be of uPVC laid with
sufficient gradient, properly secured to the floor and terminated into the nearest floor
trap.
5. Mixing Chambers
The mixing chambers shall be of adequate sizes to ensure a thorough mixing of

filtered fresh air and return air. The construction, materials and finishing of mixing
chambers shall be identical to that of the AHU casing. The return air inlet shall be
fixed with volume control air dampers. The fresh air intake shall be controlled by
motorised dampers.
6. Installation
The installation of air handling units shall strictly adhere to the manufacturer's
recommendation. Each unit shall be installed on the "U" or "C" channel structure with
neoprene isolator on the loaded sides of the structure to reduce the transmission of
vibration. The AHU shall be installed to provide easy access to components such as
fan assembly, coils and air filters for servicing and maintenance.
TS/M/S13/6 2602542S/AC
7. Filters
7.1 All FCUs, DFCUs, AHUs and fresh air intakes and where indicated on the
tender drawings be provided with primary and secondary air filters of the type
as specified herein. HEPA filter shall be provided where indicated on the
tender drawings.
7.2 General
a) All AHUs and fresh air intakes and where indicated on the Drawings
shall be provided with air filters of the type as specified herein.
b) The Contractor shall provide (minimum) the following filter changes

including all pre-filters & secondary filters:
i) one complete set for initial start up for testing and

commissioning
ii) one complete set after testing and commissioning and before
handover to Employer
iii) one complete set halfway during the Defects Liability Period
iv) one complete set at the end of Defects Liability Period
The Contractor shall nevertheless replace any filters discovered to be

worn out or clogged during the course of the free servicing and
maintenance period. The filters replaced are not considered as part of
the above mentioned sets.
c) Sample of filters complete with frame shall be submitted to S.O. for

approval.
d) Filters shall generally be installed in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendation and to the satisfaction of the S.O.
Proper access for cleaning, media removal and inspection shall be
provided. Leakage for unfiltered air shall be prevented by air-tight
sealing of the filter holding frames or casings.
e) Air filters shall be of approved make and shall be manufactured to a

fully developed design currently in production and readily available.
f) Air filters shall comply with the requirements of ASHRAE 52-76 or

an approved equivalent standard. Reference shall be made to
ASHRAE 52-76 or to the relevant approved equivalent standard for
definition of terms employed.
TS/M/S13/7 2602542S/AC
g) Air filter tests shall be performed by an independent Testing
Laboratory. Test certificates shall be produced on request.
h) The filters shall be installed complete with all accessories and other
minor necessary for their satisfactory installation and performance
whether individually specified or not.
i) All joints shall be sealed with approved non hardening mastic or

neoprene gaskets sandwiches between flange faces.
j) Uniform air velocity through the media shall be achieved, if necessary

by means of air screens, baffles and other devices to approval.
k) Pressure gauges or manometers of approved design and with suitable

scale ranges shall be provided and installed to indicate filter
resistance.
7.3 Pleated Extended Surface Filter (Low Efficiency) - Primary Filter
a) All air filter shall be of disposable type. Washable filter media shall be
REJECTED. Nominal filter depth shall be 100 mm.
b) The filters, with non-woven synthetic fabric media, shall be listed by

the Underwriter Laboratory as Class 2.
c) Independent test report by approved laboratory to substantiate the

compliance with the following minimal requirements shall be
submitted to the Superintending Officer for approval prior to
installation. The following data serve as a General guide:
No. Specifications Values

1 Average atmospheric dust spot efficiency on ASHRAE 25% to 30%
52-76
2 Weight Arrestance on ASHRAE 52-76 Above 90%
3 Initial media resistance at 2.5m/sec approach air <7.1mm w.g. (70 Pa)
velocity
4 Final media resistance at 2.5m/sec approach air <25mm w.g. (245 Pa)
velocity
d) The media, in pleated form, shall be held in shape by fine grid of

corrosion resistant wire to maximize dust collection capacity and to
avoid the possibility of media oscillation and media being pulled away
by air flow.
TS/M/S13/8 2602542S/AC
e) The pleated filter media shall be enclosed by a cartridge made of
heavy duty, rigid and high wet strength beverage board. The two
largest surfaces of the cartridge shall be die-cut into mating openings
with diagonal supports to achieve more than 90% of unobstructed
area for air now. The filter media shall be perfectly bonded to the
internal periphery of the cartridge to prevent air from bypassing the
media.
f) Filter media shall be pleated to produce an effective area of 7 m2

of media per 1 m2 of filter face area.
7.4 Pleated Extended Surface Filter (High Efficiency) - Secondary Filter
a) All air filter shall be of disposable type. Washable filter media shall be
REJECTED. Nominal filter depth shall be no less than 300 mm.
b) The filters, with micro fine glass fibre laminated by synthetic fabric
media, shall be listed by the Underwriter Laboratory as Class 2.

installation. The following data serve as a general guide:

1 Average atmospheric dust spot efficiency on ASHRAE 90% - 95%
52-76
3 Initial media resistance at 2.5m/sec approach air <10.2mm w.g.
velocity (100 Pa)
4 Final media resistance at 2.5m/sec approach air <25mm w.g.
velocity (245 Pa)

avoid the possibility of media oscillation and media being pulled away
by air flow.

heavy duty and corrosion resistant materials. The two largest surfaces
of the cartridge shall be die-cut into mating openings with diagonal
supports to achieve more than 90% of unobstructed area for air flow
The filter media shall be perfectly bonded to the internal periphery of
the cartridge to prevent air from bypassing the media.
f) Filter media shall be pleated to produce an effective area of 10m² of

media per 1m² of filter face area.
TS/M/S13/9 2602542S/AC
8. Filter Construction
8.1 Media Support Grid
The media be welded wire mesh with 93% free area. The media shall be
supported by to maintain the designed space for each pleat to maximize dust
collection capacity and to avoid the possibility of media oscillation and media
being pulled away.
8.2 Enclosing Frame
The enclosing frame shall be made of heavy duty, rigid an high wet strength
beverage board. The frame, with two of its largest surfaces being die-cut into
mating openings with diagonal supports, shall be a square box of about 100
mm depth capable of totally encasing the filter media. The filter media shall be
perfectly bonded to the internal periphery of the frame to prevent air leak.
8.3 Filter Media
Filter media shall be non-woven synthetic fabric being pleated into no less
than 11 pleats per linear foot and an effective area of 7 sq.ft per 1 sq.ft of
filter face area.
8.4 Filter Housing
All filter housings shall be of rear access or side access. Filter housings shall
be factory fabricated and assembled by the air filter manufacturer. All filter
housing shall be externally insulated to prevent condensation.
8.5 Rear Access Filter Housings
The rear access filter housing shall be in modular form with each module
designed to accommodate a standard size pleated filter. Constructed with
minimal gauge 16 galvanissed steel, each module shall be equipped with
gaskets and spring fasteners to form perfect seal against air leak. All
infiltration gaps formed by modules are to be sealed perfectly with gasket.
8.6 Side Access Filter Housing
Side access filter housings shall be accessible through filter slots at both sides
of an AHU. The slots shall be sealed by gasketted, gauge 16 access door with
latches. Inside the slot, standard sized, 100 mm deep pleated filters shall be
held by extruded aluminium track free of rivets or self-tapping screws which
tend to obstruct the sliding of filters
TS/M/S13/10 2602542S/AC
9. Air Duct Smoke Detectors (Probe Units)
9.1 All air handling units (AHUs) shall be fitted with smoke detectors (probe
units) of approved design and manufacture in the return-air stream
immediately adjacent to the air handling unit.
9.2 The smoke detectors (i.e. probe units) shall be provided for monitoring of the
return air ducts of the AHUs. In the event of alarm from the probe unit, the
related air conditioning equipment (AHU) shall 'shut down' automatically.
Provisions in the form of relays, terminal strips, etc. shall be provided for
each smoke detector to enable each detector to send a signal to the fire alarm
in the event of an emergency condition. The final connection to the external
interfacing device (supplied and installed by others) shall be by the
Contractor.
9.3 The unit shall allow the application of standard smoke detectors for
monitoring of air streams inside air-conditioning and ventilation ducts
between 1 m/s and 20 m/s.
9.4 The duct smoke detector shall have adjustable sensitivity setting and be
completed with integral power supply unit suitable for 230V, 50 Hz operation
and relay contacts for alarm and trouble condition monitoring and control.
9.5 All duct smoke detectors shall be furnished with air sampling tubes extending
through the width of the air duct.
9.6 The unit shall deviate a small amount of air from regular to high velocity air
conditioning and/or ventilation ducts into a special chamber, which contains a
smoke detector.
9.7 The unit shall not have to be adjusted to air streams between 1 m/s and 20
m/s.
9.8 The unit shall accommodate a photo-electric light scattering detector,

matching with the built-in base.
9.9 The unit shall be suitable for electric detector testing on site.
9.10 The unit shall be accessible for inspection without opening the unit.
9.11 The unit shall be designed so that all service work can be carried out without
affecting the duct system.
9.12 The unit shall be equipped with a circuit monitoring the presence of the
smoke detector head.
TS/M/S13/11 2602542S/AC
9.13 The alarm indicator shall be clearly visible from outside.
9.14 The housing shall be made of approved plastic material, shockproof,

vibration-proof and listed.
9.15 The housing of the unit shall contain 4 openings for compression cable
glands. If unused, these openings shall be covered with plugs.
9.16 The air duct detector assembly and its cover shall be joined via a rubber lip to
prevent unwanted passage of air and/or smoke.
9.17 The unit shall connect directly into any standard detector line from the
manufacturer's control unit using four wires for Class "A" wiring.
9.18 The unit shall be equipped with a terminal block with screw less terminals
accepting wires between 0.25 mm2 and 1.5 mm2 (SWG 23 and 15) and
equipped with built-in strain limits.
9.19 The unit shall allow to drive an additional alarm indicator lamp without
additional wiring from the control unit.
9.20 The unit shall be designed for complete sealing of the duct penetrations
necessary for the sampling tubes and for fastening the air duct detector
assembly.
9.21 The unit shall be supplied with a template for duct penetrations and complete
mounting, connection and maintenance guidelines.
9.22 The unit shall be designed so that there is a complete separation between
detection chamber and the compartment containing the affiliated electronics.
9.23 The unit shall be supplied with the appropriate sampling tubes.
9.24 The electronics compartment of the air duct detector assembly shall provide
ample room for additional circuitry.
9.25 Specifications :
a) Admissible flow speed : 1 to 20 m/s
b) Approval : UL/FF/EN54
c) Ambient temperature : -10 to +60°C
d) Relative humidity : max. 93% RH continuous

without condensation
TS/M/S13/12 2602542S/AC
10. Variable Speed Drive AHU
All AHU shall be provided with variable speed drive shall be provided with a VSD
bypass controller and starters. This is to allow the AHUs to be operated in a constant
speed mode should the VSD be faulty or under maintenance. The AHU motor shall
be able to drive at minimum 10Hz when using VSD.
11. Energy efficient
The selected AHU performance shall meet to the required w/CMH as specified in
the green mark requirement by BCA.
TS/M/S13/13 2602542S/AC
SECTION 14 - FAN COIL UNITS (FCUs)
1. General
and fifteen (15) months free maintenance and warranty for all fan coil units
and the associated accessories.
1.2 For FCUs in specified areas as indicated in the Drawings, spare motors shall
be provided/installed for each FCU.
1.3 Fan Coil Units shall comply to BCA green mark requirement in kW/RT and
W/CMH.
1.4 The fan coil units shall meet the energy efficiency standard requirements of
SS CP 530 : Code of practice for energy efficiency standard for building
services and equipment.
2. Construction
2.1 The Sub-Contractor shall supply and install where shown on the Tender
Drawings fan coil units of an approved type and each complete with fans,
three speed fan selector switch, motor, drive, cooling coil, drain pan, outside
air damper assembly, filters, vibration isolators, controls and accessories. The
units shall be suitable for continuous operation and shall be constructed as
below.
a) The fan shall be mounted on an 18 gauge galvanised steel fan deck

with the assembly easily removable from the basic unit. Fan shall be of
double width, double inlet, forwardly curved centrifugal type of
aluminium or approved materials. Motors shall be of split capacitor
type high efficiency premium (IE3 and above) motor or electronically
commutated brushless motor, whichever is of highest efficiency,
suitable for single phase power supply complete with sleeve bearings
with lubrication points, resilient mountings and capable of 3 speed
operation. Motors shall comply to IEC 60034-30, and energy test
standard comply to IEC 60034-2-1or IEEE 112.
b) The cabinet shall consist of a base casing fabricated with double sided
skin type with insulation being totally encased by high grade
galvanized sheets with removable panels for servicing. The drain pan
shall be insulated with an asphalt base filler compound. A drain pipe
with U-trap shall be connected from this pan to the nearest floor trap.
The drain pipe shall be insulated with minimum 25 mm thick closed
cell insulation. Secondary drain pan complete with insulation shall be
provided for Fan coils located above ceiling. The drain pipe to
individual Fan coil shall has internal diameter of minimum 20 mm.
TS/M/S14/1 2602542S/AC
c) The cooling coil shall be minimum 3 rows and maximum 5 fins per
centimetre and removable cartridge type. The cooling coil shall be
staggered tube finned coil of sizes suitable for various duties. Fin shall
be aluminium or copper continuous plate and shall be bounded to the
tubes by expansion to ensure maximum contact with the tube for
efficient heat transfer. Fins may also be of the type fastened to the
tubes by winding the fin material under tension onto the tubes. Fin
design shall be suitable for operation up to 2.5 m/s face velocity
without moisture carryover and fins shall have fin collars to cover the
entire tube surface and without sharp edges or breaks permitting
accumulation of foreign matter.
At a velocity of 2.8 m/s the bypass factor should not exceed 0.2.
Tubes shall be minimum 12.5 mm (1/2") O.D. seamless copper spaced
in a staggered pattern brazed into headers fabricated from heavy wall
copper tubing having generously sized inlet and outlet standard male
pipe thread connections.
All joints between coil, tubes and headers shall be brazed with silver
alloy solder. Coil shall be designed for up to 10.34 bar (150 psi) water
working pressure and completed coils shall be tested with 17.24 bar
(250 psi) air pressure under water.
The velocity of air through the coil shall not exceed 2.8 m/s. The
water pressure drop through the coils shall not exceed 5 metres of
water.
2.2 The Sub-Contractor shall provide and install all the control and power wiring
and an on-off switch to a point adjacent to each unit. Each fan coil unit shall
be provided with a 2-way modulating valve, controlled by temperature
sensors and controller. The fan coil unit on/off and temperature control shall
be controlled by thermostat and the Building Automation System. All ducted
fan coil unit shall also be controlled by individual DDC.
2.3 If direct current brushless motor (DCBL) is being used, it shall comply to the
followings:
a) Fan coil units shall be equipped with fans driven by direct current
brush-less (DCBL) motor with variable air volume (VAV) control,
or unless specified otherwise elsewhere in the Specifications and
Drawings,
b) The DCBL motor shall be single phase suitable for 230VAC

supply complete with associates with converter and driver forming
the complete DCBL fan motor assembly.
c) The DCBL fan motor is controlled by Pulse Width Modulation

(PWM) for variable speed operation.
TS/M/S14/2 2602542S/AC
d) The motor commutation electronics shall incorporate EMC and
mains supply filters complying with EN 61000-6-2.
e) The motor shall consist with hermetic aluminum alloy casing, 8-

pole coil, permanent magnet rotor, CR-plating polishing shaft
(S45C medium carbon steel), and permanently lubricated ball
bearing.
f) The motor has grade E class insulation; in additions of built-in

thermal cut-out, current overload and status monitored by the
main control board.
g) Default air volume setting shall be step-less at ranges of 30% to

100% against nominal airflow.
h) The complete fan/motor assembly shall be dynamically balanced

to G6.3 or better
2.4 It shall be the Sub-Contractor's responsibility to ensure that the equipment

chosen shall not induce a noise level greater than NC 30 in the rooms. If
necessary, acoustic treatment shall be provided at no additional cost.
2.5 Air Filters
The material for filters shall be provided as for the air handling units. Filters
shall be as specified in the relevant section. No washable filter is allowed.
2.6 Thermostat
a) The thermostat shall be provided for each fan coil unit and be wall
mounted, intelligent, liquid crystal display (LCD) thermostat shall
be provided for control of the fan coil unit. The thermostat shall be
of BACnet communication and BTL certified
b) BACnet thermostat shall be able to provide the function of power

ON/OFF, room temperature setting, COOLING/FAN operating
mode, AUTO/FAN SPEED SELECT mode, timer setting ON/OFF,
occupancy mode and sleep mode. It shall have multiple input for the
connection of external sensors. The thermostat LCD shall display
room temperature, set point temperature, status of fan mode and
speed, failure message for trouble-shooting and maintenance purpose.
TS/M/S14/3 2602542S/AC
SECTION 15– AIR FILTERS
1. General
1.1 This section covers the supply, delivery, installation, testing,

commissioning and fifteen (15) months free maintenance and warranty
of the air filters for all air handling units (AHU), Fan coil units (FCU,
DFCU), Fans and the associated accessories.
2. Filters
2.1 All FCUs, DFCUs, AHUs and fresh air intakes and where indicated on
the tender drawings be provided with primary and secondary air filters
of the type as specified herein. HEPA filter shall be provided where
indicated on the tender drawings.
2.2 General
a) All AHUs and fresh air intakes and where indicated on the
Drawings shall be provided with air filters of the type as
specified herein.
b) The Contractor shall provide (minimum) the following filter

changes including all pre-filters & secondary filters:
· one complete set for initial start up for testing and

commissioning
· one complete set after testing and commissioning and

before handover to Employer
· one complete set halfway during the Defects Liability

Period
· one complete set at the end of Defects Liability Period
The Contractor shall nevertheless replace any filters discovered

to be worn out or clogged during the course of the free
servicing and maintenance period. The filters replaced are not
considered as part of the above mentioned sets.
c) Sample of filters complete with frame shall be submitted to

S.O. for approval.
TS/M/S15/1 2602542S/AC
manufacturer's recommendation and to the satisfaction of the
S.O. Proper access for cleaning, media removal and inspection
shall be provided. Leakage for unfiltered air shall be prevented
by air-tight sealing of the filter holding frames or casings.
e) Air filters shall be of approved make and shall be manufactured

to a fully developed design currently in production and readily
available.
f) Air filters shall comply with the requirements of ASHRAE 52-

76 or an approved equivalent standard. Reference shall be made
to ASHRAE 52-76 or to the relevant approved equivalent
standard for definition of terms employed.

h) The filters shall be installed complete with all accessories and

other minor necessary for their satisfactory installation and
performance whether individually specified or not.
i) All joints shall be sealed with approved non hardening mastic

or neoprene gaskets sandwiches between flange faces.
j) Uniform air velocity through the media shall be achieved, if

necessary by means of air screens, baffles and other devices to
approval.
k) Pressure gauges or manometers of approved design and with

suitable scale ranges shall be provided and installed to indicate
filter resistance.
a) All air filter shall be of disposable type. Washable filter media

shall be REJECTED. Nominal filter depth shall be 100 mm.
b) The filters, with non-woven synthetic fabric media, shall be

listed by the Underwriter Laboratory as Class 2.
TS/M/S15/2 2602542S/AC
c) Independent test report by approved laboratory to substantiate
the compliance with the following minimal requirements shall
be submitted to the Superintending Officer for approval prior to

1 Average atmospheric dust spot efficiency on 25% to 30%
ASHRAE 52-76
3 Initial media resistance at 2.5m/sec approach air <7.1mm w.g. (70

velocity Pa)

velocity (245 Pa)
d) The media, in pleated form, shall be held in shape by fine grid

of corrosion resistant wire to maximize dust collection capacity
and to avoid the possibility of media oscillation and media
being pulled away by air flow.
e) The pleated filter media shall be enclosed by a cartridge made

of heavy duty, rigid and high wet strength beverage board. The
two largest surfaces of the cartridge shall be die-cut into mating
openings with diagonal supports to achieve more than 90% of
unobstructed area for air now. The filter media shall be
perfectly bonded to the internal periphery of the cartridge to
prevent air from bypassing the media.
f) Filter media shall be pleated to produce an effective area of 7

m2 of media per 1 m2 of filter face area.

shall be REJECTED. Nominal filter depth shall be no less than
300 mm.
b) The filters, with micro fine glass fibre laminated by synthetic

fabric media, shall be listed by the Underwriter Laboratory as
Class 2.
TS/M/S15/3 2602542S/AC

1 Average atmospheric dust spot efficiency on 90% - 95%
ASHRAE 52-76
velocity (100 Pa)
velocity (245 Pa)
d) The media, in pleated form, shall be held in shape by fine grid

e) The pleated filter media shall be enclosed by a cartridge made

of heavy duty and corrosion resistant materials. The two largest
surfaces of the cartridge shall be die-cut into mating openings
with diagonal supports to achieve more Man 90% of
unobstructed area for air flow The filter media shall be
f) Filter media shall be pleated to produce an effective area of

10m² of media per 1m² of filter face area.
2.5 Pleated Extended Surface Carbon Filter
g) All air filter shall be of disposable type. Nominal filter depth

shall be 100 mm.
h) The filters, Polyester media with fine granular activated carbon,

shall be listed by the Underwriter Laboratory as Class 2.
TS/M/S15/4 2602542S/AC
i) Independent test report by approved laboratory to substantiate

ASHRAE 52.2
2 Weight Arrestance on ASHRAE 52.2 Above 95%
3 Initial media resistance at 2.5m/sec approach air <12mm

velocity w.g.(120Pa)

velocity (250 Pa)
j) The media, in pleated form, shall be held in shape by fine grid

k) The pleated filter media shall be enclosed by a cartridge made

of heavy duty, rigid and high wet strength beverage board. The
two largest surfaces of the cartridge shall be die-cut into mating
unobstructed area for air now. The filter media shall be
l) Filter media shall be pleated to produce an effective area of 7

m2 of media per 1 m2 of filter face area.
g) Filter shall be chemically impregnated carbons for better

control both acid and bases gases such as H2S, SO2, NOx,
HCI, HF, Methyl Mercaptan, active sulphur composites,
ammonia, formaldehyde and highly volatile radioactive organic
iodides in Air and CO2.
h) Carbon filters shall have a CTC activity of above 60% (CCI4)

measured by ASTM standard test method D3467-88
TS/M/S15/5 2602542S/AC
The media be welded wire mesh with 93% free area. The media shall
be supported by to maintain the designed space for each pleat to
maximize dust collection capacity and to avoid the possibility of media
oscillation and media being pulled away.
3.2 Enclosing Frame
The enclosing frame shall be made of heavy duty, rigid an high wet
strength beverage board. The frame, with two of its largest surfaces
being die-cut into mating openings with diagonal supports, shall be a
square box of about 100 mm depth capable of totally encasing the filter
media. The filter media shall be perfectly bonded to the internal
periphery of the frame to prevent air leak.
3.3 Filter Media
Filter media shall be non-woven synthetic fabric being pleated into no

less than 11 pleats per linear foot and an effective area of 7 sq.ft per 1
sq.ft of filter face area.
3.4 Filter Housing
All filter housings shall be of rear access or side access. Filter housings
shall be factory fabricated and assembled by the air filter manufacturer.
All filter housing shall be externally insulated to prevent condensation.
The rear access filter housing shall be in modular form with each
module designed to accommodate a standard size pleated filter.
Constructed with minimal gauge 16 galvanissed steel, each module
shall be equipped with gaskets and spring fasteners to form perfect seal
against air leak. All infiltration gaps formed by modules are to be
sealed perfectly with gasket.
Side access filter housings shall be accessible through filter slots at

both sides of an AHU. The slots shall be sealed by gasketted, gauge 16
access door with latches. Inside the slot, standard sized, 100 mm deep
pleated filters shall be held by extruded aluminium track free of rivets
or self-tapping screws which tend to obstruct the sliding of filters
TS/M/S15/6 2602542S/AC
4. HEPA Filters
4.1 Filters shall be of the high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) type. The
components shall include particle board cell sides, water-proofed fire-
retardant glass fibre media; aluminum separators for 100% RH,
neoprene rubber bond. The media shall have a minimum thickness of
0.381 mm ± 0.07 mm, and a minimum tensile strength of 0.54 kg per
cm. Each filter cell shall withstand a pressure drop of 250 mm WG.
4.2 Each filter shall be rated for a maximum pressure drop of 25.4 mm
WG clean resistance.
4.3 Each filter shall be individually scan tested and certified to have an
efficiency of not least than 99.999 percent when tested with 0.3 micron
dioctyl phthlate (DOP) particles. Filter style code and performance
shall be printed on each filter cell.
4.4 Extreme care must be exercised at all times in the delivery, handling
and installation of the HEPA filters. Any filter damaged during the
installation shall be replaced.
4.5 The HEPA filters fitted on the ductwork shall be provided with a
protective bag which allows for easy and safe removal after the filters
have been used up.
5. Filter Housing for HEPA Filters
5.1 When a bank of HEPA filters are used and side access is required,
proprietary make side access housing for HEPA filters shall be used.
Housing shall be of the same manufacture as the filters being used.
5.2 The side access filter housings shall be package units, factory sealed
against leakage. The housings with the HEPA filters in place shall be
guaranteed to meet the specified air cleaning efficiency as assembled
units. The housings shall be constructed of 16 gauge galvanised steel
with heavy duty corner posts, 100 mm wide inside flanges, and vertical
supports spaced not more than every 600 mm of filter width. The
flanges shall be turned in to provide a flush exterior and to facilitate
attachment to adjacent equipment and/or ductwork. All non-welded
seams shall be hand caulked with Silicone rubber adhesive. The
housings shall be fabricates structurally to withstand up to 250 mm
WG utilising perimeter gasketing of neoprene rubber, permitting
servicing of the filters without the need for additional access doors in
the ductwork. Housings shall be insulated internally with 25 mm thick,
48 Kg/cu cm density, neoprene coated fibreglass.
TS/M/S15/7 2602542S/AC
5.3 Provision shall be made in the housing design for each filter cell to be
sealed around its entire periphery, eliminating the need for gaskets
between the adjacent filters. Each filter shall have single box flanges or
battens at the top and bottom of the air entering face for installation in
the mounting track. No gaskets shall be required on the filters. The 19
mm x 14 mm filter sealing gaskets shall be made of resilient close-call
neoprene rubber extruded with a hollow core to minimum gasket 'set',
and retainer, which is an integral part of the housing.
5.4 Sealing pressure shall be applied through level arms which activate
toggle and cam locking mechanisms applying 37 Kg of sealing
pressure per linear metre of filter periphery. The door design is to be
such that it cannot be closed unless the level arms are properly
positioned. The locking mechanisms shall not be affected by vibration.
6. Activated Carbon Filters
a) The filters shall be installed downstream of the primary and secondary.
b) The filter housing shall be a side access filtration system especially

designed for easy maintenance access. The housing shall be made of
minimum 16 gauge galvanised steel, welded and designed to withstand
up to 1250 Pascal positive or negative static pressure.
c) The activated carbon shall be contained in individually removable,

refillable trays fabricated of epoxy coated steel. The trays shall be held
in V-arrangement by metal channel tracks and secured and sealed by a
easily removable grid assembly. Trays shall be furnished with gasket to
provide an internal air seal.
d) The activated carbon media shall conform to the following test

specification:
i) Moisture content 3.0% maximum by ASTM 2867
ii) Carbon Tetrachloride activity rating 50% minimum by MIL-C-17605B
iii) Density 0.5gm/cc minimum by ASTM d-2854-70
iv) Hardness 95 minimum by MIL-C-17605B
v) Ash 14.0% maximum by ASTM-D-2866-70
TS/M/S15/8 2602542S/AC
vi) Screen Analysis % by ASTM-D-2862-70 Tyler Standard Screen
0 - 14 on 6 Mesh
0 - 100 on 8 Mesh
0 - 10 on 10 Mesh
0 - 2 on 14 Mesh
0 - 1 on pan
7. Bag-in Bag-out HEPA (BIBO) Filter
a) BIBO Filter should be provided at the mechanical exhaust of the

scrubber system
b) It shall be a fully welded system, complete with a DIN 1946 part 4 seal
test groove to test the seating of the HEPA filter. The seal test groove
to be made from aluminium.
c) The housing shall be made of mild steel and epoxy finished. The
housing should be suitable for decontamination in accordance with BS
4247 “surface materials for use in radioactive areas and research
establishments" or other equivalent standards. The decontamination
ports shall be installed on each containment filter system upstream and
downstream of the filters. All internal parts that come into contact with
the process air shall be epoxy coated, stainless steel or have an
electrophoretic coating. The epoxy paint finish shall be resistant to
formaldehyde.
d) The corners of the cam bars that come into contact with the epoxy
paint finish shall have a rubber heat shrink on them to eliminate
chipping of the internal paint-work and give even sealing socket
compression.
e) All change-out operations shall be within the bag so there is a barrier

between the worker and filter at all time.
8. Filter Housing for BIBO Filter
f) The filter housing steel shall be complete with cam locking mechanism
that prevents access door(s) from being closed unless the filters are
sealed. Other safety features may be acceptable subject to S.O’s
approval. Drilling or site modification of the filter housing is not
allowed on site to prevent damages to the units.
b) All connecting flanges shall be pre-drilled ready for installation into

ductwork systems.
TS/M/S15/9 2602542S/AC
c) All units shall be pressure tested prior to dispatch. The housing shall be
tested for filter fit, operation of the filter clamping mechanism, seal
alignment and leak tightness before dispatch from factory. The
pressure test maximum allowable leakage shall not be exceeding 0.5”
wg in ten minutes.
d) The filter unit shall be complete with insulation to prevent

condensation on the external of the filter unit. The process air should
be assumed to be 23oC + 2oC.
9. Specification for the Removal of Grease and Odour from Kitchen Exhaust Air
9.1. UV-C Grease/Odour Removal system
The stainless steel kitchen exhaust hood shall be fitted with a 1st stage
stainless steel grease filters to trap coarse grease particles. The grease
filters shall be installed with overlap edges.
UV-C Filtration system shall be installed ideally immediately behind

the grease filters in the hood to provide secondary grease destruction
and odour removal. Grease and odour destruction is achieved by
passing the exhaust air through the UV-C lamp assembly located
behind the grease filter in the hood. UV-C light energy breaks down
and destroys residual grease and odours by a combination of oxidation
and photolysis.
If for other reasons, the UV-C filtration system is not feasible to be

installed in the hoods, the tenant shall propose alternative location
subject to the approval of the landlord.
The UV-C filtration shall be factory tested and assembled in as

stainless steel housing complete with controls such as system "ON",
lamp fault indicator, hour run counter, interlock with exhaust fan and a
UV-C Morn tor which shall be linked to the building management
system, etc.
A general guide of an assembly of 4 tubes of 39 wits (865 mm length)

and 4 tubes of 79 watts (1630 mm length) shall handle an approximate
l000 cmh and 2000 cmh of exhaust air respectively.
The manufacturer for the above shall have at least 5 years of

experience in the manufacturing and installation of UV-C filtration
system for commercial kitchen. The products shall be UL listed and
approved as component for commercial kitchen hood or by any
international recognized body or commercial kitchen installation
TS/M/S15/10 2602542S/AC
9.2. Activated Carbon filters
Activated carbon filter shall be installed to absorb any smoke odours

that remain and the ozone released during the photolysis & oxidation
process Activated carbon absorbs the ozone and turns it into oxygen
thus ensuring that the exhaust air is discharged to the atmosphere as
cleaned and odourless.
The activated carbon filers shall be high performance type with initial
toluene efficiency of 95% or greater under laboratory test conditions of
2.5 m/s air velocity, 50% relative humidity and 20-25°C air
temperature. Carbon filter shall have a minimum 40ft2 media in a 610
mm (H) x 610 mm (W) x 95 mm (D) filter. The filter frame shall be
galvanized steel. The filter shall be rated at 2.5 m/s air velocity with
pressure drop not exceeding 125 Pa.
Carbon filters shall complete with proprietary made steel frame

housing be installed in the exhaust duct. The housing shall be multiple
V-bank type with side access to provide extended surface area and
shall be properly sealed to ensure no air bypass or leakage.
9.3. UV-C Monitor
The 1 amps should be kept dean and free of dust at all times. If dust
accumulates on the lamp it will absorb the UV-C and convert it to heat,
therefore lowering the effectiveness of the UV-Clamp.
TS/M/S15/11 2602542S/AC
10 Fan Filter Unit for Cleanroom
Fan filter unit shall be UL listed and EN 61800-5-1; CE marked. Housing shall
be of walkable housing type, casing construction shall be of powder-coated
from1.2 mm thick steel sheet steel, 1.6mm thick aluminum or stainless with
vibration-isolated anchoring, plug fan with one-sided suction and optimized
for use without spiral housing. Fan filter unit shall completed with HEPA filter
and frame. Internal baffling plates and anodized aluminum diffuser panel shall
be provide to provide uniform air speed across the filter face, ensuring laminar
airflow.
Fan unit shall be low energy consumption, quiet operation and ease of
maintenance Motor shall be built-in of Class F insulation, IP44, with variable
speed controller to control the blower speed. Motor and controller shall be of
single phase AC power input 230 Volts at 50 Hz or 415 volts at 50Hz without
any external transforming devices for stepping down the voltages. A junction
box is provided on the top of unit for cable interface. The blower shall be of
radial impeller with backward curved blades made of aluminum mounted
directly to the rotor of the built-in motor, statically and dynamically balanced
as per DIN ISO 1940, class G2.5.The bearing life time shall not be less than
75,000hours. Fan Filter Unit shall have LED indication to show green in
operation and fault in orange indication for the motor controller. Contact shall
be provided for BAS monitoring and control.
Where Electronic Communicated Motor (EC-Motor) is used with controller, it

shall be Electronically commutated including power-factor controller for
sinus-shaped main input as per EN 61000-3-2 and Modbus RS485 or BACnet
interface. The same controller is capable of accepting single phase AC power
input ranging from 230 Volts at 50Hz or 415volts at 50 Hz without any
external transforming devices. Panel with control and power electronics
integrated in the fan filter unit housing. Interface distributor: Modbus RS485
or BACnet transceiver in fan filter unit, built-in design, with green
operation/fault indication for the motor controller, with yellow communication
bus operation indication for the fan filter unit. A junction box is provided on
the top of unit for the cable interface
Fan Filter Unit shall deliver and provides an average airflow velocity of 0.35
m/sec to 0.45 m/sec and airflow of 1088 m³/hr under filter load at 100%
medium setting for 1200 mm x 600 mm fan filter unit and airflow of 650
m³/hr for size of 600 mm x 600 mm fan filter unit. Total static pressure
delivered shall not be less than 280Pa. Noise level shall not exceed 45dBA
measure 1m away from the fan filter unit.
HEPA filter shall be of 125mm thick and is to be 99.99% efficient on removal

of particles 0.3 microns and larger by DOP (dioctyl phthalate) test. Filter
module must be removed from below the ceiling for HEPA filter replacement.
All HEPA filter shall be on site tested for any leakage.
TS/M/S15/12 2602542S/AC
SECTION 16 - CONTROLS
1. General
1.1 The Contractor shall include for all necessary electric / electronic
automatic controls for the efficient, safe and economical operation of
the complete air conditioning and mechanical ventilation systems. The
scope shall include all plants, system components and accessories. The
control equipment shall include the following:
a) Main air conditioning control panel, subsidiary control panels,

isolators, remote push buttons, selector switches, indicator
lights, alarm bells and buzzers, timers, relays, contactors, etc.
b) All necessary temperature controllers, control valves, sensors,

thermostats, relays, differential pressure switches, etc.
c) The isolators for all electrical items of equipment supplied and

installed by the Contractor.
d) All control wiring and conduits between the main A/C control
panel, subsidiary control panels, and all other items of
equipment supplied by the Contractor including all necessary
transformers, power regulators, etc.
e) All complete electrical/electronic control installation including

testing and calibration under operating conditions. Testing,
calibration and commissioning shall be performed by the
manufacturer's representative or authorised distributor of the
automatic controls.
f) All necessary transformers, power regulators, rectifiers,

distribution boards and resistors shall be provided by the
Contractor to suit the control system.
g) If single phase is tapped from 3 phase power supply, electrical

load shall be arranged to distribute equally for all phases.
1.2 The operation of all automatic control equipment and components shall
be so arranged that on power failure and/or partial or complete shut
down during routine maintenance or repair, all system and components
shall be "fail-safe". All automatic dampers and valves shall be so
arranged to return to their normal operating positions on the
resumption of power supply.
TS/M/S16/1 2602542S/AC
1.3 The Contractor shall be required to draw up the detailed control
diagrams to suit the particular control manufacturer's equipment which
conform to the Specifications, and submit copies of the shop drawings
for approval before commencing installation of controls. The drawings
shall show every item of control equipment offered, all conduit sizes,
etc.
1.4 The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that design conditions as

mentioned in the Specifications be complied with.
1.5 The automatic controls shall include the following works:
a) Starting/Stopping and protection of the central air conditioning

plant.
b) Controls of refrigeration machines.
c) Interlocks and alarms.
d) Supervisory control panel.
e) Starting/stopping, protection and controls of air handling units

and fan coil units.
f) Starting/stopping and controls of ventilation fans and

pressurisation fans.
g) All others as specified elsewhere in this Specifications.
2. Sequence of Operation and Starting
2.1 During automatic start up, the selector switches of all equipment of the
system shall be in the "BAS" mode and automated in the following
starting sequence:
a) Air handling units and fan coil units;
b) all cooling tower fans (in sequence);
c) condenser water pump;
d) chilled water pump (corresponds to the condenser water pump);

followed by
e) refrigeration machine (corresponds to the respective condenser

and chilled water pumps).
TS/M/S16/2 2602542S/AC
2.2 Automated shut-down shall be of reversed order. The time difference
between the shutting down of refrigeration machine and chilled water
pump shall include shut down sequence of the refrigeration machine.
2.3 If the chiller is being cut in/out due to cooling load variation, the
respective chilled and condenser water pumps shall be cut in/out as
well.
2.4 Adequate time delays shall be incorporated between each starting

operation, and also between starting last item of one plant system and
the first item of the next plant system.
3. AHU and FCU General Controls
3.1 The operation of AHU and FCU for general areas shall be started by
the activation of time program from the BAS and or otherwise
specified.
3.2 An alarm shall be activated when the filter is dirty and transmits a print
out message through the BAS.
3.3 An BAS switch for overriding of the DDC controller shall be provided
for easy maintenance purpose.
3.4 When the control panel selector switch is at "AUTO", It shall be

controlled by the DDC itself.
3.5 All AHUs DDC controllers shall be capable of performing the

following fully standalone functions without external connection:-
a) PID control loop
b) Time programme
c) Trend logging
3.6 All controllers, temperature and static pressure indicators relays and
other interfacing equipment shall be housed in a 14 gauge baked
enamel wall mounted panel with a door and key-lock.
3.7 Two-way modulating control valve shall be installed as shown on

Tender Drawings for every air handling unit and fan coil unit water
circuit system to regulate the amount of flow through the coil by DDC
control. Two-way control valves for 40 mm size and below shall be
threaded connection and flanged connection for 50 mm size and above.
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to select a suitable size of the
2-way modulating control valve. The Contractor shall be required to
replace any 2-way modulating control valve, without additional cost, if
it does not comply with the Specifications.
TS/M/S16/3 2602542S/AC
3.8 When the AHU is turned off (automatically or manually), the 2-way
modulating control valve shall be closed. However, in the event of
power failure, the valve shall remain in its last position.
4. CAV AHU Controls
4.1 The operation of AHU will commence by the activation of time

program from the BAS. A return duct temperature sensor shall monitor
the return air temperature and transmits its measured value to the DDC
controller. The measured value shall be compared against the set point.
The DDC PID control loop shall modulate the cooling coil control
valve to reach and maintain at the required temperature set point. In
additional, space sensor will be provided at every 10m interval to
monitor the room temperature and transmits its measured value to the
DDC controller. The measured value shall be compared against the
room set point. The DDC PID control loop shall modulate the VSD of
the AHU to reach and maintain at the required room temperature set
point. When the control panel selector switch is at "AUTO", It shall be
controlled by the DDC itself.
4.2 The outdoor air temperature shall be continuously sensed by a outdoor

air temperature sensor. The signal from the sensor shall reset the return
air temperature set point to a predetermined value through the DDC
controller with respect to the outdoor air temperature. A decrease in
outdoor air temperature shall cause a proportional increase in set point
and vice versa.
4.3 The filter condition shall be monitored by a differential pressure switch

and its feedback goes to the DDC controller for alarm monitoring.
5. VAV Controls (Multiple Thermal / Ventilation Zones)
5.1 The multiple thermal zone (MTZ) VAV system shall be of pressure
dependent type. Temperature of a specific space is measured by a
designated temperature sensor of a thermostat installed within space
and compared to a preset value. The corresponding controller shall
modulate the VAV box damper to reach and maintain the space
temperature at the preset value.
5.2 The operation of AHU will commence by the activation of time

program from the BAS. A off coil temperature sensor shall monitor the
air temperature leaving the cooling coil and transmits its measured
value to the DDC controller. The measured value shall be compared
against the set point. The DDC PID control loop shall modulate the
cooling coil control valve to reach and maintain at the required
temperature set point.
TS/M/S16/4 2602542S/AC
5.3 A pressure differential sensor, installed at approximately 75% down
stream along the main or sub-main duct shall constantly measure and
feedback the air pressure within the ducting system to the DDC
controller. The DDC controller shall regulate the AHU fan speed to
reach and maintain a preset duct pressure.
5.4 The outdoor air temperature shall be continuously sensed by a outdoor

air temperature sensor. The signal from the sensor shall reset the return
air temperature set point to a predetermined value through the DDC
controller with respect to the outdoor air temperature. A decrease in
outdoor air temperature shall cause a proportional increase in set point
and vice versa.
5.5 The multiple ventilation zone (MVZ) VAV system shall be of pressure
dependent type and operate exactly like but independent of the MTZ
VAV system. A space carbone dioxide (CO2) sensor shall provide
input for the modulation of a MVZ VAV box. A wall mounted space
sensor / controller that is capable of sensing both temperature and CO2
concentration is preferred.
5.6 The ventilation zone (MVZ) VAV system shall also be also to
interface to the lighting management to control the VAV box through
radiant heat map and motion sendor
6. FCU Controls
6.1 The Contractor shall provide and install all the control and power
wiring and an on-off switch to a point adjacent to each unit. Each fan
coil unit shall be provided with a 2-way modulating motorised valve
controlled by a DDC controller.
a) Single Speed Controls - Each FCU shall be provided with a

DDC controller to maintain a preset room dry bulb temperature.
A temperature sensor located at the wall of the room shall be
used to measure the room dry bulb temperature and send a
signal to the controller to modulate the FCU motorized valve.
b) Three Speed Controls - Each FCU shall be provided with an

automatic fan speed DDC controller to maintain a preset room
dry bulb temperature. A temperature sensor located at the wall
of the room and send a signal to the controller to modulate the
FCU air quantity. When the room temperature is 2oC higher
than the preset value, the DDC controller shall automatically
switch the fan speed to “High”. When the room temperature
falls to 1oC higher than the preset value the DDC controller
shall switch the fan speed to “Medium”. When the room
temperature meets the preset value, the DDC controller shall
switch the fan speed to “Low”. Modulation of motorised two
way valve to control chilled water flow shall commence should
room temperature reduce further.
TS/M/S16/5 2602542S/AC
6.2 Fan speed and valve modulation shall be of PID control. The operator
shall be able to change parameter such as set point, on/off control etc.,
from the BAS central or through local access.
7. Cooling Tower Controls
7.1 During full load operation, all cooling towers shall operate to provide
condenser water for the chiller. The cooling towers shall load and
unload by respectively increase and decrease each cooling tower fan
speed through VSD. The fan speed shall be modulated to maintain a
preset (by user) leaving condenser water temperature of each set of
cooling tower. Fan speed modulation shall be of PID control.
7.2 Fan speed of each cooling tower consists of more than one fan shall be
modulated with a single signal from the DDC controller. However,
each fan shall be linked to a dedicated VSD to facilitate speed variation.
8. Chiller System Controls
8.1 Chiller system shall comprise a chiller and its associated chilled water
and condenser water pumps with the chiller being the central
equipment.
8.2 The DDC controller shall be able to perform chiller duty cycling to
equalise the total run time of each chiller system.
8.3 When any operating chiller system fails to operate, the standby chiller
system shall take over its operation automatically with alarm issued.
8.4 Under BAS mode, chiller system shall be started according to BAS
programming.
8.5 When the chiller system at IMSS or console selector switch is at

"AUTO", It shall be controlled by the DDC itself according to start up
sequence. This sequence shall start the group cooling tower, condenser
pump, chilled water pump and chiller. This mode shall also perform
other control that is necessary for a proper operation of the chiller
system.
TS/M/S16/6 2602542S/AC
9. Water Pump Controls
9.1 The DDC controller shall allow the selection of chilled or condenser
water pumps to be selected to operate with chiller in a different chiller
system as and when the needs arise.
9.2 The DDC controller shall monitor the feedback of the pump through
water flow switch and when a duty pump failure is detected, an alarm
shall be initiated at the BAS central and the stand-by pump shall be
started to replace it.
10. Chilled Water Bypass System
10.1 When the power supply to the control panel is energised, the control
system shall start operation.
10.2 The control system shall provide constant chilled water differential
pressure control between the chilled water supply and return system.
10.3 The differential pressure between the supply and return chilled water
system shall be continuously sensed by a differential pressure
transmitter which shall transmit a standard 4 to 20mA linear current
signal output to DDC controller.
11. Interlocks and Alarms for Cooling Towers and AHUs, Compressors and
Pumps
11.1 If water level in the cooling tower basin falls below a pre-determined
low level or smoke detector of AHU is activated, an alarm system
consisting of buzzers and indicating lamps shall be automatically
energised.
11.2 Interlocks and alarms shall be provided to ensure that:
a) The chillers can only be operated when the respective

condenser cooling water pump and chilled water pump are in
operation.
b) Flow switches shall be incorporated in each condenser cooling

water and chilled water circuit so that the pumps will be
deenergised if the flow of water stops in the corresponding
circuit whilst the pump motors are operating. Indicating lamps
and manual resets shall be provided for the no-flow cut out.
TS/M/S16/7 2602542S/AC
c) If within a set time after any one of the plant systems sequence
starting operation has been energised either manually or with
time clock contact, and the respective refrigerant compressor
fails to start, an alarm system consisting of bell and indicating
lamp shall automatically be energised.
d) Alarm bells and buzzers shall be cancelled by means of push-

button switches whilst the warning indicating lamps shall only
cut-out after the fault has been corrected.
12. Chiller Group Automation
12.1 The following table serves as basic guidelines in formulating a

programme algorithm for automating a chiller group with the intent to
optimise the efficiency of the chiller plant. Refinement shall be made
to accommodate any special requirement or operating characteristics of
individual equipment of a chiller group.
Stage Action
i
If any chiller group is in IMSS mode, the programme will deactivate
automation. Operation remains status quo.
If any of the chiller group is in OFF mode automation is still active but
will ignore this group in operation.
Pre-start
mode check If any equipment is in LOCAL mode, the programme will deactivate
automation and operation remains status quo.
If any equipment is in OFF mode automation is still active but will

ignore the chiller group, which the equipment is (are) associated with,
in the operation.
ii
Main time programme will start ALL CT available and ensure that
minimum number of CT for Hi load is satisfied before moving on.
There will be 30-minute time-out in which the above condition will
Cooling prevail.
towers (CT)
Once time-out lapses, the programme will run the number of CT in
accordance with chiller running status. (Hi / Lo load configuration.)
Automation shall NOT be deactivated if any of the CT is in IMSS or
OFF or LOCAL mode.
TS/M/S16/8 2602542S/AC
Stage Action
iii
Pump shall deliver at least 70% rated flow to return “on” feedback or
chiller manufacturer recommendation
Each pump (condenser and chilled water pump alike) shall be fitted
with approved VSD and programmed to start and stop with minimum
hammering effect.
MCC selector switch:
Remote: Equipment will receive signal from BAS, AUTO and IMSS.
Condenser
and chilled Off: Equipment not operational. The programme will shut off upstream
water pump equipment and abandon this group. Non-critical alarm will be raised.
Normal operation resumes when “Remote” mode is reselected.
Local: Equipment to be turned on and off using push button on MCC.

Manual operation. BAS will deactivate automation and operation
remains status quo. Non-critical alarm will be raised. Normal operation
resumes when “Remote” mode is reselected.
iv
Condenser A preset condenser water flow of each chiller group will be maintained
water flow by varying the condenser water pump speed.
control
Individual approved magnetic flow meter installed on condenser line of
each chiller group shall provide flow data for such control.
(Where energy saving opportunity exists and on the condition that no damage shall be
done to the chiller, provision shall be made to progressively scale down the preset
flow rate in low load condition.)
v
A preset chilled water flow of each chiller group will be maintained by
varying the chilled water pump speed. Chilled water pump shall
Chilled varying according to the load (RT) vs flow (l/sec) or the delta in
water flow pressure (ΔP) to meet the furthest end load required.
control
Individual approved magnetic flow meter installed on chilled water line
of each chiller group shall provide flow data for such control.
In the event when chilled water system pressure raises beyond preset
value during unloading period, the by-pass valve located at the by-pass
line between chiller groups and the air handling units shall be regulated
to relieve the pressure built up.
(Where energy saving opportunity exists and on the condition that no damage shall be
done to the chiller, provision shall be made to progressively scale down the preset
flow rate in low load condition.)
TS/M/S16/9 2602542S/AC
Stage Action
vi
Chiller on / off feedback is tapped from compressor contact.
MCC selector switch:
Remote: Equipment will receive signal from BAS, AUTO and IMSS.
Off: Equipment not operational. The programme will shut off upstream
equipment and abandon this group. Non-critical alarm will be raised.
Normal operation resumes when “Remote” mode is reselected.
Local: Equipment to be turned on and off using push button on MCC.

Chiller Manual operation. BAS will deactivate automation and operation
resumes when “Remote” mode is reselected.
Number of start per day will be monitored. If the number exceeds 4

times, the programme shall alert the operator. This shall NOT be treated
as a fault.
When a chiller goes into cycle shutdown, there will be a 15-minute

time-out imposed. BAS will assume the chiller faulty if the cyclical
shutdown signal remains and the chiller is still called on to start upon
the expiration of time-out.
If chiller is in anti-recycle mode when signalled to start, the programme

will wait for the lapse of this mode.
vii
Loading: When cooling load exceeds upper limit of a configuration OR
average chilled water supply temperature (among operating chillers)
breaches the upper limit of a set range, a 10-minute count down will be
initiated. At the end of the countdown, both conditions will be verified.
If breach of condition persists, start the next chiller group or switch
over to a higher capacity chiller group.
Unloading: When cooling load falls below the lower limit of a

Chiller configuration AND average chilled water supply temperature (among
group operating chillers) lies within a set range OR when the chilled water
flow rate is delivered at the minimum allowable value, a 10-minute
count down will be initiated. At the end of the countdown, both
conditions will be verified. If both conditions persist, stop the first
chiller group or switch over to a lower capacity chiller group.
During a switchover operation, the pumps of a taking-over chiller group

will be started in sequence, followed by turning off the chiller of a
shutting-down chiller group. Chiller of the taking-over group will then
be turned on; after which the pumps of the shutting-down group will be
switch off as per normal.
TS/M/S16/10 2602542S/AC
Stage Action
Chiller group selector switch:
BAS: Automated operation.
Chiller Off: Group not operational. Automation is still active but will ignore
group this group in operation. For service and maintenance. Non-critical
alarm will be raised. Normal operation resumes when “BAS” mode is
reselected.
IMSS: Manual operation. Automation will be deactivated. Operation

resumes when “BAS” mode is reselected.
Run time rationalisation is NOT required.
When a group is signalled to start
AUTO : Automated operation. Group operation by DDC without going

through BAS station.
viii
Feature of operating mix-matched equipment of different chiller group
Assigning shall be made available on the graphic centre as well as at controller
equipment level.
to operate
with other The feature is semi-automated in that it requires the manual isolation of
chiller chilled water line.
group
This feature is incorporated in anticipation of simultaneous equipment
failure two chiller groups.
ix
When any chiller group is found to be in IMSS mode or equipment
found to be in LOCAL mode a critical alarm shall be raised.
Alarms
When any chiller group is found to be in AUTO mode or equipment
found to be in LOCAL mode a critical alarm shall be raised.
x
Automation When automation is deactivated, BAS will NOT:
deactivated Turn on standby chiller group when an operating chiller group fails.
Use heat load calculation to manage chiller operation.
TS/M/S16/11 2602542S/AC
12.2 The automation and control sequence is based on the base chiller
configuration of large and small chillers.
12.3 All set points in the programme shall be adjusted at level decided by
the S.O.. These set points shall include but not be limited to cooling
load, flow rate, temperature, pressure differential and time.
13. Control of Fans
13.1 All ducted ventilation fans for A/C plant room, staircases, smoke-stop
lobbies, toilets, and etc. shall be controlled by BAS complete with
manual override control.
13.2 Ventilation fans for lift motor rooms, generator rooms, electrical
service rooms (LT, HT) shall be automatically started / stopped by
timer (i.e. time switch) and thermostats.
13.3 Manual control of each fan shall be also provided.
13.4 All chemical storage fan shall have explosion proof differential
pressure switch for the low flow and no flow alarm. Beacon light and
buzzer shall install outside the room for warning. Flow switch used
shall be of explosion proof comply to IEC / NEC/ CEC Class I
Division , Zone 1 and 2.
14. Time switches
14.1 The time switches shall be of twenty-four (24) hours Quartz type
with power reserve of minimum 72 hours (after a charging time of
10 min.) in the event of power failure.
14.2 The supply voltage and the frequency range shall be 200...240 Volt a.c.
and 50 Hz respectively.
14.3 The permissible ambient temperature shall be -5oC to +55oC.
14.4 The minimum switching interval shall be 1 minute.
14.5 The time switch shall have a changeover contact of minimum 16 Amp
(changeover) at 240 Volt a.c. at p.f. = 1.
14.6 It shall be designed to clip on DIN-rail EN 50 022.
14.7 The accuracy shall be +/- 1 second per day.
14.8 It shall allow a minimum of 20 different time settings for the

different switching within a period of 24 hours.
TS/M/S16/12 2602542S/AC
14.9 The class and degree of protection shall be class II according to VDE
0633 and IP 30 as per DIN 40050 respectively.
14.10 Terminal cover shall be provided for each time switch.
14.11 If the time switch is not housed in D.B., approved dust and vermin
proof insulated housing shall be used.
14.12 The Time switches must he such that to cater and able to serve seven
(7) days of different operation programmable type.
15. Intelligent Mimic Cum Supervisory System (IMSS)
15.1 This section covers the design, supply and delivery, installation,
connection, testing and commissioning and fifteen (15) months free
maintenance and warranty of the Intelligent Mimic Cum Supervisory
System and associated work and accessories for the air conditioning
plant room central.
15.2 The IMSS shall be of separate system from the BAS and intended
for:-
a) providing an overview of operation status of all air

conditioning equipment at the monitor of the supervisory
control panel in the air-conditioning plant room.
b) remote turning on/off of air-conditioning equipment through

the monitor of the supervisory control panel in case the BAS
being faulty or not in operation.
c) IMSS equipment provided shall be from the same manufacturer

of the BAS manufacturer of this specification.
15.3 The IMSS shall be complete with but not limited to the following
(Please refer to the attached tender drawings):-
a) a floor standing supervisory panel;
b) supervisory communication digital controller;
c) modules for all air-conditioning equipment;
d) two (2) wire low voltage network;
e) software for graphic mimic presentation, interfacing card, other

relevant accessories; etc..
TS/M/S16/13 2602542S/AC
16. Supervisory Panel
16.1 The floor standing supervisory panel shall consists of a 32" monitor
and a 20o slanting table top with all necessary
LOCAL/BAS/AUTO/OFF/REMOTE selector switches for each plant
room equipment. The keyboard and mouse shall also be installed on
the slanting table top. The supervisory panel shall be at least 1.8 m x
1.2 m and complete with front access panels/doors for future
maintenance.
16.2 The schematic of the entire air conditioning system shall be presented
in graphical mimic format on the monitor with the following
information:-
a) "ON", "OFF", "TRIP" status for the plant room equipment,

such as chillers, pumps, cooling towers.
b) "ON", "OFF", "TRIP" status for the AHUs.
c) "ON" and "OFF" status for the fan coil units (FCUs).
16.3 The " BAS/AUTO/OFF/REMOTE " selection for each plant room
equipment shall be interpreted as follows:-
a) at LOCAL mode, Chiller plant system shall start manually at

the console
b) at BAS mode, the BAS shall control the "ON/OFF" of the plant
room equipment through the optimisation program, time
program, etc.;
c) at REMOTE mode, each plant room equipment shall be

remotely "ON/OFF" through the monitor.
d) at AUTO mode, each chiller plant system shall be automated

"ON/OFF" through the selector switch.
e) "OFF" mode means turning off the equipment.
f) Mode selection and remote supervisory operation for each

AHU shall be executed using graphic software of IMSS. Only
status report is required for each FCU.
TS/M/S16/14 2602542S/AC
17. Dynamic Colour Graphic Display Terminal
17.1 A colour monitor is provided to display plant diagrams which shall

have the following features and capabilities:-
a) standard library of AHU, FCU, fans, pumps, etc., shall be

available in the CAD library or Visio library and shall be
generated by CAD software or Visio software for any
background drawings. The software shall be capable of
accepting imported CAD or Visio drawings done on other CAD
or Visio software. Access to the computer shall be through
Microsoft Windows interface.
b) all stored graphics shall be on the central disk system and freely
accessible via manual operation through the operator station
keyboard. It shall be possible to assign graphics to an address
structure.
c) the colour graphic of LCD shall be dynamic in that point data

or calculated values shall updated continuously while being
observed. The colour LCD shall have a flashing feature to
indicated abnormal condition such as trip alarm.
d) by means of a mouse which is provided, the cursor control

switching command shall be able to perform effectively and
easily within the normal addressing procedure.
18. Supervisory Communication Digital Controller (SCDC)
18.1 The SCDC shall be a real time microprocessor based self-contained

unit. The microprocessor shall be of 8 bit type and shall have
programs on EEPROM and RAM. The entire IMSS, including its
program shall be backed-up by battery for no less than 72 hours. The
SCDC shall monitor and control the digital input and digital output of
the electronic modules. A minimum of 25% spare capacity shall be
provided at each controller. The SCDC unit shall have the following
functions:-
a) start/stop command.
b) programmed start/stop time.
c) start, stop & trip status request.
d) points summary for all switches and relays of the electronic

modules.
TS/M/S16/15 2602542S/AC
e) alarm and change of status detection.
f) provides 2 lines diagnostics with short and open circuit

indication.
g) provides power supply to operate the electronic modules

through the 2 wire networks.
18.2 The SCDC shall link to the monitor through interfacing card and
terminal.
18.3 The SCDC shall have the capacity to map no less than 900 field points
that are networked from the respective electronic modules.
19. Electronic Modules
19.1 The electronic module shall have the digital input and digital output
function.
19.2 The electronic module shall consist of electronic switches and relays.
19.3 The switches and relays shall be operated from the SCDC.
19.4 The switches and relays shall be addressable and able to communicate
with the other components via a 2 wire network.
19.5 Each airconditioning equipment such as AHU, FCU, chiller, pump,

cooling tower, shall be installed with electronic modules.
20. Two (2) wire Low Voltage Network
20.1 The SCDC shall be connected to a series of electronic modules through

2 wire low voltage network.
20.2 The SCDC shall supply 24V DC to all the electronic modules through
the 2 wire network.
20.3 The SCDC shall able to control and communicate to all electronic
modules through these two (2) wire network.
20.4 The minimum transmission rate shall not be less than 9600 baud.
TS/M/S16/16 2602542S/AC
21. Programming
21.1 The application program for the SCDC and monitor terminal shall be
programmed using graphic software.
22. IMSS Point Schedule
22.1 The point schedule enclosed hereinafter shall be read in conjunction

with the tender drawings and specification.
22.2 The point schedule enclosed is for the purpose of guidance of

minimum requirements. The Contractor shall allow cost in his tender
for any further points to enable the system to operate in its intended
purpose of a complete optimum operating system.
22.3 In general, the following shall be provided for:-
a) Chillers, AHUs, Cooling Towers, Condenser & Chilled Water

Pumps
i) Start/stop control.
ii) On/off status.
iii) Trip alarm.
b) FCUs
i) On/off status.
ii) Trip alarm
TS/M/S16/17 2602542S/AC
SECTION 17 – PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROL SYSTEM
1. General
1.1. The specification shall be read in conjunction with the Drawings (as per
Schedule of Drawings), which are intended to be mutually explanatory and
complementary to one another. All works and specification called for by
one, i.e. Specification or drawings even if not by the other shall be fully
executed and complied with in total.
1.2. The Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) system shall use for providing
continuous monitoring and control of mechanical and electrical services in
the buildings and facilities. The control and monitoring functions required
are listed in the schedule points.
1.3. Unless otherwise specified, the equipment and material within the scope of
this Specification shall be of a standard proven design. Design
incorporating components which may be considered prototype in nature
will not be accepted.
1.4. Dynamic graphics shall be programmed, generated and applicated for all
points as per schedule point list to assist operations.
1.5. All PLCs, computers, servers and remote I/Os power supply shall be back
up by UPS in case of power failure. The design and provision of the UPS
shall be included.
1.6. The following provisions shall be made:
(a) Supply and installation of all monitoring temperature sensors

(inclusive of thermowells), RH sensors, velocity and static air
pressure transducers, water flow sensors and transducers, air flow
switches etc., for the Air-conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation
System and other Mechanical Systems in this Sub-Contract, unless
they are specifically designated in the Point Schedule, Drawing, or
specified in the other Section to be by others.
(b) Supply and installation of interfacing panel that including terminal

blocks, cable tray/trunkings and etc. The terminal blocks shall be
allowed for at one end of the entire panel for top-entry PLC
System cabling and the other end for field equipment cabling. A
minimum of 20% spare terminal block shall be allowed.
TS/M/S17/1 2602542S/AC
(c) Supply of all electrical transducers such as voltage, current
(including of CTs), power factor, frequency etc unless they are
specifically designated or specified in the other Sections to be by
others.
(d) Supply and installation of all interfacing junction boxes adjacent to

all starter panel, sensors, transducers, etc, unless specified
otherwise to be by others.
(e) Supply and installation of wiring from the starter panels, or

interfacing junction boxes (or interfacing panel) to the Controller
directly where control and monitoring of the equipment are
required.
(f) Supply and installation of wiring from all sensors and transducers
provided by the Sub-Contractor directly to the interfacing junction
boxes or Controllers as the case may be.
(g) Supply and installation of all interfacing wiring between ALL

control panel, Mimic panels, interfacing modules and Controllers.
(h) All Cables shall lay in the appropriate size of GI conduit or

trunking.
(i) For those devices that are installed by the other M&E service Sub-
Contractors, the PLC System Sub-Contractor shall responsible for
correct status or readings are achieved from the interfacing panels
all the way right up to the PLC System work stations in the
control room.
(j) For devices that are installed by the PLC System Sub-Contractor,
they shall responsible for the correct status or readings are
achieved from the devices all the way right up to the PLC System
work stations in the Control room.
1.7. Notwithstanding the training given, the service of 2 skilled operators for a
period of up to 12 weeks (of 8 hours per day) after substantial completion
to assist in the operation and maintenance of the system on site shall be
provided. The tendered price shall deem to have provided for this
requirement.
1.8. The PLC System shall be supplied, installed, commissioned and

maintained entirely by a local specialist Sub-Contractor who shall:
(a) be a BCA registered firm registered under Category ME02

(Building Automation, Industrial and Process Control System) of
a financial category as specified in the Tender Document.
TS/M/S17/2 2602542S/AC
(b) be staffed with factory trained engineers fully capable of PLC
designing and providing all such information, instructions,
emergency maintenance service on all system components to
enable the PLC System to operate at peak efficiency at all times
i.e. twenty-four (24) hours per day, fifteen (15) months each year.
(c) Carry adequate spare parts to guarantee that the down time of the
building automation system shall not be caused by lack of standby
spare parts nor by waiting for spare parts to become available.
(d) have a proven track record in design and installation of a fully

computerised PLC System similar in performance to that specified
herein.
2. Compliance with Regulation / Standards
2.1 Definitions of Terms
The following terms shall have the meaning as defined herewith:

Programmable Logic Control (PLC) refers to the entire system of
hardware, software, interfaces using in isolation or combination to achieve
the control sequence and logic as required, having the necessary
redundancy and availability as required.
Distribution Intelligence Architecture refers to the particular configuration

of hardware whereby master controller (CPU) and a secondary controller
(FPU) is networked by a fieldbus. The secondary controller located
remotely in the field, close to the instrumentation and actuators. Control
algorithm being resited at the secondary controller memory, and all
control and monitoring actions are being performed by the secondary
controller, but dutifully fedback to the master controller via a fieldbus.
Remote I/O Architecture refers to the particular configuration of hardware

whereby the I/O Modules for the controller (CPU) is located remotely,
close to the instrumentation and actuators, and state and status are
fedback to the controller via a fieldbus.
Local I/O Architecture refers to the particular configuration of hardware

whereby the I/O Modules for the controller (CPU) is co-located with the
CPU Module on the same backplane. This form of configuration can be
co-existed with the Distributed Intelligence or Remote I/O architectures.
Field bus refers to the standard industrial bus used for communication
between the controller (CPU) and the remote I/O modules or the
secondary controller (FPU).
TS/M/S17/3 2602542S/AC
Distributed Intelligence Drop Module refers to the secondary controller
used in a Distributed Intelligence Architecture.
Human Machine Interface refers to the micro-computer terminal or mimic
panel where the statuses and parameters of all the equipment are
indicated. Where micro-computer is used, it shall also act as the
Programmer.
Rack refers to the combination of modules (CPU module, Power Supply

Module, IO Module etc) mounted onto a common base plate.
Controller refers to the rack where the CPU Module is located. Primary
Controller refers to the rack that is assuming control and executing
command in a Hot Standby System.
Standby Controller refers to the other rack where the CPU is not
assuming control or executing command in the Hot Standby System.
2.2 Operation Conditions
All equipment, parts and works specified herein shall be capable of

operating reliably, effectively and efficiently under the following
continuous site conditions/ input power supply conditions:
Maximum Temperature 35°C dry bulb

28°C wet bulb
Average Temperature 32°C dry bulb

26°C wet bulb
Relative Humidity 20 - 95% RH (non-

condensing)
Environment High dust content
Power Supply 230V/400V 50Hz AC

Voltage dip tolerance 15%
Line conditioners or filters shall be provided for the proper uninterrupted

operation of the control system installation.
TS/M/S17/4 2602542S/AC
3. Submittals
3.1. The following products and software literature shall be submitted for
review and approval:
(a) All hardware, computers, peripherals and other components.
(b) All software, which includes Database, Utility, SCADA,

Graphical, Office Suite and Operating (OS) Software.
(c) Surge suppression, power conditioning equipment and

uninterruptable power (UPS) system components.
(d) Identify clearly, any and all exceptions taken to the requirements
of the specifications.
(e) Installation and Users Manuals (manuals will be turned over to the
Owners operating personnel for their use at substantial
completion).
(f) In addition to technical literature, the sub-contractor should

submit the following for review and approval during tender:
(g) Project Management Plan including, project organization chart,

resumes of all key personnel. The sub-contractor project
management team shall include key project and engineering
personnel that have experience in implementing large airport
projects.
(h) Track Record. The Sub-contractor shall submit a list major

projects successfully implemented in Singapore in the last 10 years
for evaluation.
(i) Software Development Plan
(j) Safety Plan
(k) Test Plan. This should include the various type of test to be
carried out.
(l) Proposed project schedule with manpower loading.
(m) Quality Assurance Plan. As software is a significant part of the

entire scope, the Quality Assurance Plan shall include software
assurance. The sub-contractor must have experience in software
assurance from previous projects. All sub-contractors must submit
sample software assurance plans and procedures implemented
from previous project.
TS/M/S17/5 2602542S/AC
(n) Sample O&M manual
(o) Sample Interface Program Documentation
(p) Sample panel configuration drawing
3.2. Network architecture diagram indicating the network nodes, file servers,
gateways, routers, bridges and all other components included in the IBMS
LAN shall be submitted for comments and approval. The proposed
network physical specifications and performance shall be indicated.
3.3. Software flow diagrams for all custom application programs to be

developed to satisfy the specified requirements, shall be submitted for
approval before commencement.
3.4. Furniture plan layout for the control Room complete with layout of all the
servers shall be submitted for approval.
3.5. The followings shall be submitted for review and approval regarding the
proposed data base software.
(a) Facility Management reports.
(b) Utility and command software tools and features.
(1) Screen, windows and menu presentation.

(2) Data presentation.
(3) New and computer generated data editing features.
(4) Data formatting.
(5) Data and document management features.
(6) Tutorials and help features.
3.6. System Reliability
The reliability of the entire PLC System shall be computed and submitted
to the SO for record.
TS/M/S17/6 2602542S/AC
4. General Requirement for Programmable Logic Controller
4.1. The complete Programmable Logic Controller Control sub-system

provided shall include but not limited to – PLC, network interfaces,
conduit and wiring, software, power supplies, cabinetry, communication
devices, programming, testing, commissioning, training and warrant.
4.2. The PLC System shall be design with Hot Standby configuration. The
CPU shall have current system status for automatic switchover in the
event of a primary controller failure. All processors must not be affected
by any control system hardware failures. The changeover time shall not be
more than 300ms. Systems shall be designed to distribute components
over multiple PLCs so that a CPU/FPU failure will not cause a system
failure. It shall be possible to shut off any CPU and have the system
continue to run minus the equipment attached to the CPU/FPU shut
down. Latching relays and other fail-safe devices shall be utilizied to
insure maximum system up times.
4.3. The following functions (but not limited to) are provided as minimum
requirements for the PLC system;
(a) dynamic and animated graphics for information,

(b) control logic (arithmetic, PI, PID, etc)
(c) monitoring of status
(d) management of Data Base
(e) setting of equipment perimeters
(f) colour representation of status
(g) alarm class differentiation
(h) Scheduler
(i) Trend Point Storage
(j) Various format of Report Generator
(k) Time function
(l) Various format of Presenting the Trend Report
(m) Event Programs
(n) Global Energy Management
(o) full English interactive menu selection
(p) True multi-tasking functionality
(q) Third-party software compatibility etc.
4.4. All field devices including sensors, switches, actuators and transmitters for
the control and monitoring of systems and equipment shall be provided.
4.5. All software development and code generated shall become the property
of the Employer, with license and copyrights being vetted with the
Employer.
TS/M/S17/7 2602542S/AC
4.6. Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) will utilise remote Input/Output
(I/O) modules and should be configured in redundant I/O bus
configuration with hot standby redundant CPU, Communication Module
and Power Supply. The communication cables for the PLC system shall
be Cat6e.
4.7. The performance of the PLC program execution times and other stated
performance parameters shall not be degraded if any PLC is populated up
to 100 percent of capacity. If performance degradation is expected at this
point quantity, indicate the maximum point population for each PLC while
maintaining performance requirements.
4.8. Each PLC shall contain all the required software and hardware to fulfil the
requirements of this Specification.
4.9. The PLC shall be state of the art digital device using real time
programmable memory capable of performing logic sequencing, continuo
control and communications.
4.10. The PLC shall be capable of handling analogue and digital I /O signals as
required by the respective applications.
4.11. The PLC shall be capable of operating in an industrial environment w/o

special requirements cooling o electrical filtering. All components of the
PLC system except programming equipment such as notebook PC shall be
designed to operate in an environment with RH ranging from 0% to
95%(non-condensing) and ambient temperatures of 0 to 60*C
(operational) and –40 to 80*C (storage).
4.12. The PLC shall be modular with all components (except the power supply)
in a single rack assembly designed for plug-in modular assemblies and
shall allow for easy service and maintenance and expansion. All system
modules shall provide for free airflow convection cooling and no internal
fans or other means of cooling except heat sinks shall be required.
4.13. No PLC controller shall be initially populated to more than 75 percent of

the controllers’ maximum point capacity of any point type (analogue
inputs, analogue outputs, digital inputs, digital outputs). Each PLC
controller shall be a complete and self-contained unit capable of
independent operation without the need for control and computing
resources residing elsewhere
4.14. The PLC shall be designed and tested to operate in industrial environment.
4.15. Shall be designed for easy backplane mounting in NEMA-class panels, or

rack mounting for 19” installations.
TS/M/S17/8 2602542S/AC
4.16. No DIP switch shall be used in the PLC system. All I/O addressing is done
in software.
4.17. Common I/O wiring connector for all I/O modules to eliminate guesswork
of which modules go with which connector.
4.18. Health information on every module during run-time for easier

maintenance.
4.19. Each and every PLC shall contain the following features, functions and
performance characteristics:
(a) CPU shall support Hot standby configuration with current system
status for automatic switchover in the event of a primary
controller failure. This means critical processes are not affected by
control system hardware failures. The change over time will not be
more than 300ms. The Master PLC at the central control room
shall equip with a 10.4” display with built-in MMI.
(b) PLC controllers shall be located in the mechanical or electrical

rooms housing the equipment to be monitored or controlled, Air
Handling Unit (AHU) rooms, electrical pipe shaft rooms, or in the
room where the Interface Strips are located. All PLC controller
locations are subject to the approval of the SO. Co-ordinate with
the SO prior to installing PLC at any location. The remote I/O
modules located in each AHU room shall equip with a 3.9”
display.
(c) Any or all points in a PLC shall be definable as global points

whose data is transmitted to other PLCs. Global points shall be
freely defined without restriction and at any time.
(d) Global point transmission to and reception by other PLCs on a

communication bus shall not require any other device intervention
for such transmission and reception to take place.
(e) Global point data shall not be used within any control loop.
Ensure all points for a control loop are contained in a single PLC.
(f) As a minimum, the PLC controller used for this project shall
conform to the following:
(1) 89/336/EMC
(2) 92/31/EEC
(3) 93/68/EEC
(4) 73/23/EEC
(5) EN50081-2
(6) EN61131-2
TS/M/S17/9 2602542S/AC
5. Implementation and Installation
5.1. The design and implementation of the PLC architecture shall be

responsibility of the Sub-Contractor, basing generally on the guidelines
given herein.
(a) Each PLC, and its corresponding hot standby PLC, shall not be
used to control more than six AHUs (whether VAV or CAU
type).
(b) VAV boxes will be allowed to be controlled by FPU, or

intelligence LON devices, network to the PLC through
LONTALK.
(c) All PLC shall be loaded up to 80%. The remaining is reserved for
future expansion.
5.2. It is the responsibility of the Sub-Contractor to design and install a

working system basing on the control and monitoring functions specified
in this specification.
5.3. Furniture for the all the workstations, equipment and printers shall be
provided.
5.4. Operator Interface Workstations shall be arranged in a semicircle

configuration around the operator. Work spaces shall be provided for
11x14 inch printed materials to be used without interference to provided
controls, keyboards, etc.
5.5. Operator Interface Workstation lighting shall be provided to supplement

normal office lighting overhead. Such lighting shall be compatible with
the type and color spectrum of lighting overhead to prevent eye strain. All
surfaces shall be washable.
5.6. Anti-static discharge pads or other methods shall be furnished to prevent

any disruption of service at the consoles by electrostatic discharges.
5.7. A console chair with armrests and seat height adjustment shall be included
for each station.
5.8. The installation of the PLC System shall adhere to industrial practices and
recommendation from the PLC System Supplier
TS/M/S17/10 2602542S/AC
6. Instrumentation and Actuator / System Control and Operation
Please refer to section S16A/S16 of the Specification
7. Testing and Commission
7.1. General
The PLC system shall be complete and thorough testing, adjusting and
commissioning of the sub-systems and equipment installed and to bring
the entire PLCS system into safe reliable and satisfactory operation.
Generally, the 3 copies of detailed and comprehensive test plans and

procedures of the factory tests, commissioning tests, performance tests
and other relevant tests shall be submitted to the S.O. for approval. These
test plans and procedures shall be submitted three (3) months before the
scheduled date of commencement of tests.
All test plans and procedures shall be designed to fully test the system to
demonstrate and verify the compliance of the system equipment and
system performance to the requirements of this specifications. The
Contractor shall be responsible for all arrangement and costs associated
with the testing of the system, including simulation of all loading
conditions of the system.
7.2. Failure of a Test
Should a defect be detected during one of the tests, the nature of the
defect shall be explained in detail. The S.O. shall decide if the defect must
be rectified before testing can continue. If the defect must be rectified, the
S.O. shall decide what portion of the tests shall be re-run. The S.O. shall
have all tests re-run if he deems so necessary.
There shall be no additional claim of any and all costs of re-run of tests,
and modification deemed necessary by the S.O. during the tests to meet
the specifications. All changes or modifications shall be approved before
implementation.
TS/M/S17/11 2602542S/AC
7.3. Test plans and procedures
Test plans and procedures to be submitted shall be comprehensive, and

shall include all details necessary to ensure that test procedures and test
results will demonstrate specification compliance. Test plans shall include
as a minimum, the following:
(a) Test description and objective of each test, including block

diagrams showing system configuration and procedures for
conducting each test, and the personnel and test facilities,
necessary to perform each test.
(b) Designation of all inputs and outputs required testing each

function. As far as practicable, test input/output shall be
expressed in measurable terms with acceptable tolerances for each
measurement.
(c) A complete time sequence of test events.
(d) A list and descriptions of software program to be used for each

test, including running time for each program.
(e) A detailed description of any required analysis of test results.
7.4. Test Report
All results of each test shall be recorded and submitted to the M&E
S.O./Employer in a comprehensive test report. The test report shall
contain as a minimum, the following information:
(a) Function that were tested.
(b) All test results and necessary analysis of test results.
(c) Evaluation of test results and analysis indicating explicitly whether

the test results meet the specified performance and functional
requirement.
(d) A record of all adjustments, engineering or program changes

found necessary during the test.
(e) Suggested corrective action to improve the test results, if any.
(f) Suggested test plans for re-running of the whole or part of the
test, if found necessary.
TS/M/S17/12 2602542S/AC
7.5. Test Facility
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all test equipment, tools,
accessories, personnel, services and any other facilities required for the
execution of all tests. Whenever necessary, the PLC contractor shall
provide two or more sets of testing equipment tools, etc., to expedite
testing.
7.6. Commissioning Test
In view of the need for the earliest possible commissioning of the system
into operation, the Contractor shall execute all commissioning tests as
soon as it is possible. This test shall, in general, be performed by
experienced technicians who are involved in the actual installation works.
The BAS contractor shall schedule and control the test, and shall report to
the S.O./Employer on the progress of the tests.
The Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate all the necessary

interfacing with the connected systems to ensure the expeditious execution
of the performance test. The Contractor shall ensure adequate precautions
are taken to protect connected system due to system malfunction, and to
calibrate all analogue sensors.
After the interfacing connections at the Controllers are completed, the
Contractor shall conduct tests to ensure the system connections are
correct, and that the correct points identification are implemented.
Simultaneous with the hardware checks, the Contractor shall conduct the
necessary test on the CPUs, the controllers and the software.
7.7. Performance Test
The Contractor shall conduct the performance tests (or final acceptance
test) of the system after the commissioning test. The Contractor shall give
notice of and shall submit detailed test plans and procedures to the
S.O./Employer as specified herein. All performance tests shall be
witnessed by the S.O./Employer.
The performance test shall be conducted with minimum interference to the

operation of the connected system.
The performance test shall be designed and planned to put the system
through all aspects of the operations. In view of the large number of tests
that need to be carried out, the Contractor shall plan for the performance
tests to be conducted expeditiously, and in the minimum possible time.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary equipment and software

necessary for the simulation of all possible conditions of operation that the
system may have to perform under.
The Performance Test shall include:
TS/M/S17/13 2602542S/AC
(a) Control, Monitoring and Measuring
Each and every point of the system shall be checked, tested and
calibrated. Start/stop points shall be checked and tested under
AUTO and MANUAL conditions.
Measuring points shall be calibrated to the specified accuracy.

Trend logs, totalization, suppression and other functions specified,
shall be conducted concurrent with other tested.
Manual activation of summaries, actions and associated I/O

reports and displays as specified shall be tested.
(b) Time Program Control
Performance tests of the time program control function shall be

conducted simultaneously with other tests. The accuracy of the
timing and time delay between two or more connected equipment
start-ups shall be tested.
Week and special day initiation of all commands and actions

including associated reporting and display shall be tested.
(c) Event Initiated Command (EIC)
The Contractor shall arrange with the connected systems

contractor responsible for the connected systems to simulate the
conditions under which the EIC function performs.
The system shall be checked and tested for accuracy, timing and
time response. The system's ability to initiate commands and
actions, as specified, based on single and logical groups of event
shall also be tested.
(d) Power Demand and Energy Management
This function shall be checked and tested for accuracy of power

demand monitoring, accuracy and response to load shedding
required and load restoration.
The Contractor shall provide signal generators and simulator

equipment to simulate the various possible power demand
conditions for the purpose of the tests.
All features including synchronization, missing synchronization

pulse, load shedding calculations, minimum on time, minimum off
time, etc., shall be tested.
TS/M/S17/14 2602542S/AC
(e) Response Times
Response times of the system shall be recorded and checked

during each and every phase of all performance tests conducted.
The BAS contractor shall provide the necessary timing and
recording equipment to accurately and reliably record all respond
times.
Throughput and occurrence time resolution shall be tested under

fully loaded conditions.
(f) Input/Output
Concurrent with the other tests, the Contractor shall check the
accuracy, format and colour coding of all input/ output at the
man-machine interface peripherals.
The Contractor shall change the format or colour coding (if any)
of parts of the input/output of the system as deemed necessary by
the S.O./Employer.
All function keys and commands shall be checked and tested for
accuracy and performance.
Message routing, assignment of critical/ non-critical, summaries

shall be checked and tested.
(g) Complete System Re-load
A complete re-load of the system from the updated source tape or

disk shall be made.
(h) Unit Fault Conditions
All of the unit fault conditions shall be simulated and the computer
response checked. Wherever possible, a standard piece of
equipment shall be used to generate these fault conditions. If this
cannot be achieved, special test units shall be used.
The test of fault conditions shall also include the testing of the
computer routine which checks the DDCs and transmission
communications link.
Automatic change-over or by-pass program routines shall be

checked by simulating failure or fault conditions in the primary
equipment. Simulation of failure or fault condition shall include
possible modes of failure or faults.
TS/M/S17/15 2602542S/AC
(i) Power Fail & Re-Start
The power supply to the system shall be interrupted during the

normal system operation. The system shall be checked to
ensure automatic change-over to the UPS system without any
corruption in system operation.
The UPS systems shall then be interrupted for varying periods of

time. Power to the system shall be restored through the UPS or
through the main power supply. The system shall be checked to
ensure that the system operation has not been corrupted by the
power cycling and voltage fluctuation and surges.
Checks shall also be made on the updating of the system's data

required due to the changes in status of the connected system
during the system outage.
(j) Operator Command
At the start of the performance (acceptance) tests, a check list of

all operator commands, both operational and executive, and the
system's diagnostics shall be established. As the different operator
commands are used for testing of the system, each will be ticked
off after it has been successfully utilised. In this manner, the
majority of the operator commands, and the system diagnostic
programs for checking of invalid operator commands shall be
tested concurrently with the various phases of the performance
tests.
Specific operator commands not exercised during the tests shall be

checked individually during the operator command test.
(k) Computer and Standard Peripherals
The computer manufacturers' standard diagnostics will be used to

test the CPUs and the standard peripherals.
The Contractor shall instruct the S.O./Employer and/or his

representative on how to bring in and run all the standard
diagnostics. This instruction shall include how to determine the
completion of a successful pass, and how to interpret error
messages given in the diagnostic documentation.
TS/M/S17/16 2602542S/AC
(l) Communication Equipment Operational Limits
Utilizing test equipment, the limits of a sample number of central

equipment and PLCs shall be tested. These test shall include the
transmission levels, the minimum levels which can be received, the
transmission is still possible, and the limits of the frequencies
which can be received correctly. Dummy, Iumped constant lines
shall be used to test the transmission limits.
(m) Communication Error Rates
Communication error rates tests shall be conducted concurrently

with other tests, A single white noise generator shall be connected
to the lines during the various tests on the system functions.
Periodically, the transmission fault count for the line shall be
requested.
A successful test will be indicated if there has been less than one
error count per 106 SECONDS OF OPERATIONS.
(o) Documentation
The documentation for the system shall be completed and ready

before the commencement of the commissioning tests. This
documentation shall be made available to the S.O./Employer and
this representative throughout the commissioning and performance
testing phases.
8. Maintenance
8.1. General
This section of the Specification sets out the requirements on

documentation which shall be complied with and provided by the
Contractor.
All documentation shall be written in the English Language, and using

accepted terminology and diagrams. The documentation shall be written
in a clear and concise manner and shall be presented in a neat, well-
organised and logical format.
The Sub-Contractor shall submit to the S.O./Employer for approval a

record keeping system including procedures to ensure that all changes or
modifications are fully documented. Changes or modifications whether in
equipment hardware or software shall be documented immediately and
submitted to the S.O./Employer for approval.
TS/M/S17/17 2602542S/AC
A master record shall be set up and maintained by the Contractor for each
sub-system and component. The initial documentation shall be entered as
well as all changes/ modifications records shall be handed over to the
S.O./Employer prior to the commencement of the Defects Liability Period.
The documentation shall be a detailed presentation with manuscript and

illustrations. For each component, it shall include, but not be limited to:
(a) description
(b) functional description
(c) functional block diagrams
(d) operating instructions and characteristic
(e) maintenance and repair procedures
(f) test procedures
(g) schematic drawings and circuit diagrams
(h) as-built drawings
(i) parts lists
(j) program listings
(k) other information as deemed necessary by the S.O./Employer for
the completeness and adequacy of the documents.
8.2. Documentation Presentation
All documentation shall be subject to approval of the S.O./Employer with

respect to completeness adequacy and presentation.
All documentation shall be prepared in a clear concise manner with

appropriate illustrations and tabulations supporting the text.
All documentation shall be bound in loose leaf thick cover volumes and
shall have the appropriate title printed on the front and along the binder
spine. Binding shall be subjected to approval by the S.O./Employer.
A comprehensive index shall be compiled for each system, sub-system and

equipment.
Dividers shall be provided between sections in each volume. All

documents shall be neatly organised to enable easy reading.
The numbering and indexing system employed for the documents shall be
sufficiently flexible to allow for progressive additions, amendments and
editorial changes without complete re-arrangement.
One copy of the final version of the installation documents, operator's

handbook, and maintenance manual shall be bound with each page
contained in a clear plastic sheath of the type capable of being easily
removed for amendments and additions. The protection against smudging
by water, oil and other liquids and damages through rough usage.
TS/M/S17/18 2602542S/AC
Three copies of the final edition of Total System Documentation shall be
supplied within one month of the commencement of the Defects Liability
Period.
Re-issues shall be provided when changes or modification are made in

equipment hardware or software. The Contractor may re-issue individual
sheets or portions of the documentation that are affected by the changes
or modifications. Each re-issue or revision shall carry the same title as the
original while the issue code number shall be made serially. However, any
revisions of the final documentation material will require a total re-issue of
the entire volume concerned with change or modification.
8.3. System Design Document
This document shall define clearly and in detail the design philosophy,
objectives, principle and criteria of the system. This document shall be
prepared immediately after acceptance of Tender.
The document shall explicitly highlight the ways and means employed in
the design of the system to achieve the system functional and operational
requirements specified herein.
Detailed descriptions of the characteristics of sub-system, equipment and

components, with respect to the part they play in the entire system in
achieving the specified functional and operational requirements shall be
covered.
Three copies of the System Design Document and subsequent

amendments approved by the S.O./Employer shall be supplied within three
(3) months after the award of the contract. This document shall form a
part of the OPERATION, MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
MANUAL of the total system documentation.
8.4. Installation Document
This document shall cover all the installation aspects of the System and
shall serve as a guide and a record of all the installation procedures on
site. All sub-systems, systems equipment and components shall be
covered in the document and all installation drawings shall be included.
The document shall include the following minimum information:
(a) Detail drawings and descriptions of size, weight, material, colour,

finishes, etc., of each piece of equipment.
(b) Detail drawings and descriptions of mounting methods, installation

procedures, cables connections, access provisions, etc., of each
piece of equipment.
TS/M/S17/19 2602542S/AC
(c) Location of all equipment at site to be shown on building plans.
(d) Layout of Control Room and control console arrangement.
(e) All signal transmission and power cable routes on the building
plans.
(f) Schematic and circuit diagrams of all necessary field wiring.
(g) Layout of mimic and display panels.
(h) The routine of operation, from necessary preparations for placing

the equipment into operation to securing the equipment after
operation, shall be fully described. Appropriate illustrations shall
be provided. The sequence illustrations shall be presented in
tabular form wherever possible.
A list of applicable test instruments, aids and tools required in the

performance of necessary measurements and techniques shall be included.
Set-up tests and calibration procedures shall be described.
Five copies of the document, including amendments issues shall be

submitted one month prior to commencement of site installation. The
updated edition of the document shall form part of the OPERATION,
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING MANUAL of the total System
Documentation.
8.5. Software Document
Full software documentation necessary to operate, maintain, update and

modify the software of the System shall be provided.
All relevant information, such as system data records, data structure, data
flow charts, calling sequences, definition of abbreviation, macros, memory
maps, timing, file structures, programme listing, etc., shall be included.
The document shall explain the overall software structure with flow charts
and descriptions, with particular attention to the points at which future
user programs can be interfaced. The complete operating structure shall
be explained such that it is clearly understood, especially by any
competent programmer who wishes to specify or interface a new program
into the System.
In the overall description, the allocation of storage and times to the

component jobs shall be given, with the limits of spare capacity. A
detailed description of each component job in operating system shall
follow, including the executive, handlers and user programs.
TS/M/S17/20 2602542S/AC
Each program shall have a functional description, with flow charts, etc.,
together with the actual listing with narrative. An instruction list for each
program step shall be provided.
Documentation shall be provided for all software programs, including

support software program, developed by the computer manufacturer and
by the Contractor himself to develop the operational software, and those
provided for system performance monitoring and fault diagnosis.
Three copies of the documentation issues, including re-issues shall be

provided when these become available.
The entire software documentation shall form the SOFTWARE

MANUAL of the Total System Documentation.
The implementation of the control logic, and codes are deemed to be the
property of the Employer, and to be appropriately documented and
handed over to.
8.6. Operator Manual
This manual shall comprise a concise set of procedures which the BAS
operator may require to operate the System. The minimum detailed
technical description of the internal operations of the various parts of the
System shall be provided. Cross reference to the appropriate manuals for
detailed technical description shall be provided.
The manual shall list and explain the specific procedures to be followed
for both hardware and software operations. Instructions shall be as basic
and detailed as necessary. Instructions shall be provided for operational
aspects of the system, including normal day-to-day operations, switching
on and off power, starting and shutting of the System, power failure
restart, loading of programs, checking of performance, etc.
Additionally, procedures shall be given for fault diagnosis. Typical

systems shall be listed, and instructions given to run the appropriate test
routines.
Five copies of the Operator's Manual shall be submitted to the

S.O./Employer three (3) months before the commencement of
commissioning tests.
TS/M/S17/21 2602542S/AC
8.7. Maintenance Document
The documentation of maintenance of the System shall include both

preventive maintenance and corrective maintenance.
Preventive Maintenance
The manufacturer's recommended procedures and checks, necessary for

proper preventive maintenance shall be indicated. These procedures and
checks shall be specified for pre-operation, daily, weekly, monthly,
quarterly, semi-annual and as required as necessary to ensure reliable
equipment operations. Specifications including defined tolerances for all
electrical, mechanical and other applicable measurements and adjustments
or both shall be listed.
Corrective Maintenance
This section shall provide the information necessary for isolation and
repair of failure and malfunctions. Accuracies, limits and tolerances for all
electrical, physical and other applicable measurements shall be described.
Instructions for re-assembly, overhaul and re-assembly, including shop
specification and performance requirement shall be provided.
Fully detailed step by step instructions shall be given where failure to

follow special procedures would result in danger to operating or
maintenance personnel, damage to the equipment, improper operation,
excessive effort in man hours, etc. Instructions and specifications shall be
included for such maintenance as may be accomplished by specialised
technicians and engineers in a modern electromechanical workshop.
Instructions concerning special test set-up, component fabrication, use of

special tools, jigs, and test equipment shall be included. Maintenance
procedures shall cover the diagnosis of faults, testing and setting up
adjustments, replacements of units, routine mechanical servicing and
operation of test equipment. The use of test programs shall be explained,
with step by step instructions for running them, but the detailed listing of
the programs shall be provided separately. The operation of the data
transmission test programs in conjunction with the test sets shall be
covered, with procedures for line testing, and for checking the outstation
in conjunction with the BAS control room. Steps for the replacement of
plug in units of the computer system shall be given.
TS/M/S17/22 2602542S/AC
8.8. Parts List
A detailed list of all parts shall be provided. It shall contain the

information necessary to describe the characteristics of the individual parts
required for identification. All equipment within a group and all
assemblies, sub-assemblies and replacement parts of units shall be listed.
The tabular arrangement shall be in alphanumeric number. A table of
contents or other convenient method, e.g., appropriate grouping, shall be
provided for the purpose of identifying major components, assemblies,
where possible, etc.
Equivalent standard parts shall be defined when manufacturer's in-house

numbers are used as identification.
8.9. Standard Operation Instructions and Maintenance Manual
The above Documentation is in addition to the Standard Operation

Instructions and Maintenance Manual as specified. The S.O./Employer
shall have his final say in case of discrepancies.
9. Training
9.1. General
The Contractor shall arrange and conduct training by qualified and
experienced personnel as follows:
(a) Technical training

(b) Operations training
(c) Maintenance training
All the training course shall be documented and fully supported by a

generous quantity of relevant literature, materials and teaching aids. All
necessary training documents, literature and materials shall be given to all
the trainees undergoing the courses.
9.2. Technical training
The Contractor shall provide a comprehensive training course for the

whole BAS including the data processing sub-systems, data transmission,
all the peripherals, input and output devices, displays, and all other
equipment and modules used in the system, inclusive of equipment
manufactured by others but supplied under this Contract. The design
philosophy, design factors, principles and theory of operation,
programming checking, commissioning and maintenance procedures for
each sub-assembly and module as well as the total system shall be
thoroughly covered in the training.
TS/M/S17/23 2602542S/AC
The course structure and method of presentation shall be specifically
geared towards the types of equipment supplied under this contract and
their operations. All theoretical explanation shall be supplemented by
practical details on the installation, operation, checking and maintenance
of the system and equipment.
Use of all items of testing and commissioning equipment, and computer

programs for fault diagnosis and location shall be covered. The objective
of the training course shall be such that the trainees, after completing the
courses, shall be capable of fully understanding the design philosophy,
principles of operation of the system and equipment, commissioning,
operating, checking, trouble shooting and maintaining the system and
equipment.
The Contractor shall provide for employer staffs the Technical Training
Course to be conducted at the BAS contractor's premises, at a time as
decided by the employer. The training shall be conducted in 2 groups
each over 5 days.
9.3. Operation Training
The Contractor shall provide the training courses on the operating of the
system to the employer. The courses shall cover in detail, all the
operational aspects and procedures of the system including all necessary
application programming, such that the trainees shall be fully capable of
operating the system after attending the course. The training shall be
conducted in 2 groups each over 10 days.
9.4. Maintenance Training
The Contractor shall provide suitable comprehensive training courses for

employer's staff on the maintenance of the system.
All preventive and corrective maintenance procedures and techniques shall

be covered so that the trainees, after attending the course, shall be capable
of carrying out all the preventive and corrective maintenance of the
system, from trouble-shooting, fault location, changing of equipment/
modules, etc. Participation of the trainees in all preventive and corrective
maintenance during the Defects Liability Period shall be provided to
enable the trainees to gain first hand experience in maintaining the system
and equipment. The training shall be conducted in 2 groups each over 10
days.
TS/M/S17/24 2602542S/AC
9.5. Training Course Information
The Contractor shall submit the following information on the training for
review and approval at least three (3) months prior to the commencement
of each course:
(a) a detail description of the structure and contents of the course.
(b) a detail description of break-down time allocation for the course,
(c) a list of persons conducting the course, with details on their

qualification and training experience.
(d) a set of draft training documentation and materials such as training

manuals, notes, charts, catalogues, slides, transparencies teaching
aids, etc.,
(e) a detailed description of the objectives of the course, and

measures to ascertain that the course objectives are accomplished.
The timing of each course shall be properly phased into the overall project
schedule. Software programming training and local technical training shall
be completed three months before the scheduled commissioning of the
system. Operational training shall be completed before handing over of
the system. Maintenance training shall be completed before the expiry of
the Defects Liability Period.
The S.O./Employer reserves the right to accept, change, modify or reject

whole of part, any or all of the courses proposed if in his opinion, the
courses proposed are not up to expectation.
Courses shall be conducted during normal office hours but it shall be held
in evening if such training session interfere or interrupt the smooth
progress of the execution of the works.
The medium of instruction and all training materials and documentation

shall be in English Language.
10. Maintenance and Servicing
10.1. This section of specification sets out the Contractor responsibility for the
Comprehensive maintenance and servicing of the PLC System during the
term of the warranty and free 15 months maintenance period as well
as after the warranty period.
TS/M/S17/25 2602542S/AC
10.2. The 15 months warranty period shall commence after the success-
ful handover of the entire PLC System to User Department. It is
the responsibility of the contractor to maintain the PLC system in first-
class running condition.
10.3. During the warranty period, the Contractor shall carry our fifteen free
servicing to the system at approximately monthly intervals in accordance
with the maintenance responsibilities outlined hereinafter. Allowance shall
be made in the tender for any cost incurred in complying with this
requirement.
10.4. The Contractor shall replace all faulty or damaged parts of the building
automation system with new ones, and replenish all consumable material
during the warranty period at no expense to the User Department. All
replaced parts shall have a new warrantee of one year start from the actual
date of installation at site. This clause shall override any standard warranty
condition of the Contractor or his supplier of equipment. Allowance shall
be made here for any cost incurred in complying with this requirement.
10.5. The Contractor shall prepare a detailed inspection and service report form
showing the functions to be carried out and the intervals between each
function to enable records of servicing to be maintained. The functions
shall include all the maintenance responsibilities outlined hereinafter for
each specific system plus any other special maintenance requirements
recommended by the manufacturers of equipment.
10.6. Routine maintenance and servicing to the PLC System is to be carried out
during normal working hours unless it is otherwise specified elsewhere in
this specification.
10.7. During the warranty period, the Contractor shall attend to any complaint
calls promptly at no expense to the User Department.
10.8. As the BAS operates on 24-hour basis, the Contractor shall ensure that
24-hour service is provided for the attendance of any emergency calls after
normal work hours.
10.9. After the attendance of complaint calls and completion of repair work, a
copy of the fault report or service chit duly signed by the User Department
for information and record.
10.10. Final payment of retention monies to the Contractor will be certified only
after evidence of regular and satisfactory maintenance during the warranty
period has been shown.
TS/M/S17/26 2602542S/AC
10.11. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages caused to the
installation of the User Department's property through the act of
negligence of their workmen except where it can be proven that it is not
fault of theirs.
10.12. The breakdown of equipment and installation shall deem to have occurred
when such equipment or installation will not perform the designed
function or performance.
10.13. No equipment, except standby equipment, shall be taken out for the
service for maintenance during peak load period, unless due to breakdown
or other emergency or scheduled annual overhaul.
10.14. The Contractor shall if so required remedy any defects or omissions

discovered or appearing therein even though previously certified to be in
good condition by the S.O./Employer during handover at Substantial
completion.
10.15. The S.O./Employer is thereby empowered to extend the time for this free
Maintenance & Servicing of the equipment for such period as in his
absolute discretion he may consider necessary for the thorough
examination of all work and completion of such as may be found
defective.
10.16. It is to be distinctly understood that the User Department shall have the
full, free and unrestricted use of the said works without any interference
whatsoever on the part of the Contractor during the currency of this
period and such use on the part of the User Department shall not held as
relieving the Contractor of any liabilities or obligations in respect of this
Contract.
10.17. Consumable Materials
The following consumables shall be provided free of charges in the

carrying out of the Maintenance and Servicing:
(a) all coolant, oil, grease and lubricant
(b) all fuses and indication lamps
(c) all carbon brushes in motors
(d) all electrical contact points
(e) all detergent and cleaning fluid for equipment
(f) all paints and anti-corrosion primer
TS/M/S17/27 2602542S/AC
(g) all cotton waste and rags
(h) all necessary paper for the printing of messages, alarms, reports,
etc. during the contract period. This shall include fanfold paper,
special inkjet papers, paper for colour laser printer and the sizes
shall be in both A4 & A3. During the Defects Liability Period, the
contractor shall supply at least 10 boxes of fanfold paper A3 for
log inkjet paper & 5 reams of special paper for colour laser
printer.
10.18. Maintenance Program
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the S.O./Employer at the time
of tender a preventive maintenance and servicing programme to be carried
out by him during the Defects Liability Period and after the Defects
Liability Period if a Maintenance Contract is entered into with them. The
programme shall contain all works necessary for the testing, checking,
cleaning, lubrication, adjustment, refurnishing, replacement of field
sensors/transducer monitoring other electromechanical and electro-
pneumatic devices, etc., and the frequency in which such works shall
executed. Upon approval of the preventive maintenance program, the
Contractor shall incorporate such works in the Maintenance Records and
Job Sheet as specified herein.
10.19. Maintenance Records and Job Sheets
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the S.O./Employer two (2)
months before the expected commencement date of the Defects Liability
Period a draft format of all Maintenance Records and Job Sheets for
approval. Upon approval of the format the Contractor shall arrange for
the printing on quality paper of the year's supply of the Maintenance
Records and Job Sheets which shall be used by the Contractor during the
Defects Liability Period. Samples of Maintenance Record and Job Sheets
shall be incorporated in the Maintenance Manual.
The Contractor shall provide and use self-adhesive waterproof
Maintenance Record Tags which shall be attached to all equipment and
components indicating the nature of servicing. The format of such records
tags shall be subject to approval.
TS/M/S17/28 2602542S/AC
10.20. Reporting Faults
The Contractor shall provide the S.O./Employer with a single telephone

number for reporting all faults of the system. This telephone shall be
manned during the hours of 0800 hours - 1700 hours by English speaking
staff provided by the Contractor and the standards of maintenance shall be
based on the time when the fault condition is reported to them under this
clause.
Additionally, the Contractor shall provide a responsible and senior
member of his maintenance team with a radio pager for the purpose of
contacting him during 1700 hours - 0800 hours for emergency repairs.
10.21. Maintenance Log
The Contractor shall provide a sturdily bound logbook for purpose of

recording all fault reports and the action taken by the Contractor.
The System Operators will enter into the logbook the time of notification
of fault the Contractor, and the time of arrival of the relevant maintenance
personnel. The Contractor's maintenance personnel shall enter into the
log the nature of the fault, the action taken and the time at which the fault
was rectified and the system put back into normal operation.
The Contractor shall study the logbook regularly, and shall submit a
separate report on the nature and cause of recurrent and/or intermittent
faults which occur at a frequency high than accepted by the
S.O./Employer. This report shall include the action which the BAS
contractor intends to take to diagnose and rectify the faults, together with
a time schedule of the works.
10.22. Test Equipment and Tools
The Contractor shall supply all equipment and instruments necessary for
checking, testing, starting up and trouble-shooting of the system, and all
tools for adjustments and preventive maintenance.
The equipment, instruments and tools shall be new and shall be handed in
similar condition to the User Department at the commencement of the
Defects Liability Period, and during subsequent maintenance period (if a
subsequent Maintenance Contract is entered into).
All test equipment shall operate on their own battery or obtain power
from the module under test, or on 230V, 50Hz, single phase supply and
shall be capable of being operated at temperatures up to 40°C and relative
humidity up to 95%.
The Tenderer shall provide a comprehensive list of all the equipment,

instruments and tools which will be provided, the purpose and use of each
item, and the unit price.
TS/M/S17/29 2602542S/AC
10.23. Spares
The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply of all spare sub-
assembly modules and components required for continuous operation of
the System during the Defects Liability Period. A list of recommended
spares (including unit price and quantities) for use during the Defects
Liability Period shall be submitted at the time of tender and included in the
tender price.
10.24. Response Time to Faults/Failure
Where faults had been identified by the SO/Employer, and duly report,
whether verbally or in writing, the faults shall be attended to within 4
hours. Where critical faults/failures are involved, the faults/failures shall
be attended to within 2 hours, irregardless whether the faults/failures
occur during off-office hour or not.
TS/M/S17/30 2602542S/AC
SECTION 18 - AUTOMATION & MONITORING SYSTEM
1. General
1.1. The purpose of the specifications is to provide the operational concepts

and minimum standalone automation and monitoring system (BAS) to be
installed for the air conditioning and ventilation system and other services.
1.2. It is the intent of this Specification to secure a networked, computerized

automation and monitoring system which is user-friendly, has known
reliability, is extremely responsive, and which is to be designed, installed,
implemented, supported and serviced by a local office of the manufacturer,
by people skilled in providing functional and efficient solutions to present
and foresee future building system needs.
1.3. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall be a complete system

designed for use with the enterprise IT systems. This functionality shall
extend into the equipment rooms. Devices residing on the automation
network located in equipment rooms and similar shall be fully IT
compatible devices that mount and communicate directly on the IT
infrastructure in the facility. Contractor shall be responsible for
coordination with the owner’s IT staff to ensure that the BAS will perform
in the owner’s environment without disruption to any of the other
activities taking place on that LAN
1.4. The Building Automation system (BAS) shall comply to the following
standards:
a) Singapore Standard CP 5, Code of practice for electrical

Installations
b) Singapore Standard SS 553, Code of practice for air-

conditioning and mechanical ventilation in buildings
c) Singapore Standard SS 591, Code of practice for long term

measurement of central chilled water system energy efficiency
d) Singapore Building Control Authority: latest BCA Green Mark

Certification Standard
e) ANSI/ASHRAE 135 BACnet - A Data Communication

Protocol for Building Automation and Control Networks
f) ASHRAE Guide 22 Instrumentation for monitoring central

chilled-water plant efficiency
g) ASHRAE. Standard 135 : A Data Communication Protocol for

Building Automation and Control Networks (BACnet);
TS/M/S18/1 2602542S/AC
h) International Organization for Standardization ISO/IEC 9075-9:
Information Technology - Database Languages SQL – Part 9 :
Management of External Data (SQL/MED);
i) TIA/EIA 232-F Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment

and Data Circuit Terminating Equipment Employing Serial
Binary Data Exchange;
j) TIA/EIA 485-A : Electrical Characteristics of Generators and

Receivers for use in Balanced Digital Multipoint Systems;
k) TIA/EIA 568-C.1 : Commercial Building telecommunications

Cabling Standard;
l) Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol of Defence

Advanced Research Project Agency (TCP/IP);
m) International Organization for Standardization ISO/IEC 8802-3

: Standard for Ethernet.
1.5. The Sub-Contractor shall submit monthly report on the energy

consumption of all the equipment over the fifteen (15) months defects
liability period. The report formats shall be subjected to the S.O.'s
approval.
1.6. The BAS shall link to respective BMS/BAS system as listed in clause 4.2.
All the power meter, water meter, BTU meter or airflow station that is
used for utility billing shall be linked and program at University of Campus
infrastructure, Ventus building, Office of Facilities Management energy
metering system.
1.7. Integration to Wireless Mesh Network Lighting Management system and

provision for third party software interfacing
2. Materials
2.1 All materials shall be of new and good quality. All equipment and materials
previously installed or used shall be rejected. Materials and equipment
shall be stored in such a manner as to be in a new condition when installed
and to avoid damage from weather and site conditions. Damaged,
deformed and cracked equipment or materials shall be rejected.
Replacement shall be provided by the Sub-Contractor at no additional cost
to the University.
TS/M/S18/2 2602542S/AC
2.2 Materials and equipment to be incorporated into the works (as called for
in this Specification) are required to meet the quality/testing standards of
designed institutes, societies and standards associations. However,
equivalent materials and equipment items meeting other authoritative
standards which ensure equal or higher quality than the standards
mentioned may also be accepted and approved by the S.O..
2.3 Should the Sub-Contractor propose to furnish materials and equipment

other than those specified as permitted by the or approved equivalent
clause, he shall submit a written request for any such substitution. Such
requests shall be accompanied by complete descriptive (manufacturers,
brand name, catalog number, etc.) and technical data for all items, samples
of both the specified and the proposed substitute items.
2.4 The S.O. reserves the right to accept or reject any proposed substitutions.
2.5 The expenses incurred by any such exercise shall be borne in full by the
Sub-Contractor.
2.6 All sensors, control valves, actuators, D.D.C. controllers, shall be from the
BAS manufacturer.
3. Site Conditions
All equipment supplied shall be capable of operating effectively and efficiently

under the following site conditions:-
Maximum Temperature 35oC dry bulb

28oC wet bulb
Average Temperature 32oC dry bulb

26.5oC wet bulb

TS/M/S18/3 2602542S/AC
4. BAS Configuration
4.1. General
a) The building automation system shall be configured as a local

area network of fully intelligent and programmable
microprocessor-based controllers that will be monitoring and
controlling the various equipment. These controllers shall
operate independently without any loss of monitoring or control
functions in the event of a failure in the communication link with
other controllers. These controllers shall be on peer to peer
communication protocol. No hierarchical system configuration
shall be accepted.
b) Master/Slave type of controllers shall not be accepted.
4.2. BAS Central Control Station
The BAS Central Control Station is located at the Office of Facilities

Management and are linked to each individual Zone BAS system control
network. The location of BAS system are as follow:
Zone 1: Block EA, TLab, E6 and others are linked to OFM BAS/IBMS
through TCP/IP
Zone 2 : Uhall, Central library and others are linked to OFM BAS/IBMS
through TCP/IP
Zone 3: Block MD6 or MD3, S9, S16, S17 and others are linked to OFM
BAS/IBMS through TCP/IP
Zone 4: Block Com2, I4.0, I Cube, Bukit Timah Campus (BTC), AS2,
AS8 and others are linked to OFM BAS/IBMS through TCP/IP
All BAS shall link to OFM BAS and IBMS system through campus
intranet. New building shall have individual BAS station and link to OFM
Central BAS and IBMS station through NUS campus IT network
TS/M/S18/4 2602542S/AC
The BAS room at OFM shall be able to read all information in above list
Zone BAS System through Campus Intranet.
c) The communication network shall be designed to pass

information about environmental control and monitoring status
from one DDC Unit to another DDC Unit, PLC TO PLC,
POWER METER TO POWER METER, Level of
communication shall be kept to a minimum.
d) The communication network shall possess the following

features:-
- Flexibility - The network shall allow the future connection

of additional controllers without any changes to the
configuration of the network.
- Fully distributed intelligence - Each communication

controller on the network shall be managed by a
microprocessor which receives, transmit and checks all the
messages passing through it. No central network manager
shall be required.
- Integrity - Should the power be lost at any communication

controller or it detect an internal fault, a watchdog relay
shall automatically bridge the mode out of the network to
prevent disruption in the communication. The network
shall continuously check itself and report faults and
failures.
- Service functions - The communication controllers shall

allow all the DDC Units OR PLC Unit & etc to pass
information between each other to effect any control
function.
4.3. Data Communication
e) Communication between individual controllers within a BAS

shall be via the PEER TO PEER bus and must be open protocol
such as BACNET-MS/TP, METER BUS /MOD BUS for
meters and etc. It shall also support Ethernet connectivity at 100
mbps as backbone. The Ethernet controller shall also support
web interface for configuration. Each PEER bus shall be a
single pair of twisted wires with a minimum transmission rate of
no less than 1 M baud. Each controller shall be coupled to the
bus to assure that single or multiple controller Units failures will
not cause loss of communications with other bus connected
devices.
TS/M/S18/5 2602542S/AC
f) Full communications shall be sustained as long as there are at
least two operational devices on any segment of the bus.
g) Global data (all station messages) is to be available for use by

any device on the bus as inputs or outputs to its resident control
programs.
4.4. System Design Submission
The system configuration and a list of equipment employed by the BAS

system shall be submitted together with the Tender. Detail description of
equipment and components with respect to their performance in achieving
the specified system functional and operational requirements shall be also
attached. Every Direct Digital Control Unit /PLC Unit shall be equipped
with an alphanumeric LCD (liquid crystal display) display and shall have a
spare capacity of no less than twenty (25) per cent for future expansion.
4.5. Remote Access
All the remote access shall be using web access through internet web
browser using JAVA platform. The web view shall have all the function
of the main BAS station. These shall include :
a) Modification and delete of data base on user, user identification,

password and level of access
b) Modification to graphic and text
c) Creation of graphic and text
d) Printing of trend report, Alarm report, User login/logout report etc
e) Changing of Setpoint, value offset, etc
f) Command Start/Stop, time scheduling, etc
g) Login station user activity such as modification on the setpoint,

editing graphic and etc
h) Graphic page sizing to match the display screen, zoom in and

zoom out
i) Set up of trending for the required monitoring BAS point
j) Set up of Alarm point
Any software that required custom programming and modification will not
be acceptable.
TS/M/S18/6 2602542S/AC
5. System Description
5.1. General
a) The BAS shall be supplied, installed, supervised and

commissioned by a BCA registered specialist contractor with a
proven track record and suitable references of systems installed.
b) The BAS shall be manufactured by a reputable manufacturer.

System content and software should be not be less than ninety-
five percent of the manufacturers own production.
c) The BAS shall consist of an information sharing network of

standalone Direct Digital Control Unit /PLC Unit to monitor and
control equipment as per the control sequence and the
input/output summary.
d) "Information sharing" shall be defined as : the function of each

DDC Unit/PLC Unit to exchange data on the network trunk
with other DDC Unit/PLC Unit without the need for additional
devices such as network managers, gateways or central
computers.
e) "Standalone" shall be defined as : the functions of each DDC

Unit/PLC Unit to independently monitor, control and operate
connected equipment through its own microcomputer.
f) The new system to be provided shall consist of the following

main components:-
- Direct Digital Control Units;/PLC Unit
- the DDC Unit/PLC Unit shall link or interface to the

central computer.
g) The new system shall have gateway/bridges interfaces such as

OPC-Server for connective to other control LAN networks.
TS/M/S18/7 2602542S/AC
5.2. System Function and Operational Training
a) The BAS shall provide centralized surveillance of all plant such as

air conditioning and ventilation with control facilities as indicated
in the attached schedules and appendices.
b) The manufacturer shall provide without additional cost to the

University a qualified engineer for one week at the University's
premises to provide training for the University's staff in system
operation and maintenance. This training shall be additional to any
other training provided during commissioning, and a programmed
detailing period and content shall be provided by the manufacturer
in advance.
c) The Sub-Contractor shall furnish five (5) sets of comprehensive

O&M manual with pictures and explanation of all control
schematic and floor plan as they appear in the central computer.
d) Tenderers shall submit clause by clause compliance list of the

proposed BAS system for evaluation. Any deviation shall be
explained in full sentences with drawing or supporting document
to illustrate if necessary.
5.3. DDC Programming
The application programme for the DDC shall be programmed using

graphical software. This software shall provide the operator with wiring
terminations, schematic representations of plant, and hardware
configuration of PCB giving details on the numbers and types of points
used in the DDC. This information shall be given in a printed format.
5.4. DDC Controllers
a) All controllers furnished for the project shall be of fully

standalone intelligent type. In the event of loss of
communication with the central computer, the controllers shall be
fully operational. Master/Slave type of controllers shall not be
acceptable.
b) All controllers communication shall be of BACNET-MS/TP or

other open protocol which third party software is able to read the
DDC information. BACNET device shall be BTL listed and
certified.
c) All controllers shall monitor and control, digital input, digital

output, analog input and analog output points. A minimum of 25%
spare capacity shall be provided at each controller. All DDC panel
shall have surge protection device installed.
TS/M/S18/8 2602542S/AC
d) All controllers shall be linked to each other via a Central Bus or
BACENET-MS/TP for peer communication (local area
networking). It shall be possible to command, read and adjust
parameters of all controllers linked on the same peer bus from any
controller without need of any tool, portable operator terminal or
PC.
e) The controller shall comply with radio interference standards VDE

871/875 and protection standards of IP30 according to DIN 40
050 or IEC 144.
f) AHU and Plantroom Control
1) Each AHU shall be provided with a DDC controller. The

controller shall have a minimum 16-bit microprocessor
with flash memory for the operating system and the
application programme.
2) All DDC controllers shall be equipped with an

alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD) with large
display area (80 characters or more). A touch panel
keyboard shall be provided for retrieval of data and
adjustment of parameters. Mode of operation of the LCD
and keyboard shall be based on easy-to-understand
dialogue driven menu.
Features to be provided on the controllers must include:
- Direct Digital Control
- Full Energy Management Programs (EMS)
- Real Time Clock. The real time clock shall have a 100-year
calendar with automatic leap year adjustment to provide
time of day, day of week and date.
- Time Programs
- Holiday and Occupancy Schedules.
- Data Collection, Processing and Reporting.
TS/M/S18/9 2602542S/AC
- Battery Backed Up Data Logging. A hardware watchdog
shall observe the battery voltage under load to announce
the end of battery life prior to possible data losses. The
battery has to be able to save the total volatile memory for
at least 3 days after "battery down" alarm in order to give
opportunity to replace the battery.
- Local and Central Alarm Monitoring.
- Low Voltage Safety Power Supply.
- Auto-Dialing, Public Telephone Network Communication

(CCITTV.24/V.28/V.25bis AT-HAYES)- This auto
dialing feature shall be made available by the mere addition
of a modem, without any other hardware/software costs.
- Access Levels - minimum 3 levels.
- Protection Against Unauthorized Access Through

Password
- Alarm Management with minimum 3 alarm categories. All

alarms shall be time-stamped. Alarm buffer shall be
provided for auto-dial applications.
3) PLC/DDC shall be provided for chiller plant room control

such as chillers, water pumps, cooling towers, VSDs, by-
pass valves, etc. Please refer to PLC technical
specification, drawing, specification
4) The PLC/DDC for the chiller control shall be equipped

with a high level interfacing module to interface with the
chillers or other equipment microprocessors.
- PLC shall be equipped with an alphanumeric LCD (liquid

crystal display) display. A touch panel keyboard shall be
provided for retrieval of data and adjustment of
parameters. Model of operation of the LCD display and
keyboard shall be based on easy-to- understand dialogue
driven menu.
TS/M/S18/10 2602542S/AC
g) PLC/DDC Controls (F.C.U.)
Each FCU shall be provided with a PLC/DDC controller. All

PLC/DDC controller shall come with full DDC functionality and
real time clock to perform real time functions.
The LCD display shall provide alphanumeric indication of:
- Actual Room Temperature and Setpoint Levels
- Actual Time and Time Schedule
- Operation Mode
- All other adjustments
It shall have provisions to accept the following inputs:
- Room Temperature Sensor
- Occupancy Sensor
A built-in real time clock shall be provided for automatic
setpoint ranges for comfort, standby and night modes. A
7-day switching program with up to 4 switching points per
day shall be provided. An early adjusted overtime function,
with automatic reset at the time-out signal shall provide
users the flexibility of extending the day level as required.
All PLC/DDC controllers provided shall be capable of
operating in full "stand alone" operation as part of a larger
control system. Individual data memory shall be fully
backup by battery for power interruption of at least 72
hours.
TS/M/S18/11 2602542S/AC
h) DDC Controls (VAV)
1) The VAV box controller shall be a standalone networked

DDC thermostat of 8-bit microprocessor based type with
real time clock and proportional plus integral control.
2) The VAV box controller shall have built-in operator

interface with keypad and alphanumeric liquid crystal
display (LCD). The LCD shall have alphanumeric
indication of:-
i) actual room temperature and set-point;
ii) actual time and time schedule;
iii) occupied / unoccupied operation mode;
iv) provide multi inputs for thermostat, and

all other adjustments.
v) thermostat shall have proportional output to

control the damper actuator at minimum (10%)
and maximum (100%) positioning without
mechanical jam to actuator
3) Each VAV controller, operating parameters, set points and

schedule shall be stored in non-volatile EEPROM memory
to prevent loss during loss of power to the controller.
4) The DDC shall have built-in operator interface with

keypad and alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD). The
LCD shall have alphanumeric indication of :-
- actual room temperature and set-point levels
- actual time and time schedule
- operation mode
- all other adjustments
5) It shall have provisions to accept inputs from temperature

and other sensors.
It shall have a 24-volt AC pulse output. The DDC shall

provide room temperature control accuracy of not greater
than ±0.5°C.
TS/M/S18/12 2602542S/AC
6) A built-in real time clock shall be provided for automatic
setpoint ranges for comfort, standby and night modes. A
7-day switching program with up to 4 switching points per
day shall be provided. An early adjusted overtime function,
with automatic reset at the time-out signal shall provide
users with flexibility of extending the day level as required.
7) All DDC controllers provided shall be capable of operating

in full “stand alone” operation as part of a larger control
system. Individual data memory shall be fully backup
battery for power interruption of at least 72 hours.
Each DDC output can drive up to 2 motor actuator of the

VAV Boxes.
8) All DDC shall be installed below the false ceiling for ease
of maintenance.
i) DDC control for Laboratory Airflow Control
Please refer to the tender drawing & technical specification
Each lab control shall be installed with a 16-bit DDC, to

monitor and control the temperature & humidity with the
following field devices:
Venturi valves/Fast Respond Variable Air Volume valves
Differential Pressure Transmitter
Room Temperature Sensor
Room Humidity Sensor
Hot Water Valve
TS/M/S18/13 2602542S/AC
j) Web-based Network Gateways
The Web-based Network Gateways shall be a fully user-

programmable, supervisory controller. The Web-based Network
Gateways shall monitor the network of distributed application-
specific controllers, provide global strategy and direction, and
communicate on a peer-to-peer basis with other Web-based
Network Gateways.
Automation network – The Web-based Network Gateways

shall reside on the automation network and shall support a
subnet of system controllers.
User Interface – Each Web-based Network Gateways shall have
the ability to deliver a web based User Interface (UI) as
previously described. All computers connected physically or
virtually to the automation network shall have access to the web
based UI.
1) The web based UI software shall be imbedded in the

Web-based Network Gateways. Systems that require a
local copy of the system database on the user’s personal
computer are not acceptable.
2) The Web-based Network Gateways shall support up a

minimum of four (4) concurrent users.
3) The web based user shall have the capability to access

all system data through one Web-based Network
Gateways.
4) Remote users connected to the network through an

Internet Service Provider (ISP) or telephone dial up
shall also have total system access through one Web-
based Network Gateways.
5) Systems that require the user to address more than one

Web-based Network Gateways to access all system
information are not acceptable.
6) The Web-based Network Gateways shall have the

capability of generating web based UI graphics. The
graphics capability shall be imbedded in the Web-based
Network Gateways.
7) Systems that support UI Graphics from a central

database or require the graphics to reside on the user’s
personal computer are not acceptable.
TS/M/S18/14 2602542S/AC
8) The web based UI shall support the following functions
using a standard version of Microsoft Internet
Explorer:
i) Configuration
ii) Commissioning
iii) Data Archiving
iv) Monitoring
v) Commanding
vi) System Diagnostics
9) Systems that require workstation software or modified

web browsers are not acceptable.
10) The Web-based Network Gateways shall allow

temporary use of portable devices without interrupting
the normal operation of permanently connected
modems.
Processor – The Web-based Network Gateways shall be

microprocessor-based shall have minimum 300 MHz with a
minimum word size of 32 bits. The Web-based Network
Gateways shall be a multi-tasking, multi-user, and real-time
digital control processor. Standard operating systems shall be
employed. Web-based Network Gateways size and capability
shall be sufficient to fully meet the requirements of this
Specification.
Memory – Each Web-based Network Gateways shall have

sufficient memory of not less than 256 MB Flash card
EPROM to support its own operating system, databases,
control programs, and to provide supervisory control for all
control level devices. Also, the gateway shall have a memory
of 256MB Synchronous DRAM for the operating of dynamic
memory.
Hardware Real Time Clock – The Web-based Network

Gateways shall include an integrated, hardware-based, real-
time clock.
TS/M/S18/15 2602542S/AC
The Web-based Network Gateways shall include
troubleshooting LED indicators to identify the following
conditions:
1) Power - On/Off
2) Ethernet Traffic – Ethernet Traffic/No Ethernet

Traffic
3) Ethernet Connection Speed – 10 Mbps/100

Mbps/1000 Mbps
4) Field Controller Bus A – Normal Communications/No

Field Communications
5) Field Controller Bus B – Normal Communications/No

6) Peer Communication – Data Traffic between Network

Controllers Devices
7) Run – Web-based Network Gateways Running/ Web-

based Network Gateways in Startup/ Web-based
Network Gateways Shutting Down/Software Not
Running
8) Bat Fault – Battery Defective, Data Protection

Battery Not Installed
9) 24 VAC – 24 VAC Present/Loss Of 24VAC
10) Fault – General Fault
11) Modem RX – Web-based Network Gateways Modem

Receiving Data
12) Modem TX – Web-based Network Gateways Modem

Transmitting Data
13) Communications Ports – The Web-based Network

Gateways shall provide the following ports for
operation of operator Input/Output (I/O) devices,
such as industry-standard computers, modems, and
portable operator’s terminals.
TS/M/S18/16 2602542S/AC
14) Two (2) USB port
15) Two (2) URS-232 serial data communication port
16) Two (2) RS-485 port
17) One (1) Ethernet port
Diagnostics – The Web-based Network Gateways shall

continuously perform self-diagnostics, communication
diagnosis, and diagnosis of all panel components. The Web-
based Network Gateways shall provide both local and remote
annunciation of any detected component failures, low battery
conditions, or repeated failures to establish communication.
Power Failure – In the event of the loss of normal power,

The Web-based Network Gateways shall continue to operate
for a user adjustable period of up to 10 minutes after which
there shall be an orderly shutdown of all programs to prevent
the loss of database or operating system software.
1) During a loss of normal power, the control sequences

shall go to the normal system shutdown conditions. All
critical configuration data shall be saved into Flash
memory.
2) Upon restoration of normal power and after a minimum

off-time delay, the controller shall automatically resume
full operation without manual intervention through a
normal soft-start sequence.
Certification – The Web-based Network Gateways shall be

listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
Controller network – The Web-based Network Gateways

shall support the following communication protocols on the
controller network:
1) The Web-based Network Gateways shall support

BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE
SSPC-135, Clause 9 on the controller network.
2) The Web-based Network Gateways shall be BACnet

Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL
Label.
TS/M/S18/17 2602542S/AC
3) The Web-based Network Gateways shall be tested
and certified as a BACnet Building Controller (B-
BC).
4) A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance

Statement shall be provided for the Web-based
Network Gateways.
5) The Web-based Network Gateways shall support a

minimum of 100 control devices.
The Web-based Network Gateways shall support LonWorks

enabled devices using the Free Topology Transceiver FTT10.
1) All LonWorks controls devices shall be LonMark

certified.

minimum of 255 LonWorks enabled control devices.
The Web-based Network Gateways shall support all Field

Bus.

2) The Bus shall conform to Electronic Industry

Alliance (EIA) Standard RS-485.
3) The Bus shall employ a master/slave protocol where

the Web-based Network Gateways is the master.
4) The Bus shall employ a four (4) level priority system

for polling frequency.
5) The Bus shall be optically isolated from the Web-

based Network Gateways.
TS/M/S18/18 2602542S/AC
k) Web-based IP Network Controller
Where specified in the drawing, the Web-based IP Network

Controller shall be a fully user-programmable, supervisory
controller. The Web-based IP Network Controller shall monitor
the network of distributed application-specific controllers,
provide global strategy and direction, and communicate on a
peer-to-peer basis with other Web-based IP Network
Controller. This shall only limited to small scale and standalone
system. All Web-based IP Network Controller shall have
LCD/LED display screen.
Automation network – The Web-based IP Network Controller

shall reside on the automation network and shall support a
subnet of system controllers. Web base controller acting as Web
base Network Gateway will not be acceptable
User Interface – Each Web-based IP Network Controller shall

have the ability to deliver a web based User Interface (UI) as
previously described. All computers connected physically or
virtually to the automation network shall have access to the web
based UI.
1) The web based UI software shall be imbedded in the Web-

based IP Network Controller. Systems that require a
local copy of the system database on the user’s personal
2) The Web-based IP Network Controller shall support up a

minimum of four (4) concurrent users.
3) The web base user shall have the capability to access all
system data through one Web-based IP Network
Controller.
4) Remote users connected to the network through an

Internet Service Provider (ISP) or telephone dial up
shall also have total system access through one Web-
based Cntroller.
5) Systems that require the user to address more than one

Web-based IP Network Controller to access all system
information are not acceptable.
6) The Web-based IP Network Controller shall have the

capability of generating web based UI graphics. The
graphics capability shall be imbedded in the Web-based
IP Network Controller.
TS/M/S18/19 2602542S/AC
7) Systems that support UI Graphics from a central database
or require the graphics to reside on the user’s personal
8) The web based UI shall support the following functions

using a standard version of Microsoft Internet Explorer:
i) Configuration
ii) Commissioning
iii) Data Archiving
iv) Monitoring
v) Commanding
vi) System Diagnostics
11) Systems that require workstation software or modified

web browsers are not acceptable.
12) The Web-based IP Network Controller shall allow

temporary use of portable devices without interrupting
the normal operation of permanently connected
modems.
Processor – The Web-based IP Network Controller shall be

microprocessor-based shall have minimum 166 MHz with a
minimum word size of 32 bits. The Web-based IP Network
Controller shall be a multi-tasking, multi-user, and real-time
digital control processor. Standard operating systems shall be
employed. Web-based IP Network Controller size and
capability shall be sufficient to fully meet the requirements of
this Specification.
Memory – Each Web-based IP Network Controller shall have

sufficient memory of not less than 32 MB Flash card EPROM
to support its own operating system, databases, control
programs, and to provide supervisory control for all control
level devices. Also, the gateway shall have a memory of 32MB
Synchronous DRAM for the operating of dynamic memory.
Hardware Real Time Clock – The Web-based IP Network

Controller shall include an integrated, hardware-based, real-time
clock.
TS/M/S18/20 2602542S/AC
The Web-based IP Network Controller shall include
troubleshooting LED indicators to identify the following
conditions:
1) Power - On/Off
2) Ethernet Traffic – Ethernet Traffic/No Ethernet Traffic
3) Ethernet Connection Speed – 10 Mbps/100 Mbps/1000

Mbps
4) Field Controller Bus A – Normal Communications/No

5) Field Controller Bus B – Normal Communications/No

6) Peer Communication – Data Traffic between Network

Controllers Devices
7) Run – Web-based IP Network Controller Running/

Web-based IP Network Controller in Startup/ Web-
based IP Network Controller Shutting Down/Software
Not Running
8) Bat Fault – Battery Defective, Data Protection Battery

Not Installed
9) 24 VAC – 24 VAC Present/Loss Of 24VAC
10) Fault – General Fault
11) Modem RX – Web-based IP Network Controller

Modem Receiving Data
12) Modem TX – Web-based IP Network Controller

Modem Transmitting Data
13) Communications Ports – The Web-based IP Network

Controller shall provide the following ports for
operation of operator Input/Output (I/O) devices, such
as industry-standard computers, modems, and portable
operator’s terminals.
14) Minimum One (1) USB port
TS/M/S18/21 2602542S/AC
15) Minimum One (1) RS-232 serial data communication
port
16) Minimum One (1) RS-485 port
17) One (1) Ethernet port
18) Minimum of 24 integrated I/Os (AO/AI and DO/DI)

connections which can be expandable for control and
monitoring
Diagnostics – The Web-based IP Network Controller shall

continuously perform self-diagnostics, communication
diagnosis, and diagnosis of all panel components. The Web-
based IP Network Controller shall provide both local and
remote annunciation of any detected component failures, low
battery conditions, or repeated failures to establish
communication.
Power Failure – In the event of the loss of normal power, The

Web-based IP Network Controller shall continue to operate for
a user adjustable period of up to 10 minutes after which there
shall be an orderly shutdown of all programs to prevent the loss
of database or operating system software.
1) During a loss of normal power, the control sequences

shall go to the normal system shutdown conditions. All
critical configuration data shall be saved into Flash
memory.
2) Upon restoration of normal power and after a minimum

off-time delay, the controller shall automatically resume
full operation without manual intervention through a
normal soft-start sequence.
Certification – The Web-based IP Network Controller shall be

listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
Controller network – The Web-based IP Network Controller

shall support the following communication protocols on the
controller network:
1) The Web-based IP Network Controller shall support

BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE
SSPC-135, Clause 9 on the controller network.
2) The Web-based IP Network Controller shall be BACnet

Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL Label.
TS/M/S18/22 2602542S/AC
3) The Web-based IP Network Controller shall be tested
and certified as a BACnet Building Controller (B-BC).
4) A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance

Statement shall be provided for the Web-based Network
Gateways.
5) The Web-based IP Network Controller shall support a

The Web-based IP Network Controller shall support LonWorks

enabled devices using the Free Topology Transceiver FTT10.
1) All LonWorks controls devices shall be LonMark

certified.

minimum of 32 LonWorks enabled control devices.
The Web-based IP Network Controller shall support all Field

Bus.

2) The Bus shall conform to Electronic Industry Alliance

(EIA) Standard RS-485.
3) The Bus shall employ a master/slave protocol where the

Web-based IP Network Controller is the master.
4) The Bus shall employ a four (4) level priority system for
polling frequency.
5) The Bus shall be optically isolated from the Web-based

Network Gateways.
TS/M/S18/23 2602542S/AC
6. System Hardware
6.1. Central Hardware
a) The central computer system is controlled by a high-end

Pentium CPU of OPC server type with latest server OS for
command entry, information management, network, alarm
management, and database management functions. All real- time
control functions, including scheduling, history collection and
alarming, shall be resident in the BAS network automation
controller to facilitate greater fault tolerance and reliability with
personal computers printers. . It shall be backed by a trained
service force of locally based personnel.
b) The CPU shall be as following as a minimum:
i. Memory – 32GB
ii. CPU– One dual-core Intel® Core™ processor i3-2100.
iii. Hard Drive – 320 GB free hard drive space
iv. Hard drive backup system – CD/RW, DVD/RW CD
v. ROM Drive – 32X performance
vi. Ports – (2) Serial and (1) parallel, (2)
vii. USB ports Keyboard – 101 Keyboard and 2 Button

Mouse
viii. LAN communications – Ethernet communications board

(2)
c) The printer shall be a colour laser printer suitable to print all the
graphics and report.
6.2. Dynamic Colour Graphic Display Terminal
A colour 32” LCD monitor of 1280 x 1024 resolution minimum and

display card with multiple monitor support is to be provided to display
plant diagrams which shall have the following features and capabilities:-
a) Standard library of AHU, FCU, fans, pumps, sensors, etc. shall

be available in the CAD library or Visio software and shall be
generated by CAD or Visio software for any background
drawings. The software shall be capable of accepting imported
CAD or Visio drawings done on other CAD or Visio software.
Access to the computer shall be through Microsoft Windows
interface.
TS/M/S18/24 2602542S/AC
b) All stored graphics shall be on the central disk system and freely
accessible via manual operation through the operator station
keyboard. It shall be possible to assign graphics to an address
structure.
c) The dynamic colour LCD shall be able to display alpha numeric

data and dynamic pictures simultaneously through a split screen
image. The system shall upon command display colour schematic
of building equipment or building areas being monitored and
simultaneously display the current measured variables associated
with the equipment or area.
d) The colour graphic of LCD shall be dynamic in that point data or

calculated values shall updated continuously while being observed.
The colour LCD shall have a flashing feature to indicate abnormal
condition.
e) By means of a mouse, which is provided, the cursor control

switching command should be able to perform effectively and
easily within the normal addressing procedure. Hence simplifying
the main machine dialogue.
f) The contractor shall supply metal console. The BAS/BMS

control center console shall be custom made galvanized metal
epoxy power coated of 2 tiers by 1 cubical for a total of 4
CPU and LCD monitors with 1 spare to suit the Client's
operations. The cubical size shall be 1500mm(L) x 1000mm
(W) x 2000mm (H). It shall be located at FCC and Chiller
room. The contractor shall submit the design for SO approval
7. Operator Station Software
7.1. General
a) Operator Station software shall include as a minimum Operating
System (OS), Data Base Manager, Communications Control,
Operator Interface (OI), Trend and History Files, Report
Generator, Support Utilities, Scheduler and Time and Event
Programs. Microsoft Internet Explorer for user interface
functions, Microsoft Office Professional for creation,
modification and maintenance of reports, sequences other
necessary building management functions
b) Real time operating system shall portray true multi-tasking

feature in providing concurrent execution of multiple real time
programs and custom program development.
TS/M/S18/25 2602542S/AC
c) Data Base Manager shall manage all data on an integrated and
non-redundant basis. It shall allow additions and deletions to the
data base without any detriment to the existing data. Cross
linkages will be provided such that no data required by a
software program can be deleted by the operator until that data
has been deleted from its respective program.
d) Communications control, scheduler, trend files, reports, operator

interface, and utilities shall be as specified hereinafter.
7.2. Operator Interface Software
a) Provide a hierarchical linked dynamic graphic operator interface

for accessing and displaying system data and commanding and
modifying equipment operation. The interface shall utilise the
mouse to provide "heads up operation: with pull-down menus,
dialogue boxes, zoom, coloration, animation and split screen to
facilitate operator understanding of the system.
b) A minimum of twenty (20) levels of graphic penetration

capability shall be provided with the hierarchy operator
assignable (for example : area, building, wing, floor air handler,
point group). Descriptions for graphics, points, alarms, etc. shall
be modified through the operators station under password
control.
c) Operator access to the system shall be under personal ID and

password control. Up to 12 alphanumeric characters for personal
ID and up to 12 alphanumeric characters for password shall be
assignable to each operator via the operator station. The
operator shall be able to access the system from any operator
station the system by entering the proper ID and password. The
operators shall be permitted to change their own password
without permitting access to any other password. Sign-off from
a station shall be a manual operation via pull-down menu or, if
no mouse or keyboard activity takes place within an assignable
time period, shall be automatic. Automatic sign-off period shall
be selectable from 10 minutes to 120 minutes for each operator
or may be disabled on a per operator basis. all sign-on/sign-off
activity shall be automatically archived on the operator station
for display or printout as desired.
TS/M/S18/26 2602542S/AC
d) Operator access to system points shall be controlled by
individual operator-assigned graphic hierarchy and by privileges
as hereinafter described. The hierarchy shall permit access to an
operator-assigned initial graphic and to all graphics linked to and
below the initial graphic. The operator shall not have access to
graphics in another hierarchical graphic "tree". For example, an
operator may have access to one building, but not to another
building, or to lighting points, but not fire alarm points. Each
operator shall have any combination of user assigned keyboard
privileges of alarm acknowledgment, point commanding, data
modification, DOS access, schedule changes and system
configuration changes.
e) Data to be displayed within a unique graphic shall be assignable

regardless of physical hardware address, communication channel
or point type (temperature, humidity, alarms, etc). Graphics shall
be on-line programmable and under ID and password control.
Points may be assignable to multiple graphics (10 minimum)
where necessary to facilitate operator understanding of system
operation.
f) Graphics shall also contain calculated or pseudo points. Each

physical point and each point assigned to a graphic shall be
assigned a text descriptor for use in reports.
g) Data segregation shall be provided for control of specific data

routed to an operator station; to an operator assigned station; or
to a given output device such as a printer. Point types shall be
randomly selectable such as all room temperature points, room
temperature points second floor, all duct temperature points,
HVAC points, command points, etc.
h) Penetration within a graphic hierarchy shall display each graphic

name as graphics are selected to facilitate operator
understanding. The "backtrace" shall permit the operator to
move upward in the hierarchy by mouse click on the backtrace.
The backtrace shall show at least the previous four penetration
levels. The operator shall be provided with the option of
showing each graphic full screen size with the backtrace as the
horizontal header or by showing a "stack" of Graphics, each with
a backtrace.
i) All operator accessed data shall be displayed on the colour

monitor. The operator shall select further penetration via mouse
click on an area, building, floor, fan, etc. The defined linked
graphic below shows that selection shall then be displayed.
Dynamic data shall be assignable to any and all graphics.
TS/M/S18/27 2602542S/AC
j) The operator shall be provided with a means to directly access
any graphic or any point without going through the penetration
path.
k) Direct access to graphics shall be menu selectable wherein the

operator may optionally enter the name of the graphic system
desired or select the desired graphic via cursor positioning on a
scroll bar listing of all graphics, or may be selected via keyboard
entry.
l) Operators may assign simple key names for points to allow

direct display or commanding of points. Key name assignments
shall be fully operator assignable and as simple as one, two or
three characters, or as lengthy as 20 characters, such that
frequently selected points may be accessed independent of
complex penetration schemes. For example, a fan serving the
south quadrant lobby of the headquarters building may be
assigned a key name as simple as "HF1". The key name
processor shall also allow the selection of graphics associated to
points by entering the key name and a graphic appendage, such
as "HF1 G", and shall allow the direct execution of a command
by entering the key name and a command appendage, such as
"HF1 ON".
m) Points (physical and pseudo) shall be displayed with dynamic

data provided by the system with appropriate text descriptors,
status or value and engineering unit. Colouration conventions
shall be variable for each class of points, as chosen by the owner.
In addition, animation shall be used to confirm latest commands
(e.g., fan rotation, damper position, fluid flow, etc.). All points
shall be dynamic with update rates adjustable on a per point
basis.
n) For operators with the appropriate privilege(s), points shall be

commanded directly from the colour monitor via mouse
selection. For a digital command point such as a valve position,
the valve would show its current state (e.g., CLOSED) and the
operator could select OPEN via mouse click. For most
operations, a keyboard equivalent shall be available for those
operators with that preference.
TS/M/S18/28 2602542S/AC
o) Upon selection of analog commandable points (such as discharge
air static pressure), a dialogue box shall appear containing the
following:
1) The value of the selected point as a decimal value and as

represented on a scaled bar chart element.
2) A scaled setpoint arrow pointed to the current position

of the setpoint value on the bar chart.
3) The decimal value of the setpoint with adjacent up-down

arrows.
4) The operator shall be afforded three months of analog

commanding from which to choose as follows:
- Click the cursor on the decimal setpoint value, and

enter a new setpoint value via the keyboard decimal
keypad.
- Drive the decimal value up or down by moving the

cursor to the desired position and clicking.
5) The bar chart shall also have associated arrows showing

the current position (scaled value) of the alarm limits.
p) An operator shall be permitted to split or realise the viewing

screen to show one graphic on the left half of the screen and
another graphic, spreadsheet, bar chart, word processing, curve
plot, etc., on the right half screen.
q) This will allow real time monitoring of one part of the system
while displaying other parts of the system or data from the
system to facilitate system operation.
r) An on-line context-sensitive help utility shall be provided to

facilitate operator training and understanding. The help feature
shall be a hypertext document with the ability too bridge to
further explanation of selected keywords. The document shall
contain text and graphics to clarify system operation. At a
minimum, help shall be available for every menu item and
dialogue box.
TS/M/S18/29 2602542S/AC
s) Electronic massaging facility shall be provided on the operator
station for any operator to enter a message to another operator
by selecting the MAIL menu item, selecting the receiving
operator's ID and entering the message (such as CHECK
CALIBRATION OF SENSOR IN CONFERENCE ROOM,
6TH FLOOR"). When an operator with a queued message signs
onto the operator station, the "Mail Message" area of the
dialogue box shall indicate that message is waiting. Upon
displaying a mail message, the display shall prompt the operator
with three message options to execute; delete, print and save.
Messages shall also include the time and data the message was
sent, the sender's personal ID and be 300 characters minimum
length, plus a brief title or subject description.
7.3. Site Specific Customising Software
Provide software which will allow the user to modify and tailor the BAS
to the specific and unique requirements of the equipment installed, the
programs implemented, and to staffing and operational practices. Online
modification of system configuration, program parameters, and data base
shall be provided via menu selection and keyboard entry of data into
preformatted self-prompting templates. As a minimum, the following
modification capability shall be provided.
a) Operator assignment capability shall include designation of

operator passwords, privilege(s), starting graphic and auto sign
off duration.
b) System text add/change capability shall include English

descriptors for graphic points, action messages for alarms and
run time, and trouble condition messages.
c) Time/Schedule change capability shall include time/date set,

time/occupancy schedules, holiday schedules and activity defined
schedules. Operators with the appropriate privilege shall be
capable of naming an activity (e.g., basketball game, board
meeting, etc.) which requires associated equipment (e.g. fans,
lights, door unlocking, etc.,) to support the activity. The named
activity shall be assigned such associations and, subsequently,
the activity can be scheduled by an operator with the underlying
associated equipment automatically provided an identical
schedule by the BAS. All time and calendar scheduling and
schedule modification shall be accomplished graphically via
colour bars and calendars in a hardware independent manner.
d) Points shall be uniquely definable as to colouration, animation,

audible rate and duration, point descriptors (60 characters
minimum), operator messages (480 characters minimum), alarm
and warning limits, and engineering units.
TS/M/S18/30 2602542S/AC
e) Point related change capability shall include system/point
enable/disable; run time enable/disable; assignment of points to
point classes, analog value offset, lockout, run time limits, and
setting a fixed input or output value.
f) Application program change capability shall include assignment

of comfort limits, global points, time and event initiators, time
and event schedules and enable/disable time and event programs.
g) Graphic creation specified under Graphic Creation.
7.4. Alarm Handler
a) Alarm Handler software shall be provided to respond to alarm

conditions sensed and transmitted from the appropriate HVAC
Controller. First in, first out handling of alarms in accordance is
required with buffer storage for a minimum of 20 alarms in case
of simultaneous multiple alarms. All alarms issued shall reflect
genuine faults on systems and equipment. The alarm handler
shall be configured and programmed to recognize situations
(such as change of mode of operations, etc.) as normal
conditions to avoid issuance of nuisance alarms.
b) Alarm handler shall be active in both the Signed On and Signed

Off modes to assure that alarms will be processed even though
an operator is not currently signed on.
c) Alarms shall be displayed in a dialogue box on the colour

monitor. Display shall include as a minimum:
1) Indication of alarm condition; i.e. FAULT, PRE-

ALARM, ALARM, analog identification such as HIGH
ROOM TEMPERATURE TECH CENTRE, SECOND
FLOOR, ROOM 202.
2) A discrete per point alarm action taking message.
d) Alarm silencing shall be through selecting the "silence" button or

by authorised operator's acknowledgement. In all cases, alarm
acknowledgement shall only be allowed by operators authorised
to acknowledge a point in alarm.
TS/M/S18/31 2602542S/AC
e) Each point shall be assigned to an alarm class, with no limit to
the quantity of alarm classes. Each alarm class be uniquely
assignable to any combination of the following alarm processing
attributes :
1) Audible beep duration (none, 10 seconds, 20

seconds, continuous)
2) Audible beep rate (slow-medium-fast)
3) Alarm historically archived (yes or no)
4) Alarm printed, with printer ID
5) Associated coloration with any of 256 colours,

with separate brightness control, assignable to
each alarm state (high alarm, high warning,
normal, low warning, low alarm). Digital points
shall similarly be distinguished with different
colours for each possible state.
f) Alarms shall be displayed and/or printed at each peripheral to

which its segregation allows, but only those operators having
proper privilege level will be allowed acknowledge alarms.
g) An unacknowledged alarm indicator shall be provided on the

colour monitor display to alert the operator that there are
unacknowledged alarms in the system.
h) Points in a graphic display that are in an unacknowledged alarm

state shall have a flashing red border, when in an acknowledged
state, the border shall be non-flashing red.
i) Run time limit message shall be presented and proceeded as an

alarm message except the action message shall be of a
maintenance directive nature.
7.5. Reports
a) Standard reports shall be provided which shall be operator

selectable to appear on the operator station, or printer or both.
All facility-wide standard reports shall be capable of being
scheduled to run at a specific time and/or interval via an operator
function supported by necessary data entry templates and
interactive prompts. A "terminate report" command shall be
available to allow the operator to stop any report in the process
of being printed.
TS/M/S18/32 2602542S/AC
b) Point summary reports may be requested at any penetration level
(facility, building, area, system) and shall include only points at
and below that level. Point summary reports shall include the
current value/status and condition, system and point descriptions
for all points. Points summary reports shall be selectable for all
points, except those points in alarm, fixed points, disabled points
and locked out points.
c) Historical trend reports shall allow the operator to randomly

select points to be recorded at selectable time intervals.
Information shall automatically diverted into a standard third
party software spreadsheet package for display, manipulation
and merging as necessary by the authorised operator. Minimum
sampling shall be at NO more than 1 minute for logging values
of 40 variables over a period of one month.
d) The trend report shall be stored to disk and shall be subsequently

capable of being displayed, printed or archived to diskette by the
operator.
e) Dynamic trends shall provide up to six points and show real time
activity of the associated points. This information shall be
printed and/or displayed in numeric, bar chart, curve plot, pie
chart, etc., as selected by the operator. Graphic plots shall allow
a unique colour for each point.
f) As new point values are sampled, they shall be processed, scaled

and dynamically appended to any plot being displayed. Minimum
sampling rate 5 seconds, maximum sampling rate 60 minutes.
Number of samples to be displayed on the screen should be
selectable, minimum 10 samples.
g) A custom report capability shall be provided to allow the user to

format reports of any text, points with status/value and
descriptions, and points with status/value only. Custom reports
may be scheduled or requested manually. A spreadsheet
programme (MicroSoft Excel) shall be provided, fully integrated
with BAS data base, and available to the user.
h) In the event of failure of any printer, subsequent reports directed

to that printer shall be automatically redirected to an operator
pre-assigned backup printer located at the operator station.
TS/M/S18/33 2602542S/AC
7.6. Graphic Creation
a) A graphic development facility shall be provided to allow the

user to develop or modify graphic displays and assign and
position any array of points within each graphic.
b) All graphic displays shall be created via operator station graphics

package. It shall not require taking the operator station off-line
or interfere with point archiving and alarms. Graphics shall be
created via mouse and keyboard selection of graphic library
stored symbols and system profiles. In addition, the system shall
have the capability to create custom symbols, system profiles,
floor plans, buildings, etc., and store them in the graphic library.
c) The number and type of graphics to be provided is as noted in
the Data Control and Graphics summary.
d) The system shall provide expansion of up to 1000 graphics.
7.7. Digital System Management
a) The Operation Station shall provide complete utilities necessary

for management of the network of digital controllers and
devices.
b) Provide a multi-page set of graphic architectural displays

showing each digital module including each remote panel, PC,
peripheral, and communication links. Clicking on any device
shall start an interactive dialogue allowing the user to observe
the device status and to select device management options. Each
device shall also be provided with a descriptor of up to 60
characters.
c) Any digital device with database storage in RAM only may be

up-line of down-line loaded to or from the Operator Station disk
for backup archival.
d) Provide software to execute and observe diagnostics of any

remote device connected to the bus and the ability to deactivate
and restart the device.
TS/M/S18/34 2602542S/AC
7.8. Operator Station Utilities
a) The Operator Station personal computer shall be provided with

the following system utilities or desktop application packages:
Clock Real Time Clock
Calculation Basis arithmetic calculation functions (add,

subtract, multiply, divide, percentage, square
root)
Clipboard Data transfer facility between dissimilar

programmes
Calendar Electronic appointment calendar
Card file Electronic Index Card file

Control Panel Basic PC operating characteristic control :
cursor blink rate, mouse sensitivity, screen
colour control, etc.
Write Word processing programme
7.9. Third Party Software
a) The system provided shall be capable of running standard off-

the-shelf MS DOS IBM PC compatible software packages (such
as Micrografx Designer, MX-Excel Spreadsheet etc)
concurrently with the real time system.
b) The base system software shall include a LCD "windowing"

feature to allow the operator to monitor the real time system and
use third party software simultaneously.
c) All third party software packages identified shall have access to

the system historical data base previously specified.
d) All third party software shall be licensed with the University

being the licensee. all original software packages, complete with
floppy on compact ABCs and instruction manuals shall be
handed over to the University as part of the hand over
documents.
e) BAS/BMS system shall be open and readiness for third party

software such as simple network management protocol, mobile
application interfacing..
TS/M/S18/35 2602542S/AC
7.10. Provided Graphics
In addition to Graphic of building systems with dynamic data points as

noted in the following Data and Control and Graphic summary, and
Graphics required under the Digital System Management sections, the
following additional graphics shall be quantified and included within the
proposal.
a) Campus layout (showing buildings, streets, etc.)
b) Individual building layouts of isometrics
c) Any other graphics necessary for logical penetration
d) Sequence or operation
e) Flowcharts for critical DDC loops
f) Supervisor graphics
g) System configuration
7.11. Trends, Messages
a) The Sub-Contractor shall enter all computer programs and data

files into the related computers including all control programs,
initial approved parameters and settings; descriptions, and colour
graphics as specified complete with dynamic dispersed data. In
addition, the following, to be user implemented, shall have
samples installed for training and validation:
1) Trend log
2) Alarm message (action taking message)
3) Trouble action message
4) Dynamic Trend Plot (6 points)
b) The BAS Central shall have extensive message capability.

Enforceable descriptive messages can be specified to address
customer concerns. The BAS Sub-Contractor shall demonstrate
this capability and install a minimum of two typical messages. All
remaining messages unless otherwise specified shall be generated
by the End User to meet individual needs.
TS/M/S18/36 2602542S/AC
7.12. Alarm Paging via Short Message Service (SMS) General
The alarm paging system shall be a Microsoft Windows based application

to be integrated with the Building Automation (BAS). On critical alarm
occurrence in the BAS, the paging system shall send SMS message to all
configured mobile phones in the system.
Functions
The Alarm Paging system shall be comply with the following functions :
a) User Interface
i) Shall be a menu based windows application capable of

running on latest Windows or Windows Server version and
above system.
ii) Shall show the on-line status of the SMS device with a log
window detailing the system activities
iii) Shall provide user friendly easy to use graphical user

interface (GUI)
b) Paging
i) Shall provide an alarm paging system to send SMS text

message either manually or automatically to all authorized
and assigned duty personnel in the event of specific
problems and/or alarms.
ii) Shall be suitable for notification to hand phone or mobile

PDA.
iii) Shall be capable of identifying the personnel(s) on duty and

SMS the personnel until an acknowledgement is received.
If the notified personnel do not acknowledge the call
within the pre-set time, the system shall page for the
person again for every time-out interval until the person
acknowledge the call. The acknowledge wait (time-out)
interval shall be adjustable in the system.
iv) Communication between the alarm notification system and

the BAS shall be through the communications LAN. The
alarm notification system receives the point data and
systems messages via LAN and transmits its text message
via MS gateway.
TS/M/S18/37 2602542S/AC
v) The paging system shall be capable of identifying the
personnel on duty and page them. If the paged personnel
do not acknowledge the call within the pre-set time, the
system shall page for the same person for another pre-set
number of times before it page the next person on the list.
The retry numbers shall be configurable in the system.
vi) System shall be capable of handling multiple critical alarms

at any given point of time. The system shall be scalable and
able to support up to 32 SMS devices so that additional
devices can be added as and when the need arises.
c) User Grouping
i) Grouping of duty technicians based on their role shall be

possible. This grouping can be applied to the alarm
condition and all users in the group shall be paged.
ii) Users shall be paged in two modes – queued or

simultaneous calling. In queued calling, system shall
escalate the notification to the next user in the User Group
only when the current user has not dialed in and
acknowledgement the notification even after a few tries.
However, some critical points may demand paging all the
users simultaneously without waiting for a response from
anyone. System shall support Inform All option to reduce
time lag in reaching several users quickly.
d) Security
i) System shall be secured with login/logoff mechanism.

Users should use their login name and password to access
the system.
ii) System shall support read/write data access levels so that

user can only have read only or read/write data access
permissions. Users with read only access level shall not be
allowed to update the data in the system.
iii) All login/logoff activity shall be logged.
TS/M/S18/38 2602542S/AC
e) Reports
i) All paging activity shall be logged.
ii) Shall provide reports for essential master data.
iii) Activity log shall be viewed and printed from the system.
System shall provide option to select date range and user
name to filter the activity data.
The alarm paging system shall be a Microsoft Windows based

application to be integrated with the Building Automation System
(BAS). On critical alarm occurrence in the BAS, the paging
system shall send SMS message to all configured mobile phones in
the system
f) Functions
The Alarm Paging system shall be comply with the following

functions:
a) User Interface
i) Shall be a menu based windows application

capable of running on Window 7 and above
system.
ii) Shall show the on-line status of the SMS device

with a log window detailing the system activities.
iii) Shall provide user friendly easy to use graphical

user interface (GUI).
b) Short Message Service
i) Shall provide SMS system to send SMS text

message either manually or automatically to all
authorized and assigned duty personnel in the
event of specific problems and/or alarms.
TS/M/S18/39 2602542S/AC
ii) Shall be suitable for notification to hand phone,
PDA or smart phones.
Shall be capable of identifying the personnel(s) on

duty and SMS the personnel until an
acknowledgement is received. If the notified
personnel do not acknowledge the call within the
pre-set time, the system shall SMS the person
again for every time-out interval until the person
acknowledged the call. The acknowledge wait
(time-out) interval shall be adjustable in the
system.
iii) Communication between the alarm notification

system and the BAS shall be through the
communications LAN. The alarm notification
system receives the point data and systems
messages via LAN and transmits its text message
via MS gateway.
iv) The paging system shall be capable of identifying

the personnel on duty and page them. If the paged
personnel do not acknowledge the call within the
pre-set time, the system shall page for the same
person for another pre-set number of times before
it page the next person on the list. The retry
numbers shall be configurable in the system.
v) System shall be capable of handling multiple

critical alarms at any given point of time. The
system shall be scalable and able to support up to
32 SMS devices so that additional devices can be
added as and when the need arises.
c) User Grouping
i) Grouping of duty technicians based on their role

shall be possible. This grouping can be applied to
the alarm condition and all users in the group shall
be paged.
TS/M/S18/40 2602542S/AC
ii) Users shall be paged in two modes - queued or
simultaneous calling. In queued calling, system
shall escalate the notification to the next user in
the User Group only when the current user has not
dialed in and acknowledgement the notification
even after a few tries. However, some critical
points may demand paging all the users
simultaneously without waiting for a response
from anyone. System shall support Inform All
option to reduce time lag in reaching several users
quickly.
d) Security
i) System shall be secured with login/logoff

mechanism. Users should use their login name and
password to access the system.
ii) System shall support read/write data access levels

so that user can only have read only or read/write
data access permissions. Users with read only
access level shall not be allowed to update the data
in the system.
iii) All login/logoff activity shall be logged.
e) Reports
i) All paging activity shall be logged.
ii) Shall provide reports for essential master data.
iii) Activity log shall be viewed and printed from the

system. System shall provide option to select date
range and user name to filter the activity data.
TS/M/S18/41 2602542S/AC
8. Not in Use
9. BAS Point Schedule
9.1. The Point Schedule enclosed hereinafter shall be read in conjunction with
the Tender Drawings and Specification.
9.2. The point schedule enclosed is for the purpose of guidance of minimum
requirements. The Sub-Contractor shall allow cost in his Tender for any
further points/sensors/instruments to enable the system to operate in its
intended purpose of a complete optimum operating system.
9.3. In general, the following are to be provided for :
Water cooled Chillers

START/STOP Control
Programmed START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Mode Selection
Chilled water in analogue pressure/temperature indication
Run-Time Totalization
Flow indication
Variable Speed Control and feedback
3 PHASE current amps ,voltage, frequency indication
Kilo-watt, kilo-watt-hour indication
High level interfacing to chiller chilled water temperature,
Set point, Alarms, all fault, pressure, kwh, voltage ,ampere, power etc
Condenser/Chilled Water Pumps

START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Mode Selection
Condensing/Chilled water in analogue pressure indication
Condensing/Chilled water in analogue pressure indication
Pump Speed Indication
TS/M/S18/42 2602542S/AC
Cooling Tower
START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Mode Selection
Condenser water in analogue pressure/temperature indication
Condenser water in analogue pressure/temperature indication
Flow indication
High/Low level indication
Motor speed indication
Outdoor wet bulb
Headers
Modulating Bypass valve control and status
Supply and Return pipe Pressure
Differential pressure
Branch pipe
BTU and flow
Chilled water supply and return Temperature
Modulating Bypass valve control and status
Supply and Return pipe Pressure
Differential pressure
AHUs
Local/BAS/Remote Mode Selection
START/STOP Control
Programmed START/STOP Control (Energy saving modes)
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Local/Remote Mode
VSD/BYPASS Mode
Run-time Totalization
Supply Air Temperature Indication
Return Air Temperature Indication and setpoint
Smoke Detector Alarm
Chilled Water Valve Control
Chilled Water Valve Analog Position Indication
Temperature Set Point Adjustment
TS/M/S18/43 2602542S/AC
Off Coil Temperature Indication
Differential Pressure
Fan Speed Indication
R.H. Indication
Flow indication
Motorized dampers control and feedback
Outdoor air temperature
Co2 Sensor
Control and Monitoring of Modulating Damper for fresh air
BTU and flow
Purging Fan START/STOP control
Purging Fan START/STOP status
Purging Fan TRIP ALARM
Purging fan Fresh Air /Return Air Dampers Position
Induction Box / VAV Boxes

Temperature
Occupancy/Non-occupancy drive
Control for Motorised Damper
Flow indication
Chilled Water Fan Coil Units

Temperature
START/STOP Control & Valve Control
ON/OFF Status
Local/Remote Mode
Variable Speed Control and feedback (fan coil with VSD)
Fan speed indication (fan coil with VSD)
TRIP ALARM
VRV and Spilt Units

Room Temperature
Room Temperature setpoint
START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
Local/Remote Mode
High Temperature Alarm
TRIP/FAULT ALARM
TS/M/S18/44 2602542S/AC
Fresh/Exhaust Air Fans
START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Variable Speed Control and feedback (fan with VSD)
Fan speed indication (fan with VSD)
Chilled Water Pumps (for Air Cooled Chilller)

START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Mode Selection
Chilled water in analogue pressure indication
Chilled water in analogue pressure indication
Air cooled Chillers

START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Mode Selection
Flow indication
3 PHASE current amps ,voltage indication
High level interfacing to chiller chilled water temperature,
TS/M/S18/45 2602542S/AC
Biological Safety Cabinet/ Fume Cupboard exhausts fans
START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Mode Selection
Temperature indication
Temperature indication
Flow indication
Kilo-watt ,kilo-watt-hour indication
PH value
Exhaust fan for Lab Exhaust

Local/BAS/Remote Mode Selection
START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Local/Remote Mode
Run-time Totalization
Exhaust Air Temperature Indication
Smoke Detector Alarm
Temperature Set Point Adjustment
Differential Pressure
Fan Speed Indication
R.H. Indication
Flow indication
Damper control and feedback
TS/M/S18/46 2602542S/AC
Heat Recovery Unit
START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Mode Selection
Temperature indication before evaporator ,after evaporator
Temperature indication of water before entering and leaving
Flow indication
High level interfacing to hot water temperature,
Hot Water Pump

START/STOP Control
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
Mode Selection
Hot water in analogue pressure/temp. indication
Bypass Valve control and feedback
Laboratory
Temperature & temperature control
Occupancy/Non-occupancy mode
Control for motorised air venturi valves and Fast Respond Variable Air
Volume valves
Air flow control & indication for all supply air ,exhaust air & etc
Pressure control & indication for all laboratory
RH control & indication for all laboratory
Motion sensor
Air tight damper on/off control and status
Main supply / exhaust duct

Air flow indication for all main branch duct for supply air / exhaust air &
etc
Modulating and on/off control and status for bubble tight/air tight damper
TS/M/S18/47 2602542S/AC
Freezer / Cold room
ON/OFF Status
TRIP ALARM
10. Chiller Plant Permanent Measurement & Verification (M&V) System
10.1. The Contractor shall include all materials, equipment, accessories,

software, applications and all necessary labours for the carrying out and
completion of the works, whether or not expressly specified in the
Tender Documents.
10.2. The installed instrumentation shall have the capability to calculate

resultant system efficiency (i.e. kW/RT) within 5% of its true value.
Each measurement system shall include the sensor, any signal
conditioning, the data acquisition system and wiring connecting them.
10.3. The Contractor shall ensure that all the instruments and installation
procedure shall follow the specification and method stated under the
following standards:
a. SS 591: Long Term Measurement of Central Chilled Water

System Energy Efficiency
b. Latest BCA Green Mark for Existing Non-Residential Buildings

ENRB
c. Latest Non-Residential New Buildings
d. New Buildings (Non Residential) 2015
e. ASHRAE Guide 22 - Instrumentation for Monitoring Central

Chilled Water System Efficiency
f. SS 553-2009 Code Of Practice for Air-conditioning and

mechanical ventilation in buildings
TS/M/S18/48 2602542S/AC
10.4. Requirements for Magnetic In-Line Flow Meter
a. The flow measuring principle of the flow meter shall be based

on Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction where the sensor
converts the flow into an electric voltage proportional to the
velocity of the flow
b. The complete flow meter assembly shall have a maximum

measuring error of 0.5% of rate (including sensor)
c. Output transmission of 4 to 20mA and Modbus communication
d. Flow meter are to be provided for chilled water , condenser

water loop and common header
e. The flow meters shall be connected to the BAS using high-

speed interface and connected to data logger using 4 to 20 mA
f. A/D converter of the BTU meter should have a minimum

resolution of 16-bit. This applies to direct data acquisition from
the BTU meter
10.5. Requirements for Ultrasonic Flow Meter
a. The flow meter shall be of the highly accurate clamp-on non-

intrusive ultrasonic flow meter
b. The complete flow meter assembly shall have a maximum

measuring error of 0.5% of rate (including sensor)
c. Output transmission of 4 to 20mA and modbus communication
d. Flow meter are to be provided for chilled water , condenser

water loop and common header
e. The flow meters shall be connected to the BAS using high-

f. A/D converter of the BTU meter should have a minimum

resolution of 16-bit. This applies to direct data acquisition from
the BTU meter
TS/M/S18/49 2602542S/AC
10.6. Requirements for Temperature Sensor
a. The temperature sensor shall be of the Thermistor 10K type 4-

wired complete with an open end thread thermo well with an
accuracy of measurement calibrated against measurement
standard include uncertainly of not exceeding ± 0.01°C
b. The sensing probe shall be installed in such manner that there is

direct contact with the water
c. Two (2) nos. of thermo wells shall be installed before and after
the temperature sensor for verification purpose
d. Temperature sensors are to be provided for chilled water,

condenser water loop and common header
e. The temperature sensors shall have their own calibration

certificate following the calibration methods stated under SS
591.
f. The flow meters shall be connected to the BAS using high-

10.7. Requirements for Power Meter
a. The power measurement device shall be of the multi-function

meter type with an accuracy equivalent to Class 0.5 (0.5%),
output transmission of 4 to 20mA and modbus for
communication
b. The current transformer shall have an accuracy of Class 0.5

(0.5%)
c. The power meters shall be connected to the BAS using high-

d. Dedicated power meters (of IEC Class 0.5 or equivalent) and

associated current transformers (of class 0.5 or equivalent) are
to be provided for each groups of equipment: chillers, chilled
water pumps, condenser water pumps, cooling towers and air
distribution equipment.
TS/M/S18/50 2602542S/AC
10.8. Requirements for Data Acquisition System
a. The data acquisition system shall have an A/D minimum native

resolution of 22 bits
b. All data are able to be logged at 1 second and 1 minute

sampling time interval, and recorded to the 3rd decimal
c. The system shall have the capability to measure and convert 11

different input signals : temperature with thermocouples, RTD’s
and thermistors; dc/ac volts; 2- and 4-wire resistance; frequency
and period; DC /AC current
d. Data Acquisition System shall have spare slot for extension

module
e. Export of raw Data in CSV and excel format
f. Interface to the BAS system for Data display and Calculation
i. Heat balance for individual and total Chiller group,
ii. Individual Chiller efficiency,
iii. Plant efficiency,
iv. Individual and total Chilled Water and Condenser Pumps

kW/RT,
v. Individual and total Cooling Tower kW/RT
10.9. Outdoor Measuring Station
a. Minimally 1 set of temperature and Humidity Sensor to be

installed along the cooling towers to measure dry-bulb air
temperature and relative humidity
TS/M/S18/51 2602542S/AC
11. Training
11.1. The Sub-Contractor shall conduct a local training program for designated
personnel. These courses shall be carried out during normal office hours
and be not be less than 5 working days duration. The date of
commencement of training shall be a date mutually agreed upon and shall
be within one month of the hand-over of installation. Contractor shall also
conduct re-training after the end of DLP and review in those problems
arise during the defects period.
11.2. The training program shall cover all operating and maintenance aspects of
the system, inclusive of detail explanation and demonstration of each and
every software and hardware feature incorporated and an overview of the
system communication network.
11.3. The training program shall consist of both hands-on and class-room
training at the job site or at location agreed upon by the University.
11.4. All instruction manuals, tools, transportation, etc., associated with the
training program shall be provided by the Sub-Contractor. Such cost shall
be deemed to include in the Tender Sum.
11.5. All training shall be carried out by manufacturer's representative and shall
utilize specified manuals, as built documentation and on-line help utility.
TS/M/S18/52 2602542S/AC
SECTION 19 - INSTRUMENTATION & SENSOR SYSTEM
1. General
1.1. The purpose of the specifications is to provide the operational concepts

and minimum standalone automation and monitoring devices and
instrumentation to be installed for the air conditioning and ventilation
system and other services.
1.2. All sensors shall be of design and size according to the requirement
suitable for installation onto the connected sub-system and equipment.
Each and every sensor point shall be provided with an individual
complete sensor set. Sharing of any form of circuitry, or part of circuitry
shall not be accepted. Sensors shall be selected such that maximum
operating point is no more than 1.5 times the normal maximum operating
point.
1.3. All sensors shall be complete with the necessary electrical/ electronic
circuitry (transmitter) to convert sensor output signals into the signal
form acceptable to the DDC/PLC controllers and compatible with
industry standards such as 0V to 10V, 1V to 10V and 4-20mA.
1.4. The transmitters shall have built-in voltage stablisation circuits, and
zero/span adjustments. The transmitters shall have the necessary
accuracy such that the accuracy of the sensor plus transmitter shall be
within the accuracy specified for that particular type of sensor. Cables
losses shall take into consideration.
1.5. Unless otherwise specified, all sensors shall be constructed of materials

suitable for the operation in the intended environment without corrosion
or degradation. In particular, sensors installed in chilled water systems,
hot water system, humid environment, inside water tanks/pipes, and
where subjected to the weather shall be corrosion resistant.
1.6. The instrumentation and device shall comply to the following standards:
a) Singapore Standard CP 5, Code of practice for electrical

Installations
b) Singapore Standard SS 553, Code of practice for air-conditioning

and mechanical ventilation in buildings
c) Singapore Standard SS 591, Code of practice for long term

measurement of central chilled water system energy efficiency
TS/M/S19/1 2602542S/AC
d) Singapore Building Control Authority: latest BCA Green Mark
Certification Standard
e) ANSI/ASHRAE 135 BACnet - A Data Communication Protocol

for Building Automation and Control Networks
f) ASHRAE Guide 22 Instrumentation for monitoring central

chilled-water plant efficiency
g) ASHRAE. Standard 135 : A Data Communication Protocol for

Building Automation and Control Networks (BACnet);
h) BS EN 61326-1 Electrical equipment for measurement, control

and laboratory use. Test certificate of conformance shall be
submitted.
i) International Organization for Standardization ISO/IEC 9075-9:

Information Technology - Database Languages SQL – Part 9 :
Management of External Data (SQL/MED);
j) TIA/EIA 232-F Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment and

Data Circuit Terminating Equipment Employing Serial Binary
Data Exchange;
k) TIA/EIA 485-A : Electrical Characteristics of Generators and

Receivers for use in Balanced Digital Multipoint Systems;
l) TIA/EIA 568-C.1 : Commercial Building telecommunications

Cabling Standard;
m) Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol of Defence

Advanced Research Project Agency (TCP/IP);
n) International Organization for Standardization ISO/IEC 8802-3 :

Standard for Ethernet.
1.7. The manufacturers shall be certified to ISO 9001 for the products offered
for minimum 10 years. Certificate of compliance/conformance to the
standards or other documents to prove origin of manufacture and
compliance specified shall be submitted.
1.8. The Sub-Contractor shall submit monthly report on calibration all the
equipment over the fifteen (15) months defects liability period. The
report formats shall be subjected to the S.O.'s approval.
TS/M/S19/2 2602542S/AC
1.9. All the power meter, water meter, BTU meter or airflow station that is
used for utility billing shall be linked and program at University of
Campus infrastructure, Ventus building, Office of Facilities
Management energy metering system.
1.10. Integration to Wireless Mesh Network Lighting Management system and

provision for third party software interfacing
2. Materials
2.1 All materials shall be of new and good quality. All equipment and
materials previously installed or used shall be rejected. Materials and
equipment shall be stored in such a manner as to be in a new condition
when installed and to avoid damage from weather and site conditions.
Damaged, deformed and cracked equipment or materials shall be
rejected. Replacement shall be provided by the Sub-Contractor at no
additional cost to the University.
2.2 Materials and equipment to be incorporated into the works (as called for
in this Specification) are required to meet the quality/testing standards of
designed institutes, societies and standards associations. However,
equivalent materials and equipment items meeting other authoritative
standards which ensure equal or higher quality than the standards
mentioned may also be accepted and approved by the S.O..
2.3 Materials and equipment shall be the products of the approved

manufacturers’ own manufacturing facilities. Materials and equipment
manufactured by contract manufacturing, under licence and similar
arrangement are not acceptable.
2.4 Should the Sub-Contractor propose to furnish materials and equipment

other than those specified as permitted by the or approved equivalent
clause, he shall submit a written request for any such substitution. Such
requests shall be accompanied by complete descriptive (manufacturers,
brand name, catalog number, etc.) and technical data for all items,
samples of both the specified and the proposed substitute items.
2.5 The products shall be actively supported by manufacturer’s local

representative or authorised distributor with technical support team and
spare parts stock.
2.6 The S.O. reserves the right to accept or reject any proposed substitutions.
2.7 The expenses incurred by any such exercise shall be borne in full by the
Sub-Contractor.
2.8 All sensors, control valves, actuators, shall be from the BAS
manufacturer or other compatible type to the BAS system
TS/M/S19/3 2602542S/AC
3. Site Conditions
All equipment supplied shall be capable of operating effectively and efficiently

under the following site conditions:-
Maximum Temperature 35oC dry bulb

28oC wet bulb
Average Temperature 32oC dry bulb

26.5oC wet bulb

4. Sensors, Transducers, Valves and Actuators
Temperature sensors, pressure sensors, kilowatt-hour transducers, 3-way valves,

2-way valves, valves actuators, flow meters, variable speed drives and etc, shall
be provided and installed to the condenser water piping system and chilled water
piping system for the air-conditioning equipment.
4.1. Temperature Sensors
a) Sensors shall be factory calibrated and shall not require

compensation for cable lengths etc. Repeatability of sensor
shall be 0.5° C or better.
b) Duct mounted temperature sensors shall be the rigid stem type

and pipe mounted temperature sensors shall be provided with a
separable copper or stainless steel well.
c) Immersion sensors shall be provided complete with immersion

pocket. Insertion length shall be 100mm. Sensing range.
d) All sensors for Chiller Plant Room equipments shall comply to

BCA green mark requirement of temperature sensors with
accuracy of ± 0.03°C- 0.05 °C @ 0°C.
4.2. Pressure Sensors /Pressure Transmitter
a) Pressure sensors for both air and water applications shall be of

the state-of-the-art piezo resistive type. The pressure sensing
diaphragm shall be of silicon material. All pressure sensors
supplied shall have no moving parts and shall not require any
maintenance or calibration.
TS/M/S19/4 2602542S/AC
b) Pressure sensors shall be selected for approximately 50% over
range and have standard output signals, e.g. 4-20mA. Signals
that are specific to a manufacturer's DDC controller's input
range will be acceptable provided the sensor is of the same
manufacturer as the DDC controller. All pressure sensors shall
have temperature compensation built-in. Repeatability and
hysteresis shall be ±0.25% or better. Shock and vibration
resistance capabilities shall comply to MIL-STD-202 or better.
4.3. Kilowatt-Hour Transducer
a) KWH transducer shall be single disc, class 1 (BS 5685:1979),

three phase, 50 Hz, 3 wire type suitable for unbalanced loads
and with impulse generator unit. All meters shall be fully
tropicalised and calibrated for use at 30 deg. C.
b) Transducer housing shall be of non-metallic, fully insulating,

non-hygroscopic, non-ignitable thermosetting plastic material
having low dirt absorption property and distortion free under
high temperature eg bakelite.
c) The wire terminal shall be protected by a separate cover, it

shall be of the same material as the housing.
d) The insulation of the meter circuits shall be with adequate

resistance and shall withstand the voltage test as specified in
BS 5685. The meter shall further withstand 1.2/50 micro
seconds standard full lightning impulse test of not less than
10kVp in accordance with the relevant requirement of BS 923 .
e) Transducer shall be fitted with electronically controlled

transmitting impulse generator unit capable of delivering
energy quantities of 1.0 kwh per impulse (maximum 5
impulse/sec). Pulse duration shall be between 10 to 120 msec.
f) KWH transducer shall be used for all electrical consumption

measurement. KWH transducer with KWH computer by BAS
shall not be acceptable.
4.4. Control Valve Actuators
a) All control valve actuators shall be of electric/electronic type

with self-contained motorized valve linkage. The linkage shall
have automatic self adjustment to compensate for any variation
in valve stroke to ensure reaching of full open or tight close-off
positions.
TS/M/S19/5 2602542S/AC
b) The valve actuator shall be provided with valve position
indication of stroke position for easy determination of valve
position during trouble shooting. The valve actuator shall be
provided with electronic current sensing circuitry to terminate
power to the prime mover for internal protection and to ensure
positive closing/opening force.
c) Valve actuators offered shall be of compact size and suitable

for multi-pose mounting to overcome mounting difficulties in
confined areas.
d) All actuators shall have a non-spring return. Manual overriding

shall be provided.
e) All actuators shall have a feed back information for valve

position
4.5. Control Valves
a) Control valves of 2" Ø and below shall be screwed type. Valves

of 2.5" Ø and above shall be flanged. Valves shall be available
with a body pressure rating of greater than 16 bar and
tangibility of better than 100:1.
b) Screw type valves shall be of gunmetal (bronze) and flanged

valves of cast iron or cast steel.
c) All valves whether two ports or three ports shall be closed

when the spindle is in the up position. Two port valves shall
have an equal percentage control characteristic. Three port
valves shall have an equal percentage characteristic on the
through port and a linear characteristic on the bypass port.
d) Valves shall be sized to have a full flow pressure drop equal or

greater than the pressure drop through the water coil being
controlled, but not more than 35KPa.
e) Two port valves shall have a close off capability equal to or

greater than the maximum possible system differential
pressure. (As determined by the pump head or the system
differential pressure bypass control setting).
f) Three port valves shall have a close off capability equal to or

greater than the combined full flow pressure drops of the coil
plus the valve itself.
g) Three port valves shall be piped for mixing service.
TS/M/S19/6 2602542S/AC
h) Two port control valves for differential pressure bypass control
applications shall be sized to handle at least the full flow one
chiller at the desired pressure setting. The valve shall be
capable of closing off against this pressure and of operating at
this pressure for long periods without internal wear, or noise.
For bypass valves the valve shall be either of double-seated or
rotary design, to provide a close off pressure equal to the
chilled water pump head.
i) The Sub-Contractor shall submit the sizing calculations for all

control valves.
j) All control valves shall be rated to withstand 1725 kPa (250 Pa)
or the expected pressure encountered, whichever is higher.
4.6. VAV Box Damper Actuator
a) A damper actuator shall be mounted directly on the damper

shaft and shall provide complete modulating control of the
damper. It shall be electronic type using magnetic coupling
technology to eliminate the need for limit switches or
mechanical stops.
b) The actuator shall be capable of driving in both clockwise and

counter-clockwise direction.
c) The damper actuator shall be a separator device from the DDC

controller.
d) Damper actuator position status shall be monitored from the

central or remote operator’s terminal and shall be displayed in
percent open notation. Systems which provide only end switch
feedback are not acceptable.
e) The actuator timing for the complete stroke shall be 90 seconds

or less. Stroke selection shall be adjustable continuously within
a range of 0 to 90 degrees.
f) The actuator running torque shall be minimum 35 lb-in with

stall torque of 45 lb-in.
TS/M/S19/7 2602542S/AC
4.7. BACnet thermostat Controls (VAV)
a) The VAV box controller shall be a standalone networked

BACnet thermostat of 8-bit microprocessor based type with
real time clock and proportional plus integral control.
b) The BACnet thermostat controller shall have built-in operator

interface with keypad and alphanumeric liquid crystal display
(LCD). The LCD shall have alphanumeric indication of:-
i) actual room temperature and set-point;
ii) actual time and time schedule;
iii) occupied / unoccupied operation mode;
iv) provide multi inputs for thermostat, and all other

adjustments.
v) thermostat shall have proportional output to control the

damper actuator at minimum (10%) and maximum
(100%) positioning without mechanical jam to actuator
c) Each VAV controller, operating parameters, set points and

schedule shall be stored in non-volatile EEPROM memory to
prevent loss during loss of power to the controller.
d) The BACnet thermostat shall have built-in operator interface

with keypad and alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD).
The LCD shall have alphanumeric indication of :-
- actual room temperature and set-point levels
- actual time and time schedule
- operation mode
- all other adjustments
e) It shall have provisions to accept inputs from temperature and

other sensors.
It shall have a 24-volt AC pulse output. The BACnet thermostat

shall provide room temperature control accuracy of not greater
than ±0.5°C.
TS/M/S19/8 2602542S/AC
f) A built-in real time clock shall be provided for automatic
setpoint ranges for comfort, standby and night modes. A 7-day
switching program with up to 4 switching points per day shall
be provided. An early adjusted overtime function, with
automatic reset at the time-out signal shall provide users with
flexibility of extending the day level as required.
g) All BACnet controllers provided shall be capable of operating

in full “stand alone” operation as part of a larger control
system. Individual data memory shall be fully backup battery
for power interruption of at least 72 hours.
Each BACnet controller output can drive up to 2 motor actuator

of the VAV Boxes.
h) All BACnet thermostat shall be installed below the false ceiling

for ease of maintenance.
4.8. Air Duct Smoke Detectors (Probe Units)
a) All smoke detector mounted at the AHU return ducts shall be

the duct mounted photoelectric type.
b) All new air handling units (AHUs) shall be fitted with

smoke detectors (probe units) of approved design and
manufacture in the return-air stream immediately adjacent to
the existing air handling unit.
c) The smoke detector (i.e. probe unit) shall be provided for

monitoring of the return air ducts of the existing AHUs. The
detector shall sample the air passing through the AHU to
provide early detection of a developing hazardous condition or
fire. In the event of alarm from the probe unit (ie. detector of
smoke at the return air duct), the related air conditioning
equipment (AHU) shall ‘shut down’ automatically.
d) The detector head shall be housed in an integrated housing with

filter system for reduced maintenance and service. The detector
head shall be accessible without removing the dust housing.
The air velocity limits shall be 300 to 4000 ft/min.
e) For reliability and safety considerations, the smoke detector

shall comply to UL, FM, CSFM or BSA standards.
f) The duct smoke detector shall have adjustable sensitivity

setting and be completed with integral power supply unit
suitable for 230V, 50 Hz operation and relay contacts for alarm
and trouble condition monitoring and control.
TS/M/S19/9 2602542S/AC
g) All duct smoke detectors shall be furnished with air sampling
tubes extending through the width of the air duct.
h) The unit shall deviate a small amount of air from regular to

high velocity air conditioning and/or ventilation ducts into a
special chamber which contains a smoke detector.
i) The unit shall not have to be adjusted to air streams between 1

m/s and 20 m/s.
j) The unit shall accommodate a photo-electric light scattering

detector, matching with the built-in base.
k) The unit shall be accessible for inspection without opening the

unit.
l) The unit shall be designed so that all service work can be

carried out without affecting the duct system.
m) The unit shall be equipped with a circuit monitoring the

presence of the smoke detector head.
n) The alarm indicator shall be clearly visible from outside.
o) The housing shall be made of approved plastic material, shock-

proof, vibration-proof and listed.
p) The housing of the unit shall contain 4 openings for

compression cable glands. If unused, these openings shall be
covered with plugs.
q) The air duct detector assembly and its cover shall be joined via
a rubber lip to prevent unwanted passage of air and/or smoke.
r) The unit shall connect directly into any standard detector line
from the manufacturer's control unit using four wires for Class
"A" wiring.
s) The unit shall be equipped with a terminal block with screwless

terminals accepting wires between 0.25 mm2 and 1.5 mm2
(SWG 23 and 15) and equipped with built-in strain limits.
t) The unit shall allow to drive an additional alarm indicator lamp

without additional wiring from the control unit.
u) The unit shall be designed for complete sealing of the duct

penetrations necessary for the sampling tubes and for fastening
the air duct detector assembly.
TS/M/S19/10 2602542S/AC
v) The unit shall be supplied with a template for duct penetrations
and complete mounting, connection and maintenance
guidelines.
w) The unit shall be designed so that there is a complete separation

between detection chamber and the compartment containing the
affiliated electronics.
x) The unit shall be supplied with the appropriate sampling tubes.
y) The electronics compartment of the air duct detector assembly

shall provide ample room for additional circuitry.
z) Specifications :
Admissible flow speed : 1 to 20 m/s
Approval : UL/FF/EN54
Ambient temperature : -10 to + 60°C
Relative humidity : max. 93% RH continuous

4.9. Radiant Heat Temperature Sensor
a) Sensor shall have a measurement range of 5° C to 50° C and the

accuracy of ± 2°C, and the response time is within 10 seconds.
b) Sensor shall have a rotation angle of 360° horizontally and 65°

vertically.
c) Sensor shall have an output signal of 1 to 5 V DC.
4.10. Humidity Sensors
a) Humidity sensors shall be sensitive thin film capacitance type.
b) Sensors shall have a range of 25 to 90% R.H. and accuracy ± 3%.
c) Room sensors shall be combined humidity/temperature sensors

and shall have terminal connection to permit wiring to be done
through the KO box.
d) Duct sensors shall have an insertion length of 200 mm and shall

have a mounting flange.
TS/M/S19/11 2602542S/AC
4.11. Differential Pressure Transmitters
a) Pressure transmitters shall be constructed to withstand 100%

pressure over-range without damage, and to hold calibrated
accuracy when subject to a momentary 40% over-range input.
b) Pressure transmitters shall transmit a 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC,

or 4 to 20 mA output signal.
c) Differential pressure transmitters used for flow measurement

shall be sized to the flow sensing device
4.12. Carbon Dioxide Sensor
a) The carbon dioxide monitor where specified shall be duct

mounted type complete with sensing probes. The monitor shall
have different range setting suitable for comfort air-conditioning
application. The CO2 monitor shall monitor the CO2 level
continuously. Visual LED or other form of visual indication
shall be provided to indicate the current measured value.
b) CO2 monitor shall have automatic calibration facility for

calibrating the monitor once every hour. It shall also have built-
in diagnostic equipment for self testing during every sampling
cycle. Should a specific malfunction be detected, the display
shall flash a malfunction code number for identification. The
CO2 monitor shall be interlocked to the AHU. There shall be no
sampling or display but unit circuitry shall be on “standby” for
immediate operation when the AHU is shutdown.
c) The accuracy of the sensor shall be ± 100ppm and the sensing

range shall be from 0 to 2000 ppm. The response time shall not
exceed 20 seconds.
4.13. Motion Sensor Detection System
a) Motion detectors are to be provided for auto on/off of the

induction VAV units, VAV units and air-conditioning unit as
specified.
b) The areas for motion detection system shall deploy in areas that
include seminar rooms, lounge and dining, conference room.
c) All motion detectors shall operate on a standalone system in all

areas.
TS/M/S19/12 2602542S/AC
d) Motion detectors in areas shall be linked to DDC of the
thermostat to sense the mode of occupancy. During unoccupied
mode, the temperature will be offset to the energy saving
temperature and user defined mode when there it is occupied to
maintain its required temperature.
e) The contractor shall ensure the correct application of motion

detection system shall be used for different types of room.
f) The Dual Technology sensor shall be capable of detecting

presence in the control area by detecting doppler shifts in
transmitted ultrasound and passive infrared heat changes.
g) Sensor shall utilize Dual Sensing Verification Principle for

coordination between ultrasonic and PIR technologies. Detection
verification of both technologies must occur in order to activate
lighting systems. Upon verification, detection by either shall hold
lighting on.
h) Sensor shall have a retrigger feature in which detection by either

technology shall retrigger the system on within 5 seconds of
being switched off.
i) Ultrasonic sensing shall be volumetric in coverage with a

frequency of 40 KHz. It shall utilize Advanced Signal Processing,
which automatically adjusts the detection threshold dynamically
to compensate for constantly changing levels of activity and
airflow throughout controlled space.
j) Sensor shall be capable of corner mounting to a wall or ceiling in

order to eliminate detection through open doorways and outside
of controlled area. To provide superior small motion detection
and immediate activation upon entry, coverage of both
technologies must be complete and overlapping throughout the
controlled area.
k) To avoid false ON activations and to provide immunity to RFI

and EMI, Detection Signature Analysis shall be used to examine
the frequency, duration, and amplitude of a signal, to respond
only to those signals caused by human motion.
l) Sensor shall operate at 24 VDC/VAC and halfwave rectified and

utilize a Watt Stopper power pack.
TS/M/S19/13 2602542S/AC
m) The PIR technology shall utilize a temperature compensated,
dual element sensor and a multi-element Fresnel lens. The lens
shall be Poly IR4 material to offer superior performance in the
infrared wavelengths and filter short wavelength IR, such as
those emitted by the sun and other visible light sources. The lens
shall have grooves facing in to avoid dust and residue build up
which affects IR reception.
n) The lens shall cover up to 2000 sq ft for walking motion when

mounted at 10 ft and 1000 sq ft of desktop motion.
o) Sensors shall have an additional single-pole, double throw

isolated relay with normally open, normally closed and common
outputs. The isolated relay is for use with HVAC control, data
logging, and other control options.
p) Sensors shall utilize technology to optimize time delay and

sensitivity settings to fit occupant usage patterns and shall be
selectable with a DIP switch.
q) Sensors shall have a time delay that is adjusted automatically

(with the setting) or shall have a fixed time delay of 5 to 30
minutes, set by DIP switch.
r) Sensors shall feature a walk-through mode, where air-

conditioning turn off 3 minutes after the area is initially occupied
if no motion is detected after the first 30 seconds.
s) Sensor shall have an override ON function for use in the event of

a failure.
t) Sensor shall have a built-in light level sensor that works from 10
to 300 footcandles.
u) Sensor shall have 8 occupancy logic options for customized

control to meet application needs.
v) Sensor shall have a manual on function that is facilitated by

installing a momentary switch.
w) Each sensing technology shall have an LED indicator that

remains active at all times in order to verify detection within the
area to be controlled. The LED can be disabled.
x) To ensure quality and reliability, sensor shall be manufactured by

an ISO 9002 certified manufacturing facility and shall have a
defect rate of less than 1/3 of 1%.
TS/M/S19/14 2602542S/AC
y) Sensor shall have standard 5-year warranty and shall be UL and
CUL listed.
z) BAS (ACMV) contractor shall design the quantity and location

of the motion sensors.
aa) All rooms shall be installed with motion sensors to off VAV
Boxes of increase to set point of thermostat controllers.
bb) Motion sensors shall be able to control the lighting of the rooms.
4.14. Indoor Air Quality Sensor
a) The Indoor Air Quality sensor shall be of wall or duct mounted

type with BACnet or Modbus communication. The sensor should
be all in one measurement of CO2, Volatile organic compounds
(VOC), temperature, Relative Humidity. The sensor shall have
LCD screen to displays the real-time value of CO2 and VOC
concentration in ppm, temperature and relative humidity. VOC
sensor shall be able to sense gases such as Formaldehyde,
organic odours, solvent, methane, hydrogen.
b) The CO2 sensor shall be of Non-dispersive infrared and the

accuracy shall be ± 5%, the sensing range shall be from 0 to
5,000 ppm with resolution of 1ppm. The response time shall not
exceed 20 seconds.
c) VOC sensor shall be of photoionization detector sensing with

accuracy of ± 10%, the sensing range shall be from 0 to 50.00
ppm with resolution of 0.01ppm. The response time shall not
exceed 3 seconds.
d) Temperature sensing range shall be from 0°C to 50°C, accuracy

of ±1°C and resolution of 1°C. Relativity humidity shall range
from 0% to 100%, accuracy of ±5% and resolution of 1%
4.15. Hydrogen Detector ( H2)
a) Hydrogen detector shall be of UL-listed using catalytic

combustion sensing technology. Detector to be housed in
polycarbonate enclosure.
b) The detector shall be of wall mount with 2-line LCD display,

LED status indication on power, alarm/fault with built-in buzzer
for alarm
c) Hydrogen Detector to have 4-20mA Output and 2xDPDT Alarm

relay output for BAS monitoring
d) The detector shall have accuracy of: +/-3% in full scale and
measurement Range between 0% to 100% LEL
TS/M/S19/15 2602542S/AC
SECTION 20 – VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE (VSD)
1. General
1.1. This section covers the supply, delivery, installation, testing and
commissioning and fifteen (15) months free maintenance and warranty of
Variable speed drive and their associated accessories.
1.2. Variable speed system shall be installed to control the speed of rotary
equipment such as for the cooling tower’s motors, AHU’s motors and
secondary chilled water pump’s motors as specified,
1.3. The system shall consist of but not be limited to AC VSDs, isolating
contactors, DDC controllers, feedback sensors and all other control devices
as required.
1.4. The VSDs shall be of the solid state, high efficiency (no less than 95% at
full load), AC adaptable frequency type. Direct current drives, eddy
current, belt drives, hydraulic drives and any other drives shall not be
acceptable.
1.5. The VSD shall be UL listed for a short circuit current rating of 100 kA and
labelled with the rating.
1.6. The VSD shall be tested to UL 508C. The appropriate UL label shall be
applied. VSD shall be manufactured in ISO 9000, 2000 certified facilities.
1.7. The VSD shall comply to BS EN 61800-3 Adjustable speed electrical power
drive systems. EMC requirements and specific test methods, IEC 60034-17
and 60034-25, Rotating electrical machines, AC electrical machines used in
power drive systems, IEC 61000-3-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
- Part 3-2: Limits - Limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment input
current ≤ 16 A per phase), IEC 61000-3-12 Electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC) - Part 3-12: Limits - Limits for harmonic currents produced by
equipment connected to public low-voltage systems with input current >16
A and ≤ 75 A per phase and EN 55011 Industrial, scientific and medical
equipment. Radio-frequency disturbance characteristics. Limits and
methods of measurement
1.8. Documentation and test report as per IEC 61800-3 clause 4 shall submit to
engineer. Compliance of VSD cable installation distance to equipment shall
be included.
1.9. The Variable speed Drive is preferably certified by Singapore Green

Building Council (SGBC) or Singapore Environment Council (SEC).
1.10. The manufacture shall provide product warranty for 5 year.
TS/M/S20/1 2602542S/AC
2. Design
2.1 The VSDs shall be of a microprocessor controlled using either Voltage

Vector Control (VVC) principle or Pulse Width Modulation (PWM). The
VSDs shall process high efficiency at full/part load. The VSDs shall not
require derating of motor at rated voltage and no cause more than 1˚C rise in
motor winding temperature over a wide operating range. At full load, motor
shall run at Class B rating.
2.2 The current wave form of the motor shall resemble the normal electricity
supply waveform (sinusoidal) to ensure high motor efficiency and smooth
running at all speeds, and low input current harmonics.
2.3 The Man Machine Interface (MMI) can read 5 simultaneous meter displays
on MMI and gives the possibility to read an energy log (last 24 hours, last 5
weeks, last 7 days, hour of the day, day of the week, day of the month) via
serial communication of Modbus, BacNet and other open protocol bus.. It
also allow to display 5 variables at any one time of kW, Kw hr, frequency,
motor speed & current and not limited to connected feedback signals and its
set points, in their own engg. units (e.g. : bar / 0C etc.). The display can be
program 255 characters in English text array.
2.4 The VSDs capacitor shall design for a life span of 10 years without the need
to be replaced every 3 to 5 years.
2.5 The product will be easy available locally. Customizing and alteration to the
VSD to suit the application or specification is not acceptable.
3. Basic Performance Requirement
3.1. Input Rated Voltage : 415 volts, 3 phase
3.2. Input Voltage Tolerance : +10% to -15% of rated voltage
3.3. Output Voltage : 0 to 100% of input voltage
3.4. Input Frequency : 50 Hz
3.5. Output Frequency : 0 to 60 Hz
3.6. Efficiency : at 100% speed shall have an overall

efficiency of no less than 95%
3.7. Frequency Stability : 175 parts per million / ˚C
3.8. Ambient Temperature Range : For Operating = 45˚C without derating

: For Storage = -20 to 70 ˚C
TS/M/S20/2 2602542S/AC
3.9. Relative Humidity : 95% RH non-condensing
3.10. Switching Frequency : for VSD up to 45kW rating frequency

control shall have self regulating
switching frequency range from 4.5
kHz to 14 kHz, without derating. For
VSD larger than 45kW, switching
frequency shall be manually selectable
but no less than 2 kHz.
3.11. Status Indication : The drive shall be equipped with a

selector keyboard and Alpha-Numeric
LCD status indication to show power
on; zero speed; enabled; forward;
reverse; accelerate and decelerate; etc.
3.12. Input Power Factor : The drive input shall have a cos Ø
corresponds to unity and true power
factor better than 0.9.
3.13. Auto Restart Feature : The VSD shall be capable of

automatically restart (auto restart)
after its external trip causing faults
have been rectified. The auto restart
shall NOT exceed 5 times within a
time span of 20 minutes. However
the VSD shall not attempt to start
automatically if it is tripped by
internal faults such as thermal cut-out,
peak current cut out, earthing of
output phase, etc. In such event, the
fault alarm shall be manually reset
before the VSD can be operational.
3.14. Start / Stop Control : Electronically controlled by contact

closure
3.15. Acceleration / Deceleration : Continuously adjustable from 0.75 to

30 sec.
TS/M/S20/3 2602542S/AC
3.16. Motor Torque : The VSD shall provide full motor
torque at any selected frequency from
10 Hz to base speed while providing a
variable torque V/Hz output at reduced
speed. This is to allow driving dire ct
drive fans without high speed derating
or low speed excessive magnetization,
as would occur if a constant torque
V/Hz curve was used at reduced
speeds. Breakaway current of 160%
shall be available.
3.17. Stalling Prevention The drive shall be designed

deceleration : with acceleration and limit circuit to
avoid nuisance tripping when:
The starting current drawn is too high

or the acceleration time set is too fast.
The acceleration limit circuit shall
reduce the acceleration rate to avoid
over-current tripping.
The regenerative voltage is too high or

the deceleration time set is too fast.
The deceleration limit circuit shall
reduce the deceleration rate to avoid
over voltage tripping.
3.18. Harmonic Suppression : The VSD shall be fitted with a

harmonic filter (D.C. link or
equivalent) on both inductive and
capacitive elements to control the
main borne harmonics. The harmonic
filter shall comply with guidelines of
IEC/EN 6100-3-2 and IEC/EN 6100-
3-12 . The same standard shall also
be used as a basis of calculation for
the total harmonic distortion at point
of common coupling. The filter shall
be mounted within the same enclosure
of the VSD. Any externally fitted
harmonic filter or harmonic filter that
causes voltage drop shall be rejected.
TS/M/S20/4 2602542S/AC
3.19. Electrical Noise : The VSD shall be include a radio
frequency interference (RFI) filter as
part of its design to be in compliance
with standard EN55011 Class 1A
(150 metres) and Class 1B (50
metres). The RFI filter shall conform
to immunity standard of IEC 61000
parts 2-5 and BS EN 61800-3. Test
document and report shall be
submitted for on compliance of cable
length distance. Documentation
according to IEC 61800-3 clause 4
shall submit to engineer.
3.20. Built-in Initial Setting : The VSD shall be provided with built-
in initial data setting to allow
immediate start up of drive.
3.21. Quality Assurance : The drive shall meet the international

standard of ISO9001.
3.22. Protection for the VSDs :
· Over temperature fault and shall be reset manually
· Built-in thermal motor protection, for efficient motor protection

even at low speed.
· Line transient protection. VDE0160 class W2 Protection by

measurement of 3 phases.
· Line to line and line to ground short circuit protection.
· Over current fault.
· Supply over-voltage and under-voltage fault.
· Insensitive to incoming power phase sequence.
· Current Limiting – 0-100% adjustable for maximum output current.
TS/M/S20/5 2602542S/AC
3.23. Analogue output signals for VSDs :
· Motor frequency : 0-20 mA for 0 to 100% rated motor

speed.
· Motor current : 0-20 mA for 0 to 100% rated motor

current.
· Relay output : A set of relay contacts shall be

provided to track any of the various
modes (such as “Run”, “Fault”, “Zero
speed”, etc.) selected for external
interlocking.
3.24. Input signals for the VSDs :
· Analogue Signal : 0 to 10 VDC and 0/4 to 20 mA
· Digital Signal : 4 inputs – reset, start, quick step
3.25. Galvanic Isolation : Isolation between power and control

components shall be incorporated to
ensure compliance with VDE 0160
P.E.L.V. to prevent damage to BMS
interface.
3.26. The VSD shall store in memory the last 10 alarms. A description of the
alarm, and the date and time of the alarm shall be recorded.
3.27. When used with a pumping system, the VSD shall be able to detect no-flow
situations, dry pump conditions, and operation off the end of the pump
curve. It shall be programmable to take appropriate protective action when
one of the above situations is detected.
3.28. Password protected keypad with alphanumeric, graphical, backlit display

can be remotely mounted. Two levels of password protection shall be
provided to guard against unauthorized parameter changes.
3.29. The VSD shall include a standard EIA-485 communications port and
capabilities to be connected to the following serial communication protocols
at no additional cost and without a need to install any additional hardware or
software in the VSD:
· Modbus RTU
· LonWorks Free Topology (FTP)
· BACnet MS/TP
· Profibus DP V1
TS/M/S20/6 2602542S/AC
4. Installation
4.1. All VSD installed outdoor shall be provided with suitable IP55
weatherproof housing complete with ventilation fan . All the ventilation fan
airflow rate shall be sized according to manufacturer recommendation in
enclosed space. Special attention shall be made not to install VSDs direct to
sunlight explosure.
4.2. All VSD installed indoor shall be provided with IP54 housing without
having to use a secondary enclosure.
4.3. All VSD installed inside the MCC and control panel shall be provided with
IP00 housing. The VSD vendor shall provided the details of heat removal
requirement (ventilation) for operating VSD in MCC and its control panel.
4.4. The Contractor shall be responsible for all electrical installation work
required for a fully functional system and shall comply with this
Specifications under the section on “Electrical Installation”.
4.5. All analogue communication cables shall be screened and installed in

separate conduit / trunking.
5. Testing and Commissioning
5.1. The testing and commissioning shall be done by a qualified person that
being trained for the installation and commissioning of VSD motor drive
system.
5.2. Contractor shall conduct system insulation test for all power cable
installation include drive to motor, earth continuity test and final
termination etc before start up
5.3. During commissioning, Contractor shall check the system input and out
voltage, currents, power factor, input parameter to drive, earth leakage
current, total harmonic distortion (THD), functional test, interval speed test
and BAS interfacing functional test.
5.4. Contractor shall submit a comprehensive testing and commissioning report

include power quality for each installed VSD to SO.
TS/M/S20/7 2602542S/AC
SECTION 21 - ELECTRONIC CONTROL SOFT STARTER
1. General
This section covers the supply, delivery, installation, testing and

commissioning and fifteen (15) months free maintenance and warranty of
electronic control soft starter and their associated accessories
2. Electronic Soft Starter
2.1. The electronic control soft starter shall be reduced voltage/current 3

phase motor type, providing ramp up, run and extended ramp
down features complete with pump control to reduce surges
caused by uncontrolled acceleration and deceleration of
centrifugal pumps. The starting time shall be adjustable from 2 to
30 seconds and stopping time shall be adjustable from 2 to 100
seconds.
2.2. The soft starter shall be sized according to the full load ampere of the
motor and shall be suitable for 400 V (+10% / -15%), 3 phase, 50 Hz
(±5%) operation in an ambient temperature of up to 50°C without
derating and relative humidity of up to 100%.
2.3. The soft starter shall comply with the following standards:
a) IEC 60068-2-6: Environmental testing, Vibration (sinusoidal)

resistance
b) IEC 60068-2-27: Environmental testing, shock resistance
c) IEC 61000-4-2: Electrostatic discharge immunity test;
d) IEC 61000-4-3: Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field

immunity test;
e) IEC 61000-4-4: Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test;
f) IEC 61000-4-5: Surge immunity test.
2.4. The soft starter shall be capable of bypass duty. The built-in
electronic bypass devices shall bypass the soft starter when the
motor has reached its full rated speed. External bypass contactor is
NOT accepted.
TS/M/S21/1 2602542S/AC
2.5. The soft starter shall consists of the following major components:
a) Thyristor
6 silicon control rectifiers (SCR) connected in inverse

parallel to provide 3-phase full wave control
b) Control module
Must be encapsulated to prevent dust and moisture

contamination. This module must be field replaceable
c) Metal oxide varistor
To protect the control against electrical transients and

electrical noise
d) Circuit breaker
Must come with shunt trip for the protection of the

motor when there is a shorted SCR and also operate as
an isolation between the starter and the incoming power
supplies
e) Motor overload
To protect the control and motor from repetitive or

extended starting conditions as well as running overload
conditions
2.6. The control module must provide the following:
a) Over current trip indication.
b) Control power ON indication.
c) Start/Stop indication and contact.
d) End of ramp indication and contact.
e) Provision for tacho generator feedback.
f) Current monitor indication and contact to indicate

running current above the preset value.
g) Shunt trip indication and contact.
h) Motor current display to check ramp up and ramp down

current conditions.
TS/M/S21/2 2602542S/AC
i) Dip switches/controls to allow the set up of Start, Stop
and Run mode of operations.
2.7. The required adjustments shall be as follows:
a) Start up adjustment
Ramp up time - this mode adjust the time it takes the

motor to reach full voltage/current adjustable from 3 to
30 seconds ramp up initial starting torque - to tun
slowly the instant the start button is pressed
Starting Pulse time - used to provide breakaway torque

for high friction load, adjustable from 0 to 1.5 second at
400 % of full load current.
Current Limit - max current setting to limit in rush
ampere during starting contact
b) Stopping adjustment
Ramp down time - provide deceleration time of 5 to

100 seconds while stopping the motor torque down
advance - in ramp down mode, when the stop button is
pressed, motor speed or voltage will immediately drop to
the set point of TD (0 to 100%). Control will continue
to ramp down to zero speed or voltage, depending on the
RD adjustment
c) Run adjustments
Current monitor set point (CM) - it must have range of at

least up to 550% of the motor FLA to monitor the
running current after the motor reaches the full run
condition. With CM enabled, if the running current
exceeds the CM set point, the current will shut down and
indicate the situation
TS/M/S21/3 2602542S/AC
2.8. The following protection shall be incorporated with the protection
system of the soft starter and shall automatically shut down when
any fault occurs:
a) Over or under current monitor
b) Phase loss protection
c) Over current protection
d) Over temperature trip
e) Surge voltage trip
f) Shorted SCR trip
TS/M/S21/4 2602542S/AC
SECTION 22 - AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHU) AND FILTERS WITH HEAT
PIPE
1. General

commissioning and fifteen (15) months free maintenance and war-
ranty of the air handling units (AHU) and the associated accessories.
efficient design and construction. The AHU shall be of single zone
central station type. The AHU shall be draw-through type and operate
with low noise level. The AHU shall be supplied and installed with
reference to the tender drawings and details as described in the Schedule
of Equipment Data. Each AHU shall consist of but not limited to the
following components:
a) casing made of frameless modular sandwiched panels or

prefabricated modular sandwiched panels with rigid extruded
aluminium frame (complete with insulation);
b) fan assembly consist of fan wheel directly coupled to the motor .
g) mixing chamber (if shown in drawings) for filtered fresh air and
return air; and

1.3 The AHUs and accessories shall be of compact design and construction
and so selected to meet the space and height constraints.
1.4 For AHUs in specified areas as indicated in the tender drawings, spare
TS/M/S21/1 2602542S/AC
1.5 One factory acceptance test shall be provided. The test covers one
typical unit. The test content shall consist of but not limited to the
followings:
a) Casing strength test
b) Casing air leakage test
c) Vibration test
2. AHU Casing
2.1. It shall be formed by standard set of sandwiched panels. All panels shall
be easily removed for the inspection and servicing of internal component
such as fan assembly and cooling coil.
2.2. The sandwiched panel shall be double-sided skin type with insulating
foam being totally encased by high grade galvanised sheets of at least
1.0 mm. No welding shall be required during site assembly.
2.3. Besides the cooling coil and fan assembly, the air passage of the AHU
shall be free of support to ensure smooth airflow. All exposed sheet
metal edges shall be filed or concealed as much as possible.
2.4. The external surface of the panels shall be powder painting to provide
resistance to atmospheric ageing and ultra violet light. The internal
surface of the panels shall be epoxy painting to provide resistance to
chemical. Minimum thickness of paint should be 60µm. The internal
and external surfaces of the panels shall be smooth to reduce the
possibility of bacteria growth and dust accumulation. All joints and
mating surfaces shall be air tight and insulated throughout to prevent the
forming of cold bridge.
2.5. The panel shall provide high noise damping characteristic of 32 dB

reductions. The insulation of the panels shall be injected polyurethane
with thermal conductivity (k value) of no more than 0.02 W/(m/K). The
minimal thickness and density of the insulation shall be 60 mm and 40
kg/cu.m for both indoor and outdoor (weatherproof) unit. The
waterproof unit shall be completed with a pitch roof.
TS/M/S21/2 2602542S/AC
2.6. The overall casing shall comply with the following criteria in accordance
with EN1866 and EUROVENT certified test report should be submitted:
a) Casing strength – Class 2A, casing deflection less than 4mm/m at
1500 Pa and no permanent deflection at 2500 Pa
b) Casing air leakage under -400 Pa – Class B
c) Casing air leakage under +700 Pa – Class B
d) Filter frame bypass leakage – Class F9, i.e. less than 0.5% at 400
Pa
e) Overall thermal transmittance – Class T1
f) Thermal bridging factor – Class TB1
3. Fan Assembly
3.1 General
The entire fan assembly shall be mounted on a steel structure with

vibration isolating base and housed within the casing of an AHU. The
minimal deflection for the spring of the vibration isolating base shall be
50 mm.
Mechanical power transmission from the motor to the fan shall be direct
driven by VSD. Two access panel or doors complete with approved
gaskets & Nylon handles, shall be provided for easy maintenance and
servicing of the fan assembly & coil. Each access door shall have a
minimum of 900 mm (height) x 570 mm (width). Compression type of
door handles that made of Nylon PA6 material; the screw is being
concealed completely in the door handle without exposing it to the
outside. The handle will be able to hold the door to the door panel firmly
to prevent air leakage
3.2 Fans Section
a) Centrifugal Fan
The fan shall be of forward or backward curved (aerofoil) types
as specified on the Schedule of Equipment Technical Data. Fan
wheels and shafts shall be statically balanced prior to assembly
and dynamically balanced as an assembly in the factory at design
speed prior to delivery. Fan shafts shall be selected to operate
well below the first critical speed. Fan wheels and shafts shall be
designed for continuous operation at the maximal rated speed
and motor capacity. All fans shall be selected to operate at air
flow and pressure efficiency of not less than 80%.
TS/M/S21/3 2602542S/AC
All fan housings, shafts and impellers (wheels) shall be from the
same fan manufacturer. Any mix matching of fan components or
prohibited.
aligned bearings with an expected life expectancy of 200,000
hours at designed operating conditions.
Backward curve fans shall be selected to operate stably within

the range of 30% to 110% of the specified air flow rate. The
impeller shall be constructed by mild steel , weld & paint with
epoxy paint.
Fans shall be selected to provide high static efficiency but low

sound level and power consumption at specified air flow rate.
Selection of fan shall be subject to S.O.'s approval. The fan
performance shall comply to BS 848, BS EN ISO 5801or DIN
standard while the certification of quality assurance shall comply
to BS EN ISO 9001.
b) Plug Fan
Fans shall be high efficiency backward curve plug fans or

centrifugal fans. The plug fans shall be direct driven with
external variable speed drive. . Motor speeds shall not exceed
1500 rpm or exceed 50Hz as noted on the Tender Drawings. All
fans shall be selected to operate at air flow and pressure
efficiency of not less than 80%.
separate variable speed drive Each fan shall be sized to deliver
100% of rated flow rate unless specified otherwise in the
Equipment Schedule. The fan section shall be compartmented to
enable maintenance on one fan without the need to shut down
the AHU.
TS/M/S21/4 2602542S/AC
requirement of Class I, II and III limit as defined in AMCA
standard 99-2408. Bearing shall have minimum life L10 of 40,000
hours at maximum rpm and power certified in accordance to
Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturer Association (AFBMA)
standards. The fans shall be placed in the unit with an even
inflow and outflow is achieved. Distance on the suction side with
minimum 0.5 x impeller diameter from component or walls in
axial direction. Fan in radial flow configurations shall have a
minimum 1.5 x impeller diameter or flow intake device. Fan
distance from the pressure side shall be free running impellers
minimum 1 x impeller diameter and other fans outflow angle
minimum α = 45° from components.
c) Axial Fans

motors giving non-loading characteristics. Motor speeds shall
not exceed 1500 rpm or 50Hz as noted on the Tender Drawings.
Fans shall be balanced and free from vibration and the blades of
adjustable type.
Casings shall be of standard length designed to protect both the

motor and impeller, continuously welded throughout and hot-
dipped galvanised after manufacture. Inspection doors to enable
direction of rotation to be checked shall be provided. Terminal
boxes welded to the casing shall be provided for electrical
connection to fan motor. Lubrication of bearing shall be possible
from outside the fan casing. Impellers shall be of die cast
aluminum coated with epoxy and low frictional losses.

limit as defined in AMCA standard. Bearing shall have minimum
life L10 of 40,000 hours at designed operating conditions.
The fan performance shall comply to BS 848, BS EN ISO 5801.

All fans shall be selected to operate at air flow and pressure
efficiency of not less than 80%. Fans shall be selected to provide
medium or high static efficiency as specified but low sound level
and power consumption at specified air flow rate. Selection of
comply to BS 848, BS EN ISO 5801 or DIN standard while the
certification of quality assurance shall comply to BS EN ISO
9001.
TS/M/S21/5 2602542S/AC
d) Fan Array
For multiple fan assembly, AHU shall provide a redundant fan

such that should a single fan fails, the remaining fans will still
deliver 100% of the specified airflow. The complete fan
assembly together with motor and drive shall have an overall
efficiency of minimum not less than 85%.
Each fan shall be driven by a separate external variable speed

drives. spacing of fans shall follow fan manufacturer’s instruction
to ensure achievement of highest performance. Low leakage
back draft damper shall be provided for every fan to prevent
recirculation through a non-operational fan.
3.3 Fan Motors
The fan motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type with
IP55 protection and class F insulation for copper windings. The motor
shall be of 4 pole and wound for standard 3 phase electrical supply of
415 V and 50 Hz. Motor frame shall be made of durable aluminium alloy
in compliance with IEC 60034 and BS EN 13195 for squirrel cage
motors. Fan motor control by VSD shall be designed to operate between
10 HZ to 50 HZ. All fan motor shall comply to IEC 60034-30, energy
efficiency shall be class premium IE3 and above with test standard
comply to IEC 60034-2-1or IEEE 112.
3.4 Cooling Coils
The cooling coil for the AHU shall be suitable for chilled water
application. The coil shall be constructed of copper tubes with
mechanically bonded corrugated aluminum fins to enhance heat transfer.
The coil frame shall be of stainless steel formed to provide structural
strength. Suitable provision shall be made to facilitate adequate draining
and cleaning through removable plugs at both ends of each tube. Each
set of coil shall be fitted with manual air vent at the highest point.
The coil shall be fitted with supply and return headers (manifold), made
of copper pipes, to ensure even distribution of chilled water throughout
the coil. All copper to copper joints shall be brazed with copper brazing
alloys or silver solder. Soft solder is strictly prohibited.
Cooling coil for the 100 % fresh air AHU shall be coated with approved
corrosion resistant material.
The coil, designed with the following characteristics shall have a

performance rating no less than that of the AHRI standard.
TS/M/S21/6 2602542S/AC
No Characteristics Specifications
.
3 Maximum air side face velocity without 2.5 m/sec
moisture carry over
4 Fin spacing 10 fins per 25 mm
5 Maximum pressure drop of water at rated 40 kPa
flow
6 Maximum air resistance across coil 250 Pa
All drain pans shall be made of grade 304 stainless steel of 1.0 mm. The drain
pans shall be of slope type as per specifications with the primary drain pan being
installed right below the cooling coil while the secondary extends from coil to
fan section. Drain pipes shall be of uPVC laid with sufficient gradient, properly
secured to the floor and terminated into the nearest floor trap.
5. Mixing Chambers

filtered fresh air and return air. The construction, materials and finishing of
mixing chambers shall be identical to that of the AHU casing. The fresh air
intake shall be controlled by motorised dampers.
6. Installation
recommendation. Each unit shall be installed on the "U" or "C" channel
structure with neoprene isolator on the loaded sides of the structure to reduce
the transmission of vibration. The AHU shall be installed to provide easy access
to components such as fan assembly, coils and air filters for servicing and
maintenance.
TS/M/S21/7 2602542S/AC
7. Filters
7.1. All AHUs and fresh air intakes and where indicated on the tender
drawings shall be provided with primary and secondary air filters of the
type as specified herein. HEPA filter shall be provided where indicated
on the tender drawings.
7.2. General
a) All AHUs and fresh air intakes and where indicated on the
Drawings shall be provided with air filters of the type as
specified herein.
b) The Sub-Contractor shall provide (minimum) the following filter


commissioning
ii) one complete set after testing and commissioning and

before handover to Employer
iii) one complete set halfway during the Defects Liability

Period
The Sub-Contractor shall nevertheless replace any filters

discovered to be worn out or clogged during the course of the
free servicing and maintenance period. The filters replaced are
not considered as part of the above mentioned sets.
c) Sample of filters complete with frame shall be submitted to S.O.

for approval.

manufacturer's recommendation and to the satisfaction of the
S.O. Proper access for cleaning, media removal and inspection
shall be provided. Leakage for unfiltered air shall be prevented
by air-tight sealing of the filter holding frames or casings.
e) Air filters shall be of approved make and shall be manufactured

to a fully developed design currently in production and readily
available.
TS/M/S21/8 2602542S/AC
f) Air filters shall comply with the requirements of ASHRAE 52-76
or an approved equivalent standard. Reference shall be made to
ASHRAE 52-76 or to the relevant approved equivalent standard
for definition of terms employed.

h) The filters shall be installed complete with all accessories and

other minor necessary for their satisfactory installation and
performance whether individually specified or not.


approval.

suitable scale ranges shall be provided and installed to indicate
filter resistance.
7.3. Pleated Extended Surface Filter (Low Efficiency) - Primary Filter

b) The filters, with non-woven synthetic fabric media, shall be listed

by the Underwriter Laboratory as Class 2.

the compliance with the following minimal requirements shall be

ASHRAE 52-76
velocity Pa)
4 Final media resistance at 2.5m/sec approach air <25mm w.g. (245
velocity Pa)
TS/M/S21/9 2602542S/AC
corrosion resistant wire to maximize dust collection capacity and
to avoid the possibility of media oscillation and media being
pulled away by air flow.

largest surfaces of the cartridge shall be die-cut into mating
unobstructed area for air now. The filter media shall be perfectly
bonded to the internal periphery of the cartridge to prevent air
from bypassing the media.

of media per 1 m2 of filter face area.
7.4. Pleated Extended Surface Filter (High Efficiency) - Secondary Filter

300 mm.

Class 2.


ASHRAE 52-76
velocity (100 Pa)
velocity (245 Pa)

TS/M/S21/10 2602542S/AC
heavy duty and corrosion resistant materials. The two largest
unobstructed area for airflow the filter media shall be perfectly
f) Filter media shall be pleated to produce an effective area of 10m²

of media per 1m² of filter face area.
8.1. Media Support Grid
sandwiched by to maintain the designed space for each pleat to
maximize dust collection capacity and to avoid the possibility of media
oscillation and media being pulled away.
8.2. Enclosing Frame
The enclosing frame shall made of heavy duty, rigid an high wet strength
beverage board. The frame, with two of its largest surfaces being die-cut
into mating openings with diagonal supports, shall be a square box of
about 100 mm depth capable of totally encasing the filter media. The
filter media shall be perfectly bonded to the internal periphery of the
frame to prevent air leak.
8.3. Filter Media
Filter media shall be non-woven synthetic fabric being pleated into no

less than 11 pleats per linear foot and an effective area of 7 sq.ft per 1
sq.ft of filter face area.
8.4. Filter Housing
shall be factory fabricated and assembled by the air filter manufacturer.
All filter housing shall be externally insulated to prevent condensation.
TS/M/S21/11 2602542S/AC
8.5. Rear Access Filter Housings
designed to accommodate a standard size pleated filter. Constructed
with minimal gauge 16 galvanised steel, each module shall be equipped
with gaskets and spring fasteners to form perfect seal against air leak.
All infiltration gaps formed by modules are to be sealed perfectly with
gasket.
8.6. Side Access Filter Housing
Side access filter housings shall be accessible through filter slots at both
sides of an AHU. The slots shall be sealed by gasketted, gauge 16 access
door with latches. Inside the slot, standard sized, 100 mm deep pleated
filters shall be held by extruded aluminium track free of rivets or self-
tapping screws, which tend to obstruct the sliding of filters.
9.1 All air handling units (AHUs) shall be fitted with dual smoke detectors
(probe units) of approved design and manufacture in the return-air
stream immediately adjacent to the air handling unit.
9.2 The smoke detectors (i.e. probe units) shall be provided for monitoring
of the return air ducts of the AHUs. In the event of alarm from the
probe unit, the related air conditioning equipment (AHU) shall 'shut
down' automatically. Provisions in the form of relays, terminal strips,
etc. shall be provided for each smoke detector to enable each detector to
send a signal to the fire alarm in the event of an emergency condition.
The final connection to the external interfacing device (supplied and
installed by others) shall be by the Sub-Contractor.
completed with integral power supply unit suitable for 230V, 50 Hz
operation and relay contacts for alarm and trouble condition monitoring
and control.
9.5 All duct smoke detectors shall be furnished with air sampling tubes
extending through the width of the air duct.
TS/M/S21/12 2602542S/AC
9.6 The unit shall deviate a small amount of air from regular to high velocity
air conditioning and/or ventilation ducts into a special chamber, which
contains a smoke detector.
9.7 The unit shall not have to be adjusted to air streams between 1 m/s and
20 m/s.

9.11 The unit shall be designed so that all service work can be carried out
without affecting the duct system.

9.16 The air duct detector assembly and its cover shall be joined via a rubber
lip to prevent unwanted passage of air and/or smoke.
9.18 The unit shall be equipped with a terminal block with screw less
terminals accepting wires between 0.25 mm2 and 1.5 mm2 (SWG 23 and
15) and equipped with built-in strain limits.
assembly.
9.21 The unit shall be supplied with a template for duct penetrations and
complete mounting, connection and maintenance guidelines.
TS/M/S21/13 2602542S/AC
detection chamber and the compartment containing the affiliated
electronics.
9.24 The electronics compartment of the air duct detector assembly shall
provide ample room for additional circuitry.

All AHU provided with variable speed drive shall be provided with a VSD
bypass controller and starters. This is to allow the AHUs to be operated in a
constant speed mode should the VSD be faulty or under maintenance.
11. Heat Pipes
Heat pipes shall be horseshoe unit type. The assembly will consist of 2 heat
exchanger coil blocks mounted within a single sheet metal framework for ease
of installation.
The assembly shall be U-shaped, with identically sized front and rear coil
blocks, which constitute precool and reheat sections of the heat pipe assembly
respectively. The separation between the coil blocks shall be sufficient to
provide clearance on either side of the cooling coil, and shall be handed to suit
the installation.
The heat pipe sections shall have interconnecting pipework linking them
together on the opposite side of the coil from the cooling coil connections.
These will be encased in a rigid box to provide stiffness and to protect the
pipework during installation.
TS/M/S21/14 2602542S/AC
The cooling coil under operation shall provide a temperature differential
enabling the heat pipe assembly to transfer sensible heat from up to downstream
of the cooling coil, thus enhancing the capacity of the cooling coil to
dehumidify, and saving energy in terms of cooling capacity and reheat
requirements.
11.1 General
Air Handling Unit (AHU) air conditioning equipment shall be equipped

with Dehumidifier Heat Pipes supplied manufacturers to pre-cool the
air, and reheat the air in a wrap around configuration applied to a supply
cooling coil as specified in equipment schedule.
The pre-cool section shall be located immediately before the cooling

coil, and the reheat section immediately after. Both heat pipe sections
shall be integral to the equipment cabinet.
The interconnecting piping between heat pipe sections shall be located at

the opposite side from chilled water connections and enclosed within a
rigid frame.
For installation, the interconnecting pipework section shall preferably be

located within the assembled access/ coil section.
11.2 Performance
The Heat Pipe unit shall provide pre-cool and reheat capacity in
compliance with maximum performance criteria laid down elsewhere in
the specification/schedule under design conditions. Airside pressure
drop shall be as given on the specification/schedule or as otherwise
specified.
11.3 Construction:
The Heat Pipe unit shall comprise pre-cool and reheat sections
constructed of copper tubes within continuous plate type fins, carried
within rigid framework.
The tubes shall be of solid drawn copper, of specific internal design to

provide enhanced heat transfer, and permanently expanded into the fin
collars to form a rigid continuous contact under all operating conditions.
Wall thickness shall be a minimum of 0.35mm. The tube pattern shall
be a staggered equilateral design, and the number of rows shall be as
specified to provide the required performance.
TS/M/S21/15 2602542S/AC
The Heat Pipes shall be interconnected with circuitry as specified from
design criteria, and individually processed, precharged with R134A,
hermetically sealed and tested.
The heat transfer fluid shall be classified as Safety Group A1 in BSR/

ASHRAE Std 15-1989 R
The fin surface shall be of aluminium 0.15mm thickness
The fin surface shall be of specific design to produce maximum heat

transfer efficiency for heat pipe applications. Fin density shall be as
specified to provide the required performance. Performance shall be
verifiable to ENV 1216
The tube endplates, sideplates and other associated framework elements

shall be in a minimum of 1.6mm thick Galvanised sheet steel
Condensate removal from the pre-cool section (where this occurs) shall
be provided for within the equipment cabinet by others unless otherwise
specified.
11.4 Installation.
This shall be provided for by the AHU manufacturer or other appointed

installer. The dimensions of the AHU shall provision for inclusion of the
Horseshoe Unit interconnecting pipework section around the cooling
coil. Upon installation the manufacturer shall ensure no air bypass within
the cabinet, and proper sealing and insulation to make good the
installation
TS/M/S21/16 2602542S/AC
SECTION 23 – 100% FRESH AIR BUILD UP AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHU)
AND FILTERS WITH HEAT RECOVERY UNIT
1. General

of the air handling units (AHU) and the associated accessories.
1.2 The Build Up Air Handling Unit (AHU) shall be site built-up, tested and
commissioned. The AHU shall be of single zone central station type. The
AHU shall be draw-through type and operate a low noise level. The AHU
shall be supplied and installed with reference to the tender drawings and
details as described in the Schedule of Equipment Data. Each AHU shall
consist of but not be limited to the following components:
a) casing made of applying cold room panels to existing masonry

floor, walls and ceiling slab.
b) fan assembly consist of fan wheel, fan motor, tapered-lock pulleys

and adequate number of belts for transmissions;
c) coil section with cooling coil of copper tubes and aluminum fins;
d) Primary and secondary filter sections with filter housing and air
filters;
e) HEPA filter section
f) insulated grade 304 stainless steel drain pans;
g) removable panels and access door for servicing;
h) mixing chamber for filtered fresh air and return air; and
i) vibration-isolating bases, vibration isolator and other accessories

j) Section for UV-C Emitter light
1.3 The build up AHUs and accessories shall be of compact design and
construction and so selected to meet the space and height constraints.
1.4 For build up AHUs in specified areas as indicated in the tender drawings,
spare motors shall be installed ready for operation in an emergency.
TS/M/S23/1 2602542S/AC
1.5 Air Handling Units shall preferably with highest energy efficiency and
comply to BCA green mark requirement in kW/RT and W/CMH. Selection
shall base on total efficiency include starter drive.
1.6 Air Handling Units shall comply to BCA green mark requirement in
kW/RT and W/CMH.
2. AHU Construction
2.1 Wall, Floor and Roof Panels
a) The AHU rooms shall be free standing type with prefabricated

metal bonded polystyrene for walls and roofs.
b) Polystyrene foam insulation shall have an inner and outer stressed

metal skin bonded with thermo setting adhesive under elevated
temperature and pressure (walls and ceiling).
c) Polystyrene foam insulating material shall be free of line faults

through or across the panel. The minimum compressive strength
for panel material shall be 100 kPa at a 10% reduction in thickness.
The minimum cross-breaking strength for panel material shall be
165 kPa. The maximum water vapour permeability of any
polystyrene foam material shall be 70 grammes per square metre,
per 24 hours at 38°C and 90% relative humidity. All polystyrene
foam material shall be self extinguishing (SE) grade with a density
of not less than 24 kg/m3. The maximum thermal resistivity of
panel type insulation shall be 30 m°C per watt at 10°C when
tested.
d) The interior surfaces of the wall panels shall be made of 22 gauge

baked enamel steel sheet. The exterior surface of the wall panels
shall be similarly made of 22 gauge baked enamel steel sheet.
e) All nails, bolts, nuts, fasteners and other metal items used for
construction of AHU room shall be stainless steel.
f) The panel thicknesses shall be as follows :
External walls to all AHU rooms min. 100 mm

Roofs to all AHU rooms min. 100 mm
Floor insulation to all AHU rooms min. 100 mm
TS/M/S23/2 2602542S/AC
g) The base floor slab shall be covered with 0.35mm polythene virgin
grade membrane with a turn up to a height of 150mm from finished
floor level. A minimum of 150 mm overlap shall be provided
between adjacent sheets and the complete lapped portion shall be
glued twice with butyl adhesive. A further membrane shall be
provided above the floor insulation before laying of the final wear
slab.
h) A steel reinforced concrete wearing floor shall be casted of

nominal thickness of 75 mm on top of the floor insulation complete
with coving to all vertical faces within the rooms. All coving shall
be finished with non-hardening silicon sealant. Concrete wear
slabs shall be graded to floor trap and ramped to meet the building
floor screed at 100 mm from the surface of the room. The wearing
floor shall be suitably treated and hardened to bear the load on it.
i) A hardener coating system suitable for heavy duty usage at low

temperature condition shall be applied onto the surface of the
levelled concrete wearing floor. The concrete surface must be
steel trowelled flat and even. Dusting of cement power on the
concrete before final trowel finish is not allowed. The concrete
shall be allowed to dry for a minimum of 28 days. All dirt, stains
and foreign matters are to be removed by appropriate means and
all cracks, pot holes, air pockets are to be patched up before the
coating. The coating system consists of one coat of Primer, one
base coat and one coat of finishing. The colour is of standard
range and thickness of finish is 4 mm. The Sub-Contractor shall be
responsible for proper application of the coating system to ensure
good plasticity and excellent impart resistance at low temperatures
as well as an aesthetic finish.
j) The top of the ramp at the doorway shall be steel trowelled level
and flat to ensure an airtight seal at the strip where the door gasket
meets the ramp.
k) The Sub-Contractor shall provide detailed drawings of the

complete floor construction intended for each room with particular
reference to levels and finishes for the S.O.'s approval prior to
construction.
l) Samples of all materials used for the construction of the AHU

rooms shall be submitted to the S.O. for approval prior to
installation.
TS/M/S23/3 2602542S/AC
2.2 Doors
a. Doors shall be side hinged type. It shall come complete with

infitting rubber seal with door frame. The door sizes shall be at
least 1000 mm wide by 2100 mm high clear opening. The doors
shall be finished flush with the walls in the closed position.
b. The door latch shall be of chrome-plated finish with provision

locking from outside and safety arrangement for opening from
inside even if it is locked from outside. The latch shall be provided
with spring for smooth, self-releasing action. Provision shall be
made to prevent "sweating" from occurring on this releasing
mechanism.
c. All hinges shall be heavy duty chrome-plated type fixed to double

gasket joints giving uniform pressure to the door frames.
d. The door shall be provided with high quality rubber strip of

suitable dimensions fixed to the perimeter of the door by metal
strapping to ensure complete air-tightness.
e. One set of low voltage heater elements shall be installed on each of

the doors to prevent condensation from occurring.
f. All door frames shall be sufficiently heated using hidden MICS

cable rated to ensure no condensation on the demarcation areas
between AHU rooms and brick walls / partitions. Any
condensation shall be rectified by the Sub-Contractor.
g. Transformers shall be supplied and installed at high level above the

doors for connection to power wiring by the Sub-Contractor.
h. A fire rated door of 1 hour fire ratings shall be provided for each
AHU room with appropriate features to ensure that the fire rating
to the AHU room is maintained. All fire doors shall be approved
by PSB and bear the PSB Certificate mark scheme.
2.3 Workmanship and Installation
a) First class workmanship only will be accepted with regard to

design, safety, structural adequacy, durability, efficiency, neatness
of details, etc.
b) All AHU room wall panels shall be flat, straight and free of surface
faults. Panels shall be erected square to opposing panels and truly
vertical to string lines.
TS/M/S23/4 2602542S/AC
c) All joiner mouldings shall be straight and free of surface faults.
Mouldings shall be mitred accurately with burrs removed and
sealed to panels with non-hardening sealant and stainless steel
rivets.
d) The Sub-Contractor shall have due regard for maintaining a vapour

seal on all rooms.
e) Door shall have frames erected in the truly vertical and horizontal
planes for the respective door.
f) All channel and moulding sections shall be straight, free of twist

and free of abnormal surface faults.
g) The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for taking reasonable care

in protecting his material from damage on site.
h) The build up AHU shall be constructed to withstand high static

pressure.
2.4 Support and Penetration
a) Intermediate roof supports shall be provided as necessary to

maintain rigidity of each room and prevent any possible sagging of
panels after installation. Due allowance shall be made for support
of refrigeration units, light fittings, etc.
b) Supporting shall be carried out by use of hot dipped galvanised

steel turn-buckle fixed to the slab above.
c) All penetrations shall be completely sealed and protected against

condensation. Holes for penetrations shall be cut using a hole saw
to provide minimum clearance around cables, pipe, etc.
2.5 Lighting
a) The inside of the AHU rooms shall be illuminated with a minimum

40 watts per square meter. The light fitting shall be of the water-
proof type. Provision shall be allowed for the lighting to be
switched on/off from inside the room as well as from outside. The
switch sockets shall come with a red indicator light.
b) Outside the AHU room, there shall be a lighting panel indicating

whether the AHU room is "IN-USE".
TS/M/S23/5 2602542S/AC
2.6 Safety Alarm
a) A bell-alarm shall be provided as a safety measure for users

trapped in the AHU room. The control switch or push button shall
be located inside the AHU room close to the front at a prominent
location.
b) The alarm bell shall be of the continuous sounding type with high
sound power level and shall be located on the front of AHU room.
The bell shall be of approved type and suitable for use on 230
volts/1 phase/50Hz power supply.
3 Fan Assembly
3.1 General
The entire fan assembly shall be mounted on a steel structure with

vibration isolating base and housed within the casing of an AHU. The
minimal deflection for the spring of the vibration isolating base shall be 50
mm.
Mechanical power transmission from the motor to the fan shall by means
of coupling. Fan shall be directly coupled to the motor. Each Build Up
AHU shall be installed with 2 fans & motors. Fan and motor selected shall
be of high total efficiency on as specified in Equipment Schedule or
Drawings. The motor shall be driven by external variable speed drive.
3.2 Fans Section
a) Centrifugal Fan

specified on the Schedule of Equipment Technical Data. Fan
wheels and shafts shall be statically balanced prior to assembly and
continuous operation at the maximal rated speed and motor
capacity. All fans shall be selected to operate at air flow and
pressure efficiency of not less than 80%.
prohibited.
TS/M/S23/6 2602542S/AC
aligned bearings with an expected life expectancy of 200,000 hours
at designed operating conditions.

range of 30% to 110% of the specified air flow rate.
Fans shall be selected to provide high static efficiency but low

sound level and power consumption at specified air flow rate.
Selection of fan shall be subject to S.O.'s approval. The fan
performance shall comply to BS 848, BS EN ISO 5801or DIN
standard while the certification of quality assurance shall comply to
BS EN ISO 9001. Impellers & shaft as an assembly shall comply to
DIN standard
b) Plug Fan
Fans shall be high efficiency backward curve plug fans or

centrifugal fans. The plug fans shall be direct driven with external
variable speed drive. . Motor speeds shall not exceed 1500 rpm or
exceed 50Hz as noted on the Tender Drawings. All fans shall be
selected to operate at air flow and pressure efficiency of not less
than 80%.
100% of rated flow rate unless specified otherwise in the
Equipment Schedule. The fan section shall be compartmented to
enable maintenance on one fan without the need to shut down the
AHU.

requirement of Class I, II and III limit as defined in AMCA
standard 99-2408. Bearing shall have minimum life L10 of 40,000
hours at maximum rpm and power certified in accordance to Anti-
Friction Bearing Manufacturer Association (AFBMA) standards.
The fans shall be placed in the unit with an even inflow and
outflow is achieved. Distance on the suction side with minimum
0.5 x impeller diameter from component or walls in axial direction.
Fan in radial flow configurations shall have a minimum 1.5 x
impeller diameter or flow intake device. Fan distance from the
pressure side shall be free running impellers minimum 1 x impeller
diameter and other fans outflow angle minimum α = 45° from
components.
TS/M/S23/7 2602542S/AC
c) Axial Fans

exceed 1500 rpm or exceed 50Hz as noted on the Tender
Drawings. Fans shall be balanced and free from vibration and the
blades of adjustable type.

motor and impeller, continuously welded throughout and hot-
dipped galvanised after manufacture. Inspection doors to enable
direction of rotation to be checked shall be provided. Terminal
boxes welded to the casing shall be provided for electrical
connection to fan motor. Lubrication of bearing shall be possible
from outside the fan casing. Impellers shall be of die cast aluminum
coated with epoxy and low frictional losses.

limit as defined in AMCA standard. Bearing shall have minimum
life L10 of 40,000 hours at designed operating conditions.
The fan performance shall comply to BS 848, BS EN ISO 5801.

All fans shall be selected to operate at air flow and pressure
efficiency of not less than 80%. Fans shall be selected to provide
medium or high static efficiency as specified but low sound level
and power consumption at specified air flow rate. Selection of fan
shall be subject to S.O.'s approval. The fan performance shall
comply to BS 848, BS EN ISO 5801 or DIN standard while the
d) Fan Array
that should a single fan fails, the remaining fans will still deliver
100% of the specified airflow. The complete fan assembly together
with motor and drive shall have an overall efficiency of minimum
not less than 85%.
Each fan shall be driven by a separate external variable speed

drives. spacing of fans shall follow fan manufacturer’s instruction
to ensure achievement of highest performance. Low leakage back
draft damper shall be provided for every fan to prevent
recirculation through a non-operational fan.
TS/M/S23/8 2602542S/AC
3.3 Fan Motors
protection and class F insulation for copper windings. The motor shall be
of 4 pole and wound for standard 3 phase electrical supply of 415 V and
50 Hz. Motor frame shall be made of durable aluminum alloy in
compliance with IEC 60034 and BS EN 13195 for squirrel cage motors ;
for fan up to 30 HP .
For fan motor above 30 HP ; Motor frame shall be made of durable cast
iron in compliance with IEC 60034 and BS 5000 for squirrel cage motors.
Fan Motor control by VSD shall be designed to operate between 10 HZ to
50 HZ. All fan motor shall comply to IEC 60034-30, energy efficiency
shall be class premium IE3 and above with test standard comply to IEC
60034-2-1or IEEE 112. If permanent magnet motor being offered, sub-
contractor shall ensure that there will be no de-magnetization and back
electromotive force generated.
3.4 Cooling Coils
The cooling coil for the AHU shall be suitable for chilled water
The coil frame shall be of 304 stainless steel formed to provide structural
and cleaning through removable plugs at both ends of each tubes. Each set
of coil shall be fitted with automatic air vent at the highest point.
copper pipes, to ensure even distribution of chilled water throughout the
coil. All copper to copper joints shall be brazed with copper brazing alloys
or silver solder. Soft solder is strictly prohibited.
Cooling coil for the AHU shall be coated with approved corrosion
resistant material such as Acrylic Resin.

TS/M/S23/9 2602542S/AC
max 8 rows
5 Maximum pressure drop of water 30 kPA
at rated flow
4 Drain Pans & Drain Pipes
All drain pans shall be made of grade 304 stainless steel of gauge 18. The drain
pans shall be of double bottom type as per specifications with the primary drain
pan being installed right below the cooling coil while the secondary extends from
coil to fan section. Drain pipes shall be of uPVC laid with sufficient gradient,
properly secured to the floor and terminated into the nearest floor trap.
5 Mixing Chambers

chambers shall be identical to that of the AHU casing. The return air inlet shall be
fixed with volume control air dampers.
6 Installation
recommendation .The AHU shall be installed to provide easy access to
components such as fan assembly, coils and air filters for servicing and
maintenance.
TS/M/S23/10 2602542S/AC
7 Filters
7.1 All FCUs, DFCUs, AHUs and fresh air intakes and where indicated on the
tender drawings shall be provided with air filters of the type as specified
herein.

b) The filters, with non-woven synthetic fabric media, shall be listed

by the Underwriter Laboratory as Class 2.


1 Average atmospheric dust spot efficiency on ASHRAE 25% to 30%
52-76
3 Initial media resistance at 2.5m/sec approach air velocity <7.1mm w.g. (70 Pa)
4 Final media resistance at 2.5m/sec approach air velocity <25mm w.g. (245 Pa)


largest surfaces of the cartridge shall be die-cut into mating
unobstructed area for air now. The filter media shall be perfectly

of media per I m2 of filter face area.
TS/M/S23/11 2602542S/AC

300 mm.

Class 2.


1 Average atmospheric dust spot efficiency on ASHRAE 90% - 95%
52-76
velocity (100 Pa)
velocity (245 Pa)


unobstructed area for air flow The filter media shall be perfectly
f) Filter media shall be pleated to produce an effective area of 10m²

of media per 1m² of filter face area.
TS/M/S23/12 2602542S/AC
8 Filter Construction
supported by to maintain the designed space for each pleat to maximize
dust collection capacity and to avoid the possibility of media oscillation
and media being pulled away.
8.2 Enclosing Frame
The enclosing frame shall be made of heavy duty, rigid an high wet
strength beverage board. The frame, with two of its largest surfaces being
die-cut into mating openings with diagonal supports, shall be a square box
of about 100 mm depth capable of totally encasing the filter media. The
filter media shall be perfectly bonded to the internal periphery of the frame
to prevent air leak.
8.3 Filter Media
filter face area.
8.4 Filter Housing
shall be factory fabricated and assembled by the air filter manufacturer. All
filter housing shall be externally insulated to prevent condensation.
minimal gauge 16 galvanissed steel, each module shall be equipped with
filters shall be held by extruded aluminum track free of rivets or self-
tapping screws which tend to obstruct the sliding of filters.
TS/M/S23/13 2602542S/AC
(probe units) of approved design and manufacture in the return-air stream
9.2 The smoke detectors (i.e. probe units) shall be provided for monitoring of
the return air ducts of the AHUs. In the event of alarm from the probe
unit, the related air conditioning equipment (AHU) shall 'shut down'
automatically. Provisions in the form of relays, terminal strips, etc. shall be
provided for each smoke detector to enable each detector to send a signal
to the fire alarm in the event of an emergency condition. The final
connection to the external interfacing device (supplied and installed by
others) shall be by the Sub-Contractor.
operation and relay contacts for alarm and trouble condition monitoring
and control.
9.6 The unit shall deviate a small amount of air from regular to high velocity
air conditioning and/or ventilation ducts into a special chamber, which
contains a smoke detector.
m/s.

TS/M/S23/14 2602542S/AC

9.16 The air duct detector assembly and its cover shall be joined via a rubber lip
to prevent unwanted passage of air and/or smoke.
assembly.
detection chamber and the compartment containing the affiliated
electronics.
9.24 The electronics compartment of the air duct detector assembly shall
provide ample room for additional circuitry.

TS/M/S23/15 2602542S/AC
10. HEPA Filters
10.1. Filters shall be of the high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) type. The
components shall include particle board cell sides, water-proofed fire-
retardant glass fibre media; aluminum separators for 100% RH, neoprene
rubber bond. The media shall have a minimum thickness of 0.381 mm ±
0.07 mm, and a minimum tensile strength of 0.54 kg per cm. Each filter
cell shall withstand a pressure drop of 250 mm WG.
10.2. Each filter shall be rated for a maximum pressure drop of 25.4 mm WG
clean resistance.
10.3. Each filter shall be individually scan tested and certified to have an
efficiency of not least than 99.999 percent when tested with 0.3 micron
dioctyl phthlate (DOP) particles. Filter style code and performance shall be
printed on each filter cell.
10.4. Extreme care must be exercised at all times in the delivery, handling and
installation of the HEPA filters. Any filter damaged during the installation
shall be replaced.
10.5. The HEPA filters fitted on the ductwork shall be provided with a
protective bag which allows for easy and safe removal after the filters have
been used up.
11. Filter Housing for HEPA Filters
11.1 When a bank of HEPA filters are used and side access is required,
proprietary make side access housing for HEPA filters shall be used.
Housing shall be of the same manufacture as the filters being used.
11.2 The side access filter housings shall be package units, factory sealed
against leakage. The housings with the HEPA filters in place shall be
guaranteed to meet the specified air cleaning efficiency as assembled units.
The housings shall be constructed of 16 gauge galvanised steel with heavy
duty corner posts, 100 mm wide inside flanges, and vertical supports
spaced not more than every 600 mm of filter width. The flanges shall be
turned in to provide a flush exterior and to facilitate attachment to adjacent
equipment and/or ductwork. All non-welded seams shall be hand caulked
with Silicone rubber adhesive. The housings shall be fabricates structurally
to withstand up to 250 mm WG utilising perimeter gasketing of neoprene
rubber, permitting servicing of the filters without the need for additional
access doors in the ductwork. Housings shall be insulated internally with
25 mm thick, 48 Kg/cu cm density, neoprene coated fibreglass.
TS/M/S23/16 2602542S/AC
11.3 Provision shall be made in the housing design for each filter cell to be
sealed around its entire periphery, eliminating the need for gaskets between
the adjacent filters. Each filter shall have single box flanges or battens at
the top and bottom of the air entering face for installation in the mounting
track. No gaskets shall be required on the filters. The 19 mm x 14 mm
filter sealing gaskets shall be made of resilient close-call neoprene rubber
extruded with a hollow core to minimum gasket 'set', and retainer, which is
an integral part of the housing.
11.4 Sealing pressure shall be applied through level arms which activate toggle
and cam locking mechanisms applying 37 Kg of sealing pressure per linear
metre of filter periphery. The door design is to be such that it cannot be
closed unless the level arms are properly positioned. The locking
mechanisms shall not be affected by vibration.
12. Heat Recovery Unit
12.1 General
Build Up Air Handling Unit (AHU) shall be equipped with Heat Recovery
Unit as shown on the drawing.
The pre-cool coil section shall be located immediately before the cooling
coil. .For reheat section; please refer the tender drawing & technical
specification.
12.2 Performance
The Heat Recovery Unit Pipe unit shall provide pre-cool and reheat
capacity in compliance with maximum performance criteria laid down
elsewhere in the specification/schedule under design conditions. Airside
pressure drop shall be as given on the specification/schedule or as
otherwise specified.
12.3 Refrigeration Cooling coil ( Evaporator Coil )
(a) Evaporator Coil
The evaporator coil for the HRU shall be suitable for refrigerant 134a
The coil frame shall be of 304 stainless steel formed to provide structural
and cleaning through removable plugs at both ends of each tubes. shall be
fitted The coil shall be fitted with supply and return headers (manifold),
made of copper pipes, to ensure even distribution of refrigerant throughout
the coil. All copper to copper joints shall be brazed with copper brazing
alloys or silver solder. Soft solder is strictly prohibited.
TS/M/S23/17 2602542S/AC
Evaporator coil shall be coated with approved corrosion resistant material
such as Acrylic Resin.


1 Depth of coil Max 6 rows
All drain pans shall be made of grade 304 stainless steel of gauge 18. The drain
pans shall be of double bottom type as per specifications with the primary drain
pan being installed right below the cooling coil while the secondary extends from
coil to fan section. Drain pipes shall be of uPVC laid with sufficient gradient,
properly secured to the floor and terminated into the nearest floor trap.
The installation shall be provided for by the AHU manufacturer or qualify installer.
TS/M/S23/18 2602542S/AC
SECTION24 - 100% FRESH AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHU) AND FILTERS
WITH HEAT RECOVERY UNIT
1. General
and fifteen (15) months free maintenance and warranty of the air handling
units (AHU) and the associated accessories.
efficient design and construction. The AHU shall be of single zone central
station type. The AHU shall be draw-through type and operate with low
noise level. The AHU shall be supplied and installed with reference to the
tender drawings and details as described in the Schedule of Equipment Data.
Each AHU shall consist of but not limited to the following components:

prefabricated modular sandwiched panels with rigid extruded
aluminium frame (complete with insulation);
b) fan assembly consist of fan wheel directly coupled to the motor .
g) mixing chamber (if shown in drawings) for filtered fresh air and
return air; and

i) Section for UV-C Emitter light
1.3 The AHUs and accessories shall be of compact design and construction and
so selected to meet the space and height constraints.
1.4 For AHUs in specified areas as indicated in the tender drawings, spare
1.5 Air Handling Units shall preferably with highest energy efficiency and
comply to BCA green mark requirement in kW/RT and W/CMH. Selection
shall base on total efficiency include starter drive.
TS/M/S24/1 2602542S/AC
1.6 One factory acceptance test shall be provided. The test covers one typical
unit. The test content shall consist of but not limited to the followings:
a) Casing strength test
b) Casing air leakage test
c) Vibration test
2. AHU Casing
2.1 It shall be formed by standard set of sandwiched panels. All panels shall be
easily removed for the inspection and servicing of internal component such
as fan assembly and cooling coil.
2.2 The sandwiched panel shall be double-sided skin type with insulating foam
being totally encased by high grade galvanised sheets of at least 1.0 mm.
No welding shall be required during site assembly.
2.3 Besides the cooling coil and fan assembly, the air passage of the AHU shall
be free of support to ensure smooth airflow. All exposed sheet metal edges
shall be filed or concealed as much as possible.
2.4 The external surface of the panels shall be powder painting to provide
resistance to atmospheric ageing and ultra violet light. The internal surface
of the panels shall be epoxy painting to provide resistance to chemical.
Minimum thickness of paint should be 60µm. The internal and external
surfaces of the panels shall be smooth to reduce the possibility of bacteria
growth and dust accumulation. All joints and mating surfaces shall be air
tight and insulated throughout to prevent the forming of cold bridge.
2.5 The panel shall provide high noise damping characteristic of 32 dB

reductions. The insulation of the panels shall be injected polyurethane with
thermal conductivity (k value) of no more than 0.02 W/(m/K). The minimal
thickness and density of the insulation shall be 60 mm and 40 kg/cu.m for
both indoor and outdoor (weatherproof) unit. The waterproof unit shall be
completed with a pitch roof.
TS/M/S24/2 2602542S/AC
2.6 The overall casing shall comply with the following criteria in accordance
with EN1866 and EUROVENT certified test report should be submitted:
a) Casing strength – Class 2A, casing deflection less than 4mm/m at
1500 Pa and no permanent deflection at 2500 Pa
b) Casing air leakage under -400 Pa – Class B
c) Casing air leakage under +700 Pa – Class B
d) Filter frame bypass leakage – Class F9, i.e. less than 0.5% at 400 Pa
e) Overall thermal transmittance – Class T1
f) Thermal bridging factor – Class TB1
3. Fan Assembly
3.1 General
The entire fan assembly shall be mounted on a steel structure with vibration
isolating base and housed within the casing of an AHU. The minimal
deflection for the spring of the vibration isolating base shall be 50 mm.
Mechanical power transmission from the motor to the fan shall be direct
driven by VSD. Two access panel or doors complete with approved gaskets
& Nylon handles, shall be provided for easy maintenance and servicing of
the fan assembly & coil. Each access door shall have a minimum of 900 mm
(height) x 570 mm (width). Compression type of door handles that made of
Nylon PA6 material; the screw is being concealed completely in the door
handle without exposing it to the outside. The handle will be able to hold
the door to the door panel firmly to prevent air leakage
3.2 Fans Section
a) Centrifugal Fan

specified on the Schedule of Equipment Technical Data. Fan wheels
and shafts shall be statically balanced prior to assembly and
continuous operation at the maximal rated speed and motor
capacity. All fans shall be selected to operate at air flow and pressure
efficiency of not less than 80%.
TS/M/S24/3 2602542S/AC
prohibited.
aligned bearings with an expected life expectancy of 200,000 hours
at designed operating conditions.

range of 30% to 110% of the specified air flow rate.
Fans shall be selected to provide high static efficiency but low sound
level and power consumption at specified air flow rate. Selection of
comply to BS 848, BS EN ISO 5801or DIN standard while the
Impellers & shaft as an assembly shall comply to DIN standard
b) Plug Fan
Fans shall be high efficiency backward curve plug fans or centrifugal

fans. The plug fans shall be direct driven with external variable speed
drive. . Motor speeds shall not exceed 1500 rpm or exceed 50Hz as
noted on the Tender Drawings. All fans shall be selected to operate
at air flow and pressure efficiency of not less than 80%.
100% of rated flow rate unless specified otherwise in the Equipment
Schedule. The fan section shall be compartmented to enable
maintenance on one fan without the need to shut down the AHU.

requirement of Class I, II and III limit as defined in AMCA standard
99-2408. Bearing shall have minimum life L10 of 40,000 hours at
maximum rpm and power certified in accordance to Anti-Friction
Bearing Manufacturer Association (AFBMA) standards. The fans
shall be placed in the unit with an even inflow and outflow is
achieved. Distance on the suction side with minimum 0.5 x impeller
diameter from component or walls in axial direction. Fan in radial
flow configurations shall have a minimum 1.5 x impeller diameter or
flow intake device. Fan distance from the pressure side shall be free
running impellers minimum 1 x impeller diameter and other fans
outflow angle minimum α = 45° from components.
TS/M/S24/4 2602542S/AC
c) Axial Fans

exceed 1500 rpm or 50Hz as noted on the Tender Drawings. Fans
shall be balanced and free from vibration and the blades of adjustable
type.

motor and impeller, continuously welded throughout and hot-dipped
galvanised after manufacture. Inspection doors to enable direction
of rotation to be checked shall be provided. Terminal boxes welded
to the casing shall be provided for electrical connection to fan motor.
Lubrication of bearing shall be possible from outside the fan casing.
Impellers shall be of die cast aluminum coated with epoxy and low
frictional losses.

limit as defined in AMCA standard. Bearing shall have minimum life
L10 of 40,000 hours at designed operating conditions.
The fan performance shall comply to BS 848, BS EN ISO 5801. All

fans shall be selected to operate at air flow and pressure efficiency of
not less than 80%. Fans shall be selected to provide medium or high
static efficiency as specified but low sound level and power
consumption at specified air flow rate. Selection of fan shall be
subject to S.O.'s approval. The fan performance shall comply to BS
848, BS EN ISO 5801 or DIN standard while the certification of
quality assurance shall comply to BS EN ISO 9001.
d) Fan Array
that should a single fan fails, the remaining fans will still deliver
100% of the specified airflow. The complete fan assembly together
with motor and drive shall have an overall efficiency of minimum not
less than85%.
Each fan shall be driven by a separate external variable speed drives.

spacing of fans shall follow fan manufacturer’s instruction to ensure
achievement of highest performance. Low leakage back draft
damper shall be provided for every fan to prevent recirculation
through a non-operational fan.
TS/M/S24/5 2602542S/AC
3.3 Fan Motors
protection and class F insulation for copper windings. The motor shall be of
4 pole and wound for standard 3 phase electrical supply of 415 V and 50
Hz. Motor frame shall be made of durable aluminum alloy in compliance
with IEC 60034 and BS EN 13195 for squirrel cage motors; for motor up
to 30 HP. For Motor above 30 HP; frame shall be made of durable cast iron
in compliance with IEC 60034 and BS 5000 for squirrel cage motor . Fan
shall be directly coupled to the motor and direct driven & control by VSD.
Motor shall be designed to operate with VSD from 10 HZ to 50 HZ. All fan
motor shall comply to IEC 60034-30, energy efficiency shall be class
premium IE3 and above with test standard comply to IEC 60034-2-1or
IEEE 112.
3.4 Cooling Coils
The cooling coil for the AHU shall be suitable for chilled water application.
The coil shall be constructed of copper tubes with mechanically bonded
corrugated aluminum fins to enhance heat transfer. The coil frame shall be
of stainless steel formed to provide structural strength. Suitable provision
shall be made to facilitate adequate draining and cleaning through removable
plugs at both ends of each tube. Each set of coil shall be fitted with manual
air vent at the highest point.
copper pipes, to ensure even distribution of chilled water throughout the
coil. All copper to copper joints shall be brazed with copper brazing alloys
or silver solder. Soft solder is strictly prohibited.
Cooling coil for the 100 % fresh air AHU shall be coated with approved
corrosion resistant material.

TS/M/S24/6 2602542S/AC
No Characteristics Specifications
.
1 Depth of coil min 6 rows
3 Maximum air side face velocity without 2.5 m/sec
moisture carry over
4 Fin spacing 10 fins per 25 mm
5 Maximum pressure drop of water at rated 40 kPa
flow
6 Maximum air resistance across coil 250 Pa
All drain pans shall be made of grade 304 stainless steel of 1.0 mm. The drain pans
shall be of slope type as per specifications with the primary drain pan being installed
right below the cooling coil while the secondary extends from coil to fan section.
Drain pipes shall be of uPVC laid with sufficient gradient, properly secured to the
floor and terminated into the nearest floor trap.
5. Mixing Chambers

chambers shall be identical to that of the AHU casing. The fresh air intake shall be
controlled by motorised dampers.
6. Installation
recommendation. Each unit shall be installed on the "U" or "C" channel structure
with neoprene isolator on the loaded sides of the structure to reduce the
transmission of vibration. The AHU shall be installed to provide easy access to
components such as fan assembly, coils and air filters for servicing and maintenance.
TS/M/S24/7 2602542S/AC
7. Filters
7.1 All AHUs and fresh air intakes and where indicated on the tender drawings
shall be provided with primary and secondary air filters of the type as
specified herein. HEPA filter shall be provided where indicated on the
tender drawings.
7.2 General
a) All AHUs and fresh air intakes and where indicated on the Drawings
shall be provided with air filters of the type as specified herein.
b) The Sub-Contractor shall provide (minimum) the following filter


commissioning
ii) one complete set after testing and commissioning and before
handover to Employer
iii) one complete set halfway during the Defects Liability Period
The Sub-Contractor shall nevertheless replace any filters discovered

to be worn out or clogged during the course of the free servicing
and maintenance period. The filters replaced are not considered as
part of the above mentioned sets.
c) Sample of filters complete with frame shall be submitted to S.O. for

approval.

manufacturer's recommendation and to the satisfaction of the S.O.
Proper access for cleaning, media removal and inspection shall be
provided. Leakage for unfiltered air shall be prevented by air-tight
sealing of the filter holding frames or casings.
e) Air filters shall be of approved make and shall be manufactured to a

fully developed design currently in production and readily available.
f) Air filters shall comply with the requirements of ASHRAE 52-76 or

an approved equivalent standard. Reference shall be made to
ASHRAE 52-76 or to the relevant approved equivalent standard for
definition of terms employed.
TS/M/S24/8 2602542S/AC
h) The filters shall be installed complete with all accessories and other
minor necessary for their satisfactory installation and performance
whether individually specified or not.


approval.

suitable scale ranges shall be provided and installed to indicate filter
resistance.
a) All air filter shall be of disposable type. Washable filter media shall
be REJECTED. Nominal filter depth shall be 100 mm.
b) The filters, with non-woven synthetic fabric media, shall be listed by

the Underwriter Laboratory as Class 2.


ASHRAE 52-76
velocity Pa)
4 Final media resistance at 2.5m/sec approach air <25mm w.g. (245
velocity Pa)

avoid the possibility of media oscillation and media being pulled
away by air flow.
TS/M/S24/9 2602542S/AC
largest surfaces of the cartridge shall be die-cut into mating openings
with diagonal supports to achieve more than 90% of unobstructed
area for air now. The filter media shall be perfectly bonded to the
internal periphery of the cartridge to prevent air from bypassing the
media.
f) Filter media shall be pleated to produce an effective area of 7 m2 of

media per 1 m2 of filter face area.
a) All air filter shall be of disposable type. Washable filter media shall
be REJECTED. Nominal filter depth shall be no less than 300 mm.
b) The filters, with micro fine glass fibre laminated by synthetic fabric
media, shall be listed by the Underwriter Laboratory as Class 2.


ASHRAE 52-76
velocity (100 Pa)
velocity (245 Pa)

avoid the possibility of media oscillation and media being pulled
away by air flow.

surfaces of the cartridge shall be die-cut into mating openings with
diagonal supports to achieve more Man 90% of unobstructed area
for airflow the filter media shall be perfectly bonded to the internal
periphery of the cartridge to prevent air from bypassing the media.
f) Filter media shall be pleated to produce an effective area of 10m² of

media per 1m² of filter face area.
TS/M/S24/10 2602542S/AC
sandwiched by to maintain the designed space for each pleat to maximize
dust collection capacity and to avoid the possibility of media oscillation and
media being pulled away.
8.2 Enclosing Frame
The enclosing frame shall made of heavy duty, rigid an high wet strength
beverage board. The frame, with two of its largest surfaces being die-cut
into mating openings with diagonal supports, shall be a square box of about
100 mm depth capable of totally encasing the filter media. The filter media
shall be perfectly bonded to the internal periphery of the frame to prevent air
leak.
8.3 Filter Media
filter face area.
8.4 Filter Housing
All filter housings shall be of rear access or side access. Filter housings shall
be factory fabricated and assembled by the air filter manufacturer. All filter
housing shall be externally insulated to prevent condensation.
minimal gauge 16 galvanised steel, each module shall be equipped with
filters shall be held by extruded aluminium track free of rivets or self-tapping
screws, which tend to obstruct the sliding of filters.
TS/M/S24/11 2602542S/AC
(probe units) of approved design and manufacture in the return-air stream
9.2 The smoke detectors (i.e. probe units) shall be provided for monitoring of
the return air ducts of the AHUs. In the event of alarm from the probe unit,
the related air conditioning equipment (AHU) shall 'shut down'
automatically. Provisions in the form of relays, terminal strips, etc. shall be
provided for each smoke detector to enable each detector to send a signal to
the fire alarm in the event of an emergency condition. The final connection
to the external interfacing device (supplied and installed by others) shall be
by the Sub-Contractor.
operation and relay contacts for alarm and trouble condition monitoring and
control.
9.6 The unit shall deviate a small amount of air from regular to high velocity air
conditioning and/or ventilation ducts into a special chamber, which contains
a smoke detector.
m/s.

TS/M/S24/12 2602542S/AC
9.16 The air duct detector assembly and its cover shall be joined via a rubber lip
to prevent unwanted passage of air and/or smoke.
assembly.
detection chamber and the compartment containing the affiliated electronics.
9.24 The electronics compartment of the air duct detector assembly shall provide
ample room for additional circuitry.

TS/M/S24/13 2602542S/AC
All AHU provided with variable speed drive shall be provided with a VSD bypass
controller and starters. This is to allow the AHUs to be operated in a constant
speed mode should the VSD be faulty or under maintenance.
11. Heat Recovery Unit (HRU)
All Heat Recovery Units (HRU) shall be as specified in Section under DX Heat
Recovery Unit ( HRU ) With Hot Water Generating System .
TS/M/S24/14 2602542S/AC
SECTION 26 - MECHANICAL VENTILATION AND FANS
1. General
1.1 This section covers the supply, delivery, installation, painting, testing and
commissioning, and fifteen (15) months free maintenance and warranty of
all mechanical ventilation fans and associated controls and accessories.
1.2 All fans shall be carefully selected and be entirely suitable for their particular
service, position of fittings and chosen with respect of corrosion,
inflammability or other hazardous application. Low noise fans shall be
selected.
1.3 The fans shall be capable of handling the air quantity necessary for the
specified system performance against the resistance of the system. The
resistance shown on the Schedules are for tendering purposes only and the
Sub-Contractor shall be held responsible for checking the final system
resistance before ordering the equipment.
1.4 Fans shall be balanced and free from vibration. All fans shall have complete
impeller assemblies including drive components, and be statically and
dynamically balanced.
1.5 Performance test of up to 110% normal running speed shall be conducted.

The rotor and pulley shall be further balanced on site to the approval of the
S.O. The rotors shall be selected for quiet operation in accordance with the
relevant British Standard Code. Performance shall be rated in accordance
with the AMCA Standard.
1.6 All the mechanical fan shall comply to SS553: Code of practice for air-
conditioning and mechanical ventilation in buildings
1.7 Unless specified, fans shall be designed and constructed for continuous
operation.
1.8 All fans shall be fitted with engraved identification and directional labels
giving full details of speed, h.p., pulley and belt sizes and type of grease
required, and mechanically fixed where they can be easily seen and not subject
to potential damage.
1.9 After manufacture, the casing, impeller shaft and belt guards shall be
thoroughly cleaned and given two coats of anti-corrosive paint or other
approved treatment.
1.10 All fans including motors, electrical wiring, control panels, etc. within the air-
stream of Kitchen Exhaust, Laboratory Exhaust or Car Park Exhaust System
shall be flame-proof types to comply with the requirements of the latest Local
Authorities.
TS/M/S26/1 2602542S/AC
1.11 All fans including motors, electrical wiring, control panels, etc. within the air-
stream of Smoke Control/ Exhaust System shall be able to withstand up to
250o C to comply with the requirements of the latest Local Authorities.
1.12 All fans including motors, electrical wiring, control panels, etc. serving the
electrical switch rooms, LT and generator rooms shall be flame proof and
explosion proof type to comply with the requirements of the Local latest
Authorities .
1.13 All fans motor shall be of high efficiency class premium IE3 and above
comply to IEC 60034-30 with test standard comply to IEC 60034-2-1 or
IEEE 112.
2. Centrifugal Fans
2.1 Centrifugal fans shall be supplied and fitted, generally as shown on the Tender
Drawings. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings the
centrifugal fans shall be double width, double inlet type or single width, single
inlet type and fans handling more than 35,000 CMH shall be of airfoil
backward curved blade and flat blade backward curved may be used for fans
handling 35,000 CMH or less. Fan wheels and housing shall be of galvanised
steel or approved equivalent. All centrifugal fans shall be belt driven unless
otherwise noted on the Schedule.
2.2 All vee-belt drives and shafts shall be fitted with easily removable expanded
and flattened steel guard of 6 mm mesh size and mounted on 14 SWG angle
steel framework. All guards shall have access openings to the shaft ends to
enable tachometer reading to be taken.
2.3 All belt drives shall have approved lock pulleys on both the driver and driven.
Belt sets shall be matched. Belts which have taken a permanent set through
remaining idle shall be rejected.
2.4 Motor speed shall not exceed 1500 rpm or as noted on the Tender
Drawings.
2.5 The main vibration isolators shall be metal spring, fitted with ribbed neoprene
pads not less than 8 mm thick at the top and bottom of the spring. The ratio
of the spring height to spring width shall be approximately equal when the
spring is deflected under load. Mounting shall be located high enough or
spaced far enough apart to prevent the machine rocking excessively.
2.6 Mounting shall be easily visible and accessible for inspection and
maintenance. When the mountings are carrying the static load, there shall be
a clearance of not less than 20 mm under the base.
TS/M/S26/2 2602542S/AC
2.7 In the loaded condition, the spring shall be able to maintain a further 50%
increase in load before the spring bottom, in this condition it shall not exceed
the elastic limit of the spring. All springs shall be constructed of best quality
steel properly heat treated.
2.8 Fans shall be selected to provide high static efficiency but low sound level and
power consumption at specified air flow rate. Selection of fan shall be subject
to S.O.'s approval. The fan performance shall comply to BS 848, BS EN ISO
5801 or DIN standard while the certification of quality assurance shall comply
to BS EN ISO 9001.
2.9 All isolators shall be sized to have the following static deflection when loaded
unless otherwise stated in the Schedules and/or Drawings:
Operating Speed Deflection
1,000 rpm and above 25 mm

500 rpm - 1,000 rpm 40 mm
400 rpm - 500 rpm 40 mm
3. Axial Fans
3.1 Axial fans shall be supplied and fitted, generally as shown on the Tender
Drawings. The fans shall be selected with direct driven motors giving non-
loading characteristics. Motor speeds shall not exceed 1500 rpm or as
noted on the Tender Drawings.
3.2 Fans shall be balanced and free from vibration and the blades of adjustable
type.
3.3 Casings shall be of standard length designed to protect both the motor and
impeller, continuously welded throughout and hot-dipped galvanised after
manufacture. Inspection doors to enable direction of rotation to be checked
shall be provided.
3.4 Terminal boxes welded to the casing shall be provided for electrical
connection to fan motor.
3.5 Lubrication of bearing shall be possible from outside the fan casing.
3.6 Impellers shall be of die cast aluminum and low frictional losses.
3.7 The fan performance shall comply to BS 848, BS EN ISO 5801. The total fan
efficiency shall not be less than 75%.
TS/M/S26/3 2602542S/AC
3.8 Fans shall be selected to provide medium or high static efficiency as specified
but low sound level and power consumption at specified air flow rate.
Selection of fan shall be subject to S.O.'s approval. The fan performance shall
comply to BS 848, BS EN ISO 5801 or DIN standard while the certification
of quality assurance shall comply to BS EN ISO 9001.
3.9 Sound attenuation shall be selected to suit the required noise level.
3.10 Where fan is used for supply or exhaust cold air, impeller shall be of epoxy
coated to prevent oxidization.
4. Propeller Fans
4.1 Propeller-type ventilation fans manufactured from plastic or other similar

approved materials designed for commercial or domestic uses shall be
supplied and fitted, generally as shown on the Tender Drawings. Fans shall
be window-mounted or wall-mounted to suit the particular installation. Wall-
mounted fans shall be supplied with wall boxes and wall plates suitable for
removal for cleaning, or built-in walls where shown on the Tender Drawings.
4.2 The fans shall be complete with weatherproof flush fitting exterior grilles,
draught-preventing iris or similar shutters linked to the fan switches and flush
fitting interior grilles.
TS/M/S26/4 2602542S/AC
SECTION 30 - PIPE AND FITTINGS
1. Scope of Work
This section covers the supply, delivery, installation, painting, testing, commissioning
and fifteen (15) months free maintenance and warranty for all types of piping system,
valves, strainers, expansion joints, flexible connections, insulation, gauges, pipe
hangers, supports and fittings, etc.
2. General
2.1 All pipes, valves, strainers and fittings to be installed shall be suitable for the
fluid medium, temperature and pressure ranges and other environmental
factors likely to be encountered.
2.2 The Drawings indicate the sizes of pipes and the manner in which the various
systems of piping are to be run. The piping shall be concealed in false ceilings
and ducts. However, where there are no false ceilings, the piping shall be run
at the highest possible level, bearing in mind the minimum space required for
future access and maintenance.
2.3 All work, whether shown on the Drawings or specified, shall be installed in
approved manner to meet structural and architectural conditions and to avoid
interference as far as possible with the work of other trades, all subject to the
approval of the S.O..
2.4 All pipework must be so constructed that the effects of contraction and
expansion will not damage any other work or the pipework itself.
2.5 Special care must be so constructed that the effects of contraction and
expansion will not damage any other work or the pipework itself.
2.6 All pipes and fittings shall be approved manufacture and shall be thoroughly
cleaned before erection and flushed out prior to start-up, removing all scale,
burrs, fins and obstructions. Rusted piping and fittings will be rejected.
2.7 The arrangement of valves and fittings shall be such that the number of joints
is a minimum.
2.8 No pressured horizontal runs of piping shall be graded down in the direction
of flow.
2.9 All chilled water pipework shall be executed in an approved manner, avoiding
as far as possible any interference with the work of other trades.
TS/M/S30/1 2602542S/AC
2.10 Approximate positions in which the pipes are to be run are indicated on the
plans, but the positions shall be revised if necessary when submitting the shop
drawings. The exact positions shall be determined on site. Pipe sizes where
given shall be checked by the Sub-Contractor having regard to the system
offered.
2.11 Before delivery to site all pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned, deburred and free
from scale, rust etc. Old and damaged pipes shall be rejected, only new pipes
shall be used. No delay of work shall be allowed for any rejected pipes. On
site, all pipes shall be again checked and thoroughly wire brushed, prime
coated and painted prior to installation.
2.12 All chilled water pipes which are run exposed to weather shall be complete
with hyrid plasters or other method by engineer and painted with weather
resistant paint.
3. Pipes
3.1 The type and quality of all pipework used shall comply with the following:
a) Refrigerant pipework shall be copper to BS 659.
b) All Chilled water pipeworks shall be Schedule 40 API 5L seamless

galvanised steel.
c) All Condenser water pipeworks shall be Schedule 40 API, 5L

seamless galvanised steel.
d) Drain pipes and condensate water pipe shall be UPVC.
e) Make-up water pipe shall be heavy duty copper (Table Y) or stainless

steel.
3.2 All chilled water pipes shall be adequately prepared, to the manufacturer's
recommendation before application of insulation.
3.3 All chilled pipe and condenser pipe joints shall be screwed, up to and
including 65 mm nominal bore; for larger sizes, they have to be welded.
Alternatively they can be joined using mechanical coupling joints. After
erection and testing, all chilled water pipework which are site insulated shall
be painted with one coat of black bitumastic primer paint in preparation for
application of insulation. Galvanised steel screwed pipe connection shall be
made using clean cut tapered threads and approved jointing compound and all
burrs shall be remove before screwing. For places where it is not possible for
welded, screwed or flange joints, mechanical coupling joints.
TS/M/S30/2 2602542S/AC
3.4 All stop valves and control valves as shown on the Drawings and otherwise
as necessary shall be provided. All stop and control valves on the water lines
shall be fully tested throughout. Gate valve up to 75 mm pipe size shall be
bronze and the larger size shall be of high quality cast iron. Supply and return
connections to all air handling units shall be fitted with full-way stop valves
and unions to facilitate isolation and/or disconnections. Balancing and control
valves shall be installed where necessary for proper control and regulation of
water distribution. All valves shall be of reputable manufacture. All drain lines
from air handling units and fan coil units shall be provided by the Sub-
Contractor and shall be suitably insulated as specified elsewhere.
3.5 All high points in the chilled and condenser water lines where air is liable to
be entrained shall be fitted with automatic air vent valves in addition to 6.5
mm brass pet cocks for air bleeding on starting up and servicing. All points in
the system from which drainage is required shall be fitted with brass pet cocks
and hose couplings.
3.6 Mechanical coupling joints shall be suitable for high pressure service when
subjected to the temperature expected to be conveyed within the pipework.
Mechanical couplings shall be of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536.
The coupling shall be complete with rubber gaskets, grooved joints and
galvanised bolts and nuts. Grooves on the piping to be joined shall be formed
by proper tools.
4. Pipe and Fitting Materials

4.1 Pipe fitting shall conform to the requirements of the specification as set out in
the following tables.
Service Pipe & Fittings Joining Method
Chilled Water <150mm Schedule 40 API 5L, Screwed for up to 65mm, welded
Grade B, seamless or mech coupling for above
galvanised steel 65mm
Chilled Water >150mm Schedule 40 API 5L, Welding, mech coupling

Grade B, seamless
galvanised steel
Condenser Water <150mm Schedule 40 API 5L, Screwed for up to 65mm, welded
Grade B, seamless or mech coupling for above
galvanised steel 65mm
Condenser Water >150mm Schedule 40 API 5L, Welding, mech coupling

Grade B, seamless
galvanised steel
Drain or Condensate Lines UPVC Chemical bonding; UPVC
Water Pipes Hard Copper Pipe (Table Cast brass wrought copper or
Y) wrought brass
TS/M/S30/3 2602542S/AC
4.2 Where pipes run in parallel, they shall be grouped in steel racks. Fastenings
shall be of approved type. Wooden plugs and ramset fasteners will not be
approved. Anchors shall be provided where necessary to provide reactions for
expansion devices. Anchors shall be to approval, either welded or clamped
securely to the bare pipe.
4.3 Pipes and their supports shall be arranged so that no stresses due to
expansion, contraction, the weight of pipes and their contents, pressure
reaction, or buckling are transmitted to pumps or other equipment. The above
factors shall not produce any likelihood of damages to building structure or
the pipes themselves.
5. Expansion
Wherever possible expansion and contraction stress and movements shall be reduced
by the inclusion of sufficient bends. Where this is not possible approved expansion
bends or other approved expansion device shall be fitted.
6. Sleeves
6.1 Where pipes pass through walls, floors or any other partitions, the openings
in the walls, floors or any partitions shall be fitted with pipe sleeves. Sleeves
for galvanised steel, black iron or UPVC pipe shall be galvanised pipe, and
sleeves for copper pipe shall be of brass or copper.
6.2 Pipe sleeves fitted in floor shall generally protrude 13 mm above the finished
floor level except in plant rooms and other areas where `wet floors' are
expected, the sleeves shall protrude 50 mm above the finished floor level.
6.3 Pipe sleeves fitted in walls or partitions shall generally protrude 13 mm above
from the finished surface level.
6.4 Sleeves for insulated pipes shall be over-sized to allow the insulation to be
continued through them.
6.5 Gaps between the pipe and pipe sleeves shall be packed with fire rated
material or caulk with fire rated compound.
6.6 Cut edges of the sleeves shall be painted with two (2) layers of zinc chromate
paint.
TS/M/S30/4 2602542S/AC
7. Vibration Movement and Settling
Provision shall be made for vibration, movement and settling by approved means.
Copper piping shall be annealed and/or coiled approved flexible connections, used to
suit application.
8. Drip Trays
Drip trays shall be provided under all cold exposed fittings on which condensation
may occur.
9. Pipe-Insulation Chilled water Pipe
9.1 All Chilled water pipes shall be Schedule 40 API 5L seamless galvanised steel
pipe.
9.2 Chilled water pipe insulation shall be of the pre-insulated type of polyurethane
foam.
9.3 Pre-insulated pipes shall have the following features:
a) All pre-insulated pipes shall be factory fabricated and factory

insulated. It shall consist of the following three (3) basic components:
A pressure tight jacket
A service pipe
Non-CFC rigid polyurethane foam
b) The service pipe shall be in the centre within the jacket and
polyurethane foam which is machine injected into the annular space
between the jacket and the service pipe.
c) Only joints between factory pre-insulated units, elbow joints, tee

joints and valve boxes are site insulated in situ using the same
materials as the factory produced items. The procedures for on-site
insulation which is recommended by the manufacturer shall be strictly
adhered to.
TS/M/S30/5 2602542S/AC
d) Insulation shall be Non-CFC rigid polyurethane foam machine
injected into annulus between service pipe and casing shall have the
following physical properties:
Density : 48 kg/m3
Thermal Conductivity
of Polyurethane : 0.022 Kcal/mhroc
Service Temperature : +5oC (ambient temperature

35oC)
Compressive Strength : 2.4 kgf/cm2 min
Water Vapour Permeability : 3.7 perm. cm.
Fire Rating : Encased in a non combustible

casing having a fire resistance
of 2 hours and to FSB/BCD's
approval
Closed Cell Content : 90% min.
Minimum Insulation
Thickness : 40 mm for pipe up to 40 mm diameter
50 mm for pipe up to 65 mm diameter
55 mm for pipe up to 150 mm

diameter.
66 mm for pipe up to 300 mm

diameter
76 mm for pipe above 350 mm

diameter
e) Casing shall be spirally formed internal locked seam galvanised steel

having the spiral folded joints at 135 mm centers and the following
thickness :
Casing size up to
210 mm diameter : 0.5 mm thick (26 gauge)
Casing size 225 mm

diameter and above : 0.6 mm thick (24 gauge)
TS/M/S30/6 2602542S/AC
10. Underground Pre-Insulated Chilled Water Pipe
The technical specification for the underground chilled water piping system shall
be the same as the above mentioned specifications except for the jacketing.
i) The jacketing of the underground chilled water pipe shall be seamless high
density polyethylene (HDPE) manufactured in accordance to M.S. 1058,
1986 based on DIN 8074 and DIN 8075 with following physical properties:
a) Density : 950 kg/m3
b) Thermal Conductivity : 0.4 W/mk
c) Tensile Strength : 18.5 Mpa
d) Corrosion Resistance : Excelent
ii) HDPE jacket thickness shall be minimum:-
a) Dia. 280 mm : 4.4 mm thick
b) Dia. 355 mm : 5.6 mm thick
c) Dia. 400 mm : 6.3 mm thick
d) Dia. 450 mm : 7.0 mm thick
e) Dia. 500 mm : 7.8 mm thick
f) Dia. 900 mm : 14.1 mm thick
TS/M/S30/7 2602542S/AC
11. Condensate Drain Lines Insulation
All condensate drain lines from the AHUs and FCUs shall be insulated with minimum
25 mm thick closed cell insulation and covered with aluminum jacketing of 26 gauge.
The closed cell insulation shall comply with the following requirements :
Thermal conductivity : at most 0.036 W/mK at +20o C to BS

874 Pt 2 1986
Water vapour resistance factor : at least 2500 to ISO 9346
Fire performance : at least Class 1 to BS 476 Pt 7 1987
Only manufacturer recommended and approved adhesive shall be used.
All pipes shall be cleaned before application of insulation which shall be set in a
suitable adhesive. The insulation shall be provided with field-applied or factory-
applied vapour-barrier sheet. The jacket shall consist of lamination of aluminum foils
and kraft paper. Field applied vapour-barrier sheet shall consist of a layer of linkote,
and the insulation wrapped with double sided aluminum foil with minimum of 75 mm
overlap and all joints securely sealed with cover strips and adhesive duct tape to form
a perfect vapour barrier.
12. Insulation for Flanges, Unions, Valves, Anchors and Fittings
Unless otherwise indicated, all flanges, unions, valves, anchors and fittings shall be
insulated with factory premoulded or prefabricated or field fabricated cements of
insulation of the same material and thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation.
13. Delivery
All pipe shall be factory inspected before delivered to site. Only new pipe shall be
used, old pipe will be rejected.
14. Storage
Piping shall be kept closed against moisture and foreign matter when stored on the
site. All pipe shall be covered and protected from damage. Pipe found to be damaged
will be rejected
TS/M/S30/8 2602542S/AC
15. Cleaning
Piping shall be thoroughly cleaned of all burrs, fins and seals before erection and
section shall be blown through and sealed until the next section is erected. All pipe to
be painted primer coat, base coat and first finishes coat before installation. Final coat
shall be done after all pressure test completed
16. Grading
Piping shall be arranged in a workmanlike manner, true to alignment and grade;

crooked or sagging pipes will not be accepted. Except where otherwise shown on the
Drawings, horizontal condensate shall be graded downwards in the direction of flow.
All fabricating and welding of the pipework shall be carried out at a location at the
site to be mutually agreed with the S.O..
17. Drainage
Where condensation can occur in piping or liquids are entrained in gas flowing in the
pipe, approved methods of drainage shall be used. Pipes shall be graded as specified
and drip pockets shall be provided at all necessary points to prevent carry over.
Liquids in refrigerant gas piping which are entrained in the gas flow shall be drained
through high pressure float valves for discharge piping and by bleed lines for suction
piping. Entrainment may be used unless otherwise specified elsewhere or unless
damage or reduced capacity may occur.
18. Air Vents
Gas collecting in liquid piping shall be automatically vented at all collecting points.
Cocks shall be provided in cold water and chilled water piping where required and the
discharge from these vents shall be piped via copper pipes of appropriate size to the
nearest waste drain pipe or trap.
TS/M/S30/9 2602542S/AC
19. Supports
19.1 Piping shall be supported by clips, rollers, or hangers which will prevent
buckling at intervals not exceeding:
Size of Pipe Intervals for Steel Intervals for

Heavy and Medium Light Gauge Copper
Gauge Copper
Nominal (mm) Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal

Run (m) Runs (m) Runs (m) Runs (m)
13 2.5 2.0 2.0 1.5
19 3.0 2.5 2.5 2.0
25 3.0 2.5 2.5 2.5
32 3.0 2.5 3.0 2.5
38 3.5 3.0 3.0 2.5
50 3.5 3.0 3.5 3.0
64 4.5 3.0 3.5 3.0
76 4.5 3.5 3.5 3.0
101 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.0
Over 101 6.0 6.0 60 6.0
19.2 Pipe supports shall be in accordance with accepted commercial practice and
shall include approved vibration isolators (see the specification for vibration
isolators).
TS/M/S30/10 2602542S/AC
19.3 Horizontal pipes shall be hung with rod or bar hangers fixed to hot dipped
galvanised steel straps surrounding the pipe and where pipes run together
with groups, a special composite hanger may be used fabricated out of 50 x
50 x 6.5 mm hot dipped galvanised angle iron with hot dipped galvanised
steel straps around pipes bolted to the angle iron or special purpose made hot
dipped galvanised steel brackets for fixing the pipes to the longitudinal beams
of the building. Single hangers shall be as follows:
Pipe Size Rod Hanger Diameter Strap/Clip Dimensions
Up to 40 mm 8 mm (5/16") 25 mm x 1.6 mm (thick)
50 to 65 mm 10 mm (7/16") 32 mm x 3.0 mm (thick)
75 to 150 mm 13 mm (1/2") 40 mm x 5.0 mm (thick)
Over 150 mm to BS 3974 to BS 3974
19.4 All vertical pipes shall be supported by adjustable wrought iron or factory
made bronze clamps securely bolted to m.s. tails which are firmly cemented
into the concrete or masonry structure of the building.
19.5 For vertical pipes, supporting brackets shall be at intervals of not greater than
the building increments and the first support shall not be further than 600 mm
from the supply mains.
19.6 Pipe hangers shall be placed not more than 600 mm from each change of
direction where possible.
19.7 The Sub-Contractor shall supply full details of the pipe runs and obtain prior
approval before carrying out the installation.
20. Permanent Pipe Joints
20.1 Where possible, joints in black steel pipe shall be welded. Where flanges must
be used, they may be tack welded on site but all other welding of the flange to
the pipe shall be carried out with the pipe joint dismantled.
20.2 For galvanised steel pipe up to 50 mm nominal, approved type screwed

fittings shall be used conforming with the requirements or the appropriate
BSS and screwed to the pipe in the manner specified. Pipes having nominal
diameters greater than 50 mm shall have screwed flanged joints. Pipes buried
underground shall also have approved type screwed fitting. Long screws or
barrel nipples shall not be used.
20.3 For places where it is not possible for welded, screwed or flange joints,
mechanical coupling joints.
TS/M/S30/11 2602542S/AC
21. Copper Pipe
Screwed - All duties
Brazed Joints - Ditto
Capillary Fitting - Ditto
Flare Fitting - i) Less than 19.0 mm nominal, all duties except

where vibration occur.
ii) Larger pipes only if permission in writing is

obtained. Permission will not be given for
refrigerant or where vibration occur.
Joints for condensate pipe shall be screwed tight. Long screws for barrel nipples shall
not be used.
The type of joints for refrigerant pipes shall be brazed joints or capillary fittings
except when it is the final connection :
21.1 The type of alloy and flux used shall be as recommended by the manufacturer
for the duty involved. 15% silver brazing alloy (phosphorous deoxidized)
shall be used for refrigerant piping. Where vibration occurs, soft solder will
not be acceptable in such case. A minimum of flux solder and heat shall be
employed to minimise contamination, distortion, etc.
21.2 Capillary fitting shall be close fitting type and tubing shall be to suitable
tolerance on external diameter to make the joint mechanical rigid without
solder, the solder being used as a seal only. Capillary fittings shall be solid
copper alloy.
21.3 Brazed joints shall only be carried out by skilled tradesmen. Particular
attention will be given to cleanliness for refrigerant, etc. A minimum of heat,
flux and brazing alloy shall be employed.
21.4 During any hot work, nitrogen gas shall be passed through the pipes which
are being worked on. This is to prevent oxidation on the inside of the pipes.
This process is called nitrogen replacement and shall be strictly adhered to.
When flare fittings is used, the pipe shall be fully annealed at the flare and shall seal
without being strained.
TS/M/S30/12 2602542S/AC
22. Bends
Where possible, bends shall be formed by means of straight pipes bent to shape. The
radius of bends shall be not less than those prescribed in the appropriate British
Standard for the use. The bending of pipes shall be carried out in an approved
manner, and care shall be taken to prevent mal-formation or damage to the structure
of the materials. However, bend fitting shall be used for refrigerant piping unless the
tube can be bent without contaminating the interior of the pipe with sand, metal, etc.
Except where space limitations prevent their use, long radius bends shall be provided
throughout. Approval for short radius bends or elbows shall be obtained in each case.
23. Valves, Locks, Strainers

23.1 Valve flanges shall be in accordance with the B.S. Tables as specified for their
respective service pipework. The nominal bore of any valve shall not be less
than the bore of the pipe to which it is fitted.
All valves, cocks, etc. shall be tested to 1.5 times the working pressure
whichever is larger. The working pressure of the system 225 psig (1550
KPa)
(a) Pressure rating : 16 bar or 1.5times working pressure

whichever is greater
(b) Butterfly valve : BS 5155 PN16
(c) Gate valve (Bronze) : BS 5154 PN16 (50mm dia. and below)
(d) Gate valve (cast iron) : BS 5150 PN16 (65mm dia. and above,
non-rising stem)
(e) Check valve (bronze) : BS 5154 PN16 (50mm dia, and below)
(f) Check valve (cast : BS 5153 PN16 (65mm dia. and above)
iron)
(g) Y-Strainer (bronze) : ANSI class 150 (50mm dia. And below)
(h) Y-Strainer (cast iron) : BS 4504 PN16 (65mm dia. and above)
23.2 Valve spindles shall be adequately lubricated with graphite, and all glands
shall be freshly packed before installation. All valves in main plant rooms shall
be of the external spindle type. All valves shall be fitted with hand-wheels.
Normally open valves shall have the handwheel painted green. Normally shut
valves shall have the handwheel painted red. Where valves are located above
2 m above the floor level or in an inaccessible location they shall be operated
by chain mechanism. All valves above 300 diameter shall be fitted with gear
operated mechanism for opened/closed of valve.
23.3 Where possible all valves supplied and fitted shall be of the same approved
manufacture. Control valves shall be supplied only by the manufacturer of
control equipment.
TS/M/S30/13 2602542S/AC
23.4 All valves, cocks, etc. for water or other services shall comply to the
requirements of the Water Department.
23.5 Valves up to an including 65 mm diameter shall be of bronze with female

screwed connections where fitted to ferrous pipe. Valves in ferrous piping
over 65 mm diameter shall have cast iron bodies and shall have flange
connections. Valves for copper pipes shall be of brass and shall have
compression type connections for a size up to and including 40 mm. The
valves shall be of the full-way, split wedge disc pattern with non-rising
spindles of high tensile steel, fitted with detachable cast iron handwheel.
23.6 Drain cocks shall be provided as necessary to ensure that all sections of the
pipework and plant can be effectively drained. The sizes of drain cocks shall
be as follows:
a) Tanks, Plant and Pipes above 150 mm diameter not less than 25 mm
diameter.
b) Pipes 75 mm to 125 mm diameter ......6 mm
c) Pipes up to 65 mm diameter ...... 6 mm
23.7 Drain cocks of 13 mm diameter shall be complete with hose unions for
draining down.
23.8 Relief and safety valves where fitted to pipework shall be of the "Enclosed
Spring Loaded" gunmetal type with outlet pipes terminating 150 mm above
floor level.
23.9 Check valves shall be of the spring-loaded non-slamming type. These shall be
of gunmetal and female screwed connection for sizes up to and including 80
mm diameter. For sizes 100 mm and above they shall be of the flange cast
iron type with bronze discs.
23.10 Balancing valves where required shall be bronze or steel lubricated plug
valves with lever handle adjustable memory stops, drip tight. It shall be
screwed end for 50 mm and below and flange for above 50 mm. Balancing
valves shall have taps for flow measurements connection. The Sub-Contractor
shall allow and provide portable flow measuring apparatus complete with
carrying case, pressure gauge, 3 way valve, hoses and connections. All
balancing valves shall have their final setting position marked on an approved
plate affixed to the body of the valve. The indicator plate shall be embossed
with words such as "OPEN", "1/2" and "SHUT" positions.
23.11 Butterfly valves shall be completed with handwheel and of the resilient valve
seat type. It shall be factory tested to at least 110% of its drop-tight rating. It
shall have standardized top plates and mounting.
TS/M/S30/14 2602542S/AC
23.12 Motorized valves where located outdoor shall be of weatherproof type to IP
66D Standard. Where located indoor, the valves shall be dustproof. The
valve's actuator shall consist of a permanent split capacitor, reversible type
electric motor which drives a compound epicyclic gear. The electrical
actuator shall have visual, mechanical indication, showing output shaft and
valve position. The actuator shall have a self-locking gear train which is
permanently lubricated at the factory. The motor shall be fitted with thermal
overload protection. The actuators shall have an integral self-locking manual
override that shall be permanently engaged.
23.13 All ball float valves shall be supplied and fitted complete with back-nuts, ball
float and arm. Ball floats may be of soldered copper or brass or polytene
P.V.C. They shall be of the low pressure type generally and comply with B.S.
1212 : 1957.
23.14 Strainers shall be the `Y' type complete with removable monel metal strainer
screen not greater than 56 mesh. Strainers up to and including 80 mm
diameter shall be of the screwed brass type. Sizes 100 mm diameter and
above shall be of the cast iron type and flange. All strainers shall be fitted with
integral ball valves for draining.
23.15 Where specified, suction diffusers of ductile or steel body and rated to 300 psi
shall be installed. The basket strainer shall be stainless steel. Each suction
diffuser shall be provided with a start-up prefilter which shall be replaced with
the final filter/strainer after the commissioning of the air conditioning system.
Outlet ports shall be provided for pressures, temperature or drain
connections.
23.16 The Sub-Contractor is required to select these valves in relation to the

velocity of the water in the pipe. In all cases the valve is required to operate
silently on reversal of water flow.
24. Test Plugs
Test plugs shall be installed as shown on Tender Drawings as well as near to all BAS
sensors location. The test plug is to provide a self sealing access point to the pipes so
that pressure and temperature measurements may be made within the pipe. The Sub-
Contractor shall provide at no additional cost four (4) numbers of adaptors and ten
(10) numbers of test plugs to the University for spare and one set of test kit.
25. Pressure Gauges
Pressure gauges shall be of the steel cased type. They shall be designed for test plug
mounting and be calibrated in m bar and kPa. All pressure gauges shall be of the
Bourdon tube type and selected for normal operating point to be at mid-point of the
scale. All pressure gauges shall be provided with suitable gauge cocks and snubbers
to prevent vibration of the needles. The Sub-Contractor shall provide at no additional
cost two (2) numbers to pressure gauges suitable for test plug mounting to the
University.
TS/M/S30/15 2602542S/AC
26. Thermometer
Thermometers shall be of steel cased industrial heavy duty type. The thermometers
shall be designed for test plug mounting. Calibration shall be Centigrade. The range
shall be suitable for the temperature service and the smallest division shall be ½ oC.
Thermometers used in conjunction with chilled water pipework shall be rejected if
condensation should occur at the glass face plate. The Sub-Contractor shall provide
at no additional cost two (2) numbers of thermometer suitable for test plug mounting
to the University.
27. Anti-Vibration Coupling
Piping connections to all pumps, refrigerant condensers, evaporators, air handling

apparatus and all equipment shall be by means of stainless steel flexible connector
unless otherwise shown on Drawings. The fittings shall be bolted onto the pipe lines
using flanges for 50 mm diameter and larger; for smaller than 50 mm diameter,
connections shall be by means of high pressure hose clips and sealed with rubber
plastic. Approved cables shall be provided for fittings of 50 mm diameter and larger
to limit expansion. Where shown on the Drawings, standard "Victaulic" couplings or
approved equivalent shall be used.
28. uPVC Pipe
28.1 Unplasticised PVC (uPVC) pipework shall be to S.S. 141 and installed
complete with standard moulded fittings. Tubing and fittings shall be
submitted to the S.O. for approval.
28.2 The uPVC pipe shall be odourless, shall not taint and shall be suitable for the
service and duty specified. The uPVC pipe shall be resistant to all external
and internal corrosion and shall not be subjected to attack by insects and
rodents. The pipe material shall be suitable for the thermal insulating materials
and vapour sealing compounds specified elsewhere in the Specification.
28.3 Pipe runs shall be fabricated using cemented sockets, bushes, bends, elbows
and tees but flange or screwed joints shall be used at connection to plant
items and valves. Sufficient additional flange joints shall be provided to
facilitate maintenance and dismantling as required by the S.O..
28.4 Generally for pipe fixing, particular care and attention shall be paid to the
greater degree of expansion and contraction of uPVC pipe in comparison
with that of metal pipes. Hangers or support spacing shall comply with the
manufacturer's recommendations but in any case shall not exceed the
following:
TS/M/S30/16 2602542S/AC
Up to and including 40mm bore 1 m apart
50 mm bore to 80 mm bore 1.5 m apart
100 mm bore to 150 mm bore 2 m apart
28.5 Valves, cocks, etc. for uPVC pipe systems shall be as specified in earlier
clauses. uPVC pipes shall be flange connected to metal valves and metal
system; screwed connections will not be accepted but composite unions or
special adopters may be used subject to approval by the S.O..
29. Earthing of Riser Pipes
29.1 Earthing bosses shall be provided at the top and for bottom of each condenser
water pipe risers and earth to the respective pumpset electrical earthing
system.
29.2 Earthing bosses shall be of the same material as the pipe and shall be welded
to the pipes in an accessible and approved location. Final connection to the
earth bar provided by the Electrical Sub-Contractor shall be by the A/C &
M/V Sub-Contractor. Bosses shall be 50 mm diameter with 100 mm diameter
clear hole and 7 mm deep.
30. Testing
30.1 General
a) All piping and fittings used shall have been tested in accordance with
the relevant BS code or specification. In addition, the pipe pressure
testing shall be done during or after the erection of the piping system
and before pipes are lagged or covered over.
b) The S.O. shall be notified in writing at least 48 hours before the test
of the date at which the test will take place and test shall be carried
out in the presence of the S.O.. Except for refrigerant piping, the
method of test shall be to pump the system to the required test
pressure which shall be maintained with all valves shut - for a period
of 24 hours or for such time as is necessary to carefully inspect all
joints and valves, whichever is the longer. When a gas is used for
testing, all joints shall be inspected after application of soapy work. In
addition, piping shall be tested at working pressure during operation
of the system through several cycles of temperature pressure and
varying conditions of operation until the S.O. is satisfied that the
piping will remain tight, sound and true to line and not damage itself
or other structure.
TS/M/S30/17 2602542S/AC
30.2 Water Sample test
All the installed water pipe circuit shall be flushed and water sampling test
passed before put into operation. Water sample shall be sent to SAC-
SINGLAS accredited laboratory for analysis. Contractor shall extend the
report to SO for approval before the system is in operation
30.3 Refrigerant Piping
Piping shall be tested according to manufacturer's recommendations.
30.4 Water Piping
All water pipes shall be hydrostatically tested to 1.5 times the working
pressure or 150 psi whichever is greater. Pressure shall not show a drop of
more than 1% in 24 hours.
31. Identification of Underground Services
Upon completion of the underground pipe laying, there shall be a concrete slab
embossed with " Dia.xxx CHILLED WATER (S) PIPE " , " Dia.xxx CHILLED
WATER (R) PIPE " , Depth and Direction for Newater pipe immediate above the
laid pipes before final back filling and proper identification tag with engraved
words mounted on RC block of diameter 150mm for the particular underground
services that being installed. All the engraved tag, location shall submit for
Engineer approval prior to delivery. Marker shall install at every 20m interval straight
length, turning and Tee-off
TS/M/S30/18 2602542S/AC
CHWS PIPE CHWR PIPE
1200 mm Depth 1200 mm Depth
CHWS PIPE CHWR PIPE

Sample of the Identification Tag for Chilled Water Pipe
NEWATER
NEWATER PIPE PIPE
NEWATER PIPE
1200 mm Depth
Sample of the Identification Tag for Newater Pipe
TS/M/S30/19 2602542S/AC
SECTION 39 - DEHUMIDIFIERS
1. General
1.1 This section sets out the requirements and covers the supply, delivery,
installation, testing and commissioning and fifteen (15) months free
maintenance and warranty of dehumidifiers system and associated
equipment.
1.2 Where shown in the Tender Drawings, dehumidifiers shall be installed

within the microscopic and weighing rooms. The dehumidification
system shall be based on the closed system whereby process air is
being drawn from the room and passed through the dehumidifier. The
resulting dry air is pumped back into the room to maintain the
humidity level. Reactivation air shall be drawn from the ambient with
the resultant wet air being discharged back into the ambient.
Automatic control of the humidity level shall be via a room humidistat.
Pre-cooling of the air, if required when the quantity of air to be
dehumidified is too much, shall be provided.
1.3 The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that any drainage generated from the
dehumidifiers shall be piped to the nearest drain outlets.
1.4 The dehumidifiers used shall satisfy the following design parameters :
a) Outdoor surrounding conditions 32.8oC DB, 26.3ºC

WB (ASHRAE 1%
annual cumulative
frequency of
occurrence)
b) Indoor surrounding conditions

(i.e. around room to be dehumidified) 65% - 80% RH
c) Desired treated space condition 22° ± 1°C

50 ± 5%RH
1.5 The Sub-Contractor shall submit detailed calculations for the

dehumidifiers proposed together with the tender submission.
TS/M/S39/1 2602542S/AC
2. Dehumidification Method
The dehumidification process shall be based on the absorption method with

lithium chloride as the hygroscopic material.
3. Construction
3.1 The dehumidifier shall have a slowly turning rotor onto which the
hygroscopic material is mounted. The rotor shall be divided into two
sectors. One sector shall be for the absorption of moisture from the
process air. The other sector shall be for the heated reactivation air
which absorbs moisture from the rotor and leaves the dehumidifier as
wet air.
3.2 The rotor and heater shall be enclosed in a sturdy sheet metal cabinet.
Process and reactivation air filters are installed in cartridges that shall
be removable without using any tools. The front panel shall be
removable to allow easy access to all internal components. The
cabinet interior and exterior shall be painted with anti-corrosion primer
and the exterior finished with a high gloss enamel. The dehumidifier
shall be splash-proof to IEC IP 44.
3.3 The dehumidifier shall have three excess temperature protective

devices - two with an automatic reset limiting the reactivation
temperature and wet air temperature respectively, and one with a
manual reset for the reactivation air temperature. A thermometer for
reactivation temperature, an operation indicator and an on/off switch
shall be provided on the control panel.
3.4 The Sub-Contractor shall supply and install all wall mounting brackets,
grilles complete with insect screen, ductings, etc., for the whole
installation.
TS/M/S39/2 2602542S/AC
4. Control
4.1 The dehumidifier unit shall complete with comprehensive control and
display panel containing all the required switches, back lit indicators
and LEDs for controlling and monitoring the operating status of the
unit.
4.2 The control shall include but not limited to the following:-
a) Run switch
b) Mode switch for switching between Manual and Humidistat

operation
c) Mains ON back lit indicator
d) Alarm back lit indicator for highlighting both high temperature

cut-out and/or fan motor overload
e) Reactivation temperature LED
f) Reactivation fan running LED
g) Reactivation heater ON LED
h) Rotor drive motor running LED
i) Process fan running LED
TS/M/S39/3 2602542S/AC
SECTION 40 – WATER DETECTION SYSTEM
1 General
1.1 This section sets out the requirements for water detection system and
covers the supply, delivery, installation, testing and commissioning
and fifteen (15) months free maintenance and warranty of the system
and associated equipment.
1.2 The system components shall be designed to be installed according to

pre-test limitations as approved or listed by a recognised testing
laboratory.
1.3 All devices shall be designed for service encountered and shall not be
readily rendered in-operative or susceptible to accidental operation.
They shall be located, installed or suitably protected against
mechanical, chemical or other damage, which may render them in-
operative. All devices for activating supplementary equipment shall be
considered as integral parts of the system and shall function with
system operation.
1.4 The complete system shall include electronics alarm module, sensing
cable, graphic display map, and auxiliary equipment, as indicated on
the design drawings. The system shall simultaneously detect the
presence of water at any point along the cable's length and activate the
module's leak alarm relays. The sensing cable shall be of such
construction that no metallic parts shall be exposed to the environment.
The system shall be provided with pre-connectorised sensing cable
components.
2 Alarm Locator Module
2.1 The alarm module shall be capable of monitoring up to 1500 meters of

sensing cable.
2.2 The alarm module shall have LEDs indicating "power" (green),
"alarm" (red), and "continuity" (yellow). The system shall sound an
audible alarm upon sensing a leak. Once the alarm condition has been
cleared, the module is reset with a single keystroke.
TS/M/S40/1 2602542S/AC
2.3 Basic Features of the alarm locator module
· In addition to detecting leaks, the system shall warn of fault

conditions and indicates when maintenance is required.
· An event history log allows leaks (and other events) to be

tracked.
· The settings can be customised to suit the user’s application.
· Both the events history log and any user settings are held in
non-volatile memory.
· The unit shall has an in-built system-wide diagnostic functions
2.4 The alarm module will be powered by 240 VAC. The module shall
have a pair of contacts open on an alarm, and a pair of contacts close
on an alarm. These contacts shall be used to actuate other alarms and
shall be capable of switching 10 amps at 250 VAC.
2.5 In additions, the module shall be provided with 4-20 mA signal and
RS232/RS-485 series port for connection to building management
system.
2.6 The module enclosure shall be NEMA 1, constructed of 16- gauge steel
with dimensions of 8" x 8" x 4". The enclosure shall be capable of
either semi-flush of surface mounting.
3 Sensing Cable
3.1 The water sensing cable shall detect the presence of water and other
conductive fluids. The cable shall consist of four wires: two sensor
wires, a continuity wire, and a return wire. All four wires shall be
coated or insulated with fluoropolymer and would helically around a
central fluoropolymer core.
3.2 Cables using exposed metal or non-fluoropolymer constructions shall

not be acceptable. The cable, including connectors, shall have a
breaking strength of at least 70 pounds as per ASTM D-638. The cable
shall have an abrasion resistance of >65 cycles as per UL 719.
3.3 The cable shall be UL-listed to UL 910, Test Method for Fire and
Smoke Characteristics of Electrical and Optical-Fibre Cables used in
Air-Handling Spaces, and shall be of class 2 plenum cable as per NEC
725-51 (a).
TS/M/S40/2 2602542S/AC
4 Accessories
A complete system accessories (jumper cable, end terminations etc) shall be

provided by the system manufacturer.
5 Performance
5.1 Leak Size Required To Alarm

Maximum wetted length of cable required to produce an alarm with tap
water shall be no greater the 1 inch. Sensitivity shall be adjustable at
the module.
5.2 Continuous Coverage

The system shall provide continuous, distributed coverage of the area
to be protected. Spot or point sensors are not acceptable.
5.3 Supervision
The system shall be continuously monitored for continuity. The loss of
continuity in any of the wires shall cause an alarm to sound and
energise the continuity LED.
5.4 Cleaning
If required, cleaning the cable without removing it shall be possible
using a damp cloth.
5.5 Drying
The cable shall dry and reset at the module within 15 seconds of
removal from free water. No shaking, wiping, air-drying, or other
mechanical action shall be required to dry the cable.
5.6 The alarm panel shall have a voltage free-contact (NO/NC) for external
interfacing.
5.7 Provide a current transmitter that capable of providing 4 - 20 mA

signal.
The current transmitter allows the transfer of leak location of
continuity fault information from the water alarm module to any
instrument capable of interpreting a 4 - 20 mA analogue signal.
TS/M/S40/3 2602542S/AC
6 Testing and Commissioning
6.1 The completed installation shall be in full operational condition before

testing is to be carried out. The Sub-Contractor shall commission the
entire installation in the presence of the S.O. and manufacturer’s
representative. Test results shall be recorded and certified by the Sub-
Contractor and the manufacturer’s representative.
6.2 The Sub-Contractor shall provide all equipment, labor and materials
necessary.
6.3 All defects and deficiencies in performance, reliability, safety,

efficiency, appearance of finish shall be rectified and resettled by the
Sub-Contractor to the entire satisfaction of the S.O. before acceptance.
6.4 The Sub-Contractor shall on commissioning conduct an instructional

briefing to the users concerned on the safe and proper use of the
system and necessary evacuation drills in the event of an agent
discharged.
TS/M/S40/4 2602542S/AC
SECTION 42 - AIR-COOLED MULTI-SPLIT VRV UNITS
1. Scope of Work

of air-cooled multi-split VRV units and associated accessories.
1.2 If the Air-Cooled VRV-Split units unit is designed as standby to the

normal air conditioning unit, then the Sub-contractor shall provide the
DBs, isolator, cabling and the entire interlock control such that the
split/package shall be automatically switched on if the normal air
conditioning unit high temperature or fails
1.3 All the Air-Cooled Multi-Split VRV units shall comply to the latest
Singapore Standard SS 530 with energy efficient and with minimum at
least 5 ticks equivalent.
1.4 The Sub-Contractor shall supply and install, where shown on the
Tender drawings, air-cooled multi-split VRV systems of an approved
type and each complete with indoor units, outdoor unit, with
refrigeration cycle, electrical components, fan speed and thermostatic
control. The units shall be suitable for continuous operation and shall
be constructed as below.
2. General
2.1 The air-conditioning units shall be air-cooled, VRV type, consisting of

one outdoor unit and plural fan coil units, each having capability to
cool the rooms independently.
2.2 The condensing unit shall be equipped with inverter controller,

enabling it to reduce minimum load down to 8% of total, without the
aid of any hot gas bypass system, and without compromising system
efficiency.
2.3 The condensing unit shall be suitable for mix-match connection of

double and multiflow ceiling mounted cassette type, built-in ceiling
type, wall mounted type, ceiling mounted cassette corner type and
floor mounted type indoor units.
2.4 The refrigerant piping shall be extendable up to 100 m with 50 m level

difference without any oil traps. Refnet piping system with only two
piping runs connected to all the fan coil units, and utilizing Refnet
joints and Refnet headers complete with associated thermal insulation,
shall be installed.
TS/M/S42/1 2602542S/AC
2.5 Both indoor and outdoor units are to be factory assembled, tested and
charged with R410A or R407 refrigerant at the factory.
2.6 The air-cooled VRV system to be supplied and installed by the Sub-
Contractor shall consist of fan coil unit(s); air-cooled condensing unit,
refrigerant pipework with associated fittings, sight-glass and filter
drier, electrical panel and control gear and wiring, including cutting
and making good necessary openings through walls and floors for
pipework and electrical wiring, 100 mm thick concrete plinth or
painted steel mounting brackets approved by the Architect and all other
incidental works and materials necessary to bring the system to good
working order. The control panel shall be constructed of
electrogalvanized steel sheets, baked-painted. The gauge of metal,
panel dimensions and layout design and circuitry, shall be approved by
the Architect. The piping layout indicated in the drawings is indicative
only. The Sub-Contractor shall also be responsible for the optimal
design and layout of the refrigerant piping system, and shall also verify
the sufficiency of the sizes of all riser ducts, openings, etc.
3. Air-Cooled Condensing Unit
3.1 The air-cooled condensing unit shall be a factory assembled unit

housed in a sturdy weather-proof casing constructed from rust-proof
mild steel panels coated with baked enamel finish. The condensing unit
shall be designed to operate safely when connected to multiple fan coil
units which have a combined operating nominal capacity varying from
8% to 130% of nominal compressors capacity. The noise level
corresponding to 50 Hz operation shall not be more than 57 dB(A)
measured horizontally 1m away and 1.5m above ground. The
condensing unit shall have the flexibility to connect the piping circuit
from three places, front, side and bottom of the unit to provide for
greater freedom of layout. The condensing unit shall come equipped
with two numbers of hermetically sealed scroll compressors for units
exceeding 5 HP.
3.2 The condensing unit shall be modular in design and shall allow for side
by side and in a row installation, with minimum spacing of 20mm. It
shall be connectable to a maximum of 16 fan coil units for the 10 HP
series, 13 fan coil units for the 8 HP series and 8 fan coil units for the 5
HP series, subject to a maximum connectable ratio of 130%.
3.3 The condensing unit shall be automatically addressable through twin

cable multiplex transmission system for inter-unit wiring between
indoor and outdoor units.
3.4 The system shall be easily extendable by the addition of further indoor
units at a later date.
TS/M/S42/2 2602542S/AC
3.5 Condensing unit shall operate and control in accordance with the ir-
conditioning load. The system shall use the “New Linear VRV control
System” which combines inverter control with unloader control for the
smooth control of operation in accordance with load. The inverter
control system shall be able to control the compressor of the 5 HP
series to 13 steps (116 Hz to 30 Hz) and the 8 and 10 HP series to 21
steps (116 Hz to 30 Hz).
3.6 The condensing unit shall be able to operate in outdoor temperature as

high as 43°C DB.
3.7 Design condition of condensing unit shall be:
Indoor temperature : 27°C DB, 19.5°C WB
Outdoor temperature : 35°C DB
4. Compressor
The compressor shall be of highly efficient hermetically sealed scroll

compressors and equipped with inverter control capable of changing the speed
linearly in accordance to the room load requirement. It shall be able to vary the
load from the 8% to 130% of its normal capacity.
5. Condenser Assembly
The air cooled condenser shall be constructed with copper tubes mechanically
bonded to aluminum fins to form a cross fin coil. The condenser shall have
large face area to minimise noise and give a high EER for heat transfer.
Condenser should be of waffle louver fins and Hi-X tubes design for high
efficiency performance. The condensing unit shall be chemically coated with
anti-corrosion P.E. fins. The thickness of the coating must be between 2.0 to
3.0 microns.
6. Condenser fan and motor
The condenser fan shall be of multi-blade low speed noise level type made
from pressed out aluminum and dynamically and statically balance for
minimum noise and vibration. The condenser fan shall be directly coupled to a
induction motor. The axial of the fan shall be perpendicular to the face of the
condenser to ensure smooth air flow. The condenser fan and motor shall be of
high efficiency type with minimum power consumption. The fan motor shall
be equipped with pole-change control so that it can be stepped down to low
speed when the requirement is low.
TS/M/S42/3 2602542S/AC
7. Refrigerant Circuit
The refrigerant circuit shall include an accumulator, liquid and gas shut off
valves, solenoid and electronic expansion valve. All necessary safely devices
should be provided to ensure the safety operation of the system.
8. Accumulator
The cylindrical accumulator shall be constructed from mild steel plates

pressed into shape. The accumulator shall have sufficient capacity to prevent
any liquid refrigerant from flowing back into the compressor suction.
9. Safety devices
The following safety devices shall be part of the condensing unit. High
pressure switch, fuse, crankcase heater, fusible plug, over current relay for
compressor, thermal protectors for compressor and fan motors, recycling
guard timer.
10. Oil recovery system
Unit shall be equipped with an oil recovery system to ensure stable operation
with long refrigerant piping. Oil trap system is not acceptable.
11. Fan coil unit
11.1 Each fan coil unit shall be of the ceiling mounted type, or ceiling
ducted type, or ceiling suspended type, ceiling mounted cassette
corner, double-flow, multi-flow type, or wall mounted type or floor
mounted type.
11.2 Each fan coil unit shall have be equipped with a self diagnosis remote
controller and having the features of setting of room temperature (with
digital indicator of room temperature), timer, air discharge direction
(for cassette units), fan speed selections, self diagnosis circuit with
malfunction code display.
11.3 The ceiling mounted cassette type, double-flow or multi-flow shall

have an "autoswing mechanism" which automatically varies the
direction of the air flow thereby preventing sharp variations in the air
flow and the temperature. The built-in "radiant heat sensor" for all fan
coil units to control the room temperature in accordance with the way
it actually feels in the room of effective temperature.
TS/M/S42/4 2602542S/AC
11.4 The sound tolerance of the fan coil units must not be higher of the
following levels:
Cassette type Multi-flow : 44 dBA
Cassette type Double-flow : 48 dBA
Cassette type Corner-flow : 41 dBA
Ceiling mounted Built-in type : 44 dBA
Ceiling suspended type : 48 dBA
Wall mounted type : 42 dBA
Floor standing type : 40 dBA
Concealed floor standing type : 40 dBA
11.5 The performance specifications of the fan coil units are based on the
following temperature conditions:
Indoor temperature : 27°C dry bulb, 19.5°C wet bulb
Outdoor temperature : 35°C dry bulb
12. Cross fin evaporator
12.1 The cross fin evaporator coil shall be constructed from strong clean
copper tubes bonded to aluminium fins suitably spaced to ensure
maximum heat transfer. The inlet of the coil shall be factory brazed to
an electronic control valve. The face velocity shall be exceptionally
low to ensure quiet operation.
12.2 The cross fin coil shall be of waffle louver fins and hi-x tube design to
ensure highly efficient performance. Fin pitch shall not be less than
2.0mm.
13. Electronic control valve
An electronic expansion valve shall be factory brazed to the inlet of the coil. It
shall modulate the refrigerant volume continuously in respond to load
variations of the room. Thus, maintain a precise constant temperature of
±0.5°C.
TS/M/S42/5 2602542S/AC
14. Soft Start (Starters)
All condensing units shall be equipped with soft start to ensure low starting
current.
The inverter compressor shall be able to start at the minimum load and
gradually increase to the required frequency according to the actual load
requirement.
A recycling guard timer shall be provided to prevent the compressor from
restarting again immediately after it was stopped.
15. Fan Coil Unit Drainage Facilities
All fan coil units viz. ceiling mounted cassette (double and multi flow type),
ceiling mounted (corner type), ceiling suspended type and wall mounted type,
shall be provided with drain-up pumps, with a separate power supply from the
FCU.
16. Pressure testing
The complete refrigerant circuit should be subjected to a pressure test of 28.0

kg/cm² for at least 24 hours without any drop in pressure.
17. Pipe Material
The refrigerant pipework shall be of de-oxidized phosphorous seamless copper

pipe complying with BS 2871 and related internationally recognized standard.
18. Evaporator Fan
The evaporator fan shall be of the dual suction multi-blade type with its length
designed to match the coil width. The fan shall be statically and dynamically
balanced to ensure low noise and vibration free operation. It shall be directly
driven by a 2-speed induction motor. For ceiling ducted unit, the fan shall be
directly driven by a 2-speed induction motor. For ceiling ducted unit, the fan
shall be able to cater for the static pressure to the system as shown in the
drawing. The motor shall operate on 230 V single phase 50Hz supply.
TS/M/S42/6 2602542S/AC
19. Control
19.1 The control system shall be connected by using 2-wire multiplex

transmission system which links a single outdoor unit to multiple
indoor units with a 2-core cable. In addition, the control system must
come equipped with automatic address setting function. No manual
setting of addressing is permitted. An automatic checking function for
connection error in wiring and piping must come as a standard with the
system.
19.2 Computerized control shall be used to maintain a correct room

temperature with minimum power consumption. The fan coil unit shall
be equipped with its own 2-speed fan controller, timer ON/OFF switch,
thermostat and LED indicators.
19.3 The control system shall also be equipped with a self diagnosis circuit
for easy and quick maintenance and service. It shall be able to indicate
at least 52 malfunction code display.
20. Centralized Control System
A centralized control system shall consist of a central remote controller,

unified on/off controller and a schedule timer. They shall be provided to
control all the functions of the fan coil units either together as a central control
system or individually as the specifications call for. They must be able to
connect to Building Automation System (BAS) via an interface for BACnet
for control and monitoring.
The function of each unit should be as follows:
20.1 Central Remote Controller
It should be able to control 64 groups (each group comprising 16 fan

coil units) or 1,024 nos. of fan coil units, with the same function of the
LCD remote controller, which should have the following features:
a) Temperature setting for each fan coil unit or group.
b) Air flow setting for each fan coil unit or group.
c) Fault indication of each fan coil unit.
d) Ability to switch on/off each individual fan coil unit or group

of fan coil units.
e) Ability to switch on/off the entire system.
f) Maximum wiring length of 1km.
TS/M/S42/7 2602542S/AC
20.2 Unified On/Off Controller
The unified on/off controller shall be connectable to a maximum of 16

groups (each consisting of 16 fan coil units) or 256 nos. of fan coil
units and it shall have the following features:
a) Simultaneous or individual operation of the fan coil units.
b) Normal operating status such as normal operation, alarm.
c) Ability to have centralized control indication.
d) Maximum wiring length of 1km.
e) Shall be combinable with the centralized remote controller.
20.3 Schedule Timer
The schedule timer shall be connectable to a maximum of 64 groups

(each comprising 16 fan coil units) or 1,024 nos. of fan coil units and it
shall have the following features:
a) 8 types of weekly schedule.
b) Maximum of 48 hours of back-up power supply.
c) Maximum wiring length of 1km.
d) Shall be combinable with the central remote controller and the

unified on/off controller.
21. Fan Coil Unit- Condensing Unit Matching
21.1 Means shall be provided (via. by ratchet relay, programmable logic

controller, etc.) for alternating the duty of those condensing units
which are to be operational 24 hrs per day, every day of the year, as
well as those condensing units which are to be operational 24 hrs per
day, but only on certain days of the year, with condensing units which
are to be operational 8 to 12 hrs per day or only intermittently (ie.
operational only as and when required).
21.2 That is, those condensing units which are operational for 8 to 12 hrs
per day will function as the 'standby' condensing units for those 'duty'
condensing units which operate 24 hrs per day (either continuously or
intermittently), for the remaining 12 to 16 hrs of the day. The
following day, the latter condensing units will then operate for the full
24 hr per day duration while the former condensing units will rest for
the remaining l2 to 16 hrs of the day, and vice versa.
TS/M/S42/8 2602542S/AC
21.3 The cooling capacities of the fan coil units and condensing units as
indicated in the schedules contained within this technical specification
and the drawings, are the minimum cooling capacities required. In the
event that the capacity ratio of the fan coil system to the associated
condensing unit is greater than 100%, and when all the fan coil units
are in operation simultaneously, then the rated capacity of each
condensing unit will be somewhat reduced. The Sub-Contractor shall
take such fact into account in the selection and matching of the fan coil
and condensing units. Any consequential increase in cooling capacity
of fan coil unit(s) and/or condensing unit(s), in order to meet the
minimum cooling requirements set out in this technical specification or
drawings, shall be deemed to be included by the Sub-Contractor in his
tender.
22. Wire Centre Air-conditioning
22.1 Power supply to all wire centres should be e-source, i.e., with
generator backup. This includes power supply to the individual air-con
units inside the wire centre.
22.2 The power consumption by IT equipment shall be 3 kW (or 4 kVA,

assuming 0.8 power efficiency) per rack. Air-conditioning cooling load
shall be sized accordingly. In any one instance, the air-conditioning
unit shall not be sized lower than 24,000 BTU for room size of 3 x 3
meter internal. Main wire centre air-conditioning unit which shall not
be sized lower than 48,000 BTU in total each for room size of 3 x 3
meter. Ceiling mounted unit shall not be used. All the fan coil unit
shall be of wall mounted type
22.3 The 24x7 air-conditioning system shall be capable of achieving

operating temperature: 22 +/- 1 degree C. The room shall be designed
to be condensation free under all operating environment.
22.4 The air-conditioning system shall be designed in accordance with N+N

redundancy with each unit configured to operate in 12-hour shift mode
automatically. Protective measures shall be taken to ensure at any one
time only up to N units should be running. Main wire centre shall
design with 2N+2N redundancy with each set of units configured to
operate in 12-hour shift mode automatically, The air-conditioning for
wire centre shall complete with 24hr change over panel, high
temperature alarm, high temperature cut-in and BAS monitoring
22.5 Thermostats shall be provided for user to adjust the room temperature
manually. A controller shall be in place to reset the temperature back
to its design operating temperature and pre-sets time schedule after 2
hours of manual setting.
TS/M/S42/9 2602542S/AC
22.6 All wire centre air-conditioning unit shall be wall mounted type.
22.7 Where VRV system is used for multiple fan coil unit, the system shall
not served more than three fan coil units. Duty and standby shall not
share with the same condensing units. The system shall not mix with
others non wire centre usage.
22.8 Contractor shall eliminate the possibility of condensation, water

dripping and leakage inside the wire centre.
22.9 The air-conditioning system shall be linked to central building

management system to automatically notify operation personnel should
there be any fault with any air-conditioning unit or component, or
when the room temperature goes beyond pre-set threshold.
TS/M/S42/10 2602542S/AC
SECTION 44 - AIR-COOLED MULTI-SPLIT VRV UNITS
1. Scope of Work

of air-cooled multi-split units and associated accessories.
1.2 If the Air-Cooled Multi-Split units unit is designed as standby to the

normal air conditioning unit, then the Sub-contractor shall provide the
DBs, isolator, cabling and the entire interlock control such that the
split/package shall be automatically switched on if the normal air
conditioning unit high temperature or fails
1.3 All the Air-Cooled Multi-Split units shall comply to the latest
Singapore Standard SS 530 with energy efficient and with minimum at
least 5 ticks.
1.4 The Sub-Contractor shall supply and install, where shown on the
Tender drawings, air-cooled multi-split systems of an approved type
and each complete with indoor units, outdoor unit, with refrigeration
cycle, electrical components, fan speed and thermostatic control. The
units shall be suitable for continuous operation and shall be constructed
as below.
2. General
2.1 The air-conditioning units shall be air-cooled, multi-split type,

consisting of one outdoor unit and plural fan coil units, each having
capability to cool the rooms independently.
2.2 The system shall be selected based on outdoor temperature of 35oC DB

and indoor temperature of 24oC DB/19oC WB. Manufacturer’s
datasheet shall be submitted.
2.3 The system shall comply with the requirements on noise pollution
control and of BCA Green Mark category specified elsewhere in the
Contract document.
2.4 Power supply at 230V single-phase 50Hz will be provided at the

vicinity of the condenser unit terminating in an isolator. The
Contractor shall be responsible to provide power supply to the systems.
2.5 The manufacturer shall provide guarantee for the compressor for a
period of 5 years from the date of Substantial Completion.
TS/M/S44/1 2602542S/AC
2.6 The system shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 378 and
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15 and ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 34.
2.7 The equipment shall meet to BS EN 378 Parts 1-4 Refrigerating

systems and heat pumps. Safety and environmental requirements
2.8 The complete air conditioner shall be the product of a single

manufacturer certified to ISO 9001 for the manufacturer of air
conditioning equipment.
2.9 The manufacturer or its authorised distributor shall maintain an active

technical team and maintenance facilities in Singapore.
2.10 The materials for system parts supplied shall meet and comply with the
RoHS Directive (Restriction of Hazardous Substances) in electrical
and electronic equipment.
2.11 The sub-contractor shall submit the detailed equipment, piping layout
plans, manufacturer’s recommended pipe size including basis for size
selection and method statement to engineer. Maintenance access shall
be clearly shown to enable coordination with the building and other
services. Installation detail and mock up shall be installed for SO
approval.
2.12 The condensing unit shall be equipped with inverter controller,

enabling it to reduce minimum load down to 2 kW of total, without the
aid of any hot gas bypass system, and without compromising system
efficiency. It shall be capable of changing the rotating speed to follow
variations in cooling load
2.13 The condensing unit shall be suitable for mix-match connection of

double and multi-flow ceiling mounted cassette type, ceiling ducted,
built-in ceiling type, wall mounted type, ceiling mounted cassette
corner type and floor mounted type indoor units.
2.14 The refrigerant piping shall be extendable up to 80 m with 15 m level

difference without any oil traps.
2.15 Both indoor and outdoor units are to be factory assembled, tested and
charged with R410A refrigerant at the factory.
TS/M/S44/2 2602542S/AC
2.16 The air-cooled multi-split system to be supplied and installed by the
Sub- Contractor shall consist of fan coil unit(s); air-cooled condensing
unit, refrigerant pipework with associated fittings, sight-glass and filter
drier, electrical panel and control gear and wiring, including cutting
and making good necessary openings through walls and floors for
pipework and electrical wiring, 100 mm thick concrete plinth or
painted steel mounting brackets approved by the Architect and all other
incidental works and materials necessary to bring the system to good
working order. The control panel shall be constructed of
electrogalvanized steel sheets, baked-painted. The gauge of metal,
panel dimensions and layout design and circuitry, shall be approved by
the Architect. The piping layout indicated in the drawings is indicative
only. The Sub-Contractor shall also be responsible for the optimal
design and layout of the refrigerant piping system, and shall also verify
the sufficiency of the sizes of all riser ducts, openings, etc.
3. Air-Cooled Condensing Unit
3.1 The air-cooled condensing unit shall be a factory assembled unit

housed in a sturdy weather-proof casing constructed from rust-proof
mild steel panels coated with baked enamel finish. The condensing unit
shall be designed to operate safely when connected to multiple fan coil
units which have a combined operating nominal capacity varying from
10% to 110% of nominal compressors capacity. The noise level shall
not be more than 49 dBA measured horizontally 1 metre away and 1.5
metres above ground.
3.2 The system shall be able to reduce its minimum load without having to
utilise any hot gas bypass system, efficiency of the system cannot be
compromised
3.3 The system shall allow refrigerant piping up to 80 metres. The

maximum allowable height difference between the outdoor and indoor
units shall be 15 metres.
3.4 The condensing unit shall be designed to operate safely when

connected to the fan coil units.
3.5 Condensing units shall be of soft-start to ensure low starting current.
3.6 The condensing unit shall be able to operate in outdoor temperature as

high as 43°C DB.
TS/M/S44/3 2602542S/AC
3.7 Design condition of condensing unit shall be:
Indoor temperature : 27°C DB, 19.5°C WB
Outdoor temperature : 35°C DB
4. Compressor
The compressor shall be of highly efficient hermetically sealed scroll

Compressors having high EER value and equipped with inverter control
capable of changing the speed linearly in accordance to the room load
requirement. It shall be able to vary the load from the 10% to 110% of its
normal capacity. The compressor shall be mounted on spring isolators within
the compressor casing to minimise vibration. In addition, the whole
compressor assembly shall also be mounted with soundproofing materials so
that complete vibration is not transferred outside. The compressor assembly
shall have low operation noise level and shall be equipped with safety devices
such as overload relay and over current relay to protect the compressor in case
of malfunction.
5. Condenser Assembly
The air cooled condenser shall be constructed with copper tubes mechanically
bonded to aluminum fins to form a cross fin coil. The condenser shall have
large face area to minimise noise and give a high EER for heat transfer.
Condenser should be of waffle louver fins and Hi-X tubes design for high
efficiency performance. The condensing unit shall be chemically coated with
anti-corrosion P.E. fins. The thickness of the coating must be between 2.0 to
3.0 microns. Manufacturer datasheet of the anti-corrosion treatment shall be
submitted
6. Condenser fan and motor
The condenser fan shall be of multi-blade low speed noise level type made
from pressed out aluminum and dynamically and statically balance for
minimum noise and vibration. The condenser fan shall be directly coupled to a
induction motor. The axial of the fan shall be perpendicular to the face of the
condenser to ensure smooth air flow. The condenser fan and motor shall be of
high efficiency type with minimum power consumption. The fan motor shall
be equipped with pole-change control so that it can be stepped down to low
speed when the requirement is low.
TS/M/S44/4 2602542S/AC
7. Refrigerant Circuit
The refrigerant circuit shall include an accumulator, liquid and gas shut off
valves, solenoid and electronic expansion valve. All necessary safely devices
should be provided to ensure the safety operation of the system.
8. Accumulator
The cylindrical accumulator shall be constructed from mild steel plates

pressed into shape. The accumulator shall have sufficient capacity to prevent
any liquid refrigerant from flowing back into the compressor suction.
9. Safety devices
The following safety devices shall be part of the condensing unit. High
pressure switch, fuse, crankcase heater, fusible plug, over current relay for
compressor, thermal protectors for compressor and fan motors, recycling
guard timer.
10. Oil recovery system
Unit shall be equipped with an oil recovery system to ensure stable operation
with long refrigerant piping. Oil trap system is not acceptable.
11. Fan coil unit
11.1 Each fan coil unit shall be of the ceiling ducted type, or ceiling
suspended type, ceiling mounted cassette corner, double-flow, multi-
flow type, or wall mounted type or floor mounted type.
11.2 Each fan coil unit shall have be equipped with a self diagnosis remote
controller and having the features of setting of room temperature (with
digital indicator of room temperature), timer, air discharge direction
(for cassette units), fan speed selections, self diagnosis circuit with
malfunction code display.
11.3 The ceiling mounted cassette type, double-flow or multi-flow shall

have an "auto swing mechanism" which automatically varies the
direction of the air flow thereby preventing sharp variations in the air
flow and the temperature. The built-in "radiant heat sensor" for all fan
coil units to control the room temperature in accordance with the way
it actually feels in the room of effective temperature.
TS/M/S44/5 2602542S/AC
11.4 The fan speed shall be controlled automatically according to the room
load requirements.
11.5 Two layered air purifying filter consisting of an electrostatic filter to

catch smoke of 0.01 micron, and an activated charcoal filter to remove
unpleasant odours effectively purifies the air in the room.
11.6 The drain pan shall be made from strong preformed foam polystyrene,
shape to ensure positive drainage and thermal insulation. It shall have
an outlet for connection to drain hose
11.7 The sound tolerance of the fan coil units must not be higher of the
following levels:
Cassette type Multi-flow : 44 dBA
Cassette type Double-flow : 48 dBA
Cassette type Corner-flow : 41 dBA
Ceiling mounted Built-in type : 44 dBA
Ceiling suspended type : 48 dBA
Wall mounted type : 42 dBA
Floor standing type : 40 dBA
Concealed floor standing type : 40 dBA
11.8 The performance specifications of the fan coil units are based on the
following temperature conditions:
Indoor temperature : 27°C dry bulb, 19.5°C wet bulb
Outdoor temperature : 35°C dry bulb
12. Cross fin evaporator
12.1 The cross fin evaporator coil shall be constructed from strong clean
copper tubes bonded to aluminium fins suitably spaced to ensure
maximum heat transfer. The inlet of the coil shall be factory brazed to
an electronic control valve. The face velocity shall be exceptionally
low to ensure quiet operation.
12.2 The cross fin coil shall be of waffle louver fins and hi-x tube design to
ensure highly efficient performance. Fin pitch shall not be less than
2.0mm.
TS/M/S44/6 2602542S/AC
13. Electronic control valve
An electronic expansion valve shall be factory brazed to the inlet of the coil. It
shall modulate the refrigerant volume continuously in respond to load
variations of the room. Thus, maintain a precise constant temperature of
±0.5°C.
14. Soft Start (Starters)
All condensing units shall be equipped with soft start to ensure low starting
current.
The inverter compressor shall be able to start at the minimum load and
gradually increase to the required frequency according to the actual load
requirement.
A recycling guard timer shall be provided to prevent the compressor from
restarting again immediately after it was stopped.
15. Fan Coil Unit Drainage Facilities
All fan coil units viz. ceiling mounted cassette (double and multi flow type),
ceiling mounted (corner type), ceiling suspended type and wall mounted type,
shall be provided with drain-up pumps, with a separate power supply from the
FCU.
16. Pressure testing
The complete refrigerant circuit should be subjected to a pressure test of 28.0

kg/cm² for at least 24 hours without any drop in pressure.
17. Pipe Material
17.1. The refrigerant pipe shall be of de-oxidised phosphorous seamless

copper pipe conforming to BS EN 12735, JIS H300 - C1220T or
approved equivalent standards. Both suction gas and liquid lines shall
be sufficiently insulated to prevent formation of condensation in all
circumstances.
17.2. All shut off valves connections in the outdoor units shall be brazed to
avoid risks of refrigerant leakages (conventionally shut off valves are
flanged or flared).
17.3. Appropriate refrigeration installation tools shall be utilised to avoid the

use of elbows. Oxygen free dry Nitrogen (OFN) shall be in the system
during brazing. Cold brazing is not permitted.
TS/M/S44/7 2602542S/AC
17.4. All pipe work (suction and liquid) to be insulated with slip-on close
cell electrometric pipe insulation, fire rated to Class "O", with a wall
thickness of not less than 25mm. Insulation shall be protected when
exposed to atmosphere by special paint or covered by an enclosure.
17.5. Refrigerant pipes shall be sized accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations.
17.6. Condensate drain pipes shall be the diameter of drain hole of the drain
pan subject to minimum 20mm bore diameter. Drain pipes shall be
dedicated to a single fan coil unit.
17.7. Condensate drain pipes shall be thermally insulated with approved

closed cell insulation material for the entire length to prevent
condensation. Calculations shall be submitted.
18. Evaporator Fan
The evaporator fan shall be of the dual suction multi-blade type with its length
designed to match the coil width. The fan shall be statically and dynamically
balanced to ensure low noise and vibration free operation. It shall be directly
driven by a variable speed induction motor. For ceiling ducted unit, the fan
shall be directly driven by a variable speed DC brushless type motor. For
ceiling ducted unit, the fan shall be able to cater for the static pressure to the
system as shown in the drawing. The motor shall operate on 230 V single
phase 50Hz supply.
19. Control
19.1 The control system shall be connected by using 2-wire multiplex

transmission system which links a single outdoor unit to multiple
indoor units with a 2-core cable. In addition, the control system must
come equipped with automatic address setting function. No manual
setting of addressing is permitted. An automatic checking function for
connection error in wiring and piping must come as a standard with the
system.
19.2 Computerized controller and thermostat shall be used to maintain a

correct room temperature with minimum power consumption. The fan
coil unit shall be equipped with its own variable speed fan controller,
timer ON/OFF switch, thermostat and LED indicators.
19.3 The control system shall also be equipped with a self diagnosis circuit
for easy and quick maintenance and service. It shall be able to indicate
at least 52 malfunction code display.
TS/M/S44/8 2602542S/AC
20. Building Automation System interfacing
The Multi-split unit shall be able to interface into the building automation
system for the control and monitoring the system.
21. Wire Centre Air-conditioning
20.1 Power supply to all wire centres should be e-source, i.e., with
generator backup. This includes power supply to the individual air-con
units inside the wire centre.
20.2 The power consumption by IT equipment shall be 3 kW (or 4 kVA,

assuming 0.8 power efficiency) per rack. Air-conditioning cooling load
shall be sized accordingly. In any one instance, the air-conditioning
unit shall not be sized lower than 24,000 BTU for room size of 3 x 3
meter internal. Main wire centre air-conditioning unit which shall not
be sized lower than 48,000 BTU in total each for room size of 3 x 3
meter. Ceiling mounted unit shall not be used. All the fan coil unit
shall be of wall mounted type
20.3 The 24x7 air-conditioning system shall be capable of achieving

operating temperature: 22 +/- 1 degree C. The room shall be designed
to be condensation free under all operating environment.
20.4 The air-conditioning system shall be designed in accordance with N+N

redundancy with each unit configured to operate in 12-hour shift mode
automatically. Protective measures shall be taken to ensure at any one
time only up to N units should be running. Main wire centre shall
design with 2N+2N redundancy with each set of units configured to
operate in 12-hour shift mode automatically, The air-conditioning for
wire centre shall complete with 24hr change over panel, high
temperature alarm, high temperature cut-in and BAS monitoring
20.5 Thermostats shall be provided for user to adjust the room temperature
manually. A controller shall be in place to reset the temperature back
to its design operating temperature and pre-sets time schedule after 2
hours of manual setting.
20.6 All wire centre air-conditioning unit shall be wall mounted type.
20.7 Where VRV system is used for multiple fan coil unit, the system shall
not served more than three fan coil units. Duty and standby shall not
share with the same condensing units. The system shall not mix with
others non wire centre usage.
TS/M/S44/9 2602542S/AC
20.8 Contractor shall eliminate the possibility of condensation, water
dripping and leakage inside the wire centre.
20.9 The air-conditioning system shall be linked to central building

management system to automatically notify operation personnel should
there be any fault with any air-conditioning unit or component, or
when the room temperature goes beyond pre-set threshold.
Testing and commissioning of the system shall be carried out by trained

personnel. Documents testifying to training and method statement on testing
and commissioning shall be submitted. All testing and commissioning report
shall submit to engineer.
TS/M/S44/10 2602542S/AC
SECTION 48 – ULTRA VIOLET EMITTER
1. General
1.1. This Section specifies the requirements for the supply, manufacture,
installation, commissioning, testing and fifteen (15) months
free maintenance and warranty of UV-C emitters and the asso-
ciated accessories for air handling units (AHU) and Fan Coil Units.
2. UV-C Emitter
2.1. The UV-C lights shall be installed between the cooling coil and the
blower within the AHU housing i.e. downstream of cooling coils. This is
to eliminate the growth of surface microbial contaminants on coils, fins
and drain pan.
2.2. Each UV-C light fitting shall consist of aluminum casing, electronic
ballasts with lamp-out sensors, lamp holders/frames, UV-C lights, power
cables, etc. The complete UV-C light fittings shall be of IP65 rating.
2.3. All UV-C lights and fittings shall be corrosion resistant type and the
lights base must be UV-resistant.
2.4. All Installation of UV-C lights and fixtures inside the AHUs shall be
designed to have safety interlocking switch under recommended safety
requirements.
2.5. If there are two numbers of coil panels inside one AHU, UV-C lights will
only be required to be installed next to the second coil panel, i.e. the last
coil panel in the air stream.
2.6. UV-C lights shall be in T5 tube diameter and constructed from hard glass
tubing for superior UV transmittance and produce no ozone or other
secondary contaminants. The UV-C emitter shall be shatter-proof with
proper sheath for containment of the tube emitter.
2.7. Each light shall retain, at minimum, 80% of initial output after 17,000
hours of use. They shall be sealed for moisture protection with a water-
tight connection. Electrodes shall be designed to maximize plasma
convection and stability for superior light performance.
2.8. UV-C lights shall have high-efficiency electronic ballasts to match the
specified output intensity.
TS/M/S48/1 2602542S/AC
2.9. Fixtures for UV-C lights shall be factory installed and wired to a
disconnect switch with a test button and door interlock switches in each
door of AHUs. The casing shall be earthed internally for safety purpose.
2.10. Lights shall be shipped separately for field installation to minimize the
chance for tube damage.
2.11. Each light output shall be measured in an ASME nozzled test apparatus
using a 7.2°C airstream at velocity not less than 2m/s. Each light output
at 253.7nm shall not be less than 10μW/cm² per 25.4mm of arc length
measured at a distance of one meter.
2.12. Lights and fixtures shall be arranged and installed so as to provide an

equal distribution of UV-C energy on the coil, fins and drain pan. The
lights shall be installed facing the coils with the distance of not more than
0.5m. The UV-C intensity striking on the leading edge of all coil fins
shall not be less than 1100mW/cm² with minimum number of UV-C
lights installed. The lights intensity at the corners of coil surface shall not
be less than 400mW/cm². The UV-C lights arrangement and calculation
shall be submitted to the Engineer for acceptance.
2.13. All UV-C lights and fittings shall be durable and able to withstand
continuous operation without overheating or adverse damage
2.14. The UV Warning Sign shall be provided as stipulated by the relevant

authority.
2.15. The UV-C emitter shall comply with the Guidelines set by the
International Ultraviolet Association or the following exposure limits set
by the American Medical Association or the latest human exposures
limited or related Standards or/and Regulations or/and Guidelines of
Singapore:
UV-C Human Exposure Limits

Exposure Duration Exposure Limit
Continuous 0.1 μW/cm²
7 hours/day 0.5 μW/cm²
10 minutes 22 μW/cm²
2.5 minutes 90 μW/cm²
TS/M/S48/2 2602542S/AC
3. Ultra Violet In-Duct Air Purifier
3.1. An individual array that will provide a barrier wall of germicidal UV

energy that will treat 100% of the air that passes through it.
3.2. An array will consist of an outwardly projecting air purifier to be used

in an air duct supporting a longitudinal (parallel) airflow.
3.3. The overall diameter of the array will not exceed 18.4cm.
3.4. The lamp assemblies will be positioned that a cylindrical array of UV

assemblies is obtained.
3.5. An aluminum convex deflector element mounted to the support, so that

the airflow is directed over the UV lamp assemblies.
3.6. The cone diameter shall not exceed 8.75cm.
3.7. The wire sets connecting the array to the ballast box shall be
constructed of 18Awg wire.
3.8. The aluminum ballast box shall consist of one ballast for each lamp, a
resetable hour accumulating counter that will show the accumulated
hours for each lamp, an LED “Lamp On” indicator for each lamp, an
audible buzzer to indicate a “Lamp Out” condition. A dry contact will
be included to remotely monitor a lamp out condition and to be able to
remotely turn on and turn off the Array. The electronics will include a
socket for an available wireless Zigby protocol electronic transmitter to
be able to monitor each lamp wirelessly at a remote location.
3.9. The purifier must be UL/FM certified.
3.10. The one piece anodized aluminum, array will contain a plurality (5) of
reflectors, having a generally parabolic inner surface and a UV lamp
mounted to each reflector so that the generally parabolic reflector inner
surface reflects all the UV radiation emitted by the UV lamps in a
radial direction.
3.11. The array can be positioned either in the return side of the coil, or in
the supply side of the coil.
3.12. The inside of the duct where the array will be installed, must be lined
with aluminum to reflect the UV intensity back into the duct. The
aluminum must have a minimum coefficient of reflection of 85%.
TS/M/S48/3 2602542S/AC
3.13. UV Lamp
a. The array will be available with UV lamp lengths of 600 mm,

750 mm, 1000mm, 1250 mm and 1500 mm.
b. The high intensity UVC lamps will be of the low-pressure (3.0

Torr) mercury laden argon-neon type with an internal Alumina
coating to reduce solarization.
c. The UVC lamps are pure fused quartz, type 219 shell, properly
doped with Titanium Oxide in order to filter out 99.99% of the
185 nm wavelength.
3.14. Performance
The UV intensity for each individual lamp shall not be less than;
a. 270 microwatts per/cm2 for the 600 mm inch lamps,

b. 290 microwatts per/cm2 for the 750 mm inch lamps,
c. 500 microwatts per/cm2 for the 1000 mm inch lamps,
d. 580 microwatts per/cm2 for the 1250 mm inch lamps,
e. 640 microwatts per/cm2 for the 1500 mm inch lamps.
3.15. Warranty
The purifier will carry a 2 year warranty on parts, 12,000 hours on the
UV lamps.
TS/M/S48/4 2602542S/AC
SECTION 49 - VIBRATION ISOLATION AND NOISE CONTROL
1. General
1.1 Unless otherwise specified, anti-vibration isolators shall be provided for all
equipment with rotating or reciprocating components to prevent the
transmission of vibration and structure borne transmission of sound to the
building structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected in accordance with
the weight distribution so as to produce reasonably uniform deflection.
1.2 Unless otherwise stated, all vibration isolators shall be selected for minimum
noise transmission. The selection of isolators shall be based on the lowest
shaft speed of any component equipment which may be mounted (rigidly or
otherwise) on the bases to which the vibration isolators shall be attached to.
1.3 The Sub-Contractor shall unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this

Specification or Tender Drawings be responsible for the following:-
a) Support all rotating machines subject to unbalanced forces on

properly selected anti-vibration mountings. Machines should be
individually mounted rather than on a common base.
b) Provide where applicable, floating inertia bases weighted suitably in

accordance with the equipment weights.
c) Select fans with low noise, low top-speeds and outlet velocities as is
practically possible for the specific application. The selection shall
be such that the air quantity or outlet velocity is within the range
0.95 - 1.5 times the air quantity or outlet velocity supplied by the
fan at its peak efficiency for the design static pressure.
d) Select motors with low bearing noise and of adequate lubrication

and motor contactors free of vibration and rattling.
e) Install smooth bends and airfoil turning vanes in all ventilation duct
work.
f) Provide, where applicable, sound attenuators in duct work to

achieve specified noise levels.
g) Select all air handling system accessories with low radiated and
discharged sound power levels.
h) Provide internal acoustic linings to all AHUs' duct work, minimum 5

metres on supply and return air ducts or as shown in the Drawings.
TS/M/S49/1 2602542S/AC
1.4 The noise level in all air conditioned and mechanical ventilated areas shall
not exceed the recommended level. The readings shall be taken with all air
conditioning equipment operational at full capacity. It shall be the Sub-
Contractor's responsibility to carry out all noise measurements and ensure
that all air-handling units and other equipments are selected and installed to
meet the design level. Where necessary, noise attenuators special
equipment covers and vibration isolators shall be provided.
1.5 The Sub-Contractor is required to ensure that the above criteria shall be
fully complied. He would be required to install noise attenuation material
and devices to ensure that the criteria is fully met. The cost for the above
compliance shall be included in the Tender price and any deviation from this
Section shall be made known to the S.O..
1.6 The Sub-Contractor shall supply and install isolation and support for the
following :
a) Acoustic seals for duct work, pipe work penetrating through wall.
b) Facilities to allow expansion and contraction for vertical pipe run.
c) Flexible connection on all ducting and vibrating equipments
d) Neoprene hangers for all main supply and return ducts
2. Duct work Isolation
2.1 The requirement of spring isolator for duct work shall be applicable only to
the first three rod hangers from the fan/AHU equipment.
2.2 Duct work vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring located in a
neoprene cup manufactured with a grommet to prevent short circuiting of
the hanger rod. The cup shall contain a steel washer designed to properly
distribute the load on the neoprene and prevent its extrusion. Spring
diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit
the hanger rod to swing through a 30 arc before contacting the hole and
short circuiting the spring. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel
to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Spring deflection shall be a
minimum of 20 mm.
TS/M/S49/2 2602542S/AC
3. Penetration for Piping and Duct work
When a duct or pipe penetrate a building structure, the space in between shall be
completely sealed with one layer of 25 mm thick and 120 kg/m3 fibreglass in 22
SWG sheet metal sleeve and caulked from both sides with non-setting bitumen
compound.
4. Pipe work Isolation
4.1 Pipe spring in the main lines shall be pre-compressed to the rated deflection
so as to keep the piping at a fixed elevation during installation. The hangers
shall be designed with a release mechanism to force the spring after the
installation is completed and the hanger is subjected to its full load.
4.2 Pipe work connected to vibration generating equipment shall be supported

by vibration isolated hangers.
4.3 Inherently rigid plants connections, such as condenser piping between the
cooling tower and the chillers, shall be resiliently supported with the same
efficiency mechanical isolation as the major plant to which it is connected.
4.4 Chilled water piping within the plant room and the risers shall be provided
with vibration isolated supports.
4.5 For all other mechanical equipment, the first three hangers/supports from
the equipment shall be spring in series with neoprene types as specified.
4.6 All other supports/hangers beyond the first three pipe hangers specified in
the schedule shall incorporate an isolation medium of 8 mm thickness such
as waffle pattern neoprene, felt or high density fibreglass between pipe and
hanger/support or between hanger/support and wall. This shall apply to all
piping installed, whether in horizontal runs or vertical pipe risers, unless
otherwise allowed by the S.O..
5. Vibration Isolation
5.1 Spring type isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without any
housing and complete with 1/4" neoprene acoustical friction pads between
the baseplate and the support. All mountings shall have levelling bolts that
must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameter shall be not less
than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall
have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated
deflection.
TS/M/S49/3 2602542S/AC
5.2 Cooling towers and the associated piping shall be isolated from the building
structure through the use of steel coil spring/neoprene assemblies. Ribbed
neoprene pads shall be incorporated under the base plate of the springs and
shall be at least 10 mm thick.
6. Spring Hangers
Vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring and 0.3" deflection neoprene element
in series and encased in a welded bracket. Spring diameter and hanger box lower
hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30° arc
before contacting the hole and short circuiting the spring. Springs shall have a
minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection.
7. Sound Attenuators
7.1 The Sub-Contractor shall install approved attenuators (silencers) where

shown in the Drawings, or as required if not shown, to achieve the
performance as specified.
7.2 Should the provisions be insufficient for the equipment selected by the Sub-
Contractor and that the noise levels exceed the specified levels, the Sub-
Contractor shall be required to rectify the defect and to replace the sound
attenuators if necessary at his own costs, to achieve the specified
requirements.
7.3 The Sub-Contractor is to note that all equipment offered shall comply with
the N.C. levels recommended by the Authorities or as stated in the
Specification whichever is lower. The Sub-Contractor shall be required to
rectify without any additional cost to the University all equipment that does
not comply with the N.C. levels recommended.
7.4 Certified test data on dynamic insertion loss and self-generated noise with
an airflow of at least 7.5 m/sec face velocity, pressure drop and a complete
set of noise attenuators selected and offered shall be furnished at the time of
Tender. Attenuators without any verifiable selection data shall not be
accepted.
TS/M/S49/4 2602542S/AC
7.5 Attenuators supplied shall be designed, manufactured and supplied by a
proprietary manufacturer who has advertised and certifiable performance
data provided to allow verification and audit checking of the selection of
proposed silencers by the S.O.. The catalogue data shall include not less
than the following:
a) Insertion loss for at least 125, 250, 500, 1000, 2000, 4000 and 8000
Hz
b) Pressure drop in Pa for various air flow values
c) Regenerated noise for various air flows or pressure drops
7.6 The attenuator cases shall be constructed with 1.2 mm minimum hot dipped
galvanised steel duct sections with air channels. Splitters shall be
streamlined shape with respect to air flow and shall comprise an absorbent
pad of heavy density mineral wool of fibre glass covered in fibre glass scrim
and faced with perforated zincanneal, having a free area appropriate to the
application. Where applicable, this lining shall also cover the internal areas
of the casing between the splitters. Casing shall have steel angles and
flanges and reinforcing to the standards set out for the duct work. Steel
angles, and any areas of the casings where the galvanising has been
damaged, shall be cleaned and finished with cold galvanising compound
before leaving the manufacturer's premises.
7.7 Acoustic attenuation casing shall be designed and built to limit radiated
noise so that space noise criteria are not exceeded.
7.8 Attenuators installed in high pressure duct work shall be pressure tested
with the rest of the duct system. All leaks shall be repaired.
7.9 All attenuators shall be etched, primed and clearly marked with the
manufacturer's name, type number, direction of air flow and identification.
TS/M/S49/5 2602542S/AC
8. Equipment Mounting
The equipment mounting for major components are listed below in Table 2.
Table 2 - Equipment Mounting for Major Components
Equipment Type of Isolation Type of Base
1. Chiller Set Vertically restrained Factory fabricated

spring isolator with noise structural steel base
stop pad
2. Air Handling Units Free standing, un-housed Galvanised steel base for
laterally stable steep spring intergral mounting of
with top and bottom load fan, motor and casing
plate and levelling bolt panel
3. Centrifugal/Axial - ditto - - ditto -

fans
4. Centrifugal water - ditto - Inertia base constructed

pump of welded steel channel
to receive concrete pour
5. Cooling Towers Double ribbed neoprene -

pad
9. Steel Springs in Series with Neoprene Pads
9.1 Unless specified otherwise, spring type isolator shall be unhoused, free
standing, laterally stable with levelling bolts rigidly bolted to inertia
blocks/base frames. In general, diameter shall be comparable with
compressed height and shall not be less than 0.8 of compressed height at
rated load, and horizontal spring stiffness shall be approximately equal to
vertical stiffness.
9.2 Spring shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of rated
deflection, and in this condition, shall not exceed elastic limit of spring.
9.3 All springs shall be mounted with adequate clearance from brackets and
shall be clearly in view of critical inspection.
TS/M/S49/6 2602542S/AC
9.4 Where restrained mounts are specified, a housing shall be used that includes
vertical limit stops. A minimum clearance of 10 mm shall be maintained
around the restraining bolts and between the housing and spring so as not to
interfere with spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during
normal operations.
9.5 All spring type (whether free or restrained type) mounts used outdoors or
exposed to weather or wet conditions shall be hot dipped galvanised and
epoxy coated.
9.6 All steel springs shall be installed in series with two layers of neoprene
ribbed or waffle pattern pads (min. 8 mm thickness) as described below.
9.7 The springs shall be selected to support the calculated loads with the
minimum spring deflections as specified without being compressed solid, or
bridged out, or exceeding the Manufacturer's maximum rated loads under
any operating condition. In the selection of the springs the Sub-Contractor
shall also take into account the weight distribution of the equipment under
normal operating conditions, weight of unsupported pipes/ducts, and any
large dynamic forces due to fluid movement, torque reaction and
starting/stopping. The Sub-Contractor shall show, on the shop drawings
submitted, the make and model number of the isolators selected and their
individual calculated loads.
10. Inertia Blocks
10.1 To be installed where specified. The mechanical equipment shall be bolted

directly on to the integral concrete inertia blocks. All concrete referred to in
this Specification should have a density of at least 140-150 lbs/cu. ft. (2240-
2400 kg/cu. m).
10.2 In general, the length and width of the inertia block should be at least 50%
greater than the length and width of the supported equipment, except where
10.3 The weight of the inertia block, generally determined by thickness, shall be
as specified.
10.4 The base shall consist of a concrete slab cast into a welded steel base frame
assembly. Frames shall be welded steel channels, of minimum (150 mm)
thickness or the same thickness as the inertia block and shall be reinforced
with welded-in (12 mm) steel reinforcing rods or angles at 6" (150 mm)
centres each way. Anchor bolts shall be fixed into position, and housed in
steel bolt sleeve to allow minor bolt location adjustments or alternatively,
pocket shall be cast into inertia block to permit the later insertion of anchor
bolts.
TS/M/S49/7 2602542S/AC
10.5 A suitable base formed of min. 10 mm plywood or equivalent shall be
included for forming the slab. Steel channel isolator bracket shall be welded
directly to channel frames, and suitably located to accommodate the height
of the deflected springs and inertia block clearance with plinth.
10.6 There shall be adequate clearance (min. 20 mm) all round the springs to
assure that there is no contact between any spring and any part of the
mounted assembly for any possible alignment or position of the installed
inertia block. The clearance between inertia block and floor/plinth shall be
at least 75 mm.
10.7 The Sub-Contractor shall supply and install all welded structural steel,
reinforcement and concrete required for the inertia blocks and shall co-
ordinate his installation with the Sub-Contractor. All installation work
concerning these items are included in this Contract.
11. Ribbed or Waffle Pattern Neoprene Pads
11.1 Minimum 40 mm thick neoprene pads shall be installed where specified.
11.2 For typical applications, neoprene pads should be loaded to a surface weight
of approximately 35,000 kg/m2 (50 lb/in2).
11.3 Where two or more layers of neoprene pads are used, individual layers shall
be separated by 20 SWG thick steel shims.
12. Resilient Hangers
12.1 Resilient hangers are to be used for resilient suspension of pumping mains
pipes.
12.2 For specified deflections in excess of 12 mm, use spring in series with
neoprene type, and for deflections less than 12 mm used neoprene in shear
type hangers.
12.3 During installation, inspection shall be made to ensure that no hangers are
compressed solid or bridged out, and that the stipulated minimum deflection
are achieved.
TS/M/S49/8 2602542S/AC
13. NR Curve Level
The Table below shows the noise level criteria for the various areas. These levels
shall be measured with the room equipped with equipment and be ready to be used.
The equipment in the room shall be in the non-operating mode.
For the auditorium, conference rooms, lecture theatres and other noise sensitive
rooms the volume control dampers for each diffuser shall be located along the run-
out ducts and not at the diffuser plenums.
Table on criteria for interior noise levels in air-conditioning or mechanical

ventilation area due to air conditioning or mechanical ventilation equipment
Areas Criteria for Noise Continuous Intrusion

NR Curve App. DB(A)
Auditorium 30 35
Car parks - 65
Class Rooms/Tutorial Rooms 40 45
Conference Rooms 35 40
Corridors and lobby spaces 45 50
Laboratories 45 50
Lecture Theatres 35 40
Offices and Office areas 40 45
13.1 All noise levels must be measured with a Type 1 sound level meter set at
slow response and placed at 1.5m from the finished floor/ground level. The
measured NC shall be read as NC+5 if the perceived background noise is
tonal, rumbling or groaning.
13.2 The measurements shall be conducted by the Contractor’s

Acoustic/Vibration Consultant and witnessed by the S.O..
14. Contractor’s Acoustic/Vibration Consultant
14.1 The Contractor is required to engage the services of a qualified registered

Acoustic/Vibration Consultant to assist him in the acoustic design and noise
and vibration control of his installations and final noise and vibration
measurements. The Contractor must submit the qualifications and
experience of the registered Acoustic/Vibration Consultant in his tender
submission. The proposed registered Acoustic/Vibration Consultant must be
registered with Singapore National Environment Agency (NEA) and have
considerable relevant experience in noise and micro-vibration design
environments, including Clean Room acoustic designs and requirements. A
list of such projects which the registered Acoustic/Vibration Consultant has
undertaken must be submitted.
TS/M/S49/9 2602542S/AC
14.2 The duty of the registered Acoustic/Vibration Consultant is to assist the
Contractor and to ensure all his M&E installation will not affect the
vibration-controlled floor as specified.
14.3 The S.O. reserves the right not to accept the proposed registered
Acoustic/Vibration Consultant should the submission shows the proposed
does not possess sufficient knowledge or work experience on vibration-
controlled and micro-vibration floor for clean room designs. In such a
situation, the Contractor shall re-propose a registered Acoustic/Vibration
Consultant as instructed.
14.4 The tender submission shall also include:
i. The registered Acoustic/Vibration Consultant’s qualification
ii. The registered Acoustic/Vibration Consultant’s experience in

mechanical and electrical noise and vibration control design
iii. The registered Acoustic/Vibration Consultant’s experience in

vibration-controlled and micro-vibration floor designs. A project list
on such a design must be furnished
iv. The instrumentation the registered Acoustic/Vibration Consultant

will use for the micro-vibration measurements
14.5 Upon the award and prior to all works, the registered Acoustic/Vibration
Consultant is required to assist the Contractor to prepare for submission his
work schedule on acoustic designs and vibration measurements, including: -
i. Method statements on design and programs of noise and vibration

measurements
ii. Proposal of all measurement locations for approval
14.6 The Contractor is required to submit reports on the acoustic and vibration
work and measurements.
14.7 The reports shall compare the measurement results with the specified
criteria and shall propose any necessary rectification work to the installation
if compliance has not been achieved. Any further work including
rectification and additional testing required shall be conducted at the
Contractor’s own expense.
TS/M/S49/10 2602542S/AC
14.8 The reports should compare:
i. The measured noise levels in NC against criteria
ii. The measured vibrations in the Clean Room against criteria in

graphical format.
iii. Boundary noise as stipulated in National Environment Agency noise

pollution control.
TS/M/S49/11 2602542S/AC
SECTION 50 - WATER FLOW METER AND BTU METER
1. General

of the flow meter and BTU calculator units and the associated
accessories.
1.2 All the meters shall be carefully selected and be entirely suitable for
their particular service and position of fittings.
1.3 All the flow meter accuracy shall comply to SS591: long term
measurement of central chilled water system energy efficiency,
ASHRAE guideline 14. ISO4185, ISO 8316, ISO/IEC 17025 and
latest green mark version under building and construction authority,
1.4 All flow meter shall install according to manufacturer recommended

standard on the piping distance requirement.
2. Electromagnetic Inductive Flow meter
The flow meter shall be used at the chilled water/condenser water pipe for
accurate flow measurement for computation of the system enthalpy by the
BAS system.
2.1. Water flow meter shall be of electromagnetic inductive type and

consists of two parts: - primary measuring unit and the converter
(transmitter).
2.2. The primary measuring unit shall have no moving parts or intrusion
into its flow path.
2.3. The tube shall be 304 stainless steel or better, with NBR hard rubber,
or better lining, suitable for flange connection. Hastelloy C276
integrated grounding and measuring electrodes. The primary housing
shall be of at least IP65 protection.
2.4. No electronics part shall be incorporated into the primary housing.

The coil and its insulation shall withstand 80ºC.
2.5. The converter shall provide a D.C. pulse precisely controlled

rectangular wave output for the primary coil. The converter shall be
complete with LCD and keypad and mounted remotely from the
primary housing.
2.6. The converter shall provide with a Modbus card.
TS/M/S50/1 2602542S/AC
2.7. It shall be insensitive to mains frequency interference voltage of all
phase relatively.
2.8. It shall be no zero point drift due to conductive into inhomogenities or

electrode contamination.
2.9. The converter shall have digital range setting by frequency division.
Full interchangeability of component board with retention of accuracy
without board matching is required.
2.10. The converter shall be fully protected against no-load running and to
be short-circuiting proof.
2.11. Flow measurement must always be taken at stabilized current

condition with a stationary magnetic field or as the average of several
reading during a measuring cycle giving automatic zero point
correction and stability.
2.12. It must have an overall accuracy of better than + 0.5% of the

measured flow rate at operating conditions ie 5-14°C for chilled water
and 25-40°C for condenser water application. Repeatability shall be
within 0.1% of actual measured value.
2.13. A wet calibration certificate must be furnished with the flowmeter to

prove that it has been properly calibrated on an approved test rig
certified to international standards.
2.14. The housing and terminal box shall be sealed with insulating material
to prevent condensation. Usage of IP68 submersible kit is a must to
be included.
2.15. It shall be effectively protected from Radio Frequency Interference

(RFI) as prescribed in EN50081-2 and EN50082-2.
2.16. Installation of the electromagnetic flow meter shall strictly adhere to
the recommendation from manufacturer or appointed local agent.
2.17. Sensor prom enables instant measurement from the start of power-up.
User settings automatically stored in the sensor prom. Transmitter
replacement requires no programming. Sensor prom automatically
updates all settings after initalization.
TS/M/S50/2 2602542S/AC
3. Ultrasonic Clamp-on Flowmeter
The flow meter shall be used at the chilled water/condenser water pipe of each
chiller for accurate flow measurement for computation of the system enthalpy
by the BAS System.
3.1. Water flow meter shall be of microprocessor based utilizing ultrasonic

clamp-on transit-time flow measurement technique type and consists
of two parts: - primary measuring unit (transducer pair) and a
converter.
3.2. The primary measuring unit shall be non-invasive and have no moving
parts or intrusion into its flow path.
3.3. The primary measuring unit shall be submersible type suitable for
burial and/or insulation against condensation.
3.4. The flow meter shall have the ability for automatic zero drift correction.
3.5. The flow meter shall have Reynolds number flow profile
compensation in case where minimum straight run pipe of 10D
upstream and 5D downstream is not achievable.
3.6. The transducers shall use ultrasonic coupling compound suitable for
long term installation.
3.7. The primary housing shall be of at least IP65 protection.
3.8. The transducer shall be able to operate in the range from -40°C to
+80°C.
3.9. The converter shall have at least 1MByte data logger for site and data
storage
3.10. The output signal shall be isolated analog 4-20MA capable of driving
1000 ohms resistive loads and one adjustable 0 to 5 KHz digital pulses.
3.11. The flowmeter shall have the ability to indicate flow rate, flow
velocity, total flow, signal strength, liquid sonic velocity, Reynolds
Number and liquid aeration level.
3.12. The flowmeter shall provide self and application diagnostics to isolate
any fault conditions to either equipment failure or abnormal process
conditions.
3.13. The flowmeter shall provide automatic transducer spacing utilizing a

Universal Mounting Frame or mounting track (ruler scales shall not be
acceptable).
TS/M/S50/3 2602542S/AC
3.14. Converter shall have full interchangeability of component board with
retention of accuracy without board matching is required.
3.15. It must have an overall accuracy of ± 0.5…2.0 % of the measured flow

rate at operating conditions i.e. 5-14°C for chilled water and 25-40°C
for condenser water application. However, overall accuracy of 0.5 to 1%
is highly recommended. Repeatability shall be within 0.15 % of actual
measured value.
3.16. The meter shall be capable of measuring flow range of ± 12 m/s bi-
directional with flow sensitivity of 0.0003 m/s flowrate independent.
3.17. A flowmeter factory quality calibration certificate must be furnished

with the flowmeter to prove that it has been properly tested and
conforms to specifications accordingly. All testing and measuring
equipments used for the procedure shall be traceable to international
standards.
3.18. The transducers shall be sealed with insulating material to prevent

condensation and water ingress.
3.19. It shall be effectively immune to Radio Frequency Field and Electro

Magnetic Field as prescribed in EMC Directives 89/336/EEC such as
EN61000-6-2, -4 and LVD Directives 72/23/EC such as IEC61010-1.
3.20. Installation of the ultrasonic clamp-on flow meter shall be strictly

adhered to the recommendation from manufacturer or appointed
authorized local competent agent.
3.21. The flow meter shall provide with a Modbus card.
4. Thermal Energy Metering Device/ Heat meter (BTU METER)
4.1. The heat meters shall be considered as a system and shall calculate the
total heat energy transferred through the heat exchanger, using supply
& return temperature and total flow measurements.
4.2. Temperature measurement shall be made by sensors mounted in both

supply and return flow lines. The sensors shall be dedicated to the heat
meter and not connected to any other instrument. A 2nd sensor or
temperature transmitter may be mounted in the same sensor assembly,
with approval from the site Supervisor.
4.3. The form and style of the temperature sensor shall be suitable for the
heat meter calculation, with low sensitivity to ambient noise and well-
defined temperature relations. Preferred styles are Platinum sensors
100 W and 500 W, 2 or 4 wire configuration. Jumpers at the heat
meter will not be accepted in 4-wire configuration.
TS/M/S50/4 2602542S/AC
4.4. The flow meter location shall be selectable on-site according to
installation possibilities, and the sense of flow (supply or return) shall
be programmable into the energy calculator after installation.
4.5. The flow meter signal shall be pulsed at a rate suitable for the flow rate
and the heat meter, not to exceed 400 Hz. The selection of pulse rate
and width shall be made on site according to the application. Flow
meters with second pulse or 4-20 mA outputs for transmission directly
to the Building Management System (BMS) will be preferred.
4.6. All Flow meter parameters shall be stored in non-volatile memory.
4.7. Factory calibration reports shall be supplied with each Flow meter.
4.8. The installation of the Flow meter shall strictly adhere to the
recommendations from the manufacturer.
4.9. The heat meter shall have the following basic characteristics:
a) Basic functions
i. Optical data reading in accordance with EN 1434
ii. Instantaneous values for energy/volume flow
iii. 24 months’ memory
iv. Error logging with date and time stamp
b) Additional functions
i. Battery back-up of real time clock in the event of power

failure
ii. Output of the last 3 months’ peak power/ flow
iii. Cut-off date output
TS/M/S50/5 2602542S/AC
Calculation of energy shall be approved in accordance with EN 1434
and based on the following formula:
Energy = Volume x (THot - TCold ) x Kfactor (Ti )
where,
Volume: Volume [m³] of a given amount of water
THot : Measured temperature in the flow,
TCold : Measured temperature in the return,
K factor (Ti): Thermal coefficient of water based on the

polynomial associated with Dr. Stuck's tables of enthalpy and
heat content,
Calculation temperature range T: 0 ... 170 °C,
Permissible differential temperature Dt: 3 ... 150 K,
Flow range Qn (or qp, minimum flows according to EN or

OIML standards) to 25000 m3 /h
c) Temperature input
i. Measuring range 0 ... 170 °C, differential temperature 3 ...

170 K
ii. Sensor type Pt 500 / Pt 100 (IEC 751), sensor connection 2

or 4 wire
iii. Measurement resolution 0.01 °C
TS/M/S50/6 2602542S/AC
d) Flow input
i. Pulse/frequency <400 Hz
ii. Pulse ON time >0.5 ms
iii. Pulse OFF time <1.5 ms
e) Network
All BTU meters shall be linked to each other via a MOD-BUS

and linked to the BAS system.
4.10. A/D converter of the BTU meter should have a minimum resolution of
16-bit. This applies to direct data acquisition from the BTU meter
TS/M/S50/7 2602542S/AC
SECTION 51 - DIGITAL POWER METER
1. General

of the power meter, current transformer and the associated accessories.
1.2 All the power meter shall be carefully selected and be entirely suitable
for their particular services.
1.3 All the power meter and current transformer accuracy and testing shall
comply to SS591 long term measurement of central chilled water
system energy efficiency, IEEE 519, IEC 61869 Part 2, IEC 61869 Part
3, IEC 61869 Part 5, IEC 62053 Part 22 and latest green mark version
under building and construction authority,
1.4 All power meter shall install according to manufacturer recommended

standard and commission by competent person for all CT ratio setting
requirement.
2. Digital Power Meter Unit
2.1. General Provisions
2.1.1 All setup parameters required by the Power Meter shall be

stored in nonvolatile memory and retained in the event of a
control power interruption.
2.1.2 The Power Meter may be applied in three-phase, three- or

four-wire systems.
2.1.3 The Power Meter shall be capable of being applied without

modification at nominal frequencies of 50Hz.
2.1.4 All Power meters shall be linked to each other via a MOD-
BUS and linked to the BAS system
TS/M/S51/1 2602542S/AC
2.2. Measured values
The Power Meter shall provide the following, true RMS metered
quantities:
2.2.1 Real-Time Readings
a) Current (per phase & neutral, 3 phase average )
b) Voltage (line-line, line-neutral, 3 phase average)
c) Real, Reactive & Apparent Power (Per-Phase, 3-Phase

Total)
d) Power Factor, True & Displacement (Per-Phase, 3-

Phase Total)
e) Frequency
f) THD (Current and Voltage)
2.2.2 Energy Readings
a) Accumulated Energy - Real kWh, Reactive kVarh,

Apparent KVAh (Signed/Absolute)
b) Reactive Energy by Quadrant
2.2.3 Demand Readings
a) Demand Current Calculations - peak, present, running

average, last completed interval (per-phase, 3-phase
avg, Neutral)
b) Demand Real, Reactive & Apparent Power

Calculations - peak, present, running average, last
completed interval (3-Phase Total)
c) Average Power Factor Calculations, Demand

Coincident (3-Phase Total)
TS/M/S51/2 2602542S/AC
2.2.4 Power Analysis Values
a) THD – Voltage, Current (3-Phase, Per-Phase, Neutral)
b) Displacement Power Factor (Per-Phase, 3-Phase)
c) Fundamental Voltage & Current, Magnitude and Angle

(Per-Phase)
d) Fundamental Real Power (Per-Phase, 3-Phase)
e) Fundamental Reactive Power (Per-Phase)
f) Harmonic Power (Per-Phase, 3-Phase)
g) Phase Rotation
h) Unbalance (Current and Voltage)
i) Each harmonic Magnitudes & Angles for Current and

Voltages (Per Phase) up to the 31st Harmonic.
2.3. Demand
All power demand calculations shall use any one of the following
calculation methods, selectable by the user:
2.3.1 Thermal demand using a sliding window updated every

second for the present demand and at the end of the interval
for the last interval. The window length shall be user
selectable from 1-60 minutes in 1 minute increments.
2.3.2 Block interval, with optional sub-intervals. The window

length shall be user selectable from 1-60 minutes in 1 minute
intervals. The user shall be able to set the sub-interval length
from 1-60 minutes in 1 minute intervals. The following
Block methods shall be available:
a) Sliding Block that calculates demand every second

with intervals less than 15 minutes and every 15
seconds with an interval between 15 and 60 minutes.
b) Fixed Block that calculates demand at the end of the

interval
c) Rolling Block that a subinterval is configured.

Demand is calculated at the end of each subinterval
and displays at the end of the interval.
TS/M/S51/3 2602542S/AC
2.3.3 Demand can be calculated using a Synchronization signal:
a) Demand can be synchronized to an input pulse from an

external source. The demand period begins with every
pulse. A synchronized input can be configured to
either a block or rolling block calculation
b) Demand can be synchronized to a communication

signal. This can be configured to either a block or
rolling block calculation
c) Demand can be synchronized to the clock in the Power

Meter.
2.4. Sampling
2.4.1 The current and voltage signals shall be digitally sampled at a

rate high enough to provide true rms accuracy to the 63rd
harmonic (fundamental of 50 Hz).
2.4.2 The Power Meter shall provide continuous sampling at a

minimum of up to 128 samples/cycle, simultaneously on all
voltage and current channels in the meter.
2.5. Minimum and Maximum Values
2.5.1 The Power Meter shall provide minimum and maximum

values for the following parameters:
a) Voltage line-line, line-neutral
b) Current per phase
c) Voltage Unbalance line-line, line-neutral
d) Power Factor, true & displacement
e) Real, Reactive & Apparent Power Total
f) THD Voltage & Current
g) Frequency
TS/M/S51/4 2602542S/AC
2.5.2 For each min/max value listed above, the Power Meter shall
record the following attributes:
a) Date/Time of the min/max value
b) Min/Max. Value
c) Phase of recorded Min/Max (for multi-phase

quantities)
d) Minimum and maximum values shall be available via

communications and display.
2.6. Harmonic Resolution
2.6.1 Advanced harmonic information shall be available via the

Power Meter. This shall include the calculation of the
harmonic magnitudes and angles for each phase voltage and
current through the 31st harmonic.
2.6.2 Harmonic information shall be available for all three phases,

current and voltage, plus the residual current. To ensure
maximum accuracy for analysis, the current and voltage
information for all phases shall be obtained simultaneously
from the same cycle.
2.6.3 The harmonic magnitude shall be reported as a percentage of

the fundamental or as a percentage of the rms values, as
selected by the user.
2.7. Current Inputs
2.7.1 The Power Meter shall accept current inputs from standard
instrument current transformers with 5 amp secondary output
and shall have a metering range of 0-10 amps with the
following withstand currents: 15 amp continuous, 50 amp 10
sec per hour, 500 amp 1 sec per hour.
2.7.2 Current transformer primaries through 327 kA shall be

supported.
TS/M/S51/5 2602542S/AC
2.8. Voltage Inputs
2.8.1 The Power Meter shall allow connection to circuits up to 600

volts AC without the use of potential transformers. The
Power Meter shall also accept voltage inputs from standard
instrument potential transformers with 110 volt secondary
output. The Power Meter shall support PT primaries through
3.2 MV.
2.8.2 The nominal full scale input of the Power Meter shall be 347
Volts AC L-N, 600 Volts AC L-L. The meter shall accept a
metering over-range of 50%. The input impedance shall be
greater than 2 Ohm.
2.9. Accuracy
2.9.1 The Power Meter shall comply with ANSI C12.20 Class 0.5
and IEC 60687 Class 0.5 for revenue meters.
2.9.2 The Power Meter shall be accurate to 0.25% of reading +0

.025% of full scale for power and energy. Voltage and
current shall be accurate to 0.075% of reading plus 0.025% of
full scale. Power factor metering shall be accurate to ±0.002
from 0.5 leading to 0.5 lagging. Frequency metering shall be
accurate ±0.01 Hz at 45-67 Hz.
2.9.3 These accuracies shall be maintained for both light and full
loads.
2.9.4 No annual calibration shall be required to maintain this

accuracy.
2.10. Input / Output
2.10.1 The Power Meter shall supply 1 digital input and 1 digital
solid state output/KY pulse output as standard.
2.10.2 The Power Meter shall be capable of operating a solid state

KY output relay to provide output pulses for a user definable
increment of reported energy. Minimum relay life shall be in
excess of one billion operations. The standard KY output
shall operate up to 240 volt AC, 300 volt DC, 96mA max,
and provide 3750 volt rms isolation.
2.10.3 The Power Meter shall support multiple input/output

including digital inputs, mechanical relay outputs. This I/O
shall be in the form of module that can be field installable.
TS/M/S51/6 2602542S/AC
2.10.4 The digital inputs shall have four operating modes:
a) Normal mode for simple on/off digital inputs
b) Demand Interval Synch Pulse to accept a demand

synch pulse from a utility demand meter
c) Conditional Energy Control input to control

conditional energy accumulation.
2.10.5 The optional relay output module shall provide a load voltage
range from 20 to 240 VAC or from 20 to 30 VDC. It shall
support a load current of 2A.
2.11. Logging
2.11.1 The Power Meter shall provide for onboard data logging.
Each Power Meter shall be able to log data, alarms and
events, and waveforms. The Meter shall have 80kb of on-
board nonvolatile memory. Logged information to be stored
in each Power Meter include the following:
a) Billing Log: The Power Meter shall store in non-

volatile memory a configurable billing log that is
updated every 15 minutes. Data shall be recorded by
month, day and 15 minute interval. The log shall
contain 24 months of monthly data, 32 days of daily
data and between 2 to 52 days of 15 minute interval
data depending on the number of quantities selected.
b) Custom Data Logs: The Power Meter shall provide 1

data. Each entry shall be date and time stamped to the
second. The log entry shall hold data of up to 96
parameters each. In addition, it shall be possible for a
user to define an event. Data logs can be configured
by users to be Fill & Hold or Circular (FIFO).
c) Alarm Log. This log shall contain time, date, event

information, and coincident information for each user
defined alarm or event.
2.11.2 The Power Meter shall have default values for the data log
loaded at the factory and begin on device power up.
TS/M/S51/7 2602542S/AC
2.12. Alarming
2.121 Alarm events shall be user definable.
2.12.2 The user shall be able to define over 50 alarm conditions.
2.12.3 The following shall be available as alarm events:
a) Over/under current & voltage
b) Current & voltage imbalance
c) Phase loss, current & voltage
d) Over kW Demand
e) Phase reversal
f) Digital Input OFF/ON
g) End of incremental energy interval
h) End of demand interval
2.12.4 For each over/under metered value alarm, the user shall be
able to define a pick-up, drop-out, and delay.
2.12.5 There shall be four alarm severity levels in order make it

easier for the user to respond to the most important events
first.
2.12.6 Indication of an alarm condition shall be given on the front

panel.
2.13. Feature Addition
It shall be possible to field upgrade the firmware in the Power Meter to

enhance functionality. These firmware upgrades shall be done through
the communication connection and shall allow upgrades of individual
meters or groups. No disassembly or changing of integrated circuit
chips shall be required and it will not be necessary to de-energize the
circuit or the equipment to perform the upgrade.
2.14. Control Power
The Power Meter shall operate properly over a wide range of control
power including 90-457 VAC or 100-300 VDC.
TS/M/S51/8 2602542S/AC
2.15. Communications
The Power Meter shall communicate via RS-485 Modbus protocol or

other protocol subject to the approval of the S.O..
2.16. Display
2.16.1 The Power Meter display shall also allow the user to select a
date/time format.
2.16.2 The Power Meter display shall be back lit LCD for easy
viewing, display shall also be anti-glare and scratch resistant
2.16.3 The Display shall be capable of allowing the user to view

four values on one screen at the same time. A summary
screen shall also be available to allow the user to view a
snapshot of the system.
2.16.4 The Power Meter display shall provide local access to the
following metered quantities:
a) Current, per phase rms, 3-phase average and neutral (if

applicable)
b) Voltage, phase-to-phase, phase-to-neutral, and 3-phase

average (phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral)
c) Real power, per phase and 3-phase total
d) Reactive power, per phase and 3-phase total
e) Apparent power, per phase and 3-phase total
f) Power factor, 3-phase total and per phase
g) Frequency
h) Demand current, per phase and three phase average
i) Demand real power, three phase total
TS/M/S51/9 2602542S/AC
j) Demand apparent power, three phase total
k) Accumulated Energy, (MWh and MVARh)
l) THD, current and voltage, per phase
2.16.5 Reset of the following electrical parameters shall also be

allowed from the Power Meter display:
a) Peak demand current
b) Peak demand power (kW) and peak demand apparent

power (kVA)
c) Energy (MWh) and reactive energy (MVARh)
2.16.6 Setup for system requirements shall be allowed from the

Power Meter display. Setup provisions shall include:
a) CT rating
b) PT rating
c) System type [three-phase, 3-wire] [three-phase, 4-wire]

d) Watt-hours per pulse
2.16.7 The individual power meter for each equipment rack supply
need not be equipped with its own display.
TS/M/S51/10 2602542S/AC
3. Current Transformer (CT)
3.1 Current transformers necessary for the operation of instruments and

meters shall be of "straight through" type, with not less than 15VA
burden and accuracy of class 0.5 for Digital power meter/Energy
meter/KWH meter, Class 1 for ammeter and class 5P20 for protection
to BS 3938:1973.
3.2 Current transformers shall be adequately rated in V.A. to carry the

summation of all V.A. burdens of connected loads, and shall be
capable of carrying currents of the corresponding circuit breakers and
fuses. They shall be capable of operation, without damage, with open
circuited secondary and full load current flowing in the primary. They
shall comply with the latest EMA’s requirements.
3.3 Current transformers shall be adequately supported and installed as to

permit easy access and shall be readily replaceable, if necessary,
without dismantling the adjacent equipment.
3.4 Current transformers shall comply with B.S. 3938 or IEC 185. They
shall be manufactured from high impact flame retardant moulded cases
suitable for mounting on 105o C bus bars and to IP40.
3.5 All current transformers shall have the following characteristics :-
a) Rated 660Vac max.

b) Dielectric strength --- 2.5 kV/min.
c) Temperature -20o C to +70o C ambient
d) Short circuit thermal current (Ith) --- 60 times rated primary
current for 1 sec.
e) Rated dynamic current --- 2.55 short circuit thermal current
(Ith)
TS/M/S51/11 2602542S/AC
SECTION 55 - DEHUMIDIFIER HEAT PIPES
1. General.
1.1. This section covers the supply, delivery, installation, testing,

commissioning and fifteen (15) months free maintenance and
warranty of the dehumidifier heat pipes in the air handling units
(AHU) and the associated accessories.
1.2. AHU shall be equipped with dehumidifier heat pipes, where

specified in the Drawings to pre-cool the air and reheat the air in a
wrap-around configuration applied to a supply cooling coil as
specified in equipment schedule.
1.3. The pre-cool section shall be located immediately before the

cooling coil and the reheat section immediately after. Both heat
pipe sections shall be integral to the equipment cabinet.
1.4. The interconnecting piping between heat pipes section shall be

located at the opposite side from chilled water connections and
enclosed within a rigid frame.
1.5. For installation, the interconnecting pipe work section shall

preferable to be located within the assembled access coil section.
1.6. The dehumidifier heat pipes shall be factory fabricated, tested and
of efficient design and construction. The dehumidifier heat pipe
shall be draw-through type, shall be supplied and installed together
with the AHU reference to the tender drawings and details as
described in the Schedule of Equipment Data. Each dehumidifier
heat pipes in the AHU shall consist of but not be limited to the
following components:
.
prefabricated modular sandwiched panels with rigid
extruded aluminium frame (complete with insulation) to
house the dehumidifier heat pipes
b) coil section with cooling coil of copper tubes and aluminium

fins.
c) insulated grade 304 stainless steel drain pans
d) removable panels and access door for servicing.
e) other accessories necessary for operation.
TS/M/S55/1 2602542S/AC
2. Dehumidifier Heat Pipe
The heat pipes shall be manufactured by a specialist sub-Sub-Contractor

with at least 10 years of proven track record and experience in this product.
The heat pipes shall be a passive device with no electrical consumption

required for its operation.
Heat pipe manufacturer shall have published design and sizing software
that predicts heat pipe performance. Performance shall be based on
empirical and verifiable results.
Heat pipes shall be U-shaped unit type. The assembly will consist of 2 heat
exchanger coil blocks mounted within a single sheet metal framework for
ease of installation.
The assembly shall be U-shaped; with identically sized front and rear
blocks which constitute pre-cool and reheat section of the heat pipe
assembly respectively. The separation between the coil blocks shall be
sufficient to provide clearance on either side of the cooling coil, and shall
be handed to suit the installation.
The heat pipe shall have interconnecting pipe work linking them together
on the opposite side of the coil from the cooling coil connections. These
will be encased in a rigid box to provide stiffness and to protect the pipe
work during installation.
The cooling coil under operation shall provide a temperature differential

enabling the heat pipe assembly to transfer sensible heat from up to
downstream of the cooling coil, thus enhancing the capacity of the cooling
coil to dehumidify, and saving energy in terms of cooling capacity and
reheat requirements.
3. Performance
The heat pipe unit shall provide pre-cool and reheat capacity in compliance
with maximum performance criteria laid down elsewhere in the equipment
schedule under design conditions. Airside pressure drop shall be as given
on the specification/schedule or as otherwise specified.
TS/M/S55/2 2602542S/AC
4. Construction
The heat pipe shall comprise pre-cool and reheat sections constructed of
copper tubes mechanically expanded in continuous plate “sine wave” type
fins carried within rigid framework. Due to condensation on the fin, the fin
surface must be constructed vertically so the condensate can adequately
drain and not block the airflow.
The tubes shall be of seamless copper of specific internal design to provide

enhanced heat transfer and permanently expanded into the fin collars to
form a rigid continuous contact under all operating conditions. Wall
thickness shall be a minimum of 0.40mm. The tube pattern shall be a
staggered equilateral design at 31.75 mm center-to-center and the number
of rows shall be as specified to provide the required performance.
The heat pipes shall be interconnected with circuitry as specified from

design criteria and individually processed, charged with an HFC heat
transfer fluid, and hermetically sealed and tested. Any threaded or flared
connections, even with a cap, shall cause the equipment to be removed and
replaced at the Sub-Contractor’s expense.
The heat transfer fluid shall be classified as Safety Group A1 in

ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15.
The fin plate shall be of aluminum 0.15mm thickness.
The fin surface shall be of sine wave form with straight edge to produce
maximum heat transfer at lowest air pressure drop for heat pipe
applications. Fin density shall be as specified to provide the required
performance. Performance shall be verifiable to ENV 1216.
The tube endplates, sideplates and other associated framework elements

shall be in a minimum of 1.5mm thick hot dipped galvanized sheet steel.
Drain holes are to be provided at the downstream edges of the heat pipes.
Condensate removal from the pre-cool section (where this occurs) shall be
provided for within the equipment cabinet by others unless otherwise
specified.
TS/M/S55/3 2602542S/AC
5. Installation
The heat pipe shall be incorporated in the design of the air handling unit to
ensure proper integration. It shall be installed by the air handling unit
manufacturer during the assembly of the equipment in accordance with the
requirements of the heat pipe manufacturer. The heat pipe manufacturer
representative shall confirm proper installation.
Upon completion of installation, manufacturer shall check to ensure no air

bypass within the cabinet and proper sealing and insulation.
The manufacturer shall provide a 5 year parts warranty.
TS/M/S55/4 2602542S/AC
SECTION 56 - FIRE RESISTANT SYSTEM
1. General
1.1. This section cover the supply, delivery, installation, testing,

commissioning and fifteen (15) months free maintenance and
warranty for fire resistant cladding system for air-conditioning and
mechanical ventilation system as specified in the drawing
1.2. The system of standard and modified constructions shall be tested

and modifications assessed and listed under the Product Listing
Scheme (PLS).
1.3. The board should preferably be Green Label certified by the

Singapore Environment Council.
1.4. The fire resistance cladding system shall comply to the following
standard:
a) BS 476: Part 20 Fire tests on building materials and

structures. Method for determination of the fire resistance of
elements of construction.
b) BS 476: Part 24 Fire tests on building materials and

structures. Method for determination of the fire resistance of
ventilation ducts
c) BS 5234: Part 2 Partitions (including matching linings).

Specification for performance requirements for strength and
robustness including methods of test
d) BS 5588: Part 5 Fire precautions in the design, construction

and use of buildings. Access and facilities for fire-fighting,
e) BS 9999: Code of practice for fire safety in the design,

management and use of buildings
f) EN 13501-1 EN 13501-1+A1 Fire classification of

construction products and building elements - Part 1:
Classification using test data from reaction to fire tests
g) BS EN 1366-3 : Fire Resistance Tests for Services

Installation - Penetration Seal.
h) BS EN 1336-4 : Fire Resistance Tests for Services

Installation- Linear Joint Seals
i) ISO 834: Fire resistance tests - Elements of Building

Construction.
TS/M/S56/1 2602542S/AC
j) ISO 6944: Fire resistance tests -- Ventilation ducts
k) ISO TR 1896 Products in fibre-reinforced cement -- Non-

combustible fibre-reinforced boards of calcium silicate or
cement for insulation and fire protection.
l) ASTM D5116-90: Standard Guide for Small-Scale

Environmental Chamber Determinations of Organic
Emissions from Indoor Materials/Products.
m) ASTM E119 : Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of

Building Construction and Materials. The Standard will not
be acceptable for load-bearing elements.
n) ASTM E814 : Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of

Penetration Fire stop Systems
1.5. The manufacturers shall be certified to ISO 9001 for the products
offered.
1.6. The original material supplier shall submit proof of relationship

with the manufacturing entity, and the manufacturer’s
internationally recognized Production Quality and Environmental
Control Certifications. Where the material is produced under a
contract manufacturer, documentation on the original material
supplier’s quality control shall be submitted for verification. Where
required, an on-site factory audit shall be arranged.
1.7. Sub-Contractor shall submit all the necessary documents, valid

system Certificate of Conformity (CoC) accordance to BS 476: Part
24, sample prototype verifiable to laboratory test setup, shop
drawing with installation details, and mock up.
TS/M/S56/2 2602542S/AC
2. Materials
2.1. System
a) The fire rated duct shall be a composite system cladded over

the steel duct. The system shall comprise fire rated
board fixed to galvanised steel framing consisting of
collar galvanised steel channel and continuous corner
angles minimum L-50x50x0.6mm, transverse board joints
shall be coincided with steel channel collar, all secured in
place encompassing the steel duct with M4 self-tapping
screws at 200mm centres and the cavity between board and
steel duct filled with mineral wool of 100kg/m3 density.
b) Minimum material thicknesses:
Fire resistant Board Channel size Mineral wool

rating thickness* thickness
2-hour 15mm U-50x50x0.6mm 50mm
4-hour 25mm U-100x50x0.6mm 100mm
c) The board butt-joints shall be treated by either sealing

with approved acrylic fire rated sealant or protected with
approved cover strip 100mm wide x 9mm thick. The
board unsupported area between steel supports shall not
exceed 1.5m2.
d) When the duct passes through compartment wall, approved

collar150mm wide by thickness of fire resistant boards shall
be installed at penetration junction of the wall/floor.
e) The steel rod supports if unprotected shall be installed

not exceeding 1220mm centres and suitably sized so that it
does not exceed the permissible tensile of 10N/mm2 2 hours
fire resistance or 6N/mm2 for 4 hours fire resistance.
f) The entire construction including steel support framings,

hanging bracket, hanger size and interval shall be suitably
sized to the correspondence duct shall adhere strictly to the
fire test prototype and allowable modifications of the
manufacturer’s specifications to achieve performance
criteria of stability, integrity and insulation for internal and
external fire exposure in accordance with BS 476: Part 24.
g) The system construction shall include an approved access

hatch construction of the same fire resistance to facilitate
maintenance and inspection.
TS/M/S56/3 2602542S/AC
h) Gaps and imperfections of fit, junction between the structure
and board shall be duly sealed with approved acrylic fire
rated sealant.
i) Where required the boards’ joints may be concealed with

joint compound and joint finishing tapes to create the desire
flush seamless finish to receive architectural finishes.
Otherwise joints and screw heads may be left unfinished.
2.2. Fire rated board
a) The fire rated board shall be asbestos-free, fibre / autoclaved

calcium silicate boards and not affected by moisture. Upon
drying, the board shall regain all its original properties and
strength.
b) The fire rated board shall be tested for strength and

robustness in accordance to BS 5234: Part 2 and complying
with BS 5588: Part 5 Appendix A and ISO TR 1896 for
bending strength and moisture movement, all in order to
comply with the dry construction requirements for
substituting masonry construction as stipulated in the Fire
Code.
c) The technical properties of the boards shall be the following

as minimum:
Nominal Density 975kg/m3
Alkalinity pH 12
Modulus of Elasticity 4995N/mm2 (longitudinal),
(EN310:1993) 4389/mm2 (transverse)
Flexural Strength F(EN 10 N/mm2 (longitudinal),
310: 1993) 6N/mm2 (transverse)
Tensile Strength T (EN 7.16 N/mm2 (longitudinal),
310: 1993) 4.94N/mm2 (transverse)
Thermal Conductivity 0.242 W/mok (ASTM
(40oC) C518:1991)
Coefficient of Expansion 6.4 x 10-6 m/Mk
Nominal moisture
6%
movement at EMC
Meet requirement for ISO TR 1896 for Bending Test
(Clause 5.4, 5.4.1 & 5.4.2)
Meet requirement for ISO TR 1896 for Moisture

Movement Test (Clause 5.9 & 6.8)
TS/M/S56/4 2602542S/AC
2.3. Fire Stop Materials
a) All electrical, telecoms and services duct openings,

including cable/pipe penetrations in floors and walls shall be
sealed with approved type firestop sealing compounds /
systems, applied in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
b) Openings for pipes that are greater than 150 mm diameter

shall be sealed with intumescent fire prevention mastic,
applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The
opening shall be prepared to accept a layer of compressed
"Rockwool" inserted inwards leaving a depth of 50mm by at
least 25mm width (thickness) for fire sealant to be properly
applied over the mineral wool, trowelled smooth at the top
to flush with the finished floor level, thus achieving a
minimum fire resistance of 2 hours.
c) Unless otherwise stated, the materials must be capable of

providing at least 2 hours fire resistance unless otherwise
stated, tested and certified to BS 476 Part 20 and approved
by the Local Authorities.
d) The material shall be capable of adhering onto the concrete

structure, forming an effective and tight seal against both
fire and smoke/fume.
e) A suitably qualified, experienced and competent applicator

shall be engaged to carry out the installation. The applicator
must be conversant with both the material used and the
application to be carried out. The Sub-Contractor shall use
only skilled and experienced workmen for installation of
fire stop materials.
3. Installation
3.1. All services penetration through the fire rated enclosure shall be
sealed with approved fire stopping systems, including and not
limited to the following:
a) General non-combustible buildings services – approved

PLS listed fire stopping systems
b) Combustible pipes – approved PLS listed collars
TS/M/S56/5 2602542S/AC
3.2. Installation work shall be carried out by manufacturer’s trained
installers. Proof of training shall be provided.
3.3. During construction, on-site installation audit shall be conducted by

manufacturer’s authorised auditors.
3.4. Manufacturer shall check the fire resistant cladding system and issue
certificate of proper installation.
3.5. The completed installations shall be issued with Declaration of

Compliance (DoC) document certifying that the construction has
been installed according to the system prototype and allowable
modifications. The document shall be endorsed by a Professional
Engineer in the mechanical discipline in addition to the
manufacturer’s endorsement.
3.6. All the labelling and identification per SCDF requirements
3.7. Sub-contractor shall submit as-built drawings with the fire rated duct
system highlighted clouded
TS/M/S56/6 2602542S/AC
SECTION 60 – INTELLIGENT BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
1.0 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION
This section covers the supply, delivery, installation, testing, commissioning

and fifteen (15) months free maintenance and warranty of intelligent building
management system (IBMS).
The Sub Contractor shall be supplied, installed, supervised and commissioned

with a minimum 5 year of proven track record and suitable references of
systems installed.
The IBMS works will consist of four major components:
a. Integration with BAS (Air-conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation

System) system, Fire Protection System, Plumbing Sanitary System,
User Equipment, Electrical System, CCTV System, Lift System,
Security System, Car park barrier system and Lighting Management
System for real-time M&E system services
b. Provision of the Facilities Booking application / Building management

facility applications and SMS alarm notification systems
c. Other support systems: control room, network equipment, backup

system within the IBMS Control room (located at FCC Room and
Ventus, University of Campus Infrastructure ).
d. Integration to Wireless Mesh Network Lighting Management system

and provision for third party software interfacing
The IBMS shall include the following features and support the following:
a. Open, industry standards

b. Uniform user interfaces
c. Communication / integration between building control systems and
high level building applications
d. Controlled access to the Building Control System by users from other
offices
e. A high-level of security, integrity and fault tolerance
f. Adequate levels of redundancy and recovery facilities
g. Centralized graphics for all graphical applications
h. There shall be only one location for data sources
TS/M/S60/1 2602542S/AC
2.0 STANDARD
The system shall comply to following standards:
a) Singapore Standard CP 5, Code of practice for electrical Installations
b) Singapore Building Control Authority: latest BCA Green Mark Certification

Standard
c) ANSI/ASHRAE 135 BACnet - A Data Communication Protocol for Building

Automation and Control Networks
d) ASHRAE. Standard 135 : A Data Communication Protocol for Building

Automation and Control Networks (BACnet);
e) International Organization for Standardization ISO/IEC 9075-9: Information

Technology - Database Languages SQL – Part 9 : Management of External
Data (SQL/MED);
f) TIA/EIA 232-F Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Circuit
Terminating Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Exchange;
g) TIA/EIA 485-A : Electrical Characteristics of Generators and Receivers for

use in Balanced Digital Multipoint Systems;
h) TIA/EIA 568-C.1 : Commercial Building telecommunications Cabling

Standard;
i) Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol of Defence Advanced

Research Project Agency (TCP/IP);
j) International Organization for Standardization ISO/IEC 8802-3 : Standard for

Ethernet.
TS/M/S60/2 2602542S/AC
3.0 INTEGRATION
The functional requirement of the IBMS includes the seamless integration of

high-level Management Applications, User and Building Management
Applications through a common Graphical User Interface. The Sub-Contractor
shall allow the controlling and modifying permitted parameters of the Building
Control services and shall inter-operate with Management and User
applications.
a) The Sub-Contractor shall coordinate with the respective M&E

Contractor with regard to real-time information (point values),
graphics, point database, real time data, alarm management and any
other necessary integration requirements. For example, when there is
an alarm on one of the monitored device, the IBMS operator shall be
able to navigate from the alarm screen (under BAS) to the device
maintenance database (under facilities management) for further action.
b) Systems that are directly integrated by IBMS, such as lift system, the
alarm from these systems shall be sent to the IBMS alarm system to
provide integrated alarm control.
3.1 M&E System Integration
a) BAS Contractor will implement a network links system for the

control and management of major M&E systems. The IBMS
system shall interface with this BAS system to allow the IBMS
operator to also control and manage the M&E systems.
b) The BAS will not interfere with lift system, the security /
CCTV system and the Lighting Management System. The Sub-
Contractor shall develop the interface with these systems.
c) The Sub-Contractor shall refer to the functional point schedule

provided in the Tender drawing and document. The Sub-
Contractor shall provide necessary programming works and co-
ordination with the respective M&E Contractor to provide the
functions as specified in the point schedule. The Sub-
Contractor shall be responsible to co-ordinate work and exact
quantity of all the M&E control and monitoring points required
in IBMS and submit for clearance before system
implementation.
d) All alarms from M&E systems will be sent back to the IBMS
alarm monitoring workstation. The Sub-Contractor shall
coordinate with the respective vendor on management of
alarms. The IBMS contractor shall supply the paging and SMS
gateway.
TS/M/S60/3 2602542S/AC
e) The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible to supply a complete
and operational interface to all the necessary subsystems. This
shall be achieved with full coordination and cooperation with
the BAS contractor and other M&E sub-contractors.
f) The Sub-Contractor shall have the responsibility to provide a

coordinated solution to the interface required and agreed during
the implementation of the Sub-Contract.
g) Generally the interface between all systems shall be by drivers

communicating directly to subsystems via the Gigabit Ethernet
LAN and also provision for network ports to be connected to
the campus IT network.
h) The architecture and the drivers used shall be open standards in

that any M&E subsystems that use any one of the above
protocols can be added to the IBMS without any program
customization required.
i) All functionality between systems shall appear transparent and

automatic when displayed and monitored or activated at the
IBMS consoles. The Sub-Contractor shall be required to co-
ordinate with all system providers to ensure that all interfaces
are provided which gives the full-required functionality.
j) The Sub-Contractor shall be required to complete a full

functional test between all accessible system elements provided
by others and the IBMS system.
k) The Sub-Contractor shall provide sufficient equipment racks

for its own systems and coordinate with other third party
vendors to supply the racks to them.
l) The Sub-Contractor shall provide the physical LAN cabling

connection ports to the security system, CCTV, and all other
systems that require interfacing to IBMS.
m) The interfaces between the device objects and any device

controllers / PC shall use only the recognized standard
protocols approved by the Consultant. Exceptions to this
specification shall be obtained from the consultant. The device
controller / PC shall be able to run on Gigabit Ethernet LAN
using one of the authorized international standard protocols.
TS/M/S60/4 2602542S/AC
n) For IBMS interface, the Sub-Contractor shall work with the
respective M&E contractor to:
§ Use the same set of graphical presentations e.g. floor
plans, drawings
§ To use a single database for point schedules
§ Synchronize all interface information
In the case where single graphics or single source of point

schedule database is not achievable, then a mirroring technique
shall be used to achieve the same purpose.
o) The IBMS shall be able to read and write data to selected points
by sending the requests directly to the respective M&E system.
p) The user interfaces shall base on a common graphical platform.

The system shall be able to process all types of common
graphical data formats such as .DWG, BMP, PCX, TARGA,
DIB, JPEG. On clicking to the respective point in the graphics,
relevant data such as device description, type and value shall be
displayed.
q) Multiple instances of the M&E objects shall be able to replicate

across the network for different users.
3.2 Systems Integrated
a) For M&E systems under the control of BAS, the interfacing

will be between the BAS server and the IBMS system. For
systems that are not under the BAS control, the integration
shall be via interface between the system controller / gateway
and the IBMS. The integration of the M&E systems shall be as
follows:
Systems controlled by BAS
§ ACMV Systems
§ Electrical System
§ Plumbing & Sanitary System
§ User Equipment
Systems with Direct Interfacing
§ Lift System
§ Lighting Management System
§ Security / CCTV System
§ Car Park Barrier System
§ Fire Alarm System
TS/M/S60/5 2602542S/AC
3.3 Interpretation of Points Schedules
a) The IBMS shall be able to interface with the BAS system to

allow the IBMS to control and monitor the status and values of
points provided with the various M&E systems. The Main
Contractor will provide a full list of hardware points to the Sub-
Contractor.
b) The Sub-Contractor shall use the same set of GUI that is

provided by the BAS and the respective M&E Contractor.
3.4 Integration with CCTV System
a) The IBMS shall interface to the CCTV system (3rd party) via
LAN. The Security Contractor shall provide the necessary LAN
connection to facilitate the connection of the CCTV system to
the IBMS LAN via its network.
b) The Sub-Contractor shall be required to have the capability of

selecting up to four CCTV video channels to any IBMS
workstation. The Security Contractor will be required to
provide up to 4 video feeds from the CCTV system to IBMS.
3.5 Integration with Lifts (Lift Supervisory System)
a) The IBMS shall communicate with the lift system through a

high level interface. The interface will provide operational
status, monitoring and control information related to the lifts to
IBMS. The Sub-Contractor shall provide the interface protocol
for its own gateway and all provide all communications and
cabling connections to the lift server.
b) Each lift shall provide the following functions via the IBMS
server. For functions that cannot be provided by the lift system,
they can be omitted. The Sub-Contractor has to inform the
Consultants during detail design stage those functions that
cannot be accomplished.
§ The location of each lift shall be nominated

§ The location of any lift shall be set
§ The operational status of the lift shall be shown
§ The operational status of the lift shall be able to be set
§ The homing floor of the lifts shall be shown
§ The homing floors of the lifts shall be able to be set
§ The load capacity of the lifts shall be displayed
§ The current load of the lifts shall be displayed
§ The door status of the lift shall be displayed
§ The access privileges to the lift and floors shall be
viewed
TS/M/S60/6 2602542S/AC
§ The access privileges to the lift and floors shall be able
to be set
§ The hall calls and floor selections of the lift shall be
monitored
§ The direction of the lifts traveling shall be displayed
§ The wait times of the lifts shall be monitored
§ The wait time of the lifts shall be able to be set
§ The floor allocation of the lifts shall be determined
§ The floor allocation of the lift shall be able to be set
§ The emergency stop status of the lift shall be monitored
§ The consumption of the lift shall be monitored (by
meter monitoring system)
§ The running statistics of the lift shall be monitored
§ The alarm status of the lift shall be monitored
§ The emergency power status of the lift shall be
monitored
c) The IBMS shall provide real time animated graphic

representation showing the movement and status of all lifts.
3.6 Integration to Lighting Management System
a) The Lighting management system shall be microprocessor

type; Sub-Contractor shall include the cost but not limit to the
following interface works:
§ Command & schedule lighting functions (On/Off)

§ Command lighting for dimming functions
3.7 Integration to Fire Alarm System
a) The Fire Alarm system shall be addressable type; the Sub-

Contractor shall include the cost but not limit to the following
interface works:
§ Monitoring of smoke detectors, heat detectors, call

points, flow switch
§ The floor allocation of the detectors shall be determined
§ Monitoring of fire pumps status, fire tank levels
3.8 Integration to Plumbing and Sanitary (P&S) System
a) The IBMS shall interface with the P&S System. The integration
shall be via interface between the system controller / gateway
The Sub-Contractor shall include the cost but not limit to the
§ Monitoring pumps status, water tanks level

§ Water metering consumption
TS/M/S60/7 2602542S/AC
3.9 Integration to User Equipment System
a) The IBMS shall interface with the User Equipment System.

The integration shall be via interface between the system
controller / gateway
The Sub-Contractor shall include the cost but not limit to the
§ Monitoring ON/OFF/TRIP and Alarm status.

§ Integrated to Card access system to OPEN/CLOSE door
on time schedule
4.0 BUILDING MANAGEMENT FACILITIES
a) The Facilities Management System is typical building management

system that shall include all major functions for the building
maintenance and operations staffs to perform their job efficiently. The
proposed system shall:
§ Be web based
§ Use customized GUI to reflect the building image
§ Be modular in design so that functions can be added or deleted
§ Able to communicate with the BAS and the respective M&E
Contractor to obtain real time data
§ Require to access the BAS building diagrams and other M&E
system
§ Easily configurable
§ User friendly
The modules for the following services shall be provided:
§ Desktop and server management

§ Single user sign on
§ Alarm management
§ Energy computation and viewing / Auditing
§ On-line facilities booking
b) In general, most of these services will require comprehensive data

input from various M&E suppliers. The Sub-Contractor shall
coordinate the tasks of collecting, verifying and editing the input data
from all sources and upload them into the IBMS system.
TS/M/S60/8 2602542S/AC
4.1 Desktop and Server Management
The Sub-Contractor shall perform all services required to setup the

server, workstation, gateway system, and peripheral devices such as
printer and scanners. The system shall include domain / user
management, access control, e-mail setup, and any other software and
system configuration necessary for administration of a computer
system in the network.
4.2 Single User Sign-on
a) The Single user sign on feature will allow authorized users to

gain entry into IBMS, BAS, other M&E system as stated, the
office system and any other designated systems from the IBMS
or office workstation by using one single user ID and password.
Once the user ID and password is authenticated, the user can
gain access to multiple application systems within the user’s
authority, without the need to re-enter their login user-id and
password again. However, if the user wants to login directly to
a specific system, they shall be able to do so.
b) The single user sign-on functions will include a

synchronization mechanism whereby if the user ID or password
is changed in any “allowed to access” system, the changes will
reflect in all systems under the single user-sign scope.
c) The single user sign-on system shall be capable inclusion up to

10 different application systems, each with their own set of user
ID and passwords.
4.3 Alarm Management
a) The respective system provider will manage all M&E alarms

under their system. The Sub-Contractor shall coordinate with
respective M&E contractor for display of alarms on their IBMS
monitors.
b) For alarms generated by systems interfaced by IBMS, such as

lift system and car park management system, the Sub-
Contractor shall coordinate with BAS and respective M&E
system for sending of their alarms to the IBMS system’s paging
or SMS gateway for transmission. They will also display
alarms in their own IBMS workstations.
c) The Sub-Contractors shall coordinate with the BAS Contractor

/ M&E system for synchronization of their alarms, GUI and
action, so that to the operator, it is from the same alarm
management system.
TS/M/S60/9 2602542S/AC
4.4 On-line Facilities Booking
a) This system shall provide on-line booking services via the web
link for tenants to book common facilities such as conference
rooms, meeting rooms etc.
b) The system shall provide all necessary information for the

booking of common facilities. Some of the functions are search
for facility availability, block booking or search for facility
according to search parameters e.g. search for meeting room
that can accommodate 20 people.
c) Once the tenant’s requests are confirmed on the booking, the

request will be sent to the building management via formed
email. The management shall be also to confirm or reject the
booking on-line.
d) The system shall provide interface to the BAS and the

respective M&E system for controls function relating to
ACMV, Lighting & Card Access System.
4.5 Energy Computation, Viewing and Auditing
This system works together with the BAS and the respective M&E
system whereby utility usage can be monitored and compute for
management reporting tools. Standard off-the-shelf Microsoft Excel or
SQL shall be deployed for reports purpose.
TS/M/S60/10 2602542S/AC
5.0 HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
a) Equipment Specification
§ Operator Workstations
I. There shall be one IBMS workstation. The IBMS

workstation is for operational use.
II. All workstations shall use slim design LCD monitors.
III. All workstations shall use the latest version of

Microsoft’s Windows workstation. Similar to the servers,
the latest release of SP (service packs) and other updates
shall be applied.
IV. The technical specification of the operator workstations

are as follows:
Processor Intel Pentium 4 3.2 GHz

Memory 768MB DDR2 SDRAM
Hard Disk 60 Gbyte
Graphics On board or third party 32MB
memory
Monitor 17” slim LCD
Accessories All necessary accessories including
LAN card
OS Microsoft lastest OS, antivirus
§ Servers
I. There shall be a minimum of two IBMS servers. All

servers shall be rack-mounted type. KVM switch and
LCD monitor shall be provided for each server rack. The
number of servers and sizing shall be sufficient to provide
the performance requirements.
II. The technical specifications of the servers are as follows:
Type Rack Mount

Processor Intel Server grade processor
supporting up to 2 processors
Memory 1 GByte
Hard Disk 4 drives with raid controller
Graphics On board or third party 32MB
memory
Monitor 1 x 15” LCD to be shared by all
three servers
Server Accessory As needed for the operation
TS/M/S60/11 2602542S/AC
§ Network Printer
One networked printer shall be provided together with necessary

drivers.
b) Backup System (UPS)
§ UPS shall be provided for back-up of IBMS servers and

sufficient capacity must be allowed for continuous operation
during power failure
§ Minimum capacity shall be 1KVA with a back-up time of
minimum 30 minutes.
6.0 NETWORK
6.1 Network Equipment
a) The Sub-Contractor shall supply and install a networking

system to provide network services to all network systems for
IBMS. The switches shall be from reputable switch
manufacturers with strong support in Singapore.
b) The system shall consist but not limited to the following:
§ Core switch in control room.

§ Firewall
§ Router
§ Patch core (3m)
c) Core switches specification:
§ Locate in the control room

§ Sufficient gigabit fiber uplink ports to link up to all the
edge switches
§ 4 spare fiber ports for future use
§ Supports VLAN
§ Radius security
§ 24 – 48 100mbps UTP port
§ Supports multicast for video streaming
§ Back plane speed of not less than 30GB
§ Support layer 3 routing and all common switching
functions
TS/M/S60/12 2602542S/AC
6.2 Firewall
a) The Sub-Contractor shall supply a firewall to fully protect the

complete network and computer system.
b) The firewall shall be used to provide protection:
§ From all remote connections

§ Between each LAN systems
§ Between the IBMS and third party system using the
network
§ Between IBMS and BAS
c) The network access security, such as user ID and password

controls, shall comply with NCB’s recommended IT security
guidelines.
d) The firewalls shall not rely on simple bit mask filtering of

packets.
e) The provision of firewalls shall allow only authorized

personnel to use any PC within the networked environment to
perform management functions.
6.3 Racks
a) The rack shall be complied with the following specifications:
§ 42U cable racks with cable management, rack size shall

be 800 x 800
§ 42U equipment racks for the IBMS servers, core switch
and any other IBMS control room equipment. The racks
shall have minimum of two rows of power bars, and 2
cooling fans.
§ 12U to 24U racks in the riser area for the edge switch
and horizontal cable terminations, 2 power bars.
§ All racks shall be close racks.
TS/M/S60/13 2602542S/AC
7.0 PERFORMANCE
a) The system shall be expected to perform without failure under extreme

load conditions.
b) In general, the time taken for 80% of screen changes shall not exceed 5
to 8 seconds.
8.0 SYSTEM SIZING
The IBMS shall be able to manage the following number of users;
Concurrent Web based users - 15

Operator Licenses - 5
These figures are provide for estimation of throughput and system sizing and
intended only as a guide to the Sub-Contractor when considered together with
the functionality described in this document.
9.0 SECURITY, INTEGRITY AND FAULT TOLERANCE
The IBMS shall be a highly secured system that uses several levels of security
through firewalls and authentication using multilevel password protection. The
IBMS proposed should ensure that a high level of security to be built for this
project via combination of firewall, access control, and network security
service etc.
As the IBMS is multifunction enterprise system made up of many subsystems,

components and applications, it is required to ensure a high-level of integrity
in all operations. Backup and fault tolerance must be built into the system.
10.0 WORKSTATION AND PASSWORD PRIVILEGES
The IBMS shall allow the system administrator to configure each workstation
with its intended functionality. Individual user authorization groups shall be
attached to those functions together with restrictions of access to certain
functions.
Passwords shall not be displayed when entered at the workstation by the

operator.
Unauthorized functions or incorrect password entries shall invoke a screen

message such as “Access Denied.”
The operator shall not have access to modify his user group for the purposes of
changing authority levels.
TS/M/S60/14 2602542S/AC
11.0 ACTIVITY LOGGING
The IBMS shall maintain an activity-tracking log of all functions and activities
that affect the operations of the IBMS and subsystems which have been
carried out within the IBMS. These logs shall contain adequate and accurate
information so that functions and consequences can easily be identified.
Event and activity logs shall be retained on the system for a period for system
administration and management read access before auto archive for offline
retrieval.
12.0 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
In your submission of the tender price, it is COMPULSORY to submit the

following for review and evaluation:
§ Project organization chart includes system designer, programmers,

coordinating engineer and all personnel
§ Submit the CV of all personnel in your proposed organization chart
§ Submit the technical specification of the display screen i.e. plasma and
LCD
§ Submit your proposed concept design of IBMS
§ Submit your proposed IBMS write-up
§ Submit your proposed methodology of the process of interfacing
amongst the Contractors / Consultants / Building Owner
§ Active switches shall be provided. Detailed specification to be
submitted
§ You are to address how the software can be future proof and advise
any changes involve in the upgrading of the software
§ Submit comprehensive and non-comprehensive maintenance cost for 5
years after DLP
§ Submit space requirement for the IBMS server
§ Submit your statement on your service back-up
§ Submit your proposed work flow i.e. list of items you require Client’s
input
§ Submit unit rates for your special items
TS/M/S60/15 2602542S/AC
SECTION 61 – MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (MMS)
1. General
1.1 This section sets out the requirements for the maintenance
management system (MMS).
1.2 The BAS vendor shall provide readily available web-based

maintenance management program that is integrated with BAS and
enable the building maintenance team to manage the facility
maintenance works easily and effectively.
1.3 MMS shall allow end users and maintenance personnel to define
maintenance work orders (e.g. corrective and preventive maintenance
activities, ad-hoc house keeping activities, etc.,) for all systems and
track work orders via web browser from any desktop computer.
1.4 The user interface shall be strictly via web technology, with all regular
day-to-day maintenance interaction occurring through a standard web
browser. Systems that require additional software on client machines to
allow viewing and configuration of facility maintenance shall not be
acceptable.
1.5 The MMS shall include but not be limited to following:
a) Enable maintenance tasks to be managed either centrally or in a

distributed manner through web access. Users shall be able to
monitor and track all assets from all locations from a single
login to the MMS server from any Internet/Intranet connection
using a standard Internet browser.
b) Preventive maintenance activities shall be scheduled based on

cyclical time basis (every day, week, month, year, every 3
months) or when a monitored equipments digital run-time point
reaches its run-time limit. All preventive maintenance shall be
scheduled automatically and system shall support advance
work order generation for time based schedules.
TS/M/S61/1 2602542S/AC
c) Users can create a corrective maintenance work orders on asset
break downs or on any equipment fault condition. The
corrective maintenance shall help to ensure swift and consistent
reaction to malfunction should they occur between planned
maintenance intervals. System shall support all work order
related functions like:
i) Registering work requests via Helpdesk module.
ii) Creating corrective maintenance work orders with cost

details.
iii) Managing asset/equipment preventive maintenance

work orders.
iv) Tracking work orders and maintenance costs.
v) Send work orders as SMS message to technician on
technician assignment.
vi) Close multiple work orders at one go.

vii) Automatically generating item purchase requests when
inventory level goes low due to usage of items in work
orders.
viii) Ability to filter and view work orders based on key
inputs.
d) Define and assign work areas to users based on asset grouping.

This would enable to supervisors to track their asset
performance based on their work location.
e) Helps the facility manager in tracking response time; Time

taken for technician to attend to a fault complaint.
f) User configurable SMS and email alerts with reminders and

escalation based on work order priority key performance index
settings.
g) Built-in reporting and statistical analysis tools that

automatically compute Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) in
real time based on response time and completion time.
h) Scalable architecture, with the capability for future upgrades to

extend the number of monitored assets or concurrent users.
TS/M/S61/2 2602542S/AC
i) Ability to support remote update of work order status via SMS.
j) Ability to send notification messages to users/technician via

SMS/Email technology as part of the maintenance workflow.
k) Building Automation System (BAS) integration ready to

automate work order creation on equipment breakdown status
and run-time condition.
2 System Access and User Roles
2.1 MMS shall be hosted on a web server and users can use Internet
Explorer 6.0 or later to access MMS. Access to MMS shall be
protected with a login id and password. Users will be provided with
unique User ID to access MMS and access rights are assigned
according to their role in the system.
2.2 Basic User Roles in MMS
The basic MMS user role and the functions available for them are as
defined below.
a) Helpdesk User
Any user having a valid User ID and having ‘Helpdesk’ role in
MMS shall be treated as helpdesk user. Helpdesk users can
register complaints or faults, view the status of the work orders
and able to rate (feedback) the service quality.
b) Field Technician
Any user having a valid User ID and having an access level
‘Technician’ in MMS application shall be treated as field
technician. Field technicians can initiate work orders, update its
status and view all work orders assigned to them. In addition,
this group of users can view all of preventive maintenance
schedules assigned to them and update actual
labor/material/cost for work orders.
c) Supervisor
Any user with a valid User ID and having an access level
‘Supervisor’ in MMS shall be treated as Supervisor. Supervisor
role based users does all of the functions in MMS within their
assigned work areas, except deleting work orders and changing
system wide parameters.
TS/M/S61/3 2602542S/AC
d) Facility Manager
Any user with a valid User ID and having an access level

‘Manager’ in MMS shall be treated as Facility Manager. Users
with facility manager role shall have full access in the system.
Apart from doing all application oriented task, they can also
define system wide parameters.
On login, users shall get different options according to their

role and access level. MMS shall support different user access
levels and capable of creating new user roles encompassing
more than one user role.
3 System Components
3.1 The maintenance management system shall consists of following

functions as the minimum
a) Location Management
b) Asset Management
c) Vendor Management
d) Inventory & Spare parts
e) Helpdesk
f) Preventive Maintenance and Job Plans
g) Corrective Maintenance & Work Order Management
h) Users/Resources
i) Purchase Request
j) Reports
k) SMS/Email integration
l) BAS Integration
TS/M/S61/4 2602542S/AC
3.2 Location
a) All major assets shall be identified with a specific geographic

location within the organization where the assets are currently
stationed.
b) For ease of maintenance, an organization shall be

geographically classified into different locations (e.g. zones).
Then these divisions can be further divided to another set of
locations.
c) Important aspects of this module include:
i) Maintain all the geographic and logical locations within

the organization
ii) Identify the priority of each location
iii) Locations can be nested to a maximum of 8 levels
3.3 Asset/Equipment
a) Asset/Equipment is one of the basic information required for

building maintenance. Before the users start using the MMS
application they must feed the details of all assets available in
the organization. The system shall provide a master entry
screen for adding/updating/removing/searching the assets.
b) Asset module shall support following features:
i) Maintain list of important assets/equipments in the

organization.
ii) Identify the location that the equipment belongs to.
iii) Identify equipment category and associate with

equipments asset group (e.g.) electrical, mechanical,
etc.
iv) Nesting of equipments to a maximum of 8 levels.
v) Capture the details of equipments like manufacturer,

vendor, model number, serial number, warranty, etc.,
vi) Keep a maintenance history of the assets.

vii) Keep track of “year-to-date” maintenance cost of
equipments and the total cost of maintenance of assets.
TS/M/S61/5 2602542S/AC
viii) Equipment monitoring points can be tied to Building
Automation System to automate the maintenance work
based on runtime and fault condition.
3.4 Vendor
a) Vendors are suppliers who supply equipments or parts for the

inventory or supply human resources needed for the
maintenance of assets. A same vendor could supply both parts
and human resources.
b) Important features of this module shall be as follows:
i) Maintain the list of vendors of the organization.
ii) Identify the equipments & parts that are supplied by

each vendor.
iii) Identify the human resources that are supplied by each

vendor.
iv) Maintain the contact details of vendors.
3.5 Inventory
a) The inventory consists of all the parts stocked in the

organization. One of the important functionality of the MMS
application is to optimize the inventory by identifying the
critical parts that need to be stocked always and not to stock
less important parts.
b) This module shall include following features:
i) Maintain the list of all parts needed for the maintenance

of equipments that belong to the organization.
ii) Identify the vendor of each item in the inventory.
iii) Identify the category of each item (e.g.) electrical,

mechanical, etc.,
iv) Identify the items that are stocked and non-stocked.
v) Keep the record of the details like quantity in stock,

price, minimum quantity, maximum quantity, reorder
level and minimum order quantity, etc.,
TS/M/S61/6 2602542S/AC
vi) Create a purchase request if an item stock reaches the
reorder level.
vii) Maintain the quantity ordered for an item.
viii) Maintain the ordering units of each item.
3.6 Helpdesk
Helpdesk module shall be a tool for building occupants to register their

fault complaints in CCMS and track the progress from their desktop.
The system shall allow the helpdesk users to:
a) Create new fault reports with location/asset information and

contact details.
b) Enquire the database and look for any specific fault reports.
c) Check the status of previous fault reports.
d) Acknowledge the completion of fault reports and provide

feedback on service quality.
3.7 Preventive Maintenance (PM)
a) Preventive maintenance helps to maintain the health of

equipments/assets by taking maintenance actions pro-actively.
b) PM module shall include following features:
i) Preventive Maintenance shall be scheduled based on

time frequency or based on operational hours.
ii) An equipment/asset can be associated with a PM to

generate work order based on metering information.
iii) Only equipments that are automated by the BAS shall

be maintained based on runtime hours.
iv) When the condition specified by a PM is met, a work

order shall be automatically generated.
v) A PM can be re-scheduled by privileged users before

work order generation.
vi) Automatically schedule and generate time based PM

before actual date to plan man power in advance.
TS/M/S61/7 2602542S/AC
3.8 Corrective Maintenance (CM)
a) Whenever equipment breaks down, corrective maintenance

needs to be taken for that equipment to put it back in operation.
A work order shall be created automatically/manually to record
this maintenance work. The users of the system shall be able to
initiate a work order.
b) Important aspects of this module include:
i) Whenever there is a breakdown of an equipment/asset a

work order can be initiated by a user of the MMS
application.
ii) The equipment that needs corrective maintenance and

its location are captured.
iii) The priority of the equipment/asset shall be captured.
iv) The estimated time and cost based on the equipment

and its parts shall be captured. The application also
caters for entering the actual cost and time.
v) The failure class and the problem code of the work
order shall be captured.
vi) Send work order details as SMS message to technician.
3.9 Work Order Tracking
a) Work Orders are the main transactions taking place in

Maintenance Management System. Work orders can be created
for either corrective maintenance or preventive maintenance.
Any user of the MMS application shall initiate a work order.
For other users who wants to log complaint but has no access to
the system, MMS shall support logging of complaint by users
and capturing the name and other details of the complainant.
i) Keep track of all work orders that are created for

corrective, preventive and other types of maintenance
work.
ii) System shall track important work order statuses like

Waiting for approval, Approved, In-progress,
Completed and Closed.
iii) The status history of any work order shall be retrievable

at any time.
TS/M/S61/8 2602542S/AC
iv) The time stamp of all the status changes shall be logged
by the system.
v) Shall capture the changes to work order details and

status with the user details and time stamp.
vi) Identify the work orders based on their priority to

ensure that critical work orders are taken care
immediately.
vii) Shall record the response time for work orders thereby
ensuring the productivity of the maintenance personnel.
viii) Shall capture the cost for a maintenance work. The cost
is captured both at total level or at detailed level like
(e.g.) labor cost, tool cost, material cost, etc.,
ix) Identify the human resource that attended the work and
help in the performance tracking of resources.
x) Work order shall only be closed by privileged users.
xi) For any critical change in status of a work order the

application shall send SMS notification to the
concerned resource.
xii) Shall identify repeatedly failing equipments and assist

the maintenance department to understand healthiness
of equipments.
xiii) Shall provide integration with GSM mobile network to

enable the technician to update Work order status
remotely via SMS.
3.10 Resources
a) MMS shall maintain resources required to carry out

maintenance tasks on assets/equipments.
i) The details of all resources and their vendor.
ii) The skill set of the resources shall be identified so that

they can be appropriately assigned for a work order.
iii) The employment type of the resource shall be

identified.
TS/M/S61/9 2602542S/AC
iv) Ability to assign Supervisor for each resource.
v) Configure SMS/Email alert options based on user role.
3.11 Purchase Request
a) When the status of equipment becomes on-hold due to

unavailability of parts the Purchase request module shall
generate a purchase request automatically.
i) This module shall be used to raise purchase request

whenever an item in stock falls below the minimum
quantity.
ii) This module shall be used to raise purchase request

whenever a work order is put in Hold status due to lack
of parts available in inventory.
iii) This module shall maintain the quantity of item ordered.
iv) This module shall maintain the vendor information for

the items in inventory.
3.12 Reports
The following reports shall be generated by the system
a) Master reports for basic data like location, Assets, vendors,

items, resource, etc.,
b) Management related reports
i) Monthly response time KPI for breakdown works based

on priority time settings. The output shall show
percentage of work orders responded for the month
within defined KPI time intervals based on work order
priority.
ii) Monthly completion time KPI for breakdown works

based on priority time settings. The output shall show
percentage of work orders completed for the month
within defined KPI time intervals based on work order
priority.
TS/M/S61/10 2602542S/AC
iii) Response time summary report showing percentage of
work orders responded within defined time intervals
based on work order priority in each asset group.
iv) Completion time summary report showing percentage

of work orders completed within defined time intervals
based on work order priority in each asset group.
v) Work load summary report detailing work orders

issued, staff count, outstanding work orders, completed
work orders and average work order per staff for each
asset group.
vi) Work order completion report showing monthly work

order completion rate for given month range.
c) Asset related reports
i) History of work orders generated for assets based on

preventive maintenance schedule.
ii) Year-to-date maintenance cost report: A report on assets

showing the maintenance cost incurred for each asset
till date for the year.
iii) List asset work orders based on specific failure or

problem.
d) Preventive Maintenance reports
i) List PM records based on due date, asset, location or

assigned technician.
ii) Master PM report: Show future PM work order dates to

be scheduled for selected year.
iii) List work orders generated out of PM for any given date
range. The report output shall be filtered based on asset,
asset group and location.
iv) Generate PM generated work orders based on asset

group, asset type or asset.
TS/M/S61/11 2602542S/AC
e) Work Order reports
i) Response time report: List of work orders with the time

taken by resources for the work orders.
ii) Work order list: List of work orders filtered by location,

asset, failure class, work order type, work group and
work order status.
iii) Repeated work orders: List of work orders that are

created for same location/asset/failure/problem over a
period of time.
iv) List of work orders with the cost (estimated, approved

and actual) details.
v) List work order details that are waiting for material.
vi) List all outstanding work orders based on asset group,

work order type, asset, location, failure class and
technician.
vii) Monthly asset breakdown summary report.
viii) Monthly maintenance cost distribution by work order

type.
f) Purchase request report: List of work orders and the purchase

requests that were created by the work orders.
g) Inventory & Purchasing
i) Item on order: All the items for which order requisition

raised.
ii) Item availability: A report on all items in stock.
h) Audit trail report: A report on all transactions taken place in the

system during a given date range by all users of the system.
TS/M/S61/12 2602542S/AC
3.13 MS/Email Integration
a) CCMS vendor shall provide workflow automation system to

automatically send notification and or escalation messages via
SMS/Email. The system shall have the capability to identify
critical events and associate users to notify. System shall
automatically generate and route the messages to relevant
personnel on work order status changes. The system shall allow
the administrator to define who can get the notification on
which status change.
b) CCMS system shall be integrated with the office email system

via industry standard SMTP interface.
c) CCMS shall support industry standard GSM devices to send

text messages using GSM based SMS technology. System to be
provided:
i) shall be easily scalable to support multiple GSM

devices when required.
ii) Shall be suitable for SMS notification to mobile phone

and PDA.
d) The messages to be sent on different events are as follows:
i) Send work order details when work order is assigned to

a technician.
ii) Send reminder to technician when technician fails to

change work order status within set interval.
iii) Notify supervisor when technician fails to change work

order status within stipulated time interval. This time
interval shall be determined based on work order
priority and should be configurable.
iv) Send notification to the complainant once the fault is

rectified, provided complainant contact details captured
during fault request.
e) In addition to event related messages, system shall support two-

way communication with technician to enable remote work
order status update via SMS. This should enable the technician
to send SMS message to system and change the work order
status remotely and complete the work in few SMS
transactions.
TS/M/S61/13 2602542S/AC
3.14 BAS Integration
The Maintenance Management System shall be integrated with

Building Automation System for improved automation of maintenance
tasks. Whenever equipment is added to the application it can be
configured to have BAS integration. If equipment is configured to have
BAS integration, the application shall prompt for BAS point details to
associate the equipment with BAS. After the point details are captured
for the equipment, the MMS application shall start capturing the
related details like runtime and alarms from BAS. The equipment can
be configured to undergo maintenance tasks based on this runtime.
Whenever the runtime limit is reached, application shall initiate a
preventive maintenance work order for the equipment. System shall
initiate corrective maintenance work order on equipment alarm
condition.
TS/M/S61/14 2602542S/AC
SECTION 64 - ELECTRICAL
1. General
1.1. This section covers the electrical equipment and services necessary for
the efficient, safe and satisfactory operation of the various systems
detailed elsewhere in the Specification, including:
a) All motors, starters, isolating switches and fuse switches for

this Contract.
b) Local Control Boards (LCBs) complete with remote push

buttons, selector switches, indicator lights, relays, MCCBs
etc.
c) All control equipment, control wiring and associated conduit

works.
d) Conduit, cable tray, cabling and control wiring between the

Control Panels and all equipment and control elements, unless
otherwise stated.
e) Cables between electrical isolators or electrical control boards

and equipment or control elements.
2. Rules and Regulations
2.1. All electrical works, material and equipment shall comply with the
following:
a) Singapore Standard : SS 638 Wiring of Electrical Equipment

of Building
b) Singapore Standard : SS 551 Code of Practice on Earthing
c) All relevant Singapore Standards or British Standards

Specifications for Equipment
d) The Electricity Act (Cap. 89A), The Electricity (Electrical

Installations) Regulations 2002
e) The Electricity Act (Cap. 89A), (Electrical Worker)

Regulations
f) Energy Market Authority of Singapore Act (Chapter 92B)
g) Any other Rules and Regulations in operation.
TS/M/S64/1 2602542S/AC
2.2. All electrical installation shall be certified by the Sub-Contractor's
Licensed Electrical Worker or Engineer (LEW/LEE) and the power
supply diagram shall be endorsed by the Sub-Contractor's LEW/LEE.
3. Power Supply
3.1. The power supply shall be 400 V/3 phase/50 Hz 4 wire system or 230
V/1 phase/50 Hz and shall be supplied with a suitable isolator by
others (unless specified otherwise) as shown on the Drawings. The
Sub-Contractor shall provide all subsequent power and control wiring
as well as the main control panel and sub-panels for each system.
Layout drawings shall be submitted for approval before fabrication.
3.2. Generally, cabling shall be PVC insulated cables run in galvanised

steel electrical conduits or trunking.
3.3. The wiring for all safety cut-out controls shall be incorporated with
the compressor starter as mentioned above. All automatic temperature
controls shall be energised via which relays operate when the
respective fan or other motor starts. The circuit indicator lights shall
be taken from the out going side of the respective starters.
3.4. The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that the power factor for all motors
shall not be less than 0.85 for under 20 hp and 0.9 for above 20 hp
motors.
4. Drawings
4.1. The Sub-Contractor shall submit detailed construction drawings of all

switchboards and power supply layout for the approval of the S.O.
before construction commences.
4.2. Such drawings shall show construction details and shall incorporate a
full list of proposed materials, equipment, meters and accessories to
be used, and the method of supporting equipment and busbars.
TS/M/S64/2 2602542S/AC
5. Standards
5.1. The equipment and materials used and the method of construction as
applicable shall conform to the following British Standard (B.S.) or
International Electrotechnical Commission (I.E.C.) or National
Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) standard.
a) Switchboard and Motor Control Centre - IEC 61439
b) Busbar connection, arrangements and markings, and grade of

copper - B.S. 158, 159, 1433 and 1977.
c) Heavy duty air circuit breakers for A.C. system - B.S. 4752 /
IEC 60947
d) Moulded case circuit breakers - B.S. 3871 Part 2 / IEC

60947-2 or NEMA Standard AB1.
e) Indicating Instruments - B.S. 89 1st Grade / IEC 60051
f) Integrating meters - B.S. 37 Parts 1 and 2.
g) Integrating meters with cyclometer registers - B.S. 37 Part 4.
h) Protection relays - B.S. 142 / IEC 60255
i) Fuses - B.S. 88 / IEC 60269
j) Contactors - B.S. 775 / IEC 60947 Part 4-1
5.2. All cable tray and ladder shall comply to following standards
a) SS 638: Code of practice for electrical installations
b) BS EN ISO 1461: Hot dip galvanized coatings on

fabricated iron and steel articles. Specifications and test
methods
c) AISI 304 / 316 / 316L: Stainless Steel
d) BS EN 10143: Continuously hot-dip coated steel sheet and

strip
e) BS EN 10152: Electrolytically zinc coated cold rolled steel

flat products. Technical delivery conditions
TS/M/S64/3 2602542S/AC
5.3. The trunking shall comply with following standards:
a) Latest Singapore Standard SS 249: Steel surface cable

trunking and accessories
b) Singapore Standard SS 638: Code of practice for electrical
installations
c) BS EN ISO 1461: Hot dip galvanized coatings on

fabricated iron and steel articles. Specifications and test
methods
d) AISI 304 / 316 / 316L: Stainless Steel
e) BS EN 10143: Continuously hot-dip coated steel sheet and

strip
f) BS EN 10152: Electrolytically zinc coated cold rolled steel

flat products. Technical delivery conditions
5.4. All metal conduits and fitting shall be BS 4568, class 4 comply to
following standard:
b) IEC 60614-2-1: Specification for conduits for electrical

installations. Part 2: Particular specifications for conduits.
Section One: Metal conduits
c) IEC 61386-21: Conduit systems for cable management. Part

21: Particular requirements - Rigid conduit systems
d) BS 4568-1: Specification for steel conduit and fittings with

metric threads of ISO form for electrical installations. Steel
conduit, bends and couplers
e) BS 4568-2: Specification for steel conduit and fittings with

metric threads of ISO form for electrical installations.
Fittings and components
f) BS 4662: Boxes for flush mounting of electrical

accessories. Requirements, test methods and dimensions
g) BS EN 50086-2-1: Specification for conduit systems for

cable management. Particular requirements Rigid conduit
systems
h) Electricity (Electrical Installations) Regulations
TS/M/S64/4 2602542S/AC
6. Local Authorities Requirements
All electrical works, installations and materials supplied shall comply strictly
to the requirements and standard of the following local Authorities:
(a) The Electricity Act, The Electricity (Electrical Installations)

Regulation , Singapore.
(b) Code of Practice for Fire Precautions in Buildings, Singapore
(c) The Factory Inspectorate (Ministry of Manpower)
(d) The latest edition of SS 638 (Code of Practice for wiring of electrical
equipment of buildings
(e) The latest edition of SS551 - Code of Practice on earthing
7. Electrical Earthing
7.1. General
a) The metal parts of all switch gears, metal conductors and all
metal work liable to become alive in the event of failure of
insulation and the earth connection of all electrical fittings and
appliances shall be effectively earthed by means of earth
continuity conductor of adequate size. The entire earthing
installation shall fully comply with all relevant clauses of the
latest edition of Singapore Standard SS 638 and Singapore
Standard SS 551.
b) The earth continuity conductor shall be of high -conductivity

copper continuous throughout its length and approval must be
make known to the S.O. prior to any jointing by mechanical
clamps.
7.2. Earth Connections
a) Earth continuity conductors from all exposed metal parts of

equipment required to be earthed including earth connections
to plug sockets shall be connected by one of the following
appropriate methods:
i) To earth connection at the distribution board

supplying the equipment of plug socket.
ii) To any point on the sub-main or main earth continuity

conductor supplying the relevant distribution board.
TS/M/S64/5 2602542S/AC
iii) To earth leakage circuit breaker installed in
accordance with EMA's requirement.
b) The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that there is earth continuity

in all trunkings, pipes, ducts, etc. Earth links of minimum size
of 6 mm5, in the form of flexible cables, shall be used to
ensure continuity.
c) The end of earthing lead shall be labelled with 4.75 mm

lettering "SAFETY ELECTRICAL EARTH DO NOT
REMOVE" stamped onto an aluminium plate.
7.3. Size and Type of Copper Earth Conductor
a) The size of copper earth conductor shall be conformed to

latest Singapore Standard SS 638. But, the minimum size of 6
mm5 green/yellow PVC insulated copper cable shall be used.
b) Each earth conductor shall be clearly labelled.
8. Local Control Boards
8.1. The Sub-Contractor shall supply, deliver, install, test and commission,
Local Control Boards (LCB) of a type specified hereafter complete
with suitable doors that allow easy access to all components installed
therein.
8.2. All components shall be so arranged as to facilitate inspection and

maintenance.
8.3. Surface mounted circuit breaker shall be supplied to control all

components together with associated starter contactor etc. mounted
on the panel inside the cubicle. Associated components shall be
grouped. Flush mounted push button and neon pilot light shall be
fitted on the front fascia of the cubicle.
8.4. Appropriate relays shall be incorporated to protect all 3-phase motors

from overload, undervoltage, single-phasing and wrong sequence of
connection.
8.5. All single phase motors shall be protected by thermal overload of a

type with a tripping current adjustable in steps of 0.1 amperes.
8.6. All LCBs shall be provided with a separate interfacing compartment

with different door containing the terminal strips for connections to
the Building Automation System.
TS/M/S64/6 2602542S/AC
8.7. All LCBs shall be provided with voltage free contacts and all
necessary relays (including 4 spare contacts) for remote indication and
control by the BAS.
9. Local Control Board (LCB)/Starters Panels
9.1. The LCB shall be suitable for 400 volt, 3-phase 4 wire 50 Hz indoor
service in an ambient temperature of up to 40°C with 100% R.H. at
maximum continuous rating without exceeding the maximum
temperature permitted by the relevant British Standard or Singapore
Standard.
9.2. All cabinets of the control/starter panels shall be of metal clad front
type and manufactured from minimum 2.0 mm (14 SWG) gauge hot
dipped galvanised sheet steel using folded sections or angle iron
bracing for rigidity of construction. Floor mounted control panel shall
be of metal clad flush fronted, totally enclosed cubicle type of similar
construction as wall mounted type.
9.3. The LCB with main incoming circuit protectors rated below 100 Amp
Trip shall be of the wall mounting type, and shall employ power
distribution panel boards for branch circuits together with starters,
protective devices and indicating instruments.
9.4. The cabinet shall be adequately ventilated and be dust, drip and
vermin proof. Unless specified otherwise, the degree of protection of
the enclosure shall be IP 44 in accordance with IEC Publication 144.
9.5. The construction shall be such that it allows for ready access to the
interior of the cubicles for operation and maintenance purposes.
9.6. Where they are installed exposed to weather and at areas of high
humidity, they shall be of weatherproof construction to the approval
of the S.O..
9.7. All cubicles and panels shall wherever practicable be of standard

pattern and dimensions.
9.8. All steel work for the cubicles and panels shall be new and free from
rust and scale. The finish shall be baked enamel of colour to S.O.
approval.
TS/M/S64/7 2602542S/AC
9.9. All fixings, screw, bolts and nuts, latches and locks shall be cadmium-
plated and chromed.
9.10. All cubicles and panels shall have hinged doors (concealed hinge
type). Rubber gaskets shall be provided between all doors, covers and
cubicles.
9.11. Switches and isolators supplied shall be of the totally enclosed, heavy
duty, air break and quick action type with a short circuit capacity
suitable for the rating of the equipment to be connected. Positive
indication of switch position shall be given by a mechanical "on" or
"off" device.
9.12. Interface barrier shall be provided for the fuse cartridges compartment
to safeguard flashover.
9.13. All fuses shall be HRC Cartridge type, having fusing factor of less
than 1.5 and complying with BS 88 Class Q1.
9.14. Instruments, indicating lights, rotary switches, etc. shall be mounted

directly on a fixed fascia panel suitably stiffened to hold such items
firmly under all conditions or operation.
9.15. The LCB shall be provided with all wiring and accessories for the
indicating and controlling devices in the supervisory control and
equipment status panel.
9.16. The LCB centres shall comprise of but not limited to the following
components and accessories:
a) Main Incoming Circuit Breaker with protective, indicating and

metering devices.
b) Branch circuit protectors with safety devices indicating and

metering instruments.
c) Motor contactors (starters) of types and capacities as specified

complete with protective and safety devices, instrumentation
and control accessories.
d) A separate compartment to housed the DDC sub-station and

all interfacing cabling connectors.
e) All interlocking relays for fire protection control.
9.17. No-volt release shall be of the manual reset type such that on
restoration of the supply, the motor cannot restart automatically.
TS/M/S64/8 2602542S/AC
9.18. Overload relays shall be factory calibrated and sealed with integral
heaters. They shall be incorporated with stop switch/manual reset
control. The range for setting of overload shall be suitably selected for
the equipment to be connected. They shall be of approved type and
manufacture.
9.19. Indicating lights shall be provided for all starter and control panel to
indicate power incoming mains available, mains turned on, motor run
and stop status, motor overload trip, alarm, etc. Indicating lamps used
shall be of heavy duty type and shall be submitted for approval prior
to order. Lamp provided shall be of long life type with a minimum
guaranteed life of 10,000 hours continuous operation.
9.20. Push buttons shall be provided for manual starting and stopping on all
starter panels. All push buttons shall be designed for switching of
control circuits up to 500 V AC and shall be of heavy duty type and
approved manufacture.
9.21. Contactors shall be double break non-stick and chatter-free and of

approved manufacture. Thermal protection and no-volt release shall
be provided for each contactors. Contactors shall satisfactorily close
at a minimum of 80% nominal volts.
9.22. Small wirings shall comply with BS 6346 of 600/1000 V grade and
PVC insulated. They shall be neatly cleated and bunched accordingly
to their function that easy identification can be maintained.
9.23. The branch circuit protectors and the main circuit protectors shall be
moulded case circuit breakers of reputed manufacture, and shall have
adequate current carrying capacities.
9.24. Moulded Case Circuit Breakers shall comply with BS 871 : Part 2.
The current ratings, frame sizes and minimum interrupting capacities
of the MCCB shall be specified in the Drawings.
9.25. All moulded case current breakers shall have interrupting capacities in
excess of 43 KA (symmetrical) or where the short circuit rating of the
Motor Control is lower, the breaker interrupting capacity shall
correspond to the short circuit rating of the LCB.
9.26. All relays and timers supplied shall be of make and type to the S.O.'s
approval.
9.27. Ammeter shall be suitable for flush mounting and shall be square or
rectangular type with moulded plastic escutcheons. Range of
Ammeter shall be suitable for the service intended.
TS/M/S64/9 2602542S/AC
9.28. All terminal blocks shall be of adequate rating and shall be of
approved make. Sufficient terminals shall be made available for easy
terminations and in no case shall more than 2 cores be allowed to be
terminated at any terminal.
9.29. All wiring shall be properly labelled and identified with approved type
feruled numbers which shall correspond exactly to the numbering
system as shown in the wiring and connection drawings for the
switchboards or starter panels. All terminals blocks shall also be
similarly labelled for identification. All wire termination shall be done
with approved type lugs.
9.30. Name-plates shall be provided for each circuit, equipment and

instrument for identification and designation in accordance with its
function. Name-plates shall be of black plastic material with engraved
white lettering and shall be fixed to the panel by brass screws.
9.31. All power cables shall be of copper conductors and phase conductors
shall follow the acceptable colour code.
9.32. Earth Leakage Relay shall be provided in all control/starter panels and
earth leakage relay (with time delay) and overcurrent relay shall be
provided in panel/board. Earth fault protection of IDMTL type (earth
leakage) and DTL type (overcurrent) shall be provided for multiple
equipment panel/board.
9.33. Where earth fault protection is specified for motor branch circuits,
earth fault relays shall be incorporated into the motor starters. The
fault level setting of these earth fault relays shall be field adjustable.
9.34. The following indicating, measuring, controlling and alarming devices

shall be incorporated into the LCB :
a) One (1) ammeter 42" (113 mm) and one (1) voltmeter 42"
(113 mm) dial with selector switches for the indication of
current and voltage between phases, and between each phase
and neutral for the mains incoming power supply, together
with indicating pilot lights.
b) One (1) rotary selector switch "BAS-AUTO-OFF-LOCAL"

operation of the motor or equipment.
c) One (1) Power Meter for measurement of line voltage, phase

current, kW, kWh, Power factor, Frequency etc. for each
starter panel.
TS/M/S64/10 2602542S/AC
d) One (1) set start/stop push buttons colour coded for each
motor on each starter panel.
e) One (1) set pilot lights for the indication of "RUN-STOP-

TRIP" condition of each motor on each starter panel.
f) One (1) 20 ampere spare MCCB circuit breaker.
g) All necessary MCBs complete with outgoing cabling for

auxiliary and associated equipment power supplies.
9.35. The "BAS-AUTO-OFF-LOCAL" operations at the LCB shall be

interpreted as follows:
a) "BAS/REMOTE" means the starting of motor or equipment

can be started at the BAS console or at the supervisory
control panel.
b) "OFF" means the complete power cut-off of motors.
c) "LOCAL" means the starting of motor or equipment shall be

started at Local Control Board and it could not be started at
the BAS console or the supervisory control panel.
10. Cabling, Trunkings, Cable Trays and Conduits
Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings or Specification, all power cables

between starters and motors shall be in copper of 600/1000 V voltage
grade, PVC insulated pvc sheathed cables to BS 6004 or SS 358. They
shall be installed on galvanised cable tray, or in galvanised steel conduit.
Where the cables on trays are installed less than 1.2m above floor level
they shall be protected with galvanised steel cover. All cabling inside
Chiller Plant Rooms for pumps, fans and other equipments shall be
PVC/PVC insulated cables except for chillers, it shall be XLPE/PVC
insulated cables. All cabling for equipments with emergency power supply
shall be Fire Resistant cables.
10.1. Where PVC/SWA/PVC cables are indicated in the drawings,

they shall be of copper and comply with BS 6346 (600/1000
V grade). All underground cables shall be PVC/SWA/PVC
cables and terminated with BICC gland.
10.2. Where mineral insulated copper sheather (MICS) cables are

indicated in the drawings they shall comply with BS 6207:
Part 1. MICS cables shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's instruction using proprietary fittings and
accessories.
TS/M/S64/11 2602542S/AC
10.3. All power cabling sizes shall unless other wise indicated in the
drawings be adequately sized to cater for the normal current
rating and starting current of the equipment without undue
overheating and stress.
10.4. Termination of power cable into motors or panel shall be

through approved type of cast metal boxes with pvc or brass
glands and proper cable sockets.
10.5. All power cables shall be fixed on cable tray with approved
pvc or brass saddles and clips at not more than 300 mm
intervals.
10.6. All fire resistance type multi-core cables used shall conform to
IEC 60331 and BS 4066.
10.7. All underground cables shall be PVC/SWA/PVC cables and

terminated with BICC gland.
10.8. All cabling for pumps, and other equipments shall be

PVC/PVC insulated cables. All cabling for equipments with
emergency power supply shall be MICS/PVC insulated cables.
10.9. All cables shall be properly labelled by means of cable markers

and cable ties shall be used to identify each set of cables.
10.10. All trunkings and cable trays shall be electro-galvanised and

the thickness of trunkings and cable trays shall be as follows:
Size of Trunking Thickness of Trunking
50 x 50 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
50 x 75 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
50 x 100 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
50 x 125 mm 1.422 mm (17 SWG)
50 x 150 mm 1.422 mm (17 SWG)
50 x 200 mm and above 1.626 mm (16 SWG)
TS/M/S64/12 2602542S/AC
Size of Cable Tray Thickness of Cable Tray
50 mm 0.914 mm (20 SWG)
100 mm 0.914 mm (20 SWG)
150 mm 0.914 mm (20 SWG)
200 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
250 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
300 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
375 mm and above 1.626 mm (16 SWG)
10.11. All metal parts, piping, etc, should be bonded to the earthing
point by means of minimum 6 mm5 PVC insulated earth cable.
10.12. All metal conduits shall be galvanised steel BS 4568, class 4

manufactured and tested in accordance with IEC 61386.
Minimum size of conduit shall be 20 mm diameter. Space
factor for cable in conduits shall not exceed 0.4 (40%). All
metal conduits shall be of heavy-gauge type. All conduits shall
be run neatly, concealed where possible, with runs truly
horizontal or vertical or parallel to walls where conduits run in
floors. Conduits shall be securely fixed with saddles and round
head screws. Powered type of fittings will not be permitted.
From outlet to outlet there shall be not more than four (4)
normal bends or their equivalent. Inspection type conduit
accessories shall be used throughout. Conduits shall be fixed
in position before cables are drawn into them. The entire
length of all cables shall be enclosed in conduit. Junction
boxes shall be used at bends and "t" junctions. Elbows and
tees will not be accepted.
10.13. Flexible conduits which are exposed to weather or dampness

shall be of water-proof type with proper seals at connections
to GI conduit and motor terminal box. Ordinary flexible
conduit wrapped with PVC tape will not be accepted.
10.14. All circular junctions boxes, pull boxes, inspection elbows,

solid elbows shall be of malleable iron type and of standard
pattern with spout to BS 4568. All access covers for these
accessories shall be provided with gaskets and lids.
TS/M/S64/13 2602542S/AC
10.15. Connections to all equipment subject to movement shall be in
flexible conduit. Where they are exposed to water, oil or to
the weather, the flexible conduit shall be of extruded pvc
sheathed. Normal galvanised steel flexible conduit will not be
acceptable.
10.16. Connections to the water tank's electrodes shall be of extruded

pvc sheathed type flexible conduit.
10.17. All conduit and trunking shall be provided with saddles and
bracket at not more than 1 m interval.
10.18. All conduit and trunking shall be finally painted to approval.
10.19. Whenever the steel trunking passing through a full height fire
wall or floor, approved fire stop putty or approved equal
material shall be used to seal the cavity inside of the trunking
and approved fire stop compound or approved equal material
to seal the air-gaps between wall or floor and trunking.
11. Outdoor Equipment
11.1. All outdoor equipment shall be provided with suitable weatherproof

local start/stop control panel which shall be mounted in close
proximity to the equipment for servicing purposes and marked
accordingly. Exact location of the local control panel shall be decided
on site if not indicated.
11.2. All wiring to these equipment shall be PVC/PVC insulated and

sheathed cables run in conduit/trunking.
12. Motors and Starters
12.1. All motor and starters shall be suitably tropicalised and the starters
shall be incorporated with over current release in each phase and a
device to prevent single phasing as well as under voltage release.
12.2. All motors and starters shall comply with the current regulations of
the electricity act
12.3. All motors and starts shall be of approved make, and designed for
operation in 400 V/3 Phase/50 Hz supply. Chilled water / condenser
water pumps shall be run with variable speed drive.
TS/M/S64/14 2602542S/AC
12.4. All starters shall be of uniform make irrespective of method of starting
and shall be rated same as the motor KW.
12.5. Unless otherwise stated elsewhere in the specification and in the

drawings, all motors shall comply with the following:
a) They shall be selected suitably for 3-phase, 50 Hz operation

with speed not more than 1500 rpm unless otherwise
approved.
b) They shall be of squirrel cage induction type with totally-

enclosed fan cooled enclosure.
c) They shall be continuously rated and designed to operate at

the highest standard possible power factor (min. 0.85) and
efficiency under all conditions of loading.
d) They shall be of Class F insulation with a Class B permissible

temperature rise.
e) They shall be equipped with cast iron made frames and

brackets.
f) They shall be equipped with enclosed cast iron terminal to

allow drilling and tapping to accept cables.
g) They shall be fitted with roller or deep groove ball bearings at

the driving end and deep groove ball bearing at the non-
driving end. Motor driving equipment giving rise to end thrust
shall be equipped with bearings designed to counter
unbalanced end thrust.
Bearings shall be selected for the duty in accordance with ISO

recommendations and shall have a minimum life of 20,000
hours.
h) Motors shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of

BS 2613 and BS 4999.
i) Where they are installed outdoor or exposed to the weather,

they shall be of minimum IP 55.
TS/M/S64/15 2602542S/AC
13. Terminal Strips and Wiring
13.1. All incoming and outgoing and control circuits shall be wired to an
approved centralized terminal strip, and the equipment at the inside of
the cubicle shall be run via wiring channels and wiring outside the
channels shall be run neatly and taped to the approval of the S.O.. All
wires shall be terminated with approved cable lugs, and separate cable
lugs shall be used for each individual wire.
13.2. All wires shall be colour coded and shall have numbered ferrules at
both ends. The ferrules shall be of white insulating materials having a
glossy finished with the characters indelibly marked in black.
Additional red ferrules marked "Trip" shall be fitted to the wires inter-
connecting the relay trip contacts and the shunt release coils.
13.3. All fuses and links shall be of the bakelite HRC type category 440/AC
4 class Q to B.S. 88 or IEC 60269
13.4. All wiring shall be arranged in a regular manner with bends set at
90°C and securely held in position with suitable clips and where
convenient shall be installed in the uprights and/or backstays,
insulating bushes being used where necessary. They shall be formed in
a neat and systematic manner.
13.5. Meter wiring of the switchboard shall be carried out in PVC insulated
flame-proof switchboard cables of size not less than 1.5 sq. mm and
enclosed in flexible plastic conduit. All meter wiring shall be of similar
colours to those of the respective busbars etc., to which connections
are made.
13.6. All terminals shall be fitted with brass washers and securely fixed with
lock nuts to an approved type of terminal block placed in an easily
accessible position for testing at site.
13.7. No connectors or soldered joints shall be permitted in the wiring.
13.8. Power cable and control cable shall be installed in separate

conduit/trunking.
TS/M/S64/16 2602542S/AC
14. Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB)
14.1. General
a) Moulded case circuit breakers shall conform to the latest

British Standard BS 3871 part 2, IEC 60947 or NEMA
Standard AB1 and U/L listed.
b) All MCCB shall have minimum interrupting capacities of

R.M.S. symmetrical amperes at 400 Volts A.C. for 3 sec.
c) All MCCBs in switchboard or distribution panel board shall be

of the same make.
d) All MCCBs of 600 AF and above shall be provided with easy

operating handles.
e) All MCCBs feeding to feeder/plug in bus-ways shall be of the

current limiting type.
14.2. Operation
Moulded case circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle type

handle and shall have a quick-make over-centre switching mechanism
that is mechanically trip free from the handle so that the contacts
cannot be held-closed against short circuits and abnormal currents.
Tripping due to overload or short circuit shall be clearly indicated by
the handle automatically assuming a position midway between the
manual "ON" and "OFF" positions. All latch surfaces shall be as
constructed that they open, closed and trip simultaneously.
14.3. Construction
a) Each of these breakers shall provide inverse time delay and

instantaneous circuit protection by means of thermal magnetic
element. Ambient compensation shall be accomplished by a
secondary bi-metal that will allow the breaker to carry rated
current between 25°C and 50°C with tripping characteristics
that are approximately the same throughout this temperature
range.
b) Breakers shall be completely enclosed in a moulded case.

Non-interchangeable trip breaker shall have their cover sealed;
whereas interchangeable trip breaker shall have the trip unit
sealed to prevent tampering. Contacts for circuit breaker shall
be of non-welding silver or silver alloy.
TS/M/S64/17 2602542S/AC
c) Manual trip button and front-adjustable magnetic trip device
shall be incorporated in the moulded case circuit breaker.
d) Arcing shall be extinguished rapidly and effectively by Arc-

extinguishing device, in normal switching as well as protective
tripping, to minimise deterioration of contacts and adjacent
insulating materials.
e) Terminals shall be constructed to assure electrical efficiency

and reliability, with minimised possibility of localised heating.
f) Trip indication shall be by handle position mid-way between

'ON' and 'OFF'. To reset the trip mechanism, the handle shall
be moved to extreme 'OFF' and 'ON' position.
g) For current limiting (CL) moulded case circuit breakers, the

current limiting breakers shall be fuseless type and shall have
the same operation as specified above. They shall meet the
IEC requirements and shall be UL listed. All three phases shall
be opened simultaneously under fault conditions. The breakers
shall have interrupting ratings as low as 10KA rms, sym. on
systems capable of delivering fault currents as high as 200KA,
rms, sym. The contact opening and are extinguishing shall be
less than 3 cycle to reduce and limit peak let-through current
and let-through energy.
15. Colour Codes and Labels
15.1 Corners and bases shall be coloured in accordance with the following
code:
Colour Function
White 5A fuse
Blue 15A fuse
Yellow 20 fuse
Red link
TS/M/S64/18 2602542S/AC
15.2 Descriptive labels shall be fitted, adjacent to all fuses and links.
15.3 The terminal strip shall be numbered and schedule so as to identify the
particular circuits without difficulty. The same numbers and reference
letters identifying circuits and/or components of the equipment shall
be shown on the wiring diagram which is to be supplied by the Sub-
Contractor.
15.4 The interior of each piece of equipment shall be clearly marked to

show the phases and to this end either coloured plastic discs screwed
to fixed components or identification by means of colour plastic
sleeving shall be employed. Plastic tape will not be permitted.
16. Labels
16.1. All equipment shall be clearly labelled in accordance with regulations,

and to indicate its functions by means of engraved traffolyte ivorine
labels (Block in white lettering for normal supply, Red in white
lettering for emergency supply).
16.2. Each circuit breaker, switch, switch-fuse, fuse, selector switch,

indicating light, push button, instrument, etc. shall be labelled
indicating its rating, function, designation. In addition warning signs
marked "400 volts Danger" manufactured to standard design and
colour shall be suitably mounted and fixed on the back of the
incoming cubicles on the front of each switchboard and on the door of
the switchroom. The marking shall be in accordance with BS 171
clause 79.
17. Current Transformers (C.T.)
17.1. Current transformers necessary for the operation of instruments and

meters shall be of "straight through" type, with accuracy not less than
class 'C' for measuring, class '0.5' or better for metering and class 'S'
for protection as per SS 638. All CT for chiller plant shall comply to
latest BCA green mark requirement.
17.2. Current transformers shall be adequately rated in V.A. to carry the

shall comply with the latest EMA requirements.
TS/M/S64/19 2602542S/AC
17.3. Current transformers shall be adequately supported and installed as to
permit easy access and to be readily replaceable, if necessary, without
dismantling of adjacent equipment.
18. Instruments and Meters
18.1. Instruments and meters for external panel mounting shall be flush
mounting, square or rectangular type with moulded plastic
escutcheons and shall conform to the requirements.
18.2. Reading scales in kilo-watt hour meters shall be in multiple of ten

(10).
18.3. All instruments shall be to B.S. 89 1st grade, moving iron spring
controlled with 100 mm diameter dials (240° scale) with external zero
adjustment. Integrating meters shall be to B.S. 37 part 1 and 2 and
part 4 : with cyclometer registers and shall be calibrated for use with
their respective current transformers. They shall be fully tropicalised.
18.4. Voltmeters shall incorporate selector switches to enable phase to

phase and phase to neutral voltage to be read. Ammeters shall have
selector switches to read all the line currents. Selector switches shall
be of approved rotary type.
19. Over Current Relays
19.1. The over current relays shall be IDMTL adjustable current setting
between 50% to 200% of rated values and adjustable time lag settings
of 0 to 3.0 seconds; instantaneous high set elements shall be provided
for each main circuit breaker.
19.2. The relays shall be of the surface mounted and housed in a totally
enclosed dust-proof switchboard module.
19.3. The operating coils and contacts shall be adequately rated to carry the
necessary load. Operation indicator and reset facilities shall be
provided.
19.4. The relays shall be heavy pattern, unaffected by external vibration,

fully tropicalised and capable of operation in any position.
TS/M/S64/20 2602542S/AC
20. Earth Fault Relays
20.1. The earth fault relays shall incorporate adjustable current setting
between 5% to 40% in steps of 5% and adjustable time lag 0 to 1 sec.
20.2. The relays shall be of the flush pattern and housed in removable dust-
proof sheet metal casings provided with viewing glass or clean plastic.
provided to show a fault condition.

21. Indicating Lamps
Indicating lamps shall be the LED 24 volts type. The lamp shall be easily
removed or replaced from the front of the panel without using extractors and
shall be adequately ventilated.
22. Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB), Contactors, Isolators, etc.
Moulded case circuit breakers, contactors, isolators and other items where
applicable and necessary shall be provided to comply with the relevant clauses
specified elsewhere in the Specification.
23. Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB)
23.1. General
Miniature circuit breakers shall comply with the latest British Standard
BS 3871 with latest amendments.
Unless otherwise stated, miniature circuit breakers and distribution

boards shall have minimum short-circuit capacities of R.M.S.
symmetrical amperes of 10 KA for power circuit distribution boards
at 240/415 Volt A.C.
All miniature circuit breakers (MCB) shall have tripping characteristic

type "3" curve.
Irrespective to the mounting positions, the miniature circuit breakers

shall be operated in accordance with the factory calibrated
characteristic.
TS/M/S64/21 2602542S/AC
All miniature circuit breakers shall be of positive plug-on or bolted-on,
no error connection type.
Miniature circuit breaker must have positive contact position

indicator.
23.2. Operation
Miniature circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle

and shall have a quick-made, positive quick-break over centre
switching mechanism that is mechanically trip free from the handle so
that the contacts cannot be held close against short circuits and over
current conditions. When the circuit breaks and over current
conditions. When the circuit breakers automatically trip, the operating
handle shall be assured a position between "ON" and "OFF" positions.
The contacts shall also be of positive quick-make and quick-break on
manual and automatic operation.
Contact position indicator (coloured) linking physically to the contacts

for the positive indication of isolation shall be provided.
Two and three pole circuit breakers shall be commonly trip with
individual spring pressure on each contact.
23.3. Construction
Each pole of the circuit breakers shall have a factory calibrated

thermal bi-metal overcurrent element with inverse time delay
characteristic and a factory calibrated instantaneous magnetic tripping
device for short circuit condition. Ambient temperature compensation
shall be accomplished by a secondary bi-metal that shall allow the
circuit breaker to carry rated current between 25°C to 50°C with
tripping characteristics that are the same throughout this temperature
range, and that shall not cause nuisance tripping.
Circuit breakers shall be completely enclosed in a high dielectric

strength casing. The properties of the dielectric strength casing shall
not deteriorate with time.
Contacts of circuit breaker shall be non-welding silver-tungsten.
The high pressure plug-on busbar connector shall assure a solid

positive contacts without screw to tighten and no chance of error.
Load terminals shall be constructed to assure electrical efficiency and

reliability, with minimized possibility of localised heating, and for
straight in wiring.
TS/M/S64/22 2602542S/AC
Arcing shall be extinguished rapidly and effectively by arc chute
barrier, in normal switching as well as protective tripping, to minimize
deterioration of contacts and adjacent insulating materials.
Trip indication shall be by means of the handle position lying between

"ON" and "OFF". To reset the trip mechanism, the handle shall be
moved to extreme "OFF" position.
24. Motor Control Centres (MCCs)/ A/C Switchboard
24.1. The MCC shall be designed in accordance with Form 3 of IEC 61439
and suitable for 400 volt, 3-phase 4 wire 50 Hz indoor service in an
ambient temperature of up to 40°C with 100% R.H. at maximum
continuous rating without exceeding the maximum temperature
permitted by the relevant British Standard or Singapore Standard.
The Sub-Contractor shall guarantee all boards are constructed in
accordance the type tested requirements of IEC 61439 Form 3.
24.2. The MCC shall be of the self-contained, floor mounting, extensible,

metal clad, flush-fronted, front and rear access cubicle type, built up
from completely enclosed units housing all the circuit breakers,
meters, selector switches, indicating lamps and protection relays,
current transformers, protection transformers, contactors, busbars,
fuses, anti-condensation heaters complete with indicating lamps and
switches, and etc.
24.3. Switches and isolators supplied shall be of the totally enclosed, heavy
duty, air break and quick action type with a short circuit capacity
suitable for the rating of the equipment to be connected. Positive
indication of switch position shall be given by a mechanical "on" or
"off" device.
24.4. Interface barrier shall be provided for the fuse cartridges compartment
to safeguard flashover.
24.5. All fuses shall be HRC Cartridge type, having fusing factor of less
than 1.5 and complying with BS 88 Class Q1 or IEC 60269
24.6. Instruments, indicating lights, rotary switches, etc. shall be mounted

directly on a fixed fascia panel suitably stiffened to hold such items
firmly under all conditions or operation.
24.7. The MCC shall be provided with all wiring and accessories for the
indicating and controlling devices in the supervisory control and
equipment status panel.
TS/M/S64/23 2602542S/AC
24.8. All the incoming power supply ACB/MCCB and outgoing power
supply ACB/MCCB for pumps and chillers, the ampere frame size
(AF) shall be one size higher than the ampere Trip (AT).
24.9. Motor control centres shall comprise of but not limited to the
following components and accessories:
a) Main Incoming Circuit Breaker with protective, indicating and

metering devices.
b) Main bus sections and vertical bus sections as applicable with

full neutral bus and ground bus sections.
c) Branch circuit protectors with safety devices, indicating and

metering instruments.
d) Motor contactors (starters) of types and capacities as specified

complete with protective and safety devices, instrumentation
and control accessories.
24.10. The bus sections shall have adequate current carrying capacity and be
of all copper and electro-tinned. The bus sections shall be adequately
protected and supported and shall have a short circuit rating not less
than 43 KA (symmetrical) at 400 volts for 3 seconds.
24.11. The branch circuit protectors and the main circuit protectors or all
motor control centres shall be moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB)
of reputable manufacture, and shall have adequate current carrying
capacities.
24.12. All moulded case current breakers shall have interrupting capacities in
excess of 43 KA (symmetrical) or where the short circuit rating of the
Motor Control is lower, the breaker interrupting capacity shall
correspond to the short circuit rating of the motor control centre.
24.13. Earth Leakage Relay shall be provided in all MCC below 100 Amps
and earth leakage relay (with time delay) and overcurrent relay shall
be provided in MCC 100 Amps and above. Earth fault protection of
IDMTL type (earth leakage) and DTL type (overcurrent) shall be
provided for multiple equipment panel/board.
24.14. MCCs with main incoming circuit protectors rated below 100 Amp
Trip shall be of the wall mounting type, and shall employ power
distribution panel boards for branch circuits together with starters,
protective devices and indicating instruments.
TS/M/S64/24 2602542S/AC
24.15. Motor control centres with current or voltage operated earth leakage
circuit breakers for protection of branch circuits feeding motors or
other air conditioning and mechanical ventilation equipment will not
be accepted.
However, where earth fault protection is specified for motor branch

circuits earth fault relays shall be incorporated into the motor starters.
The fault level setting of these earth fault relays shall be field
adjustable.
24.16. The following indicating, measuring controlling and alarming devices

shall be incorporated into the MCC:
a) One (1) ammeter 4½" (113 mm) dial and one (1) voltmeter
4½" (113 mm) dial with selector switches for the indication
of current and voltage between phases, and between each
phase and neutral for the mains incoming power supply,
together with indicating pilot lights.
b) One (1) kilowatt meter 4½" (113 mm) dial for reading the rate
of electricity consumption at the main incoming panel.
c) One (1) rotary selector switch "REMOTE-OFF-LOCAL"

operation of the motor or equipment.
d) One (1) ammeter only with selector switch for measurement

of line voltage and phase current of each motor on each
starter panel. The selector switch shall be marked with
"Line1-Line2-Line3" indicating the phases.
e) One (1) set start/stop push buttons colour coded for each
motor on each starter panel.
f) One (1) set 24V LED pilot lights for the indication of "RUN-
STOP-TRIP" condition of each motor on each starter panel.
g) One (1) set or rotary selector switch for pumps operation, on

each of the condenser and chilled water pumps' starter panel.
h) One (1) Power Meter for measurement of line voltage, phase

current, kW, kWh, Power factor, Frequency etc. for each
incoming feeder and starter panel. Current Transformer
include power meter shall have an accuracy of CL 0.5 or
better
TS/M/S64/25 2602542S/AC
i) spare MCCBs as specified.
j) One set additional Power meter for incoming feeder for

measurement of line voltage, phase current, kW, kWh, Power
factor, Frequency.c. for each incoming feeder. Current
Transformer include power meter shall have an accuracy of
CL 0.5 or better
24.17. The "BAS-AUTO-OFF-LOCAL" operations at the MCC shall be

interpreted as follows:
a) "BAS/REMOTE" means the starting of motor or equipment

can be started at the BAS console or the supervisory control
panel through IMSS.
b) "OFF" means the complete power cut-off of motors.
c) "LOCAL" means the starting of motor or equipment shall be

started at the Motor Control Centre and it could not be started
at the BAS console or the supervisory control panel of IMSS.
25. MCC Tests
25.1. Delivery Test
After the equipment has been erected on site, and before final
connection to supply, the Sub-Contractor shall at his own expense:
(a) to arrange with the EMA/Employer/Consultant to carry out

the necessary testing
(b) to carry out all necessary adjustments and/or tests necessary

to demonstrate that the equipment complies with the
requirements of this Specification with his own equipment, in
the presence of and to the satisfaction of the S.O.. Such tests
shall include:
i) Demonstration that all equipment are installed and all

wiring connected, so that the board functions as
required.
ii) Tests of accuracy of all measuring instruments.
iii) Insulation resistances between phases, between each

phase and neutral, and between each phase, neutral
and earth with circuit breakers closed.
TS/M/S64/26 2602542S/AC
iv) Insulation resistance across breaks in all circuit
breakers, with the breaker open and with all
equipment installed.
v) Power - frequency voltage tests, in accordance with

clause 63 of B.S. 116:
Copies of test sheets, showing the results of all test carried out in
accordance with this section of the Specification, shall be submitted in
Triplicate, to the S.O..
25.2. Routing Tests
The Sub-Contractor shall submit certified test sheets showing details

of all routing tests applied, during manufacture, to the switchboards
and the individual components thereof. Without in any way affecting
the generality of this Clause such test shall include the following
clauses relating to switchgear:
a) Operating test, consisting of fifty operations of the operating

mechanisms performed with the closing device.
b) Millivolt drop test, or resistance test at the rated current of the

equipment across all contacts individually, and as a complete
unit as a check against temperature rise type test if applicable.
The record taken on the type test shall be taken as datum if
applicable.
c) Tests on each switching unit to determine the satisfactory

operation of trip coil or coils at the minimum and the normal
tripping voltage.
25.3. Type Tests
The switchboards, ie MCCs, shall be capable as a whole of

withstanding without damage the electrical, mechanical and thermal
stresses produced under short circuit conditions equivalent to the
interrupting capacities of RMS Symmetrical Amperes at 400 Volts
A.C. of the incoming breakers for 3 sec. and shall comply with all
requirements of B.S. 162. In addition to details of type tests for
making and breaking capacity, as required under this Clause of the
Specification, the Sub-Contractor shall submit certified details of type
tests for mechanical endurance and temperature rise from each type of
switching equipment included in the Contract, such test to be carried
out in accordance with the requirements of their relevant British
Standard Specifications.
TS/M/S64/27 2602542S/AC
Switchboard manufacturer shall be required to submit two (2) sets of
detail switchboard construction drawings approved and endorsed by
his principal to ensure the switchboards are constructed and
manufactured according to the type test requirements and a letter of
undertaking for each type tested switchboard.
All parts of the MCC shall be subjected to type tests to verify

compliance with the relevant BS standard. The type test shall include
verification of temperature rise limit, dielectric properties, short circuit
strength, continuity of protective circuit, clearance and creepage
distances, mechanical operation and degree of protection.
The Sub-Contractor shall submit type test certificates issued by

independent testing authority which shall be a member of the
Associated of Short Circuit Testing Authority (ASTA).
25.4. Frame Construction
a) MCC/Main switchboard frame shall be fabricated from not

less than 12 B.G. (2.5 mm thick) steel sheet pressed or rolled
to shape. All joints shall be neatly welded and finished flush
with the adjacent surfaces by grinding and/or machining. No
joints shall be located on a corner and all base edges shall be
lipped.
b) Structural members and bracing where necessary shall be

welded or bolted to the frame.
c) Each cubicle shall be of standard size, uniform in height, width

and depth.
d) Each cubicle shall be adequately ventilated and the interior of

each cubicle shall be dust, insect and vermin proof.
25.5. Doors and Panels
a) Doors and instrument panels shall be constructed with not less

than 12 SWG (2.5 mm thick) steel sheet pressed or rolled so
that edges are given a neat round finish and shall be reinforced
with a suitable frame welded to the inside folded edge of the
door. An approved stiffener shall be welded to the inside of
each door and/or panel.
b) The side, back and top panels as well as the front panel shall
be removable to provide access.
TS/M/S64/28 2602542S/AC
c) The doors and panels shall be seated on a neoprene gasket
cemented to the frame. Doors shall hang on substantially
concealed type hinges and fitted with nickel or chrome plated
automobile type door handles which shall be fitted with
suitable toggle to operate the rods so as to latch with suitable
slots on both the top and bottom of the switchboards.
Minimum size of the latching rods shall be 9.5 mm diameter or
19 mm x 4.8 mm flat and they shall be adequately guided by
brackets space not more than 450 mm centres. The latching
rods and associated brackets shall be cadmium plated. The
instrument panel compartments of the switchboards shall have
hinged doors and countersunk cadmium plated fixing screws.
d) All front side and top panels shall be constructed in a manner

similar to that specified for doors mentioned above. They
shall be fitted from the inside of the switchboards by means of
studs and cadmium plated washers and nuts.
25.6. Base Plate and Insulation Panels
a) The MCC/switchboard shall be of the front access type.
b) All equipment shall be mounted on rigid base plates made of

not less than 12 B.G. (2.5 mm thick) sheet steel with folded
edges and welded stiffeners wherever necessary. Whenever
insulating panels are required to mount special equipment they
shall be of high quality black bakelite, polished on the front
and sprayed with four (4) coats of matt white on the back. All
edges must be cut straight and squared and shall be chamfered
on the front edge with 3.2 mm chamfer. Any defective or
damaged panel shall be rejected and the Sub-Contractor shall
replace it at his own expense.
25.7. Finishing and Metal Work
a) Panel work of the MCC/switchboards shall be finished

smooth. All metal work shall be rust inhibited and have baked
enamel finish of dark admiralty grey, externally and white
internally.
b) The interior of the MCC/switchboard shall be illuminated by

low voltage lamps, which will be switched on when any
portion of the cubicle is opened to provide adequate lighting
on all equipment to which access has been gained.
TS/M/S64/29 2602542S/AC
c) After erection on site and after all inspection and tests have
been carried out, the Sub-Contractor shall thoroughly clean all
parts, apply an additional coat of anti-corrosive structural
priming paint to any part of the originally painted surfaces that
have been scratched or otherwise marked and also apply at
least one additional finishing coat as specified.
25.8. Busbar
a) The design of the air-insulated busbar shall comply with B.S.

159, B.S. 1432 and/or B.S. 1433. They shall be of hard
drawn high conductivity copper of adequate rectangular cross-
section as determined in accordance with Singapore Standard
SS 638 or IEE regulations for the electrical equipment of
buildings to carry continuously the currents required or as
detailed elsewhere in this Specification or accompanying
Drawings. In any case, a current density of 155 amperes per
sq. m (1,000 amperes per sq. in.) of cross sectional area shall
not be exceeded.
b) Busbars and links shall be covered with plastic sheathing,

coded to comply with the standard colour code.
c) All joints in busbars shall be bolted or clamped with contact

surfaces suitably prepared to prevent oxidation in service.
Joints in copper busbar shall have tinned surfaces. They shall
be rigidly supported to as to withstand any mechanical forces
to which they may be subjected both during transport, erection
and normal operation.
d) Busbar shall be supported on glass fibre reinforced polyester

blocks or epoxy-resin blocks or resin bounded paper or resin
bonded laminated-wood or other approved insulating
materials. The busbar supports shall be securely bolted to the
structural frame of the cubicle. A neutral busbar shall be of
the same cross-section as that for the phases. All bolts
connections shall be secured by lock nuts.
e) The minimum busbar clearances between phases and between

phases and earth shall not be less than 38 mm and 32 mm
respectively.
f) Busbars to MCCBs or other apparatus shall be made of

circular busbars covered with Nylex tubing or rectangular
section busbars covered with plastic sheathing in
corresponding phase colour and terminated in core grip cable
sockets or other approved termination.
TS/M/S64/30 2602542S/AC
g) All screws, bolts, washer and similar securing materials used
for the construction of the switchboard shall be cadmium
plated.
h) All contact parts of the busbars and connections shall be

sanded and coated with thin coat of chemically inert petroleum
jelly.
25.9. Insulation
a) The clearance and insulation shall be such as to

withstand the standard high voltage test on the
switchgear.
b) All insulation used shall be of the best quality and

sufficiently strong to withstand all stresses which may
be imposed on it in the ordinary erection and
operation of the plant. Test results shall be submitted.
c) Where insulators are cemented or jointed to metal

parts, such jointing shall be of such a nature that no
dangerous stresses are set up on the insulators by the
unequal expansion or contraction of the insulation and
the metal through range of temperature up to 40°C.
d) Attention is drawn to the possibility of bakelised paper

being damaged by arching if unprotected with
consequent cracking, and unless arc controls are
fitted, such bakelised paper shall be protected by a
porcelain shroud or other approved means. The
Tenderer shall state the protective means for
protection.
e) Arrangements must be made to ensure that metal parts

attached to bushings are maintained at fixed potential
under all conditions of operation.
25.10. Phasing
a) Phase rotations shall be strictly maintained throughout

the project, and shall comply with the requirements of
B.S. 158.
b) Phase distinguishing colours shall be RED, YELLOW

and BLUE.
TS/M/S64/31 2602542S/AC
25.11. Earthing
a) All metal parts of the switchboard and associated

equipment shall be bonded and connected to a main
earthing bar running throughout the entire length of
the switchboard.
b) All earthing conductors shall be permanently

connected to the main earthing bar.
c) All earthing provisions shall be made strictly in

accordance with the requirements of EMA and it shall
be the Sub-Contractor's responsibility to fully acquaint
himself of all such requirements.
25.12. Neutral Links
a) Neutral links of incoming breakers shall be easily

accessible and removable.
b) Neutral links of all outgoing moulded case circuit

breakers shall be removable and accessible from the
front.
25.13. Cable Entries
a) The switchboards shall house all necessary boxes,

glands, etc. mounted vertically and arranged for front
and rear access and connections. Provision for busbar
connection to be done by Sub-Contractor.
b) Paper insulated lead-sheathed steel tape wire

armoured or PVC/SWA/PVC cables shall be bottom
entries unless otherwise stated, whereas PVC/PVC
and MICC cables shall be top entries.
c) Cable boxes for termination of paper insulated lead-

sheathed steel tape wire armoured cables shall be
mounted at base of the split type manufactured from
good quality cast iron free from blow-holes complete
with filling orifice, drain plugs, expansion dome, brass-
cone shaped wiping gland of appropriate size, armour
clamp and of such design as is suitable for attachment
to the equipment served and such as to permit cable
conductors to be formed into equipment terminals
without undue bending.
TS/M/S64/32 2602542S/AC
d) Connections from switchboards gears to the busbar
trunking shall be top entries and switchboard stubs
shall be included in the switchboard design.
25.14. Terminal Strips and Wiring
a) All incoming and outgoing and control circuits shall be

wired to an approved centralized terminal strip, and
the equipment at the inside of the cubicle shall be run
via wiring channels and wiring outside the channels
shall be run neatly and taped to the approval of the
S.O.. All wires shall be terminated with approved
cable lugs, and separate cable lugs shall be used for
each individual wire.
b) All wires shall be colour coded and shall have

numbered ferrules at both ends. The ferrules shall be
of white insulating materials having a glossy finished
with the characters indelibly marked in black.
Additional red ferrules marked "Trip" shall be fitted to
the wires inter-connecting the relay trip contacts and
the shunt release coils.
c) All fuses and links shall be of the bakelite HRC type

category 440/AC 4 class Q to B.S. 88 or IEC 60269
d) All wiring shall be arranged in a regular manner with

bends set at 90°C and securely held in position with
suitable clips and where convenient shall be installed in
the uprights and/or backstays, insulating bushes being
used where necessary. They shall be formed in a neat
and systematic manner.
e) Meter wiring of the switchboard shall be carried out in

PVC insulated flame-proof switchboard cables of size
not less than 1.5 sq. mm and enclosed in flexible
plastic conduit. All meter wiring shall be of similar
colours to those of the respective busbars etc., to
which connections are made.
TS/M/S64/33 2602542S/AC
26. Cabling, Trunkings, Cable Trays and Conduits
26.1. Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings or Specification, all power

cables between starters and motors shall be in copper of 600/1000 V
voltage grade, PVC insulated pvc sheathed cables to BS 6004 or SS
50. They shall be installed on galvanised cable tray, or in galvanised
steel conduit. Where the cables on trays are installed less than 1.2m
above floor level they shall be protected with galvanised steel cover.
All cabling inside Chiller Plant Rooms for pumps, fans and other
equipments shall be PVC/PVC insulated cables except for chillers, it
shall be XLPE/PVC insulated cables. All cabling for equipments with
emergency power supply shall be Fire Resistant cables.
26.2. Where PVC/SWA/PVC cables are indicated in the drawings, they

shall be of copper and comply with BS 6346 (600/1000 V grade). All
underground cables shall be PVC/SWA/PVC cables and terminated
with BICC gland.
26.3. Where mineral insulated copper sheather (MICS) cables are indicated
in the drawings they shall comply with BS 6207: Part 1. MICS
cables shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
instruction using proprietary fittings and accessories.
26.4. All power cabling sizes shall unless other wise indicated in the
drawings be adequately sized to cater for the normal current rating
and starting current of the equipment without undue overheating and
stress.
26.5. Termination of power cable into motors or panel shall be through

approved type of cast metal boxes with pvc or brass glands and
proper cable sockets.
26.6. All power cables shall be fixed on cable tray with approved pvc or
brass saddles and clips at not more than 300 mm intervals.
26.7. All fire resistance type multi-core cables used shall conform to IEC
60331 and BS 4066.
26.8. All underground cables shall be PVC/SWA/PVC cables and

terminated with BICC gland.
26.9. All cabling for pumps, and other equipments shall be PVC/PVC
insulated cables. All cabling for equipments with emergency power
supply shall be MICS/PVC insulated cables.
TS/M/S64/34 2602542S/AC
26.10. All cables shall be properly labelled by means of cable markers and
cable ties shall be used to identify each set of cables.
26.11. All trunkings and cable trays shall be electro-galvanised and the
thickness of trunkings and cable trays shall be as follows:
Size of Trunking Thickness of Trunking
50 x 50 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
50 x 75 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
50 x 100 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
50 x 125 mm 1.422 mm (17 SWG)
50 x 150 mm 1.422 mm (17 SWG)
50 x 200 mm and above 1.626 mm (16 SWG)
Size of Cable Tray Thickness of Cable Tray
50 mm 0.914 mm (20 SWG)
100 mm 0.914 mm (20 SWG)
150 mm 0.914 mm (20 SWG)
200 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
250 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
300 mm 1.219 mm (18 SWG)
375 mm and above 1.626 mm (16 SWG)
26.12. All metal parts, piping, etc, should be bonded to the earthing point by
means of minimum 6 mm² PVC insulated earth cable.
TS/M/S64/35 2602542S/AC
26.13. All metal conduits shall be galvanised steel BS 4568, class 4
manufactured and tested in accordance with IEC 61386. Minimum
size of conduit shall be 20 mm diameter. Space factor for cable in
conduits shall not exceed 0.4 (40%). All metal conduits shall be of
heavy-gauge type. All conduits shall be run neatly, concealed where
possible, with runs truly horizontal or vertical or parallel to walls
where conduits run in floors. Conduits shall be securely fixed with
saddles and round head screws. Powered type of fittings will not be
permitted. From outlet to outlet there shall be not more than four (4)
normal bends or their equivalent. Inspection type conduit accessories
shall be used throughout. Conduits shall be fixed in position before
cables are drawn into them. The entire length of all cables shall be
enclosed in conduit. Junction boxes shall be used at bends and "t"
junctions. Elbows and tees will not be accepted.
26.14. Flexible conduits which are exposed to weather or dampness shall be

of water-proof type with proper seals at connections to GI conduit
and motor terminal box. Ordinary flexible conduit wrapped with PVC
tape will not be accepted.
26.15. All circular junctions boxes, pull boxes, inspection elbows, solid
elbows shall be of malleable iron type and of standard pattern with
spout to BS 4568. All access covers for these accessories shall be
provided with gaskets and lids.
26.16. Connections to all equipment subject to movement shall be in flexible

conduit. Where they are exposed to water, oil or to the weather, the
flexible conduit shall be of extruded pvc sheathed. Normal galvanised
steel flexible conduit will not be acceptable.
26.17. Connections to the water tank's electrodes shall be of extruded pvc

sheathed type flexible conduit.
26.18. All conduits, flexible conduits, cable tray and trunking shall be sealed
with rockwool with air tight when passing through any compartment,
between cold and warm area and from above ceiling to below ceiling
TS/M/S64/36 2602542S/AC
26.19. All conduit and trunking shall be provided with saddles and bracket at
not more than 1 m interval.
a) They shall be fitted with roller or deep groove ball bearings at

the driving end and deep groove ball bearing at the non-
driving end.
Motor driving equipment giving rise to end thrust shall be

equipped with bearings designed to counter unbalanced end
thrust.
Bearings shall be selected for the duty in accordance with ISO

recommendations and shall have a minimum life of 20,000
hours.
b) Motors shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of

BS 2613 and BS 4999.
c) Where they are installed outdoor or exposed to the weather,

they shall be of minimum IP 55.
27.1. All incoming and outgoing and control circuits shall be wired to an
approved centralized terminal strip, and the equipment at the inside of
the cubicle shall be run via wiring channels and wiring outside the
channels shall be run neatly and taped to the approval of the S.O.. All
wires shall be terminated with approved cable lugs, and separate cable
lugs shall be used for each individual wire.
27.2. All wires shall be colour coded and shall have numbered ferrules at
both ends. The ferrules shall be of white insulating materials having a
glossy finished with the characters indelibly marked in black.
Additional red ferrules marked "Trip" shall be fitted to the wires inter-
connecting the relay trip contacts and the shunt release coils.
27.3. All fuses and links shall be of the bakelite HRC type category 440/AC
4 class Q to B.S. 88.
27.4. All wiring shall be arranged in a regular manner with bends set at
90°C and securely held in position with suitable clips and where
convenient shall be installed in the uprights and/or backstays,
insulating bushes being used where necessary. They shall be formed
in a neat and systematic manner.
TS/M/S64/37 2602542S/AC
27.5. Meter wiring of the switchboard shall be carried out in PVC insulated
flame-proof switchboard cables of size not less than 1.5 sq. mm and
enclosed in flexible plastic conduit. All meter wiring shall be of
similar colours to those of the respective busbars etc., to which
connections are made.
27.6. All terminals shall be fitted with brass washers and securely fixed with
lock nuts to an approved type of terminal block placed in an easily
accessible position for testing at site.
27.7. No connectors or soldered joints shall be permitted in the wiring.
27.8. Power cable and control cable shall be installed in separate

conduit/trunking.
28. Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB)
28.1. General
a) Moulded case circuit breakers shall conform to the latest

British Standard BS 3871 part 2 or NEMA Standard AB1 and
U/L listed.
b) All MCCB shall have minimum interrupting capacities of

R.M.S. symmetrical amperes at 400 Volts A.C. for 3 sec.
c) All MCCBs in switchboard or distribution panel board shall be

of the same make.
d) All MCCBs of 600 AF and above shall be provided with easy

operating handles.
e) All MCCBs feeding to feeder/plug in bus-ways shall be of the

current limiting type.
28.2. Operation
Moulded case circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle type

handle and shall have a quick-make over-centre switching mechanism
that is mechanically trip free from the handle so that the contacts
cannot be held-closed against short circuits and abnormal currents.
Tripping due to overload or short circuit shall be clearly indicated by
the handle automatically assuming a position midway between the
manual "ON" and "OFF" positions. All latch surfaces shall be as
constructed that they open, closed and trip simultaneously.
TS/M/S64/38 2602542S/AC
28.3. Construction
a) Each of these breakers shall provide inverse time delay and

instantaneous circuit protection by means of thermal magnetic
element. Ambient compensation shall be accomplished by a
secondary bi-metal that will allow the breaker to carry rated
current between 25°C and 50°C with tripping characteristics
that are approximately the same throughout this temperature
range.
b) Breakers shall be completely enclosed in a moulded case.

Non-interchangeable trip breaker shall have their cover sealed;
whereas interchangeable trip breaker shall have the trip unit
sealed to prevent tampering. Contacts for circuit breaker shall
be of non-welding silver or silver alloy.
c) Manual trip button and front-adjustable magnetic trip device

shall be incorporated in the moulded case circuit breaker.
d) Arcing shall be extinguished rapidly and effectively by Arc-

extinguishing device, in normal switching as well as protective
tripping, to minimise deterioration of contacts and adjacent
e) Terminals shall be constructed to assure electrical efficiency

and reliability, with minimised possibility of localised heating.
f) Trip indication shall be by handle position mid-way between

'ON' and 'OFF'. To reset the trip mechanism, the handle shall
be moved to extreme 'OFF' and 'ON' position.
g) For current limiting (CL) moulded case circuit breakers, the

current limiting breakers shall be fuseless type and shall have
the same operation as specified above. They shall meet the
IEC requirements and shall be UL listed. All three phases
shall be opened simultaneously under fault conditions. The
breakers shall have interrupting ratings as low as 10KA rms,
sym. on systems capable of delivering fault currents as high as
200KA, rms, sym. The contact opening and are extinguishing
shall be less than ¼ cycle to reduce and limit peak let-through
current and let-through energy.
TS/M/S64/39 2602542S/AC
29. Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers
29.1. General
Low voltage air-circuit breaker shall be of metal-clad, flush mounted

horizontal draw-out isolation type. They shall comply fully with IEC
60947, B.S. 4752 and applicable part of B.S. 116 and B.S. 936 and
shall have a rupturing capacity of not less than 65KA or calculated
fault values using transformer and cables impedance whichever is
greater at volts A.C. 50 HZ for 3 sec. in accordance with the above
specifications certified by ASTA or KEMA or other recognised
testing authority.
Low voltage air-circuit breaker shall incorporate direct acting tripping

device which shall operate at 15% or 200% of the rated current.
29.2. Construction
Each air circuit breaker shall be self-contained with specifically

designed rollers, runner rails and interlocks and housed in a separate
completely zoned "Enclosed Ventilated" metal clad switchboard
compartment.
The circuit shall comprise fixed and moving main arcing contacts of
adequate rating to ensure that no overheating, damage or
deterioration will arise when carrying continuously full rated current.
The contacts shall be individually spring loaded and hard silver plated,
so arranged that electro-magnetic forces arising from under fault
conditions do not tend to reduce contact pressure.
The main contacts shall be arranged to give a double break in each

pole. Auxiliary arcing contacts shall be provided with renewable arc
resisting alloy tips arranged to close before and open after the main
contacts.
Each pole of the breaker shall be equipped with individual arc chutes
with specially designed baffles and splitter to provide effective and
efficient electro-magnetic arc control at all values of load current.
Any arc caused by the opening of the breaker under maximum fault
conditions shall be completely contained in the chute with no
possibility of a "Flashover" between phases or between any phase and
neutral or between adjacent earthed metal. The complete chute
assembly shall be easily removed for routine inspection and
maintenance of the chute and contacts.
TS/M/S64/40 2602542S/AC
Safety screening shutters of insulation materials to prevent access to
live connections shall be actuated automatically with the circuit
breaker isolated and withdrawn. Provisions shall be made for
padlocking the safety screening shutters when the breaker is
completely withdrawn.
Auxiliary switches, relay isolating plugs and sockets, and contactors

as necessary for the proper operation of the circuit breaker, trip coils,
electrical interlocks, and "operation status' indication shall be
provided. In addition to those required for the functions covered in
this specification, provision shall be made for extending the number of
auxiliary switches on each circuit breaker to cover possible future
alarm or signalling circuit requirements. Auxiliary switches shall be of
robust double breaker design, easily accessible for maintenance,
having adequate current ratings to carry the connected loads.
Earth terminals shall be provided at the rear of the withdrawable

breaker housing. This connect to a plug and socket contact to
provide an earth connection to the moving breaker portion. Contact
shall be maintained in the breaker isolated position.
Mechanical interlocking shall be provided to prevent:
a) opening of cubicle door until breaker is fully isolated
b) withdrawal of plugging of the circuit breaker in the closed position
c) plugging until the cubicle door has been closed and locked
d) closure unless either fully plugged or fully isolated
29.3. Operation
The circuit breaker of stored energy spring manually charged type

with manual release of the spring by means of the "Close" push
button. It shall incorporate an interlock which prevent a close
operation until spring is fully charged. Tripping shall be carried out
means of a 'trip' button, operation of overcurrent trip and shunt trip
release. The speed of closing and opening of the circuit breaker shall
be independent of the operation. Breaker 'ON' - 'OFF' and spring
'Charged' -'Discharged' indications shall be provided.
TS/M/S64/41 2602542S/AC
The shunt trips coils for operating the release mechanism of the circuit
breakers shall be controlled by push-button and/or circuit closing
relays. They shall be designed for operation from a supply source.
The mechanism shall be stable and not capable of being opened by
shocks or jam. The design of the trip coil shall be such that the trip
plunger shall be operated immediately there being no delay due to the
building up of the coil field to maximum value. The use of fibre in the
construction of the trip coils will not be acceptable, being preferred
that the trip coils be wound on a high grade bakelite on mica former.
The operation mechanism and the carriage or hinged panel shall be so

interlocked that it is not possible to withdraw or replace the circuit
breaker while the breaker is in the closed position, so that it is not
possible to close the breaker while the carriage or hinged panel is in
any position between "fully isolated' and "full home" or vice versa.
Provision shall be made so that it is possible to operate the breaker
mechanism, if required for inspection and testing purposes, when the
breaker is fully isolated. Provision shall also be made to prevent the
breaker being accidentally pulled completely off the guide rails.
30.1. Corners and bases shall be coloured in accordance with the following
code:
Colour Function
White 5A fuse
Blue 15A fuse
Yellow 20 fuse
Red link
30.2. Descriptive labels shall be fitted, adjacent to all fuses and links.
30.3. The terminal strip shall be numbered and schedule so as to identify the
particular circuits without difficulty. The same numbers and reference
letters identifying circuits and/or components of the equipment shall
be shown on the wiring diagram which is to be supplied by the Sub-
Contractor.
TS/M/S64/42 2602542S/AC
30.4. The interior of each piece of equipment shall be clearly marked to
show the phases and to this end either coloured plastic discs screwed
to fixed components or identification by means of colour plastic
sleeving shall be employed. Plastic tape will not be permitted.
31. Labels
30.1. All equipment shall be clearly labelled in accordance with regulations,

and to indicate its functions by means of engraved traffolyte ivorine
labels (Block in white lettering for normal supply, Red in white
30.2. Each circuit breaker, switch, switch-fuse, fuse, selector switch,

indicating light, push button, instrument, etc. shall be labelled
indicating its rating, function, designation. In addition warning signs
marked "400 volts Danger" manufactured to standard design and
colour shall be suitably mounted and fixed on the back of the
incoming cubicles on the front of each switchboard and on the door of
the switchroom. The marking shall be in accordance with BS 171
clause 79.
32. Current Transformers (C.T.)
32.1. Current transformers necessary for the operation of instruments and

meters shall be of "straight through" type, with accuracy not less than
0.5 class 'C' for measuring, class '0.5' for metering and class 'S' for
protection as per SS 638.
32.2. Current transformers shall be adequately rated in V.A. to carry the

shall comply with the latest EMA requirements.
32.3. Current transformers shall be adequately supported and installed as to

permit easy access and to be readily replaceable, if necessary, without
dismantling of adjacent equipment.
TS/M/S64/43 2602542S/AC
33.1. Instruments and meters for external panel mounting shall be flush
mounting, square or rectangular type with moulded plastic
escutcheons and shall conform to the requirements.
33.2. Reading scales in kilo-watt hour meters shall be in multiple of ten

(10).
33.3. All instruments shall be to B.S. 89 1st grade, moving iron spring
controlled with 100 mm diameter dials (240° scale) with external zero
adjustment. Integrating meters shall be to B.S. 37 part 1 and 2 and
part 4 with cyclometer registers and shall be calibrated for use with
their respective current transformers. They shall be fully tropicalised.
33.4. Voltmeters shall incorporate selector switches to enable phase to

phase and phase to neutral voltage to be read. Ammeters shall have
selector switches to read all the line currents. Selector switches shall
be of approved rotary type.
34. Over Current Relays
34.1. The over current relays shall be IDMTL adjustable current setting
between 50% to 200% of rated values and adjustable time lag settings
of 0 to 3.0 seconds; instantaneous high set elements shall be provided
for each main circuit breaker.
34.2. The relays shall be of the surface mounted and housed in a totally
enclosed dust-proof switchboard module.
provided.
The relays shall be heavy pattern, unaffected by external vibration, fully

tropicalised and capable of operation in any position.
35. Earth Fault Relays
35.1. The earth fault relays shall incorporate adjustable current setting
between 5% to 40% in steps of 5% and adjustable time lag 0 to 1 sec.
35.2. The relays shall be of the flush pattern and housed in removable dust-
proof sheet metal casings provided with viewing glass or clean plastic.
TS/M/S64/44 2602542S/AC
provided to show a fault condition.

Indicating lamps shall be the LED 24 volts type. The lamp shall be easily
37. Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB), Contactors, Isolators, etc
Moulded case circuit breakers, contactors, isolators and other items where
applicable and necessary shall be provided to comply with the relevant clauses
specified elsewhere in the Specification.
38. Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB)
38.1. General
Miniature circuit breakers shall comply with the latest British Standard
BS 3871 with latest amendments.
Unless otherwise stated, miniature circuit breakers and distribution

boards shall have minimum short-circuit capacities of R.M.S.
symmetrical amperes of 10 KA for power circuit distribution boards
at 240/415 Volt A.C.
All miniature circuit breakers (MCB) shall have tripping characteristic

type "3" curve.
Irrespective to the mounting positions, the miniature circuit breakers

shall be operated in accordance with the factory calibrated
characteristic.
All miniature circuit breakers shall be of positive plug-on or bolted-on,

no error connection type.
Miniature circuit breaker must have positive contact position

indicator.
TS/M/S64/45 2602542S/AC
38.2. Operation
Miniature circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle

and shall have a quick-made, positive quick-break over centre
switching mechanism that is mechanically trip free from the handle so
that the contacts cannot be held close against short circuits and over
current conditions. When the circuit breaks and over current
conditions. When the circuit breakers automatically trip, the
operating handle shall be assured a position between "ON" and "OFF"
positions. The contacts shall also be of positive quick-make and
quick-break on manual and automatic operation.
Contact position indicator (coloured) linking physically to the contacts

for the positive indication of isolation shall be provided.
Two and three pole circuit breakers shall be commonly trip with
38.3. Construction
Each pole of the circuit breakers shall have a factory calibrated

thermal bi-metal overcurrent element with inverse time delay
characteristic and a factory calibrated instantaneous magnetic tripping
device for short circuit condition. Ambient temperature compensation
shall be accomplished by a secondary bi-metal that shall allow the
circuit breaker to carry rated current between 25°C to 50°C with
tripping characteristics that are the same throughout this temperature
range, and that shall not cause nuisance tripping.
Circuit breakers shall be completely enclosed in a high dielectric

strength casing. The properties of the dielectric strength casing shall
not deteriorate with time.
Contacts of circuit breaker shall be non-welding silver-tungsten.
The high pressure plug-on busbar connector shall assure a solid

positive contacts without screw to tighten and no chance of error.
Load terminals shall be constructed to assure electrical efficiency and

reliability, with minimized possibility of localised heating, and for
straight in wiring.
Arcing shall be extinguished rapidly and effectively by arc chute

barrier, in normal switching as well as protective tripping, to minimize
Trip indication shall be by means of the handle position lying between

"ON" and "OFF". To reset the trip mechanism, the handle shall be
moved to extreme "OFF" position.
TS/M/S64/46 2602542S/AC
39. Testing
39.1. All electrical installation works shall be tested in accordance with the
requirements of SS 638 and the local authorities. All test results shall
be submitted to the S.O. for approval before turn-on of power.
39.2. The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for all Electrical tests at the
site and shall be represented by a capable during the whole of the
period required for the tests.
39.3. All materials and equipment supplied or erected under this Contract
which fail the tests shall be replaced or rectified at once by the Sub-
Contractor without cost to the Government and the tests shall be
repeated.
39.4. All tests shall be conducted in the presence of and to the satisfaction
of the S.O.. The Sub-Contractor shall supply all necessary
instruments, apparatus, connections, skilled and unskilled labour
required for the tests to the satisfaction of the S.O. and the cost of
doing so shall be included in the Contract price.
39.5. The Sub-Contractor shall make accurate records of all tests and shall
furnish test certificates and a schedule of the results in an approved
form. Four copies of such schedules and of each test certificate will
be required.
39.6. Any circuit or section of the installation failing to reach the required
standard for acceptance shall be made good by the Sub-Contractor
without cost to the Government.
39.7. The minimum of site tests to be carried out on each completed section
of the electrical installation shall be as follows:
a) Insulation resistance tests.
b) Continuity Tests.
c) Tests to prove correct operation of interlocks, tripping and

closing circuits, indications, etc.
d) Protective gear timing tests as may be necessary.
e) Test operation of alarm devices.
f) Rational tests on all motors.
TS/M/S64/47 2602542S/AC
g) Polarity tests to verify that single pole switches are installed in
the phased or live conductor of each circuit and not in the
neutral conductor.
h) A test to verify the continuity of all conductors in every ring

circuit, correct connections to terminals or all socket outlets
and effective bending to earth of each terminal and socket.
i) Insulation resistance tests to earth and between conductors

before and after fitting of lamps. The standard of acceptance
for electrical insulation tests shall be as recommended in the
latest Edition of the IEE Regulations for the Electrical
Equipment of the Building.
j) Insulation resistance tests on any electrical apparatus supplied

and/or erected under this contracts before and after
connecting such apparatus to the supply.
k) Earth continuity tests for each final sub-circuit and the

completed installation to ensure that the impedance of the
earth fault loop is such as to permit compliance with the
requirements of Section D and E of the latest Edition of the
IEE Regulations for the Electrical Equipment of Buildings.
40. Certification by Sub-Contractor
Before any turning-on of power can be made to the Installations, the Sub-
Contractor shall certify in writing to the S.O. that his electrical installation is
in full compliance with the Electricity Act Regulations and that it is safe for
turn-on. The certificate shall be signed by a EMA licensed electrical worker,
employed by the Sub-Contractor and qualified to sign for the capacity of the
installation involved. Test results shall accompany this certification.
41. Safety Notices
The Sub-Contractor shall provide and install the following notices and
equipment in the AHU Room.
A varnished and mounted on suitable hard backing and framed (in glass panel)
copy of the main single line diagram showing clearly the full details,
dimensions, layout of the switchboards as supplied and installed.
Solid rubber insulated mats of 1 meter wide and 9.5 mm thick complying with
B.S. 921 to the full length in front of every switchboard.
TS/M/S64/48 2602542S/AC
42. Changeover LCB and DB
The Sub-Contractor shall supply, deliver, install, test and commission,

Changeover Local Control Boards (LCB) and Distribution Board (DB) of a
type specified hereafter complete with suitable doors that allow easy access to
all components installed therein.
The DB shall design with spare ways for the distribution of the final circuit to
the condensing unit, FCUs and the change over panel. Indicating light (LED),
ELR and RCCB shall be designed for main and individual circuit protection.
The LCB shall design for the auto-change over c/w manual override to the
air-conditioning unit for 12hrs interval to areas that required 24hrs air-
conditioning operation with duty and standby air-conditioning units.
Indicating lights and room sensor shall be incorporated in the panel to indicate
the “Incoming/Outing Supply Available”, “Start”, “Stop”, “Trip” and “High
Temperature” of the air-conditioning units.
Where there is a “Trip” and “High Temperature” in the room, the standby
units shall cut-in automatically to back up the failed one. Strobe light and
buzzer c/w battery backup (minimum 24 hours in standby and 2 hours in
operating modes, respectively) shall be provided at outside of the room. Any
faults such as power tripping to the air-conditioning units and air-conditioning
unit fails to operate, etc. shall trigger the strobe light and buzzer.
Acknowledge and reset switches shall be provided at the LCB to silence the
buzzer and reset the system after validation check.
TS/M/S64/49 2602542S/AC
The following types shall be used (unless otherwise specified) :
Chilled
Rating V/P/Hz Chiller Pump Water & AHU FCU Cooling AHU (c/w Fan
Condenser (CAV) Tower VAV)
Water
Pumps
Below 230/1/50 - - - - - VSD c/w VSD c/w D.O.L.

0.7 kW D.O.L. D.O.L.
0.7 - 230/1/50 - D.O.L. VSD c/w D.O.L. D.O.L. VSD c/w VSD c/w D.O.L.
2.25 kW D.O.L. D.O.L. D.O.L.
2.26 – 400/3/50 - VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w Automatic
Star/Delta
7.5 kW solid solid state D.O.L. D.O.L.. D.O.L. D.O.L..
state soft soft starter
starter
7.6 - 400/3/50 - VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w
solid state
29.9 kW solid solid state solid state solid state solid state solid state soft starter
state soft soft starter soft soft starter. soft starter soft starter
starter starter.
30.0 kW
& Above 400/3/50 VSD / VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w VSD c/w
solid state
solid solid VSD c/w solid state solid state solid state solid state soft starter
state state soft solid state soft soft starter. soft starter soft starter
soft starter soft starter starter.
starter
a) All staircase pressurization fans to be of VSD operated with standby Solid State Soft Starter. Pressure sensor shall install to maintain the
pressure in the pressure staircase of not less than 50Pa.
TS/M/S64/50 2602542S/AC
SECTION 67 – INTERFACE FOR BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM
1. General
1.1 This section sets out the requirements for remote control and monitoring
of all mechanical systems by the Building Automation System (BAS).
1.2 The provisions specified herein to be made by the Sub-Contractor shall

be in addition to any provisions for localised control and monitoring
devices and systems specified elsewhere in the Specification. The
intention is to achieve comprehensive control and monitoring of all
mechanical and electrical systems by integrating all localised control and
monitoring systems with the BAS. Towards this end, the Sub-Contractor
shall cooperate and co-ordinate with the BAS contractor in such matters
as the installation of auxiliary devices, wiring identification and testing,
uniformity in control circuitry and the provision of all necessary data for
programming.
1.3 The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for all works and materials
necessary for the provisions of auxiliary devices as specified herein,
including the provisions of terminal blocks at each starter panel, switch-
board section and elsewhere as specified, the installation of sensors, and
wiring from such auxiliary devices and sensors to the terminal blocks.
1.4 The Sub-Contractor shall provide a separate section or compartment in
each starter panel or switchboard to house the terminal blocks mentioned
in the above paragraph. The compartment should be front access and
located at the bottom of the panel. For floor-standing panels, the
compartment shall be no less than 300mm above the floor, with the
section below it reserved for keeping of spares and tools. A separate
vertical cable-way shall be allowed for at one end of the entire panel for
cabling. A minimum of 25% spare terminal block shall be allowed for
additional interfacing requirements. The Sub-Contractor shall also
connect the designated BAS monitoring and control points to the
terminal blocks using approved control cables. All terminations shall be
clearly labelled. The BAS connecting panel shall be located at the pump
room.
1.5 The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that all BAS control and monitoring
devices installed by them are correctly terminated in the terminal blocks.
1.6 The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for and shall connect all
temporary connections across the terminal blocks mentioned above and
elsewhere if these connections are necessary for testing, commissioning
and temporary operation of any of the equipment installed by them. The
Sub-Contractor shall liaise with the BAS contractor to phase in the
functions of the BAS progressively.
TS/M/S67/1 2602542S/AC
2. Auxiliary Devices
Auxiliary devices shall be provided by the Sub-Contractor in the control circuitry

or elsewhere for the purpose of remote control and monitoring of the equipment
by BAS. The auxiliary devices shall be of the following:
2.1 Digital Input (DI)
Digital input in the form of voltage free, normally open contacts and
switches shall be provided by the Sub-Contractor for monitoring of
equipment by BAS. Where the contact cannot return to its normal
position after the alarm state has been restored to normal, the Sub-
Contractor shall provide for a manual reset facility to manually reset the
contact to its normal position. Also, if transducers are required to drive
these contacts and switches, the Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for
the provision of these transducers. All DIs must be electrically isolated
from power circuits.
2.2 Start/Stop Circuit
The Sub-Contractor shall provide start/stop circuits in the control

circuitry of equipment for remote start/stop by BAS.
2.3 Analog Input (AI)
Analog Input (AI) in the form of transducers and sensors shall be

provided and installed by the Sub-Contractor. The Sub-Contractor shall
be responsible for all work and material involved in the installation of
these AI devices, including the installation of wells in pipes and wiring
up to the BAS interfacing panels.
2.4 Current Transformer and Potential Transformer
Current and potential transformer of rating 0-5A and 230V:1V

respectively shall be provided by the Sub-Contractor for monitoring the
analogue value of current, voltage and power consumption. The
transducers (including wiring and conduits) to convert output of current
and potential transformer to BAS compatible signals shall be provided
and be installed by the Sub-Contractor up to the BAS interfacing panels.
TS/M/S67/2 2602542S/AC
3. Wiring
3.1 All wiring for BAS interfacing shall conform to the specification herein:
Digital Input (DI) : 0.6mm diameter, single twisted

pair, screen telephone cable.
Analogue Input (AI) : 0.9mm diameter, duo-twisted pair,

screen telephone cable.
Digital Output (DO) : 1mm sq PVC cables.
Electrical Input (EI) : 0.9mm diameter, single twisted

pair, screen telephone cable.
3.2 All cable screens for DI, AI & EI shall be left floating at the equipment
(auxiliary contacts, sensors etc) and shall be terminated in a common
screen terminal on the terminal block. The screens shall not be earthed.
3.3 All line valves shall come with limit switch, to connected to BAS.
4. BAS Points Schedule
4.1 The point schedule enclosed is for purpose of guidance of minimum

requirements. The Sub-Contractor shall allow cost in his Tender for
any further points/sensors/instruments to enable the system to operate
in its intended purpose of a complete optimum operating system.
4.2 The Point Schedule enclosed hereinafter shall be read in conjunction

with the Drawings and Specification.
4.3 The Sub-Contractor shall read the Specifications and Drawings

conjunction for the actual quantities.
TS/M/S67/3 2602542S/AC
SECTION 68 - PAINTING
1. General
1.1 The work to be painted shall include all equipment, duct work, piping,
fittings, valves, hangers, conduits, frameworks, switchboard, electrical
trunking, machinery, water tank, etc. and all work exposed to view. All
paints, enamel, etc. shall be approved brand of best quality and shall be
delivered to the site in the maker's containers with seal, etc., unbroken and
are clearly marked with the maker's name or trademark and a description
of the contents and colour.
1.2 The paints used in the works must be suitable for use in tropical climates,
with an addition of anti-fungus nature. The paint shall be of low VOC.
1.3 All materials for multiple coat work e.g. primers, undercoatings and
finishing coats, shall be obtained from the same manufacturer and shall be
those recommended by the manufacturer as suitable for application
together and for the type and duty of surfaces concerned.
1.4 No painting on exterior work to be done during wet weather, or upon

surfaces that are not thoroughly clean and dry.
1.5 During the execution of Painter's work the Sub-Contractor is held

responsible for taking all precautions necessary for the health and safety of
his workmen.
1.6 The paint shall be kept stirred during use and when more than one coat is
specified, subsequent coats shall not be applied until preceding coats have
thoroughly hardened.
1.7 All painting shall be carried out within seven (7) days of delivery and
erection on site. This requirement shall be strictly complied with.
2. Metal Surface
Primer for metal surfaces shall be red lead or chromate metal primer or other
approved equivalent. If the primer has thoroughly dried, apply one undercoat of
appropriate shade, allow at least 24 hours drying time under normal weather
conditions before application of each subsequent finishing coat. All galvanised
steel surfaces shall be primed with zinc chromate before application of the
finishing coats (minimum two coats).
TS/M/S68/1 2602542S/AC
3. Protection of Finishes
All polished or chromium plated iron or steel work shall have at least one coat of
protective finish at the manufacturers works and the Sub-Contractor shall maintain
this preservation until the work is finally painted or put into use.
4. Painting and Protection
4.1 The following items shall be painted to colours approved by the S.O.:
a) Sleeves and sheet metal casings
b) All pipe work including pipe fittings
c) All duct work
d) All metal work, hangers, conduits
e) Screw heads and means of fixing
f) Suppliers items
g) Galvanised steel
h) All work exposed to view
4.2 Before any painting is carried out the Sub-Contractor shall ensure that the
surface to be painted is clean, free of grease and rust as recommended by
the paint manufacturer. If necessary, degreasing and de-rusting shall be
employed.
4.3 Each coat of paint shall be applied by brush and when thoroughly dry,
smoothed with suitable abrasive paper or cloth before the next coat is
applied.
4.4 No painting or drying should be carried out in direct sunlight and due care
shall be taken during dusty or wet conditions.
4.5 All items subjected to corrosive air or other hazardous conditions shall be
specially treated and painted with suitable anti-corrosive paint as
recommended by the manufacturers.
4.6 Should any corrosion, or signs of faulty painting techniques become

apparent during the maintenance period, the Sub-Contractor will be
required to remove the defective paint work or component part at his own
cost and retreat and/or repaint it as directed and to the satisfaction of the
Superintending Officer.
TS/M/S68/2 2602542S/AC
4.7 All floors, ceilings, walls, fittings etc shall be protected by proper painters'
sheet and all paint spots and splashes be removed.
4.8 The painting shall be carried out as follows:
a) All pipe work and associated hangers, brackets, supports, sleeves,

etc shall be painted as follows :
1 coat - degreasing coat

1 coat - primer coat
1 coat - undercoat
2 coats - top coat hard matt finish paint
The first finishing coat shall be of a lighter shade of the final

finishing coat.
The finishing coats for all metal surfaces exposed to weather shall
be epoxy paints.
b) The direction of flow shall be indicated by an arrow stenciled in

black/white paint on the pipe.
c) All screw heads, wing nuts and other means of fixing shall be
painted at the time of installation and re-finished after the final
testing and commissioning is completed.
d) All manufactured items that are delivered in a painted condition

whether under or finish coated shall be prepared as mentioned
above and then re-painted as before. Special care shall be taken
with the painting of the underside of pumps, bases, etc. A layer of
bituminous material or roofing felt shall be laid on the base before
the item is installed and then trimmed to size.
e) All cut ends of galvanised steel and sheet metal work shall be
prepared as mentioned above and painted two coats of zinc
chromate paint.
f) All items that are considered liable to oil or grease splashes shall
be finished painted using two coats of the appropriate oil proof
paint.
TS/M/S68/3 2602542S/AC
5. Identification of Pipelines
5.1 The direction of flow shall be indicated by an arrow pencilled in

black/white paint on the pipe. The length of the arrow shall be :
a) For pipes 50 mm internal diameter and under, the arrow shall be

75 mm.
b) For pipes exceeding over 50 mm internal diameter and over, the

arrow shall be 150 mm.
5.2 All pipelines shall be identified to BS 1710.
PIPE
other other
150mm 150mm 150mm
approved approved
decorative decorative
A B C
colour colour
Pipe A B C
1. Chilled water Green White emerald Green

green and white
2. Condenser water Green White Green
3. Drainage Black Black Black
4. Cold Water Light Blue White Light Blue
5. Soil, Waste Black White Black

and Vent
6. Refrigerant Yellow Sea Green Yellow
5.3 Permanent labels eg "CHS", "CHR", "CNS", "CWS" "BAS", "Elect",

“ACMV-ELECT”, "TAS", "CCTV", etc shall be provided for the
identification of all pipes, trunking, etc. The labels shall be painted at every
5 metres interval.
TS/M/S68/4 2602542S/AC
6. Colour Scheme
6.1 All pipe work and equipment installed under this Sub-Contract shall be
painted in accordance with the following colour scheme:
Pipeline/Equipment Colour
Cold water service pipe Blue
Cold water rising main Blue
Hot water service pipe Insulation with Red and blue band
Gas pipe Yellow
Soil, waste & vent pipe Bituminous paint or as directed by

S.O..
Electrical Services Orange
Fire services and associated

equipment and pipe work Signal Red
Chilled water pipe Dark Green (Return line) and Light

Green (Supply line)
Condenser water pipe Dark Blue (Return line) and Light

Blue (supply line)
BAS services White
Control panels Light Grey
Duct work Beige
6.2 On completion, the Sub-Contractor shall make good all painting works
which have been damaged during the progress of works for the handing
over.
TS/M/S68/5 2602542S/AC
7. Directional Flow
When it is necessary to know the direction of flow of the fluid, this should be
indicated by an arrow as illustrated hereunder :
300mm 150mm
50mm
For pipes 150mm diameter For pipes under 150mm

& above including insulation diameter including
if used insulation if used
(a) Arrows shall be painted black.
(b) Arrows shall be readable from floor.
(c) Arrows shall be marked for every 5 m (15 feet).
8. Galvanising
8.1 All metals to be galvanised shall be of the full dimensions shown or

specified, and all punching, cutting, drilling, screw tapping and the
removal of burrs shall be completed before the galvanising process
commences.
8.2 All galvanising shall be done by the hot dip process with spelter not less
than 98 per cent of which shall be pure zinc. No alternative process may
be used without the approval of the S.O.. No components shall be
galvanised which are likely to come into subsequent contact with oil.
8.3 The galvanising shall be uniform, clean, smooth and as free from spangle
as possible. In the case of component parts the galvanizing shall not be less
than 85 microns in thickness.
8.4 All galvanised parts shall be protected from injury due to electrolytic
action, white rust and abrasion during the periods of transit, storage and
erection. Damaged area of the coating shall be touched up with an
approved zinc rich paint or other approved metallic compound.
8.5 Galvanising shall conform to BS 729.
TS/M/S68/6 2602542S/AC
SECTION 69 - BALANCING, TESTING & COMMISSIONING OF AIR-
CONDITIONING & VENTILATION
1. General Scope of Works
This section sets out the basic requirements for balancing, testing and
commissioning of the systems as specified within this Sub-Contract. All testing,
balancing, calibration, and setting of the equipment and controls associated with this
installation shall be performed with all the instruments and labour necessary to this
shall be supplied by the Sub-Contractor. The systems include:
a) Air Conditioning System

b) Mechanical Ventilation System
c) Laboratory Air-Flow Control System
d) Fume cupboard / Biological safety cabinet
e) Animal House Air-Flow Control System
f) Cold Rooms / Warm Room
g) Building Automation System
h) Chiller Plant Measurement and Verification System
2. The Sub-Contractor shall employ thoroughly competent and experienced personnel

to carry out all tests and shall comply with all rules and requirements of the Local
Authorities.
3. The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the complete and thorough testing,
commissioning, adjusting and balancing of the systems and equipment installed and
to bring into safe and reliable operation the entire Air Conditioning and Mechanical
Ventilation System and the other systems included in this Sub-Contract.
4. The Sub-Contractor shall notify the S.O. in writing of his programme to test and
commission equipment and systems at least seven (7) days before actual execution.
5. The Sub-Contractor shall prepare and provide printed testing and commissioning
record forms of approved format.
6. The Sub-Contractor shall submit two (2) copies of a written report on the results of
tests etc within seven (7) days of completion of such test, irrespective of test results.
7. All water pipes shall be hydrostatically tested at a pressure equal to 150 percent of
the maximum operating pressure or at 150 psi whichever is greater.
TS/M/S69/1 2602542S/AC
8. The test pressure should not be allowed to decrease by more than one (1) percent
over a 24-hour period. Leaks shall be repaired by re-welding, replacing of sections
or tightening of bolted flanges. Caulking of joints shall not be allowed.
9. The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that all pressure gauges, control valves, flow
switches, regulators joints and fittings which have operating pressure below the test
pressure are isolated.
10. All water for hydrostatic pressure testing of pipe work systems shall be chemically
treated with a suitable corrosion inhibitor. The chemically treated water shall
remain and totally filled each section of the system until all sections of the system
have been pressure tested and the complete system is ready for the pre-commission
cleaning operation.
11. After the pressure test all pipes shall be flushed clean in sections. The Sub-
Contractor shall ensure that flushing water do not pass through coils.
12. All strainers, tanks and valves shall be thoroughly cleaned.
13. All water circuits shall be balanced. The water circuit shall be so adjusted to enable
120% rated flow through the furthest cooling coil from the pump when the throttle
valve is in fully open position.
14. All coils and control valves shall be tested for pressure drop and flow rates against
the ratings given by the Sub-Contractor. Final assessment shall be done by checking
the air volumes, and entering/leaving conditions of the air.
15. The chiller sets shall be commissioned by qualified personnel. Detailed and
comprehensive commissioning procedures recommended by the chiller manufacturer
shall be strictly adhered to.
16. Standard procedures shall be complied with in the testing and commissioning of
AHU's fans, motors, cooling towers, pumps, chillers and other accessories. In the
event of conflict of testing and commissioning requirements between manufacturers'
and standard procedures, the more stringent requirement shall be adhered to.
17. All pumps shall be tested for proper alignment and flow rates at design heads. RPM
check shall also be made for excessive noise and leakage.
18. During the installation stage, all main duct work shall be pressure tested in sections.
TS/M/S69/2 2602542S/AC
19. Prior to the start up of air moving equipment, the Sub-Contractor shall ensure that
all ducts plenums, sound attenuators, duct accessories and AHU rooms are clean.
20. The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that all dampers and fire dampers in particular are
in the correct positions.
21. Air Handling Units, and fans shall be checked to ensure that the filters are clean and
all in position and that no air is bypassed. All duct connections shall be checked for
air tightness before balancing commences.
22. The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that the entire duct work is commissioned to allow
the designed maximum flow into each and every branch of duct work under all
operating conditions. Air quantities shall be set to designed figures with ± 10%
tolerance as given on the Drawing.
23. All fans shall be tested and commissioned in strict accordance to the manufacturer's
recommendations. The fan system shall be tested and commissioned for air
performance in accordance to the guidelines as set out in AMCA Fan Application
Manuals and AMCA Standard 210.
24. All registers, grilles, diffusers and dampers shall be correctly adjusted to give
required design air quantities or within ± 10 percent tolerance as indicated in the
Drawings.
25. All fixed dampers shall be set and the final position shall be clearly and permanently
marked. Variable Air Volume System shall be balanced by turning down all
thermostat settings or raise supply air temperature so that the controlled regulator
will allow full air flow.
26. Air movement in the conditioned spaces shall be as uniform as practicable and
temperature differential in the occupancy level shall not exceed 1°C.
27. The Sub-Contractor shall deploy at least 3 skilled and competent workers in air
conditioning and mechanical ventilation work on a full time basis for minimum two
(2) months after the Practical Completion Date, to attend to complaints relating to
poor performance of air diffusion and to re-adjust air diffusion equipment to suit the
different requirements of the conditioned spaces' occupants.
28. All control systems shall be calibrated under operating conditions until smooth and
accurate operation conditions are attained. Control settings shall then be
permanently marked on the control equipment. All calibration procedures shall be
properly and fully recorded.
TS/M/S69/3 2602542S/AC
29. The Sub-Contractor shall check, test and adjust each and every sensor, controller,
actuator and other accessories for the smooth and fine operation.
30. All necessary costs for the adjustments and replacements shall be borne by the Sub-
Contractor.
31. The Sub-Contractor shall conduct vibration level measurement of all equipment and
noise level measurement in various space.
32. Test carried out for the staircase pressurisation system shall be to the satisfaction of
the S.O.. All test procedure and method of testing shall be submitted to the S.O.
for approval before work commences.
Test shall include measurement of the following :
32.1 Static pressure within the staircase when all staircase doors are close.
32.2 Average air-flow velocity through doors when the ground floor entrance
and two or more doors are open.
33. The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for all electrical tests of all equipment
before turning on and shall be represented by a competent Electrical Engineer
during the whole of the period required for the tests. The Sub-Contractor shall
supply all necessary instruments, apparatus, labour for the tests to the satisfaction of
the S.O., the cost shall be borne by the Sub-Contractor.
34. The Sub-Contractor shall conduct Indoor Air Quality ( IAQ) test according to
SS554: Code of practice for indoor air quality for air-conditioned buildings before
occupied and after occupied.
35. The Sub-Contractor shall submit performance tests to ensure that the equipment
and systems perform to the requirements of the Specification.
36. The performance tests shall comprise of:
36.1 Chiller Sets
a) Full load current at maximum capacity at design water temperature

and specified fouling factors.
b) Minimum operating capacity without any surge or instability at

design condenser water temperature.
36.2 Cooling Towers
Leaving water temperature at design water flow rate and entering

temperature and at design ambient wet bulb condition.
TS/M/S69/4 2602542S/AC
36.3 Fans
Maximum air quantity delivery at maximum permissible fan settings, and at

rated motor duty.
36.4 Cooling Coils
Pressure drop and water carry over at maximum permissible face velocity.
36.5 Pumps
Maximum water quantity deliveries at design total dynamic head.
36.6 Treatment Devices
Water quality test report to equipment's standard.
37. Temperature and Humidity records shall be obtained for in selected areas served by
each AHU and charts labelled and presented to the S.O. before arrangement for
hand over. During the free maintenance period, such records on any other rooms
shall be obtained when required by the S.O..
38. For other works on the Fume Cupboard System, Cold Room System and Clean
Room System the testing and commissioning shall be as stated in their sections
within this Specification. In addition, all tests as recommended by their
manufacturers shall be carried out. All tests and commissioning shall be conducted
by skilled, competent and qualified personnel in specialised areas.
39. All Chiller plant measurement and verification system temperature sensors, flow
meter and power meter shall carry out monthly servicing and carried out yearly third
party re-certification with calibration report by accredited body.
TS/M/S69/5 2602542S/AC
SECTION 70 - SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACT
1. The Sub-Contractor shall state clearly in his Tender, the maintenance and
servicing charge per annum after the warranty and free maintenance period. This
price shall stay firm for at least fifteen (15) calendar months after the aforesaid
period and shall be based on the maintenance responsibilities specified for the
warranty period except the items that are otherwise stated. In addition, it shall
cover all trips by the Sub-Contractor to attend to any complaint calls in between
routine servicing.
2. The Employer does not bind itself to award the Maintenance and Servicing
Contract after the warranty period to the successful Tenderer.
3. After the warranty period and with the sufficient number of free maintenance
servicing provided by the Sub-Contractor, a maintenance agreement may be
signed between the Employer and the Sub-Contractor based on the accepted
servicing charge at the time of Tender.
4. Any work outside the scope of this maintenance agreement and materials and
spare parts supplied shall be additionally charged. The Sub-Contractor shall submit
a report together with an itemised quotation for the consideration and approval of
the Employer at the earliest instance.
5. Upon completion of routine servicing under the maintenance agreement and any
repair works as stated in the accepted quotations, the Sub-Contractor shall submit
an invoice for payment.
6. Either party of the Maintenance Agreement is required to give 30 days notice for
the termination of the same.
7. The Sub-Contractor shall keep adequate spare parts for the systems under his
maintenance to ensure that the machine down-time in the event of breakdowns
will be minimised.
8. The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for all damages caused to the installation
or the Employer property through the act of negligence of their workmen except
where it can be proven that it is no fault of theirs.
TS/M/S70/1 2602542S/AC
After the expiry of the Maintenance and Warranty Period of the installation, we offer our
comprehensive service and maintenance for a period of three (3) years in accordance with
the section on "Service and Maintenance" in the Specification for the sum per annum as
stated below.
System Cost Cost Per Annum (S$)
1st Yr 2nd Yr 3rd Yr 4th Yr 5th Yr

1. A/C and M/V System
2. BAS/IMSS
3. Cold Rooms
4. Heat Recovery System
5. Odour Control Systems
6. Air Cooled Chillers
7 Other Systems
…………………………………
…………………………………
Total $
TS/M/S70/2 2602542S/AC
Details and qualifications of works not included in this Comprehensive Servicing and
Maintenance Contract offered (if any)
......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
...................................................... ................................................
Name, Position & Signature Company Stamp & Date
of SUB-CONTRACTOR
...................................................... ................................................
Name, Position & Signature Date
of WITNESS
TS/M/S70/3 2602542S/AC
AREA)
PART IV-2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
2602542S/ME
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
1. General
1.1 The contents herein shall be read in conjunction with other sections of
the Specifications, Preliminaries and the accompanied drawing.
1.2 The tenderer's attention is drawn to the distinction that must be

observed between the drawings and the Specifications and that they
are well advised to seek clarification from the S.O. if in doubt of any
matters regarding interpretation of any sections of the Specifications
and drawings or discrepancies between the Specifications and
drawings before submission of the Tender Offer.
1.3 The work to be performed under this Sub-Contract consists of the

Design, Supply, Delivery, Installation, Painting, Testing, Commissioning
and fifteen (15) months free Comprehensive Maintenance and
Warranty from the latest date of the certified Substantial Completion
Certificate. The Sub-Contract Works comprising the following systems
and equipment which are further described in other sections of the
Specifications. The following Sub-Contract Works shall also perform in
accordance with the Conditions of this Sub-Contract, schedules, and
drawings.
a) Low Tension 400 V Systems
b) Earthing Systems
c) Computer Cablings and supporting system
d) Telephone Cablings and supporting system
e) Emergency Voice Communication System
f) Security Card Access System
g) Security Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) System
h) Master Antenna & Cable TV System
i) Lighting Management System
j) Power Monitoring System
k) Emergency Call System for handicapped toilets
l) Hearing Enhancement system
1.4 Tenderer must submit main offer fully complied with all Conditions of
Sub-Contract, the Specifications, Preliminaries, Schedules and
drawings, Appendices failing which may result in disqualification of the
tender on ground of not compliance to the Specifications and
Conditions of this Sub-Contract.
TS/1/1 2602542S/EL
2. Scope of Sub-Contract Works
The Sub-Contract Works are to be carried out and completed to the absolute
approval and satisfaction of the S.O. The Sub-Contract Works involved are
briefly described as follows:
2.1. High Tension 22 kV Systems (NOT USED)
a) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the complete

22 kV metalclad indoor switchgears, control panels and other
accessories needed for the complete installation.
b) Sealing and making goods of all cable entry/exit pipes and

openings with approved 4 hours fire rated fillings/waterproofing
compound.
c) Supply, install, test and commission of 22kV/433 V power

transformers including terminations at the transformer room.
Ratings refer to drawing.
d) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the 22 kV High

Tension power cables including the control cables, cable
supporting system from item 2.1(a) to item 2.1(c) and other
e) Supply, install, test and commission the earthing system for the
transformer units.
f) Supply labour and material to install the first aid chart, rubber
mat (1000mm (width) x 10mm (thick)), fire extinguisher, tool
cabinets, key box complete with locks and keys (18 sets),
framed single line drawing in the High Tension switchroom. The
length of the mat shall be throughout the entire length of the
switchgear units.
g) Supply labour and material to terminate, test and commission

the cable joint and termination. The works shall be carried out
by approved registered Cable Jointers. All the testing and
commissioning shall be carried out by approved and registered
Testing Engineer. All works necessary for to commission the
entire system shall be the responsibility of the Sub-Contractor.
The cost for the above works shall be included in the Sub-
Contract.
h) Supply, install, laid new drawpits and underground heavy duty

150mm UPVC pipes encased in concrete for abovementioned
22KV cables, supervisory cables and pilot cables complete with
MCTs and required structural works/opening/penetration to
cable trenches as shown in the drawings and referred to herein
this specification. Installation of weather resistance road
markers for all drawpits location are required.
TS/1/2 2602542S/EL
2.2. Low Tension 400 V Systems
a) Test and recommission the existing 415 volts fully type-tested

Main switchboards (Normal and Emergency).
b) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the sub-main

cabling MSB / EMSB including the cable supporting system and
other accessories needed for the complete installation. The
Sub-Contractor shall liaise and co-ordinate with other
Specialists on the termination of the cablings into the
switchboards.
c) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the sub-main

cabling and busbar trunking system from item 2.2(b) to all the
electrical sub-switchboards and distribution boards including
cable supporting system and other accessories needed for the
complete installation.
d) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the final sub-

circuit cablings to provide power supplies to the power points,
lighting fixtures and to all other electrical and communication
appliances and equipment including cable supporting system
and other accessories needed for the complete installation.
e) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the sub-main

and final sub-circuit cablings to provide power supplies to the
mechanical systems such as ACMV, domestic water pump
system, fire protection system etc. including cable supporting
system and other accessories needed for the complete
installation.
f) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the sub-main

cablings and sensing cablings to provide power supplies to the
lift systems including cable supporting system and other
g) Supply labour and material to liaise, co-ordinate and termination

of the cablings/busbar trunking system into electrical
switchboards/equipments provided by others.
h) Supply, install, test and commission all the electrical distribution

boards (Normal and Emergency) including the Digital Power
Meter (DPM), surge arrestors, moulded case circuit breakers
(MCCBs), protection relays and other accessories needed for
the complete installation.
i) Supply, install, test and commission the raised floor and

underfloor trunking system including the junction boxes, metal
trunking, vertical access riser trunking, services outlet boxes
TS/1/3 2602542S/EL
j) Supply labour and material to install the first aid chart, rubber
mat (1000mm (width) x10mm (thick)), fire extinguisher, tool
cabinets, key box complete with locks and keys (min 30 sets),
framed single line drawing in the Low Tension switchroom. The
length of the mat shall be throughout the entire length of the
switchboards.
k) Supply, install, test and commission all the internal and external
light fixtures including emergency lightings, cablings supporting
installation. All the emergency lighting fixtures including battery
packs, EXIT lighting fixtures shall be type tested and pasted
with approved certification label by Singapore Accreditation
Council accredited testing laboratory. For internal light fixtures,
each fixture shall be provided with an approved male and
female connector suitable for terminating or looping 2 numbers
of 2.5sq.mm PVC cables per terminal. For external light
fixtures, each fixture shall be provided with approved ABS
terminal block house in weatherproof box suitable for
terminating or looping 2 numbers of minimum 6sq.mm PVC
cables per terminal.
l) Supply, install, test and commission all the switches, switch

socket outlets, dimming switches, isolators and other
m) Supply, install, test and commission the lighting management

system, lighting dimming control system including actuators,
master control scene panel, programmable panel, wireless
remote dimmer unit and other accessories needed for the
n) Supply, install, connect, test and commission of all the lightning

protection system including earth pits, test link box and testing
of all the associate lightning protection system as shown in the
Tender Drawings and mentioned in the Specification.
Concealed Double-sealed type earth pits shall be used if earth
pits are located on the basement weatherproof floor slab.
o) Supply labour and material to install the approved light fittings,

switch socket outlets, lighting switches, computer and
telephone outlets and other accessories needed for the
complete installation for the mock-up to the rooms stipulated
including the remove and dispose off site.
p) Supply labour and material to install mock-up for specialist

lighting fixtures (internal and external) including the cables,
ballast, tubes and other accessories needed for the complete
installation. The lighting fixtures shall be capable to be power-
up for review. The Sub-Contractor shall allow each type of the
lighting fixtures for review mock-up and selection in this Sub-
Contract. The Sub-Contractor shall include the cost of the
labour and material to install the lighting fixtures and including
the components within the fixtures for the review and selection
on site in the Sub-Contract.
TS/1/4 2602542S/EL
2.3. Emergency Generators and Underground Fuel Storage Systems
(NOT USED)
a) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the 5000 litres

underground fuel storage tank complete with leakage sensors,
fuel piping system, pumps and pump control panel system,
cables and accessories needed for the complete installation. All
the tanks shall be completely filled with fuel before the handing
over to the Employer.
b) Supply labour and material to install, test and commission the

fuel transfer supply and overflow system (HDPPE pipes) from
item 2.3(a) to all the day tanks in the generator room. The
piping work shall be enclosed in fire resistant
material/compound of minimum 4 hours.
c) Supply, install, test and commission 2 sets of diesel generator

units complete with remote radiator units, silencers,
attenuators, automatic main failure panel, 1000 litres day-tank,
batteries and other accessories needed for the complete
installation. Ratings refer to the drawings.
d) Supply, install, test and commission the main synchronizing

main switchboard for item 2.3(c) complete with other
e) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the sub-main

cablings from item 2.3(c) to item 2.3(d) including the cable
supporting system and other accessories needed for the
f) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the sub-main

cablings including the sensing cablings from item 2.3(d) to the
electrical switchboards (emergency) including cable supporting
installation.
g) Supply labour and material to install the first aid chart, rubber
mat ((1000mm (width) x10mm (thick)), fire extinguisher, tool
cabinets, key box complete with locks and keys (min 30 sets),
framed single line drawing in the switchroom. The length of the
mat shall be throughout the entire length of the switchboards.
h) Supply labour and material to engage Specialists and

Professionals to prepare and submit drawings, documents,
Emergency Response Plan, endorsed test report and
certification reports to relevant Authority for approval,
commencement of work, installation, testing and
commissioning including licensing of the underground storage
fuel tank till end of the DLP period. The cost for the above
works shall be included in the Sub-Contract.
TS/1/5 2602542S/EL
2.4. Earthing Systems
a) Test and recommission the main earthing system for the

following systems:
i) High Tension System

ii) Low Tension System
iii) Generator System
iv) Telecommunication (MDF) System
v) Computer Cablings System (Main Wire Centre and Wire
Centres)
b) Supply, install, terminate, test and recommission the existing

earthing system including earth bar, connection outlets and
other accessories needed for the complete installation in all
toilet areas.
2.5. Computer Cablings and supporting system
a) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the computer

Cat. 6 UTP cablings from the patch panels in the Wire Centre
to the outlet including the cable supporting system, computer
outlets and other accessories needed for the complete
installation.
b) Supply, install, test and commission 2 sets (minimum 3 m in

length) of the computer patch cord cables terminated with jacks
at both ends for each computer point outlet.
c) Supply, install, test and commission 46U, 19” racks including

Cat 6 patch panels for the termination of the computer cables,
fibre optic cables, power bars, protection relays, surge
arrestors, 2 nos of UPSs of 5KVA with 45min battery backup for
each rack and other accessories needed for the complete
installation in the Wire Centres and 2 nos of UPSs of 10KVA
with 45min battery backup for each rack and other accessories
needed for the complete installation in Main Wire Centre. (Refer
to Tender Schematic Drawings for number of Racks required.)
d) Supply and install the cable supporting system include heavy

duty uPVC pipes, manholes and MCTs. All horizontal trunking
shall be of minimum size of 200mm x 50mm.
e) Supply, install, test and commission the fibre optic patch cord
cables (3 m in length) terminated with connectors at both ends.
f) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the computer

point for the wireless access unit above the ceiling complete
with patch cables (2 sets, minimum 3m in length, terminated
with jacks at both ends), outlet, patch panels in the racks and
other accessories needed for the complete installation. The
exact location of the points would be determined on site after
the measurement of the unit frequency and zone coverage. The
cables used shall be shielded type.
TS/1/6 2602542S/EL
g) Supply, install, test and commission the Uninterruptible Power
Supply (UPS) as shown in the drawings and referred to herein
this Specification. The UPS must be able to
link/communicate/interface with NUS master UPS
communication system if necessary.
h) Supply and install UTP Data point for card access system Input
and output server, fire alarm main alarm panel and sub-alarm
panel, Building Automation System, Intelligent Building
Management System, Lift system and lift motor room, AHU
room for metering system, Fire Command Centre, carpark
gantry etc.
i) Supply labour and material to liaise with the Employer on the

testing, labeling and activation of the computer outlet points.
2.6. Telephone Cablings and supporting system
a) Supply, install, terminate, test, and commission the telephone

cabling from the IDF panel to the outlet including the cable
supporting system and other accessories needed for the
b) Supply, install, test and commission 2 sets (minimum 3 m in

length) of the telephone patch cord cables terminated with
jacks at both ends for each telephone point outlet.
c) Supply, install, test and commission the two sets of IDF frame
including terminal blocks (six numbers) per telephone riser and
other accessories needed for the complete installation. Each
terminal block can terminate 100 telephone points.
d) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission all the sub-main

communication cablings from the telephone risers to the MDF
room including the cable supporting system and other
e) Supply, install, test and commission the MDF frame, terminal

blocks and other accessories needed for the complete
installation in the MDF Room.
f) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission telephone

cablings from the IDF terminal blocks to all the patch panel in
the LAN room (Per floor distribution) including cable supporting
system, patch panel in the rack and other accessories needed
for the complete installation.
g) Supply and install the cable supporting system include heavy

duty uPVC pipes, manholes and MCTs.
h) Supply labour and material to liaise with the Employer/Authority

on the testing, labeling and activation of the telephone
lines/outlet including the application to the Authority for the new
line.
TS/1/7 2602542S/EL
2.7. Emergency Voice Communication System
a) Supply, install, test and commission the central console system

including the monitoring and control station in the FCC room,
power amplifiers, call station, amplifier and speaker supervisory
units interconnection cables, cable supporting system and other
b) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the speaker

points including the cabling, volume control complete with
overriding relays, cable supporting system, speakers and other
c) Supply labour and material to terminate the Fire Alarm signal

cablings (24V dc) into the system and other accessories
needed for the complete installation. The Sub-Contractor shall
co-ordinate, test and commission of the system together with
the Fire Alarm System.
2.8. Security Card Access System
a) Supply, install, test and commission the central control and

monitoring station in the Security Office including processors,
sub-controller units, monitor and other accessories needed for
the complete installation.
b) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the Card Access

unit including cablings, cable supporting system and other
c) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the EM-Lock,

EXIT push button, breakglass, door contacts including cablings,
cable supporting system and other accessories needed for the
d) Supply labour and material to terminate the Fire Alarm signal

cablings (24V dc) into the system and other accessories
needed for the complete installation. The Sub-Contractor shall
co-ordinate, test and commission of the system together with
the Fire Alarm System.
2.9. Security Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) System
a) Supply, install, test and commissioning the security CCTV

system include central control and monitoring station with web-
based capability to view and monitor on the internet thru the
web browser c/w Internet Protocol (IP) type cameras, LCD
monitors, three sets of 16 channel digital video recorder which
support up to 48 cameras, cabling, control cabling including
trunking, concealed G.I conduits and other necessary
accessories needed for the complete installation. The security
CCTV system shall be housed in 1st storey FCC/security room.
TS/1/8 2602542S/EL
b) External CCTV cameras shall be a separate digital system
similar and able to link back to existing system adopted by
NUS. These external CCTV cameras shall be linked back to the
existing hub in S16 /COM2/ E3A office and Office of Campus
Security as shown in the Tender Drawings and scope of works
as mentioned in this Particular Specification.
c) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the camera

units including cablings, cable and bracket supporting system
d) Supply, install, test and commissioning a set of 36-core single-

mode fibre optic cables from fiber patch panels in FCC/
Security room to existing hub at S16 /COM2/ E3A building
office and Office of Campus Security inclusive of new fiber
patch panels at S16, 16 channel video matrix switcher with
communication interface module, FO video transmitter, 4-
channel multiplex, colour video monitors, 16-channel digital
video recorder, equipment consoles, all cable termination pot at
both end, metal trunking, underground piping works include
manholes and MCTs, penetration works, opening, as shown in
the drawings and mentioned in this Specification.
e) Supply, install, test and commissioning a set of 12 core single-

mode fibre optic with fibre panel link from MD6 exising CCTV to
MD1 new CCTV system with all the necessary software for
viewing.
2.10. Master Antenna & Cable TV System
a) Supply, install, test and commissioning of Digital TV system

including antennae mask, antennas, amplifiers units, splitters,
tap-units, cables, cable and bracket supporting system and
other needed accessories for the complete installation.
b) Supply, install, terminate, test and commission the TV point

including cables, cable supporting system, approved TV outlet
c) The cable ready Digital TV system shall comply with the Code
of Practice for Info-Communications Facilities in Building
(COPIF). All necessary accessories like boosters etc to make
the system comply with COPIF and SCV standard are deemed
to be included in this Sub-Contract.
d) Supply labour and material to liaise with the Employer/Authority

on the testing, labeling and activation of the lines/outlet
including the application and testing to the Authority.
TS/1/9 2602542S/EL
2.11. Power Monitoring System
a) Supply, install, test and commissioning of power monitoring system

including monitoring station, digital power meters, cable and
bracket supporting system and other needed accessories for the
b) The status of the power monitoring meters in MD1 shall be linked

back and monitored by OED master power monitoring system in
OED office as shown in the drawings and referred herein this
Specification.
2.12. Emergency Call System
a) Supply, install, test and commissioning of emergency call system

for handicapped toilets including cable, cable support system and
2.13. Lighting Management System
a) Supply, install, test and commissioning of lighting management

system including cable, cable support system and other needed
accessories for the complete installation.(refer to specification and
drawing)
2.14. Stage Lighting System (NOT USED)
a) Supply, install, test and commissioning of stage lighting system

including cable, cable support system, support bracket/truss and
2.15. Hearing Enhancement system
Supply, install, test and commissioning of hearing enhancement

system including equipment, cable, cable support system, support
bracket/truss and other needed accessories for the complete
installation.
2.16. Other related works
a) Before the commencement of grubbing up foundation or

excavations, Contractor shall confirm with cable detectors that
no live cables or other underground lines/services are present.
Actual extent of detection will be decided at site. The
Contractor shall peg the lines of services which are in use after
detecting by cable detector.
b) The Sub-Contractor shall engage NUS’s Licensed Electrical

Worker of Engineer grade for switching of existing switchboard
inclusive of all testing and calibration of the setting of all the
protection instruments. The cost to engage NUS’s LEW must
be deemed to be priced and included in the tender offer.
TS/1/10 2602542S/EL
c) The Sub-contractor shall liaise and co-ordinate with other
appointed contractor for the cablings termination for the lift
control system including the sensing system, remote lift
monitoring system at OFM at Ventus, activation of the electrical
power to the lift system.
d) Sealing and making goods of all cable entry/exit pipes and

openings, cable penetrations/openings and cable ducts with
approved fire proof/stop materials of minimum 4 hrs for all
ducts/risers/rooms.
e) The Sub-Contractor shall provide labour and material to ensure

that the Sub-Contract Works are completed as scheduled. The
Sub-Contractor shall note that any shutdown or modification to
the existing system/equipment can only be carried out after
office hours and over the weekends subjected to the S.O.
approval. All costs to meet the schedule shall be included in the
Sub-Contract.
f) All works shall be carried out in minimum disturbances to the

Employer. Sub-Contract Works may be carried out after normal
working hours, holidays, weekends etc. The Sub-Contractor
must obtain written permission from the S.O. prior to carrying
out of the works. All costs incurred in respects to any of the
above shall be deemed to be included in the Sub-Contract in
order to facilitate the completion of the Sub-Contract Works.
g) The Sub-Contractor shall co-ordinate the sizes and positions of

all opening required for the services. The Sub-Contractor shall
ensure provision of openings through structure elements for
installations and box-up of exposed cable services along
passage.
h) The Sub-Contractor shall engaged a qualified Professional

Engineer/Licensed Electrical Worker of the appropriate
category to perform testing and commissioning, certification
and endorsement, licensing and switching of the complete
electrical installation from the date of turn-on till expiry of the
Defects Liability Period. The Cost for the above works shall be
included in the Sub-Contract.
i) The Sub-Contractor shall supply labour and material to liaise

and co-ordinate with Authority on the termination of the High
Tension power control cables into their Switchgear units
including termination kits, testing and commissioning the
j) The Consultant/Employer reserve the rights to decide which

brands to be used for any equipment/materials should the
tenderer submit more than one approved brands for the
equipment/materials in the Schedules.
k) Any other works not specifically mentioned in the Specifications

or noted on the drawings but which are required and must to
make a complete installation shall be deemed to be included in
the Sub-Contract.
TS/1/11 2602542S/EL
l) Any other Sub-Contract Works that are required to be done to
comply with the Specifications but not shown on the drawings
and vice versa.
m) All the cable routing is indicative only. Any change in the routing
due to site condition or existing services shall be adjusted
accordingly without any additional cost to the Employer.
n) Provide a comprehensive and effective training programme

complete with training materials for technical staffs of the
Employer. The Sub-Contractor shall design the training
programme with the objective of facilitating smooth installation
and implementation and subject to S.O.'s approval.
o) The intent of the Specifications are to provide guidance to the

Sub-Contractor to design, supply, install, test, commission and
bring into operation a system that is of high quality and high
reliability. Compliance with the operational and technical
requirements on individual components or subsystems of the
system specified herein does not necessarily constitute
compliance with the requirement for overall system reliability or
capability.
p) All cabling to the allocated outlet shall be as directed by the

S.O.. It shall be also understood that any outlet may be re-
located ten (10) metres from the proposed location without
additional cost as shown on the drawings if so directed by the
S.O..
q) All permanent labels for the identification of emergency

circuits/points/accessories and the electrical panels should be
of white lettering in red background.
r) The Sub-contractor shall engage a Licensed Cable Detector to

detect the entire area around the cable route and development
site for any underground M&E services. The Sub-contractor
shall perform trial holes and submit plans indicating the trial
holes locations and the detected services routing to the S.O. for
approval and comment before commencement of any
underground works. The plans to be submitted shall be
endorsed by the licensed cable detection worker authorized by
PowerGrid and Infocomm Development Authority of Singapore
(IDA).
s) To make good all openings of roads/walkways in cases where

crossing of pipes are required. To make good of turf areas
where affected, including planting back affected plants and/or
replacing affected dead plants. Sub-contractor shall liaise and
coordinate with NUS with regards to any excavation and cable
laying and all costs incurred shall be at the expense of the Sub-
contractor. All affected works shall be carried out by proper
tradesman with the proper skills to the satisfaction of the S.O.
All precautions must be taken so as not to endanger any road
users or cause any safety hazards to road users. Sub-
contractor shall liaise with all appropriate authorities where road
openings are required.
TS/1/12 2602542S/EL
t) The Sub-contractor shall take all due care any necessary
precaution to ensure that no damage occurs to any existing
services. Any damage arising out of the Contractor's works will
be rectified at Contractor's cost.
u) In addition, to design/supply/install the support for all electrical

apparatus/fixtures duly calculated, checked and certified by the
Sub-contractor’s structural P.E. when required by the S.O.
v) The Sub-contractor shall provide 13A switch-socket outlets

inside false ceiling for each DDC controller installed by the
ACMV sub-contractor.
w) Location of isolators for all mechanical equipment and plant are

indicative only. The exact positioning shall be determined on
site to S.O's approval. No additional cost shall be incurred to
the owner if the equipment or plant mentioned above is to shift
in location, so decided by the S.O.
x) The Sub-Contractor shall provide interface communication link

between IBMS and the following Specialist Systems. (Refer to
Appendix O, Schedule of IBMS Points)
· Security Card Access System,
· Intrusion Detection System
· IP Camera System
· Emergency Voice Communication & Public Address
System
· Lighting Management System
· Power Monitoring System
· Emergency Call System
Each Specialist System has to be able to integrate with the

IBMS Enterprise Network to form a homogeneous environment
through seamless integration. The systems shall be connected
/ integrated to the Industry standard Fast Ethernet (IEEE 802.3)
TCP/IP Local Area Network via one of the following methods
and able to access by third party software.
· Network API over Fast Ethernet TCP/IP
· DE
· OLE or OPC (OLE for Process Control)
· Dedicated protocol (one or two way communication)
· RS232 serial interface (one or two -way communication)
Direct Connections to DDC Controllers
The Sub-contractor shall coordinate with the appointed IBMS

sub-contractor for the interfacing of their sub-systems into the
IBMS.
TS/1/13 2602542S/EL
y) The Sub-Contractor shall provide 20A DP isolators to all fire
rated roller/fire shutters.
z) Administrative charges of S$300,000, S$5,000 and S$500 for

causing any trip to power distribution network, power supply to
wire centre and office/general area respectively will be
deducted from the contract.
aa) The Sub-Contractor shall liaise and co-ordinate with other

appointed contractor for all Electro-Magnetic unit (EMU) related
rooms to ensure free of EMF interference. Shielding shall be
provided for enclosed cable runs in metallic trunking. The
arrangement of cables shall be in trefoil configuration for cables
in open cable trays for flux cancellation to minimize stray
magnetic fields.
bb) The Sub-Contractor shall ensure the electrical conductors to be

routed outside of the EMU rooms. The entry of electrical
conductors into the shielded room should be minimized. Where
required for power points and lighting points, single-phase
conductors should be of “twisted pairs” and 3-phase and
neutral conductors should be closely bundled and arranged in a
trefoil configuration for maximum flux cancellation. These
power points can emerge from walls and the floor for power
and from the roof for lighting.
cc) Electrical conductors running behind the walls, floor and ceiling
on the outside of the EMU rooms should also be enclosed in
metallic conduit or trunking system to provide some shielding.
Such shielding shall be extended to the power socket outlets
and lighting points within the room. Cablings should be routed
to avoid within the EMU rooms.
2.17. Standard List of Electrical Requirements for NUS projects
a) 13A switch socket outlet with neon indicating lamp for LAB
only.
b) Emergency DBs (Power) – all outgoing circuit must be

protected by individual RCCB.
c) Normal DBs (Power) – all outgoing circuit must be protected by

individual RCCB.
d) Exit Light – shall be of approved certification label by third party

accredited test laboratory c/w white LED light.
e) Emergency light – To use separate non-maintained type (eg.

LED light and solely for emergency used).
f) All fluorescent tube to be of LED or T8/T5 type of cool white.
TS/1/14 2602542S/EL
g) To provide one ballast to each tube of fluorescent light fitting
and PL light fitting.
h) All area except M&E plant room, switchroom and risers to

provide ‘electronic’ ballast for all fluorescent light fitting.
i) To use extra low loss ballast for all non-dimmable PL lamp

downlight & small surface mounted light.
j) To use extra low loss driver for all non-dimmable LED lamp
downlight & small surface mounted light.
k) Separate MDB/DB shall be provided for lighting, power and

mechanical service, eg. Aircon, pumps. standards.
2.18. Remove of existing Services
a) Remove all the existing trunkings, trays, supports systems,

cables, fibre optic cables etc that are no longer in used from
end to end.
b) Make goods all the openings to the required fire rated of the
walls or floors. Painting to match the existing finishes.
3. Statutory Regulations, By-Laws, Singapore Accreditation Council Accredited

Testing Laboratory Approvals
3.1 The works and all plant, equipment and materials forming part of this
Sub-Contract shall comply in all respect with any relevant Statutory
Regulation, Bye-Laws and other Regulations currently in force. In
addition, current Rules and Requirements of the following bodies shall
be complied with:
a) The Energy Market Authority Regulation.
b) The National Environment Agency (NEA).
c) The Building Construction Authority (BCA).
d) The Ministry of Manpower (MOM).
e) Code of Practices: SS 638 ,CP39 and latest edition,
f) Singapore Standards: SS531, SS535, SS540, SS546, SS551,

SS538, SS563, SS555 and latest edition.
g) Fire Safety and Shelter Department (FSSD).
h) Infocomm Development Authority of Singapore (IDA) e.g. Code

of Practice for Telecommunication Facilities in Buildings
(COPIF).
TS/1/15 2602542S/EL
i) SP PowerGrid Limited (SPPG) on Service Cable Sample and
Product Specification.
j) All other Authority having jurisdiction over the installation of

equipment and carrying out this Sub-Contract Works in the
locally.
3.2 The Sub-Contractor shall obtain and complete all notices required by
the above Authority as necessary and shall obtain all consents
necessary for the various works to be executed and shall pay all fees in
connection therewith.
3.3 The Sub-Contract Works shall also be carried out strictly in accordance
with the current editions of all applicable British Standards or other
National Standard acceptable to the S.O. All electrical installations and
materials supplied shall comply with SS 638 and to be approved by the
Authority.
3.4 All Codes, Acts, Standards and regulations shall be the latest
published edition unless otherwise stated.
3.5 Where discrepancy arises, the provisions in the Singapore Standards

shall take precedence on all matters relating to the works.
4. Noise Level and Sound Control
4.1 The Sub-Contractor shall comply with the Noise Specifications in the
Specifications.
4.2 All installed plants are to be reasonably quiet in operation. Preference

will be given to equipment operating at lowest noise level not higher
than 50 dBA.
4.3 Special care is to be exercised in the manufacture of equipment and

installation of outlets to keep air borne noise down to a practical
minimum.
4.4 Vibration isolators shall be installed where necessary so as to eliminate

the transmission of vibration.
4.5 During initial testing operation of the installation, the Sub-Contractor is

to correct for any undue noise and to make any adjustment and
modifications necessary for this purpose.
4.6 The noise/sound level in the various areas due to operation of the
system's equipment shall not exceed the recommended standard by
local Authority or ASHRAE whichever is the lowest.
TS/1/16 2602542S/EL
5. Permits and Fees
The Sub-Contractor shall procure all permits and pay all fees and charges
incurred in connection with this Sub-Contract.
6. The Specifications
6.1 The Specifications is intended to set out in general outline the

minimum requirements and standards of installation for the various
units of equipment and works it covers. Provision set out, or claim
made in the successful Tender Offer which are in excess of, or
improved upon the basic requirements of the Specifications shall
unless otherwise determined by the S.O. become part of the
requirements of the Specifications whether or not they are
subsequently incorporated in addenda to the Specifications.
6.2 The S.O. shall be the sole judge of what constitute an improvement
upon or exceeds the requirements of the Specifications.
6.3 The Specifications shall be read in conjunction with the Drawings and
are intended to be mutually explanatory and complementary to one
another. All Sub-Contract Works and the Specifications called for by
one, i.e. Specifications or Drawings even if not by the other shall be
fully executed and complied with in total.
7. Materials and Workmanship
7.1 Unless expressedly stated to the contrary, all materials, and equipment
supplied by the Sub-Contractor and its construction/installation
methods shall comply with the applicable Singapore Standards or
British Standards Specifications approved by the S.O.
7.2 Where a standard is referred to, that standard shall be the latest
published edition thereof, unless otherwise stated.
7.3 All materials and equipment supplied shall be new and of the best type
for each particular purpose and of the first quality with regard to design,
manufacture and performance.
7.4 The equipment and materials shall be suitably designed and

constructed for safe, proper and continuous operation under all
conditions described or implied in the Specifications without undue
heat, strain, vibration, corrosion or other operating difficulties.
7.5 Unless otherwise specified, the equipment and material within the
scope of the Specifications shall be of a standard proven design.
Design incorporating components, which may be considered prototype
in nature, will not be accepted.
7.6 Equipment and equipment components shall be designed and

supported to permit free expansion and contraction without causing
excessive strains, distortion or leakage.
TS/1/17 2602542S/EL
7.7 Parts subject to wear, corrosion or other deterioration, or requiring
adjustment, inspection or repair shall be accessible and capable of
reasonably convenient removal, replacement and repair. All such parts
shall be of suitable material for keeping maintenance to a minimum.
7.8 The equipment shall be designed to permit replacement of parts and

ease of access during inspection, maintenance and repair.
7.9 Vibration, noise, mechanical and thermal stresses and susceptibility to

corrosion and erosion shall not be greater than with similar plant of first
class design and workmanship operating under similar conditions.
7.10 All Sub-Contract Works shall be carried out in accordance with the
best engineering practice by experience tradesmen of appropriate
grades to the approval of the S.O.
7.11 Where disagreement occur between the Drawings and the

Specifications or within either document itself, the item or arrangement
of better quality, greater quantities, or higher cost shall be deemed to
be included in this Sub-Contract.
7.12 All system, equipment and materials proposed shall be submitted to

the S.O. for verification of compliance with the Specifications. As part
of the submission requirements, at least two sets of catalogues
including manufacturers installation, operation, and maintenance
manuals submitted shall be the originals.
7.13 It is the onus of the Sub-Contractor to ensure that the system,

equipment and materials conform to the requirements of the
Specifications and that they are approved by the S.O. early.
7.14 Inspection of system, equipment and materials is not to be considered

as a guarantee of suitability or compliance with the Specifications.
Where system, equipment and materials are inspected and approved
by the S.O., such approval does not in any way relieve the Sub-
Contractor’s responsibilities nor from the necessity of furnishing
material or performing work required by the Drawings and the
Specifications which shall in the event of dispute, take precedence.
8. Electricity Supply
8.1 The electricity supply will be 400/230 volts±6% and 50 Hz ±1 %.
8.2 All works and equipment shall be suitable for connection to the above
electricity supply and approved by the S.O..
9. Clearance Of Electric Conduits From Other Services
All electric conduit and equipment shall be installed at least 150 mm clear of
any other metalwork, and in particular of any water, gas or chemical pipes and
300 mm clear from telephone and computer cables unless otherwise
specified.
TS/1/18 2602542S/EL
10. Existing Services
10.1 The Sub-Contractor shall take all due care any necessary precaution to
ensure that no damage occurs to any existing services. Any damage
arising out of the Sub-Contractor's works will be rectified at Sub-
Contractor's cost.
10.2 Any services shall be rectified immediately within the same day by the
Sub-Contractor. The cost of the entire rectification including engaging
Employer representatives for the works shall be borne by the Sub-
Contractor.
10.3 The Sub-Contractor shall liaise and co-ordinate with the

Authority/Employer/Employer’s representatives on the isolation of the
affected M&E services.
10.4 The Sub-Contractor shall be deemed to have inspected and examined

the site and its surroundings and acquaint himself as to the nature of
the existing works, buildings and the site, the extent and nature of the
works and materials, article or equipment required for the necessary
completion of the Sub-Contract Works, the means of communication
and access to the site, and in general obtain for himself all necessary
information as to the risks, contingencies and all other factors that will
influence or affect his tender. No claim whatsoever of any of the
foresaid will be entertained. Existing services as shown on the tender
drawings are indicative only.
10.5 The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that the existing M&E services shall
be functional and operational at all times while works are carried. The
Sub-Contractor shall deem to have included all necessary temporary
diversion & protection works to ensure the continuous functioning of
the services.
10.6 Diversion and alteration works to the existing services shall be carried
out after office hour or weekends, if deem necessary, to facilitate the
continuous operation of the building/ system.
10.7 All major existing equipment, materials, panels and fittings that are not
in use shall be dismantled in good condition and returned to the
Employer.
10.8 The Sub-Contractor shall give minimum 2-weeks notice in advance for
any relocation/shutdown of existing M&E services.
TS/1/19 2602542S/EL
11. Site Climate Conditions
All equipment and works installed shall be capable of operating effectively and
efficiently under the following site conditions:
Maximum Temperature 40°C dry bulb

28°C wet bulb
Average Temperature 32°C dry bulb

26.5°C wet bulb
Relative Humidity 70% to 98%
12. Shop Drawings
12.1 The Sub-Contractor shall immediately upon the award of the Sub-
Contract prepare and submit to the S.O. for approval all plant and
equipment layout drawings showing full details within four weeks.
Detailed calculations shall be submitted where applicable. All
equipment and materials proposed shall be submitted for approval.
12.2 Shop drawings shall cover complete details for the following but not
limited to:
a) Operation loading of all items of plant, equipment and

accessories.
b) Dimensions of all plant, equipment and accessories, which

include the detailed drawings for installation construction which
necessary to finalise the structure requirements.
c) Equipment room layout, showing all clearances for operating

and servicing and in sufficient details to ensure that the
provision made shall be adequate and satisfactory.
d) Control equipment and system, wiring and control diagrams,

lighting and power requirements.
e) Vibration Isolation Equipment.
f) Hangers and supports.
g) Foundations.
h) Chases, drains, openings in walls, floors, roof slabs and

beams.
i) Piping, trunking, conduit, tray and electrical cable run.
j) Underground piping routing and its layout, manholes

construction details.
k) All other items as is reasonably required by the S.O.
TS/1/20 2602542S/EL
12.3 These layout drawings shall be based generally on the S.O.'s
drawings, modified as required to suit the specified materials and
equipment to be provided, to fit in with the latest available information
on building construction details and the requirements of other services
and equipment and also to incorporate any improvements proposed by
the Sub-Contractor.
12.4 The drawings shall be drawn in the same scale as the S.O.'s drawings.
Details shall be drawn in larger scales. Where applicable, symbols the
same as those in the S.O.'s drawings shall be used and all other
symbols shall conform to the acceptable local drafting practice.
12.5 Legend for all symbols shall be shown on every drawing.
12.6 Five (5) copies of each drawing including the softcopies in CD shall be
submitted for approval not later than four weeks after award of this
Sub-Contract. Drawings with inadequate details and not conforming to
the requirements as stated above will not be considered.
12.7 Shop drawings shall be minimum of A1 size and it shall have the same
project number as the contract drawings.
12.8 Shop drawings shall be submitted to the S.O. for approval. The Sub-
Contractor shall allow a period of two (02) weeks for the S.O. to check
and approve the drawings.
12.9 Upon approval of the drawings, the Sub-Contractor shall deliver six (6)
copies of each approved drawing to the S.O. for the purpose of Sub-
Contract administration. Softcopy (In CD format) of the approved
drawings and subsequent updates arising from the variations ordered
shall be submitted to the S.O during the course of the Sub-Contract
period.
12.10 Shop drawings shall be checked by Contractor and submitted through

the Contractor to the S.O. for approval. Sub-Contractor shall allow a
period of one (1) week for the Contractor to check the drawings and
minimum two (2) weeks for the S.O. to check and approve the
drawings.
12.11 The drawings shall be submitted in ample time for review and approval
by the S.O. and no work shall be carried out until such drawings are
approved.
12.12 It is the onus of the Sub-Contractor to ensure that his drawings

conform to the requirements of the Specifications and that they are
approved by the S.O. early.
12.13 Inspection of shop and working drawings is not to be considered as a

guarantee of measurements or building conditions. Where drawings
are inspected and approved by the S.O. such approval does not in any
way relieve the Sub-Contractor from his responsibility nor from the
necessity of furnishing material or performing work required by the
Drawings and the Specifications which shall in the event of a dispute,
take precedence over shop drawings.
TS/1/21 2602542S/EL
12.14 During the installation, the Sub-Contractor shall keep exact "As-Built"
drawings of installed position of all system, supporting system and
cable route, etc. in particular the exact position of any concealed or
buried works.
13. As-Installed drawings and Manuals
13.1 During construction, the Sub-Contractor shall maintain accurate

records of the actual construction. This information shall be supplied to
the S.O. and shall form the basis of an " As-Installed/As-Built' record of
the final constructed Sub-Contract Works.
13.2 Eight weeks before the Substantial Completion of the works, the Sub-
Contractor shall submit to the satisfaction of the S.O. five (5) sets of
paper prints of all "As-Installed / As-Built" drawings for vertification and
comments. Upon vertification and approval obtained, the Sub-
Contractor shall submit to the S.O. five (5) sets of comprehensive
operation and Maintenance Manuals and Data Sheets published by the
material/equipment manufacturers, bound into sets together with the
same number of bound sets of all the "As-Installed / As- built" paper
print drawings and five (5) sets of all the "As-Installed/ As-Built"
drawings in softcopy (using AUTOCAD latest version, Building
information modeling and portable document format) in CD-Rom disks,
warranty card, test reports.
All drawings submitted shall be drawn using the software.
13.3 These instruction manuals shall be typed in good quality paper and
neatly bound into a manual having rigid covers. A draft shall be
approved before final submission.
13.4 All the operation and maintenance manuals and As-Built drawings shall
be bound with hard covers.
13.5 All “As-Installed / As-Built " electrical single line drawings, control
diagram, calculations and 5 sets of original letter of supervision shall
be endorsed and signed by the Sub-Contractor's Professional
Engineer/Licensed Electrical Worker who is registered under the
correct category.
13.6The manuals shall contain and be set out as follows:
a) Description of System
This section shall simply but clearly describe the operation of

the system and the equipment.
TS/1/22 2602542S/EL
b) Summary of Equipment List
This section shall include all major equipment complete with

makes, models, serial number with technical catalogues (at
least one set to be original and others in legible print) to be
included. The equipment or plant used shall be clearly
highlighted in the catalogues. When an item or plant includes
ancillary equipment, similar information shall be provided for
these equipment as well.
c) Spare Parts, Special Tools and Equipment List
Include manufacturer's list of all recommended spare parts for

replacement and special tools and equipment for maintenance
used.
d) Operational Procedure
This section shall fully described start and stop sequence of

operation; safety precautions and features to be observed;
programme for alternate running of plant to even out wear and
testing procedures for all sections of the plant, including
emergency procedures.
e) Manufacturer's Handbook
Include Manufacturer's technical literature and equipment

details on all components of the installation, particularly as
applying to operation and maintenance. The technical literature
shall include all major equipment, control instruments and
equipment used and other related materials. The equipment or
plant used shall be clearly highlighted in the literature.
f) Installation Instruction
g) Maintenance and Trouble Shooting Instruction
Include manufacturer's technical literature on all components of

maintenance. The maintenance requirements shall be arranged
in sections of recommended daily, weekly, monthly and annual.
The schedule of maintenance and servicing during the free

servicing period shall be included.
TS/1/23 2602542S/EL
h) Equipment Operation Instruction
This section shall include the following:
- Safety precautions to be observed before start-up

- Start-up sequence of operation
- Shut-down sequence of operation
- Instruction on emergency shut-down
- Safety precautions to be observed if any equipment is to
be shut-down for any extended periods.
- Programme for alternating the operation of paralle or
standby equipment to even out wear.
- Functional diagram or mimic display to explain
graphically operating instructions.
- Steps to be taken in case of plant failure.
i) Control Circuit Diagram
In addition to the control circuit diagrams, a drawing list for

these diagrams shall be provided.
j) Test Results & Certification
This section shall include the test results and certifications of

the various equipment and systems, whether factory-test
results or on-site test results. The actual measured quantities of
the plant/system performance shall be stated and included. The
test results and records shall be endorsed by the appropriate
category of engaged Professional specialist and the company
stamp.
This section shall also include a compilation of all test reports

and sign-off inspection forms and defect lists.
k) System Data Information/Type Test Information
l) Guarantee & Warranty
This section shall include a listing showing all the guarantees

and warranties for the system and equipment. Copies of these
guarantees and warrantees shall be included in this Section.
The original copies of the guarantees and warranties shall be

submitted separately to the Employer.
m) “As-Installed” Drawings List
This section shall include the complete drawing list for the “As-
Installed” drawings to be submitted.
n) Hang-up Instruction
This section shall have copies of the hang-up instructions for

the project.
TS/1/24 2602542S/EL
o) Equipment Suppliers
This section shall comprise a full list of names, addresses and

telephone numbers (including after office hours numbers) of all
Sub-Contractors and suppliers of equipment (local and
overseas) incorporated in the installation.
p) Maintenance & Breakdown Service
This section shall comprise a list of the names and telephone

numbers of the Company's Maintenance and Servicing Section
personnel for normal maintenance and breakdown request.
13.7 In the event of the Sub-Contractor failing to fulfill the aforesaid

requirements, the S.O. shall reserve the right to obtain all of the
required operating and maintenance manuals by other means and shall
deduct all cost incurred thereof from monies due to the Sub-
Contractor. In addition the S.O. shall forfeit the rights of the Sub-
Contractor in relation to further payment until he has so complied
accordingly.
14. Fixing to Building
14.1 Suitable metal expansion devices shall be used where plugs are
necessary for securing equipment, pipes, conduits and other fittings.
Wooden plugs will not be allowed. Hole shall be drilled by using
electrical/pneumatic rotary drills wherever possible. Electrical and/or
pneumatic percussion drills and tools are not permitted.
14.2 Any fixing device on the roof struts shall not be acceptable unless
certified by the structural Professional Engineer engaged by the Sub-
Contractor and approved by the S.O..
15. Metrification
All gauges and indicators shall be provided with scales marked in SI units as
well as in relevant Imperial units.
16. Tropicalised
All materials and equipment to be supplied and installed shall be tropicalised.
17. Samples
17.1 Samples to be submitted by the Sub-Contractor shall be for the

following system where applicable or instructed by the S.O.:
a) Cable supporting system such as conduits, trunkings, trays.

b) Cables and accessories such as cables, socket outlet, wall
plate, equipment, cables etc.
c) Lighting fixtures
TS/1/25 2602542S/EL
17.2 In addition, the Sub-Contractor shall also submit any other samples as
may be required by the S.O..
18. Fixing of Services
18.1 All pipes, tray, trunking, cable ladder under this Sub-Contract shall be
sufficiently supported with hangers, supports beams clamps, slips,
inserts and mounting devices suitable for the works. Provision for
expansion shall be allowed when locating the services hangars. All
supports including brackets, bolts and nuts, wall plugs for all the M&E
services shall be designed and endorsed by a Professional Engineer of
the appropriate category. All conduits shall be concealed in wall, slab,
partition and column.
18.2 In general, hangers shall be of individual type with provision for vertical
adjustment.
18.3Where structural members are pre-stressed, hangers shall be installed in

the structural members before the pouring of concrete.
18.4If this is not practicable due to site condition, the hangers shall be secured
to the structure by means of anchor bolts or power driven bolts at
locations where the pre-stressed tension are not affected.
18.5All the services and equipment such as pumps, generators shall be

effectively isolated from vibration. Spring isolator type of supports shall
be installed and neoprene isolation pad shall be provided between the
fixing clamp or holder-bat and the type for the pipeline run.
18.6When pipe pass through walls or floors, GS pipe sleeves shall be

provided. These shall be extended through the full finished thickness of
the wall or floor and be secured against movement.
18.7Opening, Holes, Gaps between the pipe sleeve and the pipe shall be filled
up with high density fiberglass and caulked with fire-rated compound
(min 2 hours) and finish flush to the face of the pipe sleeve.
18.8All fixings, hangers, holder-bats, brackets etc. shall be hot-dipped

galvanized to BS 729 or equivalent. In addition, for outdoor
applications, two coats of epoxy paints shall be applied.
19. Mock-Ups
19.1 The Sub-Contractor shall be required to construct full mock-ups of

typical installation of services and common items of equipment in
conjunction with other trades including the lighting fixtures, switches,
outlet points etc. on site as and when directed by the S.O.. Refer to the
Appendices for other areas required for mock-up.
19.2 The Sub-Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in his Sub-

Contract Sum for these mock-ups.
TS/1/26 2602542S/EL
19.3 Apart from the above provision of mock-up areas, the Sub-Contractor
shall where required submit the samples where specified to the S.O.
for review and approval before commencement of fabrication,
construction and installation work.
19.4 Mock-ups shall be constructed to ensure proper installation and co-

ordination of all services on site. The Sub-Contractor shall replace and
modify such mock-up and sample at his own cost, if deemed
necessary by the S.O. whose decision shall be final and conclusive.
The approved mock-up and samples shall be used as the basis of
actual/permanent work.
19.5 Any approval granted by the S.O shall not relieve the Sub-Contractor of
his responsibility in ensuring that all works executed conform to the
Sub-Contract terms and conditions. The Sub-Contractor shall bear all
cost arising out of the errors/omissions in samples and mock-ups.
19.6 The Sub-Contractor shall remove at his own cost all mock-ups and
samples when no longer required as directed by the S.O.
20. Identification and Labeling
20.1 Complete identification and labeling shall be provided for the various
sections of the work.
20.2 Additional requirements as requested by the FSSD to suit local

condition shall also be complied with.
20.3 All equipment, valves, etc. shall be clearly and legibly labeled using
engraved aluminum plates of minimum dimensions of 75 x 50 x 2 mm
thick.
20.4 Permanent labels eg. "ELECT", "TELEHONE", "SCV", "COMPUTER",

“CARD ACCESS”, “CCTV”, “EVC”, shall be provided for the
identification of pipes, trunking, tray etc. Thermal label to be imprint on
faceplate of switch socket outlet or lighting switch
20.5 The following colour scheme for the trunking/tray/ conduits shall be
adopted:
Services Colour BS4800 Code

Electrical Orange 06E51
TELEPHONE White 00E55
COMPUTER White
SCV White
Computer White
Security Card Access Green
Security CCTV Green
PA System Blue
20.6 Complete identification and labeling shall be provided for other

equipments, DBs e.g. main and sub switchboards, distribution boards,
transformers and others as requested by the S.O. shall be submitted
for approval.
TS/1/27 2602542S/EL
21. Provision of Works by Other Trades
21.1 It shall be the Sub-Contractor’s responsibility to advise, check and

confirm that the works listed above are provided to the requirements
during the course of building construction. Failure on the part of the
Sub-Contractor to ensure that any or all of these services are provided
will result in the Sub-Contractor to carry out the respective works at his
own expense.
21.2 The Sub-Contractor shall liaise closely with all the other trades for such
provisions and communicate all the requirements well in advance and
conform to the construction programme.
22. Co-ordination of work
22.1 The Sub-Contractor shall check and ensure that all equipment provided
are suitable for the space allowed. The Sub-Contractor shall, if
necessary, locate this equipment before the erection of the walls and
doors. Any abortive work arising from failing to comply with the above
shall be paid for by the Sub-Contractor.
22.2 The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the proper and accurate
setting out of his work. He shall furnish all necessary information on the
installation to the S.O. and the Contractor for work co-ordination
purposes. The Sub-Contractor shall also obtain information on routes
of other services from the Contractor before commencing any works to
any floor of the building. He shall co-operate with the Contractor and all
other contractors on the job and his work shall be suitably pre-planned
to ensure proper co-ordination with other Contractors.
22.3 The Sub-Contractor shall inform and check with the Contractor on all
building works (such as holes, openings, grooves required on floors,
walls, etc) that are required to be done as early as possible in order
that holes, openings etc, may be formed as the building work
proceeds. Should the Sub-Contractor neglect to give the Contractor
reasonable notice and full particulars of any building works required to
be done, and thereby cause delay or additional expense to be incurred
by the Contractor, the Sub-contractor shall be required to indemnify the
Contractor against all charges or additional expense incurred in respect
thereof.
22.4 The Sub-Contractor shall be held solely responsible for making

necessary arrangement and/or coordinating with all relevant Authority,
specialists, other Contractors, etc, to ensure satisfactory completion of
this Sub-Contract such as Temporary Fire Permit Certificate (TFP),
Fire Safety Certificate (FSC), TOP, CSC, etc.
TS/1/28 2602542S/EL
22.5 The Sub-Contractor shall allow for the co-ordination and interfacing of
his work in line with the works of other contractors. Such coordination
and interfacing shall include for permitting other contractors to
complete his work before proceeding to complete the balance of works
under this Sub-Contract Works. In the event of failure by the Sub-
Contractor to allow for such co-ordination and interphasing, no claim
whatsoever would be entertained by the Employer for taking out and
re-installing works to accommodate the installation of equipment and
works by other contractors. The Sub-Contractor shall obtain the
programmes and work schedules of such other contractors and include
them into his programme chart.
22.6 The Sub-Contractor shall inform the S.O. of any discrepancies in

construction details installed on site as compared with “Approved”
drawings owing to unforeseen site conditions. The Sub-Contractor
shall bear the full cost of rectification if the failure to comply with the
above clause leads to a malfunction of the system.
22.7 Ceiling pattern as shown in the Tender drawing is given as a guide

only, exact position of ceiling equipment has to be verified on site and
adjusted, if necessary, without additional cost to the owner.
22.8 The runs of cable trays, ladders, and trunkings as shown in the
drawings shall be used as a guide only. Prior to the installation,
coordinated layout drawings of all M&E services shall be produced so
that no M&E installation will clash. The coordinated layout drawings
shall be submitted to the S.O. for approval prior installation. All
necessary dimensions of cable trays, ladders, trunkings and conduits
shall be clearly indicated in the proposed M&E coordinated drawings.
All cable trays, ladders, conduits and trunkings shall not run along the
way of air-con diffuser.
22.9 Any cable trays, ladders, trunkings and conduits which are found un-
coordinated and not easily accessible after all other services are
installed, shall be relocated at the expense of the Sub-Contractor.
23. Testing
23.1 The Sub-Contractor shall allow in his Sub-Contract Sum for the cost of
all acceptance tests required as hereinafter specified or as required by
the Authority having jurisdiction over the installation.
23.2 All test results on the electrical system shall be properly bound and
endorsed by EMA Registered Testing Engineer and LEW respectively
engaged by the Sub-Contractor. Four (4) sets of test results shall be
submitted to the S.O.. The cost shall be deemed to be included in this
Sub-Contract.
23.3 All water and electricity used during the testing and commissioning of
the systems in this Sub-Contract shall be borne by the Contractor
including the supply, installation and dismantling of necessary meters
and associated works.
23.4 All pipeworks which are to be encased or concealed shall be tested

and approved before they are finally enclosed.
TS/1/29 2602542S/EL
23.5 The Sub-Contractor shall give the S.O. seven (7) days notice of his
readiness to carry out acceptance test and shall submit for his
approval a complete and detailed schedule of his tests to be carried
out and the method statement.
23.6 Before the commencement of acceptance tests, the Sub-Contractor

shall have brought the installation to a state of substantial completion
and shall have completed all of his preliminary testing and adjusted the
equipment to its proper running order.
23.7 During the testing period, no modifications, adjustment or other work

on the installation shall be carried out without the permission of the
S.O. Should there be any contravention of this requirement, the results
of all tests completed may be rejected and a retest ordered.
23.8 No acceptance test shall be carried out except in the presence of the
S.O. or the representative appointed for the purpose.
23.9 Should the installation fail to perform in accordance with the

requirements of the Specifications and/or Authority, the S.O. may reject
the whole or any part of it.
23.10 The testing period shall form part of the Sub-Contract period and no
extension of the time will be granted by reasons of any extension of the
testing period to permit rectification, modification, adjustment or
retesting of the installation except where testing has been delayed or
retesting has been necessitated by circumstances beyond the control
of the Sub-Contractor.
23.11 The Sub-Contractor shall make all arrangements and supply all labour,
equipment, instruments and tools for necessary tests to be carried out
as required by the BCA, the FSSD and other relevant Authority, in
addition to all those tests as specifically called for in the Specifications.
The Sub- Contractor’s Professional Engineer shall be present during
the BCA, TOP and FSSD/CSC inspection. The cost of all these above
and other tests shall be included in the Sub-Contract.
23.12 The Sub-Contractor shall also be required to conduct all tests as and
when requested by the Authority during the DLP, Maintenance and
Servicing Period.
24. Tools and Equipment
24.1 A complete set of tools and equipment for maintenance shall be

supplied to the approval of the S.O if required.
24.2 The tools and equipment shall be contained in a standing lockable

metal cabinet. Two sets of keys shall be provided. The design of the
cabinet shall be to the approval of the S.O.
TS/1/30 2602542S/EL
25 Quality Assurance
25.1 The Sub-Contractor shall establish, document and maintain a quality

system to demonstrate his commitment to qualify in construction. As
far as possible, the quality system shall be formulated in accordance
with the requirements
25.2 Specifically the Sub-Contractor shall plan, establish, implement and

maintain a project quality plan setting out, as a minimum, the following:
a) Quality objectives to be attained;
b) Specific allocation of responsibilities and authority during the

different phases of the project;
c) Specific quality procedures, methods and work instructions to

be applied, including detailed procedures for each of the major
work activities;
d) Suitable testing, inspection, examination and audit programmes

at the appropriate stages;
e) Method for changes and modification in a quality plan as the

project proceeds; and
f) Other measures necessary to meet the objectives.
25.3 The Sub-Contractor's project quality plan shall be documented in the

form of a project quality manual and project operating procedures
which shall be submitted to the S.O. within 30 days from the date of
letter of acceptance of tender. The quality control procedures for each
work activity shall be submitted to the S.O. at least 14 days before the
commencement of the activity.
25.4 Four copies of the project quality manual and project operating
procedures shall be submitted to the S.O.. A further copy shall be
retained on the site.
25.5 Any comment, advice or acceptance of the project quality plan by the
S.O. shall not, in any way, alter or diminish the Sub-Contractor's
obligation under this Sub-Contract for the quality of the Works.
25.6 The Sub-Contractor shall adequately price for the above provision in
the preliminaries.
TS/1/31 2602542S/EL
26. Training
26.1 The Sub-Contractor shall train the Employer’s operating personnel in

the operation and maintenance of the plants.
26.2 The period of training shall be minimum four (4) weeks and with the
plant in continuous normal operation. Suitable and competent
instructor representing the Sub-Contractor/Manufacturer shall be
required full time on site during the said period.
26.3 During the system commissioning, the Sub-Contractor shall provide

training and give instructions to the Employer’s designated personnel
on the operation of all equipment describe its intended use with
respect to the programmed functions specified. Operator orientation of
the entire installation system shall include, but not limited to, the overall
operational programme, equipment functions (both individually and as
part of the total integrated system) commands, advisories, and
appropriate operator intervention required in response to the system’s
operation, all test results, and site measurement for the lighting levels
achieved. An Employer’s manual prepared for this project by the Sub-
Contractor shall be used in addition to the instruction. Minimum ten
(10) original copies of the manual shall be provided for the Employer
and minimum ten sets of photocopy manuals be distributed to the
trainees during the training.
27. Comprehensive Maintenance during Defects Liability Period (DLP)
27.1 The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for all costs involved in setting
and adjustment of controls, checking and tabulating of building
conditions, and supplying, during the period stipulated, all test
equipment and instruments deemed necessary by the S.O.. The Sub-
Contractor shall also carry out the maintenance works as refer in the
other sections “Maintenance During Defects Liability Period” and
“Maintenance Standard and Schedule”.
27.2 The Sub-Contractor shall implement approved preventive

maintenance, carry out repairs, replace defective equipment, blown
lamps, plants, materials, parts, etc and provide all lubricants, paper, ink
and other consumable items at no additional cost to the Employer.
27.3 The Sub-Contractor shall correct any defects, faults and / or omissions
and also replace and/or repair all defective parts or items free of
charge if such repairs or replacement has been necessitated by reason
of defects in the equipment supplied, or as a result of fair wear and
tear; repairs or replacement necessitated by reason of misuse of the
equipment by the users alone being excepted.
TS/1/32 2602542S/EL
27.4 Replacement parts shall be delivered or repairs shall be made promptly
upon receipt of notice of failure despite normal and proper use and
maintenance. All costs of replacement and repair shall be borne by the
Sub-Contractor. For equipment rectified or replaced during this
guarantee period, the Sub-Contractor shall extend his liability in relation
to this equipment for a further period of fifteen (15) months from the
date of replacement or repair.
27.5 The Sub-Contractor shall carry out the free comprehensive

maintenance of the complete installation and systems during the
Defects Liability Period inclusive of emergency service during
breakdowns..
27.6 A log book shall be provided by the Sub-Contractor to record the date,
time and details of each maintenance service. A full detail of the
service and maintenance shall be furnished.
27.7 Before the last month of the Defects Liability Period, a full report with
the test and check list of the complete installation detailing the
condition of each of the equipment shall be submitted to the S.O. All
labour, materials, tools and parts necessary to rectify the defects shall
be supplied at no extra cost.
27.8 A competent person shall be made available immediately at times

other than those of the inspection and servicing herein before
described, for the purpose of adjusting on rectifying any fault. No extra
payment shall be made for the additional visits or servicing required
under this Sub-Contract.
27.9 The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for all costs involved in setting
and adjustment of controls, checking and tabulating of the equipment
and supplying, during the period stipulated, all test equipment and
instruments deemed necessary by the S.O.
28. Handing Over of M&E system
28.1 Upon satisfactory completion of the inspection and testing, the Sub-
Contractor shall conduct joint inspection cum training briefing of the
M&E systems with Employer and his representatives.
28.2 All test results, certifications, inspection comments/reports are to be

properly documented and handed over to users 3 days before the joint
inspection.
28.3 Should Employer/Employer’s representative rejects the system during

the inspection, the subsequent inspection should be affected within two
weeks.
28.4 Employer/Employer’s representatives shall accept handing over of

M&E systems upon satisfactory completion of the joint inspection and
provided the outstanding defects do not affect the functioning of the
building/system.
TS/1/33 2602542S/EL
28.5 Maintenance schedule, relevant keys to the system, list of sub-
contractors/equipment agents on call breakdown/maintenance service
should be submitted within one week after the successful handover
inspection.
29. Energy Efficiency
29.1 All equipment submitted/proposed by the Sub-Contractor shall comply

to the SS530 in terms of equipment efficiency and performance.
31. Asset Management
31.1 The Sub-Contractor shall submit Asset/Inventory List in the format

approved by the S.O. at least one month before the Sub-Contract
completion date.
32. Others
32.1 Service Rooms/ Plant rooms
a) Provide emergency supply to all lighting and power circuits in HV

Switchroom, LV Switchroom, Gen Set room, MDF room, and CDR
room. The cables to all emergency points should be wired with fire-
rated cables in surface galvanized conduits.
b) Hasp and staple (size: 140mm x 65mm x 6mm) shall be installed

for the doors to Switchrooms, Gen Set room
c) To provide metering kiosks, if required by University.
d) All service rooms and risers should have permanent signage for
identification of room locations; signage should comply with the
UCI’s guideline.
e) To provide hot-dipped galvanized mild steel/stainless steel railing

for stair and loading/unloading platform.
f) No beams shall be allowed in the trenches and the trenches must

be fully covered with removable hot-dipped galvanized mild steel
gratings which can be able to support at least 100kg.
g) Internal walls and columns to have 20mm cement plastering finish

and to be painted with 2 color scheme; emulsion paint on the upper
walls and vinyl paint on the lower walls (1.2m from floor level).
h) Cable Entry Ducts – uPVC pipes in concrete jacket, sealed with

removable water-tight plugs at both ends of pipes and to have
piling if necessary.
i) No water pipes, sewage pipes, etc., should pass through electrical

service rooms/risers.
TS/1/34 2602542S/EL
j) There should be no wet rooms, such as AHU room, washroom,
above HV Sub-station, Transformer room, LV Switchroom, Gen Set
room and other Service rooms.
k) To provide emergency escaped doors for Sub-station, Transformer

room and Main Switch room.
l) Incoming Power Supply circuit to the Battery Charger Panel must

be connected before RCCB, i.e. bypass the RCCB.
m) Lighting of at least 300 lux or higher should be designed for all

Service room.
n) Service rooms should have Electric Shock Treatment Chart, Fire

Protections against all Openings on floor, walls, etc. for passage of
cables, Electrical Single-line Drawings, Earthing Drawing and
Control Circuit Diagrams, Warning and Danger signs, Fire
Extinguisher, Rubber Mat, No Smoking sign, Log Book, Key
Cabinets with Padlocks available for safe working, Operating Tools
with bracket provided for safe keeping for Switchgear and breakers
Operation.
o) Sub-stations, Transformer room, Main Switch room, Gen Set room

should be mechanically ventilated and provision to have sufficient
free or filtered air available for ventilation. No air-conditioning is
required.
p) Individual/separate earthing system for High Voltage Power Supply

Installation (22kV), Low Voltage (3 phase, 400V) Power Supply
Installation, Generator Set Installation, MDF room’s Infocomm and
Telecom Equipment, and other critical services.
q) All earth bars should be mounted above cable trench and at

400mm above finished floor level. The bars should have permanent
labels for main earthing conductor and protective conductors, the
overall value of the earth resistance (earthing), nos of earth
electrode points, test date and a caution/warning information of
‘Safety Electrical Connection – Do not remove’.
r) Bonding of all exposed conductive part (such as metallic enclosure

of MSB, ESB, MDB, etc) and extraneous conductive part (such as
the metallic exhaust pipe/fuel tank for Gen Set, ventilation ducting,
etc.) in the Server room should be connected respectively to the
Earthing Terminal (in MSB, DB, ESB, etc) and Main Earth Terminal
Bar (in Sub-station/LV Switch room).
s) Display a framed-up drawing of the supply’s earth installation

system in the service rooms with the information of the earth
system wiring connections, nos of earth electrode points with the
individual earth readings at each point and the overall earth system
reading, and a summary table of the individual earth resistance
correspond to each points’ nos and the overall earth system
reading, test date and endorsed by Electrical Sub-Contractor’s
LEW (PE).
TS/1/35 2602542S/EL
32.2 LV Main Switchboard, Sub-board, Emergency Switch board
a) The whole Main Switchboard and Emergency Switchboard shall be

constructed of Form 3B design and type tested requirements.
b) Sub-board shall be constructed of form 3B design.
c) A 4-pole bus-section breaker shall be provided when there is more

than one incoming service and be mechanically and electrically
interlocked against parallel operation of the incoming services.
d) Minimum 600mm all round clearance for the Main Switch Board.
e) Metering with remote monitoring system should be installed on main

switch board, and air-con board serving AC chiller plant, cooling towers
etc.
f) 2 nos of Surge protection Devices (SPD) with pre-warning indicator

should be installed in the Switch Boards; one for the Switch board and
the other for the Digital Power Meter (to protect to a let-through voltage
at 800V and below). The communication port (for remote monitoring
system) at the meter terminals should be protected by SDP (metal
oxide varistor or any better device) to a clamping voltage at 200V or
below.
g) Sub-metering (Digital KWH meter) should be installed at Sub-board(s)

for other tenants such as Canteen, Non-Faculty Departments, etc.
h) The meter’s remote monitoring device shall be wired up and connected

to the new power monitoring system’s communication controller near
the meters’ site and also to the data server and the MMI unit (or the
Master Station) in Monitoring Control Room, Office of Estate &
Development. MMI unit shall have power back-up from UPS. The
monitoring system must generate energy consumptions report, billing
invoices, and event and alarm reports on daily, weekly, monthly,
different intervals of the year and yearly period.
i) IDMTL protection relay for ACB must be of 3 nos of over-current and

one earth fault (Electromechanical type)
j) Main Incoming Breaker and breaker (MCCB) of 800A rating and above
shall be of ACB with motorized spring charged type.
k) Extended rotary lever handles with padlocking facilities and position

indicators shall be provided for all MCCB in all the switchboards.
l) Appropriate instant trip settings, earth leakage protection for all

outgoing MCCBs.
m) Protection systems are to be properly discriminated with correct

selection of MCCBs.
n) Separate Transformers’ power supply to Air-con circuits and

power/lighting circuit.
TS/1/36 2602542S/EL
o) Separate busbar trunking riser/rising main serving AHU loads and the
power supply to this riser should be from transformer purely for Air-
con’s load.
p) Sub-boards or MDBs under normal power supply should have over-

current(OC) and earth fault(EF)/leakage protection.
q) All Sub-boards or MDBs must be easily accessible for maintenance

needs especially after office hours.
r) Emergency Switch Board (EMSB) shall be of 3-feeds; 2-feeds from

normal switch board consisting of normal power supply feed(to ATS,
Auto Transfer Switch, in ESB) and maintenance by-pass circuit feed (to
MTS, Manual Transfer Switch, in EMSB) and the last feed from Gen
Set Control Panel.
s) ESB should not have main earth fault protection at the incoming main
breaker but should have earth fault/leakage protections to all sub-
circuits.
t) Over-Current and Earth Fault Protections must be discriminated well to

prevent breakers (MCCBs) from tripping.
u) Emergency MDB or Sub-board should not have any earth fault/leakage

protections in incoming and outgoing breakers/circuits (RCCBs shall be
installed at their DB ends).
v) All permanent labels for the identification of emergency

circuits/points/accessories and the ESB should be of white lettering in
red background.
w) Normal switch board shall have permanent labels of white lettering

black background.
x) Stabilizer is required for sensitive equipment.
y) Submission of computation and circuit discrimination graph for fault

analysis.
z) Main Switch Board and Emergency Switch Board should have 30%
spare outgoing circuits’ capacities of 200A, 400A etc.
aa) MDBs, Sub-boards, DBs should have 20% spare circuit capacities.
bb) Electrical Sub-Contractor shall provide individual RCCB in the DBs to

all final circuits for power points, all emergency final circuits, computer
circuits, air-con unit power points and AHU isolators. Individual RCCB
per phase should be provided for three phase lighting DBs. A main
RCCB should be provided for a single phase lighting DBs.
cc) MCB should be of type B for lighting and type C for power points.
dd) All DBs must display single line diagram of the final circuits in a plastic
folder with an insert-able top pasted and, if the DBs are housed in
riser, a warning and danger sign should be mounted on the riser door.
TS/1/37 2602542S/EL
ee) Installation of DBs shall allow for maintenance access to carry out
repair work easily and must be easily accessible after office hour
period.
32.3 Generator Set
a) Main earth fault protection shall be provided in the Gen Set’s Control
Panel to protect in a zone from the generator to the cub-circuit
protection circuits in the Emergency Switch Board.
b) Battery Bank of Plante cells; to be correctly sized to the generator’s

starting requirement and install with wooden battery rack in an
arrangement to allow topping up of electrolyte.
c) External battery charger panel of current limiting, temperature

compensating, constant voltage, floor standing type; built-in charger is
not accepted.
d) Incoming Power Supply circuit to the battery charger Panel must be

connected before RCCB, i.e. by-pass the RCCB.
e) Submission of the reports:
i) for sizing of the Plante battery cells with the information on Get
Set engine’s breakaway and cranking current and the voltages
of the battery during periods of locked rotor currents and
cranking current,
ii) for the sizing of charger with information on the rating of the
charger (in Amp) and the nos of charging hour it will take to
recover full charged state upon depleting its power in a fully
discharged state,
iii) for performance data such as acoustic information, noise level,

fuel consumption, nos of hours the fuel transfer system (from
the daily service tank) can support full load emergency back-up
and,
iv) symmetrical fault level of the generator.
The reports should be made available in the O&M Manual.
f) Install with fire rated (FR) cables on tray/trunking for all power cables
g) Suitable spring type anti-vibration mounting for the generator.
h) Design of exhaust pipe’s discharged end shall face away from the
nearest building, especially AHU rooms, etc to prevent it from
absorbing to the air conditioning services.
i) Lighting of at least 300 lux or higher should be designed for the Gen
Set Room.
TS/1/38 2602542S/EL
j) Fuel storage tank of sufficient capacity (at least 1000 litres) and
underground fuel tank (5000 litres) complete with fuel pumping system
and fuel level gauge. The tank should be mounted high and housed in
a contained space for fire safety protection.
k) Provide sound silencer, good ventilation for generator exhaust pipe.
l) Provide independent earth for generator.
32.4 Lighting
a) All lamp holders used in luminaires shall be of fire retardant type and of
IP65 as specified.
b) All low voltage transformers for tungsten halogen luminaires shall be

supplied from the original luminaires manufacturer and shall be of one
transformer for each luminaire.
c) Different groups of centralized timer for all staircase and the corridor
lighting.
d) Emergency supply to emergency lights/luminaires shall be provided

and wired up with fire rated cables.
e) All self-contained emergency luminaires shall be of non-maintained

type and solely for emergency use. The luminaires shall be of 10W
LED on flush disk housing for false ceiling installation.
f) All self-contained emergency luminaires shall have self-contained

emergency kit. This kit shall be duo rate charging, has 2 hours duration
of lighting, a red indicator, test button and a label. The sealed nickel
cadmium batteries shall be sized to give minimum lumen output of 200
lumens.
g) Exit light shall be of LED type with batteries sized to give minimum
lumens output 180 or above.
h) Recessed luminaires are to be securely hanged by 4 nos of fastslide

spring clips and adjustable steel wire hangers.
32.5 22kV HV Switchgear
a) Use VCB breakers. PT shall be protected by fuses.
b) IDMTL relay (electromechanical OC and EF relay) for protection.
c) Incoming Power Supply circuit to the Battery Charger Panel must be

connected before RCCB, i.e. bypass the RCCB.
d) Earth fault protection for Transformer Feeder Panel shall be protected

by a high impedance voltage differential relay and has setting of 25-
170V/25-270V in 5V steps. CT shall be class X type.
TS/1/39 2602542S/EL
e) Pilot wire protection to all feeder circuits.
f) All switchgear and cable connections shall be grounded and connected

to the Main Earth Terminal. Labels shall be permanently fixed to all
cables and the front and back part of switchgear panels.
g) Should there be any discrepencies in tender drawing, all pilot and

supervisory cabling supplied by contractors to match existing pairs of
cables.
32.7 Transformer
a) Transformer HV cable box shall be of bottom entry and be secured

with good support. Termination to LV cable box shall be by feeder
busbar trunking, if specified for, and shall be of top entry with earthing
connection.
b) If cable is used at LV cable box, it must be properly supported with

bracket and supervised by the transformer manufacturer/agent.
c) To provide High Temperature, Over Pressure and Low Oil Level

protection for the transformer and be wired back to HV switchgear
panel for tripping/alarm operation and indication. The protection
devices should be wired to a terminal box mounted on the transformer.
d) Transformer protection relays; OCR c/w high set and EF relay of high
impedance voltage differential operation with wide voltage range
setting in 5V steps.
e) 2 x 120mm2 cable for Transformer neutral earthing and body earthing.

f) Full conductor size (similar to phase conductors) for transformer
neutral termination.
g) All cables terminated in cable boxes shall be ground to the

transformers and be connected to the Main Earth Terminal. Labels
shall be permanently fixed to all cables.
h) To provide permanent labels for identification of Transformer in white

lettering in black background and spray paint the identification label on
the transformer body.
32.8 Underground Services
a) All services underneath the road must be laid with uPVC pipes and
encased in class ‘C’ concrete with a thickness of 150mm all round.
b) Cable marker of approved type shall be provided for identification at

good interval range for straight runs and cornering runs.
TS/1/40 2602542S/EL
33. Instruction Manual for Essential Facility Provision in Building
Beside the training, operation and maintenance manual that need to be

submitted. The sub-contractor shall required to prepare the instruction manual,
respond instruction and recommended maintenance regimes on the system
which being installed in the building and submit to the SO and Engineer for
approval. This information shall be the extract and overall summary with
equipment detail for those fire related and critical provision essential provision
The manual shall include the emergency respond action to be taken in which
when the building is in fire or other critical condition. The documentation shall
be a controlled copy with all the amended revision recorded.
The Sub-contractor shall coordinate and compile with the builder and other
M&E specialist Sub-contractor for the instruction manual
The instruction manual shall consist of the following:
a) Project Title, all the consultant firm, Qualified Person, Contractors, etc.
b) Content , Revision and controlled sheet on amendments
c) Description of the building, type of system that being installed in the

building, system compliance
d) Summary of the equipments and the its operation procedure during

emergency
e) Emergency respond, such as Locating, Identifying, Checking, Respond

and Recovery.
f) Flow chart on the procedure. ( One set to be paste at the Fire

command Centre and at the relevant equipment)
g) Recommend Maintenance Regime
TS/1/41 2602542S/EL
The system shall include but not limited to the followings:
a) Architectural - Escape staircase location and the routing
b) PWD -Location, emergency respond and the recommended procedure

on evacuation
c) Two way EVC - Type of system, Fireman intercom, PWD intercom,

Emergency respond, 3-way conferencing ( Satellite FCC, Local FCC
and Local PWD handset)
d) Emergency Secondary Power Supply – Generator location, fuel tank

detail, Underground fuel detail.
e) Fire alarm system - Stage of Alarm, Location, emergency respond and

the recommended procedure on evacuation
f) Sprinkler – Classification of System, Stage of sprinkler, Location,

g) Gas Suppression system- Type of system, Stage of Alarm, Location,

h) Medical Gas/ Laboratory Gas - Type of system, Type of Alarm,

Location, emergency respond and the recommended procedure on
evacuation
i) Petroleum and Flammable Materials - recommend good practice,

emergency respond and recommended procedure during emergency
j) Lab ACMV, Exhaust, equipment exhaust and Purging system - Type of

k) Smoke Control system and car park ventilation system - Type of

l) Kitchen Exhaust - Fan and air cleaner location and equipment detail,
Hood detail, Gas suppression system
m) One way EVC - The setup, type of messages, emergency respond and
recommended procedure during emergency
TS/1/42 2602542S/EL
n) Fire Command Centre and Fire fighting facility location - Type of
system, emergency respond and the recommended procedure on
evacuation
o) Lift - Type of system, Location, emergency respond and the

recommended procedure on evacuation, PWD evacuation.
p) Others – System that affect the building fire safety and its
recommended procedure on evacuation.
Sub-contractor shall liaise with the main-contractor for the final compiling and
combine of the instruction manual into a copy. 5 set of softcopy (including editable
copy) and hardcopy shall be submitted during the handing over of building or after
the training.
TS/1/43 2602542S/EL
SECTION 5 - LOW VOLTAGE MAIN AND SUB-SWITCHBOARD
1. General Requirements
1.1 The low voltage switchboard shall be suitable for use on a 400/230 Volt phase
4 wire 50 Hz supply system.
1.2 The switchboard shall be of the self-contained, total insulated, floor mounting,
extensible modular construction, metal clad, flush-fronted, front and rear
access cubicle type, built up from completely enclosed units housing all the
circuit breakers, meters, selector switches, indicating lamps and protection
relays, current transformers, protection transformers, contactors, busbars,
fuses, anti-condensation heaters complete with indicating lamps and switches
and etc. all as indicated in the drawings. Dry contacts on breaker status such
as ON/OFF and TRIP/FAULT for BAS/IBMS/Lighting management systems
monitoring shall be provided with linking to digital power meter.
1.3 The Sub-Contractor shall state the rating and size of all necessary equipment
having due regards to the arrangement and loading of the particular equipment
and the Sub-Contract price shall be deemed to include the cost for suitably
rated equipment, and for the completion of the switchboards in every respect
ready for continuous operations whether such requirement are directly
mentioned in the Specifications or not. No extra cost will be considered for
additional equipment necessary to complete the switchboards.
1.4 The whole switchboard shall be designed in accordance with FORM 3B OF

IEC 61439 and suitable for 400 volt, 3-phase 4 wire, 50 Hz indoor service in an
ambient temperature of up to 40oC with 100% R.H. at maximum continuous
rating without exceeding the maximum temperature permitted by Singapore
Standard. It shall withstand without damage, stresses under short circuit
condition up to the minimum interrupting capacity Icu (kA) at 415 volts 50 Hz
A.C. as stated on the drawings for 3 seconds.
1.5 The manufacturer shall guarantee all L.V. switchboards are constructed in
accordance with the type-tested requirements of IEC 61439 FORM 3B.
1.6 The manufacturer of the switchboards shall ensure that his products are so
designed and tested that they are satisfactory for the purpose.
1.7 All air circuit breakers (ACB), moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) and
equipment shall be housed in a separated, totally insulated module.
1.8 The switchboard is preferably certified by Singapore Green Building Council

(SGBC) or Singapore Environment Council (SEC).
TS/5/1 2602542S/EL
2. Drawings
2.1 The Sub-Contractor shall submit detailed construction drawings of all

switchboards for the approval of the S.O. before fabrication and installation.
Such drawings shall show constructional details and shall incorporate a full list
of proposed materials, equipment, meters and accessories to be used, and
the method of supporting equipment and busbars.
2.2 On completion of the installation, the Sub-Contractor shall provide and mount
on frames single line diagrams for every switchroom, load centre and electrical
closet showing full details of connected circuits, current transformers rating,
bus-bar, size, time setting or protective devices, sizes and types of cable
installed etc. suitably framed in glass panels. The diagrams shall be
approximately 1000 mm x 750 mm for L.V. switchroom.
3. Standards
3.1 The equipment and materials used and the method of construction as
applicable shall conform to Singapore Electricity Act and the following British
Standard (BS) or International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC). These
standards shall be the minimum requirement of the equipment.
a) Switchboard - BS EN 61495 and IEC 60439
b) Busbars and busbar connection on

switchboard - BS 159
c) Busbar connections, arrangements

and markings, and grade of copper - BS 159/ BS 1433 / BS 1977
d) Heavy duty air circuit breakers

and switchgears for A.C. system
up to 1000 V - BS 4752: Part /IEC 60947
e) Moulded case circuit breakers - BS 3871 Part 2 / IEC 60947-2
f) Indicating instruments - BS 89 1st. grade / IEC 60051
g) Integrating meters - BS 37 Part 1 and 2
h) Integrating meters with

cyclometer registers - BS 37 Part 4
i) Protection relays - BS 142 / IEC 60255
j) Cartridge fuses for voltage up

to 1000 V.a.c. - BS 88 /IEC 60269
k) Contactors - BS 775 / IEC 60947-4
l) Indicator lights - BS 4099: 1986
m) Air-break switches, air-break

fuse switches and air-breakers - BS 5419 / IEC 60947
switch-fuse
TS/5/2 2602542S/EL
n) Control Switches - BS 4794 / IEC60947-3 /
IEC60947 -5
o) Terminal marking for switchgear

and control gear - BS 5581 / EN 50013
p) Contactor relays - BS 5583 / EN 50011
q) Electrical accessories,
circuit breakers for overcurrent - BS EN 60898 -2
protection and circuit breaker for
A.C and D.C operation
4. Authority Requirements
4.1 The Sub-Contractor shall include all the other necessary items of equipment
that is not shown in the drawings and mentioned in this specification but which
is necessary to comply with Authorities requirements.
5. Air Circuit Breaker(ACB) and Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
5.1 ACB and MCCB shall refer to the relevant sections of the Specifications.
5.2 Extended rotary lever handles shall be provided for all MCCB in the
switchboards.
5.3 All MCCBs feeding to feeder or plug in busways shall be current limiting type
unless otherwise stated or directed by the S.O.
5.4 Non-metallic, non-flammable insulating barriers shall be fitted between

adjacent terminals of the incoming and outgoing sides of the MCCB.
5.5 All moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) shall have tripping characteristic
type "3" curve.
5.6 All main incoming breakers shall be installed with lightning transient surge
protector to provide full protection against transient overvoltages for all
possible transient mode :
a) Phase to neutral
b) Phase to earth
c) Neutral to earth
The transient overvoltage shall reduce to less than 700 V for 230 V supply.
5.7 The device shall conform to BS 2914:1972, BS 6651: 1999 and UL 1449.
TS/5/3 2602542S/EL
6. Frame Construction
6.1 The sections and subsections of the switchboard cubicle shall be modular in
design in accordance to BS 5486: 1989 and shall stand rigidly on top of the
floor opening. The cubicle shall be installed on a framework of channel steel
50mm x 50mm x 2.5mm with flushed cover and panels made of 2mm thick
mild steel plate flanged for added strength and shall be constructed without
any sag, deformation or warping and be able to withstand the load likely to be
experienced during normal operation, maintenance or under a fault condition
of not less than the specified kA for 3 seconds. All steel sheets and channel
shall preferably be zinc alloy coated.
6.2 Structural members and bracing where necessary shall be welded or bolted to
the frame.
6.3 Each cubicle shall be standard size, uniform in height, width and depth.
6.4 Each module of section and subsection of the switchboard cubicle shall be
type tested to withstand a fault level of specified kA for 3 seconds. The
cubicle shall have pressure relieving roof and rear panels.
6.5 Full access shall be provided to the control equipment inside the cubicles by
means of suitable door, secured in closed position by means of recessed key
operated catches, which shall be mechanically interlocked with the controlling
switch, to prevent the door from being opened with the switch in the 'ON'
position. The doors shall be fitted with strengthening strips to give the
necessary rigidity. Rear panel door for every module shall be full height,
hinged and fitted with recessed key operated catches.
6.6 The cubicles shall be constructed with degree of protection IP 4X and shall
also meet the special requirement for use in tropical climates.
6.7 All the doors shall be fitted with neoprene gasket cemented to the frame. All
edges for the openings at the front panel shall be fitted with gasket.
6.8 The interior of each cubicle shall be dust, insect and vermin proof and wire
nets shall be permanently welded to the panels.
7. Base Plate and Insulating Panels
7.1 The switchboard shall be of the front and rear access type.
7.2 All equipment shall be mounted on rigid base plates made of not less than 14
B.G. (2 mm thick) steel sheet with folded edges and welded stiffeners
wherever necessary. Whenever insulating panels are required to mount
special equipment they shall be of high quality rigid, non-hygroscopic
fiberboard. All edges must be cut straight and squared and shall be
chamfered on the front edge with 3.2 mm chamfer. Any defective or damaged
panel shall be rejected and the Sub-Contractor shall replace it at his own
expense.
TS/5/4 2602542S/EL
8. Lighting Contactor Cubicles
8.1 In the case of lighting contactor cubicles electrically/mechanically interlocks

shall be provided with the circuit breakers to prevent door being opened with
the circuit breakers in the 'ON' position.
9. Finishing and Metal Work
9.1 All painted parts of the steel work are to be phosphated and finished with a
rust proof stove-dried polyester or epoxy-resin electrostatically power coating.
Non painted steel parts are to be electrostatically zinc alloy coated.
9.2 All metal parts exposed by cutting and any part of the painted surfaces that
has been scratched or marked shall be prepared and finished to match the
original paint finish.
9.3 Colour of the switchboard shall be finished in royal blue to BS.
10. Insulation
10.1 The whole switchboard shall be of a total insulation type as IEC 61439 Form
3B requirements.
10.2 The clearances and insulation shall be such as to withstand the standard high
voltage test on the switchgear.
10.3 All insulation used shall be of the best quality and sufficiently strong to
withstand all stresses that may be imposed on it in the ordinary erection and
operation of the plant.
10.4 Glass-reinforced thermoset polyester or epoxy resin busbar support insulators

shall be employed. Insulating materials that liberate smoke, injurious gases or
corrosive substances under insulation failure or arcing faults must not be
used.
10.5 Arrangements must be made to ensure that metal parts attached to bushings
are maintained at fixed potential under all conditions of operation.
10.6 All live parts shall be completely covered with insulation according to clause
SS 293 Form 3B requirements.
10.7 Insulation plates shall be provided for segregation of compartments and

cubicles.
11. Interlocking of Main Circuit Breakers and Bus-Tie Breaker
11.1 The main circuit breakers for the incoming supply and the bus-tie breaker shall
be so interlocked, electrically and mechanically, that only two of the three
breakers can be closed at any one time. The mechanical interlock shall be
achieved by the use of "Castell" keys. The system shall be so arranged that
the withdrawal of one circuit breaker in no way affects the operation of the
other two.
TS/5/5 2602542S/EL
12. Safety Measure
12.1 The Switchboards shall incorporate suitable protective measure such as

partitioning between sections, subsections, shutters and interlock etc. for
protection against internal arching, contact with live parts etc.
12.2 Where insulation is cemented or jointed to metal parts such jointing shall be of
such a nature that no dangerous stresses are set up in the insulation by the
unequal expansion or contraction of the insulation and the metal through a
range of temperature from 25oC to 90oC.
12.3 Phase distinguishing colours shall be BLUE, BROWN and BLACK and the
phase rotation shall be strictly maintained throughout the complete L.V.
installation.
13. Busbars and Jumpers
Busbars shall comprise four (4) air-insulated, hard drawn high conductivity tinned
copper of adequate rectangular cross sections as determined in accordance to CP5,
to carry continuously the currents required or as specified in the drawings. Current
rating of copper busbar shall refer to the table A below. If laminated busbars are used,
appropriate de-rating factor according to IEC standard for the current capacity must be
applied. The busbar shall be rigidly supported by means of heavy duty busbar holders
of fiberglass reinforced polyester which are securely bolted to the framework so as to
enable the busbars to withstand the mechanical and thermal stresses to which they
would be subjected under maximum fault conditions.
Current rating of copper busbar shall refer to the table A below:-
TS/5/6 2602542S/EL
Width X Thickness Single busbar Double busbars
(mm) (Amp) (Amp)
20 x 5 153 306
30 x 5 230 460
40 x 5 308 616
50 x 5 385 770
20 x 10 308 616
30 x 10 463 926
40 x 10 618 1236
50 x 10 773 1510
60 x 10 928 1720
80 x 10 1238 2110
100 x 10 1490 2480
120 x 10 1740 2866
160 x 10 2200 3590
200 x 10 2690 4310
TABLE A -- Continuous current for copper busbars for an ambient temperature of 35 oC

and maximum permissible temperature of the busbars 65 oC
13.1 If laminated busbars are used, appropriate de-rating factor according to IEC
standard for the current capacity must be applied. In any case, current density
shall not more than 1.55 ampere per sq. mm. The busbar shall be rigidly
supported by means of heavy duty busbar holders of fiberglass reinforced
polyester which are securely bolted to the framework so as to enable the
busbars to withstand the mechanical and thermal stresses to which they would
be subjected under maximum fault conditions.
13.2 Busbar shall be tinned throughout and shall be painted to indicate phases with
two (2) coat of non- glossy nitrocellulose lacquers for the entire length. The
ends of the busbar shall be drilled and be ready for future extension. The main
busbars and earthing shall be to the full length of the switchboard. Access to
the busbars shall be through fixed doors and covers; suitable warning labels
shall be fixed to the front of the busbar covers.
13.3 The main horizontal circuit busbars must be located on the top most section of
the switchboard, whereas the main earthing busbar must be located at the
bottom of the switchboard.
TS/5/7 2602542S/EL
13.4 The busbar shall be provided with facilities for connection to incoming and
outgoing switchgear. All joints in the busbar shall be securely bolted or
clamped, with contact surface suitably prepared to prevent oxidation in service
and shall not cause any deformation or distortion of the busbar or connection
rod.
13.5 Joints in copper busbar shall have tinned surfaces. Approved washer,
screwed and locknut shall be used. Screw, locknut shall be of cadmium
plated high tensile steel with ISO metric thread in accordance to BS 3643.
13.6 All jumpers from MCCB or fuse switches above 100 ampereframe (AF) to
main busbars shall be tinned copper busbars.
13.7 For cable to busbar termination, heat resistant cables with cable lug shall be
used.
13.8 The cross sectional areas of the jumper busbars shall be sized according to
the Ampere Frame of the MCCB or fuse switches.
13.9 Under no circumstances shall step busbar be allowed in the switchboards.
13.10 All busbars shall be constructed in such manner as to allow for future
extension without dismantling and modifying of the busbars and busbar
mounting.
13.11 All busbars shall be constructed in such manner as to allow for thermal
expansion.
13.12 Self adhesive reversible temperature indicators of approved design shall be

placed at all the joints along main busbar vertically or horizontally run and at
the fixed contacts of all the air circuit breaker. The range of the temperature
indicator shall be from 40oC - 70oC and shall be clearly legible when viewed
from the rear panel. The insulation board between the rear panels and the
busbars where the temperature indicators are placed shall be transparent.
13.13 All clamps, screws, bolts, washers, and similar securing materials used for the
construction of the switchboard shall be made of gunmetal, brass, bronze or
approved copper alloy. Spring washers shall be made of high grade of
stainless steel or other approved material. Screws and bolts shall be tightened
by torque wrench to the following standards:-
a) M6 - 8 Nm
b) M8 - 20 Nm
c) M10 - 40 Nm
d) M12 - 70 Nm
e) M14 - 110 Nm
f) M16 - 170 Nm
TS/5/8 2602542S/EL
14. Clearance For Air-Insulated Busbars
14.1 The minimum busbar clearances between phases and between phase to earth
in air shall not be less than 26 mm and 19 mm respectively. If the above
mentioned minimum clearance cannot be met, busbars shall be insulated by
approved colour coded heat shrinkable tubings.
15. Earthing
15.1 All metal parts of the switchboard and associated equipment shall be bonded
and connected to an appropriate size of hard drawn high conductivity copper
main earthing bar running at the bottom and throughout the entire length of the
switchboard.
15.2 The minimum cross sectional area of switchboard main earth bar shall be as
follows:-
a) 240 mm2 for 22 kA

b) 360 mm2 for 36 kA
c) 420 mm2 for 43 kA
d) 500 mm2 for 50 kA
15.3 Minimum two nos. of earthing cables /conductors of the same cross sectional
area of the switchboard main earthing bar shall be provided for the connection
of the switchboard main earthing bar to the low voltage system main earthing
bar. These cables /conductors shall be connected to the both ends of the
switchboard main earthing bar.
15.4 All earthing conductors shall be permanently connected to the main earthing
bar.
15.5 All earthing provisions shall be made strictly in accordance with the
requirements of Singapore Standards and it shall be the Sub-Contractor's
responsibility to comply fully with all such requirements.
15.6 All hinged doors shall be connected to the cubicle body by appropriate size of
earth braids.
16. Neutral Links
16.1 Neutral links of incoming breakers shall be easily accessible and removable.
16.2 Neutral links of all outgoing moulded case circuit breakers shall be removed
and accessible from the front.
17. Ventilation
All switchboard shall be properly naturally ventilated. All vents shall be covered with a
fine mesh net welded on the inside.
TS/5/9 2602542S/EL
18. Cable Entries
18.1 The switchboards shall house all necessary cable boxes, glands, etc. mounted
vertically or horizontally and arranged for front and rear access and
connections.
18.2 Except for busducts and unless otherwise stated, all incoming cables shall be
at bottom entries and outgoing cables shall be of top entries.
18.3 Cable boxes for termination of incoming cables shall be mounted at the base.
It shall be of the split type manufactured from good quality cast iron, free from
blowholes complete with filling orifice, drain plugs, expansion dome, brass-
core shaped wiping gland of appropriate size, armour clamp. Such design as
is suitable for attachment to the equipment served and such as to permit cable
conductors to be formed into equipment terminals without undue bending.
18.4 Connections from switchboards gears to the busbar trunkings shall be top
entries and switchboard stubs shall be included in the switchboard design.
18.5 Outgoing cables shall be secured to the switchboard by approved suitable

cable glands mounted on non-ferrous plate. The arrangement of the outgoing
cables shall ensure no blocking of future outgoing cables terminations.
18.6 All cable terminations within the cubicle shall be in a satisfactory manner in a
purpose made terminal and shall be neatly fastened to the purpose made
metal channels. For all underground armoured cables, arrangement shall be
made to have the sheath bonded and earthed through a special earthing
system.
19.1 All incoming and outgoing and control circuits shall be wired to an approved
centralized terminal strip, and the equipment at the inside of the cubicle shall
be run through wiring channels and wiring outside the channels shall be run
neatly and taped to approval. All wires shall be terminated with approved
cable lugs, and separate cable lugs shall be used for each individual wire.
19.2 All wires shall be colour coded and shall have numbered ferrules at both ends.
The ferrules shall be of white insulating material having a glossy finished with
the characters indelibly marked in black. Additional red ferrules marked "Trip"
shall be fitted to the wires interconnecting the relay trip and the shunt release
coils.
19.3 All fuses and links shall be of the bakelite HRC type category 415/AC 13 class
Q to BS 88:2007.
19.4 All wiring shall be arranged in a regular manner with bends set at 90o and
securely held in position with suitable clips and where convenient shall be
installed in the uprights and/or secured, insulating bushes being used where
necessary. They shall be formed in a neat and systematic manner.
19.5 Meter wiring of the switchboard shall be carried out in PVC insulated name-
proof switchboard cables of size not less than 1.5 sq. mm and enclosed in
flexible plastic conduit. All meter wiring shall be of similar colours to those of
the respective busbars etc. to which connections are made.
TS/5/10 2602542S/EL
19.6 All terminals shall be fitted with brass washers and securely fixed with lock
nuts to an approved type of terminal block placed in an easily accessible
position for testing at site.
19.7 No connectors or soldered joints shall be permitted in the wiring.
19.8 All terminals shall be completely insulated and potential circuits shall be
suitably fused.
19.9 Approved means shall be provided on the relay panels for the testing of
protective relays and associated circuits.
20.1 Corners and bases shall be coloured according to the following code:
Colour Function
White 5A fuse
Blue 15A fuse
Yellow 20A fuse
Red link
20.2 Descriptive labels shall be fitted, near all fuses and links.
20.3 The terminal strips shall be numbered and scheduled to identify the particular
circuits without difficulty. The same numbers and reference letters identifying
circuits and/or components of the equipment shall be shown on the wiring
diagram that is to be supplied by the Sub-Contractor.
20.4 The interior of each piece of equipment shall be clearly marked to show the
phases and to this end either coloured plastic discs screwed to fixed
components or identification by means of colour plastic sleeve shall be
employed. Plastic tape will not be permitted.
21. Tools Compartment
Each main switchboard shall incorporate a compartment for tools.
22. Labels
22.1 All equipment shall be clearly labelled in accordance with regulations, and to
indicate its functions, designation, ampere, etc. by means of engraved
traffolyte ivorine labels (Black in white lettering for normal supply, Red in white
22.2 Each circuit breaker, switch, switch-fuse, fuse, selector switch, indicating light,
push button, instrument, etc. shall be labelled indicating its rating, function,
designation. In addition warnings signs marked "400 volts Danger"
manufactured to standard design and colour shall be suitably nominated and
fixed on the back of each cubicles on the insulation plates and on the front of
each switchboard and on the door of each switchroom. The markings shall be
according to BS 171 Clause 79.
TS/5/11 2602542S/EL
23. Current Transformer (CT)
23.1 Current transformers necessary for the operation of instruments and meters
shall be of "straight through" type, with not less than 15VA burden and
accuracy of class 0.5 for Digital power meter/Energy meter/KWH meter, Class
1 for ammeter and class 5P20 for protection to BS 3938:1973.
23.2 Current transformers shall be adequately rated in V.A. to carry the summation
of all V.A. burdens of connected loads, and shall be capable of carrying
currents of the corresponding circuit breakers and fuses. They shall be
capable of operation, without damage, with open circuited secondary and full
load current flowing in the primary. They shall comply with the latest EMA’s
requirements.
23.3 Current transformers shall be adequately supported and installed as to permit

easy access and shall be readily replaceable, if necessary, without dismantling
the adjacent equipment.
23.4 Current transformers shall comply with B.S. 3938:1982 or IEC 60185. They
shall be manufactured from high impact flame retardant moulded cases
suitable for mounting on 105o C busbars and to IP40.
23.5 All current transformers shall have the following characteristics :-
a) Rated 660Vac max.

b) Dielectric strength --- 2.5 kV/min.
c) Temperature -20o C to +70o C ambient
d) Short circuit thermal current (Ith) --- 60 times rated primary current for
1 sec.
e) Rated dynamic current --- 2.55 short circuit thermal current (Ith)
24.1 Instruments and meters for external panel mounting shall be flush mounting,
square or rectangular type with appropriate cover plates finished black and
shall conform to the requirements shown on the drawings.
24.2 Reading scales in kilowatt hour meters shall be preferably in multiple of ten
(10).
24.3 All instruments shall be to BS 89 1st grade, moving iron spring controlled with
100 mm x 100 mm dials (90o scale) with external zero adjustment, integrating
meters shall be to BS 37 Part 1 and 2: 1952 and part 4: 1954 with cyclometer
registers and shall be calibrated for use with their respective current
transformers.
24.4 Voltmeters shall incorporate selector switches to enable phase to phase and
phase to neutral voltage to be read. Ammeter shall have selector switches to
read all the line current. Selector switches shall be of approved rotary type.
Generally ammeters shall be 20% overscaled however, ammeters associated
with motor circuits shall be 500% overscaled.
24.5 Ampere meters shall have maximum demand pointers (5 minutes type).
24.6 All live terminals shall be insulated.
TS/5/12 2602542S/EL
24.7 Instruments, meters and relays located on the front of the switchboard shall be
segregated from the interior of the cubicle and so positioned that as far as
possible, each instrument meter and relay is flush with the hinged dust proof
access doors and is adjacent to the unit with which it is associated. Other
relays more suitable for mounting inside the cubicle such as those required for
back indication and tripping etc. shall be grouped conveniently in dust proof
cases with removable covers to provide easy access for cleaning and
adjustment without dismantling.
24.8 Meter panels shall be hinged to provide ready access to connections and
small wiring shall be enclosed in flexible plastic conduit.
24.9 All meters and relays shall be fully tropicallised.
24.10 The back of these instruments, meters and relays for external panel mounting
shall be encased in a removable high heat resistant, high insulation, dust proof
cover to prevent any accidental contact with any of the line terminals or
connections. These removable covers shall be designed in such that it
provides easy access for cleaning and adjustment/maintenance with proper
labelling/identification 'LIVE TERMINAL' on the cover
25. Over Current and Earth Fault Relays
25.1 The over current relays shall be IDMTL (electromechanical) type with
adjustable current setting between 50% to 200% of rated values and
adjustable time lag settings of 0 to 1.3 seconds at 10 times current setting;
instantaneous high set elements adjustable between 1 to 10 times shall be
provided for each main incoming circuit breaker. They shall be of 3/10
characteristic.
25.2 The earth fault relays shall be IDMTL (electromechanical) type with adjustable
current setting between 1% to 10% of rated values and adjustable time lag
settings of 0 to 1.3 seconds at 10 times current setting; instantaneous high set
elements adjustable between 1 to 10 times shall be provided for each main
incoming circuit breaker. They shall be of 1.3/10 characteristic.
25.3 The relays shall be surface mounted and housed in a totally enclosed dust-
proof switchboard module, tested and sealed by EMA registered testing
engineer (LEW).
25.4 The operating coils and contacts shall be adequately rated to carry the
necessary load. Operation indicator and reset facilities shall be provided.
25.5 The relays shall be heavy pattern, unaffected by external vibration, fully
tropicallised and capable of operation in any position.
25.6 The control voltage for the relays shall be 240 V.a.c. 50 Hz.
TS/5/13 2602542S/EL
26. Anti-Condensation Heaters
26.1 Each vertical cubicle section of the switchboard shall be fitted with a 25 watts
approved strip heating devices suitable for operation at 230 volt A.C. single
phase of sufficient capacity to raise the internal ambient temperature by 5oC if
requested by S.O.
26.2 Protection device shall be incorporated so that the maximum permitted rise in
temperature is not exceeded if the heaters are energized with the apparatus in
operation.
26.3 Heater 'ON' indicating lamps shall be provided.
27.1 Indicating lamps shall be the type with built-in transformers and made of brass
with chromium plated bezel and locking ring. The lamps shall be easily
28. Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB), Contactors, Isolators, etc.,
Moulded case circuit breakers, contactors, isolators and other items where applicable
and necessary shall be provided to comply with the relevant clauses specified
elsewhere in the Specifications.
29. Auto Transfer Switch (ATS)
Auto Transfer Switch (ATS) shall be provided to comply with the relevant clauses
specified elsewhere in the Specifications.
30. Safety Notices Equipment
30.1 The Sub-Contractor shall provide and install the following notices and
equipment in the consumer switchrooms/load centres.
a) Copies of all statutory safety notices, regulations and instructions for

resuscitation and treatment after electrical shock; all surface treated
with clear varnish, in suitable wall mounted frames.
b) Four languages danger signs in the switchrooms and elsewhere, all to

Authority’s requirements.
c) A varnished and mounted on suitable hard backing and framed (in

glass panel) copy of the main single line diagram showing clearly the
full details, dimensions, layout of the L.V. switchboards as supplied
and installed.
d) Solid rubber insulated mats of 1 metre wide and 10 mm thick

complying with BS 921 to the full length in front of every switchboard.
TS/5/14 2602542S/EL
e) A wall mounted key press housing all keys in the switchroom/load
centre with a B4 size hard cover log book for record purposes.
f) A wall mounted or floor standing tool cabinet to house all the tools
within the switchrooms.
g) A hanging signage " DANGER DO NOT TURN ON WORK IN

PROGRESS" shall be provided. The signage shall be white lettering
with red background, size 150mm (L) x 105mm (H) and Font size of
15mm (H) x 10mm (W).
31. Switchboard Tests
31.1 Delivery Tests
After the equipment has been erected on site, and before final connection to
supply, the Sub-Contractor shall at his own expense:
a) Arrange with the Authorties/PowerGrid and Registered Testing

Engineer to carry out the necessary testings.
b) Carry out all necessary adjustments and/or tests necessary to

demonstrate that the equipment complies with the requirements of this
specification and with his own equipment, in the presence of, and to
the satisfaction of the S.O.. Such tests shall include:
1) Demonstrating that all equipment is installed and all wiring

connected, so that the board functions as required.
2) Tests of accuracy of all measuring instruments.
3) Insulation resistances between phases, between each phase

and neutral, and between each phase, neutral and earth with
circuit breakers closed.
4) Insulation resistance across breaks in all circuit breakers, with

the breaker open and with all equipment installed.
5) Power - frequency voltage tests, in accordance with Clause 63

of BS 116: 1952.
c) Copies of test sheets /reports, showing the results of all test carried
out in accordance with this section of the specification, shall be
submitted in Triplicate, to the S.O..
TS/5/15 2602542S/EL
31.2 Routine Tests
The Sub-Contractor shall submit certified test sheets /reports showing details
of all routine test applied, during manufacture, to the switchboards and the
individual components thereof. Without in any way affecting the generality of
this Clause such test shall include the following clauses relating to switchgear:
a) Operating test, consisting of fifty operations of the operating

mechanisms performed with the closing device.
b) Millivolt drop test, or resistance test at the rated current of the

equipment across all contacts individually, and as a complete unit as a
check against temperature rise type test if applicable.
c) The record taken on the type test shall be taken as datum if applicable.
d) Timing test, conducted on one of the air circuit breaker to be supplied,

to obtain the times of closing and opening of the circuit breaker in
relation to the results obtained under type test if applicable.
e) Tests on each switching unit to determine the satisfactory operation of

trip coil or coil at the minimum and the normal tripping voltage.
f) inspection of the switchboards including inspection of wiring and

electrical operation test
g) dielectric test
h) checking of protective measures and of the electrical continuity of the

protective circuit
31.3 Switchboard Verification Tests
a) The switchboards as a whole shall be capable of withstanding, without

damage to the electrical, mechanical and thermal stresses produced
under short circuit conditions equivalent to the interrupting capacities
of RMS Symmetrical Amperes at 415 Volts A.C. of the incoming
breakers for 3 sec. and shall comply with all requirements of BS 162
and IEC 61439.
b) In addition to details of type tests for making and breaking capacity, as

required under this Clause of the Technical Specifications, the Sub-
Contractor shall submit certified details of type tests for mechanical
endurance and temperature rise from each type of switching
equipment included in the Sub-Contract, such tests to be carried out in
accordance with the requirements of their relevant British Standard
Specifications.
TS/5/16 2602542S/EL
c) All parts of the switchboard shall be subjected to type tests to verify
compliance with the requirements laid down in the relevant British
Standard Specification. The type tests shall include the following :
1) Verification of temperature rise limit

2) Verification of dielectric properties
3) Verification of short circuit strength
4) Verification of the continuity of the protective circuit
5) Verification of clearances and creepage distances
6) Verification of mechanical operation
7) Verification of the degree of protection
d) The Sub-Contractor shall submit copies of test sheets /reports in

duplicate showing the result of all test carried out in accordance with
this section of the Technical Specifications to the S.O.
e) The Sub-Contractor shall also require to submit a copy of full type test
certificate (all tests for one switchboard) issued by independent testing
authority that shall be a member of the Association of Short Circuit
Testing Authority (ASTA) during the submission of the Tender Offer
stage. The type test certificate shall be accompanied by a detail and
complete type test report that shall including among others' information
on arrangement and details of switchboard construction, calibration
oscillograms of short circuit test, temperature rise measurements to
the S.O.
f) The manufacturer must submit a certificate of declaration

endorsed by Professional Engineer/LEW to the S.O. to declare the
switchboard(s) are manufactured and constructed according to
the same type tested switchboard sent for full ASTA test and
obtained full ASTA tested certificate at the same time.
DANGER
DO NOT TURN ON
WORK IN PROGRESS
Hanging Safety Signage
TS/5/17 2602542S/EL
SECTION 6 - LOW VOLTAGE AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
1. General
1.1 Low voltage air-circuit breakers shall be of four (4) or three (3) poles metal-
clad, flush mounted, horizontal draw-out isolation type as shown in the
drawing. They shall comply fully with IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-2 with a
rupturing capacity (Icw) of not less than the interrupting capacity of the
associated switchboard at 400 V, 50 Hz for 3 seconds.
1.2 The continuous current rating of the air circuit breaker shall be of enclosed
rating.
1.3 Low voltage air-circuit breaker shall incorporate a direct acting tripping
device that shall operate at 200% to 400% of the rated current.
1.4 All 4-pole air-circuit breakers shall have full size neutral.
1.5 The low voltage air-circuit breakers shall be under category 'B' classification
system.
2. Construction
2.1 Each air circuit breaker shall be self-contained with specially designed
rollers, runner rails and interlocks and housed in a separate completely
zoned "Enclosed Ventilated" metal clad switchboard compartment.
2.2 The circuit breaker shall comprise fixed and moving arching contacts of
adequate rating to ensure that no overheating damage or deterioration will
arise when carrying continuously full rated current. The contacts shall be
individually spring loaded and hard silver plated, so arranged that electro-
magnetic forces arising under fault conditions do not tend to reduce contact
pressure.
2.3 The main contacts shall be arranged to give a double break in each pole.
Auxiliary arcing contacts shall be provided with renewable arc resisting alloy
tips arranged to close before and open after the main contacts.
2.4 Each pole of the breaker shall be equipped with individual arch chutes with
specially designed baffles and spitter plates to provide effective and
efficient electro-magnetic arch control at all values of load current. Any arch
caused by the opening of the breaker under maximum fault conditions shall
be completely contained in the chute with no possibility of a "flashover"
between phases or between any phase and neutral or between adjacent
earthed metal. The complete chute assembly shall be easily removed for
routine inspection and maintenance of the chute and contacts.
2.5 Safety screening shutters of insulation material to prevent access to live

connections shall be actuated automatically with the circuit breaker isolated
and withdrawn. Provision shall be made for padlocking the safety screening
shutters when the breaker is completely withdrawn.
2.6 Provision shall also be made for padlocking the ACB operating mechanism
when the breaker is at the "OFF" position.
TS/6/1 2602542S/EL
2.7 Auxiliary switches, relay isolating plugs and sockets, and contactors, as are
necessary for the proper operation of the circuit breaker, trip coils
electrically interlock, and "operation status" indication shall be provided. In
addition to those required for the functions covered in this specification,
provision shall be made for extending the number of auxiliary switches on
each circuit breaker to cover possible future alarm or signaling circuit
requirements. Auxiliary switches shall be of robust, double breaker design,
easily accessible for maintenance, having adequate current ratings to carry
the connected loads.
2.8 Earth terminal shall be provided at the rear of the breaker housing. This
shall be connected to a plug and socket contact to provide an earth
connection to the moving breaker portion.
2.9 Mechanical interlocking shall be provided to prevent:
a) opening of cubicle door until breaker is fully isolated
b) withdrawal or plugging of the circuit breaker in the closed position
c) plugging until the cubicle door has been closed and locked
d) closure unless either fully plugged or fully isolated.
3. Operation
3.1 The circuit breaker shall be of 230 volt 50 Hz a.c. motorized spring
charged type with manual release of the spring by means of the "Close"
push button. It shall incorporate an interlock which prevent a close
operation until the spring is fully charged. Tripping shall be carried out by
means of a "trip" button, operation of overcurrent trip and shunt trip release.
The speed of closing and opening of the circuit breaker shall be
independent of the operation. Breaker 'ON' - 'OFF' and 'Charged' -
'Discharged' indications shall be provided. In addition, terminal block shall
be provided for the electrical BAS/Power Monitoring System/SCADA
system to monitor the status of the breakers.
3.2 The shunt trip coils for operating the release mechanisms of the circuit
breakers shall be controlled by push-button and/or circuit closing relays.
The mechanism shall be stable and not capable of being opened by shock
or jam. The design of the trip coil shall be such that the trip plunger shall be
operated immediately there being no delay due to building up of the coil
field to maximum value. The use of fibre in the construction of the trip coils
will not be acceptable; the trip coils shall be wound on high grade bakelite
on mica former.
3.3 The operating mechanism and the carriage or hinged panel shall be so
interlocked that it is not possible to withdraw or replace the circuit breaker
while the breaker is in the closed position, so that it is not possible to close
the breaker while the carriage or hinged panel is in any position between
"fully isolated" and "full home" or vice versa. Provision shall be made so
that it is possible to operate the breaker mechanism, if required for
inspection and testing purposes, when the breaker is fully isolated.
Provision shall also be made to prevent the breaker being accidentally
pulled completely off the guide rails.
TS/6/2 2602542S/EL
SECTION 7 - LOW VOLTAGE AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES (ATS)
1. General
1.1 Low voltage automatic transfer switches shall be of four (4) poles, flush
mounted, front access type. They shall comply fully with B.S. or IEC or U.L.
and shall have the same interrupting capacity Icu at 415 volts A.C., 50 Hz as
the interrupting capacity (kA) of the associated switchboard for 3 seconds in
accordance with the above specifications certified by ASTA or KEMA or
recognized testing authority.
1.2 The automatic transfer switches (ATS) shall be of four (4) non-automatic
moulded case circuit breakers (moulded case circuit breakers without trip
units) type for below 800 amperes or air circuit breaker type for 800 amperes
and above.
1.3 They shall be fully rated as suitable for all classes of load (resistive and
inductive loads) without derating and with enclosure.
1.4 Automatic transfer switch shall have withstand, closing and interrupting rating
sufficient for the voltage employed and the available short circuit current at the
point of application.
1.5 All accessories and equipment shall be front accessible for ease of
maintenance or removal.
1.6 All pilot devices/ relays shall be of the industrial standard/ type rated 10
amperes with self cleaning contacts.
1.7 Components of operating mechanism shall be insulated or electrically dead.
1.8 Components of linkages and handles in operating mechanisms shall be

ruggedly constructed and not subject to deterioration. Medium and light plastic
components will be not accepted.
1.9 All electrical equipment or apparatus of any one system must be the product of
one manufacturer, or approved equivalent products of a number of
manufacturers which are suitable for use in a unified system.
TS/7/1 2602542S/EL
2. Construction
2.1 Each automatic transfer switch shall be housed is a self-contained, separate

completely zoned metal clad switchboard compartment.
2.2 The automatic transfer switches shall be electrically and mechanically

interlocked.
2.3 Construction of non-automatic moulded case circuit breaker and air circuit
breaker shall refer to the relevant sections (section for moulded case circuit
breaker and air circuit breaker) of this specification.
2.4 All relays and printed circuit boards shall be plugged in type for ease of
maintenance or removal.
2.5 Mechanical & electrical interlocking shall be provided to prevent:
a) neutral position shall not be possible when under electrical operation
b) load circuits shall not be connected to normal and emergency sources

simultaneously, regardless of whether switch is electrically or manually
operated.
c) switch shall have a manual neutral position.
d) manual operation shall be able to be accomplished by one person.
2.6 The transfer mechanism shall be electrically operated by a single A.C. gear-
motor with all parts in positive contact at all times. It shall also be capable of
being operated manually and shall have suitable provisions for easy and
readily disengaging the gear-motor when necessary.
TS/7/2 2602542S/EL
3. Operation
3.1 The automatic transfer switch shall be provided with close differential voltage
sensing relays to monitor each phase of the normal supply. A drop in voltage
in any phase below the pre-determined drop-out value of the relay shall initiate
load transfer. The relay(s) shall initiate retransfer of the load to the normal as
soon as the voltage of normal PUB supply source is restored in all phases
beyond the pre-determined pick-up value of the relay. Voltage sensing relays
shall be of the completely solid state type and shall have tamper proof field
adjustable pick-up and drop-out values from 52% to 115% of nominal line
voltage.
3.2 The automatic transfer switch shall obtain its operating current from the
source to which the load is being transferred. All accessories and equipment
shall be front accessible for ease of maintenance and removal.
3.3 The automatic transfer switch shall automatically initiate the engine start circuit
in the event of normal power failure, and transfer shall be made to this source
when available. Upon restoration of normal PUB supply source, the switch
shall automatically transfer to the normal supply source after a preset time
delay period. The engine shall be signalled to shut down when the switch
transfer back to normal supply.
3.4 The standard automatic transfer switch shall include but not limited to the
following:
a) complete protection, voltage sensing relays (one each phase)
b) time delay emergency to normal, solid state relay, adjustable from 0-

120 seconds.
c) engine start contact and termination block(s)
d) breaker auxiliary contact, normal source
e) breaker auxiliary contact, emergency source
f) two number of 4 poles circuit breakers
g) gear-motor
h) test push button
TS/7/3 2602542S/EL
3.5 In addition the automatic transfer switch shall also include the following
functions:
a) Delay the transfer to normal from emergency to permit stabilization of

the normal power source before retransfer shall be made, adjustable
10 seconds to 5 minutes.
b) Provide test operation of the transfer switch by simulating a loss of

normal power. This unit shall be mounted on cover of the switch panel.
c) Provide four modes of switch operation, TEST-AUTO-OFF-ENGINE

START. The 'OFF' position shall be energized the control relays and
opens the engine start circuit. The switch shall not operate nor shall
the engine start on power failure. The "TEST" position shall simulate
power failure. Engine starting shall be initiated and the switch shall
transfer when emergency voltage appears on "AUTO" position. The
transfer switch shall return to normal operation on "ENGINE START"
position. The transfer switch shall return to normal and initiate the
engine start circuit. The switch shall not transfer unless the normal
source fails. The selector switch shall be mounted on front panel.
d) Provide a by-pass on the time delay emergency to normal delay, which

shall permit the switch to be transferred without time delay.
e) Transfer mechanism shall be energized only momentarily during

transfer.
TS/7/4 2602542S/EL
SECTION 8 - MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCB) FOR MAIN
SWITCHBOARD, SUB-SWITCHBOARDS AND MAIN DISTRIBUTION
BOARDS
1. General
1.1 Moulded case circuit breakers shall conform to the latest British Standard
BS EN 60947-2.
1.2 All moulded case circuit breakers shall have minimum interrupting
capacities of R.M.S. symmetrical amperes at 415 Volts A.C. as the
associated switchboard or as stated on the drawing.
1.3 MCCB shall be calibrated at ambient temperature of 40oC and carried its
rated current continuously when operated in free air at this temperature.
1.4 All MCCB in switchboard or distribution board(s) shall be of the same

manufacturer.
1.5 Extended rotary lever handles shall be provided for all MCCB in the
switchboards.
1.6 All MCCB feeding to feeder or plug in busways shall be current limiting
type unless otherwise stated or directed by the Superintending Officer.
1.7 Nonmetallic, non-flammable insulating barriers shall be fitted between

adjacent terminals of the incoming and outgoing sides of the MCCB.
1.8 Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) below 400 ampere frame shall
have inverse time tripping characteristic. Moulded case circuit breakers
(MCCB) above 400 ampere frame shall have the following tripping
characteristics:-
a) Adjustable ampere setting (0.6 times to 1 time)
b) Adjustable long time (minimum 3 settings)
c) Adjustable short time trip point (minimum 6 fixed points)
d) Adjustable short time delay time (minimum 3 settings)
e) Adjustable instantaneous tripping (minimum 2 times to 10 times)
1.9 Adjustable ampere trip settings type of MCCB is used, the ampere trip
must be calibrated and set in the factory and the adjustable trip unit must
be permanently sealed by approved methods.
1.10 Positive position indication for the moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB)
to determine the status of the breaker to be provided.
TS/8/1 2602542S/EL
2. Operation
2.1 Moulded case circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle

and shall have a quick-make over-centre switching mechanism that is
mechanically trip free from the handle so that the contacts cannot be held
close against short circuits and abnormal currents tripping due to overload
or short circuit and they shall be clearly indicated by the handle
automatically assuming a position midway between the manual "ON" and
"OFF" position. All latch surfaces shall be so constructed that they open,
close and trip simultaneously.
2.2 MCCB shall be trip free and capable of manual operation in addition to
other normal means, such as electrical or pneumatic operation.
3. Construction
3.1 Each pole of these breakers shall provide inverse time delay and
instantaneous circuit protection by means of thermal magnetic elements.
Ambient compensation shall be accomplished by a secondary bi-metal
that will allow the breaker to carry rated current at 40oC+2oC with tripping
characteristics that are the same throughout this temperature range.
3.2 Breakers shall be completely enclosed in a moulded case. Non-

interchangeable trip breakers (below 150 amp. frame) shall have their
cover sealed; whereas interchangeable trip breakers (150 amp. frame and
above) shall have the trip unit sealed to prevent tampering. Contacts of
circuit breaker shall be of non-welding silver alloy.
3.3 The contacts shall be maintained minimum 5 mm apart when it is at OFF

position.
3.4 Manual trip button and front-adjusting magnetic trip device shall be
incorporated in the moulded case circuit breaker.
3.5 Arcing shall be extinguished rapidly and effectively by Arc-extinguishing

device, in normal switching as well as protective tripping, to minimize
3.6 Terminals shall be constructed to assure electrical efficiency and

reliability, with minimized possibility of localized heating.
3.7 Trip indication shall be by means of the handle position being midway
between 'ON' and 'OFF'. To reset the trip mechanism, the handle shall be
moved to extreme 'OFF' and 'ON' position.
TS/8/2 2602542S/EL
3.8 For current limiting (CL) moulded case circuit breakers, the current limiting
breakers shall be fuseless type for 400A and below and shall have the
same operation as Clause (2) and same construction as Clause (3). They
shall meet the IEC requirements. All three phases shall be opened
simultaneously under fault conditions. The contact opening and arc
extinguishing shall be less than 1/4 cycle to reduce and limit peak let-
through current and let-through energy. These breakers shall limit the
interrupting ratings as shown below:
Up Stream (kA) Up Stream Breaker Limited Value/SC

Rating (Amp) (kA)
36 30 8
36 60 10
36 100 15
36 150 17
36 250 22
36 400 28
TS/8/3 2602542S/EL
SECTION 9 - MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB) FOR DISTRIBUTION
BOARDS
1. General
1.1 Miniature circuit breakers shall comply with the latest British Standard BS
EN60898 with latest amendments test duty sequence 240V for single pole
and 240/415V for multi-poles.
1.2 Unless otherwise stated, miniature circuit breakers and distribution boards
shall have minimum short-circuit capacities of R.M.S. symmetrical amperes
of 10 kA for lighting circuit distribution boards and 15 kA for power or
mixture of lighting and power circuit distribution boards at 240 or 240/415
Volt A.C.
1.3 All miniature circuit breakers (MCB) shall be calibrated at ambient

temperature of 40o C and carried their rated current continuously when
operated in free air at this temperature.
1.4 All miniature circuit breakers (MCB) shall have tripping characteristic type
"C" curve before KWHr or power meters and tripping characteristic type "B"
curve after KWHr meters or power meter for unit. All minature circuit
breakers provided shall have tripping characteristic type "C" curve unless
otherwise stated.
1.5 Miniature circuit breakers and the distribution board enclosure shall be from
the same manufacturer.
1.6 Irrespective to the mounting positions, the miniature circuit breakers shall
be operated according to the factory calibrated characteristic.

position.
1.8 All miniature circuit breakers shall be of positive plug-on or bolted-on, no

error connection type.
1.9 Miniature circuit breaker must have positive contact position.
1.10 Miniature circuit breaker shall comply to the following standard :
a) IEC 60898-1: Electrical accessories - Circuit-breakers for

overcurrent protection for household and similar installations.
Circuit-breakers for a.c and d.c. operation and
b) IEC 60947-2: Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear. Circuit-

breakers
TS/9/1 2602542S/EL
2. Operation
2.1 Miniature circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle and

shall have a quick-made, positive quick-break over centre switching
mechanism that is mechanically trip free from the handle so that the
contacts cannot be held close against short circuits and over current
conditions. When the circuit breaks and over current conditions. When the
circuit breakers automatically trip, the operating handle shall be assured a
position between "ON" and "OFF" positions. The contacts shall also be of
positive quick-make and quick-break on manual and automatic operation.
2.2 Contact position indicator (coloured) linking physically to the contacts for
the positive indication of isolation must be provided.
2.3 Two and three pole circuit breakers shall be commonly tripped with
2.4 The magnetic operation (Instantaneous Trip) of these MCB shall be tripped
between 3 to 5 millisecond.
3. Construction
3.1 Each pole of the circuit breakers shall have a factory calibrated thermal bi-
metal overcurrent element with inverse time delay characteristic and a
factory calibrated instantaneous magnetic tripping device for short circuit
condition. Ambient temperature compensation shall be accomplished by a
secondary bi-metal that shall allow the circuit breaker to carry rated current
between 25oC to 40oC with tripping characteristics that are the same
throughout this temperature range, and that shall not cause nuisance
tripping.
3.2 Circuit breakers shall be completely enclosed in a high dielectric strength

casing. The properties of the dielectric strength casing shall not deteriorate
with time.
3.3 Contacts of circuit breaker shall be silver-tungsten or silver-graphite for

ensuring a reliable contact of low resistance and highly resistant to welding.
3.4 The high pressure plug-on busbar connector shall assure a solid positive
contacts without screw to tighten and no chance of error.
3.5 Load terminals shall be constructed to assure electrical efficiency and

reliability, with minimized possibility of localized heating, and for straight in
wiring.
3.6 Arcing shall be extinguished rapidly and effectively by arc chute barrier, in
normal switching as well as protective tripping, to minimize deterioration of
contacts and adjacent insulating materials.
3.7 Trip indication shall be by means of the handle position lying between "ON"
and "OFF". To reset the trip mechanism, the handle shall be moved to
extreme "OFF" position.
TS/9/2 2602542S/EL
SECTION 10 - RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS (RCCB)
1. General
1.1 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB) shall be current operated type with
milliampere tripping current and continuous load current as shown on the
accompanied drawing.
1.2 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB) and method of installation shall
comply with latest Singapore Standards SS 97 and BS EN 61008-1
including the amendments.
1.3 All residual current circuit breakers (RCCB) shall bear with local authority
trade mark.
1.4 For single phase supply, the residual current circuit breaker (RCCB) shall
be rated 240 Volt 50 Hz A.C. 2 poles. For three phase supply, the residual
current circuit breaker (RCCB) shall be rated 415 Volt 50 Hz A.C. 4 poles.
All RCCB shall be surge proof design to prevent nuisance tripping due to
transient over-voltage. A local trip indication in the form of window on the
front face of the RCCB shall be provided to differentiate between OFF and
TRIPPED position. A test button shall be incorporated to enable periodic
check on the tripping mechanism of the RCCB.
1.5 The RCCB of 30 mA sensitivity and the operating time less than 0.1 second is a
Controlled Good as defined by the Singapore Consumer Protection (Safety
Requirements) Registration Scheme (CPS). it must be registered with SPRING
Singapore and bear the SAFETY Mark. All other RCCB which is greater than 30mA
shall also be tested by spring and operating times less than 0.1 second.
1.6 All incoming and outgoing cables, and copper links connected to residual
current circuit breakers (RCCB) shall be insulated.
1.7 The Sub-Contractor shall test all the residual current circuit breakers
(RCCB) installations by an approved residual current circuit breaker (RCCB)
tester. Testing shall be carried out in the presence of the S.O. or his/her
representative. The actual value and one step below the actual tripping
current shall be tested. Four (4) sets of test results endorsed by Licensed
Electrical Workers (LEW) shall be submitted to the S.O.
TS/10/1 2602542S/EL
SECTION 11 - MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARDS (MDB)
1. General
1.1 Main Distribution Boards shall be of the dead-front construction equipped with
thermal magnetic incoming main and branch circuit breakers of the frame
sizes, and trip ratings indicated on the drawings or on the distribution board
schedule.
1.2 All main distribution boards shall be rated at 415 Volt A.C. for three phase 4
wire supply. They shall comply with BS 5486 Part 1. The whole main
distribution board including circuit breakers shall maintain the minimum
interrupting capacity (symmetrical) stated in the drawings or distribution board
schedules.
1.3 Main distribution boards (MDB) shall have general purpose enclosures and
shall be surface mounted except where otherwise indicated.
1.4 The main distribution boards and the moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB)
for the main distribution board shall be from the same manufacturer, or the
manufacturer of the main distribution boards shall be capable of manufacturing
type-tested main switch board.
1.5 Door of circuit breaker main distribution panel board shall be equipped with
one or more master-keyed safety cylinder locks to prevent unauthorized
personnel to switch "ON" or "OFF" the main and branch breakers. The no. of
safety cylinder locks depends on the length of the door.
1.6 The specification of moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB) shall refer to the
technical specification of moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) for
switchboard or main distribution boards. All MCCBs shall be provided with
extended lever handles.
1.7 The interior assembly for the connection and mounting of MCCB must be of
good quality, type tested and approved type.
1.8 Original blanking plates shall be used for space(s) (i.e. outgoing branches
without miniature circuit breaker(s)).
1.9 Dry contacts on breaker status such as ON/OFF and TRIP/FAULT for
BAS/IBMS/Lighting management systems monitoring shall be provided with
linking to digital power meter.
1.10 Degree of protection for circuit breaker main distribution panel boards shall be
of min. IP31 to BS 5420 or IEC 60144. The main distribution boards shall be
properly naturally ventilated. All the louvre vent openings shall be cover with
very fine wire mesh net permanently welded on the inside of the panel board.
1.11 The main distribution board shall comply to following standard:
a) IEC 61439: Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies
b) BS EN / IEC 60947-2: Specification for low-voltage switchgear and

controlgear. Circuit-breakers.
TS/11/1 2602542S/EL
2. Construction
2.1 The main distribution boards shall conform to the following construction to
form a single or group of boards as indicated on the drawings.
a) Bussing Assembly and Temperature Rise
Main distribution board bus structure shall have the same current
rating as that of the incoming breakers as shown on the main
distribution board drawings. In any case, a current density of min. 155
Amperes per sq.cm. (1,000 Amperes per sq.in.) of cross-sectional
area shall be maintained. Such ratings shall be established by heat
riser tests with maximum hot spot temperature on any connector or
busbar not exceeding 50oC rise above ambient (based on an ambient
temperature having value not exceeding 40oC and an average value
not exceeding 35oC measured over a 24-hour period). Adequate
conductor dimension will not be accepted as an excuse for foregoing
actual heat tests. Busbars shall be made of tinned hard drawn copper.
Full size pre-drilled copper neutral bar and appropriate size of pre-
drilled copper earth bar of screwed-on type connectors shall be
provided. Phase bussing shall be full height without reduction. The
number of connector holes in the neutral and earth bars shall be equal
to the number of branch circuit breakers plus incoming cable hole plus
3 numbers of spare connector holes for each bar.. Busbar taps for
distribution boards with single pole branches shall be arranged for
sequence phase connection of the branch circuit devices that allows
complete flexibility of circuit arrangement (1, 2 or 3 poles circuit
breakers). Phase busbars shall be fully protected with an integral, high
impact, thermoplastic shroud.
b) Circuit Breakers
Circuit Breakers shall be equipped with individually insulated, braced

and protected connectors. The front face of all circuit breakers shall
be flushed with each other. Large permanent individual circuit
numbers shall be affixed to each breaker in an uniform position.
Space provisions for additional breakers shall be so designed that no
additional connectors/connection links, machining drilling or tapping
will be required, when breakers are added.
c) Integrated Equipment Rating
Each distribution board, as a complete unit, shall have a rating equal

to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on the
distribution board schedule or drawing on the plans.
d) Cabinet
Distribution board assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The

rigidity and gauge of steel shall be as specified in British Standards
(BS). Doors of all distribution boards shall be lockable by means of a
barrel-type lock with detachable master-keys. Doors over 1.2 m long
shall be equipped with two safety cylinder locks. The hinged door shall
conceal the retaining screws of the front cover to prevent unauthorized
personnel to remove the front cover. Top and bottom walls shall be
removable. The steel enclosure shall be anti-rust treated and finished
with an electrostatically deposited light grey powder coating.
TS/11/2 2602542S/EL
e) Safety Barriers
The distribution board interior assembly shall be dead front

construction with the distribution board front removed (i.e. covered
with approved thickness of insulation board). Also, it shall be possible
to change branch circuit load connections without any personal
exposure to any line side bussing on line terminals. Main breaker shall
have barriers on live sides. The end of the bus structure opposite the
mains shall have barriers. Ampere clearance shall be provided
between 'live' parts and the sheet-steel protection to allow cables to be
brought to their respective terminals in a neat and workmanlike
manner.
2.2 Three phase and neutral or single phase and neutral distribution boards shall
be designed in such a way that the minimum short-circuit capacity mentioned
in the specifications or indicated on the distribution board drawings shall be
maintained.
2.3 All distribution board shall also be designed for bottom incoming and top
outgoing circuitry unless otherwise stated.
3. Labelling
3.1 Engraved traffolyte invorine labels (BLACK in white lettering for normal
supply, RED in white lettering for emergency supply) for large permanent
individual number shall be affixed permanently to each branch circuit breaker
and incoming main circuit breaker in an uniform position.
3.2 Each individual cable shall be numbered with thermal marking on PVC or
heat shrinkable tubes system according to the 'As Built' distribution board
drawings and the Sub-Contractor shall in addition hang a good quality plastic
bag beside the distribution board with a copy of floor plan or a portion of the
floor plan which is served by the associated distribution board, and a
typewritten table showing the circuit numbers and room numbers/designations
in approved arrangement according to the 'As Built' circuit breakers layout of
each distribution board.
3.3 All neutral and earth continuity conductors shall be installed in sequence and
numbered with thermal marking on PVC or heat shrinkable tubes system
to label according to the circuit numbers of the "As-Built" distribution boards
drawings.
3.4 All neutral and earth bar connectors shall be clearly and permanently
numbered with thermal marking on marker label or foil tape system for
easy identification. The sequence of numbers shall be as follows:
1L1, 1L2, 1L3, 2L1, 2L2, 2L3, 3L1, 3L2, 3L3, 4L1, 4L2, 4L3, 5L1, 5L2, 5L3,
6L1, 6L2, 6L3, etc.
3.5 All distribution boards shall be clearly, permanently labelled according to the
'As-Built' distribution boards drawings and also indicate its tap off from
designation, ampere etc by engraved traffolyte ivorine labels (BLACK in white
lettering for normal supply, RED in white lettering for emergency supply).
TS/11/3 2602542S/EL
a) Copies of all statutory safety notices, regulations and instructions for
resuscitation and treatment after electrical shock; all surface treated
with clear varnish, in suitable wall mounted frames.
b) Four languages danger signs in the switchrooms/risers and elsewhere,

all to authority requirements.
c) A varnished and mounted on suitable hard backing and framed (in

glass panel) copy of the main single line diagram showing clearly the
full details, dimensions, layout of the switchboards as supplied and
installed.
d) Solid rubber insulated mats of 10 mm thick complying with BS 921:

1976 to the full length in front of every switchboard.
e) A wall mounted key press housing all keys in the switchroom/load

centre with a B4 size hard cover log book for record purposes.
f) Standard lock set as approved by the authority for the meter/MDB.
TS/11/4 2602542S/EL
SECTION 12 - THREE PHASE DISTRIBUTION BOARDS FOR LIGHTING AND POWER
CIRCUITS
1. General
1.1 Three phase circuit breaker distribution boards shall be of the dead-front
safety type equipped with thermal magnetic miniature circuit breakers of the
frame sizes, types and ampere trip ratings specified on the accompanied
distribution board drawings.
1.2 All distribution boards shall be rated at 415 Volt A.C. 50 Hz for three phase
4 wire supply and shall comply with the latest British Standard BS 5486 part
12 for distribution boards.
1.3 Distribution boards shall have general purpose enclosures and shall be
surface mounted except where otherwise indicated (FM) for flush mounting.
1.4 All miniature circuit breakers (MCBs), single phase and three phase circuit
breaker distribution boards shall be from the same manufacturer.
1.5 All circuit breaker distribution boards shall be of the approved type.
1.6 All doors of circuit breakers distribution boards shall be equipped with
master-keyed safety cylinder locks to prevent unauthorized personnel to
switch on or off the main and branch breakers. The no. of locks depends on
the length of the door.
1.7 Miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) shall refer to the technical specification of
miniature circuit breakers.
1.8 The minimum short-circuit capacities of R.M.S. symmetrical amperes of

circuit breaker distribution boards and incoming circuit breakers, if
applicable, shall be of the same kA rating of the specified short-circuit
capacities of the incoming circuit breaker.
1.9 The interior assembly for the connection and mounting of MCB must be of
1.10 Original blanking plates shall be used for space(s) (i.e. outgoing way(s)
without miniature circuit breaker(s)) as indicated in the drawings.
1.11 The distribution board shall comply to IEC 61439-3: Low-voltage switchgear
and control gear assemblies. Distribution boards intended to be operated by
ordinary persons (DBO)
TS/12/1 2602542S/EL
2. Construction
2.1 The distribution boards shall conform to the following construction to form a
single or group of boards as indicated on the accompanied distribution
boards drawings.
Distribution board bus structure shall have the same current rating
(ampere frame) of the incoming breakers as shown on the
accompanied distribution boards drawings. In any case, a current
density of max. 155 Amperes per sq. cm (1,000 amperes per sq. in.)
of cross-sectional area shall be maintained. However, the ratings
shall also be established by heat riser tests with maximum hot spot
temperature on any connector or busbar not exceeding 50oC rise
above ambient temperature. Adequate conductor dimension will not
be accepted as an excuse for foregoing actual heat tests. All the
busbars shall be of tinned hard drawn copper rated at 200 A. Pre-
drilled copper neutral bar of full current rating and pre-drilled copper
earth bar of size equal to incoming feeder earth cable shall be
provided and neatly arranged. Neutral and earth bars shall be of
solderless mechanical type connectors. The neutral bars shall be
mounted to the distribution boards by non-hygroscopic insulators.
The insulation of resistance for neutral bars to the metal enclosure
shall be infinity and for earth bars to the metal enclosure shall be
zero. The number of neutral bar terminals to be provided shall be
the same as the total number of branch circuit breakers ways plus
one for incoming feeder neutral cable. The number of earth bar
terminals to be provided shall be the same as the total number of
branch circuit breakers ways plus one for incoming feeder earth
cable and plus two for the separate earthing points for the
equipments/accessories. Phase bussing shall be full length without
reduction. Busbar taps for distribution boards with single pole
branches shall be arranged for sequence phase connection of the
branch circuit devices that allows complete flexibility of circuit
arrangement (1, 2 or 3 - pole circuit breakers). Phase busbars shall
be fully protected with an integral, high impact, thermoplastic
shroud.
TS/12/2 2602542S/EL
b) Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB)
Miniature circuit breakers shall be equipped with individually

insulated, braced and protected connectors. The front face of all
miniature circuit breakers shall be flush with each other. Miniature
circuit breakers shall refer to technical specification miniature circuit
breakers (MCBs) for distribution board. Space provisions for
additional circuit breakers shall be so designed that additional
breakers shall be plugged-on to the bus-tap by pressure without
using additional connectors, cable or copper bar links, modification
or alteration to the distribution board.
Each distribution board, as a complete unit, shall have a rating

equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on
the drawings. Such rating shall be established by test with the
circuit breakers mounted on the distribution boards. The short-circuit
tests on the circuit breaker and on the distribution structure shall be
made simultaneously by connecting the fault to each distribution
board circuit breaker with the distribution board connected to its
rated voltage source. The method of testing shall be according to
proposed British Standard (B.S.) pertaining to listing of miniature
circuit breakers for high-short circuit capacity ratings. The source
shall be capable of supplying the specified distribution board short-
circuit current or greater. Test data showing the completion of
such test upon the entire range of distribution boards to be
furnished shall be submitted to the Superintending Officer, if
requested by him/her, with or before the submission of
drawings for approval. Testing of distribution board circuit
breakers for short-circuit rating only with the circuit breaker
individually mounted and testing of the bus structure by applying a
fixed fault to the bus structure alone is not acceptable.
TS/12/3 2602542S/EL
d) Cabinet
Distribution board assembly shall be enclosed in a zinc plated sheet

steel cabinet unless otherwise stated. The rigidity and gauge of
steel shall be as specified in British Standards. Doors of all
distribution boards shall be lockable by means of a barrel-type lock
with detachable master-keys. Hinged sheet steel door over 1.2 m
long shall be equipped with two (2) safety cylinder locks. Top and
bottom walls shall be removable for the ease of cutting rectangular
holes for the connection of metal trunkings. The steel enclosure
shall be anti-rust treated and finished with an electrostatically
deposited light grey powder coating. The hinged door shall conceal
the retaining screws of the front cover to prevent unauthorized
personnel removing the front cover. Flush mounting distribution
board shall have removable, adjustable depth interiors to allow for
varying thickness of wall finishes. All the ventilation louvre shall
complete with very fine wire mesh net welded permanently on the
inside of the panel.
e) Safety Barriers
The distribution board interior assembly shall be dead front with

distribution board front removed (i.e. cover with approved thickness
of insulation board). Also, it shall be possible to change branch
circuit load connections without personal exposure to any live side
bussing on live terminals. Spaces for future installation of circuit
breakers shall be covered by clip-on type of non-metallic plates.
Main lugs or main circuit breaker shall have barriers on live sides.
The barrier in front of the main lugs shall be hinged to a fixed part of
the interior. The end of the bus structure opposite the mains shall
have barriers. Ampere clearance shall be provided between 'live'
parts and the sheet-steel protection to allow cables to be brought to
their respective terminals in a neat and workmanlike manner.
2.2 Three phase and neutral distribution boards shall be designed in such a
way that three (3) single-pole breakers shall be replaced by one (1)
three-pole breaker of the same frame size to give 3-phase 415 Volt A.C.
supply or vice versa without altering the bus or adding jumper cables
or copper links, no comb bus bar shall be used. The neutral bar shall not
locate near to panel edges. The minimum short-circuit capacity mentioned
in the Technical Specifications or indicated on the distribution board
drawings shall be maintained.
2.3 All distribution board shall also be designed for bottom incoming and top
outgoing circuitry unless otherwise stated.
TS/12/4 2602542S/EL
3. Labelling
3.1 Thermal marking on approved marker label or foil tape system for large
permanent individual number shall be affixed permanently to each branch
circuit breaker and incoming main circuit breaker in an uniform position.
drawings and the Contractor shall in addition hang a good quality plastic
typewritten table showing the circuit numbers and room
numbers/designations in approved arrangement according to the 'As Built'
circuit breakers layout of each distribution board.
3.3 All neutral and earth continuity conductors shall be installed in sequence
and numbered with thermal marking on PVC or heat shrinkable tubes
system to label according to the circuit numbers of the "As-Built"
distribution boards drawings.
easy identification. The sequence of numbers shall be as follows:
1L1, 1L2, 1L3, 2L1, 2L2, 2L3, 3L1, 3L2, 3L3, 4L1, 4L2, 4L3, 5L1, 5L2, 5L3,
6L1, 6L2, 6L3, etc.
3.5 All distribution boards shall be clearly, permanently labelled according to

the 'As-Built' distribution boards drawings and also indicate its tap off from
designation, ampere etc by engraved traffolyte ivorine labels (BLACK in
white lettering for normal supply, RED in white lettering for emergency
supply).
TS/12/5 2602542S/EL
SECTION 13 - SINGLE PHASE COMBINED LIGHTING AND POWER DISTRIBUTION
BOARDS
1. General
1.1 Single phase circuit breaker distribution boards shall be of the dead-front
safety type equipped with thermal magnetic miniature circuit breakers of the
frame sizes, types and ampere trip ratings specified on the accompanied
distribution board drawings.
1.2 All distribution boards shall be rated at 240 Volt A.C. 50 Hz 2 wire supply
and shall comply with the latest British Standard BS 5486-13 for consumer
units.
1.3 Distribution boards shall have general purpose enclosures and shall be
surface mounted except where otherwise indicated (FM) for flush mounting.
1.4 All miniature circuit breakers (MCBs), single phase, three phase circuit
breaker distribution boards shall be from the same manufacturer.
1.5 All circuit breaker distribution boards shall be of the approved type.
1.6 All doors of circuit breakers distribution boards shall be equipped with
master-keyed safety cylinder locks to prevent unauthorized personnel to
switch on or off the main and branch breakers.
1.7 Miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) shall refer to the technical specification of
miniature circuit breakers.
1.8 The minimum short-circuit capacities of R.M.S. symmetrical amperes of

circuit breaker distribution boards and incoming circuit breakers, if
applicable, shall be of the same kA rating of the specified short-circuit
capacities of the miniature circuit breaker.
1.9 The interior assembly for the connection and mounting of MCB must be of
1.10 Original blanking plates shall be used for space(s) (i.e. outgoing way(s)
without miniature circuit breaker(s)).
1.11 The distribution board shall comply to IEC 61439-3: Low-voltage switchgear
and control gear assemblies. Distribution boards intended to be operated by
ordinary persons (DBO)
TS/13/1 2602542S/EL
2. Construction
2.1 The distribution boards shall conform to the following construction to form a
single board as indicated on the accompanied distribution boards drawings.
Distribution board bus structure shall have the same current rating
(ampere frame) of the incoming breakers as shown on the
accompanied distribution boards drawings. In any case, a current
density of max. 155 Amperes per sq. cm of cross-sectional area
shall be maintained. However, the ratings shall also be established
by heat riser tests with maximum hot spot temperature on any
connector or busbar not exceeding 40oC rise above ambient
temperature. Adequate conductor dimension will not be accepted
as an excuse for foregoing actual heat tests. Busbars shall be of
tinned hard drawn copper rated at 100 A. Pre-drilled copper neutral
bar of full current rating and pre-drilled copper earth bar of size
equal to incoming feeder earth cable shall be provided and neatly
arranged. Neutral and earth bars shall be of solderless mechanical
type connectors. The neutral bars shall be mounted to the
distribution boards by non-hygroscopic insulators. The insulation of
resistance for neutral bars to the metal enclosure shall be infinity
and for earth bars to the metal enclosure shall be zero. The number
of neutral bar terminals to be provided shall be the same as the total
number of branch circuit breakers ways plus one for incoming
feeder. The number of earth bar terminals to be provided shall be
the same as the total number of branch circuit breakers ways plus
one for incoming feeder plus two for the separate earthing points for
the equipments/accessories.
b) Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB)
Miniature circuit breakers shall be equipped with individually

insulated, braced and protected connectors. The front face of all
miniature circuit breakers shall be flush with each other. Miniature
circuit breakers shall refer to technical specification of miniature
circuit breakers (MCBs) for distribution board.
TS/13/2 2602542S/EL
Each distribution board, as a complete unit, shall have a rating

equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on
the drawings. Such rating shall be established by test with the
circuit breakers mounted on the distribution boards. The short-
circuit tests on the circuit breaker and on the distribution structure
shall be made simultaneously by connecting the fault to each
distribution board circuit breaker with the distribution board
connected to its rated voltage source. The method of testing shall
be according to proposed British Standard (B.S.) pertaining to listing
of miniature circuit breakers for high-short circuit capacity ratings.
The source shall be capable of supplying the specified distribution
board short-circuit current or greater.
Test data showing the completion of such test upon the entire
range of distribution boards to be furnished shall be submitted
to the Superintending Officer, if requested by him/her, with or
before the submission of drawings for approval. Testing of
distribution board circuit breakers for short-circuit rating only with
the circuit breaker individually mounted and testing of the bus
structure by applying a fixed fault to the bus structure alone is not
acceptable.
d) Cabinet
Distribution board assembly shall been closed in a zinc plated sheet

steel cabinet unless otherwise stated. The rigidity and gauge of
steel shall be as specified in British Standards. Doors of all
distribution boards shall be lockable by means of a barrel-type lock
with detachable master-keys. The steel enclosure shall be anti-rust
treated and finished with an electrostatically deposited light grey
powder coating. The hinged door shall conceal the retaining screws
of the front cover to prevent unauthorized personnel removing the
front cover. Flush mounting distribution board shall have
removable, adjustable depth interiors to allow for varying thickness
of wall finishes.
e) Safety Barriers
The distribution board interior assembly shall be dead front with

distribution board front removed (i.e. cover with approved thickness
of insulation board). Also, it shall be possible to change branch
circuit load connections without personal exposure to any live side
bussing on live terminals. Spaces for future installation of circuit
breakers shall be covered by clip-on type of non-metallic plates.
Main lugs or main circuit breaker shall have barriers on live sides.
The barrier in front of the main lugs shall be hinged to a fixed part of
the interior. The end of the bus structure opposite the mains shall
have barriers. Ampere clearance shall be provided between 'live'
parts and the sheet-steel protection to allow cables to be brought to
their respective terminals in a neat and workmanlike manner.
TS/13/3 2602542S/EL
3. Labelling
3.1 Thermal marking on approved marker label or foil tape system for large
permanent individual number shall be affixed permanently to each branch
circuit breaker and incoming main circuit breaker in an uniform position.
drawings and the Contractor shall in addition hang a good quality plastic
typewritten table showing the circuit numbers and room
numbers/designations in approved arrangement according to the 'As Built'
circuit breakers layout of each distribution board.
3.3 All neutral and earth continuity conductors shall be installed in sequence
and numbered with thermal marking on PVC or heat shrinkable tubes
system to label according to the circuit numbers of the "As-Built"
distribution boards drawings.
easy identification.
3.5 All distribution boards shall be clearly, permanently labelled according to

the 'As-Built' distribution boards drawings and also indicate its tap off from
designation, ampere etc by thermal marking on PVC or heat shrinkable
tubes system and thermal marking on marker label or foil tape system.
TS/13/4 2602542S/EL
SECTION 14 - ALTERNATING CURRENT (A.C.) CONTACTORS FOR LIGHTING
CIRCUITS
1. General
1.1 The alternating current (A.C.) contactor shall be designed for 230 V. A.C.
50 Hz supply and 400V A.C. 50Hz supply and for controlling the line side
of the lighting or power distribution board(s).
1.2 Although the number of operations is low, the contactor, in most case, will
close and open under full load at p.f. = 0.5.
1.3 The contactor shall be enclosed in an enclosure that is in turn mounted in

a totally enclosed room. Therefore, the internal temperature must be taken
into account.
1.4 Contactor coil shall be protected by an appropriate BS 88 / BS HD /IEC

60269 cartridge fuse.
1.5 Contactor shall comply to following standard:
a) IEC 60947-4-1: Low-voltage switchgear and control gear - Part 4-1:

Contactors and motor- starters - Electromechanical contactors and
motor-starters.
b) IEC 60947-5-1: Low-voltage switchgear and control gear - Part 5-1:

Control circuit devices and switching elements - Electromechanical
control circuit devices
2. Construction
2.1 The contactors shall be silent in operation.
2.2 High quality silicon steel lamination shall be used for the magnetic cores
construction to reduce eddy current.
2.3 Shading rings or approved type windings shall be incorporated in the

magnetic cores to prevent the contactor from chattering.
2.4 Fixed and moving parts shall be accurately grinded to ensure silent
operation.
2.5 The coil shall be designed to operate from - 15% to +10% of the nominal
240 V 50 Hz, and to withstand mechanical shocks caused by the closing
and opening of the contactors as well as electromagnetic shocks due to
current flow in its turns. It shall be highly resistant to excess voltages,
physical shock and corrosive atmospheres. The coil shall be made of
reinforced enamelled copper wire and vacuum impregnated.
TS/14/1 2602542S/EL
2.6 Poles shall be designed to quick-make and quick-break the current in the
power circuit and to allow the flow of the rated current of the contactor in
continuous service without overheating. They shall be fitted with silver
cadmium oxide contacts providing high mechanical strength and
resistance to welding. An effective blowout coil to extinguish the arc which
is created between the fixed part and the moving part when the contactor
opens under load condition shall be provided for each pole.
2.7 One instantaneous normally closed and one instantaneous normally open
auxiliary contacts shall be provided for each contactor.
2.8 The coil and cores shall be mounted on shock absorbers.
2.9 The contacts shall be design to be able to carry a minimum load current
same as the incoming breaker/connector isolator to or otherwise stipulated
elsewhere.
2.10 The contactors shall be design to provide a minimum operation of 100,000

times.
2.11 There shall be a bypass MCB installed for the bypass of the contactor
during testing.
TS/14/2 2602542S/EL
SECTION 15 - ISOLATOR (NON-AUTOMATIC MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER
TYPE)
1. General
1.1 Isolator shall of non-automatic moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB without
trip unit) type housed in an approved metal housing.
1.2 All isolators shall comply with latest BS 3185 and mounted at 1200 mm above
finished floor level unless otherwise stated or directed by Superintending
Officer.
1.3 Isolators shall be heave-duty pattern non-automatic MCCB in an approved

galvanized metal cabinet treated with chemical compound to prevent paint for
peeling off from the iron surface, a coat of Chromate Primer and two coats of
polyurethane finish (grey) or approved equivalent. Front access doors shall be
fitted with dust-excluding gaskets.
1.4 Isolators shall be 500 V rating and shall be clearly marked with their current
rating.
1.5 Non-Auto moulded case circuit breakers shall conform to the latest British
Standard BS 3871 part 2 or IEC 60947-2.
1.6 Isolator shall comply to the following standard:
a) SS CP5: Code of practice for electrical installations
b) BS 3185: Heavy Duty Composite Units Of Air Break Switches And

Fuses For Voltages Not Exceeding 660 V
c) BS 3871-1: Specification for miniature and moulded case circuit-

breakers. Miniature air-break circuit-breakers for a.c. circuits
d) BS EN 60669-2-4: Switches for household and similar fixed

electrical installations. Particular requirements
e) BS EN 60898-1: Electrical accessories. Circuit-breakers for

overcurrent protection for household and similar installations.
Circuit-breakers for a.c and d.c. operation
f) BS EN / IEC 60947-2: Specification for low-voltage switchgear and

controlgear. Circuit-breakers
1.7 Isolator shall of on load switching type.
1.8 The metal housing shall make of not less than 14 B.G. (2 mm) thick steel
sheet.
TS/15/1 2602542S/EL
1.9 Extended rotary lever handle shall be interlocked with the housing door so that
they cannot be opened when the non-automatic MCCB is at the `on' position.
This operating handles shall be lockable in the "off" positions and shall have
visible on-off indication.
1.10 Nonmetallic, non-flammable insulating barriers shall be fitted between

adjacent terminals of the incoming and outgoing sides of the MCCB, if the
terminals of non-auto MCCB are busbar type.
1.11 The rating shall be permanently shown on the MCCB as well as on the
housing.
1.12 All steel doors shall be earthed to the enclosures by appropriate size of tinned
copper earth braids.
1.13 Isolators shall be approved by Superintending Officer.
2. Operation
Non-auto moulded case circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle and
shall have a quick-make over-centre switching mechanism. All latch surfaces shall be
so constructed that they open and close simultaneously.
3. Construction
3.1 Breakers shall be completely enclosed in a moulded case. Contacts of circuit

breaker shall be of non-welding silver alloy.

position.
3.3 Arcing shall be extinguished rapidly and effectively by Arc-extinguishing

device, in normal switching to minimize deterioration of contacts and adjacent
3.4 Terminals shall be constructed to assure electrical efficiency and reliability,

with minimized possibility of localized heating.
TS/15/2 2602542S/EL
SECTION 16 - LOW VOLTAGE CABLES AND INSTALLATION
1. General
1.1 Unless otherwise specified, all wires and cables shall be rated as per
specification, and conductors shall be of high conductivity stranded copper.
1.2 The following code is used throughout the specification and drawings.
a) PVC - Polyvinyl chloride insulated
b) PVC/PVC - Polyvinyl chloride insulated and

sheathed
c) PVC/DSTA/PVC - Polyvinyl chloride insulated, double

steel tape armored and polyvinyl
chloride oversheath.
d) PVC/SWA/PVC - Polyvinyl chloride insulated, steel tape

armoured and polyvinyl chloride
oversheath
e) XLPE/PVC - Cross-linked polyethylene insulated,

polyvinyl chloride oversheath
f) FR - Fire resistant layer with polyethylene

insulated, fire retardant low-smoke
and halogen free polyethylene
oversheathed.
1.3 Cables shall be delivered to site in the manufacturer's standard packing

with seals and labels intact, except that cables larger than 4 mm 2 may be
delivered in required lengths.
1.4 Colour code shall be according to Singapore Standard SS 638.
1.5 When necessary, cable ends shall be temporary sealed and tested before
connection.
1.6 All cable ducts and pipes shall be sealed by the Sub-Contractor.
1.7 No joint will be allowed without the consent of the Superintending Officer.
1.8 Cable drums for MICS/PVC cables, PVC/DSTA/PVC and etc. shall be
treated by wood preservative and insecticide.
1.9 The cables shall comply to the following standards:
a) SS CP5: Code of practice for electrical installations
b) SS 299 - 1: Fire resistant cables - Performance requirements for

cables required to maintain circuit integrity under fire conditions
c) SS 358: Specification for polyvinyl chloride insulated cables of rated

voltages up to and including 450/750 V
TS/16/1 2602542S/EL
d) BS 6004: Electric cables. PVC insulated and PVC sheathed cables
for voltages up to and including 300/500 V, for electric power and
lighting
e) BS 6724:Electric cables. Thermosetting insulated, armoured cables

for voltages of 600/1000 V and 1900/3300 V, having low emission of
smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire
f) BS EN 60228: Conductors of insulated cables
2. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) or PVC/PVC Cables
2.1 Cable PVC-insulated only, and PVC-insulated PVC-sheathed cable shall be

manufactured according to British Standard BS 6004:2000.
2.2 The cable shall be delivered to site on reels, with seals and labels intact
and shall be of one manufacturer throughout the installation.
2.3 The cable shall be installed direct from the reels and any cable which has
become kinked, twisted or damaged in any way shall be rejected. The
installation shall be wired on the loop-in system ie. wiring shall terminate at
definite points (switch positions, lighting points, etc) and no intermediate
connections or joints will be permitted. Cables shall not pass through or
terminate in lighting fittings.
2.4 Where it is necessary to make direct connection between the hard wiring
and flexible cord, this shall be done means of porcelain-shielded
connectors with twin screws.
2.5 The termination shall be suitable for the type of terminal provided and shall
be either sweated lugs of appropriate size, or eyelet or crimped type cable
termination, all of reputable manufacture. Shakeproof washers shall be
used where electric motors are connected.
2.6 Where cable cores are larger than terminal holes, the cables shall be fitted
with thimbles. For all single connections, they shall be doubled or twisted
back on themselves and pinching screws shall not be permitted to cut the
conductor. Cables shall be firmly twisted together before the connection is
made.
2.7 In no circumstances shall cables be trapped under plain washers as a

termination.
2.8 Cables shall be coloured in accordance with CP5 standard.
2.9 Only two cables shall generally be bunched together at one terminal.
2.10 In exceptional cases three cables may be bunched together at one terminal
with the authority of the S.O. given on site.
2.11 PVC cable shall be used in conduit or trunking.
TS/16/2 2602542S/EL
2.12 PVC/PVC cable shall be used on cable tray.
2.13 All cables shall be strapped or tied to the cable support system using
stainless steel cable ties or approved strappings.
2.14 The stainless steel cable ties and strap shall be tested and approved for
used in fire resistant wiring systems with minimum grade of 304.
2.15 The spacing of the straps/ties shall conform to the manufacturer

recommendation but shall in all cases not exceed 1 metre interval
3. PVC/SWA/PVC Cable
3.1 PVC-insulated single-wire armoured PVC sheath cables shall be

600/1000 volt grade and shall comply with BS 6346:1997.
3.2 The cable shall comprise round or shaped conductors, of equal cross-
sectional area, composed of high-conductivity plain annealed copper wire
insulated with PVC, coloured for identification. The cores to be laid up
circular and sheathed with PVC. The cable shall be served with one layer
of steel-wire armour and sheathed overall with PVC.
3.3 The cable shall be manufactured and supplied in one length on a suitable
drum. No through joints will be allowed. All cables shall be of one
manufacture.
3.4 Where individual cables are run on the surface suitable supports shall be
fitted to give minimum clearance of 15 mm between cables and face of
structure. Where cables are installed vertically, the cable shall be gripped
firmly by clamps of an approved pattern.
3.5 Where cables are grouped and run on the surface they shall be carried on
wrought-iron brackets or purpose-made clips of approved design, fixed at
not more than 600 mm centres.
3.6 All PVC/SWA/PVC cables run on the surface shall be adequately protected
to a height of 2 m from the ground.
4. Fire Resistant (FR) Cables
4.1 Cable shall be manufactured in accordance with Singapore Standard

SS299.
4.2 Cable shall be tested in accordance to Category C, W & Z of SS299 Part 1

for fire resistant, water and mechanical shock respectively.
4.3 All fire resistant cable shall be Halogen free and conform to IEC 754 Part 1.
TS/16/3 2602542S/EL
4.4 Armoured FR cables shall be tested in accordance to BS6724:1997.
4.5 The fire resistant cable shall suitable for surface wiring and wiring in conduit
or duct. The cable shall be both fire resistant and flame retardant to IEC
331 and IEC 332 respectively. It shall be approved by the local authority for
use as fire resistant cables in emergency circuits applications. Test
Certificates for the compliance to IEC standards shall be submitted
with the tender.
4.6 The conductor shall be made of stranded, soft anneal copper wires to BS
6360. The outer jacket shall be made of fire retardant low chlorine PVC.
Core identification of the cable shall be by colour of the insulation according
to SS 638 with amendments. The maximum resistance of the conductors
at 20oC shall not exceed that specified in BS 6360:1991.
4.7 The cable and accessories shall be designed for operation up to a

conductor temperature of 105oC.
4.8 The cable shall be suitable for installation by conventional methods without
requiring expensive special tools, seals or terminations. They shall be non-
hygroscopic, maintenance free and insensitive to vibrations.
4.9 Cables shall be strapped or tied to the cable support system using stainless
steel cable ties or strappings.
4.10 The stainless steel cable ties and strap shall be tested and approved for
used in fire resistant wiring systems with minimum grade of 304.
4.11 The spacing of the straps/ties shall conform to the manufacturer

recommendation but shall in all cases not exceed 1 metre interval.
4.12 As far as possible, joints shall be avoided. Where this is not possible due to
extra long run, prior written approval shall be obtained from the S.O. This
shall include the joint method and material use which shall not undermine
the fire, mechanical and electrical integrity of the cable under all
circumstances.
5. Multipair Control Cables
5.1 The control cable shall conform to BS 3573:1990, BS 6346:1997 suitable

for operation on 110V DC control cables shall be filled version PVC
insulated with copper tape shielding, steel wire armoured and PVC
outersheath.
5.2 The conductors shall be high conductivity tinned annealed copper wire of
1.5 mm2 complied with BS 6360:1991 and tested as to BS 2011:Part 2. The
conductors shall be individually insulated with colour coded PVC to BS
6246 and BS 6346 twisted into pairs, right hand laid to form a compact,
symmetrical multipair cable.
TS/16/4 2602542S/EL
SECTION 17 - LUMINARIES
1. GENERAL
1.1. All light fittings shown and listed on the drawings and schedules shall be
provided and installed. The supplied luminaries and ballast shall comply to
safety requirements and energy efficient. The light fittings shall be supplied
and manufactured by a reputable manufacturer.
1.2. Fittings with non-standard suspension lengths shall be ordered to the correct
lengths to suit mounting height as indicated on the drawings and schedules.
The installation of light fittings shall include all necessary assembling, wiring
and erection.
1.3. Surface mounted LED / fluorescent fittings shall be mounted either directly or
on suspensions from two BS conduit boxes installed at the spacing required
to suit the fitting.
1.4. All ballast / LED driver shall be type tested/approved Singapore Accreditation
Council accredited testing laboratory in accordance with the latest S.S. 263 /
IEC 60598-2. / IEC 61347
1.5. Luminaries and associated electrical components and wiring shall comply with
latest Safety Standard B.S. 4533 or equivalent.
1.6. All locally manufactured luminaries, driver and control gear shall carry the
approved certification label by Singapore Accreditation Council accredited
testing laboratory or Safety Mark.
1.7. All recessed LED / fluorescent fixtures shall be hanged by four number of
approved fast slide spring steel clips and adjustable steel wire hangers of
minimum static load of 30kg.
1.8. All LED / fluorescent tubes shall be of colour temperature 3000oK / 40000K /
6000 oK with colour rendering index 80 or approved manufacture filled with
standard bi-pin caps, unless otherwise stated or directed by Superintending
Officer.
1.9. All LED / fluorescent tubes for Hospital/Laboratory/Medical Clinic/Office

Project or others shall be selectable of range colour temperature from
3000oK / 40000K / 6000 oK with colour rendering index 80 or approved
manufacture filled with standard bi-pin caps, unless otherwise stated or
directed by Superintending Officer. All the tube colour temperature shall be
selected by SO before any installation
1.10. All LED module, Surface Mount Technology LED, PL, PLC or SL lamps shall
of colour temperature 3000oK / 40000K / 6000 oKwith colour rendering index
80 or approved equal.
1.11. All LED / tubular fluorescent lamp shall comply with latest SS 122.
TS/17/1 2602542S/EL
1.12. Unless otherwise stated, all recessed LED / fluorescent lighting fitting
diffusers shall be of K15 clear acrylic diffusers of thickness 5 mm (0.20
inches)
1.13. The lenses, louvers or other light diffusing elements that contained in there
movable frames must be ensure that they are positively held within the frames
so that the hinging or other motion of the frame will not cause the diffusing
element to drop out and with ease of maintenance/replacement.
1.14. Unless otherwise stated, louvers of mirror reflector lighting fittings and down
lighters shall be made from high quality, resistant to finger marks, HSC-
polished high gloss anodized 99.99% pure aluminum.
1.15. All Escape lighting, Emergency lighting and Exit lighting shall comply with
latest Singapore Standard SS 563 Part 1, Part 2 and the latest fire code from
FSSD. Exit light shall be of LED type.
1.16. Unless otherwise stated, all the lighting fixtures installed in outdoor area shall
be IP65.
1.17. Tungsten Lamps shall be supplied and filled to all points and fittings shown
and listed on the drawings and schedules. Tungsten filament lamps of 40 to
100 watt (inclusive) shall be of the coiled type. Lamps shall be pearl-finished
when filled in open shades or in globes which are unobscured and shall be of
the clear type when filled in closed units of opalescent glassware or any other
type of fitting selected where the filament is not under direct vision.
1.18. Unless otherwise stated, tungsten Lamp holders shall be of the bayonet-cap
type for tungsten lamps up to and including 150 watts, and of the Edison
screw type for larger lamps. Where they are integral with lighting fittings, they
shall be brass with porcelain interiors. For use with flexible pendants, they
shall be of white plastic with compression glands. Where batten lamp holders
are installed the lamp holders shall be of white plastic. In damp situations,
lamp holder shall be approved by S.O.
1.19. All lamp holders shall be lubricated with molybdenum disulphide to ensure
easy removal of threaded rings and lamps.
1.20. All LED driver, ballasts and low voltage transformers shall be enclosed in
approved, vented metal cabinets (IP42).
1.21. All low voltage transformers for tungsten halogen fixtures shall be supplied
from the original lighting fixture manufacturer and shall be one transformer for
each lighting fixture.
1.22. Information to prove that the self-contained emergency luminaries comply

fully with the specification and latest Singapore Standard SS 563 Part 1 and
Part 2 shall be furnished at the request of Superintending Officer.
TS/17/2 2602542S/EL
1.23. Approved tough PVC covered flexible metal conduits with approved type of
connection glands and bushes shall be used for the connection between
lighting fittings to the ceiling outlet box.
1.24. For all luminaries with more than one lamp within the fixture, one ballast /LED
driver shall only be used for one lamp.
1.25. All lamp holders used for all light fixtures shall be of fire retardant type.
1.26. Sub-Contractor to submit the lux level calculation and power budget.
1.27. All light fixtures shall come with air return feature to ensure return airflow
circulations.
1.28. Where jet proof lighting fixtures are used, housing shall be made of fibre-glass
reinforced polyester and cover should be impact resistance polycarbonate
(PC) IK 08(2J). There should be at least 4 securing clips at each side of the
fixtures to act as a hinge for ease of maintenance.
1.29. For Auditorium, lights must be able to switch off in rows horizontally and
parallel to projection screen. Front rows of lights can be switched off for
projection.
1.30. To provide centralized control switch for lighting and all AV facilities.
1.31. Luminaires, except Interior Design light shall be type tested by approved third
party Accredited Test Labs or other recognized international testing body to
ensure compliance with the safety, reliability and performance standards as
specified. All necessary test reports of the luminaire and manufacturer’s in
house test procedures, warranty and relevant data shall be submitted to SO
for approval.
2. SAMPLE LUMINARIES
2.1 The Sub-Contractor will be required to submit full catalogue and samples of
each luminary to be used in this Sub-Contract for the approval of the
Superintending Officer. The manufacture’s catalogue sheets shall indicate
input and load electrical characteristics, ambient temperature rating, fitting
photometric, noise level rating and mounting methods.
2.2 The Sub-Contractor shall submit one sample of each type of

“Approved” luminaries as indicated in the drawings to the site office for
reference purpose. These samples shall be retained at the site office till
the end of the project.
TS/17/3 2602542S/EL
3. PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
The Sub-Contractor shall ensure all luminaries including all constructional materials,
electrical components and wiring, supplied to this Electrical Sub-Contract are of the
highest quality complying to the Specifications and specified standards. The
Superintending Officer reserves his/her right to select fittings, components, and
wirings at random for local testing in Singapore Accreditation Council accredited
testing laboratory. The cost of such tests and/or analyses affected elsewhere other
than at the works of the Electrical Sub-Contractor shall be borne by the Employer
should such tests prove satisfactory, but the Electrical Sub-Contractor shall be called
upon to pay all expenses incurred by the Employer in respect of any work or material
found to be defective on of inferior quality, adulterated or otherwise unacceptable.
4. METAL WORK
4.1. Unless otherwise stated the body of the luminaries shall be pressed or rolled
from quality electro-galvanized zinc coated steel sheet to form a rigid, robust,
top quality body as a basis for the complete unit. The gauge of metalwork and
material to be used shall be stated in the tender. However, it shall not be less
than 20 B.G. electro-galvanized zinc coated sheet steel. Any metalwork,
which in the opinion of the Superintending Officer is flimsy, inadequate and
not of good quality shall be rejected and replaced with the appropriate gauge
as requested by the Superintending Officer regardless of the gauge stated in
the tender. The body of the fluorescent lighting luminaire shall be finished as
specified in this section. The end caps shall be fabricated of gauge 20
electro-galvanised steel sheets in powder coat finish and permanently fixed at
the two ends. Contractor shall submit a sample of the actual light fitting to the
Superintending Officer (S.O.) for approval prior to bulk ordering.
4.2. Mounting screws, etc., shall be spot welded to the body.
4.3. The luminary fixture shall be constructed with the minimum number of joints.
All the unexposed joints shall be made by approved methods such as
welding, brazing. Soldered joints shall not be approved. Self-tapping methods
or rivets for fastening parts which shall be remove to gain access to electrical
components required service or replacement or fastening any electrical
components or their support shall not be used.
4.4. Unless otherwise stated, completely concealed hardware shall be applied to

the fixture luminary. All the exposed metal at joints shall be welded, fill with
weld materials, grind smooth and make free from light leaks by the inherent
design of the fixture body and frame. Weld ballast support studs, socket sable
studs and reflector support studs to fixture body.
4.5. The lamellae supplied shall be of 99.9% purity aluminium and the
performance of the entire construction shall comply with the glare control
standard in accordance to UK norm CIBSE Lighting Guide 3(LG3).
TS/17/4 2602542S/EL
4.6. The luminaire must be able to accept a variety of diffusers (louver or fully
covered diffuser such as prismatic, polycarbonate etc) such that the diffuser
shall click on to the housing without the need of clips, springs or other foreign
attachment. This option of using diffusers shall be decided by Superintending
Officer (S.O.). Contractor shall include such cost in the tender sum. The
reflector shall be of gauge 20 electro-galvanized steel sheet in polyester
powder coat finish. The sectional profile shall be of waveform curvature with
2 heat resistant plastic head screws. The gap between the luminaire’s
housing and the reflector shall not be seen from normal view. The reflector
shall be of one-piece construction with an easy to secure one twist locking
mechanism for convenient removal for cleaning. A white end reflector of the
same material shall be included to increase the lighting efficiency of the fitting
and simultaneously provide protection to the interior of the fitting. The
electronic ballast shall be mounted on removable gear tray with expansion
slot and this tray can be removed easily with hinges. The removable gear
tray must be able to cater any types and brands of ballasts to be mounted on
the gear tray.
4.7. The luminaries shall comply with international Protection IPXX or better for
the specified fitting. Knock-out cable entry to be provided at side of the metal
end caps. The size of the cable opening to be approximately 20mm x 40mm
or of 20mm diameter hole with rubber bush to facilitate cable entry as per
existing luminaries position at site. There should be no cable opening from
the back of the luminaries as the wires are surface run in trunking or conduit.
The two tightening screws for the white reflector should be made of high
temperature ABS plastic located behind the tube to ensure better light
efficiency and provide better looking to the overall design of the luminaries.
For safety reason, the lamp holder’s brackets are to be secured permanently
to the fixture. The wiring terminal block in the luminaire shall be provided
type. Plastic terminal lock should not be used.
4.8. For all laboratory and office lighting, the luminaries body shall be able to
withstand a change of environment humidity from 30% to 100 % without
condensation, corrosion and rusty. Humidity test to ISO 6270 with duration of
1000 hours shall be carried out.
5. PAINTING
5.1. All metalwork associated with the luminaries excluding auxiliaries shall be de-
greased, cleaned, phosphate coated, and shall be finished with best quality
100% “white” polyester powder coating complying with PR12 outdoor
durable polyester powder coating whereby the paint shall not discolour. The
finished painting work shall have an average thickness of 50 to 60 microns
and shall provide a very high resistance to Ultra Violet light. Care shall be
taken to treat all edges of sheet metal.
5.2. Any fitting on which the painting work is in the opinion of the Superintending
Officer defective shall be rejected.
TS/17/5 2602542S/EL
5.3. All the exposed metal surfaces (brass, bronze, aluminium and others) and
finished casting except chromium-plated or stainless steel parts shall be
treated with an even coating of high grade methacrylate lacquer, or
transparent epoxy. Anodize exposed aluminium surfaces for corrosion
resistance.
5.4. The fixtures shall be provided with a final synthetic, high temperature bakes
enamel coating of colour and finish and also all the white baked enamel
reflective surfaces shall have a minimum reflectance of 94% unless otherwise
stated.
6. CONVENTIONAL BALLASTS
6.1 Ballasts shall be designed for 240 volts (plus 4% minus 6%) to 50 Hz supply
and shall be filled in a totally enclosed standard mild steel casing and it shall
be of high power factor, super low temperature rise of the energy-saving type,
rapid start, extra low noise level, good heat dissipation, minimum radio and
frequency interferences and to provide highly excellent good resistant barrier.
6.2 Each unit shall be filled with a 16 amp rated spring-grip quick-connect
terminals for speedy installation.
6.3 Ballasts shall be mounted not less than 100 mm (4”) 7 apart.
6.4 For luminarie with one or two lamps, one ballast shall only be used for one
lamp.
6.5 The ballast shall be rigidly mounted, unless specifically indicated to the
contrary, to the inside of the top fixture housing, with the ballast surfaces and
housing in complete contact for efficient conduction of ballast heat. Provide
only fixtures whose design, fabrication, and assembly prevent overheating or
cycling of lamps and ballasts under any condition of use.
6.6 Ballasts shall comply with latest S.S. 24 and bearing the local authority trade
mark respectively. They shall be of high reliability, silent in operation, and
shall be designed suitable for the electrical characteristics of the electrical
circuits to which they are connected, and which shall be suitable for operating
the fluorescent tubes supplied to this Electrical Sub-Contract to give full lumen
output and to ensure long lamp life.
6.7 The ballast provided shall have the lowest sound-rating “Class A” available for
the lamps/tubes specified and clearly shown their respective sound ratings.
Replace ballasts found by S.O. to be duly noisy, without additional cost, prior
to acceptance of the work.
6.8 The ballast shall have a two (2) year warranty and guarantee for its
performance from the date of acceptance of the completed installation.
TS/17/6 2602542S/EL
6.9 Fluorescent ballasts shall be extra low loss type with maximum losses and
thermal data as stated below:
Ballast Cold Hot loss Thermal Data Thermal Data tw

Wattage loss (W) (W) tw 130 normal 130 abnormal
(delta t) (delta t)
7, 9, 11 3 3.5 20 35
10 4.5 5 30 40
18/20 5 5.5 30 40
2 x 18 4.5 5 25 50
36/40 4.5 5 30 60
58/65 7 7.5 35 70
7. HF ELECTRONIC BALLASTS FOR T8 TUBE
7.1. The high frequency (HF) electronic ballast shall designed to operate
Triphosphor fluorescent tubes at full initial lumen output stated by fluorescent
tube manufacturer with the system power as stated below
Fluorescent Tube (watt) Max. System Power (watt)

1 x TLD 18W 19
2 x TLD 18W 37
1 x TLD 36W 36
2 x TLD 36W 72
1 x TLD 58W 56
2 x TLD 58W 112
Fluorescent Tube (watt) Max. System Power (watt)

1 x PLS 9W 10
1 x PLS 11W 14.5
1 x PLS 10W 10.5
1 x PLC 13W 15
1 x PLC 18W 19.5
1 x PLL 18W 19
1 x PLL 24W 25
2 x PLL 24W 49
1 x PLL 36W 36
2 x PLL 36W 72
TS/17/7 2602542S/EL
7.2. The electronic ballast shall full comply with the following standards and tested
by Singapore Accreditation Council accredited testing laboratory and bear
label of approval:
a) Radio Interference
CISPR15 BS EN 55015
VDE 0875 part2
b) Harmonics
IEC 61000-3-2 BS EN 61000-3-2

VDE 0712 part23 BS EN 61000-3-2
c) Safety Requirements
IEC 61347 (FL) IEC 61347 (Tr.)

BS EN 61347 VDE 0712 part 22, 24
d) Performance Requirements
IEC 60929 (FL) IEC 61047 (Tr.)

BS EN 60929/61047 VDE 0712 part 23, 25
7.3. Each ballast shall consists of the following high quality components:
a) low-pass filter coil to limit harmonic distortions and radio interference.

It also protects the electronic components against high mains voltage
peaks. Harmonic distortions should not exceed 28.8% for 3rd
harmonic, 7% for 5th harmonic, 4% for 7th harmonic and 3% for 9th
harmonic as per BS EN / IEC 61000-3-2 standard and VDE 0712 part
23, 25. Radio interference suppression shall be within limits as defined
in the CJSPR 15 regulations and BS EN 55015 standard and FCC
part 1 8C and VDE 0875 part 2. It shall meet with the requirements of
VDE 0107 section 7 regarding magnetic field radiation. Conventional
electromagnetic filter shall only be used.
b) Rectifier
c) HF power oscillator to transform the DC voltage to an HIF voltage of

over 25 KHz.
d) Lamp stabilization section.
7.4. The electronic ballast shall automatically switch off when a lamp fails to ignite.
It shall also be automatically operational when a new lamp is in place. No
damage to the electronic ballast when any lamp has been removed and
replaced with the electrical supply to the particular light fitting has not been
isolated.
TS/17/8 2602542S/EL
7.5. It shall be equipped with a built-in fuse to protect the power supply against
any possible short-circuit in the ballast and/or excessive heating of the ballast.
7.6. It shall be incorporated an overvoltage detection circuit to switch off the

lamp(s) when the mains voltage rises above 280 VAC. The ballast shall
withstand mains voltages up to 230 - 240 VAC 50 Hz without negative
influences.
7.7. The open-circuit voltage of the ballast shall be less than 60% of the starting
voltage for 1 to 2 second during the initial pre-heating period of the lamp
electrodes to prevent a cold-start of the lamp, which can cause blackening of
the electrodes and hence shortens the life span of lamp. The electronic
ballast shall increase the rated lamp-life of the fluorescent tubes by up to 50%
and maintain a high 85% of light output even at the end of its lamp-life.
7.8. The Mean time Between Failures (MTBF) of the electronic ballast should be
at least 100,000 hours. Hence, manufacturer and local sole distributor/agent
must give guaranteed period of 10 years, replacing malfunctioned ballasts
without any cost to the Owner.
7.9. The ballast loss shall not be greater than 4W per lamp way with power factor
greater than 96% when operating under a main supply of 235 Volt 50 Hz.
7.10. The ballast is optimized for standard commercial T8 krypton lamp.
7.11. They are silent in operation, low weight, low profile (for single-lamp ballast)
and resistant to over voltage.
7.12. The p.f. of the electronic ballast shall not be less than 0.9 lagging.
7.13. The manufacturer and local sole agent of HF electronic ballast shall ensure
that their products are able to interface 100% and work satisfactory with the
self-contained emergency (battery powered) kit to achieve optimum result.
7.14. The ballast manufacturer & local sole agent shall supply instruments to
approve that their ballast loss, voltage and p.f. are fully complied to the
specification.
7.15. The ballast manufacturer & local sole agent shall produce all documents to
prove that their ballast is tested and fully complied with the above-mentioned
standards.
TS/17/9 2602542S/EL
7.16. The ballast manufacturer & local sole agent shall also furnish pictures or
drawings to prove that their ballast consists of low-pass filter coil, rectifier
section, HF power oscillator section, lamp stabilization section, automatic
switch off when lamp fails to ignite section and over voltage detection section,
etc. as specified above. The Superintending Officer reserve his/her right to
select not more than five (5) pieces of these ballasts at random from the
fluorescent fixtures on site to open up for through checking/investigation on
the ballast components. The cost of replacement of these ballasts shall be
included in the Electrical Sub-Contract. If any one of these ballasts does not
comply with specification, the Electrical Sub-Contractor has to replace all the
ballasts to another acceptable brand/make at his/her own cost.
7.17. Dimmable H.F. Ballast Requirement
a) There shall be no electrode flicker, no stroboscopic effect and no

system humming from the ballast.
b) Conventional tube shall be used for dimming. No special tube required

for the dimming of the tube to 5%. The dimming capability shall be
tested by Singapore Accreditation Council accredited testing
laboratory.
c) When connected to dimming system, there shall be no requirement to

set the output to maximum before switching on. The fluorescent tube
shall be able to light up and achieve the selling on the control when
the circuit is switch on. The tube shall not extinguish when the control
is dimmed to minimum.
7.18. The ballast shall have a five (5) year warranty and guarantee for its
7.19. The following information shall be legibly and durable marked:
a) Make of Origin
b) Manufacturer’s name of trademark
c) Nominal wattage
d) Operating voltage and frequency
e) Power factor and current
f) Model Number
g) Wiring diagram indicating the position of terminals
h) Type of lamp for which the ballast is designed
i) Maximum operating temperature of the winding
TS/17/10 2602542S/EL
8. HF ELECTRONIC BALLASTS FOR T5 TUBE
8.1. The high frequency electronic control gear shall be designed to reliably start
and operate standard commercially available T5 16mm diameter tubular
fluorescent lamp in the ambient conditions and within the limit specified by the
lamp manufacturer.
8.2. The electronic ballast must be single piece fully electronic, low weight, hum-
free and low profile with 30mm x 29mm (width x height) for both single and
double-lamps ranges.
8.3. The electronic ballast shall be designed to operate at 50Hz nominal frequency
and at nominal voltages indicated on the label, 230-240 volt single phase a.c.
± 10%.
8.4. The electronic ballast shall be designed with high quality components
consisting low pass filter to limit harmonic distortions and radio interference,
rectifier, HF generator in the range of 25 kHz to 60 kHz and an output lamp
stabilization section.
8.5. The electronic ballast shall be designed to comply with the following
standards and requirements:
CISPR15 BS EN 55015
VDE 0875 part2
b) Harmonics
IEC 61000-3-2/929 BS EN 61000-3-2
IEC 61347 (FL) IEC 61347 (Tr.)

BS EN 61347 VDE 0712 part 22, 24
IEC 60929 (FL) IEC 61047 (Tr.)

BS EN 60929/61047 VDE 0712 part 23, 25
e) Immunity
BS EN 61547
8.6. All electronic ballasts shall have in-line fuse protection.
8.7. All electronic control gear within each light fitting must come from the same
manufacturer as the lamp.
TS/17/11 2602542S/EL
8.8. The electronic ballast shall be designed with integrated safety shutdown upon
lamp failure, component failure and/or no load operation. The circuit must
completely shutdown the ballast within 3 seconds.
8.9. For luminaries with one or two lamps, one ballast shall only be used for one
lamp.
8.10. The electronic control gear shall comply with IEC 929 for line voltage transient
protection.
8.11. The electronic control gear shall incorporate an over-voltage detection circuit
to operate lamps during short duration of over-voltage up to 280V without
negative effect.
8.12. The open-circuit voltage of the ballast shall be less than 60% of the starting
voltage for 1 to 2 second during the initial pre-heating period of the lamp
electrodes to prevent a cold-start of the lamp, which can cause blackening of
the electrodes and hence shortens the life-span of lamp.
8.13. The electronic ballast shall preheat start the lamp within two seconds.
8.14. The electronic ballast must be able to operate over the temperature range of-
150C to +500 C.
8.15. The electronic ballast loss shall not be greater than 4W per lamp with power
factor greater than 0.96 when operating under a main supply of 235 Volt 50
Hz..
8.16. The manufacturer and the local sole agent of the ballast shall ensure that their
products are able to interface 100% and work satisfactory with the self-
contained emergency (battery powered) kit and the addressable module kit
(lighting management system) to achieve optimum result.
8.17. The ballast manufacturer & local sole agent shall supply instruments to prove
and test their ballast loss, voltage and p.f. are fully complied to the
specification.
8.18. The design life of the electronic ballast shall be 50,000 hrs at measuring point
temperature (Tc) of 700C on the ballast with failure rate of less than 0.1% per
5000 hours of operation.
8.19. The ballast manufacturer & local sole agent shall supply all documents
instruments to prove that their ballast is tested and fully complied to the above
mentioned standard.
8.20. For Dimming requirement, the electronic ballast must be able to dim from
100% to 3% luminous flux via DC control voltage from 1V to 10V incorporated
within the ballast.
8.21. The ballast shall have a five (5) year warranty and guarantee for its
TS/17/12 2602542S/EL
8.22. The S.O reserves the right to select not more than five (5) pieces of these
ballasts at random from the fluorescent fixtures on site to open up for
thorough checking/investigation on the ballast components. The cost of
replacement of these ballasts shall be included in the Sub-Contract. If any of
these ballast does not comply with the Specification, the Sub-Contractor has
to replace all the ballasts to another acceptable brand/make at his own cost.
8.23. The following information shall be legibly and durable marked:
a) Make of Origin
c) Nominal wattage
f) Model Number
9. Electronic Ballasts for Multiwatt T5 Fluorescent Lamp
Contractor shall comply to the specifications as mentioned below for the T5 approved
multiwatt fluorescent lamps.
9.1 All electronic ballasts shall comply with type tested by Singapore
Accreditation Council accredited testing laboratory to IEC 60929 fully and
other relevant Singapore Standards and any latest requirement as required by
the authority. The ballasts supplied shall have to pass test and bear label of
approval.
9.2 The following information shall be legibly and durable marked:
a) Make of Origin
c) Nominal wattage
f) Model Number
9.3 The ballast shall have a five (5) year warranty and guarantee for its
performance from the date of acceptance of the completed installation against
manufacturer defects for the ballast supplied. The Contractor shall keep
sufficient stocks of the electronic ballast during the DLP warranty period. The
Contractor shall arrange to remove the defective ballast from site within 24
hour notice during the warranty period. The cost of transportation and labour
are to be borned by the Contractor. No claim of compensation from the
Superintending Officer (S.O.) will be entertained.
TS/17/13 2602542S/EL
9.4 The high frequency multi-watt electronic control gear shall be designed to
reliably start and operate standard commercially available T5 tubular
fluorescent lamp in the ambient conditions and within the limit specified by the
lamp manufacturer.
9.5 The multi-watt electronic ballast must be single piece fully electronic, low
weight, low profile and hum-free for both single and double lamp ranges.
Ferro-magnetic filters are not allowed. Separate (non-integral with ballast
housing) filters are not allowed.
9.6 The multi-watt electronic ballast shall be designed to operate at 50Hz nominal
frequency and at nominal voltages indicated on the label, 230 – 240 volt
single phase a.c. +10%.
9.7 The multi-watt electronic ballast shall be designed with high quality
components consisting low pass filter to limit harmonic distortions and radio
interference, rectifier. HF generator in the range of 25khz to 60 hkz and an
output lamp stabilization section.
9.8 The electronic ballasts shall be designed and tested to comply with the
following standards and requirements:
CISPR15 BS EN 55015
VDE 0875 part2
b) Harmonics
IEC 61000-3-2 BS EN 61000-3-2

VDE 0712 part23 BS EN 61000-3-2
IEC 61347 (FL) IEC 61347 (Tr.)

BS EN 61347 VDE 0712 part 22, 24
IEC 60929 (FL) IEC 61047 (Tr.)

BS EN 60929/61047 VDE 0712 part 23, 25
e) Immunity BS EN 61547
The test shall be conducted by recognized international testing body.
9.9 All multi-watt electronic ballasts shall have in-line fuse protection and ballast
must be able to operate over the temperature range of -15oC to +50oC.
TS/17/14 2602542S/EL
9.10 The multi-watt electronic ballast shall be designed with integrated safety shut
down upon lamp failure, component failure and/or no load operation. The
circuit must completely shut down the ballasts within 3 seconds.
9.11 Two lamp fittings shall be furnished with a single multi-watt electronic ballast
suitable for two lamps operation. If either one lamp fails, the remaining lamp
must be able to maintain full output. It shall atomically switch on after
replacement with supply connected.
9.12 The multi-watt electronic control gear shall incorporate an over-voltage

detection circuit to operate lamps during short duration of over-voltage up to
280V without negative effect.
9.13 The multi-watt electronic ballast loss shall not be greater than 3W per lamp
with power factor greater than 0.96 without additional external correction
devices such as line frequency ferro-magnetic coils.
9.14 The design life of the multi-watt electronic ballast shall be 50,000 hours at
measuring point temperature (Tc) of 70oC on the ballast with failure rate of
less than 0.2% per 1000 hours of operation.
9.15 The multi-watt electronic control gear shall preheat start the lamp within two
seconds.
9.16 The multi-watt electronic control gear shall meet energy efficiency index at
least Class A2.
9.17 The Contractor may submit single wattage of T5 electronic ballasts of,
however the technical requirements and specification shall comply fully with
the multi-watt electronic ballast specified herein.
9.18 The Contractor should submit the third party test reports by Singapore
Accreditation Council accredited testing laboratory, ballast factory test reports
with the tender submission for tender evaluation. Contractor may submit
better quality with latest technology ballast during tender.
10. COMPONENTS AND SUSPENSION ACCESSORIES
10.1 Fluorescent lamp holders shall be bi-pin, spring contacts engaging effectively
with the pins of the lamp and shall be constructed in such a way that the lamp
is easily removable either for cleaning or replacement purposes. The holders
shall be non-inflammable and non-conductive. No Live parts of the lamp
holders shall be exposed to touch. Holder shall comply with Latest S.S. 121.
10.2 All fluorescent luminaries shall be completed with fuse terminal block with
cartridge fuse of 3 Amp. or approval equal.
10.3 For bare batten fluorescent, at least two (2) approved lamp retaining clips per
fluorescent lamp shall be provided for safety.
TS/17/15 2602542S/EL
10.4 Power-factor correction parallel capacitors shall be of self-healing dry film
construction. They shall correct the power factor of each luminaries to not less
than 0.94 lagging two hours after the luminaries has operated continuously on
site and shall be designed for 250V r.m.s., 50Hz a.c. and rated temperature of
-40ºC to +85ºC or better.
10.5 For those fluorescent luminaires not installed with H.F. ballast, then the
capacitors installed in these fluorescent luminaires shall comply with latest
S.S. 123 and shall be mounted not less than 100mm from any ballast.
10.6 For those fluorescent luminaires not installed with H.F. ballast, they shall be
completed with fuse terminal block with cartridge fuse of 5 Amp. or approval
equal.
10.7 For those fluorescent luminaires not installed with H.F. ballast, then the
fluorescent lamp glow-starters installed in these fluorescent luminaires shall
be unsurpassed for high quality and excellent reliability. The glow switch
together with a radio-interference suppression capacitor shall be safely
housed in a high quality polycarbonate canister. It shall comply with the
performance requirements of IEC 60155/60155A.
10.8 The lamp holding sockets shall be rigidly and securely attached to the fixture
enclosure or husk.
10.9 Where pull-chains are included, and insulating joint shall be provided.
10.10 For all the connection between the ceiling outlet box and the light fitting
fixture, liquid tight PVC covered/sheathed flexible metal conduit with approved
type of brass adaptor and lock nut shall be used and the ceiling outlet box or
approved type of plug-in ceiling rose with 2.5mm2 3-core flexible PVC/PVC
cable and vertim tight/proof gland shall be used for the connection.
10.11 The lamp holders for theT5 fluorescent lighting luminaires shall be of high
quality type able to suit different wattage T5 fluorescent tube. They shall
comply with but not limited to following specifications:
a) Rated at specified IP rating.
b) Polycarbonate body front plate made of heat resistant PBT GF

material.
c) Temperature marking: T110
d) Maximum permissible temperature to the rear side of lamp holder TM

110oC.
e) Both lamp holders must provide with support for reliable contact
TS/17/16 2602542S/EL
11. INTER-COMPONENT WIRING
11.1 Inter-component wiring shall be of mi 1050C 250 volt 50 Hz rating PVC 24/0.2
mm and shall be neatly secured within the luminaries to prevent under
looseness and contact with ballasts.
11.2 Cables with the maker’s identification, voltage grade and temperature clearly
printed on the cable sheath shall only be used.
11.3 The only joints made shall be at the fuse terminal block provided on the
luminaries.
11.4 Where wiring passes through or passes the edge of any metal section of the
fitting, it shall be protected by an approved rubber grommet or be doubly
insulated in an approved manner. All connections of wires to terminals shall
be of approved types. All wiring shall be concealed from view with the fitting
installed.
12. SELF-CONTAINED EMERGENCY LUMINARIES AND COMPONENTS (SINGLE-

POINT SYSTEM)
12.1 All self-contained emergency luminaries shall be of LED type. It shall comply
with Singapore Standard SS 563, IEC-60598-2-22, SS 263 Part 2 and
approved by approved certification label by Singapore Accreditation Council
accredited testing laboratory. All self-contained emergency luminaries shall
comply to the specification as below.
12.2 For LED / fluorescent luminaries shall be incorporated with self-contained

emergency kit, the self-contained emergency kit shall be dual rate
charging/converter kits for LED / fluorescent luminaries for 3 hours duration.
The unit shall be wired for external switching if necessary when the mains
supply is healthy. It shall operate on all circuits, on energy saving (26 mm)
tubes.
12.3 The input supply of self-contained emergency kit shall be 240 V, 50 Hz, single
phase. All self-contained emergency luminaries shall have a duration of
Three (3) hours unless otherwise stated.
12.4 A green LED indicator that shows the batteries being charged and a test
button for the system test shall be provided on the external and visible side of
the luminaries.
12.5 The sealed nickel cadmium batteries for self-contained emergency luminaries
shall be suitable for continuous high temperature ambient in float applications
and yet display minimal capacity reduction if cycled. The operating
temperature range for charging and discharging shall be ±50C to +700C and -
200C to +700C respectively. The safety vents for the batteries shall be
automatically resealed. The batteries shall be sized to provide max. lumens
output.
TS/17/17 2602542S/EL
12.6 All self-contained emergency luminaries shall be designed to ensure that the
temperature inside the luminaries will not exceed +400C.
12.7 If the self-contained emergency kits are housed outside the luminaries, the
enclosures shall be approved by the Superintending Officer.
12.8 Unless otherwise stated, all self-contained emergency luminaries shall be of

maintained mode with external switching from normal mains supply.
12.9 The solid-state battery charger shall be designed for nickel cadmium
batteries. Dual rate constant current charger, which will charge the discharge
battery to full capacity within the specified period of SS 563 at a high rate and
then change over to a low rate of charge (trickle charge) to maintain a fully
charge condition by compensation for the self-discharge losses of the
batteries will be preferred. The charger unit shall be of high efficiency type
with input voltage of 240 volt, 50 Hz. single phase. The battery cut-off device
shall be provided to meet Clause 5.2.3 of SS 563
12.10 All battery packs shall be sized to give minimum lumen output as follows:
Light Source (Watts) Battery Min. Lumens output

18-20 W Fluorescent 6 cell 7.2 Volts 750
PL/DULUX 5, 7, 9, 11 W ----- Full Lumens output
Fluorescent
10 Watt LED 3 cell 3.6 Volts 200
10 Watt EXIT Light, LED 3 cell 3.6 Volts 180
12.11 The manufacturer and local sole agent of self-contained emergency (battery
powered) kit shall ensure that their products are able to interface 100% and
work satisfactory with the HF electronic ballasts to achieve optimum result.
TS/17/18 2602542S/EL
13. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR T8 FLUORESCENT TUBE
13.1. All tubular fluorescent lamps shall comply with IEC 60968: Self-ballasted
fluorescent lamps for general lighting service.
13.2. The fluorescent lamp shall be of the Bi-Pin lamp cap with G13 base and the
following information shall be distinctly and durably marked on the lamp :
i) Trademark or mark of origin;
ii) Nominal Wattage/Voltage;
iii) Colour Definition; and
iv) Colour Rendering Index.
13.3. The operational life span of the fluorescent lamps shall be of minimum 8000
hours at a mortality rate of 50% or better. The guaranteed life span shall be
at least 5000 hours.
13.4. The fluorescent lamp shall have the following characteristics :
Lamp Wattage Length Diameter Output Colour Rendering

(W) (mm) (mm) (Lumen) Index
18 600 26 1300 or better 80 or better
36 1200 26 3300 or better 80 or better
The output value quoted shall be the minimum value after 100 burning hours.
The output after 2000 burning hours shall not fall below 10% of the value at
100 burning hours.
13.5 The correlated colour temperature of the fluorescent lamp shall be 4000ΩK
unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings.
13.6 The metallic part of the Bi-Pin lamp cap shall be either non-corroding or
suitably protected against corrosion.
TS/17/19 2602542S/EL
14. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR T5 FLUORESCENT TUBE
Contractor shall comply with the Specifications as mentioned below for T5

fluorescent lamps:
14.1 All fluorescent tubes shall be high brightness warm white / cool white or
daylight tube and shall comply with EN600081 – tubular fluorescent lamps for
general lighting services, and subsequent latest amendment issued for this
specification. All fluorescent tube supply should be type tested by Singapore
Accreditation Council accredited testing laboratory. The Superintending
Officer (S.O.) reserves the right to use various colour temperature of the tube
to be supplied. The tube supplied shall have to pass test and bear label of
approval.
14.2 The following information of the fluorescent tube shall be distinctly and
durably marked on the lamp:
a) Mark of origin of Trademark
b) Nominal Wattage/Voltages
c) Colour Designation – the preferred colour temperature is minimum

3000oK – Warm white and minimum 6000oK Daylight and 4000oK –
Cool white
d) Colour Rendering Index – 80 or better
14.3 The operational life span of the fluorescent tubes shall be of minimum 16,000
hours for the 549mm and 1149mm fluorescent tubes used in conjunction with
the electronic contract gear with pre-heat ignition complying with the relevant
Singapore and EN standards. The mortality rate of the fluorescent tubes shall
be 50% or better and the guaranteed life span shall be least 10,000 hours.
14.4 The minimum luminous flux shall be:
Length of Diameter of Wattage Output Luminaire

Tube (mm) Tube (mm) (Lumen) (CD/m2)
549 (+5mm) 16 (max) 14 1350 (min) 1.7
1149 (+5mm) 16 (max) 28 2750 (min) 1.7
14.5 All energy saving fluorescent tubes must have good colour appearance and
conform to the recommendation of International Commission of Illumination.
14.6 Parts of metal used for the Lamp Caps shall be of non-corroding or suitably
protected against corrosion.
TS/17/20 2602542S/EL
14.7 The tenderer shall fill in the Technical Specification of the tubes to be supplied
in the following Schedule of Particulars:
a) Manufacturer/Trade Name: ______________________
b) Country of Origin: ______________________
c) Overall Length of Tube: 14W ______________mm

28W ______________mm
d) Minimum Normal Operating ) 14W ______________mm

Life Span ) 28W ______________mm
e) Output luminous flux after ) 14W ______________mm

100 and 2000 burning hours) 28W ______________mm
f) Colour Designation/Temperature _______________________
g) Colour Rendering Index _______________________
h) Tested and passed according to _______________________

(Name of Testing Authority)
__________________________ on __________________
And Standard used) Date
Failure to complete the Schedule of Particulars will automatically result

in the rejection of the Tender.
The Contractor shall submit catalogue and mortality curve of the lighting tube
to be supplied for tender evaluation.
TS/17/21 2602542S/EL
15. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS
All compact fluorescent lamps shall comply with IEC 60901 : Single-capped
fluorescent lamps - Performance Specifications.
15.1 The compact PL-S or PL-C fluorescent lamp shall be single ended and shall
have a 2 pin base complete with a built-in starter and a radio frequency
interference suppression capacitor.
The following information shall be distinctly and durably marked on the lamp :
i) Trademark or mark of origin;
ii) Nominal Wattage/Voltage;
iii) Colour Definition; and
iv) Colour Rendering Index.
15.2 The operational life span of the compact fluorescent lamps shall be of
minimum 8000 hours at a mortality rate of 50% or better. The guaranteed life
span shall be at least 5000 hours.
15.3 The compact fluorescent lamp shall have the following characteristics :
Wattage/Type Overall Base Output Colour

(W) Length (Lumen) Rendering
(mm) Index
9W PL-S 167 G23 600 80 or better
11W PL-S 237 G23 900 80 or better

13W PL-C 140 G24d-1 900 80 or better
18W PL-C 154 G24d-2 1200 80 or better
26W PL-C 173 G24d-3 1800 80 or better
The output quoted shall be the minimum value after 100 burning hours. The
output after 2000 burning hours shall not fall below 10% of the value at 100
burning hours.
15.4 The correlated colour temperature of the compact fluorescent lamp shall be
3000ΩK unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings.
TS/17/22 2602542S/EL
16. TYPE TESTING OF FLUORESCENT LIGHTING LUMINAIRES
16.1 All lighting luminaries shall be type tested and bearing pass test sticker or
valid test report. The testing shall meet but not limited to the following
requirement.
S/N Description Requirement

1 Material
(a) Body in electro-galvanised steel sheet with seal
metal end cap and cable opening entry on one
side.
(b) Waveform curvature reflector in electro-

galvanised steel sheet.
(c) 1.0mm or gauge 20 and to be submitted to

Singapore Accreditation Council accredited
testing laboratory for dry film thickness
measurement.
(d) Wing out secured ballast gear tray suitable for

multi wattage lamp electronic ballast.
2 Powder Coated All body and reflector shall be coated with equivalent
to PR12 outdoor durable polyester power coated
white colour and submitted to Singapore
Accreditation Council accredited testing laboratory
for the following type test or sample test
(a) Impact resistance to ISO 6272-2

(b) Cross hatch adhesion to ISO 2409
(c) Bend test to ISO 1519
(d) Pencil test to ASTM D 3363
(e) Salt Spray test to 7253 with duration of 500
hours
(f) Humidity test to ISO 6270 with duration of
1000 hours
(g) Hot resistance at 150oC for 24 hours
(h) Simulated light exposure test to ISO 11341
with duration 1000 hours
3 Internal Wiring 150oC one square mm internal cable wiring.
TS/17/23 2602542S/EL
4 Lamp Holder Nominal Voltage: 2 Amp / 500V with VDE, ENEC
tested and marking. Both side of the lamp holder
should come with spring provided to prevent lamp
cathode pin expose.
5 Incoming 3 way single tier cable coupler 16A, 250Vac, 25”C

Connector with Live, Neutral, Earth Marking complied to IEC
60998-1& 60998-2-1 and Singapore Accreditation
Council accredited testing laboratory tested suitable
for 2.5 sq mm incoming cable.
6 Incoming Cable 2.5 square mm PVC insulated and PVC sheathed

cable with international colour for Live, Neutral &
Earth. The cable should be Singapore Accreditation
Council accredited testing laboratory tested and
listed to SS358-3.
7 Lamp Approved lamp model with rated lamp life of 24,000

hours, services lamp life of 18,000 hours and
Singapore Accreditation Council accredited testing
laboratory type tested.
16.2 IP 65 luminaries, Clean Room and Indicated Laboratory
1 Material (a) Body is constructed from best quality, “hole-

free” white enamelled sheet steel with
lapped and welded seams. The relamping
shall be from the top access with hinged to
hold the luminaire body
(b) Waveform curvature reflector in electro-

galvanised steel sheet. Composite 4mm
thick toughened glass with Clear Prismatic
panel
(c) Heavy gauge Zintec steel 2-part sandwich

construction and to be submitted to
measurement. Walk on capability to
BS6399
(d) Wing out secured ballast gear tray suitable

for multi wattage lamp electronic ballast.
TS/17/24 2602542S/EL
white colour with antistatic coating, resistant to
disinfectants and submitted to Singapore
Accreditation Council accredited testing laboratory for
the following type test or sample test

hours

1000 hours
(g) Hot resistance at 150oC for 24 hours
(h) Test of resistance to UV rays to DIN EN

ISO 11997-2
(i) Antimicrobial protection test to ASTM

standard

cathode pin expose.


Earth. The cable should be tested by Singapore
tested and listed to SS358-3.
TS/17/25 2602542S/EL
hours, services lamp life of 18,000 hours
8 Environmental Comply to IP 65 rating

Protection
Air tightness test comply to ISO 14644-11:ISO
Cleanliness 3 to 9, ENEC or equivalent
16.3 Explosion proof luminaries,
1 Material (a) Body is constructed from best quality, “hole-

free” white enamelled sheet steel with
lapped and welded seams. The relamping
shall be from the top access with hinged to
hold the luminaire body
(b) Composite 4mm thick toughened glass with

Clear Prismatic panel
(c) Heavy gauge Zintec steel 2-part sandwich

construction and to be submitted to
measurement.
(d) Wing out secured ballast gear tray suitable

for multi wattage lamp electronic ballast.
white colour and submitted to Singapore
for the following type test or sample test

hours

1000 hours
TS/17/26 2602542S/EL
2 Powder Coated (g) Hot resistance at 150oC for 24 hours
(h) Simulated light exposure test to ISO 11341

with duration 1000 hours
(i) Test of resistance to UV rays to DIN EN ISO

11997-2
(j) Antimicrobial protection test to ASTM

standard

cathode pin expose.


Earth. The cable should be Singapore Accreditation
Council accredited testing laboratory tested and
listed to SS358-3.

hours, services lamp life of 18,000 hours and
Singapore Accreditation Council accredited testing
laboratory type tested.
8 Environmental Comply to IP 66 rating.

Protection Air leakage test comply to ISO 14644-1
TS/17/27 2602542S/EL
17. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR LED LUMINAIRE
17.1 The LED luminaires used for offices, seminar room, laboratory, corridor and
common areas or other area as specified in the tender drawing shall comply
to clause 4 of this section. All the luminaire are to type tested by Singapore
Accreditation Council accredited testing laboratory or other recognized
international testing body to ensure compliance with the safety, reliability and
performance standards specified above. All necessary test reports of the
LED luminaire and manufacturer’s in house test procedures, warranty and
relevant data shall be submitted to SO for approval. Product inclusive LED
tube, and gear/driver to be covered with 5 Years Warranty on one-to-one
exchange terms due to failure
17.2 The Light Emitting Diode (LED) luminaire comprising of LED tube or LED
modules, electronic control gear and accessories, where shown in drawings,
shall be supplied, installed and commissioned for reliable operation to light
up offices, seminar room, laboratory, corridor and common areas or other
area as specified in the tender drawing. The LED luminaire shall be able to
fully withstand the current and voltage surges from lighting strikes and the
frequent switching operation of the power supplies. The LED luminaire shall
be properly selected to ensure that the functional characteristics, failure rate,
operating life span and other requirements as mentioned in this specification
clause are fully met. All LED tube / LED module used shall of cool white or
warm white high intensity.
17.3 Each LED luminaire shall also be provided with its own electronic control
gear. The electrical control gear shall be integrated within LED tube that is
removable or a separate unit with its own housing in the luminaire. The
electronic control gear shall be connected to the LED component via a plug
and socket connector complies with IEC 60998-1 & IEC 60998-2-1.
17.4 The LEDs used shall be of illuminated grade LEDs without infringing the
Intellectual Property Patent of LED manufacturers. The Contractor and LED
luminaire manufactures shall indemnify Employer from any legal
responsibilities from any infringement of the patent right.
17.5 The LED tube / LED module shall consist of a high flux LED strip and with it
trademark or Mark of Origin, Nominal Wattage, Correlated Colour T
Temperature and Colour Rendering Index distinctly and durable marked.
TS/17/28 2602542S/EL
The LED tube / LED module and luminaire shall comply with test standards
and performance requirements as follows:
(a) The LED tube / LED module shall have nominal day light, natural white
light, Cool white or warm white output that corresponds to the
correlated colour temperature (CCT) in the range of between 2800K
and 6500K. The colour rendering index, the target CCT and the
tolerance shall base on latest ANSI_NEMA_ANSLG C78.377A, as
listed below:
Target CCT and Colour Rendering

Nominal CCT (K)
tolerance (K) Index
3000K 3045 +/- 175 Minimum 70
4000K 3985 +/- 275 Minimum 70
5000K 5028+/- 283 Minimum 65
6500K 6530 +/- 510 Minimum 65
The CCT for the Luminaire should comply with tolerance quadrangle
as stated in the ANSI Chromaticity Standard C78.377A.
(b) All LED tube and LED module including electronic gear/driver shall
provide with 5 year warranty. Any failure on shall be on one to one
exchange.
(c) For luminaries with one or two lamps, one electronic gear/driver shall
only be used for one lamp.
(d) The LED tube shall come with aluminum housing, ABS plastic end cap
and plastic optic. For LED module shall provided with minimum IP
rating of 54
(e) For recess down light, the LED module shall be provided with
minimum IP rating of 20
(f) The radiation angle of the LED shall be at least +/- 45 degree (half
angle/half maximum) and beam angle of 120 degree.
(g) The LED tube / LED module shall be suitable for use of AC supplies
220 - 240V at 50Hz and the power factor shall be 0.9 or better.
TS/17/29 2602542S/EL
(h) The luminaire shall comply with:
(i) IEC 62471 “Photo biological safety of lamps and lamp systems”
and IEC 62471-2 “Photo biological safety of lamps and lamp
systems – Part 2: Guidance on manufacturing requirements
relating to non-laser optical radiation safety”.
(ii) The LED tube / LED module shall comply with IEC 62031 “LED
modules or general lighting – Safety specifications”.
(i) Test results shall be provided to indicate adequate thermal

performance for long-term operation of LED’s at minimum luminaire’s
operating temperature of 45°C in accordance to test condition with
Part 1 of SS 263 (or IEC 60598-1). The LED junction temperature
shall be maintained at or below manufacturer’s recommendation.
The LED luminaire shall be of following type:
Type of luminaire Max System Luminous Lux Colour Rendering

Power (W) (Lumen) Index
a) 600mm LED tube 12W Min. 650 (for CCT Min. 65

or module @4000K/ 5000K/
6500K)
b) 1200mm LED 24W Min. 1100 (for CCT Min. 65

tube or module @4000K/5000K/ 6500K)
c) 600mm strip 54W Min 4100 ( for CCT @ Min 80

module 4000K /5000K
The LED luminaire shall be pre-wired and complete with illumination-

grade LEDs, heat sinks, electronic control gear and housing. LED
module to come with external driver/transformer shall be replaceable;
not built-in type. LED tube shall come with external driver or
integrated driver within tube. The correlated colour temperature of
the LED shall be 4000K unless otherwise indicated in drawings. The
LED luminaire shall be resistant to shock and vibration. External Light
fixture shall consist of anti-glare frosted front cover for uniformity light
distribution.
TS/17/30 2602542S/EL
The LED luminaire housing shall have the following features:
(i) Metal housing with high heat dissipation properties.
(ii) Corrosion resistant.
(iii) Heat sinks with high thermal dissipation properties.
(iv) External light luminaries diffuser shall be UV resistant and

deflector shall be of mirror finish for offices and laboratory.
(v) Operate in relative humidity of greater than 90%.
(vi) Light shall be free of lines / spots / flicker.
(j) The surface mounted LED luminaire shall comply with SS263 Part 3
(and IEC 60598-2-1) “Particular requirements for fixed general purpose
luminaires”, used together with SS 263 Part 1 (and IEC 60598-1).
(k) The LED tube shall be provided with minimum IP rating of 54.
(l) The thermal path and mechanical support of the LED Chip shall be in
Ceramic material
(m) The failure rate of the completely assembled LED luminaires (inclusive
of the LEDs, heat sinks, diffuser, electronic control gear and housing)
shall not be more than 5% per 10,000 hours of operation. A failure is
deemed to have occurred if the luminaires malfunctions or does not
meet any requirements in the specifications.
(n) The luminaire that being supplied and proposed for use shall be of
non-proprietary.
(o) The material and body of the luminaire shall comply with test
standards and performance as follows:
(i) Electro-galvanized coating of min. 1 micro on steel metal of

thickness gauge 22 or 0.8mm +/- 0.05mm.
(ii) PR 12 or equivalent outdoor durable polyester powder in white

colour. Thickness shall be at least 60 microns on average, and
not less than 50 microns at any point
TS/17/31 2602542S/EL
(iii) Material – Powder Coating
1 ISO 6272-2 Impact Resistance
2 ISO 2409 Cross-cut adhesion
3 ISO 1519 Bend Test
4 ASTM D3363 Pencil Hardness Test
5 ISO 9227 Salt Spray Test duration 500 hrs
6 ISO 6270 Humidity test, 1000 hrs

Simulated light exposure test duration
7 ISO 11341
1000 hrs
8 ISO 2808 Dry firm thickness of powder coating
17.6 The electronic control gears shall power the LED such that the LED is flicker-
free including during dimming operation tested in accordance to IEEE Std
1789.
17.7 The electronic control gear shall comply with test standards and
performance requirements as follow:
(a) IEC 62384: DC or AC supplied electronic control gear for LED

modules.
(b) IEC 61347 Part 2-13; Particular requirements for DC or AC supplied

electronic control gear for LED modules.
(c) IEC 61547 – EMC Immunity Requirements.
(d) IEC 61000-3-2 “Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) – Part 3:

Limits for Harmonic Current Emissions (Equipment Input Current
Less Than 16A per Phase)”
(e) IEC 61000-3-3 “Limitation of voltage changes, voltage fluctuations

and flicker in public low-voltage supply systems, for equipment with
rated current less than or equal 16A per phase and not subject to
conditional connection”.
(f) CISPR 15 “Limits and methods of measurement of radio

disturbance characteristics of electrical lighting and similar
equipment”.
17.8 The electronic control gears shall be suitable for use of AC supplies 220 -
240V at 50Hz. It shall be designed for SELV voltage and constant current for
LED operation. The electronic control gear shall be provided with protection
against short circuits, overload, over voltage, thermal overload and transient
overvoltage. It shall be of CE, ROHS compliance.
TS/17/32 2602542S/EL
The electronic control gears shall satisfy the following requirements:
Life Span : 5 years against defects
Operating Temperature Range : 20°C to 45°C
Storage Temperature Range : 20°C to 85°C

Rated constant current at
350mA (+/- 5%) for 12W
Output current :
Rated constant current at700mA
(+/- 5%) for 24W
Power Factor : 0.9 or better
THD : < 15 %
AC 220V to 240V (+/-10%) 50
Rated input voltage :
Hz continuous Operation
Efficiency : At least 75%
17.9 Luminaire with Motion Sensor
For LED luminaire used with motion sensor, it shall have dual level lighting. It
shall be provided with driver with a motion detector to dim the light level to
50% (+/- 5%) of its rated lumen output. The motion sensor shall be integrated
into the luminaire or remote adjacent to the luminaire. If remote, the sensor
shall be placed in its own housing and the supply cable to the sensor shall be
connected via socket connector. The LED luminaire shall remain lighted in the
event of failure of the motion sensor.
The Motion Detector shall have the following characteristic/specifications:
(a) Operate in SELV DC .
(b) Current Consumption shall be below 50 mA.
(c) Operation within temperature ranges of 17°C to 50°C.
(d) Operate in humidity greater than 90% .
(e) Have a detection zone of 360°.
(f) Have a detection range of 8m from ceiling mount height of 2.5m to 3m.
(g) Have built-in features to reduce false alarms due to rapid.

Temperatures changes, vibration, noises, RFI, static or lightning,
insects, etc..
(h) Be easily disabled.
TS/17/33 2602542S/EL
(i) Provide normally closed cover tamper.
(j) The reset shall be automatic and adjustable from 5 to 99 seconds.
(k) Be rated IP21.
17.20 Technical Specification for 52W LED module
The 52W LED module shall comply the following specification:
a) LED module to come with external driver/transformer shall be

replaceable; not built-in type
b) LED chips must not be visually seen when lighted up; Secondary
optics/diffuser shall not produce uneven diffusion of light or dark spots
when lit.
c) Optic/Diffuser’s produced light dispersion shall be of uniformity with

minimal glare and without dark spots.
d) Product including gear/driver to be covered with 5 Years Warranty on

one-to-one exchange terms due to failure.
e) Warranty on Lumen maintenance at 70% for not less than 40,000hrs.

(Lumen do not drop below 70%)
f) Lumens output shall be at least 4100lm.
g) Total LED power consumption shall not be higher than 52W.
h) Input : Constant Current input (max. 24V DC)
i) Driver/transformer shall be of constant current type (Output).
j) The colour rendering index (CRI) shall be at least 80.
k) Mid Lifespan of min.50,000hrs.
l) Flicker-free operation.
m) Colour temperature of 4000K-4500K.
n) Beam angle of at least 120 degrees
o) Free of toxic material such as mercury, lead, phosphor, etc Aluminium

heat sink.
p) Operating temperature shall be between -20°C ~ +55°C.
q) The product shall be compliance to ROHS.
TS/17/34 2602542S/EL
r) The LED has to comply to following standard:
i) EN 60825-1:1994+A1: 2002+A2:2001, Safety of laser products

part 1 : Equipment classification, requirements and user’s
guide,
ii) EN 55015: 2006+A1: 2007 (Emissions),
iii) EN 55015: 2006+A1: 2007, Conducted Emission,
iv) EN 55015: 2006+A1: 2007, Radiated Electromagnetic

Disturbance,
v) EN 55015: 2006+A1: 2007, CISPR 22: 2005, Radiated

Emissions,
vi) EN 61000-3-3: 1995+A1: 2001+A2: 2005, Voltage Fluctuation,
vii) EN 61547: 1995+A1: 2000 (Immunity),
viii) IEC 61000-4-2, Edition 1.2 (2001), Electrostatic Discharge,
ix) IEC 61000-4-3, Edition 3.0 (2006), RF Immunity,
x) IEC 61000-4-4, Edition 2.0 (2004), EFT/Bursts Immunity.
xi) IEC 61000-4-5, Edition 2.0 (2005), Surge Immunity,
xii) IEC 61000-4-6, Edition 2.2 (2006), Conducted Immunity,
xiii) IEC 61000-4-8, Edition 1.1 (2001), Power Magnetic Field,
xiv) IEC 61000-4-11, Edition 2.0 (2004), Voltage Dips & Short
Interruption,
xv) EN 61347-1: 2008, Lamp control gear - Safety-Part 1: General

requirements
TS/17/35 2602542S/EL
18. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR LED LUMINAIRE (OUTDOOR
18.1. Outdoor LED luminaires are those installed typically at the outdoor open
garden areas and surface carpark.
18.2. The intent of this specification is to define the performance characteristics

required of a replacement of the existing conventional luminaires with LED
street light, LED post top, LED bollards, LED flood light and LED spot- lights
with the appropriate adaptor onto existing pole/arms on a one-to- one
replacement (for posts which are not replaced) to achieve comparative
photometric performance.
18.3. The Contractor shall use illumination grade LEDs supported with IES LM-80
accredited test report for measuring lumen maintenance of LED sources.
18.4. The usage of illumination grade LED shall not infringe any Intellectual
Property Patent of LED manufacturers. The Contractor and LED luminaire
manufacturers shall indemnify the Employer from any legal responsibilities
from any infringement of the patent right.
18.5. All LED modules shall comply with IEC 62031.
18.6. The thermal path and mechanical support of the LED Chip shall be in
Ceramic material.
18.7. The LED luminaire shall be pre-wired and complete with all necessary
components to provide a working unit.
18.8. The luminaire shall incorporate the following features:
(a) The luminaire shall be capable of operation at 220-240 volts AC +/-

10%, 50 Hertz
(b) The luminaire power factor ≥ 0.90.
(c) Be resistance to shock and vibration, appropriate to the

environment it will be installed in.
(d) All housings shall be capable of being easily opened and closed
without the use of a specialised tool.
(e) Be designed for ease of individual component replacement

including LED engines/modules, drivers, etc.
(f) The design shall accommodate ease of end-of-life dis-assembly.
(g) The luminaire wiring input terminals shall be capable of accepting a

looped 4mm2 stranded wire (as a minimum size).
(h) The light produced shall be free of flicker, lines/spots (not applicable to
Street light).
TS/17/36 2602542S/EL
(i) Constructed so that individual LED light bars can be replaced in-situ.
(j) The luminaire shall be capable of operating in minimum ambient

temperature of 45 C and RH ≥ 90%.
(k) The luminaire shall be type tested to Part 1 and respective Part 2 of
IEC 60598.
(l) The IP rating of luminaires shall be defined by IEC 60529. The

minimum IP rating shall be IP65.
(m) The luminaire shall have an impact rating better than IK07 as
defined by IEC 62262 and there shall be no damage to the
luminaire enclosure.
(n) Luminaires shall have the following information distinctly and durably
marked:
(i) Trademark or mark of origin.
(ii) Nominal wattage.
(iii) Correlated colour temperature
(iv) Colour rendering index
(v) Marking requirements in accordance to relevant test standards.
(o) The luminaire shall meet the EMC requirements of;
(i) IEC 61000-3-2 “Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) – Part

3: Limits for Harmonic Current Emissions (Equipment Input
Current Less Than 16A per Phase)”
(ii) IEC 61547 – EMC Immunity Requirements.
(iii) IEC 61000-3-3 “Limitation of voltage changes, voltage

fluctuations and flicker in public low-voltage supply systems,
for equipment with rated current less than or equal 16A per
phase and not subject to conditional connection”.
(iv) CISPR 15 “Limits and methods of measurement of radio

disturbance characteristics of electrical lighting and similar
equipment”.
(p) The luminaire shall meet the electromagnetic field requirements of

IEC 62493.
(q) The luminaire shall withstand 500Vdc insulation resistance test.
TS/17/37 2602542S/EL
(r) Type of LED luminaire
Type of System Lumen CRI Remarks

Luminaire Power (W) Efficiency (as
(Outdoor) (as per IES per IES LM-79)
LM-79)
Street ≤ 120W ≥ 85 lumens/W ≥ 70 To replace existing
Light (for CCT @ street light Refer to.
3000K/3500K) Cut-sheet for details
Post Top ≤ 40W ≥ 85 lumens/W ≥ 70 To replace all
(for CCT @ existing landscape
3000K/3500K) and foot- path post
top. Refer to Cut-
sheet for details.
Bollard ≤ 10W ≥ 85 lumens/W ≥ 70 Refer to Cut-sheet
(for CCT @ for details.
3000K/3500K)
(s) The initial and maintained chromaticity coordinates shall be within 5-

steps and 6 steps MacAdam ellipse (defined by IEC 62722-2-1)
respectively.
(t) All luminaires shall meet the Category “ Risk Group 1 “as defined by
IEC 62471 & IEC 62471-2
(u) All luminaires shall meet the RoHS (Restrictions of Hazardous

Substances) Directive 2002/95/EC. The following materials shall not
be incorporated into the construction of the luminaire or the internal
elements:
(i) Lead
(ii) Cadmium
(iii) Mercury
(iv) PCB (polychlorinated biphenyl)
(v) Luminaires shall be manufactured from high quality pressure die cast
aluminium incorporating a copper content of less than 0.1%.
18.9 The luminaire shall also have the following additional requirements:
(a) Lumen maintenance of LED luminaire shall consider the humidity

conditions specified.
(b) High power single chip on board LED will not be accepted for post top
luminaire.
(c) LED luminaire shall have luminance uniformity ratio of 1:3 tested in
accordance to SS 508 Part 4. (not applicable to Street Light)
TS/17/38 2602542S/EL
(d) Designed with Built in Protective air vent to balance the pressure and
prevent condensation inside the LED module compartment.
(e) Both LED module and electrical compartment are to in separate

compartments and either independently IP65 protected if they are in
separate housing or in a single IP65 protected housing.
(f) Luminaires shall generally have photometric distribution following the

IESNA Type I, Type II, Type III, Type IV and Type V patterns (or an
approved equivalent similar distribution). Different photometric
distribution, applicable to particular area functionality requirements,
shall be not precluded to these options.
(g) Diffusers and optical lens shall be made of UV resistance material and
be stabilised against deformation, deterioration on discoloration due to
the lamp and/or solar radiation (UV) affecting light transmission losses
and colour shift.
18.10 The electronic control gear is defined as the driver and all other associated
control and dimming elements incorporated within the luminaire. LED control
gear shall be within +/-10% of the rated current to comply with IEC 62384.
The electronic control gear shall be designed for isolated output and constant
current operation. The electronic control gear shall be designed to suit the
LED operation and be provided with protection against short circuits,
overloads, overvoltage, thermal overload and transient overvoltage.
18.11 The electronic control gear shall satisfy the following requirements:
(a) The electronic components shall provide flicker-free LED operation

including during dimming operation tested in accordance to IEEE Std
1789-2015.
(b) Safety requirements of IEC 61347-2-13 and performance

requirements of IEC 62384-1 Control gear to withstand over-voltage
up to 280Vac without negative effect during endurance test.
(c) Power factor ≥ 0.90
(d) EMC type tested to CISPR15, IEC 61000-3-2, IEC 61000-3-3 and IEC
61547 and type tested to IP67, if control gear is located outside of
luminaire
(e) Minimum operating temperature of 55º C
(f) Storage Temperature range of 20º C to 85º C
(g) 350mA/700mA/900mA/1050mA (+/-10%) rated constant output

current
(h) Total harmonics current distortion (ATHD) ≤ 15%
TS/17/39 2602542S/EL
(i) Supply voltage of 220-240Vac (+/-10%), 50Hz
(j) The electronic control gear shall be rated at least 50,000 hours
operation.
18.12 All LED luminaires shall come complete with the following provisions for the
replacement of the drivers.
(a) DC Connector (to be installed between LED module and Electronic

Control Gear).
(b) Ease of securing/removing the driver.
(c) Polarised plug and socket connector.
(d) The leads shall be colour coded.
(e) LED luminaire shall allow replacement of electronic control gear

without replacement of the LED module (Refer to Figure A below).
Figure A
TS/17/40 2602542S/EL
19. All the luminaries, control gear, ballasts, drivers, lamp holder and related accessories
shall meet to the standard and regulation as follows:
(a) SS 121: Lamp holders and start holders for tubular fluorescent lamps
(b) SS 122: Tubular fluorescent lamps for general lighting service
(c) SS 263 /IEC 60598-2: Specification for luminaires - General requirements

and tests
(d) SS 490-1: Lamp control gear - General and safety requirements
(e) SS 490-2: Lamp control gear - Particular requirements for ballasts for lighting
(f) SS 531: Code of practice for lighting of work places
(g) SS 563-1: Design, installation and maintenance of emergency lighting and

power supply systems in buildings - Part 1 : Emergency lighting
(h) SS 563-2: Design, installation and maintenance of emergency lighting and

power supply systems in buildings - Part 2 : Installation requirements and
maintenance procedures
(i) BS 4533-102.1 / BS EN / IEC 60598-2-1: Luminaires. Particular requirements.

Specification for fixed general purpose luminaires
(j) BS EN 55015: Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance

characteristics of electrical lighting and similar equipment
(k) BS EN 55022: Information technology equipment. Radio disturbance

characteristics. Limits and methods of measurement
(l) BS EN / IEC 60155: Glow-starters for fluorescent lamps
(m) BS EN / IEC 60598-1: Luminaires General requirements and tests
(n) BS EN / IEC 60598-2: Luminaires. Particular requirements
(o) IEC /EN 60929 / VDE 0712-23: AC and/or DC-supplied electronic control gear
for tubular fluorescent lamps - Performance requirements
(p) BS EN 61000-3-2: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Limits. Limits for

harmonic current emissions (equipment input current ≤16 A per phase)
(q) BS EN / IEC 61347-2-3: Lamp control gear. Particular requirements for a.c.
supplied electronic ballasts for fluorescent lamps
(r) BS EN / IEC 61347-2-8: Lamp control gear. Particular requirements for

ballasts for fluorescent lamps
TS/17/41 2602542S/EL
(s) BS EN / IEC 61347-2-13: Lamp controlgear. Particular requirements for d.c.
or a.c. supplied electronic control gear for LED modules
(t) BS EN / IEC 61558: Safety of transformers, reactors, power supply units and
combinations thereof
(u) CISPR 15: Emissions from Luminaries and Ancillary Devices
(v) EN 50172 / VDE 0108-100: Emergency escape lighting systems
(w) EN 60555-2: Disturbances in supply systems caused by household

appliances and similar electrical equipment. Specification of harmonics
(x) EN 60928 / IEC 61347-1: Lamp controlgear. General and safety requirements
(y) EN 61547 / VDE 0875-15-2: Equipment for general lighting purposes - EMC
immunity requirements
(z) IEC 60598-1: Luminaires. General requirements and tests (British Standard)
(aa) IEC 60598-2: Luminaires. Particular Requirements
(bb) IEC 61347-2-3: Lamp controlgear. Particular requirements for a.c. supplied
electronic ballasts for fluorescent lamps.
(cc) Ballast and any other luminaires and lighting components regulated as
Controlled Good defined by the Singapore Consumer Protection (Safety
Requirements) Registration Scheme (CPS) must be registered with SPRING
Singapore and bear the SAFETY Mark.
TS/17/42 2602542S/EL
SECTION 18 - ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
1. General
1.1 Electrical accessories shall be of the highest quality consistent with the
required safety and shall comply with all the relevant standards. Type test
certification by recognized testing authority is essential.
1.2 The colour of switches and switched socket outlets shall be selected by the
1.3 All electrical accessories shall comply to following standard
b) SS 23: Ceiling roses
c) SS 144 / IEC 61058-1: Switches for appliances - General

requirements
d) SS 145-1: Specification for 13 A plugs and socket-outlets - Part 1 :

Rewirable and non-rewirable 13 A fused plugs
e) SS 145-2: Specification for 13 A plugs and socket-outlets - Part 2:

13 A switched and unswitched socket-outlets
f) SS 472: 15A plugs and switched socket-outlets for domestic and

similar purposes
g) BS 546: Specification. Two-pole and earthing-pin plugs, socket-

outlets and socket-outlet adaptors
h) BS 1363: 13 A plugs, socket-outlets, adaptors and connection units
i) BS 4573: Specification for 2-pin reversible plugs and shaver socket

outlets
j) BS EN 60947: Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear. Switches,

disconnectors, switch-disconnectors and fuse-combination units
k) BS EN 60669: Specification for switches for domestic and similar

purposes. General requirements (for fixed or portable mounting)
l) BS 4177: Specification for cooker control units
m) BS 4662: Boxes for flush mounting of electrical accessories.

Requirements, test methods and dimensions
n) BS 5490: Specification for classification of degrees of protection

provided by enclosures
TS/18/1 2602542S/EL
o) BS 5733: General requirements for electrical accessories.
Specification
p) BS 7288: Specification for residual current devices with or without

overcurrent protection for socket-outlets for household and similar
uses.
q) BS EN 60529: Specification for degrees of protection provided by

enclosures (IP code)
r) BS EN 60669-1: Switches for household and similar fixed-electrical

installations. General requirements
s) BS EN 60669-2-4: Switches for household and similar fixed

electrical installations. Particular requirements. Isolating switches
t) BS EN 60947-3: Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear. Switches,

disconnectors, switch-disconnectors and fuse-combination units
u) BS EN 61558-2-5: Safety of transformers, reactors, power supply

units and combinations thereof. Particular requirements and tests
for transformer for shavers, power supply units for shavers and
shaver supply units
v) Where switches and socket outlets are classified as Controlled

Good as defined by the Singapore Consumer Protection (Safety
Requirements) Registration Scheme (CPS), it must be registered
and bear the SAFETY Mark.
1.4 All steel boxes shall comply with latest Singapore Standard SS 145 and
with brass earth terminals fitted in base.
1.5 For outdoors or wet locations, everything shall be corrosion-resistant

including bolts, strips, etc. and the switches, isolator mounted and installed
in the outdoor or wet location shall be of IP65.
1.6 Ferrous material shall be protected both inside and out by two coatings of
approved corrosion-resistant material (e.g., zinc, cadmium, or enamel).
Enamel shall not be used outdoors or in wet locations. For outdoors or wet
locations, approved material and coating shall be used.
1.7 Unless otherwise stated, switches and switched socket outlets for outdoors
or wet locations shall be mounted at 1200 mm above finished floor level.
1.8 Other than shaver outlets, no switches and switched socket outlets shall be
allowed to install inside bath rooms or toilets.
1.9 Unless otherwise stated, all switched socket outlets on the laboratory
benches shall be surface-mounted on an approved purpose made cast
alloy pedestal boxes with 38 mm diameter knockouts in both sides for
conduit connection and earth terminal for connection of earth wire. Corners
shall be rounded. Socket outlet fixings shall be in accordance with BS 4662.
TS/18/2 2602542S/EL
1.10 All switch and socket outlet boxes, isolators, etc. shall be properly labelled
according to the circuit number of the "As-built" drawings with approved
label.
1.11 All the switches, switch socket-outlets installed above ceiling, riser, plant
rooms, maintenance room, mechanical plant room shall be of metal clad
type unless otherwise specified
2. Switches
2.1 Indication
Switches having contacts that are not visible shall be marked or provided
with a device indicating clearly either the switch is at 'ON' or 'OFF'
positions. Tumbler operated switches shall be so mounted that the tumbler
knob is in the raised position when the switch is 'OFF' and in the depressed
position when 'ON'. All tumbler operated switches shall be of the silent type
and shall comply with BS 3676 / BS EN 60669-1. Switches controlling
normal/emergency supplies shall have 'red' colour tumbler knobs. They
shall be rated minimum 10 Amp at reactive loads unless otherwise stated.
2.2 Sequence of Operation
No multi-pole switch or circuit breaker that includes a switch in a neutral

conductor shall connect any live conductor before the neutral conductor is
connected, or open the neutral conductor before all live conductors have
been opened.
3. Lighting Switches
3.1 All flush mounted lighting switches shall be wide rocker-operated switch
with impact resistance plastic flush plate switch type mounted on malleable
iron or pressed steel boxes complete with brass earth terminals to latest
Singapore Standard SS 145. Lighting switches shall comply with latest
Singapore Standard SS 227 and Singapore Standard SS 144 / IEC 61058-
1. Whenever the number of switches at one location exceeds one, multi-
gang switches shall be used. Where more than one phase of a supply are
brought into a multi-gang switch box, the switches and accessories and
wiring connected to one phase shall be adequately separated from those
connected to other phases by means of rigidly fixed screens or barriers.
3.2 All lighting switches shall be capable of being used up to their full rating on
fluorescent loads.
3.3 Where switches are connected to normal as well as emergency supplies
of electricity "RED" coloured rocker switches shall be used.
3.4 Surface switches shall be heavy-gauge steel with conduit entries and shall
have rocker-operated mechanisms. They shall have steel front plates of
the single-switch or grid-switch type.
TS/18/3 2602542S/EL
3.5 Switches outdoors or otherwise exposed to damp conditions shall be of
industrial pattern watertight type with galvanized steel or UV stabilized PVC
boxes and waterproof gaskets.
4. Base Blocks
Every lighting fitting and accessory shall be mounted on a suitable base block or
other device providing adequate wiring space except in the following cases:
4.1 A lighting fitting or accessory mounted on a switchboard panel or a metal

conduit box.
4.2 An accessory completely enclosed in a metallic casing.
4.3 A lighting fitting or accessory providing in its own base adequate space for
wiring or one that incorporates a suitable fixing base.
4.4 A tumbler switch mounted on a flat architrave that is not overlapped by the
base of the switch.
4.5 A flush plug-socket or flush switch.
4.6 A lighting fitting or accessory that is securely attached to rigid conduit or

piping or flexible cord.
4.7 All base blocks or similar devices shall be securely fixed by at least two
screws provided that a small base block accommodating only one
accessory such a tumbler switch, ceiling rose etc. may be fixed by one
screw only provided rotation of the base is effectively prevented by the
manner or fixing.
5. Ceiling Roses
5.1 Ceiling roses shall be white of reputable manufacture according to the

latest Singapore Standard SS 23. They shall be of porcelain, or of plastic
with porcelain interiors and shall be fitted with plastic backplates or plastic
mounting blocks semi-recessed where necessary to comply with the
Singapore Standard SS 638.
5.2 Where they are of the three-plate type the live terminal shall be shrouded
so as to prevent accidental contact when the cover is removed.
5.3 No ceiling rose shall be used for voltage in excess of 250 V between
terminals or for connection of more than two flexible cords unless the
ceiling rose is specifically designed for multiple attachment. Brass earth
terminals shall be provided for each continuity conductor.
TS/18/4 2602542S/EL
6. Lamp holders
6.1 Lamp holders shall be of the bayonet-cap type for tungsten lamps up to and
including 150 watt, and of the Edison screw type for larger lamps.
6.2 Where they are integral with lighting fittings, they shall be brass with
porcelain interiors. For use with flexible pendants, they shall be of white
plastic with compression glands. Where batten lamp holders are installed
the lamp holders shall be of white plastic. In damp situation, holders shall
be approved by S.O.
6.3 Lamp holders for fluorescent tubes shall be of the heavy pattern bi-pin type
of white plastic construction.
6.4 All lampholders shall be lubricated with molybdenum disulphide to ensure

easy removal of threaded rings and lamps.
7. Lighting Contactor
Lighting contactors shall be electrically held and shall be furnished in a general

purpose, surface mounted enclosure, unless otherwise indicated. The contactors
shall employ gravity dropout and shall employ double break silver allow contacts,
with full tungsten lamp rating, without the use of auxiliary arcing contacts. All
contacts must be removable without disturbing line or load wiring. All coils shall be
moulded construction, replaceable without removing the contactor from its
enclosure. Coil must be suitable for continuous energisation and for silent
operation. Refer to further details in the Technical Specifications on AC Contactor.
8. Plugs and Socket Outlets
8.1 All socket outlets and plugs shall comply with latest Singapore Standard SS
145 and generally, switched socket outlets shall be of 13 amp, flush
mounting type consisting of impact resistance plastic plate, 13 Amp S.P.
rocker-operated micro break switch mechanisms mounted in a steel wall
box with a suitable brass earth terminals and matted chromed plate.
8.2 Power outlets in offices and general areas shall be mounted on skirting
boards or as directed by the S.O.. Socket outlets shall be so mounted that
the plug is withdrawn in a horizontal plane. Socket outlets shall also be
fixed on floor where so directed by the S.O. and they shall be so arranged
that no dust or water can accumulate therein.
8.3 Surface socket outlets shall be metal clad type with steel front plate for
plant rooms, risers and carpark areas.
8.4 Skirting socket outlet is not allowed to be mounted lower than 150 mm
above finished floor level.
TS/18/5 2602542S/EL
8.5 Outlets in plant and machine rooms shall be metal clad protected type.
These outlets shall be flush type where practicable, otherwise surface
mounted. Outlets exposed to weather and in Basement shall be
weatherproof type. Weatherproof type socket outlet shall comply with IEC
60309-2 and be provided with a push-on cap and cap retaining ring or a
screw-on cap with rubber gasket. The socket outlet shall have ingress
protection of at least IPX4 to BS EN 60529.
8.6 Switched socket outlets of 15 Amp 3 Pin and 13 Amp 3 Pin shall be flush or
surface type as indicated and shall be provided with chrome plated brass
plate. Where socket outlets are connected to normal as well as emergency
supplies of electricity. Socket outlets with "red" rocker switch shall be used.
Whereas socket outlets connected to stabilized voltage/uninterruptible
power supply shall be with "red" indication lights.
8.7 Special socket outlets incorporating sparkless mercury switch or explosion

proof switches and socket outlets shall be used for explosion hazard areas.
The outlets shall be tested and approved by the relevant testing authority.
8.8 3 Phase 415 V 50 Hz switched socket outlets shall be 5 pole 5 wire 415 V
AC complete with equipment grounding and locking devices. The
receptacles shall be heavy duty moulded of rugged arc resistant polyamide,
positive locking and cannot be pulled apart accidentally. It shall be self
closing and ensures protection from electrical hazards by closing off live
connection when cap is removed. The plug shall be of the same make.
The socket outlet and plug shall be mineral oils, greases and corrosion
resistant and shall be splashproof.
8.9 Cooker outlets where used in kitchen shall be 30 A double-pole flush type
with 13 Amp switch socket contained in mild steel box and with impact
resistance flush mounted plastic plate.
8.10 Shaver socket outlets shall be 230 V/110 V dual voltage operation,
complete with isolation transformer and thermal overload device. The unit
shall be enclosed in mild steel box for flush mounting and fitted with
moulded ivory cover plate. A flush mounting double-pole switch similar to
the lighting switches shall be installed outside the bathroom/toilet to control
each shaver outlet.
8.11 Water heaters socket outlet shall be controlled by 20 Amp double-pole,

flush mounted water heater switches with pilot light and labelled with the
word "water-heater". These switches shall be installed outside
bathroom/toilet and sockets installed near to the heater.
TS/18/6 2602542S/EL
9. Isolators
9.1 All isolators shall comply with latest BS 3185 / BS EN 60669-2-4and

mounted at 1250 mm above finished floor level unless otherwise stated or
directed by S.O..
9.2 Isolators shall be heavy-duty pattern with steel enclosures having cast-iron
frame members, rust-protected and finished grey stoved enamel. Front
access doors shall be fitted with dust-excluding gaskets and shall be
interlocked so that they cannot be opened when the switch is ‘on’.
Operating handles shall be lockable in both the on and off positions and
shall have visible on-off indication.
9.3 Isolators shall be 500 V rating and shall be clearly marked with their current
rating.
9.4 The moving contract assemblies are to be removable for inspection and
maintenance.
9.5 All steel doors shall be earthed to the enclosures by appropriate size of
tinned copper earth braids.
9.6 Isolators shall be approved by Superintending Officer.
9.7 Isolators with lettering (FM) shall be flush mounted.
9.8 Isolator above 100 Amp, refer to the other details of the Specification.
10. Switch fuses
10.1 Switch fuses shall be industrial pattern dust-proof type with HRC fuse links.
They shall have enclosures fabricated from sheet steel finished grey
stoved enamel with removable top and bottom endplates and shall have
doors fitted with dust-proof gaskets. They shall have front-operated
handles with visible on-off indication.
10.2 The interiors shall have vitreous porcelain bases fitted with plated non-
ferrous conducting components. Switches shall be of the quick make-and-
break type and have removable shields over the fixed contacts and
removable moving contact bars.
10.3 Each switch fuse shall be supplied complete with the correct HRC fuse
links.
10.4 Switch fuses shall be 500 V rating and shall be clearly marked with their
current rating.
TS/18/7 2602542S/EL
11. Industrial plug and socket (Cee form)
11.1. The industrial plug and socket shall comply with BS 4343, NEMA, IEC
60309-1, IEC 60309-2 and IEC 60309-4.
11.2. The industrial plug shall be of heavy duty switched interlocked socket
outlet type with on/off switch and auto shutter cover the outlet.
11.3. The body of the plug and connector shall be of heavy duty Polybutylene
terephthalate (PBT) plastic and degree of protection shall be IP44, splash
proof type for indoor. For outdoor and humid environment, the degree of
protection shall be of IP67. All the connector outlet shall complete with
auto shutter to cover the pins.
11.4. All panel mounted plug socket shall be of flush type mounting flush to DB or
OG box. Flush mounted shall water tight and shall not cause any water
ingress into panel
11.5. Chemical storage and gas storage, the body of the plug and connector shall
be of heavy duty aluminum enclosure and explosion proof.
11.6. The industrial plug and socket shall have the colour code as following :
a) Single phase, 230VAC, 50Hz, shall be of blue colour with 4 pin

include earth.
b) Three phase, 380-415VAC, 50Hz, shall be of red colour 5 pins

include earth.
c) Extra low voltage shall be of violet for AC, grey colour for DC
12. Position of Wiring and Outlets
The location of outlets shown on the drawing is approximate only and the Sub-
Contractor shall before installing outlet boxes study all pertinent drawings and
obtain precise information from the S.O.. It shall be understood that any outlet may
be re-located 5 metres from the position shown on the drawings if so directed by
the S.O.. The Sub-Contractor shall be required to make any necessary adjustment
of his work to fit conditions for recessed fixtures and for outlets occurring in glazed
tile, wood panelling or other special finish and for centering such outlets properly.
13. Mounting Height
13.1 Unless otherwise stated, switches and switched socket outlets for outdoors or wet
locations shall be mounted at 1200 mm above finished floor level
13.2 The mounting height of all switch socket outlets shall be above false ceiling
level for auto sensor flush valve, mechanical fan, card phone.
13.3 Other than shaver outlets, no switches and switched socket outlets shall be
allowed to install inside bath rooms or toilets.
TS/18/8 2602542S/EL
13.4 Unless otherwise stated, all switched socket outlets on the laboratory
benches shall be surface-mounted on an approved purpose made cast
alloy pedestal boxes with 38 mm diameter knockouts in both sides for
conduit connection and earth terminal for connection of earth wire. Corners
shall be rounded,
13.5 The mounting height of all wiring devices, outlets shall be as indicated
below with the provision that they shall be subject to alteration as per
instruction by the S.O.
a) All switches 1200 mm above finished floor level

1000 mm above finished floor level for
all handicap requirements
b) Socket outlets in 1200 mm above

switchroom, mechanical finished floor
plant room and work level
areas with wiring conduits
c) Socket outlets in 300mm above table top

laboratories and or to be directed by the
workshop Superintending Officer
d) Socket outlets in 450 mm above

Offices and general finished floor level
office
e) Switches and socket To be directed

outlets on the office by the Superintending Officer
workstations
f) Wall mounted light to be directed by the Superintending

Officer
g) Skirting socket outlet not to be mounted lower than 150mm

from finished floor level
14. Extension Stud
Necessary extension stud shall be used for switches and switched socket outlet
boxes that are concealed in the wall or column.
TS/18/9 2602542S/EL
15. Standards
15.1 All electrical accessories shall comply with the following standards :-
a) Switches --- IEC 60669-1, IEC 61058-1 and SS 144

b) Steel boxes--- SS 145
c) Ceiling roses --- SS 23.
d) 13 Amp. switched socket outlets and plugs --- BS 1363 / SS145
e) Fused connection units --- BS 5733.
f) 15 amp. switched socket outlets and plugs --- BS 546 / SS472
g) 6 amp. plate switches, 6 amp. ceiling switches, and 20 amp./32
amp. DP switches --- BS 3676.
h) Cooker units --- BS 4177 and BS 1363.
i) Shaver units --- BS 3052.
j) Lamp holders and batten lamp holders --- BS 5042 Pt.1 T2 rating.
k) Weatherproof switches --- BS 3676 & BS 5490, IP56.
l) Weatherproof 13 amp. switched socket outlets --- BS 5490, IP56.
m) Industrial plug and socket - IEC 60309, BS 4343
16. Pressed Flip Open Flush Table Power dock Socket
The pressed flush table flip open power dock socket shall be of modularity and
versatility mounted virtually flush on a desk-surface.
The unit is to be easily mounted using a rectangular cut-out in the desk surface
and secured in position with two sturdy ratchet clips. It shall be constructed in
aluminium with different colour selection, providing excellent strength and allowing
a number of finish options to suit any work-surface.
The flush table power dock must be able to house RJ45 data outlets, also be able
to incorporate with 2 way smart USB charger outlets, HDMI outlets, VGA
extension, Data interface with peripherals.
The operating voltage of the power dock shall be of 220V to 250V at 50Hz and
maximum power of 3000W. The USB smart charger output power shall be of
5VDC, 3.1A maximum with input power of 240VAC 100mA.
The power dock shall comply to UL,CE, BS 5733, BS 6396 or relevant Singapore
Standard. The length of the power dock shall be of variable to suit the furniture and
the width shall be of 135mm.
TS/18/10 2602542S/EL
17. Power Socket Distribution Unit
The power socket distribution unit shall be of modularity and versatility type
provided for all the system furniture and of slim and compact type of width not
more than 60mm, CE marking certification of type approved by relevant authority or
accreditation bodies.
Power socket distribution unit is to be of black in colour or any other colour

subjected to SO approval. The power outlet shall be of good electrical insulation
material with class ‘0’ surface flame spread and self-extinguishing complying with
local fire code.
Power main plug shall be of 13A fused and detachable cable to power outlets with
pin connector. The power outlet shall be suitable for type “G” three pin plug
operated at 230V, 50Hz. Power socket distribution unit shall be protected with fuse.
The on/off switch shall be of illuminate rocker upon switch on. The power socket
distribution unit shall be of five single socket outlets with extension power pin for
another plug in connection. Extension pin shall complete with end cap.
The power socket shall have the flexibility to incorporate to incorporate with 2 way
smart USB charger outlets, HDMI outlets, VGA extension, Data interface with
peripherals. The USB smart charger output power shall be of 5VDC, 3.1A
maximum with input power of 240VAC 100mA
The power socket distribution unit shall have maximum power rating of 300W and
16A operated at 230V, 50HZ. External earth cable shall be provided for earth
bonding at the furniture, if required.
Where as specified, the power socket distribution unit outlet shall have the function
of remote power supply on/off, monitoring of the energy consumption, current and
overload.
TS/18/11 2602542S/EL
18. Power Socket Distribution Unit With Power Monitoring
The power socket distribution unit shall be of rack mounted and complete with
power monitoring. It shall be of slim and compact in line type, UL compliant, CE
marking certification of type approved by relevant authority or accreditation bodies.
Power meter shall be going between the source and the power distribution unit or
power socket distribution unit. It shall be suitable for all kind of single phase power
or three phase power IT rack or other purpose as specified. The power meter shall
monitor the energy consumption (kWh), active power (kW) that being consumed,
voltage (V), current (A) and power factor and send data to the monitoring system.
The power socket distribution unit shall have 2 RJ45 sensor port, thin-film
transistor (TFT) LCD display and 1 Ethernet port for remotely monitoring.
The power meter measurement accuracy shall be of +/- 1% for the energy
monitoring, Input power plug using UK BS1363 plug ‘G’ or IEC 60309 P+N+E Cee
form. The power socket distribution unit shall be suitable for IT rack from 3.6kW to
22kW of power supply. The meter shall able to operate at 0oC to 45 oC and non
condensing at humidity between 20% to 80%.
Power main plug shall be of UK BS1363 plug ‘G’ or IEC 60309 2P+E Cee form
rated 16A or 32A and detachable from the power meter. The power outlet shall be
suitable for connection to type “G” three pin plug socket outlet or Cee-form or other
form of connection that to be approved by engineer or user
The unit shall be able to send data communication for monitoring and control
through BAS, SNMP, SNMP trap, Ethernet 10/100 Mbps, DHCP, NTP protocols,
mobile application, Wireless Mesh Network or any third party software and
application or protocols.
TS/18/12 2602542S/EL
SECTION 19 – TIME SWITCHES
1. General
1.1 The timeswitches shall be of one programmable type with RS232

interfacing and with additional auxiliary twenty-four (24) hours Quartz type
with power reserve of minimum 48 hours (after a charging time of 10min.)
in the even of power failure.
1.2 The supply voltage and the frequency range shall be 200...240 Volt a.c. and
50 Hz respectively.
1.3 The permissible ambient temperature shall be -5o to +55oC.
1.4 The time switch shall comply to following standard
a) DIN 40050-9: Road vehicles; degrees of protection (IP-code);

protection against foreign objects,
b) DIN EN 60715: Dimensions Of Low-voltage Switchgear And

Controlgear - Standardized Mounting On Rails For Mechanical
Support Of Electrical Devices In Switchgear And Controlgear
Installations
c) IEC 60730-2-7: Automatic electrical controls for household and

similar use - Part 2-7: Particular requirements for timers and time
switches
1.5 The minimum switching interval shall be 1 minute.
1.6 The time switch shall have a changeover contact of 16 Amp (changeover)
at 240 Volt a.c. at p.f. = 1.
1.7 It shall be designed to clip on DIN-rail EN 50 022.
1.8 The accuracy shall be + 1 second per day.
1.9 The class and degree of protection shall be class II according to VDE 0633
and IP 20 as per DIN 40050 respectively.
1.10 Terminal cover shall be provided for each timeswitch.
1.11 If the time switch is not housed in D.B., approved dust and vermin proof
insulated housing shall be used.
1.12 The time switches must be of 7 days 24 hours programmable type

(minimum 6 different time settings per day).
TS/19/1 2602542S/EL
SECTION 22 - CABLE TRAYS AND LADDER INSTALLATION
1. General
1.1 Cable trays shall be of approved perforated type and constructed of

minimum 1.60 mm thickness (16 S.W.G.) good quality galvanized mild steel
and Polyester powder coated. Both inside and out of cable tray shall be
protected by two coatings of approved corrosion-resistant material (e.g.,
zinc, cadmium, or enamel). Enamel shall not be used outdoors or in wet
locations. For outdoors or wet locations, approved material and coating
shall be used.
1.2 All cable tray and ladder shall comply to following standards
b) BS EN ISO 1461: Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and

steel articles. Specifications and test methods
c) AISI 304 / 316 / 316L: Stainless Steel
d) BS EN 10143: Continuously hot-dip coated steel sheet and strip
e) BS EN 10152: Electrolytically zinc coated cold rolled steel flat

products. Technical delivery conditions
1.3 The manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 Quality Management

System in the design, manufacture and supply of the cable trays and
ladder.
1.4 Cable ladders shall be of approved heavy duty type and constructed of
minimum 2.0 mm thickness good quality galvanised mild steel and
polyester powder coated. Cable ladder shall be protected by two coatings of
1.5 Sub-Contractor shall select the trays according to the following

requirements:-
a) all cables in one layer
b) allow spacing between supports and cable ties/clips (filling

coefficient : 1.4 for power cables; 1.2 for cable size less 50 mm2)
c) 20% spare for future usage
d) deflection of not more than 1/100th of the span at temperature +40o

C to +50o C when full weight (including future 20% capacity) applied
to the trays
TS/22/1 2602542S/EL
1.6 Cable trays shall be approved for the purpose and shall comply with the
following:
a) Shall have suitable strength and rigidity to provide adequate support

for all contained wiring.
b) Shall not present sharp edges, burrs or projections injurious to the

insulation or jackets of the wiring.
c) Shall be adequately protected against corrosion.
d) Shall include fittings or other suitable means of changes in direction

and elevation of runs.
e) Shall have side edges of minimum 15 mm for the width of 100 mm

and below; and minimum 50 mm for the width of 150 and above.
f) Shall be able to withstand the total load (including weight of cables,

cable accessories, associated equipment, cable tray, and additional
20% future load) applied to the cable tray with a deflection of not
more than 1/100th of the span at temperature +40o C to +50o C.
1.7 If the conditions are not able to achieve, cable ladder shall be used.
1.8 Colours of cable tray for different services shall be selected by the S.O..
Permanent labels shall be provided on the bottle of trays at 1200 mm
interval or at the location when the trays change direction/penetrate wall
and floor.
1.9 Trays for extra low voltage cable shall be zintec coated with approved
permanent label "TELEPHONE", “COMPUTER”, “MATV”, “LIFT” etc.
onto the trays to indicate the different services. Permanent label "ELECT"
shall be used for electrical services. Colours of cable tray for different
services shall be "ORANGE" for electrical, "WHITE" for Extra Low Voltage
(ELV) System, Computer (Data) System, Master Antenna Television
(MATV) System, Telecommunications System “BLUE” for Public Address
(PA) System, and “ GREY” for Lift System. All exposed ceiling tray shall be
of white colour or paint as to Architect requirement. Where there is
perforated or semi-exposed ceiling, all tray shall be painted to Architect
requirement.
TS/22/2 2602542S/EL
2. Cable Ladder
2.1 Cable ladder shall comply with the following :
a) Shall include fittings or other suitable means of change in direction

and elevation of runs.
b) Shall be adequately protected against corrosion.
c) Shall withstand the total load (including weight of cables, cable

accessories, associated equipment, ladder and additional 20%
future load ) applied to the cable ladder.
d) The height of the cable ladder shall be minimum 100 mm.
2.2 The cable ladder channels shall be strengthened by reinforcing inserts to

increase the torsional rigidity.
2.3 The cable ladder shall be completed with rung slots of 50 mm width and of
minimum thickness of 2 mm spaced at maximum 300 mm at the straight
runs.
2.4 Protective enclosure shall be provided for the cable ladder when the ladder
has been used for High Voltage cable installation except in the High
Voltage cable chamber. The protective enclosure shall have permanent
label "H.V." for identification.
2.5 Trays and ladder shall not run along the path of air-con diffuser
3. Tray/ladder Installation
3.1 Cables tray/ladder shall be installed as a complete system with all

necessary long radius bends, coupling accessories, elbows, tees, crosses,
branch and reducer sections, cable dropout accessories, and fixing
brackets fabricated from galvanized mild steel flat. Field bends of
modifications shall be so made that the electrical continuity of the cable tray
system and support for the cables shall be maintained.
3.2 Mild steel hangers fixed to wall or structural slab (with metal threaded studs
No. C14/250/60 complete with washer No. 20, two locknuts using cartridge
hammer in an approved manner shall be provided not more than 1200 mm
intervals to prevent stress on cables. Additional supports shall be provided
at junctions of cable tray/cable tray system or cable tray/steel cable trunking
system. The hangers shall be painted with a primer and two coats of semi-
glossy grey or other-approved colour.
3.3 Cable tray/ladder shall be permitted to extend transversely through

partitions and wall or vertically through floors.
3.4 Each run of cable tray shall be completed before the installation of cables.
TS/22/3 2602542S/EL
3.5 Where tee, cross and reducer are required, factory fabricated tee, cross
and reducer section of cable tray/ladder shall be used.
3.6 Cables shall be fastened securely to transverse members of the cable

tray/ladder. Where single conductor cables comprising each phase of
neutral of a.c., circuit are installed, the conductors consisting of phase
neutral and earth of the same circuit shall be installed in group. Single
conductors shall be securely bound in circuit group to prevent excessive
movement due to fault current magnetic force.
3.7 An appropriate size of copper links, brass bolts and nuts shall be installed
at each joint trunking to provide earth continuity.
3.8 The end of the cable tray/ladder shall be connected to the earth bar of the
associated distribution board by 70 mm2 PVC (GREEN/YELLOW) cable.
3.9 Sufficient space shall be provided and maintained above cable tray/ladder
to permit adequate access for installing and maintaining the cables.
3.10 Whenever the steel cable tray/ladder passing through a full height fire wall
or floor, approved fire stop putty and approved equal material shall be used
to seal the cavity of the cables and the air-gaps between wall or floor and
steel cable tray.
3.11 Fixings for the cable tray shall be disposed at regular intervals not
exceeding 1200 mm and at 50 mm from bends and intersections. Fixings
shall be fabricated from mild steel flat bar complying with BS 4360 and shall
be painted with two coats of primer and two coats of semi-glossy grey.
3.12 Where the cable tray is suspended, the installation shall not be subject to
any vertical and horizontal distortion. Suspension parts are to be purpose
made of suitable length when facilities incorporated for allowing
adjustments to be made to the height of the suspended tray. The Sub-
Contractor shall design the suspension system such that there is no
distortion to the cable tray after all the services are laid on it. The cost for
these works shall be deemed to be included in this Sub-Contract. Any
distortion found on site shall be replaced at the Sub-Contractor's expense.
3.13 All cable trays shall be mechanically and electrically continuous throughout.
3.14 Cable trays shall only cut along a line of plain metal not through the
preforations. All edges of galvanised cable tray shall be painted with two
layer of primer and two coats of approved zinc rich paint. Any scratched or
exposed parts of cable trays shall be painted with the zinc rich paint.
3.15 When welding had been employed in the fabrication of the tray and/or
accessories the area around the joint shall be mechanically prepared and
thereafter treated with zinc chromate primer or zinc rich paint according to
the original finish of the metal.
3.16 Holes cut in the cable tray for the passage of cable shall be provided with
grommets complying with BS 1767: 1999. Alternatively they shall be
bushed or lined.
3.17 The cable ladder shall be supported not more than 1200 mm interval by
approved hangers or brackets.
TS/22/4 2602542S/EL
3.18 All couplers, bends, riser, interconnection clamps and supporters and other
fittings shall be of manufacturer's standard products and shall be supported
such that it will carry the designated load.
3.19 Load test for the cable ladder shall be carried out on the complete system
in accordance to the manufacturer's recommendation.
TS/22/5 2602542S/EL
SECTION 23 - STEEL CABLE TRUNKING INSTALLATION
1. General
1.1 Cable trunking shall be supplied and installed complete with fittings and
accessories and shall be of an approved manufacture. It shall be
manufactured from best quality zinc- or lead-coated sheet steel finished
stove enamelled orange or other colours or galvanized and shall be of
minimum 1.20 mm thickness (18 SWG) for sizes up to and including 75 mm
x 75 mm section and 1.60 mm thickness (16 SWG) for sizes above. The
trunking shall comply with latest
a) Singapore Standard SS 249: Steel surface cable trunking and

accessories
b) Singapore Standard SS 638: Code of practice for electrical

installations
c) BS EN ISO 1461: Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and

steel articles. Specifications and test methods
d) AISI 304 / 316 / 316L: Stainless Steel
e) BS EN 10143: Continuously hot-dip coated steel sheet and strip
f) BS EN 10152: Electrolytically zinc coated cold rolled steel flat

products. Technical delivery conditions
1.2 Space factor for cables in trunking shall comply strictly with Singapore
Standard CP 638.
1.3 Trunkings shall be protected both inside and out by two coatings of
1.4 The manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 Quality Management

System in the design, manufacture and supply of the cable trunking system.
The product should be listed in Product Listing Scheme and tested to SS
249 or certified by internationally recognized test laboratories.
1.5 Unless otherwise stated, trunkings for lighting and power cables shall be
painted with primer and finished with two coats of "ORANGE" stove
enamel paint. Permanent labels shall be printed on the trunking.
TS/23/1 2602542S/EL
1.6 Trunkings for electrical fire alarm system cables shall be painted with a
primer and finished with two coats of "Red" stove enamel paint. Colours of
trunking for different services shall be 'ORANGE' for electrical, 'WHITE' for
Extra Low Voltage (ELV) System, Computer (Data) System, Master
Antenna Television (MATV) System, Telecommunications System, “BLUE”
for Public Address (PA) System, and “ GREY” for Lift System. All exposed
trunkings shall be of white colour or paint as to Architect requirement.
Where there is perforated or semi-exposed ceiling, all trunkings shall be
painted to Architect requirement.
1.7 Covers shall be held securely in position with self-tapping screws fixing or
approved fastening at suitable intervals to facilitate the drawing in or
removal of cables at any time.
1.8 Cable retainers shall be readily removable.
1.9 Steel trunking used in basement, outdoor, or other damp environment shall
be of weatherproof and galvanized construction with cold phosphate
pretreatment, chromate primer, and two coats of polyurethane finish.
1.10 Pin supports or insulating cleats at an interval of 5 metres shall be used for
non-sheathed cables in vertical trunking run.
1.11 Approved non-flammable heat barriers shall be installed not more than 3
metres apart in trunking, channel, or duct.
2. Accessories
2.1 Right angle bends, 45 degree angle bends, intersections, Tee joints,
Gusset bends, Gusset joints, Gusset Tees, Gusset intersections, end caps,
reducers, vertical offsets, horizontal offsets, end flanges and flanges
adapters, etc. shall be fabricated in factory and shall made of the same
materials and finished off with the colour as the colour as the adjoining
steel trunking.
2.2 All bends, tees, reducers, couplings, etc. shall be of standard pattern:
where it is necessary for a special fitting to be used, it is to be fabricated by
the manufacturers.
TS/23/2 2602542S/EL
3. Installation
3.1 The whole steel trunking system shall be installed to comply fully with of the
3.2 The trunking shall run parallel to each other and at right angle to building
lines with bends, tees, intersections, and flanges, end caps, reducers,
offsets, and flange adapters etc.
3.3 Approved threaded steel rod hangers and angle iron brackets painted with
two coats of approved anti-rust paint and finished with semi-glossy paint
shall be provided at an interval of not more than two (2) metres. Mounting
brackets to support trunking shall be secured with metal threaded studs No.
C14/250/60 complete with washer No. 20, two locks nuts using
"TORNADS" cartridge hammer or approved equivalent. The maximum
deflection of the suspended trunking must not exceed 12.5 mm when fully
loaded between suspension points five (5) metres apart. Where necessary,
vertical trunkings shall be provided with suspension units and thrust blocks.
3.4 An appropriate size copper link, brass bolts and nuts shall be provided at
each joint trunking to provide earth continuity.
3.5 Conduit entry to trunking shall be coupling and male bush.
3.6 The inner radius of any bend shall not be less than twice the minor
dimension of rectangular section trunking.
3.7 Each run of trunking shall be completed before the installation of cable.
3.8 Sufficient space shall be provided and maintained to permit adequate

access for installing and maintaining the cables.
3.9 Where it is necessary to provide additional trunking over fixings, these shall
be supplied by the manufacturer and shall be applied with the
manufacturer's tools.
3.10 Where holes or apertures are formed in the trunking for cable entry, they
shall be bushed with brass smoothbore entry bushes, or PVC grommet
strips. Cable supports are to be inserted in vertical runs of trunking and
cables are to be laced thereto in their respective groups.
3.11 Whenever the steel trunking passing through a full height fire wall or floor,
approved fire stop putty or approved equal material shall be used to seal
the cavity inside of the trunking and approved fire stop compound or
approved equal material to seal the air-gaps between wall or floor and
trunking.
3.12 Where more than one service is involved multi-compartment trunking shall
be employed to separate the services.
3.13 Trunking shall not run along the path of air-con diffuser.
TS/23/3 2602542S/EL
SECTION 24 - CONDUIT INSTALLATION (CONCEALED OR EXPOSED)
1. General
1.1 All metal conduits shall be of heavy-gauge galvanized screwed steel and
have minimum Class 4 protection against corrosion.
1.2 All fittings shall be of the screwed pattern, and no solid or inspection
elbows, tees or bends shall be installed. Generally, all conduit fittings shall
be galvanized by the hot process both inside and out and coated with
stove-enamelled orange or other approved finish inside and out. All conduit
fittings shall have Class 4 protection against corrosion.
1.3 All metal conduits and fitting shall comply to following standard:
b) IEC 60614-2-1: Specification for conduits for electrical installations.

Part 2: Particular specifications for conduits. Section One: Metal
conduits
c) IEC 61386-21: Conduit systems for cable management. Part 21:

Particular requirements - Rigid conduit systems
d) BS 4568-1: Specification for steel conduit and fittings with metric

threads of ISO form for electrical installations. Steel conduit, bends
and couplers
e) BS 4568-2: Specification for steel conduit and fittings with metric

threads of ISO form for electrical installations. Fittings and
components
f) BS 4662: Boxes for flush mounting of electrical accessories.

Requirements, test methods and dimensions
g) BS EN 50086-2-1: Specification for conduit systems for cable

management. Particular requirements Rigid conduit systems
h) Electricity (Electrical Installations) Regulations
1.4 Conduits shall be free from internal burrs, fins and the like that may cause
damage to cables.
1.5 All conduits shall be concealed inside slab, wall, partition and column
where there is no false ceiling and running below ceiling.
1.6 All rough edges shall be removed when the conduit is cut. When threaded
in the field, a tapered cutting die 18 mm per 300 mm taper) shall be used.
TS/24/1 2602542S/EL
1.7 Minimum size conduit shall be 25 mm diameter. Other sizes shall be as
indicated on the plans, or as required by Singapore Standard SS 638 for
number and size of conductors installed.
1.8 Pull wires shall be provided in telephone, AV and other low voltage
equipment conduits/points.
1.9 Space factor for cable in conduits must strictly conform to Singapore
Standard SS 638.
1.10 All PVC insulated cables, other than flexible, shall be protected throughout
their length with heavy-gauge screwed welded conduit (enamelled or
galvanized as required) with the necessary approved loop-in, draw-in, angle
and outlet boxes. No type of `elbow' or `tee' will be allowed on works under
this Specification.
1.11 Where adaptable boxes are used they shall be of cast iron or heavy-gauge
sheet steel of not less than 12 gauge.
1.12 Conduits for extra low voltage cable shall be galvanized with words "TEL"
for TELEPHONE, permanently printed onto the conduits to indicate the
different services. All conduits shall be painted as per colour scheme stated
in General Specification.
2. Accessories
2.1 All circular junction boxes, pull boxes, solid elbows and inspection elbows
are to be malleable iron type and of standard pattern with spout to British
Standard BS 4568: 1970.
2.2 Circular junction boxes, pull boxes and inspection elbows shall be provided
with gaskets and lids.
2.3 Bushing shall be used at the point where the conduit goes into a box, fitting,
or other enclosure.
2.4 All switch and socket outlet boxes shall be surface mounted galvanized
steel type complying with British Standard BS 4662:1970 with heavy
protection both inside and outside. They shall have earth terminals.
2.5 All lids for draw-in boxes, etc., whether of the BS or adaptable type shall be
of heavy cast-iron or 12 gauge sheet steel, and shall be fixed (overlapping
for flush work) by means of two or four 2BA round-headed brass screws.
TS/24/2 2602542S/EL
3. Installation
3.1 The whole conduit system shall be installed to comply fully with clauses in
3.2 The conduit shall be laid as far as possible in straight lines with easy sets
or bends. Bends or offset shall be made with standard conduit benders,
field bends made with an approved bender or hickey, hub-type conduit
fittings.
3.3 Prior permission shall be obtained from the S.O. for hacking and chasing on
reinforced concrete structures. Any unauthorized hacking and chasing shall
render the Sub-Contractor liable for penalty to be determined by S.O.
3.4 All conduit joints shall be cut square, threaded, reamed smoothly and
drawn uptight. Conduit shall be clean, tune and free from all obstructions
and painted with aluminum paint before being screwed into sockets and
boxes.
3.5 Conduit shall run parallel to each other and at right angles to building lines
and painted with semi-glossy paint to match the colour of the walls and
ceiling. Where the conduit is above the false ceiling, orange colour conduit
shall be used for L.V. installation.
3.6 Conduits shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and from outlets to
cabinets for switch gears, pull or function boxes, and shall be secured to all
boxes with locknuts and bushing in such a manner that each system shall
be electrically continuous throughout. Conduits' ends shall be capped to
prevent entrance of foreign materials during construction.
3.7 All conduit system shall be installed complete before conductor/cables are
pulled in. Conduits shall be supported at least every 3000 mm by approved
spacer bar type of saddles or flat hangers and firmly fasten within 150 mm
of each outlet, junction boxes, cabinet, or fittings, etc.
3.8 Conduits below false ceiling shall run vertically to each switch or socket
outlet box. No horizontal conduit work shall be allowed.
3.9 The allowable bending radius for conduit is 12 times the diameter of
conduit.
3.10 All conduits and fittings are to be painted on ground before installation to
walls and partitions.
3.11 No conduit installation work shall be allowed to run under the cement
screed except for areas using underfloor/flush floor trunking system.
3.12 A circular pull box shall be used to limit any pull to maximum 8000 mm. A
sum of conduit between circular pull boxes must not have more than two
90o bends.
TS/24/3 2602542S/EL
3.13 No conduit shall be installed with more than two right-angle bends without
draw-in boxes and draw-in boxes shall not be more than 8000 mm apart.
3.14 All conduits, except where otherwise specified, shall drop not rise to the
respective points. In no circumstances shall the conduit be erected in such
a manner as to form a U without outlet, or in any other way that would
provide a trap for condensed moisture.
3.15 Provision shall be made for draining all conduits or fixtures by a method
approved by the S.O.
3.16 Ceiling point boxes are to be of medium pattern malleable iron, with fixing
holes at 50 mm centres and conforming to SS Specification.
3.17 All conduit systems shall be installed complete before

conductors/cables are pulled in.
3.18 Galvanized spaced bar saddles shall be used for securing conduits on
surfaces other than in structural steel members for which an approved type
of clamp shall be devised. Spacing of saddles shall not exceed 1200mm
(ft.) for conduit sizes up to and including 25 mm and 1.8 m for sizes 32 mm
and above and within 1000 mm of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or
fitting, etc. Full saddle shall be used for all vertical run of conduit.
3.19 In addition, conduit fixing shall be located not less than 150 mm from each
surface box or switch and shall be one per conduit to each such box or
switch.
3.20 Connections between conduits and trunking and conduit and steel boxes,
or between conduit and steel cases of distribution gear or equipment, shall
be made by means of a flanged coupling and brass smooth-bore entry
bush. The lead washer shall be fitted on the inside of the trunking or box,
etc.
3.21 Conduits set through walls will not be permitted. When change of direction
is required after passing through a wall an appropriate back outlet box is to
be fitted.
3.22 All joints between lengths of conduit, or between conduit and fittings, etc.
are to be threaded home and butted.
3.23 Sets and bends are to be made without indentation, and the bore must be
full and free throughout. All screw-cutting oil must be carefully wiped off
before joining up.
3.24 Conduit runs, as far as possible, are to be symmetrical and equally spaced.
3.25 The Sub-Contractor shall take all precautions in situations likely to be damp
to see that all conduits and boxes in the vicinity are rendered watertight.
TS/24/4 2602542S/EL
3.26 During the progress of the work all exposed ends of conduits shall be fitted
with suitable plastic or metal plugs. Plugs of wood, paper and the like will
not be acceptable as sufficient protection.
3.27 All conduit fittings not carrying lighting or other fittings shall be supplied with
suitable cast-iron covers with round-head brass screws. Where flush
boxes are installed the covers shall be of the overlapping rustproof pattern.
3.28 All conduit boxes, including boxes on and in which fittings, switches and
socket outlets are mounted, shall be securely fixed to the walls and ceilings
by means of not less than two countersunk screws, correctly spaced, and
the fixing holes shall be countersunk, so that the screw heads do not
project into the box.
3.29 Lighting, power and any other types of circuit shall be run in separate
conduits and no circuit of any one system shall be installed in any conduit
or box of any other system.
3.30 Under no circumstances shall conduits from different distribution boards be

connected to any one junction box and likewise cables from different
distribution boards shall not be housed in the same conduit. The phase,
neutral and earth conductors of the same circuit or circuits shall in all cases
be drawn into the same conduit.
3.31 Where conduits are required to run across expansion joints, they shall be
provided with a short-length of approved liquid-tight, nonmetallic, and
sunlight-resistant PVC covered flexible metal conduit sufficient to allow for
a total movement of +50 mm.
3.32 Where conduits are run in wet or damp location, conduits, clips, saddles,
bolts and screws, etc., shall be corrosion resistant materials or protected
against corrosion by corrosion resistant materials as required by Singapore
Standard SS 638 and approved for that purpose by the S.O.
3.33 Flexible conduits shall be terminated with couplings and connectors

specially made for the purpose.
3.34 Short lengths of appropriate size of approved liquid-tight, nonmetallic, and

sunlight-resistant PVC covered flexible conduits shall be used for final
connections to motors, lighting fixtures, and other equipment subject to
movement or vibration (maximum of 300 mm for motors or other equipment
and 1500 mm for lighting fixtures). Earth continuity of all flexible conduits
shall be maintained by 4mm2 minimum copper conductors in addition to the
number of cores of the cables.
3.35 Whenever conduit passing through a full height fire wall or floor, approved
fire stop compound shall be used to seal the air-gaps between wall or floor
and conduit.
TS/24/5 2602542S/EL
SECTION 25 - FLOOR TRUNKING INSTALLATION FOR POWER, TELEPHONE
AND DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
1. Underfloor Trunking System
1.1 Power
a) All underfloor trunking shall be made from high impact uPVC and
shall comply with latest Singapore Standard SS 638 and BS 476
Part 5.
b) All underfloor conduits shall be made from super high impact

uPVC and shall comply with BS 6099.
c) Underfloor trunking and conduits shall be free from sharp edges

and objects which cause damage to cables.
d) Minimum size conduits shall be 25 mm diameter other sizes shall

be as indicated on the drawings, Singapore Standard SS 638 with
amendments for the number and size of conductors installed.
e) Space factor for cables in trunking and conduits must comply

strictly with Singapore Standard SS 638.
1.2 Accessories
a) All junction, outlet and vertical access boxes shall be rust free and
water-tight construction.
b) The junction box shall be fabricated from a set of uPVC moulded

sections on a steel base plate. They shall be retained in position
by plastic clips on the steel pillars which are threaded for devoting
screws. Earth terminals shall be pressed into the box base plate.
The uPVC module shall provide location for duct entry and also
for the tunnel separators. The various tray and frame assemblies
shall be retained on the box devoting screws with steel clips. The
uPVC duct entry sockets shall be of low tolerance fit to prevent
the egress of screed material into the duct box. The box shall
have internal height adjustment to allow up to 25 mm adjustment
to suit screed depth.
c) All concealed outlet boxes on the floor shall be fabricated from

sheet steel with spot welded corner angle pieces and segregation
plates. Steel pillars, threaded for earth terminals, shall be
pressed into the base pan.
d) The uPVC duct entry sockets shall be of low tolerance fit to

prevent the ingress of screed material into the duct or box. The
top unit shall be fitted with a reversible moulded cable protector,
lids with hinges and an adjustable segregator trim for carpet or
other floor finish. The lids shall be firmly locked with a ball and
spring clip. If the concealed outlet boxes are for power cable
clamp, cable protector clamp and BS switch-socket outlet shall be
used.
TS/25/1 2602542S/EL
e) All pedestal outlets boxes shall be manufactured from die-cast
aluminum with integral lugs screw threaded M 3.5 for location of
all BS switch-socket outlets to BS 4568 : Part 2 1970. Cadmium
plated earthing terminals shall be pressed into the body casting.
f) Accessories such as vertical access boxes, blanking piece, direct

outlets, jointing sleeves, duct adapters, fixing clips, socket
reducers and tunnel separators, necessary for the completion of
the underfloor duct system shall be included in this Sub-Contract.
1.3 Installation
a) All underfloor trunking and conduits shall be accurately aligned,

anchored on floor slabs at 1.5 metre intervals by approved type of
fixing clips prior to any screed being poured.
b) To prevent subsequent cracking, chicken wire mesh shall be used

along these runs as a reinforcing agent.
c) Vertical bends, conduit connecting sleeves, horizontal bends

jointing sleeves, direct outlets, vertical access boxes and end
flanges shall be provided if required due to site conditions.
d) All floors boxes shall be provided with a timber "throw away" lid to
prevent ingress of screed and dust during installation.
e) All floor boxes shall be levelled so that surface covers will be flush
with the finished floor covering.
f) All floor duct systems shall be installed complete before

conductors/cables are pulled in.
g) For telephone underfloor trunkings system, two draw-wires shall

be installed in all trunking and conduits for future requirements.
h) Type of covers (trays) for junction boxes shall be provided

according to the type of floor finishes specified by the S.O.
1.4 Load Test
a) A load test shall be carried out on the underfloor box and trunking.
b) The box shall be able to withstand a 3.35 kN load (18 cm X 7.9

cm indentor) with only 2 mm deflection.
c) The trunking shall be able to withstand minimum 150 kN load

(screed with wire mesh).
TS/25/2 2602542S/EL
2. Flushfloor Trunking System
2.1 General
a) The flushfloor trunking shall comprise accessible single, double or

triple compartment rectangular steel trunkings, multi-way junction
boxes complete with flyover, vertical access boxes, pedestal
outlet boxes, couplers, levelling brackets, end cap, fixing brackets
and all other accessories for the telephone and data
communication system.
b) The trunking, junction boxes, vertical access boxes etc. shall be

constructed from pre-galvanised sheet steel to BS EN
10142:1991, BS 2989:1991 and BS 4678 Class 3. The thickness
of the trunking body, compartment separators, flanges, junction
boxes, vertical access boxes etc. shall not be less than 1.6 mm
while all covers shall be not less than 2.5 mm thick.
c) The trunking covers shall be of modular design in equal sections

to facilitate installation and subsequent removal and
interchangeatility of covers. The entire length of the trunking and
junction boxes shall accessible for maintenance.
d) Each modular cover shall be provided with four number of rust

resistant quick release fastener clamps made from zinc alloy die
cast material. The clamps shall be tightened by stainless steel
screws. Spring pressure clamps shall not be allowed.
2.2 Accessories
a) The system shall be designed for routing of power, telephone and

data communication cables in three separate compartment with
suitable flyover.
b) Separator shall be provided at junction box to ensure proper

segregation of different types of cables when crossing at different
directions.
c) Tap-off for any three services shall be made possible at any point
along the trunking by drilling into the cover and installation of a
pedestal outlet box.
d) Suitable extruded PVC gaskets shall be provided for the entire

lengths of the trunkings, junction boxes and vertical access boxes.
e) Pedestal outlet boxes shall be manufactured from high pressure

zinc alloy die-cast material fitted when an earth stud. It shall be
protected by a layer of high temperature oven baked epoxy
powder coating.
TS/25/3 2602542S/EL
f) Floor outlet box shall be used for housing the switched socket outlet,
data and communication outlet as shown in the tender drawings. The
outlet box shall be supplied with a textured, easy to clean frame and
the lid shall be available in grey colour. The frame with lid shall be
suitable for used in carpet or vinyl tile (7 mm thickness) environment
and to be self adjustable to the floor finishes. All outlet boxes shall
have adjustable mounting bracket for mounting below or above the
floor panel. Coloured trim shall be provided to match the floor
finishes.
2.3 Installation
a) The structural floor slab on which the flushfloor are to be laid shall
be clean and level by the Sub-Contractor. Humps and unlevel
structural floor shall be hacked to ensure accurate levelling of the
system.
b) A layer of wet screed shall be laid on the structural floor slab by

the Contractor.
c) The straight feeder trunking with the junction shall be laid first and
following by the distribution trunking. All fixing brackets are to be
fastened on the exterior of the trunking and the covers shall not
be removed until later stage.
d) After the trunking and junction box have been set in position and
levelled, they shall be securely fastened to the structural floor by
the means of using the floor fixing brackets. The fixing method
shall be submitted to S.O. for approval before proceed works.
e) All joints shall be sealed with metal-to-metal sealant to prevent

screed seepage into the system. All trunking and junction boxes
shall be protected by an adhesive based PVC film or other type of
approved material to prevent the trunking and boxes being stained
by the wet cement before screeding.
f) The entire flushfloor trunking network at every floor shall be

electrically continuous. Suitable earthing arrangement shall be
made at all parts for the installation of earthing cables/earthing
link. Standard coupling device shall be used.
g) Immediately after the screed is thoroughly cured, an inspection

and cleaning shall be carried out to ensure the system is cleaned
and dry. All covers shall be opening up for inspection. Cold
galvanised touch-up paint shall be used if rusting occurs.
h) Before laying cables, locations of the service outlets boxes shall

be marked to ensure extra lead of cables provided for termination
used. All covers shall be precisely aligned and tightened to
prevent transmission of noise and ingress of dirt.
TS/25/4 2602542S/EL
2.4 Load test
a) A load test shall be carried out on the flushfloor junction box and
trunking.
b) The box and trunking shall be able to withstand a 9 kN load (18

cm X 7.9 cm indentor) with only 2 mm deflection.
3. Raisefloor Trunking System
3.1 General
a) The raisefloor trunking shall comprise accessible single, double or

triple compartment rectangular steel trunkings, multi-way junction
boxes complete with flyover, vertical access boxes, floor outlet
boxes, couplers, levelling brackets, end cap, fixing brackets and
all other accessories for the telephone and data communication
system. All floor trunking shall be raised by minimum 25 mm using
elevated trunking coupler.
b) The trunking, junction boxes, vertical access boxes etc. shall be

constructed from pre-galvanised sheet steel to BS EN
10142:1991, BS 2989:1991 and BS 4678 Class 3. The thickness
of the trunking body, compartment separators, flanges, junction
boxes, vertical access boxes etc. shall not be less than 1.6 mm
while all covers shall be not less than 2.5 mm thick.
c) The trunking covers shall be of modular design in equal sections

to facilitate installation and subsequent removal and
interchangeatility of covers. The entire length of the trunking and
junction boxes shall accessible for maintenance.
d) Each modular cover shall be provided with four number of rust

resistant quick release fastener clamps made from zinc alloy die
cast material. The clamps shall be tightened by stainless steel
screws. Spring pressure clamps shall not be allowed.
3.2 Accessories
a) The system shall be designed for routing of power, telephone and

data communication cables in three separate compartment with
suitable flyover.
b) Separator shall be provided at junction box to ensure proper

segregation of different types of cables when crossing at different
directions.
c) Tap-off for any three services shall be made possible at any point
along the trunking by drilling into the cover or using purposed
made tap-off unit for installation of floor outlet box.
TS/25/5 2602542S/EL
d) Floor outlet box shall be used for housing the switched socket
outlet, data and communication outlet as shown in the tender
drawings. The outlet box shall be supplied with a textured, easy to
clean frame and the lid shall be available in grey colour. The
frame with lid shall be suitable for used in carpet or vinyl tile (7
mm thickness) environment and to be self adjustable to the floor
finishes. All outlet boxes shall have adjustable mounting bracket
for mounting below or above the floor panel. Coloured trim shall
be provided to match the floor finishes.
3.3 Installation
a) The Sub-Contractor shall co-ordinate with the S.O. for the

positioning of junction boxes on the raisefloor. The final position
shall be submitted to S.O. for approval.
b) The entire raisefloor trunking network at every floor shall be

electrically continuous. Suitable earthing arrangement shall be
made at all parts for the installation of earthing cables/earthing
link. Standard coupling device shall be used.
c) Before laying cables, locations of the service outlets boxes shall

be marked to ensure extra lead of cables provided for termination
used.
d) A load test shall be carried out on the raised floor junction box and
trunking. The box and trunking shall be able to withstand a 9 kN load
(18 cm X 7.9 cm indentor) with only 2 mm deflection
e) The cutting of raisefloor to suit the junction box shall be carried

out under this Sub-Contract.
f) Whenever the steel trunking passing through a full height fire wall
or floor, approved fire stop putty or approved equal material shall
be used to seal the cavity inside of the trunking and approved fire
stop compound or approved equal material to seal the air-gaps
between wall or floor and trunking
TS/25/6 2602542S/EL
SECTION 26 - EARTHING
1. General
1.1 The Sub-Contractor shall supply, install, test and commission the following:
a) Earth bar and cabling connected to earth mass together with

earthing electrodes.
b) Earthing for the entire electrical System.
c) Separate sets of main earthing systems complete with earthing

electrodes, earthing cables, main earthing bar and other
accessories for the complete earthing installation for the following
system:
1) High Tension System
2) Low Tension System
3) Generator System
4) Audio and Visual system
5) Telecommunication systems
6) Computer Systems
7) Data Centre
8) Server Room
9) Clean Room
10) Equipments.
d) Other main earthing system as shown in the drawings.
e) All earthing bars provided in this Sub-Contract shall have an

additional of 2 nos. of spare termination points in excess to all the
other terminations provided for.
1.2 The entire earthing installation shall fully comply with all relevant clauses of
the latest edition of Singapore Standard SS 638: code of practice for
electrical installations and Singapore Standard SS551: code of practice for
earthing.
1.3 The earth continuity conductor shall be of high - conductivity copper

continuous throughout its length and without joints except by approved
mechanical clamps.
TS/26/1 2602542S/EL
1.4 The metal parts of all switch gears, switches, metal boxes, switch-socket
outlets, isolators, metal trunking, lighting luminaries, metal conductors and
all metal work liable to become alive in the event of failure of insulation and
the earth connection of all electrical fittings and appliances shall be
effectively earthed by means of earth continuity conductor of adequate size.
1.5 The earth continuity conductor shall be of high - conductivity copper

continuous throughout its length and without joints except by approved
mechanical clamps or approved PVC (GREEN/YELLOW) insulated copper
cables.
1.6 If earth plate is employed, the Sub-Contractor shall arrange with the EMA.
to inspect the installation before covering with earth.
1.7 All earth conductors shall be protected by concrete slabs of 200 mm (W) x
600 mm (L) x 50 mm (T).
2. Earth Connections
2.1 The earth continuity conductor from all exposed metal parts of equipment
required to be earthed including earth connections to plug sockets shall be
connected by one of the following appropriate methods unless otherwise
stated :-
a) To earth connection at the distribution board supplying the

equipment or plug socket.
b) To any point on the sub-main or main earth continuity conductor

supply the relevant distribution board.
c) To residual current circuit breaker installed in accordance with

EMA's requirement.
3. Main Earth Continuity Conductor
The main earth continuity conductor from switchboard to earth electrode shall be
installed as directly as possible without looping into any accessory or equipment.
4. Earthing Electrodes
4.1 Earthing electrodes shall comprise one or more hard-drawn copper rod of
minimum diameter of 16 mm. The length of the electrodes/rods shall be
made up from standard 1200 mm or 1800 mm lengths with internal screw
and socket joints. The electrodes/rods shall be driven into the ground to a
depth of at least 3650 mm regardless of the size and numbers used. In any
circumstance, it shall be sized that it can be driven into the soil without of
deforming the rod/electrode.
4.2 Earth electrodes shall be driven into the ground at a distance of at least
1000 mm away from the building line and by means of mechanical
hammers employing driving heads.
TS/26/2 2602542S/EL
4.3 The distance between any two driven electrodes shall be at least twice that
driven length. If the earthing resistance due to one electrode is insufficient
for the required purpose additional electrodes shall be driven into the
ground and connected to the original electrode until a sufficiently low value
of earth resistance to meet specified requirements is achieved.
4.4 Each earth electrode shall be located as instructed by the S.O. and be
provided with a concrete pit with substantial removal lib to enable access to
the connection between earthing electrode and earth continuity conductor
to be obtained. The earth continuity conductor shall be clamped to the
earth electrode by an approved method that shall enable the connection to
be broken and to be remade as often as may be necessary.
5. Main Earth Resistance
The resistance of the main earth electrode/s to the general mass of the earth,
except where earth leakage circuit breakers are installed in the circuits, shall be
low enough to permit the conducting current to earth of the value not less than
those specified in the latest edition of Singapore Standard SS551 standards or
latest.
6. Earth Electrodes
Each earth electrode shall be located as instructed by the Superintending Officer

and be provided with a concrete pit with substantial removal lid to enable access to
the connection between earthing electrode and earth continuity conductor to be
obtained. The earth continuity conductor shall be clamped to the earth electrode by
an approved method that shall enable the connection to be broken and to be
remade as often as may be necessary. The clamping method shall function so that
the earth continuity is maintained when any one of the electrodes is disconnected
for testings.
7. Earth Plate -- Solid Type
Solid earth plate shall be made of high continuity copper of dimension 900 mm x
900 mm x 3 mm.
8. Earth Plate -- Lattice type
Lattice type of earth plate shall be made of ten (10) no. hard drawn high
conductivity tinned, rectangular copper bars of 900 mm x 25 mm x 3 mm bolted
together by 5 mm diameter bolts and nuts to form a dimension of minimum size of
900 mm x 900 mm. The distance between bars shall not be more than 100 mm.
TS/26/3 2602542S/EL
9. Earth Continuity Conductor Resistance
The electrical resistance of earth continuity conductor and earthing lead measured
from the connection with the main electrode to any other position in the complete
installation in the building shall not exceed 1 ohm.
10. Inspection Pit
10.1 A precast concrete inspection pit shall be provided for each earth electrode.
The precast concrete cover shall be fixed flush to ground level over a
concrete inspection hole 200 mm x 200 x 250 mm deep. The cost of which
shall be included in the Tender Sum.
10.2 For inspection pit on the car park or road, suitable approved cast iron
inspection pit and cover shall be used.
10.3 All the inspection pit shall be filled with approved fine grade of sand at the
end of the testing and commissioning of the system.
10.4 All inspection pit shall properly label with type of earth pit, date of test, ohm
of the point, pit number and the total ohm achieved by the system. Label
shall installed at the internal of the pit for car park, road and concrete area
11. Label
The end of each earthing lead inside the concrete inspection hole shall be labelled
with 4.75 mm lettering "SAFETY ELECTRICAL EARTH DO NOT REMOVE"
stamped into an aluminum plate.
12. Size and Type of Copper Earth Conductor
12.1 The size of copper earth conductor shall conform to Table 1 of Singapore
Standard SS551: 2009. But, the minimum size of 25 mm x 3 mm copper
tape or 70 mm2 green PVC insulated copper cable shall be used.
12.2 Earthing cables from main earth bar to earth electrodes; H.V. switchgear
frames; L.V. switchgear frames, transformers frames and transformer
neutrals etc. shall be individually connected from individual equipment to
main earth bar.
12.3 Each earth conductor shall be clearly labelled.
12.4 Green/Yellow PVC insulated cables shall be used for substation earth
electrodes and transformer neutral.
12.5 Earth tape used for EMI cage shall be of green PVC insulated copper tape.
12.6 Earth cable used for EMI earth bonding shall be of green PVC insulated
copper cable encased in GI conduit.
TS/26/4 2602542S/EL
13. Main Earth Bar
13.1 Main earth bar shall be made of high conductivity hard-drawn copper bar of
minimum cross-section area 300 mm2 (6 mm thick x 50 mm width) unless
otherwise stated.
13.2 The actual location of main earth bar shall be decided by the
Superintending Officer on site.
13.3 The minimum length of the main earth bar shall 500 mm. The main earth
bar shall be bolted onto the wall by means of minimum four nos. of
approved 2700V epoxy insulators. Additional nos. of insulators shall be
used for additional length of 200 mm.
13.4 Two numbers of earth cables/tapes shall only be allowed to terminate to

each terminal.
14. Installation of Earth Plate or Electrode
14.1 A layer of 150 mm depth coke shall be filled in the pit before and after the
installation of earth plate.
14.2 Earth corner of every earth plate shall have one no. of copper earth tape of
minimum size of 25 mm x 3 mm bolted with minimum two (2) braze bolts
and nuts onto the plate. The other end of the tape shall be clamped to the
exposed end of solid copper earth rods of 3650 mm x 16 mm diameter
which shall be placed at four corners of the earth plates.
14.3 Each exposed end of the earth rods shall be housed in a pre-cast concrete
inspection pit complete with cover.
14.4 If the inspection pit is located on the car park or road, suitable approved
cast iron inspection pit and cover shall be used.
14.5 Approved type of connector clamps for connecting copper tape to earth rod
and connecting cable sockets for PVC insulated copper cable to earth rod
shall be used. Only one number of earth cable or copper tape shall be
allowed in each conductor clamp made to the earth electrode rod.
14.6 Non-water soluble, non-toxic, non-petrol based polymer grease or oxide

inhibiting compound or approved equal compound that seals electrical
connections from oxidation shall be applied to all joints and connections.
14.7 All cable connection shall have tinned copper socket to prevent corrosion
and oxidation.
14.8 All the end of copper tape shall be tinned.
TS/26/5 2602542S/EL
SECTION 28 - SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD)
1. General
1.1 This section of the specification covers the supply, installation and the testing
for the surge protective devices and is to read in conjunction with the
drawings.
1.2 The system shall be installed according to the following standards. Where the
Publications are referenced throughout this specification and shall apply when
relevant.
a) UL 1449 Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.
b) ANS/IEEE C62.41 Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-

Voltage AC Power Circuits.
c) ANS/IEEE C62.33 Standard Test Specifications for Varistor Surge

Protective Devices.
d) ANS/IEEE C62.45 IEE Guide on Surge testing for Equipment

connected to Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
e) IEC 61000-4-5 Surge Immunity Requirements.
f) Singapore standard SS553 Code of Practice for Protection against

lightning part 4 Electrical and electronic systems within structures
g) IEC 60364-4-44 Low-voltage electrical installations: Protection for

safety – Protection against voltage disturbances and electromagnetic
disturbances
h) IEC 61643-11 Surge protective devices connected to low-voltage

power systems – Requirements and test methods
i) IEC 61643-12 Surge protective devices connected to low-voltage

power distribution systems – Selection and application principles
j) IEC 62305-4 Protection against lightning: Electrical and electronic

systems within structures
1.3 All components shall be from the same manufacturer to ensure that system
performance is fully coordinated.
1.4 Surge Protective devices (SPD’s) shall be installed at each main switchboard
and at distribution switchboard supplying critical equipment (computers, PLC’s
etc) and original devices as indicated in the drawings.
TS/28/1 2602542S/EL
2. Main Switchboard Surge Protective Devices
The minimum acceptable requirements for a main switchboard SPD are as follows:-
2.1 The maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV) of the SPD must be 25%
above nominal system voltage. For example, for use on a 240V AC (phase-
neutral) system, the SPD’s rated MCOV must exceed 300V AC.
2.2 The maximum single withstand surge current, per phase of the SPD, is to be a
minimum of 140kA (8µs rise time and 20 µs delay time to half peak amplitude),
including all fusing and overcurrent protection. The failure of any fusing
mechanism under this high current condition is not permissible.
2.3 The complete SPD must be UL listed to UL 1449 or equivalent for 230/400V
AC (phase-neutral) systems, the rated suppression voltage for the complete
SPD is to be 800V or less.
2.4 The SPD must be modular in design. Surge protection circuitry, fusing
mechanisms and diagnostics are to be housed in a replaceable module.
Discrete modules are to be employed for each phase. Each surge protection
component within a module is to be individually protected by thermal and short
circuit fusing mechanisms that disconnect should a fault occur.
2.5 The SPD must include full diagnostics, electrical (LEDs) and mechanical (a
flag visible through a window) status indicators must be presented at the
module level. Remote status indication is to be available through dry (or
voltage free) contacts which can be connected to a PLC/Building Automatic
System.
2.6 All surge carrying connections within the SPD are to be heavy duty bolted
connections. Wires less than 8/AWG (10mm²) or friction contacts for
replaceable modules are not to be used.
3. Distribution Switchboard Surge Protective Devices
3.1 The SPD’s shall be : listed to UL1449 or equivalent, having a maximum

continuous operating voltage greater than 15% or 25% above nominal system
voltage, have a maximum single withstand surge current of 25kA, or higher,
per phase and have a UL suppression voltage of 800V or less for 240V AC
systems. Status indication shall be provided on the unit to shoe operational
readiness.
3.2 Performance of these surge protective devices shall be coordinated with the
main switchboard SPD such that 95% of incoming surge current is diverted by
the main switchboard.
TS/28/2 2602542S/EL
4. Surge Protective Devices For Data-Communication Lines
SPD’s for data lines shall : have a maximum surge capacity of 10kA per line, less than
3dB signal attenuation at 5 times the maximum data bit (or baud)rate, have a let-
through voltage appropriate for the susceptibility of the interface and a maximum
continuous operating voltage 25% above the peak signal voltage.
5. Protection Mode for SPD
The SPD shall be installed to protect the line-ground (L-G), line-netural (L-N) and
Netural-ground (N-G).
Warning indication shall be provided for high neutral to ground voltage to be able for
identification any potential wiring faults conditions which exist within the facility.
6. Test
6.1 All test result from relevant testing authorities shall be submitted for approval.
6.2 All tests shall be carried out according the approved standard and to the
satisfaction of the superintending officer.
7. Label
All labels shall be clearly shown at the side of the devices.
TS/28/3 2602542S/EL
SECTION 29 – SMART CARD ACCESS WITH COMPUTER AND SOFTWARE
SECURITY SYSTEM
Section A : Card Access system
1. System Overview
1.1 The system shall be a fully integrated Computer-Based Security

Monitoring and Access Control System. It shall be a multi-tier
distributed intelligent system with the latest state of the art
microprocessor technology incorporated at every level.
1.2 The computers/microprocessors shall be capable of functioning in

stand alone mode or communicating with computers in the hierarchy
above and below. The lower level controllers shall take the control
when higher level computer is down or not reachable and shall serve
the system in degraded mode.
1.3 The users interface with the computer system shall be via the user
level. The users shall interact with the computer via the keyboard or
mouse. Field information gathered by the computer system shall be
transformed into human readable form and shall be presented via
intuitive summery windows and graphic floor plans dynamically in real
time, for ease of monitoring and control. Printers and disk drives shall
serve as a logging device, where data can be retrieved and processed
in a later time.
1.4 The scope of work to be covered in this section shall include the
supply, delivery, install, test and commission and the final handover of
the Security Card Access system.
1.5 The works covered in this section is considered as specialist work; the
Tenderer shall seek competent specialist in this field to prepare
submission of the works as part of the overall tender submission.
1.6 The system shall provide facilities to configure, edit, review and
implement security SOPs, such as time-based schedule, event-based
schedule and situation based program triggering schemes.
1.7 The system shall reserve flexible interfaces to integrate with 3rd party
systems whenever required, and shall cater expansion capability
without having to change entire system structure.
TS/29/1 2602542S/EL
2. Equipment Description
2.1 Supervisory Centre
a) The Supervisory Centre (SC) shall operate on a high speed

data network with maximum data throughput of 1Gbps. The
SC network shall use industry standard Ethernet,
communication network. Windowing software package shall
be implemented in the supervisory centre to ensure
instantaneous response to operator's input especially for the
display of dynamic graphics. Also, this shall allow for the
simultaneous viewing of text messages and associated
graphics.
b) The SC software shall be developed using latest .Net
technology, shall adopt WCF (Windows Communication
Foundation) as the means of communication among all nodes
and WPF (Windows Presentation Foundation) as the key
component of Windows UI design.
c) The Sub-Contractor shall design the software system based on
Window application and shall release/work together with other
Sub-Contractors for the integration of the Security System with
other Computer System.
d) The supervisory centre shall be located at the card Reader

Controller Room. The proposed security card access system
shall support the overall NUS security card access system.
The supervisory centre shall be able to retrieve and send all
kind of information from/to the NUS, Computer Centre.
e) The proposed smart card reader must be able to read the

existing or new proximity card system issued by the NUS
computer centre, at same time, the reader must be able to
read the CAN of CEPAS 2.0 compatible cards including EZ-
Link, NETS Combi Cashcard, NETS FlashPay card and LTA
Concession Card.
f) The Supervisory Centre shall be a desktop computer with the

following configuration:
1) Processor: Intel® Core™ i3-550 Processor (

3.20GHz 1333MHz 4MB )
2) Operating System: Windows 7 Professional 32 bit
3) System Graphics: Intel Graphics Media Accelerator

HD
4) Total Memory: 4 GB DDR3 SDRAM 1333MHz
5) Hard Drive Device: 500GB
TS/29/2 2602542S/EL
6) Form Factor: Small Form Factor
7) Point Device: USB pointing device optical
8) Slots: PCI-e x 16 slot, PCI-e x 1 slot,

PCI slot
9) Network Device: Intel® 82579, 10M/100M/1000M

Gigabit, Ethernet
10) DVD/CD Drive: DVD-ROM, DVD Recordable
2.2 Card Reader Controller (CRC)
a) The CRC shall be a 32-bit ARM microprocessor and Linux

based device with sufficient memory to be standalone and
carry out decisions making and logging of transactions relating
to access control of 2 Card Access Units (CAU). The following
devices shall be connected directly to the CRC :
1) Door contacts x 4 nos
2) Door strikes x 4 nos
3) Door Strikes Auxiliary Output x 4
4) Card Access Units x 4 nos or 8 nos with exit door
5) push button or Passive Infra Red Detector for Free

Egress Control x 4 nos
b) The CRC shall be able to support a wide range of readers

inclusive of Wiegand-based, magnetic stripe, proximity,
pincode keypad, smart card and proximity smart card. Each
CRC shall comprise of 3 cards housed in a card cage namely
the CPU card, Input/Output Adaptor and CAU Interface. The
system shall be easily upgraded to support the different type of
CAU just by changing the CAU interface. The CAU shall be
able to buffer up to 100,000 transactions, even if the S.C. is
not communicating with the CRC.
c) Each CRC shall have the capacity to locally store at least
200,000 whitelist users, and 100,000 blacklist users. With total
number of users increased, searching speed shall not be
compromised.
d) The CRC shall have direct TCP/IP network interface that
supports 100Mbps Ethernet communication with backend
system.
TS/29/3 2602542S/EL
e) The CRC firmware shall be remotely upgradable for fast
deployment of new firmware via network, without having to
physically access controller on site. Through CRC, reader
firmware also must be remotely upgradable for quick
deployment of business logic change, reading technology
change etc.
f) The CRC shall be able to generate the following type of

messages:
1) Legal access by xxxx
2) Legal access by xxxx, open Fail
3) Legal access by xxxx, close Fail
4) Door Fail
5) Door lock command, door open alarm
6) Recover from alarm
7) Break in
8) Duress Alarm
9) Legal exit (Free egress)
10) Legal exit, close Fail (Free egress)
11) Legal exit, open Fail (Free egress)
12) Antipass back alarm
TS/29/4 2602542S/EL
3. Basic Design and Operational Requirements
3.1 Presentation of Information
In fulfilling the basic functions of monitoring, controlling and

supervising, the System shall provide fast, relevant, accurate and
unambiguous reports on alarm conditions, changes-of-states, status
and exceeding of set limit of all connected systems.
System shall provide a live message window to display incoming

event messages in tabulate form. The message window shall cater
different filters to allow operator filter out messages that operator does
not want to see, and cater custom query functions for operator to
search specific historical records according to different criteria.
System should provide a powerful report generation module for the

operators to generate reports base on pre-defined reports templates
or customized user defined templates, and reports can be easily
exported to PDF, MS-Word and Excel format for further processing.
3.2 Operator Interaction
a) The System shall allow simple and short operator input for
quick and error free man-machine communication.
b) Commonly used instructions shall be made available in the

form of function keys and shortcuts reduce to input time and
input errors.
c) Shortcut buttons can be placed onto floor plan to quick launch
of a series of command actions.
d) An intuitive graphic viewer shall be provided. Graphic viewer or
floor plan viewer shall allow operator to open up multiple floor
plan drawings at same time, and shall be smoothly zoomable.
Each floor plan shall be able to support minimum 100 points
displaying animation icons.
3.3 Response Time
a) The probability of the occurrence of a critical or non-critical

alarm or signal effects the system response time. The System
shall be designed to meet the following maximum response
times with a confidence interval of 95 percent:-
1) critical points - Binary : 2.00 + 0.15 seconds
2) non-critical points - Binary : 3.00 + 0.15 seconds
TS/29/5 2602542S/EL
b) Calculation of the estimated total response times within the
constraints of the system hardware and software shall be
submitted with the tender for various combinations of critical
and non-critical, binary and analog points being processed by
the main computer.
c) Extensive statistical data at the testing and commissioning

stage shall be precisely measured and recorded to verify the
calculations and confidence interval required.
d) The Tenderer shall submit with the tender submission a

proposed sampling plan to verify the above requirement.
Statistical results shall serve as a basis for meeting
performance requirement and project completion.
e) Response time shall be defined as the longest time interval of

the following:
1) time interval between the occurrence of an event

(change-of-status or limit exceeded) in the connected
systems and the commencement of an uninterrupted
report of the event on a man-machine interface device;
or
2) time interval between the EXECUTE command by the

operator and the commencement of execution of the
command, or
3) time interval between the occurrence of an event and

the commencement of pre programmed sequence of
actions such as Event Response program, special
reports, trend activation etc.
f) The System shall allow operators to reassign any connected

point to be either critical or non-critical. There shall be no limit
to the number of critical alarm points.
TS/29/6 2602542S/EL
SECTION B - SYSTEM FUNCTIONS FOR SECURITY CARD ACCESS SYSTEM
1. Supervisory Centre
1.1 Man Machine Interface
a) The Supervisory Centre shall be designed and configured for

simple, easy and unambiguous communication between the
operators and the System at the man-machine interfaces. The
input/output program shall be structured in a simple, logical
manner which will allow the operators to input instructions,
recognise and comprehend outputs, and displays without
difficulty and ambiguity having to refer to the operation
manuals.
b) Operation and programming work shall be performed in an on-

line conversational mode, with interrogative and informative
advisory messages. The System shall accept the shortest
possible input from the operator, and shall report in full for
easy and unambiguous interpretation by the operator.
c) The System input/output and other program shall be

designed to be modular, and shall enable quick changes in
peripherals assignment without any major or involved
reprogramming by the operator.
d) Input/Output format shall be simple and unambiguous to allow

quick communication between the operator and the System.
Output shall be organised in a logical, orderly and neat
manner.
e) All messages generated for output on the general purpose

printer shall include the following minimum information:
1) Descriptor to identify whether message is critical alarm

or normal.
2) Descriptor to identify the origin and the type of

message (e.g. system, field, operator, event program,
time program, etc).
3) Time tag in Hours: Minutes: Seconds format.
4) Date
f) Specific information, depending on the type of messages, shall

also be included in the output.
TS/29/7 2602542S/EL
g) Field messages (Change-of status, alarm, limit violation)
- Custom defined name of the device point
- Text description of the device point
- Type of device point (e.g. LSDI-Line Supervised Digital

Input, DOR - Digital Output Relay, FDPP - Full
Definition Pseudo Point, CAU- Card Access Unit etc.)
- Status (e.g. ON, OFF, Unlock, locked etc)
h) Program initiated messages
- Origin (e.g. Name and state if single point is event

initiated ERP)
- Result (action number initiated)
i) The last twenty messages received and/or generated by the

System shall always be updated and display on the System
Controller Message Page. By right-clicking on a reader icon,
system shall provide a menu item to show last 5 transactions
as who and when access the reader and their respective state.
Colour coding of messages shall be provided. Generally, all
unacknowledged alarm messages shall be in red, messages
acknowledged shall be in purple and normal change of status
messages in black.
j) Once a message has been acknowledged, the location where
the message is acknowledged and the name of operator who
committed acknowledges shall appear at the same line of the
message.
k) If the origin device of the message is associated with a CCTV
device such as a camera, a camera icon shall be appeared at
the same line of message for the operator to check recorded
historical video clip and live view.
l) If the message is related to card holder, by double-click on the
message the card holer's photo and detail particulars shall be
pop up.
m) Function keys, to generate used instructions in place of keying

in alpha numerics, shall be provided on the System Controller
keyboard. The function keys shall be grouped in a logical and
convenient manner to allow easy recognition and usage.
Separate function keys shall comprise, but do not

necessary limited to the following operational functions.
F1 Dialogue help key.
F2 Enables a window for choice list
TS/29/8 2602542S/EL
F3 Key help at the level 0 and level 1 dialogue
F4 Off speaker in the Message Page dialogue

Acknowledge panel test in Acknowledgement Message
Page with exception of in the Command Sequence
dialogue where F3 is used to delete an action record
and F4 is used to insert an action.
F5 Acknowledge all messages in alarm message page
F10 Save and exit
ESC Escapes to previous menu without saving
SHIFT-F10 Shut down
1.2 System Access
a) Although the prime feature of the Supervisory Centre is the

ease of usage, system access security shall not be
compromised. The system shall be protected from
unauthorised access or illegal operation by a password access
control. Operations shall be required to enter a unique
operator name and password to enter the Supervisory Centre
Dialogue Page. The operator can alter his own password at
any time but the access priority or authorisation level shall be
controlled by the system manager.
b) Authorisation levels shall be assigned to various operators to

determine the authorisation to access and execute different
types of system utilities or the authorisation to access to
different equipment. These two categories of authorisation
shall allow the flexibility to assign different passwords to
various departments of the organisation and further
segregating the various grades of staffs. As such, this will
restrict operator from switching equipment not within their
purview.
c) An additional security feature shall be the automatic logout

function. An auto-logout time interval (5 minutes) can be
defined during the system installation. If there is no response
from a logon user, system shall be automatically logged out to
prevent unauthorised personnel from meddling with the
system. Upon log-out, either manual or auto, the alarm and
status messages shall continue to be displayed on the system
controller.
TS/29/9 2602542S/EL
1.3 Definition
a) The Supervisory Centre shall provide the utilities for definition

of device point such as door contacts or motion detectors,
definition of card users, command sequence, time program
and other control programs.
b) The definition of device point shall be on-line and the

Supervisory Centre shall check for the validity of the definition
based on the actual hardware installed in the card reader
unit/controller.
c) The definition/configuration of device points user-friendly and
intuitive, mostly by drag & drop, tick & untick. To define a
similar device point, system shall provide copy & paste
function so that operators do not have to repeatedly type the
settings again.
1.4 Device Name
a) The Supervisory Centre shall have a clear, logical and concise

system of addressing to associate and identify device name
(name of connected device point) with physical address
(technical address) of digital, analog, control, calculated or
pseudo points.
b) Each device point shall be identified by a 12-character
(alphanumeric) device name. Point identification or memonic
address system will not be accepted. The addressing system
shall enable easy recall of device points by the operator
without frequently having to refer to operation manuals.
c) When defining a device point, internal addressing number
(also known as technical address) shall be automatically
generated, and shall not require operator to remember or key
in.
d) The System shall allow authorised operators to modify user

addresses and their attributes, and add or delete user
addresses by simple keyboard operations. Attributes
assignable to each user address shall include, but not limited,
to the following:
1) At least 32 characters used as standard text to provide

clear description of device point.
2) Device properties that are native to the type
3) The type of device point (eg digital input, single digital

output with or without feedback, card access unit etc.).
TS/29/10 2602542S/EL
4) Access code to restrict unauthorised operators from
changing of limits or switching of equipment (ie read
access only) according to the respective discipline and
seniority of operators.
5) Device group which the device belongs to.
e) The System shall also allow operators to define digital points to

be status or alarm points. This definition shall determine the
status test to be displayed. Normal status points shall be
reported as ON/OFF, while alarm points shall be reported as
CRITICAL/ALARM/NORMAL.
1.5 Manual Interrogation
a) Although device status must be displayed on floor plan in

almost real time, the System shall also allow operators to view
status, values, conditions and information relating to the device
point in the manual interrogation mode.
b) Upon right-click on the device icon from floor plan, system tree
view or device tree view, operators shall be allowed to :
1) Get current status of the device point

2) Get properties of the device point.
3) Change display settings for the particular point, such as
colour code, background etc.
4) Get last 10 transactions.
5) Stop beep of that device
6) Priority setting: By ERP, By TRP, By TP, Manual etc.
7) Latch commands
8) Choose 1 out of 31 commands to send.
1.6 Commands
a) The System shall execute single switching commands as well

as pre programmed group of switch commands and actions
initiated both by operators and by card reader unit/controller
functions such as Event Response and Time Program Control.
TS/29/11 2602542S/EL
b) Commands and actions shall include the following:
1) Commands to control
- latched digital output with and without

feedbacks
- unlatched digital output without feedbacks
2) Command to suppress (also release) reporting of

messages
3) Command to suppress (also release) alarm of
messages.
4) Command to free, secure or access security door
5) Command to lock and unlock the device point(s)
c) Feedback of control instructions shall be of positive indication

ie any change of state shall give rise to a change of polarity
and not merely the closing of normally open contacts. The
System shall report an alarm when no feedback signal is
received after a command instruction. Time delays shall be
assignable to connected equipment to suppress oscillating
signal during equipment startup.
d) The System shall also report command instructions which are

not executed due to whatever reason.
1.7 Alarm/Change-of-State
a) The System shall display and print change-of-state, alarm, limit

violation, operator action (switching, programming change or
activations of actions) and system initiated action reports on
the System Controller, Graphic Viewer, logged buffer, printer
as specified. Assignment of reports to the peripherals shall be
programmable by simple keyboard action, and shall be
restricted to operators having a sufficient high access privilege.
b) Alarms shall be accompanied by an audio and visual signal at

the SC station. The audio signal shall continue to sound until
the report is acknowledged by an operator. Special function
key shall be provided for acknowledgement of alarm messages
to silence the audio signal, such as "No beep" command.
c) When the current alarm report is not acknowledged and a new

alarm report is received, the alarm shall remain there waiting
for operator to acknowledge.
TS/29/12 2602542S/EL
d) Alarm and change-of-status reports shall be complemented
with the initiation of one or more colour graphic diagrams at the
graphic viewer in automatic mode.
1.8 Global Command Control
The Supervisory Centre shall serve as the window of real time

monitored data. All connected points shall be monitored for change of
state or alarm condition. On receipt of the alarm or change-of-state
messages, the Supervisory Centre shall in turn initiate the appropriate
actions such as :
a) generate status messages
b) generate alarm messages with / without acknowledgement
c) Pop up floor plan display if alarm occurs
d) update alarm panel display
e) trigger global actions according to pre-defined EPR such as

switch the camera nearest to the alarm location onto the spot
monitor or arm the motion detector etc.
1.9 Report Generation
The Supervisory Centre shall provide the facilities for the following
report/enquiry not be limited to :
a) Roll Call Report that shall list out on the report printer all
personnel that are in a specified location during the specified
time and date. The operator shall be prompted to enter the CA
name, start and stop data, start and stop time.
b) Personal locator report/enquiry that shall display on the

computer screen the last known location of a person in the
building with the option to list out on the report printer the
access transactions associated with that person during the
specified time frame. The operator shall be prompted to enter
the person's name, start and stop date, start and stop time.
Utilities shall be provided to assist the entry of name such that
the operator may enter partially following by the 'help' key, the
System Controller shall provide available names that matches
the partial entry and the operator shall enter the name by
menu-bar selection.
c) Access Summary Report that shall generate report based on

the CAU specified, the type of access (break in, legal access,
legal exit, etc) during a specified time frame.
d) Access Enquiry that shall display on the screen the access

profile associated with the name of the person.
TS/29/13 2602542S/EL
e) Staff Attendance Enquiry that shall display locations of the staff
by departments/groups. The operator shall select to view any
of the 10 departments, each defined with 10 names.
The Supervisory Centre shall check for the last transaction for
each of the names and if not available or matches the CAUs
defined to be outreaders shall indicate that the person is out. If
the person is in, the Supervisory Centre shall display the last
location. Utility shall be provided the definition of names in
each department as well as the CAUs that are readers
associated with exit door.
f) Historical Log
1) A 5,000 message-buffer shall be provided to

automatically log change-of-status, limit violation,
alarms, single and group commands activated by
operator and by program, etc.
2) Messages and reports to be routed by this buffer for

historical logging shall be programmable by the system
operator.
3) The System shall allow operators to generate summary

log output from these messages stored. Typical
summaries to be generated shall include alarm
messages, event logging message and login message.
Date message shall be displayed together with
summary log output.
4) Multi-level selection criterion up to three levels

(location, level, equipment) shall be assignable by the
operator to generate summaries. Where multi-level
coding systems are structured as a field (eg user
address) selection criterion within the field shall be
provided.
5) The System shall allow operators to assign time and

date window on selected messages for the summary
log output, or for backing up onto other media.
g) Definition Reports that shall generate report of attributes

defined for each of device point and the associated control
programs.
TS/29/14 2602542S/EL
1.10 Graphic Display
a) In addition to text display, the Supervisory Centre shall allow

for the creation, display, modification and deletion of dynamic
colour graphic display.
b) Each graphic shall accommodate minimum 100 input/output

points displayed as ICONS on the screen.
c) The operator shall invoke the graphic display by using the

'mouse' to 'zoom' or 'pan' to the relevant display. The operator
shall start with an overview picture and will be prompted to
select the equipment type or floor level. On selection, the
graphic shall change to prompt the user with further options.
In this way, the operator shall be able to manoeuver into or out
of a particular equipment or location.
d) Running in the background is the alarm monitoring task that

will associate the point in alarm to the graphics that can be
brought automatically on to the screen. On detection of alarm,
the bell icon will change to red and blinked accompanied with
an audio signal. The operator may continue with his current
Window/Task or invoke the display of alarm panel will indicate
the 10 priority levels, highlighting those that are activated
together with the number of alarm counts. The operator will
select to view the 'alarm' pictures or opt to hide the alarm panel
or to silence the audio signal. The operator will acknowledge
the point in alarm at the equipment. From this picture, the
operator may choose to acknowledge the point or to call the
panel again to view the next 'alarm' picture. Only when all
alarms are cleared and acknowledged, will the panel and the
bell icon return to normal.
e) In addition, the operator will be able to invoke the 'graphic

builder' mode that allows the operator to create graphics.
Using the 'mouse', the operator will select the 'palette' and the
various options to draw lines of different geometric shapes.
Simply by selecting and clicking on the 'palette' with the
'mouse', graphics depicting M&E plant room or architectural
floor plan can be created with ease. Editing of graphic will
performed when Supervisory Centre is on line.
TS/29/15 2602542S/EL
1.11 Advisory Messages
a) The Supervisory Centre shall provide advisory to aid the user

when alarm occurs at a particular input point. The advisory
shall be in two forms: Detailed text (4 lines of 60 characters
each) to assist maintenance technician to act on incoming
alarms. Typical advisory text will provide information relating
to the make, type model of the equipment where the alarm
originated, the particulars of the company or personnel to
rectify the equipment fault. The system shall allow virtually
unlimited advisory texts to be defined.
b) In addition to the above, primary instruction panels for night

security guards shall be provided on the message page. Each
of this panel shall provide simple instruction such as
'INTRUSION DETECTION IN AOC PAGE MR TAN PAGER
NO. 2355666' or 'CARD READER FAULT, CALL MR LIM TEL
63456785' prominently displayed on the screen when an alarm
occurs. With this feature, security guards or any personnel
that are not trained on the system shall simply be instructed to
look out for prominent alarms that 'pop up' on the screen
(accompanied by buzzer) and act accordingly.
1.12 User Page
The Supervisory Centre shall provide the utility to enable the operator
to determine the type of information and the layout that he would like
to see on one screen (defined as a page). The operator shall be able
to define the mix of different device points (digital input, line
supervised digital input, digital output or card access unit) to be
displayed on one page. As such, the operator shall be able to define
one page that will indicate the status of the card access units. Each
page shall be able to display a minimum of 20 device points.
1.13 Event and Alarm Logging
a) The Supervisory Centre shall has an EVENT LOGGING

FACILITY whereby the user may select to log all the status
changes of any device point on the system. Conversely, the
user may remove device point from the event logging system.
b) When a change of state occurs on an device point that has

been EVENT LOGGED by the user, the system shall
automatically record the date and time of change and the
current state of the point on the hard disk. This means that all
logged input point that changes state from "OFF" to "ON" and
vice versa shall be logged on the hard disk. Similarly change
of states of digital output, analog input/output, CAU shall be
logged as defined.
TS/29/16 2602542S/EL
c) The alarm logging system shall be provided as part of the
standard system facilities. The alarm logging system shall
automatically log all alarms on the hard disk. This alarm is
generated when an device point changes to the state which
was programmed as the alarm state.
d) This alarm logging system shall aid the user in keeping a

record of all alarms that occurred in the system. In other
words, apart from indicating an alarm on the VDU and on the
colour graphics terminal and logging on the printer, the alarm
shall also be saved on hard disk for future analysis if
necessary. The date, time and name of the point shall be
stored on the hard disk.
e) The alarm logging system shall also log the acknowledgement

and reset of all alarmed points.
1.14 Database Management
a) The latest MS-SQ database server shall be used as

centralized database engine. At real-time data gateway level
(DG or RTS level), MS-SQL Express shall be used as local
data storage.
b) Flexible data partition shall be adopted to support multi-tier

administration of system assets including: people (operators
and card holders), software operation, equipment, monitor and
control privileges, system outputs (message & alarms) and
reports.
c) Every effort shall be made to build maximum flexibility into the

basic software package. This shall be accomplished through
the use of an extensive user controlled database. This
database shall be made up of many different types of files
stored in the hard disk of the Supervisory Centre. Therefore in
the event of power failure, the database shall still be intact.
d) The files that make up this database shall include but not
limited to:
1) Input/Output point attribute file
2) Operator Resource Group Files.

3) Data Partition files
4) Time program File
5) Card Access Unit Access Group File
6) Card Access User File
7) Card Access Week Code File
8) Response Program File
TS/29/17 2602542S/EL
9) Local Command Sequence File
10) Trend log File
11) Global Command Sequence File
12) Password File
13) Graphic State/Link File
e) During system initialisation, the files or database tables shall

be downloaded to the CRCs. With these definitions, the CRC
shall be able to operate independently.
f) With the standalone feature of CRC, the Supervisory Centre's

main function shall be the handling of man machine interface
and the logging of events.
g) The Supervisory Centre shall maintain a 7 day CAU

transaction buffers, each with at least 2000 messages so that
the operator can generate report based on access records
logged during the last seven day period. The Supervisory
Centre shall maintain a separate buffer to accommodate at
least 5000 events and alarm logging message.
2. Card Reader Controller
2.1 General
a) The card access security service shall provide the user with
the means of controlling entry to secured areas equipped with
Card Access units (CAU) based on access codes and time
criteria. Each authorised user shall be assigned an access
code which relates to an assigned time zones for each CAU.
b) Hence, the card access security system shall provide tight

security by preventing unauthorised persons from entering
certain areas. It shall also ensure that proper measures
should be taken by generating alarms and displaying the
reaction text to be taken by the operator.
2.2 Features of CRC
The CRC shall be equipped with the following features but not limited
to:
a) Standalone to grant access without referring the Supervisory

Centre.
b) CRC shall be connected via RTS to backend system for

database initialisation.
TS/29/18 2602542S/EL
c) after 3 consecutive unsuccessful attempts, the CRC will send a
'multiple attempts' alarm to the S.C.
d) storage of up to 100,000 transactions when the CRC is in a

standalone mode (Off-Line Mode). These stored transactions
shall report back to the Supervisory Centre once the
communication link is returned between CRC and the
Supervisory Centre.
e) CRC shall be supplied in a locking enclosure with tamper

switch alarm.
f) The CRC shall has provision for 64 time zones. Each time
zone shall consist of 4 start-stop intervals per day (Monday -
Sunday) plus another 2 intervals for holiday.
A user can only enter an area if he presents his card within

and inclusive of the start-stop times specified for the day's time
zone associated with that CAU.
However, if that day is a holiday, the start-stop times will be of

the holiday's time zone.
g) support minimum four Card Access Units (CAUs)
h) There shall be 1000 access codes. These access codes shall

relate to an assigned time zones for each of the CAU.
Each user shall be assigned an access code. With Each user

shall be assigned an access code. With this code, the user is
either restricted/allowed entry from/into an area depending on
the time zone associated with the CAU he/she wishes to by-
pass.
i) CRC shall be able to detect break-in situation when the door is

opened without a valid and or when the free egree switch is
not activated.
j) CRC shall support free egree configuration with the use of

either a push button or motion detector.
k) CRC shall support 'clocking' mode, that is the user shall

present the access card to inform the Supervisory Centre for
time management purposes and not for access control.
l) CRC shall support UNLOCK mode, that is , the door can be

kept in temporary open during certain period when the card is
not required for access control.
TS/29/19 2602542S/EL
m) CRC shall detect the following alarm conditions : door open too
long, door close failure and door command failure.
n) CRC shall be equipped with built-in fire alarm panel input point
as hardware interlocking. Even the CRC firmware is not
running/hang, the hardware interlocking mechanism shall still
function, meaning a valid fire alarm signal shall unlock the
doors without CPU involvement.
2.3 Operation of CRC
a) The CAU shall be mounted outside the security area, beside

the security door. The CRC panel shall be located in the
secure area, together with the power supply units.
b) In the normal use, the CRC shall work as a standalone

controller without dependence on the SC. After the CRC has
been initialised, the CAU operate the system, the user shall
hold the card momentarily in the proximity of the card access
unit at a distance of 3cm-6cm. The CAU which contains a
microprocessor shall decode the signal and reformats it into
the proper data format for transmission back to CRC. If there is
a match and the time zone permits entry for that user, the door
release contract shall be energised for a period of time. At the
same time, the access grant event shall be put in event queue.
However, if no match is found, an illegal attempt event shall be
pt into the event queue. Any abnormal situation such as illegal
access or break-in, duress situation, invalid card, card valid but
door not open, etc shall be reported to S.C. The event queue
shall be transmitted to S.C. in the next polling cycle.
c) The remote control push-button shall allow the user to leave or

enter the security area without the use of the user card. This is
normally operated remotely by the security guard or from
within the security area.
2.4 Card Access Unit (CAU)
The card access unit shall be suitable for proximity card type with
keypad as additional requirement for legal access.
2.5 Proximity Smart Card
The card shall be compatible with Mifare S50/S70 smart card, or

Mifare Plus.
- 1K bytes EEPROM
- Embedded antenna
- Mifare 13.56MHz ISO14443A
- Range of Operation: about 3cm to 8cm
TS/29/20 2602542S/EL
- Dimension: CR80 standard credit card size
- Material: PVC
2.6 Electric Strike

The Contractor shall provide the correct type of electric strike
according to door type. The unit shall have the following:
a) fire rated as per door requirement

b) Temper resistant
c) With strike and latch monitoring
d) Stainless steel with minimum 3 hardened locking pins
e) Maximum power consumption : 2.2 Watts
2.7 Electromagnetic Lock (EM Lock)

The Contractor shall provide the correct type of electromagnetic locks
according to the door type. The lock shall have excellent holding force
and remarkable features. It's specification:
a) Voltage Input : 12 VDC
b) Current Draw : 12V / 480mA
c) Holding Force : Up to 600 lbs (272 kg)
d) Anti-Rust Surface Treatment : Blue Zinc Plating
e) Operating Temperature : 0~55° C ( 32~131° F)
f) Operating Humidity : 0~95% ( non condensing)
g) Weight ( Magnet) : 1.08 kg (±1%)
h) Dimensions : Magnet - (L)250x(W)42x(T)25 mm
i) Armature - (L)180x(W)38x(T)11 mm
TS/29/21 2602542S/EL
3. Auto Alarm Notification System
Error/alarm message can be linked to auto notification system, which consists

of two parts: Email and SMS.
Upon a define time delay and system error/alarm message, the system shall
automatically deliver the same message to the pre-defined group of recipient
via Email and/or SMS.
The alarm source, the alarm type, alarm priority, device group, device name
from which the users supposed to receive alarm shall be configurable. The
time duration for a recipient to receive alarm must be also configurable.
Each recipient shall have an escalate officer to whom the recipient is

associated with. Whenever a recipient is not reachable or not taking
necessary action after a configured time, the notification module will in turn
trigger his escalated officer.
TS/29/22 2602542S/EL
SECTION 30- POWER METER
1. General
1.1. All setup parameters required by the Power Meter shall be stored in
nonvolatile memory and retained in the event of a control power interruption.
1.2. The Power Meter may be applied in three-phase, three- or four-wire systems.
1.3. The Power Meter shall be capable of being applied without modification at
nominal frequencies of 50Hz.
1.4. The power meter shall comply to BS EN / IEC 62053: Electricity metering
equipment (a.c.). Particular Requirements
2. Measured values
2.1. The Power Meter shall provide the following, true RMS metered quantities:
Real-Time Readings
a) Current (per phase & neutral, 3 phase average )
b) Voltage (line-line, line-neutral, 3 phase average)
c) Real, Reactive & Apparent Power (Per-Phase, 3-Phase Total)
d) Power Factor, True & Displacement (Per-Phase, 3-Phase Total)
e) Frequency
f) THD (Current and Voltage)
2.2. Energy Readings
a) Accumulated Energy - Real kWh, Reactive kVarh, Apparent KVAh

(Signed/Absolute)
b) Reactive Energy by Quadrant
2.3. Demand Readings
a) Demand Current Calculations - peak, present, running average, last

completed interval (per-phase, 3-phase avg, Neutral)
b) Demand Real, Reactive & Apparent Power Calculations - peak, present,

running average, last completed interval (3-Phase Total)
c) Average Power Factor Calculations, Demand Coincident (3-Phase Total)
TS/30/1 2602542S/EL
2.4. Power Analysis Values
a) THD – Voltage, Current (3-Phase, Per-Phase, Neutral)
b) Displacement Power Factor (Per-Phase, 3-Phase)
c) Fundamental Voltage & Current, Magnitude and Angle (Per-Phase)
d) Fundamental Real Power (Per-Phase, 3-Phase)
e) Fundamental Reactive Power (Per-Phase)
f) Harmonic Power (Per-Phase, 3-Phase)
g) Phase Rotation
h) Unbalance (Current and Voltage)
i) Each harmonic Magnitudes & Angles for Current and Voltages (Per
Phase) up to the 31st Harmonic.
3. Demand
All power demand calculations shall use any one of the following calculation
methods, selectable by the user:
a) Thermal demand using a sliding window updated every second for the
present demand and at the end of the interval for the last interval. The
window length shall be user selectable from 1-60 minutes in 1 minute
increments.
b) Block interval, with optional sub-intervals. The window length shall be user
selectable from 1-60 minutes in 1 minute intervals. The user shall be able to
set the sub-interval length from 1-60 minutes in 1 minute intervals. The
following Block methods shall be available:
a) Sliding Block that calculates demand every second with intervals less
than 15 minutes and every 15 seconds with an interval between 15
and 60 minutes.
b) Fixed Block that calculates demand at the end of the interval
c) Rolling Block that a subinterval is configured. Demand is calculated at

the end of each subinterval and displays at the end of the interval.
TS/30/2 2602542S/EL
c) Demand can be calculated using a Synchronization signal:
a) Demand can be synchronized to an input pulse from an external

source. The demand period begins with every pulse. A synchronized
input can be configured to either a block or rolling block calculation
b) Demand can be synchronized to a communication signal. This can be

configured to either a block or rolling block calculation
c) Demand can be synchronized to the clock in the Power Meter.
4. Sampling
The current and voltage signals shall be digitally sampled at a rate high enough to
provide true rms accuracy to the 63rd harmonic (fundamental of 50 Hz).
The Power Meter shall provide continuous sampling at a minimum of up to 128

samples/cycle, simultaneously on all voltage and current channels in the meter.
5. Minimum and Maximum Values
5.1. The Power Meter shall provide minimum and maximum values for the
following parameters:
a) Voltage line-line, line-neutral
b) Current per phase
c) Voltage Unbalance line-line, line-neutral
d) Power Factor, true & displacement
e) Real, Reactive & Apparent Power Total
f) THD Voltage & Current
g) Frequency
5.2. For each min/max value listed above, the Power Meter shall record the
following attributes:
a) Date/Time of the min/max value
b) Min/Max. Value
c) Phase of recorded Min/Max (for multi-phase quantities)
d) Minimum and maximum values shall be available via communications

and display.
TS/30/3 2602542S/EL
6. Harmonic Resolution
6.1. Advanced harmonic information shall be available via the Power Meter. This
shall include the calculation of the harmonic magnitudes and angles for each
phase voltage and current through the 31st harmonic.
6.2. Harmonic information shall be available for all three phases, current and
voltage, plus the residual current. To ensure maximum accuracy for analysis,
the current and voltage information for all phases shall be obtained
simultaneously from the same cycle.
6.3. The harmonic magnitude shall be reported as a percentage of the

fundamental or as a percentage of the rms values, as selected by the user.
7. Current Inputs
7.1. The Power Meter shall accept current inputs from standard instrument current
transformers with 5 amp secondary output and shall have a metering range of
0-10 amps with the following withstand currents: 15 amp continuous, 50 amp
10 sec per hour, 500 amp 1 sec per hour.
7.2. Current transformer primaries through 327 kA shall be supported.
8. Voltage Inputs
11.1. The Power Meter shall allow connection to circuits up to 600 volts AC without
the use of potential transformers. The Power Meter shall also accept voltage
inputs from standard instrument potential transformers with 110 volt
secondary output. The Power Meter shall support PT primaries through 3.2
MV.
11.2. The nominal full scale input of the Power Meter shall be 347 Volts AC L-N,
600 Volts AC L-L. The meter shall accept a metering over-range of 50%.
The input impedance shall be greater then 2 Ohm.
9. Accuracy
9.1. The Power Meter shall comply with ANSI C12.20 Class 0.5 and IEC 60687
Class 0.5 for revenue meters.
9.2. The Power Meter shall be accurate to 0.25% of reading +0 .025% of full scale
for power and energy. Voltage and current shall be accurate to 0.075% of
reading plus 0.025% of full scale. Power factor metering shall be accurate to
±0.002 from 0.5 leading to 0.5 lagging. Frequency metering shall be
accurate ±0.01 Hz at 45-67 Hz.
9.3. These accuracies shall be maintained for both light and full loads.
9.4. No annual calibration shall be required to maintain this accuracy.
TS/30/4 2602542S/EL
10. Input/Output
10.1. The Power Meter shall supply 1 digital input and 1 digital solid state output/KY
pulse output as standard.
10.2. The Power Meter shall be capable of operating a solid state KY output relay
to provide output pulses for a user definable increment of reported energy.
Minimum relay life shall be in excess of one billion operations. The standard
KY output shall operate up to 240 volt AC, 300 volt DC, 96mA max, and
provide 3750 volt rms isolation.
10.3. The Power Meter shall support multiple input/output options including digital
inputs, mechanical relay outputs.This optional I/O shall be in the form of an
option module that can be field installable.
10.4. The digital inputs shall have four operating modes:
a) Normal mode for simple on/off digital inputs
b) Demand Interval Synch Pulse to accept a demand synch pulse from a

utility demand meter
c) Conditional Energy Control input to control conditional energy

accumulation.
10.5. The optional relay output module shall provide a load voltage range from 20
to 240 VAC or from 20 to 30 VDC. It shall support a load current of 2A.
11. Logging
11.1. The Power Meter shall provide for onboard data logging. Each Power Meter
shall be able to log data, alarms and events, and waveforms. The Meter shall
have 80kb of on-board nonvolatile memory. Logged information to be stored
in each Power Meter include the following:
a) Billing Log: The Power Meter shall store in non-volatile memory a

configurable billing log that is updated every 15 minutes. Data shall be
recorded by month, day and 15 minute interval. The log shall contain
24 months of monthly data, 32 days of daily data and between 2 to 52
days of 15 minute interval data depending on the number of quantities
selected.
b) Custom Data Logs: The Power Meter shall provide 1 data. Each entry
shall be date and time stamped to the second. The log entry shall hold
data of up to 96 parameters each. In addition, it shall be possible for a
user to define an event. Data logs can be configured by users to be
Fill & Hold or Circular (FIFO).
c) Alarm Log. This log shall contain time, date, event information, and
coincident information for each user defined alarm or event.
11.2. The Power Meter shall have default values for the data log loaded at the
factory and begin on device power up.
TS/30/5 2602542S/EL
12. Alarming
12.1. Alarm events shall be user definable.
12.2. The user shall be able to define over 50 alarm conditions.
12.3. The following shall be available as alarm events:
a) Over/under current & voltage
b) Current & voltage imbalance
c) Phase loss, current & voltage
d) Over kW Demand
e) Phase reversal
f) Digital Input OFF/ON
g) End of incremental energy interval
h) End of demand interval
12.4. For each over/under metered value alarm, the user shall be able to define a
pick-up, drop-out, and delay.
12.5. There shall be four alarm severity levels in order make it easier for the user to
respond to the most important events first.
12.6. Indication of an alarm condition shall be given on the front panel.
13. Feature Addition
It shall be possible to field upgrade the firmware in the Power Meter to enhance
functionality. These firmware upgrades shall be done through the communication
connection and shall allow upgrades of individual meters or groups. No disassembly
or changing of integrated circuit chips shall be required and it will not be necessary to
de-energize the circuit or the equipment to perform the upgrade.
14. Control Power
The Power Meter shall operate properly over a wide range of control power including
90-457 VAC or 100-300 VDC.
TS/30/6 2602542S/EL
15. Communications
The Power Meter shall communicate via RS-485 Modbus protocol.
16. Display
16.1 The Power Meter display shall also allow the user to select a date/time
format.
16.2 The Power Meter display shall be back lit LCD for easy viewing, display shall
also be anti-glare and scratch resistant
16.3 The Display shall be capable of allowing the user to view four values on one
screen at the same time. A summary screen shall also be available to allow
the user to view a snapshot of the system.
16.4 The Power Meter display shall provide local access to the following metered
quantities:
a) Current, per phase rms, 3-phase average and neutral (if applicable)
b) Voltage, phase-to-phase, phase-to-neutral, and 3-phase average

(phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral)
c) Real power, per phase and 3-phase total
d) Reactive power, per phase and 3-phase total
e) Apparent power, per phase and 3-phase total
f) Power factor, 3-phase total and per phase
g) Frequency
h) Demand current, per phase and three phase average
i) Demand real power, three phase total
j) Demand apparent power, three phase total
k) Accumulated Energy, (MWh and MVARh)
l) THD, current and voltage, per phase
TS/30/7 2602542S/EL
16.5 Reset of the following electrical parameters shall also be allowed from the
Power Meter display:
a) Peak demand current
b) Peak demand power (kW) and peak demand apparent power (kVA)
c) Energy (MWh) and reactive energy (MVARh)
16.6 Setup for system requirements shall be allowed from the Power Meter
display. Setup provisions shall include:
a) CT rating
b) PT rating
c) System type [three-phase, 3-wire] [three-phase, 4-wire]
d) Watt-hours per pulse
17. Single Phase Power Meter for Power Distribution unit
17.1. The power meter shall be of slim and compact in line type, UL compliant, CE
marking certification of type approved by relevant authority or accreditation
bodies.
17.2. Power meter shall be going between the source and the power distribution
unit or power socket distribution unit. It shall be suitable for all kind of single
phase power usage eg, rack, laboratories, offices etc. The power meter shall
monitor the energy consumption (kWh), active power (kW) that being
consumed, overload, voltage (V), current (A) and power factor and send data
to the monitoring system. The power meter shall have 1 RJ 45 sensor port
and relay for remotely switch devices on and off. It shall have built in bi-Stable
latched relay, which retains the state regardless of any power or not. The
power meter shall have status indicating light showing the power status and
the relay status.
17.3. The power meter shall be of class 0.5 for the energy monitoring, Input power
plug using UK BS1363 plug ‘G’ or IEC 60309 P+N+E Cee form. The built in
latch relay contact shall be of 40A. The meter shall able to operate at 0oC to
45 oC and non condensing at humidity between 20% to 80%.
TS/30/8 2602542S/EL
17.4. Power main plug shall be of UK BS1363 plug ‘G’ or IEC 60309 2P+E Cee
form rated 16A or 32A and detachable from the power meter. The power
outlet shall be suitable for connection to type “G” three pin plug socket outlet
or Cee-form.
17.5. The power meter shall be able to send data for monitoring and control through
BAS, SNMP, mobile application, Wireless Mesh Network or any third party
software and application
TS/30/9 2602542S/EL
SECTION 31 – TELEPHONE CABLINGS (CAT 6 UTP) SYSTEM
1. General
1.1 This section is for the supply, installation and commissioning of the telephone
system using CAT 6 unshielded twisted pair (UTP) copper cabling system,
optical fibre cabling system and associated works..
1.2 All equipment supplied shall be the latest in current manufacture and have
spare parts readily available.
1.3 The cabling system shall support implementing a single structured

wiring infrastructure and complete integrated multi-media
communication networking system, which includes text, graphics,
images, voice and video.
1.4 The system shall:
a) Support voice, data, image and video application.
b) Cover its capacity and functionality with minimum components.
c) Facilitate expansion from the initial proposed system by

addition of modules.
d) Be flexible and capable of including new facilities.
e) Facilitate easy maintenance, change management and future

growth.
1.5 The Sub-Contractor shall submit details shop drawing and obtain approval
from the S.O. before commencement of work.
1.6 All the telephone cabling shall comply to following standards:
a) ANSI X3T9.5: Fibre Distributed Data Interface
b) BS EN 50173: Information technology. Generic cabling systems
c) BS EN 50174: Information technology. Cabling installation
d) EIA/TIA 568C.0: Generic Telecommunications Cabling for

Customer Premises
e) EIA/TIA 568C.1: Commercial Building Telecommunications

Cabling Standard
f) EIA/TIA 569-A: The Design and Installation Requirements
TS/31/1 2602542S/EL
g) EIA/TIA 606: Administration Standard for Telecommunications
Infrastructure in commercial Buildings
h) EIA/TIA 607: Grounding and Bonding Requirements for

Telecommunications in Commercial Buildings
i) EIA/TIA TSB-36: Telecommunications System Bulletin - Additional

Specifications for Unshielded Twisted Pair Cables
j) EIA/TIA TSB-40: Telecommunications System Bulletin - Additional

Specifications for UTP Connecting Hardware
k) IEEE 802.3: IEEE Standard for Ethernet
l) IEEE 802.5: IEEE Standard for Local Area Networks: Token Ring
Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications
m) ISO/IEC 11801: 2nd Edition, Amendment 2 International

Standards. Information technology – Generic cabling for customer
premises
n) Code of Practice for Info-communication Facilities in Buildings

(COPIF) latest edition
2. Telephone Cabling Installation
2.1 Each telephone riser shall be provided with 2 nos of IDF with six terminal
block.
2.2 Each terminal block – 100 points
2.3 Provision of Main Distribution Frame (MDF) in Main Distribution Frame

(MDF) / Telecom Equipment Room (TER).
2.4 Provision of RJ45 patch panel in utility room or closet for residential
units.
2.5 Optical fibre cables with associated fibre interface points and fibre
termination points.
2.6 All necessary wiring from the telephone point including outlet to the terminal
block inside the Telephone riser including termination of the four pairs of
wires at both end. All cables used shall be Category-6 UTP computer grade
cable. All the patching cables at the telephone outlet end and the riser
terminal block ends complete with RJ45 jacks. The patching cables shall be
of minimum length of 3 meters.
2.7 Cable supporting system, conduit and other accessories.
2.8 Coordinate with PTL Service Providers and users on for the activation of
lines.
TS/31/2 2602542S/EL
3. Category 6 UTP Cable
3.1 All UTP cables used shall be of Category 6, 4-pair 100 ohm high
performance unshielded twisted pair (UTP). The UTP cable shall be of 24
AWG (0.51 mm) bare solid copper conductors insulated with high density
polyethylene, jacketed with the non-halogen compound. The insulated
conductors are twisted into pairs. The cable shall be IEC tested for low
smoke and non-halogen emission.
a) All UTP terminations shall be consistent with ANSI/EIA/TIA TSB-

40.
b) All UTP cables shall meet the transmission characteristics of

Category 6 as specified in ANSI/EIA/TIA 568, TSB-36.
c) All UTP connectors shall meet the transmission characteristics of

Category 6 as defined in TSB-40 and meets the pin/pair
assignments of 1-2, 7-8 for ANSI X3T9.5 TP-PMD (FDDI).
d) Apart from above requirements, all Category 6 UTP cable shall

also meet the following near end cross talk (NEXT) and
attenuation requirements :
Frequency (MHz) Next*(min) (dB) Attenuation (max)

f (dB)
0.064 - 0.8
0.150 74 -
0.256 - 1.1
0.512 - 1.5
0.772 64 1.8
1.0 62 2.1
4.0 53 4.3
8.0 48 5.9
10.0 47 6.6
16.0 44 8.2
20.0 42 9.2
25.0 41 10.5
31.25 39 11.8
62.5 35 17.1
100.0 32 22.0
Next*: Next (f) > Next (0.772) - 15 log(f/0.772)
TS/31/3 2602542S/EL
e) All UTP cables shall meet the requirement specified for current
and emerging standard such as ANSI X3T9.5, TPPMD, 100Mbits
Ethernet, ATM 155Mbps, CDDI at 100Mbps, ISDN, Data over
RS232, Ethernet over 10 BaseT, Ethernet over 100 BaseT, token
ring and possibility of 622 Mbps transmission and application in
future.
f) Each run of cable between the patch panels and the computer
outlet shall be continuous without any joints or splices.
g) The length of each individual run of cable from the patch panels in
from the IDF or termination block to the computer outlet shall not
exceed 90 meter for error-free transmission at 155 Mbps.
h) If the length exceed 90 meter, necessary line driving/boosting

devices shall be provided at the Tenderer's cost to ensure data
transmission at 155 Mbps to the respective work areas are still
error-free.
i) The 4-pair UTP cable shall be Under-writer's Laboratories (UL)

listed.
j) The 4 pair UTP cable shall also meet or exceed the following
standards:
· ICEA S80-S76, 9/88
· Mutual Capacitance 14pf/ft. Low unbalance
· DC resistance (ohms/1000 feet) : 28.6 Low unbalance
· Characteristic Impedence (ohms @1 to 100Mhz) : 100 + 15%
· Maximum attenuation 67 dB/1000ft and worst pair-pair NEXT

32 dB at 100 Mhz
· IEC 60754 part 2, Test on gases evolved during combustion of

materials from cables - Part 2: Determination of acidity (by pH
measurement) and conductivity.Measurements
· IEC 61034 part 2, Measurement of smoke density of cables

burning under defined conditions - Part 2: Test procedure and
requirements.
· IEC 60332 part 3, : Tests on electric and optical fibre cables

under fire conditions.
· NES 713, Overview of Smoke Toxicity Testing and

Regulations.
TS/31/4 2602542S/EL
k) The 4-pair UTP cable shall comply with the EEC (European
Economic Community) 1992 EMC (electromagnetic compatibility)
Directive requirement and the following required standards:
· Emissions:
EN 55 022 radiated emissions
EN 55 022 AC mains conducted emissions
EN 60 555-2 AC mains harmonics emissions
EN 60 555-3 AC mains voltage fluctuations
· Immunity:
IEC 60801-2 electrostatic discharge immunity
IEC 60801-3 radiated immunity
IEC 60801-4 fast transient immunity
l) The 4-pair UTP cable shall support high speed data, voice, image
and single channel video application.
m) The color code shall conform to the following scheme:
pair 1 - White Blue & Blue

pair 2 - White orange & orange
pair 3 - White green & green
pair 4 - White brown & brown
3.2 RJ45 Patch Panel
a) The RJ45 patch panel provided in the utility room or closet shall
have sufficient capacity to cater for the total quantity of the
RJ45 points in the zones served.
b) The wiring block shall be fire-retardant, moulded plastic blocks.

It should consist of colour index or label strips to be used to
identify the data points and high teeth to separate the tip and
ring.
c) The patch panels must be able to support 100Mbps and ATM

155 applications, Cat 6 compliance.
d) The wiring block shall be able to accommodate 22-26 AWG

(0.40 mm - 0.64 mm) cable conductors. The patch panel shall
be quiet front without any contact element exposed.
e) The patch panels shall cater to data, image and video

applications.
f) The cross-connect wire shall be colour-coded and available in

1, 2, 3 and 4 pairs versions
TS/31/5 2602542S/EL
3.3 Optical fibre cables with associated fibre interface points and fibre
termination points
a) A minimum of 1 no. 2-core optical fibre cable complying with ITU-T

G.652.D specifications designated for a non-coaxial cable system
shall be provided. The cable shall terminate into a fibre termination
point with 2 sets of SC/APC connectors at one end (which may be
located in the utility room or closet) and into a fibre interface point
with 2 sets of SC/APC connectors located in the telecommunication
riser or gate pillar (or meter compartment) to each residential unit at
the other end.
b) The 2-core optical fibre cable shall be terminated with an

additional 2m length as “slack”.
c) The fibre interface point and fibre termination point shall each
be a set of 2 SC/APC connectors.
d) When fibre cables are installed in conduits, the optical fibre

cable used shall:
1) Comply with the G.657 Category A specifications in the

ITU-T Recommendations;
2) Comprise an outer sheath of fire retardant polyethylene or

Low Smoke Free of Halogen (LSFH) material;
3) Have a central strength member that is made of Aramid

Yarn (Kevlar Yarn) or its equivalent; and
4) Be able to withstand a maximum tensile load of at least

500N.
e) When the fibre cables are installed underground, the optical

fibre cable used shall:
1) Comply with the specifications in sub-category G.652.D

in the ITU-T Recommendations;
2) Have a loose tube with filled jelly compound and

polyethylene sheath;
3) Have a central strength member that is made of Aramid

Yarn (Kevlar Yarn) or its equivalent; and
4) Use water blocking tape to enhance prevention of water

armouring
TS/31/6 2602542S/EL
f) Fibre interface point shall be securely mounted at the side of
the telecommunication riser facing the door. Where there is no
telecommunication riser, the fibre interface point shall be
securely mounted inside the gate pillar (or meter compartment)
at a height which is at least 1m.
g) The fibre termination point shall be securely mounted adjacent

to the RJ45 patch panel (which may be located in the utility
room or closet) and have a clear space of 50mm from the
SC/APC connectors to allow the connection of patch cords.
Each fibre termination point shall be provided with a 13A switch
socket outlet.
3.4 Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF)
Each IDF shall be sized for 100 pair telephone cables termination, unless
3.5 Terminal Block (TB)
The capacity of the terminal block shall be for termination of 100

telephone points.
3.6 All cables, both fiber and copper shall be terminated during the initial
installation build-out.
4. Installation
4.1 The scope of work in this section refers to the telephone point and cable
installation. Location of points refer to the associated tender drawings.
4.2 Cable trunking or cable tray installed along the corridor shall be similar to
the cable trunking or tray installed for the electrical cable except the
colour of the trunking shall be "green" for telephone and "white" for
computer installation.
4.3 The cable trunking shall be marked at every 1 metre interval or at least 2
markings at equal interval for every length of trunking either by permanent
machine press lettering 'TELEPHONE' for respective services or by
spray-painting the wording before installation of cable trunking.
4.4 Similar treatment to the cable tray if used shall also be applied.
4.5 Relevant sections of cable trunking and cable tray for electrical
installation in this tender specification are also applicable in this section.
4.6 All the downdrops from the cable trunking and cable tray shall be
concealed within brickwall, partition, and other wall paneling by using
uPVC conduits.
TS/31/7 2602542S/EL
4.7 Relevant section of concealed conduit wiring for electrical installation shall
be applicable in this section.
4.8 All telephone installation shall comply to the Telecommunication

Authority’s requirement. Any discrepancies between this specification and
Telecommunication Authority shall refer to the S.O. for his final decision.
5. Accessories
5.1 Cable trunkings and cable trays shall be provided with factory made
elbows, tees, crosses, branch and reducers, joints and other accessories
such as earthing connector to ensure continuity, coupler piece, and all
cadmium-plated bolts and nuts.
5.2 Fixing brackets fabricated from galvanised mild steel angle iron and
threaded rods shall be supplied and installed. The sizes of all suspended
rods shall be calculated depending on the loading for S.O.'s approval.
5.3 Rawl plugs suitable for the installation of threaded rods shall e provided
for the suspension of cable trunkings and cable trays.
5.4 Accessories for the installation of G.I. conduit/cable trays/cable trunking

as per relevant section in this Technical Specifications shall be provided.
6. IDF Frame/DP Panels
6.1 All risers shall be provided with IDF frames complete with six terminal
blocks.
6.2 Sub-contractor shall provide the termination diagram indicating the

individual cable with respect to the extension lines number/location.
6.3 Sub-contractor shall coordinate with Service provider for the termination
and testing of individual telephone/fax lines.
6.4 The Sub-Contractor shall also provide Main Distribution Frame in the MDF
room complete with terminal blocks and other accessories required for the
complete installation for the buildings.
TS/31/8 2602542S/EL
7. Installation
7.1 Cable trunking or cable tray installed for telephone and for computer shall
be separated horizontally and vertically by 100 mm minimum if they are
running along the same route.
7.2 The cable trunking shall allow another 25 mm on the height for the
coupling of conduit to the side of the trunking.
7.3 When allowing for access to the conduit proper metal hole cutter with
diameter of conduit shall be provided for cutting the side of trunking.
8.1 Site Acceptance Tests
a) Optical Fibre Cable
1) Continuity testing using a powerful visible red laser.
2) Scanning at the fibre interface/termination point with an

Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) to measure
the fibre lengths, losses, connector losses, splice losses
and fibre defects. The optical fibre cable will be treated
as being in good working condition if the losses
measured between the fibre interface point and the fibre
termination point are less than 0.6dB.
b) CAT 6 UTP Cable
All cables shall be tested and conformed to the Specifications

and Standards.
8.2 Certification
The sub-contractor shall involve engaging an operator licensed to provide

passive optical fibre connectivity service to certify fibre readiness. The
certification shall be submitted for authority clearance.
TS/31/9 2602542S/EL
SECTION 32 – LIGHTING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
1. General
1.1 The Sub-contractor shall engage a Specialist for this part of the works i.e.
to design, supply, install, test and commission the complete Lighting
Control System, Power monitoring and status monitoring of switchboards,
distribution board, generator and Handicap call bell as per but not limited to
this Technical Specifications, Design Parameters and Tender Drawings.
1.2 This Section of the Sub-contract includes complete Specialist Design,

Supply, Delivery, Termination, Testing and Commissioning of the Lighting
Control System’s devices and Control Schedules necessary for the proper
installation and functioning of the Lighting Control System in this part of the
sub-contract.
1.3 The Sub-contractor shall engage a Specialist for this part of the works and
submit the name of the Specialist in the tender for S.O.’s approval.
1.4 The required and accepted Lighting Control System shall be strictly
configured as per but not limited to this Technical Specifications, Design
Parameters and Tender Drawings. Any alternative proposed and offered is
not acceptable unless otherwise approved by the S.O.
1.5 The Building shall be equipped with a lighting management system

providing flexible and efficient control and management of the whole
lighting installation from a centralized location.
1.6 All devices connected to the system, such as switches, sensors, actuators,
displays, control units, dimmers etc. can exchange information via this
system. All devices shall be able to select freely and are interactive
between one another. These devices shall be able to be programmed to
perform its present specific tasks as required by the project and with the
flexibilities in changing its desired tasks to meet the End Users’
requirement at any time in the future.
1.7 All devices shall be able to being programmed to any specific tasks or
different loads and also provide flexibility in changing its tasks or loads at
any time.
1.8 It should be a non-proprietary open protocol system with distributed

intelligent or multi processor system with micro-processor on each control
device. If a device should fail, only the functions associated with that device
may be lost while other devices on the system are not affected.
TS/32/1 2602542S/EL
1.9 The system shall allow any brand of Internet of Things and Artificial
Intelligent to be interfaced without the need to expand any of the system or
add -in controller.
1.10 The lighting and power circuits should be wired in a topology that meets the
wiring regulation for a conventional ON/OFF switching control and also to
be automation ready using a non-proprietary protocol system.
1.11 The system shall be expandable and not limited or having constraint to
specific lighting fixtures or type of lamps. Switching actuator shall be
suitable and rated for inductive lamp load switching. Design of by-pass
and/or isolation switching shall be stipulated in the proposal
1.12 The system shall use advanced graphical programming software

compatible with Microsoft Windows OS to enable the lighting operations to
be centrally programmed and adapted, with local controls available from
local wall switches. The entire system shall be centrally controlled and
monitored in real time. Lighting layouts shall detail the active status of each
relay.
1.13 The system shall be of IP web base access that can be easily interfaced
with third party and shall have gateway/bridges interfaces (BACNET, OPC)
for connectivity to other control LAN networks such as Integrated Building
Management/Automation System, Facility Booking System, Internet or
Intranet System.
1.14 The system shall compiled to SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) and should
consist of a dedicated 2-wire twisted pair 24VDC control cable (KNX/EIB
bus line), shielded from interference, with rated insulation voltage required
to meet the wiring regulation. Approved system should be KNX/EIB or
equivalent, which should be an open and non-proprietary system having
structure able to connect and operate compatible bus devices.
1.15 It should be a decentralized multi-master system with distributed

intelligence in all bus devices. The system shall not require a PC or any
other special control unit after testing and commissioning.
1.16 The backbone protocol of the system should be based on the KNX/EIB
system.
1.17 The system shall able improve for measuring, controlling, monitoring and
signaling all building services functions locally and remotely.
1.18 The control network system shall be able to tailor in order to suit the
modern electrical wiring system.
1.19 The system integrators should have support by the supplier and receive
training from certified training centre.
TS/32/2 2602542S/EL
1.20 In the event of network failure, the sensor shall continue to works on the
last setting. The light shall be 100% turned up during any power failure to
controller or sensor
1.21 Sub-Contractor to have pre-installation mock up and demonstration the on

the system installation. It shall also demonstrate every level of work
involved include integration, connection, controller coding, decoding,
scanning, proper wiring connection method, self-connectivity check with
instrument and visual observation
2. Data Transmission and Communication
2.1 The data transmission rate should be least 9.6 Kbps and testing and
commissioning shall be through USB interface.
2.2 The system data rate shall be maximized up to 10/100 BaseT networks
compliant to IEEE802.3 using line or area couplers.
2.3 The transmission should be through a decentralized bus access CSMA/CA,

where in an event of collision detection or resolution there would be no loss
of telegrams.
2.4 The data communication should be based on the OSI (Open System
Interconnection) reference model.
3. Bus Cable
3.1 The insulation voltage of the bus cable with the system shall have
adequate protection to meet overvoltage requirement of the wiring
requirement.
3.2 The size of the bus cable should be 2X2X0.8 mm diameter with screen, J-
Y(st)Y 2x2x0.8. each able to withstand 2.5KV and 4KV insulation
respectively of the type of Bus Cable used.
3.3 Bus Cable shall be run in dedicated conduit or as specified. Sharing of

conduit with LV electrical circuits is not allowed.
3.4 The twisted pair bus cable should link all input devices such as switches,
touch panels, motion sensors, light sensor etc. and be connected to output
devices such as switch actuators, dimmer, brightness controllers, etc.
3.5 The bus cable should be able to handle information, data exchange and
supply 24 VDC power to all devices on the bus.
TS/32/3 2602542S/EL
3.6 The topology should be linear, multi-point star or ring in structure.
3.7 The basic installations shall include the following items:
(a) Control Panels
(b) System components and accessories. E.g. Data rails, Data

connector, IP Router, Power Supply, Data rail cover and Bus
connecting blocks.
(c) Switch Actuators and dimmer actuator for all kinds of lighting such
LED lighting, fluorescent lighting, incandescent lighting and halogen
lighting.
(d) Programmable switches with positive on and off status indicators by

LED lights. The configuration of switches varies from 1-gang, 2-
gang, 4-gang and 8-gang. A maximum of 5 switches can be
mounted into a single frame.
(e) Control cable (2x2x0.8 mm, with adequate insulation) for signal
transmission.
(f) Scene/Mood Control programmable switch, shall be also configure
4. System Applications
4.1 Parameter lights along the glass façade shall be equipped with
daylight/presence sensor. These sensors should be able to achieve dual
functions of presence sensing and constant light level control. The sensor
can be used to measure the brightness level in rooms to achieve constant
lux level controls. They shall be switched off or dimmed if sufficient natural
light is enough to maintain the lux level or when no presence is detected.
4.2 Every light fixture shall be grouped with the sensor and generate a zoning
and address.
4.3 Microwave Presence sensors & motion sensors for control of Lights at all
Toilets as specified.
4.4 Daylight sensors for dimming control of Lights at Building’s Common

Corridors, Staircases, areas close to windows and as specified.
4.5 Office shall be equipped with presence sensors with dimming controls. The
switches in the office shall be able to activate/ deactivate the presence
sensor. The switches shall be able to activate scenes or on/off/dim the
lights.
TS/32/4 2602542S/EL
4.6 Open Laboratories shall be equipped with presence/daylight sensors with
dimming controls. The switches in the laboratories shall be able to activate/
deactivate the presence/daylight sensor. The switches shall be able to
activate scenes or on/off/dim the lights. When the brightness detected by
the sensors exceeds the predetermined Upper Threshold level, “Off” or
“Dim Down” Control Command shall be sent to the Switch Actuators or
Switch/-Dim Actuators respectively to manage the Lights in these areas
accordingly. Contrary, when the brightness detected falls below the Lower
Threshold, Lights are “On” or “Dim Up” accordingly. During off-peak hours,
the Presence Sensors start functioning, Lights shall be “On” throughout so
long it continuously sense movements and only switches “Off” upon
continuously sensing no movement for 30min.
4.7 For Multi Purpose Rooms, the system shall be able to use the same control
switch to control individual partition of the room or all at once depending on
the partition condition as close or open between rooms. Dimming Controls
shall be provided for the Multi Purpose Room.
4.8 Lecture Theatres, Auditorium, Tutorial Rooms, Meeting Rooms,

Video/Presentation Conferencing Rooms and College/Seminar Rooms
shall be provided with dimming controls. The switches shall be able to
activate scenes or on/off/dim the lights. Wireless touch panels shall be
integrated with the lighting controls with the all the necessary controller to
interface to AV systems, Motorised Curtain/Blind systems, Motorized
Projector Screens, Security functions, Temperature sensors and many
more and not limited to only Lighting Control, thus providing End Users with
further flexibilities and possibilities of adding this requirement and functions
into the existing Control System at any time in the future.
4.9 Timer Control and motion microwave control for control of lights at External
Areas (eg. Landscape areas, pole light and bollard), building common
areas, loading/unloading Bay, meeting rooms, Lecture Theaters, Seminar
rooms, Tutorial Rooms, College Rooms, Landscapes and as specified.
4.10 There shall be a main centralized control system capable of displaying,

monitoring and control.
4.11 The system should be able to incorporate energy saving features through
the use of timers, motion detectors, light sensors etc so that unnecessary
turning on of loads can be minimized.
4.12 The system devices should be able to communicate or control/monitor via

the existing Local Area Network (LAN), no need to install an additional
dedicated LAN.
4.13 The system should have rated actuators to facilitate the use of energy
saving bulbs or florescent tubes.
TS/32/5 2602542S/EL
4.14 Time Schedules by the Lighting Management Station shall be set for Lights
at Building’s Common Areas, Landscapes and other areas as determined
by S.O. and End Users that requires “Time Control” to be “On” and “Off”
respectively as needed.
4.15 Programmable Switches with Scenes-Effecting type shall be provided at

each Seminar room/ LT and other locations as determined by the S.O. and
End Users to control On/Off/Dim the Lights in these areas and alternatively,
Light Scenes or Preset.
4.16 Dimming can be programmed as needed for easier and convenient control
of lights.
4.17 Microwave sensors shall be provided for all Toilets and to be only
effectively sensing for moments after peak hours of the building operation
whereby, the Lighting Management Station shall sends a Time Schedule
Control Command to enable and disable these presence sensors from
functioning.
4.18 During peak hours, Lights in the Toilets shall always be “On” and when the
microwave Sensors start functioning, Lights shall be “On” throughout so
4.19 Building’s Common Corridors with ample natural lights and other areas as
determined by the S.O. and End Users shall be provided with Daylight
Sensor control. When the brightness detected by the sensors exceeds the
predetermined Upper Threshold level, “Off” or “Dim Down” Control
Command shall be sent to the Switch Actuators or Switch/-Dim Actuators
respectively to manage the Lights in these areas accordingly. Contrary,
when the brightness detected falls below the Lower Threshold, Lights are
“On” or “Dim Up” accordingly.
4.20 Smart Plug Load monitoring and control. Base on wireless Mesh network
to enable the communication between a Mobile application or Laptop with
the Plug Load for the control, setting, collect of data with built in calendar,
power meter and with cut out function to the power supply.
4.21 Microwave sensor for car park lighting and monitoring.
4.22 Technology applications for Human or equipment tracking, Location Way

finding, public transport location, Car position tracing where applicable.
4.23 The system shall be capable to integrate with other new application in the
future.
TS/32/6 2602542S/EL
5. Modular Bus Devices
5.1 All bus devices should be made according to DIN EN 50022 and suitable
for mounting on 35-mm DIN-rail mounting rail.
5.2 Each bus device should have a built-in micro-controller with programmable
Physical Address. The Physical Address should have the capability to be
re-programmable.
5.3 The bus lines should be able to incorporate up to 64 bus devices

connected and these lines should be able to be grouped up to 12 lines
together via line couplers to form an area.
5.4 The switch actuator for lighting control should have a rating of 16AX and
16A AC3 or AC5a utilization category with individual mechanical bypass
switch built into the actuator for each channel.
5.5 Switch actuator shall at each channel be able to feedback the status of the
contact and load.
5.6 The Switch Actuators shall have up to 400,000 times of switching operation
for each channel/output at rated current and up to 1,000,000 times without
load. Verification Report and Certification from manufacturer shall be
provided upon request by the S.O. prior to approval.
5.7 No special digital addressable electronic ballast is needed for all the light
fittings. The switch actuator should be able to control the conventional
electro magnetic ballast or electronic ballast.
5.8 Device for switching and dimming of eight independent groups of

luminaries with LED driver, electronic ballasts, dimmers or transformers
with 1 – 10 V control input. The dimming control per outputs carried out
with two control wires. Maximum control load per channel is 100 mA. The
Switch/Dim Actuator needs only EIB / KNX bus voltage for normal function.
With eight potential free relays the supply voltage of the ballasts and
consequently the luminaries can be switched on and off over or manually
without any auxiliary supply. Contact position is displayed.
The following functions can be set separately for each channel:
- switching and dimming of lighting
- feedback of switching state and brightness value
- different adjustable dimming speeds for dimming and setting brightness
- adjustable upper and lower dimming limits
TS/32/7 2602542S/EL
- recall and set of up to 18 light scenes (8-bit commands) per channel
- 4 presets (1-bit commands) per channel
- integration in constant lighting control (“slave mode”)
- forced operation with higher priority
- staircase lighting function with adjustable staircase lighting time and

warning before switching off
- disable function to prevent unauthorised operation
- characteristic curve adjustment to adapt ballast brightness characteristic
5.9 When combined with the light sensor, the device shall be able to perform
constant light control for the parameter lighting
5.10 Light sensor shall be able to perform constant light level control with
dimmer (ON/OFF switching of lighting circuit and step function control are
not allow). Sensor shall be able to send brightness value to all dimmer in
the system for share sensor function.
5.11 The presence sensor shall control lighting as a function of the brightness
and/or movement. It is designed for ceiling installation and can be both
flush mounted and surface mounted. It should have high sensitivity
sensors/ lens system and depending on the application chosen, different
functions which can be varied via the software. There shall be 4 sensors
with lens in each presence sensor.
5.12 The cable used for connecting the actuator to load should be of a single
core PVC insulated cable.
5.13 No additional power supply is needed for individual bus devices; they
should be powered by the power supply transmitting through the bus line.
TS/32/8 2602542S/EL
6. Programmable lighting controls
6.1 All the lighting circuitries shall be able to being addressable or

programmable at any time. Any areas with more than 2 lighting circuits
shall have a switch to be able to program with a spare rocker for central
control such as ON/OFF or dimming etc.
6.2 The system shall able to incorporate group controls and scenes without
any additional control items and all shall be able to achieve by means of
programming on the actuators and switches.
6.3 Dimming Actuators
(a) For dimming lighting shall be very flexible in planning for changing
the dimming actuator to different loads such as : LED lighting,
Fluorescent lighting with 1-10V control signal, LV Halogen
(Electronic / Conventional transformer), 230VAC Halogen and
230VAC Incandescent.
(b) If higher wattage is required like >1KW… 5KW, additional dimming

amplifier can be extended from the existing dimming actuator,
without any modification at the above ceiling, only affected at the
control panel.
(c) The dimming function shall able provide 1% - 100% dimming

control. While switching function shall be like ON/OFF (Full
brightness/Total darkness) control.
(d) The system shall also able to dim and control numerous/groups of
lighting without much changes to the initial configuration such as
without physical hacking of wall for re-wiring. The changes will be
very minimum only require some software programming.
(e) The system shall allow dimming control points and switching points
to be combined into scene function, and it can be easily
retrieve/recall and store at any programmable switches, touch panel
and any PC at FCC room or other terminal.
(f) These Switch/-Dim Actuators shall have built-in manual overriding

switch for each channel/output for manual switching of the Lighting
State in the event of device or channel/output failure.
TS/32/9 2602542S/EL
6.4 Switching Actuators
(a) The switching actuators can be changed according to different

loads such as different ampere rating e.g. 6A, 10A etc.
(b) The switching actuator receives telegrams from sensors or other

controls via the KNX / EIB and switches electrical consumers by
means of its relay contacts which are independent of one another.
Each switching output has a separate bistable switching relay so
that the states of the switching contacts are safely maintained even
in case of bus voltage failure. The switching contacts are especially
designed for capacitive loads and therefore suited for relatively high
inrush currents.
(c) The actuators shall have the slide switches on the device front
panel, the relays can be switched on and off by hand parallel to the
KNX / EIB even without bus voltage or in a non-programmed state.
This shall be able to permit fast checking of connected consumers
for proper functioning.
(d) There shall be incorporated with logic function individual for each
output, disabling function, timing functions (ON-delay, OFF-delay,
staircase lighting timer, also with early-warning function) , timing
functions (ON-delay, OFF-delay, staircase lighting timer, also with
early-warning function) and light-scenes: up to 8 internal scenes
parameterize as per output.
(e) The actuators shall be able to provide measurement for the

operating hours counter can be activated independently for each
output.
(f) The current measurement for each output can be monitor and
transmission of measured current intensity to the bus via
independent communication objects (transmission in the event of
value changes or additionally in fixed cycles). A load monitoring
function (overload / under load) with predefined load limits (teach-in
or parameter setting) can be optionally activated with separately
parameterize message telegrams. Input monitoring for cyclical
updates with safety circuit.
(g) The specified Switch/-Dim Actuators for dimming a circuit shall

strictly be de-rated by 40% for each channel/output and then
configures accordingly to suite each respective load and
(h) The Switch circuit and not basing on the full capacity of the dimmer
rating, i.e. at all time each channel/output of a Switch/-Dim Actuator
shall strictly have 40% tolerance.
TS/32/10 2602542S/EL
(i) The Switch Actuators for On/Off Lighting Control shall strictly be AX
rated type as shown in the Tender Drawings that supports full load
without having to de-rate when connected with light fixtures with
high peak in-rush switching current such as Fluorescent and
PLC/Compact Fluorescent lamps and according to EN 60669.
(j) Actuators shall strictly be capable of monitoring the state of the

circuitry and report the state of failures with Alarm Alerts. It shall
have built-in Active Current Sensors for every channel/output to
feedback the Load/Current Situation. Load Current threshold can be
set for detecting the MCB and/or RCCB/ELCB trip, no load, partially
lost of load or any fault on the circuitry.
Following functions shall strictly be available with any proposed

Switch Actuators.
i. Load Current Recognition, Load Current Value Send and

Reaction to Current Threshold Values;
ii. Time functions and Delay On/Off;
iii. Forced Control and Safety functions (Overriding Control

during Critical Situations);
iv. Reaction to Upper and Lower Threshold Values;
v. Preferred State for Lights on Bus Voltage Failure and

Recovery.
The Dimming Actuators for other lamps such as 230VAC Halogen

LED Lamps, Low-Voltage Halogen LED Lamps and etc. shall be
universal and Modular Din-Rail Component (MDRC) type that works
on all kinds of transformers or directly without transformer. It shall
supports minimum load of 500W/VA in a single circuit connections
and expandable by End Users by only having to add Capacity
Boosters gradually to the existing dimmers and up to a maximum
load of 3000W/VA for the same dimming circuit.
(k) The specified Universal Dimmer for a dimming circuit shall strictly
be de-rated by 40% for each channel/output and then configures
accordingly to suite each respective load and circuit and not basing
on the full capacity of the dimmer, i.e. at all time each
channel/output of a Universal Dimmer shall strictly have 40%
tolerance.
TS/32/11 2602542S/EL
6.5 DALI Interface Gateway
(a) The DALI Gateway shall be able to interface between a KNX/EIB

installation and a digital DALI (Digital Addressable Lighting
Interface) lighting system. The DALI Gateway allows the switching
and dimming of a maximum of 64 lamps including DALI device (e.g.
LED driver, electronic ballast). Each DALI lamp can be assigned up
to 32 different lighting groups that are controlled via the KNX/EIB.
This permits the integration of a room-specific light control of, for
example, offices, multi-purpose rooms, tutorial rooms and
Laboratories and lecture theatres etc into the higher-level KNX/EIB
building management. In addition, the lighting groups can be
integrated into up to 16 scenes that make it possible to recall pre-
programmed light moods or to save new light scene.
(b) The DALI Gateway shall be able to separate feedback of individual

switching and brightness states of the DALI groups to the KNX/EIB.
In addition, the general DALI operating status can be reported to
the KNX/EIB (error status, short-circuit, status of supply voltage).
(c) The controls at each programmable switches or touch panel / PC

shall permit to manually dim or switch the DALI light groups on and
off in parallel with the KNX / EIB even without bus voltage or in an
non-programmed state (broadcast of all connected DALI lamps).
This feature shall able to quickly test the operability of connected
consumers.
(d) The DALI Gateway is able to check the devices integrated into the
DALI system for integrity. The replacement of a defect electronic
ballast device by a new one, for example, can be detected if the
“Automatic device replacement” has been activated. The decoding
of the parameterized data into the new electronic ballast device is
carried out fully automatic by the Gateway without any special
commissioning. That makes the corrective maintenance of a DALI
system much easier.
(e) The device shall be able can be integrated into scene functions with
different brightness values and centralized switching of all groups is
also possible.
(f) The DALI gateway shall be able to permits the error status
feedback of the connected DALI devices. In case of failure, the
DALI components will send “lamp error” or “Error in device (e.g.
electronic ballast error)”status information to the DALI Gateway
where it will be stored. Furthermore, feedback for DALI short-circuit
shall be also possible to be detected by the DALI gateway.
TS/32/12 2602542S/EL
(g) DALI gateway shall be able to perform central function, defining
brightness value, time delays and scene functions can be
incorporated.
(h) The EIB-DALI Gateway for managing any brand of DALI Ballasts
and Transformers shall have a ready-built Diagnosis Program that
can be installed immediately without any customization into the
Visualization Station for checking various statuses on Lamp/s
Failure, Ballast/s and Transformer/s Failure, 230VAC failure to
Ballast/s and Transformer/s as well as communication failure
between the EIB-DALI Gateway and the DALI Ballast/s and
Transformer/s.
7. IP Router for networking
7.1 The IP router shall be able to interconnect KNX / EIB lines via data
networks using the Internet Protocol (IP). The IP router implements the
EIBnet/IP standard so that it cannot only be used for routing KNX / EIB
telegrams between lines via an IP network, it shall also for accessing to the
bus from a PC or from other DP devices (visualization displays and
applications). The IP router can thus also be used as an IP data interface
for the programming software. By using a LAN modem, the installation can
be remotely accessed even if there is no direct local data network.
7.2 The use of the existing data network for communication between bus lines
in the IP router shall be able to provide: fast communication between KNX /
EIB lines, extending a KNX / EIB system by means of LAN and WAN
beyond a building, direct routing of KNX / EIB data to each network user
(not in bus monitor mode) and KNX / EIB remote configuration from each
network access point.
7.3 In the design capacity as an area/line coupler, the IP router shall be able to
interconnect two KNX / EIB lines to form a logical functional area ensuring
at the same time the electrical separation between these lines. Each bus
line of a KNX / EIB installation is thus electrically independent of other bus
lines.
TS/32/13 2602542S/EL
8. Presence & Motion Sensors
8.1 The Presence Sensors and Motion Sensors proposed shall be KNX/EIB
enabled and integrated type and able to communicate within devices on its
parameter settings that requires no additional cables for power supply and
with the same pair of Bus Cable it shall besides receiving the 24VDC SELV
Bus Voltage also transmit all control functions.
8.2 The Motion Sensors shall be either wall mounted next to the lighting
switches and of the same approved range of switches and sharing the
same frame for the switches and with built-in manual overriding switch or
ceiling mounted with adjustable angle and direction of detections.
8.3 The Wall-Mount Motion Sensors shall have detection of frontier 8m and
side wings (left and right) each 6m and 180 deg. horizontal and downwards
angle of 45 deg. and frontier 16m and side wings (left and right) each 10m
and 220 deg. horizontal and downwards angle of 90 deg. for the long
range, ceiling-mount and weatherproof type.
8.4 The Presence Sensors shall be ceiling-mount type and have possibilities of
controlling lights via sensing of brightness and/or movements. It shall have
high-sensitivity sensors and multi-lens that detect 360 deg. and up to 5m
diameter range at a 2.2m to 3m mounting height.
8.5 The Presence Sensors and Motion Sensors shall besides being able to set
the Lux Intensity and Off Timer via the ETS Program also possible of
setting by the built-in knobs on the devices. It shall also allow for the
adjustment of detection range to the desires of the End Users.
8.6 The Presence Sensors and Motion Sensors shall besides being able to
perform as Lighting Management to achieve energy saving also possible to
act as Security Monitoring to meet the cost saving in materials and
installation as well as maintenance and replacement in the future.
8.7 The Presence Sensors and Motion Sensors shall continues to detect and
send commands to the Visualization Station or BMS/IBMS during its idle
period when lights are not required but security monitoring and protection is
still in need.
8.8 The sensor provided can be used in conjunction with venturi valve /
variable air volume box /Fan Coil unit control via Bus interface to
BMS/IBMS.
8.9 The motion sensor and presence sensor shall be able to be enabled and
disable from the work station.
TS/32/14 2602542S/EL
9. Daylight Sensor
9.1 The desired Brightness Sensor shall be capable of switching Lights and
Other Loads controlled and monitored by the Lighting Control System
depending on the Daylight light intensity. This device shall have the
flexibilities to be programmed as a Twilight Switch detecting 1 to 10 Lux or
a Light Level Switch detecting 100 to 20,000 Lux.
9.2 Upon detecting the brightness exceeds or falls below a specific Threshold,
the Daylight Sensor shall send Control Commands to the Switch Actuators
respectively to control the Lights and Other Loads that are controlled and
monitored by the Lighting Control System.
9.3 The desired Daylight Sensor shall be capable of detecting up to 3 different

Threshold values by a single device.
9.4 The sensor can be used in conjunction with venturi valve / variable air
volume box /Fan Coil unit control via Bus interface to BMS/IBMS.
9.5 Dependent of brightness and motion dependent or motion only dependent

are also possible in terms of software settings.
9.6 Measurement of brightness value can be integrated on the detector device

and enable to feedback to the KNX/EIB bus lines.
9.7 The Daylight sensor level setrpoint shall be able to be adjusted by the user
at the workstation through graphic.
10. Ammonia Gas Sensor
Ammonia gas sensor shall be of electrochemical type with IP65 enclosure,

operating at 12VDC or 24VDC, to detect the Ammonia Gas for urinal cleanliness
for toilet. It shall sense the level of ammonia gas from 0ppm to 100ppm at
operation temperature between 0oC to +40oC and humidity from 5% to 90% RH
non-condensing. The sensor shall transmit to the controller and server. The data
shall be collected and analyzed for preventive and maintenance alert.
11. Methane Gas Sensor
The sensor shall use the Infra red LEL technology with IP65 enclosure, operating
at 12VDC or 24VDC, to detect the Methane Gas level for Kitchen/Laboratory. It
shall sense the level of methane gas from 0% to 100% LEL at operation
temperature between 0oC to +40oC and humidity from 5% to 90% RH non-
condensing. The sensor shall transmit the environment condition to controller and
server The data shall be collected and analyzed for health and safety alert.
TS/32/15 2602542S/EL
12. Carbon Monoxide Sensor
Carbon Monoxide sensor shall be of electrochemical sensing with IP65 enclosure,

operating at 12VDC or 24VDC, for the for the detection of Carbon Monoxide for
enclosed vehicle parking, generator room, gas heater, steam plant room system. .
It shall sense the level of methane gas from 0ppm to 2000ppm at operation
condensing. The data shall be collected and analyzed for health and safety alert
13. Switches
13.1 The programmable switches shall have its parameters programmed, each
switches transmits telegrams to the KNX / EIB. These can be, for instance,
for switching or momentary-contact control, for dimming or for motorized
blind control. It is also possible to program value transmitter functions such
as dimming value transmitters, light-scene extensions, temperature value
transmitters or brightness value transmitters.
13.2 There shall have some programmable switches can come with a LCD
display to visualize its room temperature value acting with thermo stating
functions.
13.3 The programmable switches shall have long-life LED indicators able to be
programmed to illuminate Red LED indicating lights ‘On’ and Green LED
indicating lights ‘Off’ or vice versa for each switch. The 2 colours LEDs
shall also serve as (Night Light) indicating the Switches locations when
required to facilitate convenient identification in constantly dark
environment.
13.4 Each programmable switch shall be able to be programmed to control

On/Off or On/Off/Dim functions on the switch and each dedicated switch
shall be able to perform multi-functions i.e. On/Off control with Short Push
on either sides of the switch respectively and Dimming control with Long
Push. Performing of On/Off and On/Off/Dim with 1 button or 1 side of a
switch is not acceptable.
13.5 The sensor shall at least come with two status LEDs per control surface.
These status LEDs can be program either be permanently on or off, or
otherwise act as an actuation or status indicator for a key or a rocker. As
an alternative, the LED can also be controlled via separate communication
objects. The status LEDS can then also signal the operating states of room
temperature controllers or indicate the results of logic value comparisons.
Another operation LED can also serve as an orientation light (steady or
also flashing) or be controlled via an independent communication object.
TS/32/16 2602542S/EL
13.6 The programmable switches shall be able inscribed with wordings for easy
identification of its functional purposes.
13.7 The programmable switches shall be of latest state-of-art design and with
Stain-Less coating and tamper and thief proof. The Sub-contractor shall
submit the samples for S.O.’s approval.
14. Multi function Sensor
14.1 The multi function sensor shall be of smart integrated type comprises of
occupancy sensor, photo sensor and thermal sensor. Sensor is to be of
compact size, all in one.
14.2 The applications of the sensors shall include but not limited to lighting
control, HVAC control, Space Analysis, location-based and Security
services.
14.3 Occupancy detection should be of passive infra-red motion sensor. Photo

sensor for Daylight or Ambient light detection and temperature detection
using thermal sensor. Multi function sensor shall be able to interface via
wireless. Sensor shall be of low power consumption.
14.4 Multi function sensor shall be of input voltage of 230VAC and low power
consumption, operation temperature between -35oC to +70oC and humidity
from 20% to 95% RH non-condensing.
14.5 The multi function Sensors shall be ceiling mounted next to the light fixture
with adjustable angle and direction of detections and with manual
overriding switch.
14.6 The multi function sensor height of installation shall able to cater to height
range of 2.5m to 12.5m and the sensor sensing distance shall cover at
least 1m to 8m range.
14.7 The deployment of multi function sensor to the light fixture shall be flexible
in its configuration such that a single sensor can either connect to a group
or a single fixture. The coverage range of sensors shall be arranged in
overlapping manner to avoid functional lapse.
14.8 The multi function sensors shall be able to trigger the artificial light dimming
and mixing of daylight automatically to meet the pre-set lux level in the
space
14.9 The light fixture shall be addressable to the Data Server via the connection
of device controller to each light fixture.
TS/32/17 2602542S/EL
14.10 The multi function sensors shall be able to be paired into different fixture
zones, thereby allowing for zonal control and for multiple fixtures to share
occupancy sensing data and respond simultaneously to occupant motion
patterns in the zones.
14.11 The multi function sensor can be used in conjunction with venturi valve /
BMS/IBMS.
15. Interface with BMS/IBMS
The Interface gateway with BMS/IBMS shall be located at FCC room’s control
panel. Each gateway can serve up to 15 lines per 1 Area. The transfer of the data
points is in 2-way communications via data exchange of EIS data RS232 format or
BACNET, the group addresses at each point are swiftly appeared at BMS system
panels and it allowed BMS/IBMS to control and monitoring freely at the Lighting
Control system data points.
16. Monitoring & Control at FCC room
16.1 The central control station at FCC room shall have a Lighting Management
software in which embedded used for controlling and monitoring all lighting.
16.2 The Server minimum configuration shall be at least minimum in latest

Microsoft Server OS, in Intel’s Pentium 4 processor running at minimum
3.2GHz, 8GB RAM, 1TB Hard disk, complete with accessories like USB
Optical mouse, keyboard, CDRW drive, 2 nos. RS232 Serial Port, 3 nos
Ethernet card, 4 nos. of USB, 24’’ LCD flat screen monitor in super VGA
graphics card and with adaptor for Ethernet networking with TCP/IP
network protocols. The system shall have 1hour UPS back up
16.3 The Lighting Management System Software shall be a Windows Based

program with interactive and flexible in programming capabilities.
16.4 The Lighting Management System software shall provide the main
functions :
(a) Password Access – Multi-Level passwords access to enable

various degrees of control to be implemented and the password
level shall dictate the Display Menu options.
(b) Active Status & Control – Visualization of status feedback on all

active status of lighting in the form of graphical layout floor plan and
possible for switching On/Off and performing dimming on dedicated
icons / symbols;
TS/32/18 2602542S/EL
(c) Remote Web Access – Allows up to 20 users with different user ID
and password to access the graphical software concurrently via the
LAN or Campus intranet Infrastructure with specific settings created
by the Network Administrator. The Remote Computer will connect
and interact with the System by Microsoft Windows Internet
Explorer environment without the needs to download any program
or database; Remote desktop type of access will not be accepted;
(d) Scene management and master controls are provided at the

graphical screen; - a digitalized layout displayed symbolically and
also in icon format with corresponding numerals/words, code, the
percentage of the lighting dimming value, the power consumption
(in Wattage), ambient brightness level, occupancy status and
temperature around the sensor. A customized Dashboard shall be
designed with user friendliness. With the built-in useful artificial
intelligent (AI) perimeter, the user shall be able to set different
profiles for the sensors including minimum light level, maximum
light level, ramp-up time, active motion window, motion sensitivity,
and ambient light sensitivity, trigger points for the HVAC. The
profiles can be set for different times of the day, for weekdays,
weekends and holidays.
(e) Time Schedules – The graphical software shall be able to set time
schedules for all zones of lights with daily and yearly time
schedules as well as holidays and special events;
(f) Logical functions for IF/Then functions for complex programming;
(g) Generating Reports – The Management Software shall be capable

of generating 5 types of customized reports. The contents of these
reports shall reflect all Monitored lamps failure status, Total hours
run per zone of lights, Types of faults detected and etc. or as per
the End Users requirement.
(h) Essential Lighting – Each zone of lights may be programmed via

the graphical software to operate as essential lights whenever
needed to.
(i) Hours-Run Monitoring & Re-Lamping Schedules – The

accumulative of run time of each Light Zone shall be recorded and
logged thus enabling the re-lamping schedules to be displayed and
printed for planning and carrying out the replacement works. The
System shall graphically highlight the Light Zones that have
exceeded the User-Defined percentage of usage.
(j) Graphics showing the line status of EIB and Power meter loops
TS/32/19 2602542S/EL
(k) Monitoring of all power meter functions and history- The energy
savings, usage pattern, artificial information of the entire Smart
system down to each individual fixture/sensor level shall be made
available to the user. The savings in KWh, and cost shall be
available in terms of daily, weekly, monthly and yearly savings, and
all data shall be exportable in portable document format (PDF) and
CSV format for excel spreadsheet.
(l) All switchboards and Generators status as indicated.
(m) Energy Management – Energy saving include artificial light tuning,

day light harvesting, HVAC saving, Occupancy saving. The artificial
light management come with mobile Apps and/or wireless room
control handset to activate scenes of the lights
(n) Space Analysis – Space management include generate Heat map,
Motion path and Space utilization pattern
(o) Facility Booking System – Booking through third party interfacing

with mobile Application for booking of facilities, conference room,
meeting room, break out room etc. with auto notifying of booking to
user after 10 minutes from booked time.
(p) Complementing HVAC System – Real time HVAC data (room

temperature with humidity) can be collected and transmit into the
BMS System to fine-tune the building for optimizing of air
conditioning.
(q) Car Park Management – Basement / indoor car park lighting energy
saving and monitoring system base on microwave sensor with
integrated Smart driver for control and data collection.
16.5 The System Software shall be capable of dynamically generate various

types of reports with data visualization tool as required but not limited to
these reports usage by profile, fixture outage and inventory.
16.6 The data storage within the Centralized Data Platform must be scalable,
down time resilience with redundancy and secured to cater to the growth of
storing of overall data for up to 10 years.
16.7 The Centralized Data Platform shall have the capabilities of performing
data analytics aims to immediately extract knowledgeable information using
data mining techniques that help in making predictions, identifying recent
trends, finding hidden information, and making decisions.
16.8 The Centralized Data Platform shall have data integration capabilities that
can help address issues on storage, processing, data analytics, and
visualization tools. It can also assist in improving collaboration and
communication among various objects in a smart building environment.
TS/32/20 2602542S/EL
16.9 The Centralized System shall enable information sharing across platforms
in a convenient manner. It must provide data redundancy by having at least
3 time replications for its raw data storage and able to scale for further
storage space without powering down the system.
17. Testing & Commissioning
17.1 The complete Lighting Control System shall be fully tested and
commissioned by a Specialist to ensure that the desired performance is
met and that the configuration is as per this Technical Specifications,
Design Parameters and Tender.
17.2 The Sub-contractor shall be further required to liaise with the End Users
on the Lighting Control System controls and to assist and advise them on
the programming on the various required settings as well as train them to
use The System. This cost shall deem to be allowed for in the contract.
18. Documentation and As-built Submission
18.1 Sub-contractor shall submit the as built drawing include the following for
system.
(a) All the devices, controller, gateway, lighting fixture physical address
(MAC), IP address and device address for the entire system in
relationship.
(b) Floor plan showing the devices, controller, gateway, location with all
the necessary address indicated.
(c) Floor plan showing all the lighting fixture with sensor installed with
their physical address
18.2 Sub-Contractor shall compile all the in excel spreadsheet on all the
devices, controller, gateway, lighting fixture physical address (MAC), IP
address and device address that being installed.
18.3 Sub-Contractor shall submit all the system programming, and other
necessary software document for the installed system
18.4 Sub-Contractor shall submit all the final as-built program (3 set) after all the
adjustment during Defect Liability Period.
TS/32/21 2602542S/EL
SECTION 33 - LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
1. General
1.1 This section of the Specification and the scope of works comprise the supply, install,
test and commission of the complete lightning protection system and is to be read in
conjunction with the drawings. The provision of all testing facilities shall also be
included.
1.2 The system shall be installed according to the current Singapore Standard SS 555
Code of Practice for Lightning Protection or latest and BS EN/IEC 62305: lightning
protection standard
1.3 The Electrical Sub-Contractor shall inform the Superintending Officer at his discretion
on the inspection of all joints including thermal welded joints and bonds prior to the
erection of formwork for concrete works.
1.4 The Electrical Sub-Contractor shall propose a schedule for the thermal welding or
bonding of joints for Superintending Officer’s approval before commencement of
works.
1.5 All material used shall be from the same brand and the brand name shall be
embossed clearly on all the materials and components.
1.6 All lightning copper tape and aluminium tape where exposed to public and within
human reach shall be of insulated tape type comply to SS CP 555. Addition PVC
pipe casing protection shall also be provided.
2. MATERIALS SPECIFICATION
2.1 Copper Tape
a) High conductivity annealed copper conforming to BS 1433 Grade C101 and

C102.
b) Tensile strength @ 200C : 200 - 250 N/mm sq.
c) Resistivity @ 200C : 0.0 172 x 10-6 ohm metres.
d) 3 second fault current to produce 3750C temperature rise above 300C
ambient: 9 KA
2.2 Components for Copper Conductors
a) Cast Components: manufactured from leaded gunmetal in accordance with

BS 1400 Grade LG1, LG2.
b) Pressed Components: manufactured from naval brass in accordance with BS

2872 Grade CZ1 12.
c) Fixing Screws: manufactured from either phosphor bronze in accordance with

BS 2874 Grade PB1O2M or naval brass in accordance with BS 2874 Grade
CZ112, CZ132.
TS/33/1 2602542S/EL
2.3 Clips for Copper Conductors
DC Clips: manufactured from either outdoor grade polycarbonate or polypropylene.
2.4 Bi-Metallic Connectors
Bi-Metallic Connectors: manufactured from aluminium component of at least 99.5%

pure in accordance with BS 1471 Grade E1b and copper component of high purity
and conductivity in accordance with BS 2874 Grade C 101. The two components
shall be joined by means of a friction weld product in accordance with BS 6223.
2.5 Copperbond Earth Electrodes (RODS)
a) Copperbond rods: manufactured by molecularly bonding 99.99% pure

electrolytic copper onto a high tensile, low carbon steel core.
b) Copper Coating: 99.99% pure electrolytic copper with radial thickness not less
than 0.15 mm for 10mm rods and not less than 0.25 mm for rods larger than
10mm.
c) Steel Core: Low carbon steel with a tensile strength of approximately

600N/mm sq. and a quality not less than grade 43A of BS 4300.
d) Coupling threads: Threads shall be rolled onto the rod, maintaining at least
0.05 mm copper in the thread roots.
2.6 Couplings
Couplings: Manufactured from aluminium bronze in accordance with BS 2871 Grade

CA1O2. The couplings shall be countered bored at each end to a depth sufficient to
completely enclose the threads and so protect them from damage and corrosion.
2.7 Driving Studs
Driving studs for 16mm and 19mm diameter: High tensile socket head cap screws
with a black phosphate finish.
2.8 Earth Rod Clamps
Earth rod clamps: Manufactured from cast bronze alloy in accordance with BS 1400
Grade AB3 or leaded gun metal and fifed with phosphor bronze screws.
2.9 Aluminium Tape
99.95% pure electrical grade aluminium conforming to BS 2898 Grade 1350.

Tensile strength @ 200C : 50 - 60 N/mm2.
Resistivity @ 200C : 0.0283 x 10-6 ohm metres.
3 second fault current to produce 2950C temperature rise above 300C
ambient: 9 KIA
TS/33/2 2602542S/EL
3. HORIZONTAL ROOF CONDUCTOR
3.1 Horizontal Roof Conductor shall be of 25 mm x 3 mm approved material. They shall

be exposed and run along the perimeter of the roof. This roof conductor shall be run
as directly as possible and bends shall be at a radius of less than 15 cm. The roof
tapes shall form a mesh as indicated in the drawings and shall be bonded to the
down conductor through the ground plate. Bi-metallic connectors shall be used for
copper tape/conductor connected to aluminium tape or aluminium coping.
3.2 All metallic structures such as pipes, ducts, metallic root water tanks, cooling tower,
air-conditioning equipment, motor, metallic handrails, curtain wall etc. on the roof or
at the external or protrudes or project out of the building facade shall be bonded in a
solid and permanent manner to the conductor network.
3.3 For outdoor FM, TV and transmission (disc) Aerials, Clause 2.11 in SS 555 shall be
applicable for the lightning protection of outdoor aerial system.
3.4 Approved non-metallic DC clips shall be used for horizontal conductors running on
the brickwall or parapet wall or concrete surface. For flat roof, brass or copper
clamps shall be used.
3.5 Slate holdfast similar to “Furse” conductor fixing No 42 or approved equivalent shall
be used for securing the horizontal conductor on the apex of the metallic roof.
3.6 Corrugation holdfast similar to “Furse” conductor fixing No 43 or approved equivalent

type shall be used for securing copper tape to curved or corrugated surfaces such as
corrugated metallic roof, etc.
3.7 The maximum spacing between clip to clip or holdfast or clip to holdfast shall not
exceed 1000mm centres.
3.8 For concrete roof, the clamping of the copper tapes shall be by mounting these tapes
on purpose made brass or copper clamps on specially designed brass or copper
clamps at 25mm above the surface of the roof at intervals not exceeding 900 mm.
3.9 Waterproofing of the roof surface, roof or any part of the roofing materials that has
been waterproofed shall not be punctured. Contractor is required to propose an
acceptable method before work commence.
3.10 For sheet metallic roof, the termination of the copper tapes shall be by means of
thermal welding to the metallic purlin. Table 3a in SS 555 shall be employed if
thickness of sheet metal used is sufficient for bonding to the metallic structure.
Contractor must ensure the continuity of the metallic roof and the other metallic
structure where thermal welding is carried out.
TS/33/3 2602542S/EL
4. DOWN CONDUCTORS
4.1 Concealed down conductor made of 25 mm x 3 mm tape shall be installed as

indicated on the drawings to interconnect the horizontal roof conductors and the
approved test clamp. Concealed down conductor shall be provided between this test
clamp and the earth termination at the bottom of the building. The down conductor
shall be fixed to the separate independent steel structural bars (diameter T13) at half
(1/2) metre centres with approved steel tie-wires and thermal welded at every 1200
mm to the structural steel bar before erection of formwork unless otherwise specified.
The down conductor shall be connected to the earth electrodes through approved
connection/test clamps.
4.2 Down conductor shall be brought out to the surface of the columns (facing outside of
the building) 1800mm (minimum) above finished floor level for the connection of
approved test clamp which shall be housed in an approved recessed stainless steel
box with cover plate. The level above finished floor level is shown in the tender
drawings for each down conductor.
4.3 Any exposed metal running vertically through the structure shall be bonded to the
down conductor. These include but shall not be limited to the following chilled water
pipes, fire hydrant pipes, water pipes, roof run-off down pipes, sewer pipes, curtain
walls/aluminium cladding, cable trays and any other metal component running
exposed on the other surface of the building. These components shall be bonded to
the down conductor on the upper and lower extremities.
4.4 All metallic roof trusses shall also be bonded to the down conductors using approved
bonding tape metal. All rainwater pipes, catladders and handrails, metal railing shall
be bonded by bonding tapes.
4.5 Down conductors shall be welded at splice joints to ensure electrical continuity. The
down conductors shall be bonded to the footing of the building by means of thermal
welding with a minimum overlap of 120 mm in length and on both sides of the contact
area. The width of the weld shall be at least 20 mm.
4.6 The down conductor shall be of sufficient length so that not more than one joint is
made in each level. The down conductor shall be welded as specified in the above to
the pile cap. The inspection must be carried out by Superintending Officer before
covering up.
4.7 Continuity of every length of the down conductor shall be checked after forming of
concrete and before proceeding to next storey unless otherwise stated.
4.8 All joints that will be buried in concrete or concealed in brick wall, etc. shall be
checked, tested (resistance test) and witnessed by Superintending Officer before
proceeding to next step of installation. Thermal welded joint shall be used for jointing
copper to copper or copper to steel materials.
4.9 Linkway metallic columns where act as down conductors shall be thermal welded to
copper horizontal roof conductors and copper down conductors connecting to earth
terminations.
TS/33/4 2602542S/EL
4.10 Bi-metallic connectors shall be provided between the aluminium and copper
materials.
4.11 Down tapes shall be so routed that there shall be neither sharp bends or horizontal
runs which give rise to problem of re-entrant loops.
4.12 For termination to the external wall or facade of the building, a test clamp shall be
placed and the method of jointing shall be as specified in the drawings.
5. JOINTS AND BONDS
5.1 All joints shall be made by approved thermal welding or of any approved process.
Joints and bonds shall be as few as possible. All joints shall be coated with oxide
inhibiting compound and painted with epoxy resin paint to protect against moisture
and corrosion. Clamps, bolted or screwed joints shall not be used except at testing
points.
5.2 The maximum resistance of a joint shall not exceed 0.5 milliohm.
5.3 All bolts and nuts shall be made of same type and approved type of material. The
clamps and clips used shall also be of approved type of material.
5.4 Approved type of bonds such as “Furse” No 61 watermain bond and No 62 RWP
bond or approved equivalent shall be used for rainwater, pipes and handrails.
6. EARTH TERMINATION
6.1 Earth termination shall be of approved type of copper molecularly bonded to steel
core rod. The minimum diameter of the rod shall not be less than 16 mm and in any
circumstance, it shall be so sized that it can be driven into the soil without or
deforming the rod.
6.2 The length of the rod shall be made up from standard 1200mm or 1800mm lengths
with internal screw and socket joints. The minimum length of earth electrodes driven
into the ground shall be 3600 mm and as many rods of the above length shall be
driven into the ground to achieve an earth termination point.
6.3 The earth termination (earth electrode) shall be connected to the down conductor
through the ground plate; copper tape; pile cap and copper tape. Earth copper tape
connection to the earth electrodes shall be buried at the depth of minimum 800 mm
below final finished level. Contractor shall allow in this tender to provide additional
copper tape, earth electrodes and inspection chamber etc. at a distance of 4000 mm
away from every down conductor points.
6.4 Earth electrodes shall be driven into ground at a distance of at least 1000mm away
from the building line and by means of mechanical hammers employing driving
heads.
TS/33/5 2602542S/EL
6.5 Footing of the building will be employed as earth electrodes. If the earth resistance of
10 ohms cannot be achieved by providing earth electrodes of 4800 mm deep, then
separate additional earth termination with earth electrode and inspection chamber
connected to the down conductor shall be provided at a distance of 4000 mm away
from every down conductors points.
7. INSPECTION PIT
7.1 Cast iron inspection pit and cover, and concrete inspection pit and cover shall be
used for carpark, external and internal of the building respectively. Approved
inspection pit shall be used for external and internal of the building respectively.
7.2 For inspection pit used inside the building, it shall be able to withstand the water
pressure of 80 psi (55 metres head of water) to against the upward seepage of water.
The design of the earth pit shall be in such that it allow for the installation of
additional earth termination without removing the rod threads. Test result from
relevant testing authorities shall be submitted for approval.
7.3 All the inspection pit installed at the turf area in this Contract shall be of the light
weight in construction and also high load-bearing capacity of safe working load of
minimum 5000 kg. It shall be shatterproof, highly chemical resistant and highly heat
resistance type.
8. ELECTROLYTIC CORROSION AT JOINTS
For all joints between any dissimilar materials like mild steel to brass or copper or any
copper alloy, high tensile steel to copper etc, there shall be means of waterproofing
at these joints to prevent rust or corrosion of these dissimilar materials.
9. LABEL
9.1 The end of each down conductor inside the concrete inspection pit shall be labeled
with 10 mm lettering “LIGHTNING EARTH DO NOT REMOVE”, and the measured
earth resistance at each earth electrode (EE pt) without connection to down
conductor, the overall LPS’s earth resistance with whole LPS connections in tact and
the EE pt no. (e.g. Pt 1/12 at 18Ω. LPS at 5Ω) Interpretation of Pt 1/12 is first point of
a total 12pt LPS).
9.2 The label shall be stamped on a brass plate and tied to a small hole at the end of
each down conductor by high durable and reliability PVC cable-tie.
TS/33/6 2602542S/EL
10. TESTING
10.1 All tests shall be carried out according to Singapore Standard SS 555 or latest
edition.
10.2 All tests shall be carried out in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the
Superintending Officer or the representative appointed by the Superintending Officer.
The test results shall be recorded in the Lightning Protection System Test Record
Form and endorsed by the qualified person engaged by the Electrical Sub-
Contractor. All the forms shall be submitted to the Superintending Officer for record
within two (2) calendar weeks after the test. In addition the Electrical Sub-Contractor
shall also be required to certify in writing to the Superintending Officer that the
system is in full compliance with the requirements of the Specification and the Codes
to which they are designed by a Professional Engineer/Licensed Electrical Worker.
10.3 Earth resistance test shall be carried out by the Electrical Sub-Contractor’s qualified
person in the presence of Superintending Officer or his/her representative in dry
weather condition (i.e. after a minimum often (10) continuous rainless days). The
maximum earth resistance of the lightning protection system shall not exceed
10 ohms.
10.4 Contractor shall engage a qualified person Professional Engineer (PE) to

endorse the BCA Form BCA-CSC-CSPLP or BPD-CSC03 -- “Certificate of
Supervision of Lightning Protection System” include all as-built plan and test
reports for the submission to the relevant authorities.
10.5 The performance of the whole installation shall be guaranteed to conform with the
requirements of this Specification. The Electrical Sub-Contractor shall, without
additional charge to replace any works which prove faulty from workmanship or
materials and fully complied maintain the whole installation for the defect liability
period.
TS/33/7 2602542S/EL
Form 5 Lightning Protection System Test Record
Testing Date : Sheet of
Project : Contractor :
Test Instrument : Manufacturer/Model No.
Drawing No.
Serial No.
Item Location/ Earth Resistance (Ohm) Down Conductor Continuity Test (Ohm) Remarks
Grid Lines measured at earth measured from from roof horizontal From curtain wall
No. electrode w/o down conductor conductor to earth capping to earth
connected to down with electrode electrode electrode
conductor connected (top
portion of last clamp
side)
Tested by (LEW) : Witnessed by :
Signature : Signature :
LEW No. : Date :
Company Address :
TS/33/8 2602542S/EL
SECTION 34 - CABLE READY MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION (CATV/MATV)
SYSTEMS
1. GENERAL
1.1. This section sets out the requirements for cable ready master antenna
television (CATV/MATV) system and associated works.
(1) The installation of the system shall be in accordance with Singapore

Standards and IDA’s Code of Practice for Info-communication Facilities
in Buildings (COPIF) latest edition.
(2) The tenderer shall be responsible for the correct location of all
equipment. If there are any discrepancy between the details in the
proposal and the real dimension of equipment, rooms, buildings, etc.
they must be reported immediately upon discovery to the
(3) All elements of the system shall be connected by the Sub-Contractor or

an authorised sub-contractor in order to assure application of all the
manufacturers application guidelines and the high standard of
workmanship necessary in this type of system. The Sub-Contractor
shall supervise and check the performance of such an authorised sub-
contractor.
1.2. The electrical installation shall comply with CP 5: code of practice for
electrical installations and SS CP 555: Code of practice for protection
against lightning.
1.3. The whole system shall comply with Singapore Standard CP 39 Code
of Practice for the Installation of Master and Community Antennae
Television Systems for the Reception of VHF and UHF Sound and
Television Broadcasting Transmission Operating between 5 Mhz and
824 Mhz
1.4. The system shall comprise of the following:
(1) Analog and digital antennae
(2) Distribution or channel or booster amplifiers
(3) Splitters
(4) Feeder cables
(5) TV and FM outlet units
(6) All necessary accessories for the proper functioning of the

system
TS/34/1 2602542S/EL
1.5. The works shall be executed by qualified cable TV specialist
contractors approved by local broadband coaxial cable system
licensee.
1.6. The system shall be designed, supplied and installed such that it is
cable ready and always ready for the telecommunication system
licensees to connect and provide their services.
1.7. The system shall be able to receive digital TV signals of DVB-T2

(Digital Video Broadcasting – Second Generation Terrestrial)
broadcasting standard.
2. SUBMISSIONS
The Sub-Contractor shall submit the following for engineer approval before
installation.
2.1 The detailed products specifications, catalogues. schematic diagrams

and system layout plans.
2.2 Samples of trunking, conduits, pipes, cables, TV outlets, amplifier,

splitter.
2.3 Proposed antenna location with site signal tests, method statement for
antenna mast mounting and mounting details.
3. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
3.1. All necessary attenuators, matching transformers, terminations,

booster amplifiers, channel amplifiers, etc. to ensure proper matching
and performance of the whole system shall be included. All materials
used shall be of approved type by the local broadband coaxial cable
system licensee.
3.2. The system shall provide television reception on Band III and UHF for
TV1, TV2, TV3 and existing local TV channels, UHF for digital TV
signals (DTV) (Channels 27, 29, 31 and 33) and frequency
modulated (FM) sound on Band II over the specified frequency range.
3.3. All components used shall be of noise reducing type and suitably
matched electrically and mechanically into the distribution to avoid
discontinuities in the transmission. All components of the system
shall have Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) better than 1.4 to 1
within the specific frequency range.
3.4. The amplifiers and antenna shall be so combined that all signals sent
into the system have approximately equal levels.
TS/34/2 2602542S/EL
3.5. The system from the antenna to the TV outlets, including all cables,
junction boxes, branch and outlet boxes, amplifiers, splitters, mixers
and equalisers must be completely and continuously screened.
3.6. All components installed shall be adequately protected from theft.
3.7. All cables and outlet used shall be typed approved by SCV.
3.8. The system shall have adequate capacity to drive all TV/FM and
future TV outlets as shown on the Drawings taking into account all
losses through distribution, terminations etc.
3.9. The system shall provide a good television reception on Bands I to V

as well as the FM sound on Band II. The overall performance of the
system conform to the following minimum requirements:
(1) Signal to noise ratio: better than 45 Db.
(2) Mains supply hum: minus (-) 60 dB or less.
(3) The ghost and echo effect due to transmission: minus (-) 40
dB or less.
(4) VSWR shall not exceed 1:1 throughout the frequency range
from Band I to V.
(5) Radiation of signal from the system shall not exceed 4nW.
This corresponds to an unwanted radiation level of 55 dB to
70 ohms.
(6) Cross-modulation: Minus (-) 40 dB or better
(7) A minimum of 34dB isolation shall be maintained between any

two outlets.
(8) Radiation of signals at 3m from any point in the system shall

be less than 50 V/m.
(9) The frequency response shall be flat to ± 0.3 dB or better

within each TV channel and/or FM channel.
3.10. The cross-modulation performance which includes all amplifiers,

bridging amplifiers and repeaters shall be less than 125 dB.
3.11. The ghost and echo effect due to transmission discontinuities shall be
less than -34dB.
3.12. Mains supply hum shall be less than -60 dB below picture carrier
level.
TS/34/3 2602542S/EL
3.13. Radiation of signals from the system shall not exceed 50 mV/m
measured at a distance of 3m from any point in the system.
3.14. The inter-modulation products at the outputs of the broadband/

bridging/repeater amplifiers shall comply with local broadband coaxial
cable system licensee’s standards.
3.15. The system shall be free from any interference or being interfered by
other radiated signal source.
3.16. Antenna System
(1) UHF antenna shall be provided to receive the DVB-T2 signals

which will be broadcast in the UHF channels 21~69 (470~862
MHz). A UHF antenna shall be provided to receive free-to-air
local High Definition DTV channels broadcast via Channel 27,
29, 31 and 33. Additional UHF antennae shall be provided to
receive TV1, TV3 signals and existing local TV channels.
(2) VHF Band III antennae shall be provided to receive TV2 and
existing local TV signals and a Band II FM antenna is required
for the system.
(3) The antennae shall be mounted with adequate interspacing

on communal masts made of thick walled hot dipped
galvanised steel tube adequately secured to resist high wind
loadings or the most severe weather conditions. The
antennae shall have a characteristic impedance of 75Ω and
shall be complete with matching baluns, band-pass filters,
suppression filters etc. The antenna arrays shall be
constructed from the highest quality extruded aluminium
elements.
(4) Splitter mixers, adjustable attenuators, filters, equipment box

and accessories at head end for reception of UHF channels
shall be provided. If the filters do not have internal adjustable
attenuator, external adjustable attenuator is required for each
filter.
(5) The antennae shall be located at the roof taking into

consideration the best receiving conditions consistent with
substantially strong and steady signal strength with no
observable ghosting and where the interference is minimal.
(6) Antennae transformer, if required, shall be provided and shall

be attached to the aerials as built-in balancing transformers.
(7) Antennae of at least 8 dB and minimum 20 dB front to back

ratio shall be used. A monitoring point shall be available at the
head end to assess visually the quality of the signal feeding
the head and amplifier.
TS/34/4 2602542S/EL
3.17. Amplifiers and Power Supply Unit
(1) Separate pre-amplifiers and channel amplifiers shall be used

for signals corresponding to Band I to Band V. In addition,
VHF, FM Band II amplifiers are required. All single channel
amplifiers shall be solid-state type of modular design and shall
have Automatic Gain Control. All amplifiers shall be fitted
together with the power supply unit on a common mounting
rail designed for wall mounting.
(2) The equipment shall be adequately screened from radio

interference caused by other equipment e.g. starters, etc and
shall be enclosed in weatherproof and tamper-proof sheet
metal housing.
(3) Broad-band amplifiers may be used for repeaters and

distribution. Bandwidth of the single channel amplifier shall be
7MHz +0.5 dB. The frequency response of the broad-band
amplifier shall be +1 dB over the specified frequency range.
(4) The skirt selectivity of the single channel amplifier including

the first-stage of the amplifier shall be at least 28dB below the
video carrier at 10.5 MHz from mid-channel frequency.
(5) Amplifier construction shall be such as to ensure long life

reliability and economical running with permanently 'on'
switching.
(6) No components shall be operated above 90% of the

manufacturer's rating.
(7) The external characteristics, frequency response and input

and output characteristics and impedances of the amplifier
shall be submitted.
(8) Attenuators or decoupling components shall be mounted and

fixed within the amplifier with approved plugs and sockets.
(9) All equipment must be perfectly matched.
(10) The amplifiers shall be installed in a suitable place under

shelter on the roof and as approved.

amplifiers shall be supplied and installed. Dedicated 13A
switched socket outlet to supply the amplifier shall be
provided.
TS/34/5 2602542S/EL
3.18. Filters
(1) FM filters shall be provided to ensure that the difference in the

signal levels between the local FM stations is less than 12dB
when it is measured from the antenna output.
(2) External filter at the input of the single channel amplifier shall
be installed to resolve undesirable interference, if required.
(3) The return loss of the filter(s) shall be better than 18dB.
3.19. Splitters and Tee Units
(1) The splitters and tee units shall be of approved type by the
local broadband coaxial cable system licensee.
(2) The input and output impedance of all splitter, spur splitter and
tee units shall be 75W.
(3) A minimum isolation of 25dB between any two output ports

shall be provided by all splitters, directional couplers and
multi-tap combinations.
(4) The return loss for 5 MHz to 1000 MHz at any port with all
unused ports properly terminated shall be 14 dB or better.
(5) All splitters, directional coupler and multi-tap combination

shall have a minimum shielding (screening) effectiveness of
80 dB.
(6) The minimum frequency response of all passive devices,

including taps/tees/splitters, couplers and power inserters
shall be 5 to 1000 MHz.
(7) All the units shall be suitable for use within the specified
frequency range.
(8) Performance of all the units shall not be affected by the high
ambient temperatures on the roof.
(9) The tee units shall be the transformer or directional type.
(10) The maximum number of 4-way tee units that may be

connected to each distribution line shall be four (4).
(11) All split and tees units shall come with housing box of at least
1.0mm thick galvanised sheet or other approved material that
is rust resistant. It shall be painted with a least one coat of
approved anti-rust paint and enamel.
TS/34/6 2602542S/EL
(12) Where remote cable powering is required, the units shall be
capable of carrying up to 55V AC or 30V DC and a current of
2A may be used. The taps/tees/splitters used shall also be
able to carry a minimum voltage of 55V AC or 30V DC and a
current of 5A.
3.20. Line Equaliser Units
Line equaliser shall be provided for the entire system to compensate

for frequency dependent losses for coaxial cables over the Bands I to
V frequency range. The line equalisers shall be installed along the
distribution points such that the signals at each TV/FM and TV outlet
from Bands I to V will not differ by more than 3dB.
3.21. Distribution and Termination Unit
Distribution unit shall be of the broad-band type for frequency ranges

from Band I to V. Termination units shall include 75W resistors and
shall have very low insertion loss. The casing for both types of units
shall be suitable for wall mounting and for receiving screwed GI
conduits. Casings where subject to weather shall be of weatherproof
type.
3.22. TV and FM Outlets
(1) The outlets shall be designed to operate in both the VHF and
UHF bands.
(2) TV/FM coaxial socket outlets shall be the lead-through type.

The sockets shall be constructed on the directional coupler
principle to ensure uniform signal strength and reduce voltage
interference. An isolating transformer or blocking capacitors
shall be provided at each outlet. The finishes of outlet plates
shall be the same as the switch socket outlet plates specified
for the areas concerned.
(3) The cover plate of the outlets must be made of white

polycarbonate material and shall be UV stablised.
(4) The mounting height of the outlets shall follow that of the
power sockets or as approved.
(5) Each TV/FM coaxial socket outlet shall be provided with a

connection flex complete with coaxial plug and 75/300 Ω
matching transformer.
TS/34/7 2602542S/EL
(6) Separate outlets shall be provided for TV and FM reception.
The cover plates shall be suitable for flush mounting to
standard metal conduit boxes with label, for TV and FM
clearly inscribed on each of the plates.
(7) Isolation between any two TV socket outlets within the system
shall be more than 34 dB. TV outlet shall be of single barrel
type.
(8) Isolation between any TV and FM sockets on different outlets

within the system shall be more than 46 dB.
(9) The TV and FM outlets shall have a 75W output impedance

unbalanced.
(10) The insertion loss of TV outlet shall be less than 1.5 dB. The
outlet shall be able to withstand high voltage test of 2 kV rms
for 1 minute.
(11) The side-loss of the outlet shall not vary by more than ± 1.5
dB with reference to the specified value.
(12) The system shall be designed such that no appreciable effect

is caused by the pressure or absence of any of the television
receivers.
3.23. Feeder Cable
(1) Feeder cable of two (2) metres length must be provided for
every TV and TV/FM outlets specified.
(2) The feeder cable must meet the specifications of local

broadband coaxial cable system licensee and UL listed.
(3) The feeder cable shall be terminated with the F and PAL type
connectors at either end of the cable.
3.24. Coaxial Cables
(1) The main trunk and branch feeder shall be of low loss coaxial
cables with a characteristic impedance of 75W, comprising an
inner solid copper conductor with solid polythene dielectric
insulation and an external conductor of copper braid screen or
copper foil covered with protective PVC sheath or Polythene
sheath. The loss of the cable shall not be more than 6 dB per
100m for main drops and 10 dB per 100m for secondary runs
over the specified frequency range. Cables used shall be
specifically designed for transmitting UHF and VHF signals.
(2) Only cables that are imprinted with the manufacturer's names
and model numbers shall be approved for installation. All
cables should be from the same manufacturer to ensure
system compatibility.
TS/34/8 2602542S/EL
4. INSTALLATION
4.1. Antenna
(1) The antennae array shall be capable of withstanding wind

gusts of highest velocity (maximum 125 Km/h) and shall be
erected in such a manner as to be solidly supported without
risk of damage to the supporting structure.
(2) Guy wires shall be of galvanised steel of adequately cross

sectional area or shall be of other corrosion resistant material
of equal strength.
(3) The antenna and its supporting structure, including base,

guys swivel and other accessories shall be inherently
corrosion resistant or shall be rendered so by galvanising or
other equivalent means.
4.2. Aerial and Distribution Wiring
(1) Aerial-drop coaxial cables shall be run in GI conduits and

shall be adequately secured to the mast. Distribution wiring in
the building shall be carried out using coaxial cables and shall
be concealed in false ceiling spaces, wall/slabs etc. in
appropriate cable support system. All coaxial cables for the
system shall be kept away from lighting and power
cables/circuits.
(2) The open ends of coaxial cables in the service duct shall be
sealed with silicon rubber (neutral type) or self-amalgamating
type to prevent ingress of water.
(3) A minimum 300mm length of cable at every TV/FM outlet and

400mm length of cable at every Tee box shall be allowed for
termination.
4.3. Conduit and Trunking Installation
(1) The installation details and requirements of GI conduits,

flexible conduits and trunking shall be as specified elsewhere
in this Specification.
(2) PVC or porcelain tubes may be used for threading through

wall.
(3) All metal conduits and metal casings shall be properly earthed
and painted with cold galvanize paint.
(4) Conduit pipes shall be properly secured to the metal boxes by

means of lock-nut.
TS/34/9 2602542S/EL
(5) All lead wires to and from antenna and amplifiers shall be
properly clipped on to antennae mounting poles, building
structures, etc. at 300mm intervals. Where lead wire is to be
run on top of secondary roofing, they shall be supported by
teak battens and secured at 300mm intervals.
(6) No cables shall be suspended between piles and building.
(7) Conduit pipes at the roof top shall be supported by concrete

cube at 2m interval.
4.4. Surge Diverters and Earthing Bars
(1) All the lead wires (coaxial cables) from the antennae shall be
connected to surge diverters before they are connected to the
amplifiers. Each channel shall be protected by a surge
diverters. All the surge diverters shall be mounted in a nickel
chrome plated or other approved box. F-connectors shall be
used for connections. The RLR of the surge diverter unit shall
be equal to or better than 17 dB for VHF and 14 dB for UHF.
(2) The box housing the surge diverters shall be connected to the
lightning protection system of the Building by means of high
conductivity aluminium tape of 25 mm x 3mm.
(3) Where possible, surge diverters box and the amplifier box
shall be separated by at least 300mm apart.
(4) Earthing bars shall be installed for all the incoming and
outgoing cables at the inputs and outputs of the amplifiers.
(5) The power supply units shall also be protected by surge

diverters.
(6) The surge diverter box shall have a hinged door and shall be
painted with at least one coat of anti-rust paint before spray
painted.
(7) All the protective devices shall be approved.
(8) The earthing conductors that are connected to the lightning

protection system and that which are connected to the
electrical earthing system shall be separated. A minimum
isolation of 2 kV is required.
4.5. Bonding of the Screen of Coaxial Cables
The screen of all the coaxial cable connections at the amplifiers,

splitters and tee units shall be bonded with copper or tinned copper
wire according to the braiding of the coaxial cables before they are
clamped to the earth/classis unless F-type of connectors are used.
TS/34/10 2602542S/EL
4.6. All screws and washers used to mount the tee, splitter, trunking and
outlet boxes shall be of brass type or of equivalent that do not
corrode easily.
4.7. Sub-contractor shall provide and design all necessary power supply
units, voltage regulators, surge arrestors, filters, switched socket
outlet, cables and accessories etc. for the functioning, operation of
the equipment and performance of the system.
4.8. Lightning Protection
(1) Lightning conductors for the antenna mast shall be installed

and effectively bonded and connected to the main lightning
protection system to prevent dangerous voltage from being
conducted to the TV and FM outlets. Lightning conductor
installation to protect the entire system shall comply with the
latest edition of SS555: Code of Practice for Lightning
Protection.
(2) All exposed metallic parts of the antenna system shall be

bonded to the building lightning protection system.
4.9. Labelling of Coaxial Cable
(1) Labelling shall be provided for all the lead wire from the
antennae to the amplifiers including those at the surge diverter
box.
(2) All cables in the junction or splitter/tee boxes shall be labelled

according to the markings given on the circuit diagram at the
amplifier box.
5. CONDUIT SYSTEM
5.1. All the subscriber's outlet shall be concealed
5.2. No joint is allowed for coaxial cables laid underground. Under normal
circumstances, joints are also not allowed for cables laid above the
ground. Where joints are inevitable, the Superintending Officer's
permission must be obtained. Such joints may only be made by using
the correct type of RF couplers, cable splice or connectors and heat
shrunk or cold shrunk sleeves
5.3. The number of coaxial cables run in one conduit shall be such as to
permit easy drawing in. There should also be sufficient space for the
drawing in of additional cables.
5.4. The number and sizes of the cables installed in the conduits shall not
exceed a Space Factor of 35%.
TS/34/11 2602542S/EL
5.5. Guidelines for some of the sizes of conduits and the maximum number
of coaxial cables permitted to be drawn into the particular sizes of
conduits are as follows :
(1) For vertically mounted conduits only
Nominal Diameter of Conduit Max number of cables
25 mm (minimum) 1
(maximum nominal
32 mm 2 diameter of 7.5 mm)
38 mm 2
(2) For horizontally mounted conduits only
Nominal Diameter of Conduit Max number of cables
25 mm (minimum) 1
32 mm 2
(maximum nominal
38 mm 2 diameter of 7.5 mm)
The above guidelines are only applicable to conduits with no bend or a

limited number of minor bends (change of direction is less than 45°).
Where the bends are sharp (internal angle of less than 145°) and
numerous, the Sub-Contractor shall increase the size of the conduits
accordingly so as to permit easy drawing-in of the cables.
5.6. Where the bending of conduits is unavoidable, the following guidelines

must be followed :
(1) not more than two (2) bends shall be made in any unbroken
length of conduit;
(2) the minimum bending radius of the conduit shall be 150 mm or

more depending on the minimum bending radius of the cables;
(3) the maximum length of unbent conduit between junction boxes

shall not exceed 15 metres;
(4) junction boxes shall be at least 150 mm x 150 mm x 50 mm; they

must be treated with anti-rust paint and must have a waterproof
cover;
(5) junction boxes shall be used at sharp bends;
TS/34/12 2602542S/EL
(6) if the junction box is within 1 metre of a bend, the change in
direction shall not exceed 90° and in other cases when the
distance is less than 1 metre, it shall not exceed 45° ;
(7) moulded elbow joints and tee joint shall not be used;
5.7. The jagged ends of the conduits must be filed or bushed so that the
sharp edges do not damage the cable.
5.8. Separate conduits must be used for the A.C. power cables and the
coaxial cables. The A.C. voltage shall be stepped down to below 50
volts for transmission in the underground conduits. The transformers
must have a minimum current rating of 2 Amperes.
5.9. The roof-top conduits shall have a nominal diameter of 32 mm

throughout. If the space factor of 35% is exceeded, the size of the
conduits must be increased accordingly.
5.10. The roof-top conduits shall be painted with at least one coat of anti rust
primer paint, one coat of base paint and two coat of finishing paint.
5.11. The roof-top conduits shall be supported by concrete cubes and cement
mix at every one metre interval. Conduit joints must be tight and the
edges of junction boxes must be sealed and waterproofed.
5.12. The G.I. conduits shall be class 4 comply to IEC 61386 (or BS 4568
class 4 Part 1 and 2).
5.13. Conduit pipes shall be properly secured to the junction boxes.
6. THE UNDERGROUND SYSTEM
7.1. Cables laid underground must be 750 mm below the finished level.
They shall be run in G.I. or PVC conduits and protected by LT bricks.
The minimum diameter of the conduits shall be 50 mm. The LT brick
must be at least 35 mm thick and 150 mm wide with the word "CATV"
engraved on it. It must be also be reinforced with wire mesh. All the
conduit joints must be carefully sealed and waterproofed.
7.2. At road crossings, cast iron pipes of 100 mm diameter shall be laid. The
G.I. or PVC conduits shall then be threaded through them. The
remaining space at both ends of the cast iron pipe must be blocked by
sand bags. Road crossing pipes must be laid before the final stages of
the road construction. The Sub-Contractor must obtain written approval
from the relevant authorities before carrying out the road crossings. The
Sub-Contractor must also apply for the permission as early as possible.
7.3. The Sub-Contractor shall lay the approved type of underground conduits
before the pavements and drains are concreted. No hacking is
permitted.
7.4. Moulded type of 90° jointing sockets for the PVC conduits shall not be
used.
TS/34/13 2602542S/EL
7.5. The minimum bending radius of the underground conduits shall be 1000
mm. The unbroken length of conduit may be bent.
7.6. 90° bends must be avoided and double-Z or double-S bends are not
permitted.
7.7. Approved above-ground junction boxes are required if the routes are
long and consist of many bends. The Superintending Officer shall
decide the number of boxes required.
7.8. All the underground trenches, conduits and cables must be inspected by
the Superintending Officer before they are covered up. If the Sub-
Contractor covers up the trenches without the knowledge of the
Superintending Officer, the Superintending Officer can request the Sub-
Contractor to open up the trenches for inspection without compensation.
7.9. The Sub-Contractor shall provide markers for the underground cable
routes and road crossing. They shall be installed at every 15 metre
interval or when there is a change of direction or where the
Superintending Officer's directs. The Sub-Contractor shall replace the
damaged cable free-of-charge if markers were not installed to indicate
the presence of the cable.
7.10. Equalisers must be used for all sections of the underground systems.
7. TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
7.1. Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the commissioning of the

complete system(s) and shall submit method statement for testing and
commissioning before carry out the work.
7.2. Prior to commissioning, the Sub-Contractor shall submit a time

schedule for this work. A sufficient number of qualified commissioning
engineers shall be provided to ensure timely commissioning of the
system.
7.3. Field tests shall be carried out to determine the minimum heights and
number of masts required and the numbers and arrangements the
antenna elements to be used and the best locations to give the best
reception of all the TV and FM channels.
7.4. Test. commission and system trial operation on all outlets to

demonstrate the perfect operation of the system using a colour
monitor TV set and a radio receiver shall be carried out jointly
between the Superintending Officer and the site engineer of the Sub-
Contractor.
7.5. Signal measurement shall be conducted and test reports be

submitted for certification.
TS/34/14 2602542S/EL
7.6. In the event of the component units and/or cables failure in such tests
and/or system proposed cannot meet the requirements specified due
to the usage of the inconsistent component units or cables, the
system shall be made good.
7.7. After satisfactory completion of installation, commissioning, the Sub-

Contractor shall demonstrate that the system successfully performs
the tasks set forth in the Specification
8. CERTIFICATION OF SYSTEM
8.1. The Sub-Contractor shall submit all the necessary test reports and
Cable Ready Certificate to engineer.
8.2. IDA’s authorised broadband coaxial cable system licensee shall be

engaged to inspect and certify the facilities, space and system
signals for the provision of broadband coaxial cable system in the
building comply fully with the specifications and other requirements in
COPIF. The cost for all inspections, testing and commissioning and
fee for the obtainment of Cable Readiness Certification (CRC) shall
be included.
8.3. The CRC shall be submitted for the application of TOP.
TS/34/15 2602542S/EL
SECTION 37 - POWER QUALITY MANAGEMENT
1. General
This section intended to define the scope of work for power quality management
for Electromagnetic Force and harmonic generated equipment.
2. Power System Modelling and Simulation
The contractor is required to provide pre-installation power system modelling,

simulation and analysis. It consists of load flow, short circuit, voltage drop and
harmonic analysis. Based on the results of the modelling and analysis, the
contractor shall make recommendations for improvement to the power
distribution system for compliance to EN Directive 2004/108/EC. The electrical
distribution system shall be designed to avoid the EMF/EMI effect on sensitive
critical load i.e. medical & imaging equipment; within the area of their prospective
use.
The recommendations shall include the appropriate power quality mitigation to

arrest the following Power Quality issue benchmarking against its respective
standards at all the incomer of the Main Switchboards, Generators Switchboards
and Data Centre Switchboards:
a) Transient Surge Voltage (IEC 1024/ IEC 62305)
b) Harmonics (IEEE 519 1992)
c) Voltage Flicker (ER P28 UK)
d) Voltage DIP / SAG (IEC 61000-4-11 and IEC 61000-4-34)
e) Total Power Factor (at least 0.9 lag; without over compensation)
As part of the modelling and simulation work, the contractor shall liaise with user
to gather data of research equipments such as NMI machines, CT Scanner
machines, MRI machines, X-Ray machines, Data Centres, etc.
3. Post-Commissioning Site Measurements
After practical completion, upon user moving in can commission the equipment,
the contractor shall conduct post-commissioning site measurements of the Power
Quality (disturbance, harmonic voltage & current distortion, voltage flicker and
voltage & current unbalance) and consumption (apparent, reactive & working
power and total power factor). It shall be measured (with measurement duration
of 72-hour for each location) and verify at all the incomer of the Main
Switchboards, Generators Switchboards and Data Centre Switchboards.
The Power meter / logger used shall be true class A type according to IEC
61000-4-30.
The recorded PQ parameters shall benchmark against IEEE 519 1992 and
Engineering Recommendation (ER) P28 UK.
TS/37/1 2602542S/EL
Chillers, AHUs, High Plume Fan and other critical load ( Critical research facilities
Equipment connected to Variable Frequency Drive and other medical diagnostic
equipment especially the imaging device) shall be subjected to on-site voltage
SAG immunity test benchmarking against IEC 61000-4-11 and IEC 61000-4-34.
The Electro-Magnetic Field measurement shall be in accordance with AS/NZ

4252.1 1994.
4. Routing and Installation of HT and LV Cables
The contractor shall analyse the routing of HT and LV cables and recommend
the necessary measures to be taken, including cable laying configuration, to
reduce the level of magnetic field (EMF/EMI) of heavy current circuits to minimise
risk of potential EMI interference to nearby sensitive equipment and system.
TS/37/2 2602542S/EL
SECTION 38 - EMERGENCY VOICE COMMUNICATION / PUBLIC ADDRESS /
BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEM (EVC/PA)
1. General
1.0 The scope of work to be covered in this section shall include the supply,
delivery, installation, testing and commissioning and the final handing over of
a flexible Emergency Voice Communication (EVC) /Public Address
(PA)/Background Music (BGM) System as indicated in the tender drawings
and described herein this Specification.
1.1 The works covered in this section is considered as specialist works; the Sub-
Contractor shall seek competent specialist in this field to prepare submission
for the works as part of the tender submission.
1.2 The Emergency Voice Communication system shall comply with
a) SS546: "Code of Practice for Emergency Voice Communication

System in Buildings" and “Fire Precautions for Building”.
b) SS CP 638: Code of practice for electrical installations
c) BS EN / IEC 60065: Audio, video and similar electronic apparatus.

Safety requirements
d) BS EN / IEC 60529: Degrees of protection provided by enclosures

(IP Code)
2. System Requirement
2.0 The system shall function primarily as Emergency Voice Communication

System for evacuation purpose to comply with Singapore Fire Code and
provide background music and paging as secondary usage. It shall be able to
conduct general paging and background Music broadcast at different priority
level.
2.1 The system shall be fully tested with proper simulations by stages of alarms
and emergency voice responses according to the fire codes and SS546.
2.2 The system shall be a digital matrix system integrated with a Personal
Computer for TCP/IP based functions ensuring a more efficient and cost-
effective network solution. The system communication network shall be of
non-proprietary open protocol. The system shall be up-gradable in future to
support visual paging capabilities for integration with IP Cameras for
monitoring of key zones during an announcement broadcast. It shall have a
central monitoring PC on the status of the system including the functional and
operational such as the controller operational status, the health status of
each power amplifier including the standby amplifiers, the health status of the
speaker circuits etc..
TS/38/1 2602542S/EL
2.3 The system equipment shall be of one single brand, except for the music
source equipment.
2.4 The system shall fulfill the following requirements :
a) clean, undistorted announcements to selected areas during public

addressing.
b) clean, undistorted paging to selected areas. This shall include over-

riding of the volume controls, allowing emergency announcements to
be heard at full volume. Volume control complete with over-riding
relays shall be provided to all seminar rooms, auditorium, teaching
rooms, meeting rooms, conference rooms, discussion rooms,
classrooms, debrief/briefing rooms, Board room and tutorial rooms.
c) Background music to selected areas when other functions are not

selected.
2.5 The system shall be modular in design and comprise an intelligent System
which can be expanded by adding modular cards, power amplifiers and
others to meet the complete system requirement.
2.6 The central amplifiers and equipments shall be centralized and located in the
Fire Command Centre as shown on the drawings and the monitoring of the
control systems, the speaker line and the amplifiers shall all be connected
back to the Fire Command Centre for central monitoring and reporting.
2.7 Switching of zones shall be carried out at input side, with each zone having
its own amplifier, for all zones requiring background music so different zones
can have their own selection of music, which shall be time-programmable
and also having the capacity to match the number of speakers in the zone.
2.8 A chime shall first be heard for those areas selected for public addressing,
then followed by the announcement.
2.9 It shall be possible to program different charms/alarms for different user keys.
2.10 Hard lighted button with cover shall be incorporated for the override of PA
testing message, Fire standby message, Evacuation message and False
alarm message.
2.11 Cables for the local microphone paging stations shall be connected to the
central system. These cables shall be supervised by the system for the
disconnection/fault of microphone paging system. Dedicated cables shall be
run as required for the connection of these microphone call station to the
central rack at the Fire Command Centre.
TS/38/2 2602542S/EL
2.12 The audio transportation in the system shall be in digital form except for the
100V speaker lines output from the power amplifiers. The system shall
provide simultaneously broadcasting of different calls to different locations, so
as there is no conflict in the zones selected. The system shall be able to store
at least the last 200 messages in the memory of the network controller. It
shall be possible to log any changes in status of the system in an external PC
connected to the Ethernet port of the network controller.
2.13 The system shall be designed to handle different call stations and different
commands in operation simultaneously, provided there is no conflict in the
zones being called by the call station and also it shall have a system of
priority to cope with conflict situation.
2.14 It shall be able to be programmed for different priorities on different user keys
of the call stations under conflict situation. Changes on priorities shall be
possible by re-programming through the keyboard of the central processor.
2.15 The call station shall have a goose neck microphone complete with individual
zones, floors, departments (user group) and entire building selection buttons
which shall be provided as indicated in the drawings. An alpha-numeric
display panel shall also be provided attached to the microphone to display the
name of zones, floors, user groups and whole building selection status. The
system shall also have a monitoring system to continuously monitor from the
call station onwards. Any fault shall be displayed on the panel as well as on
the PC monitors, LED flashing and buzzer activated. Means of muting the
buzzer shall be available.
2.16 The system shall have the flexibility of allocating or changing zones to each
user key by re-programming using the keyboard without the need for re-wiring
the system. It shall be possible to select and programme different music
inputs to the different group of building zones at different time. The
background music shall be cut off to the selected zones during an
announcement.
2.17 The entire system shall be electrically supervised, and reported, by means of
the fault monitoring PC at the Fire Command Center to monitor all outgoing
announcements and to indicate malfunctions including short and open circuits
and grounds, in components and in each speaker circuit. Supervision shall
include all speaker lines, and amplifiers and microphone call station.
2.18 The system shall be capable of delivering a minimum sound pressure level of
10 dB above the ambient noise in any areas of the building at the listening
level of 1.5m above floor level.
2.19 An articulation loss of consonants of less than 15 % shall be maintained.
2.20 The reinforced sound shall be distributed evenly throughout the listening
area. Total variation in each area shall not exceed +/- 4 dB.
TS/38/3 2602542S/EL
2.21 Zones for paging announcement shall be compensated by providing tone
control facility, if necessary.
2.22 It shall be possible to select and programme different music inputs either
from CD players, to different zones including pre-programmable time settings
for each music source for each zone with background music via the
keyboard.
2.23 Localised volume control shall comply to the latest safety requirements and
shall be over-ridden when the emergency announcement is activated and
submit to S.O. for approval.
2.24 Background music and localised public address systems shall be over-ridden
during an emergency announcement.
2.25 All input equipment such as microphone line amplifier, preamplifiers, chime
units etc, shall be of modular type such that in the event of any failure of
these units, they shall easily be replaced by unplugging the faulty unit and
plugging in a new unit.
2.26 The history of events including the self-diagnosis reports shall be stored in a
database format and be retrieved within the PA system network via a PC.
2.27 Under normal operation, the PA system shall be able to broadcast different
Background Music (BGM) to different designated zones simultaneously. This
system shall provide at least 20 different BGM signals broadcast to different
speakers zones simultaneously.
2.28 The Sub-Contractor shall liaise and co-ordinate with the Fire Alarm System
Contractor on the interfacing works including testing and commissioning. The
activation of any particular zones, floors or buildings shall be followed closely.
The Sub-Contractor shall also co-ordinate with other specialist on the
interfacing to their Audio systems including testing and commissioning.
2.29 An Auto Changeover Monitoring Panel (ACMP) shall be provided to

constantly monitor the functioning of power amplifiers and shall automatically
switch in a spare power amplifier in case of failure of any of the amplifiers.
2.30 Standby batteries (UPS system) shall be provided to provide electrical power
supply to operate the Central Emergency Voice Communication System in
case of failure of the normal power supply. The batteries shall be kept fully
charged by a permanently connected automatic boost/trigger battery charger.
The capacity of the batteries shall be sufficient to operate the whole system
for not less than 2 hours. The status of every local UPS should be monitored
centrally at the FCC room.
TS/38/4 2602542S/EL
2.31 Digital message module shall be provided and located in the system
controller for pre-recording of emergency messages to be broadcast in case
of emergency. More than one message shall be able to played
simultaneously. The status of these messages shall be monitored. These
messages shall be able to be recalled for playback, either automatically or
manually.
2.32 For excavation and emergency procedures, signals shall be programmed to

precede an announcement from the call station, or they shall be capable of
being broadcast independently by selection of a defined user-key.
2.33 The system shall be able to broadcast pre-recorded emergency messages

during fire alarm activation. It shall be able to broadcast another pre-recorded
message automatically after fire alarm activation.
2.34 A switch shall be provided to silence all the fire alarm sounding device in the
building when the speakers are in use during the fire alarm activation, but
only after the fire alarm sounding devices have operated and initially for not
less than 15 seconds.
2.35 The system shall satisfy the emergency specification IEC 60849 and shall be
tested and certified to be compliant to IEC 60489, and local Code of Practice.
2.36 The system shall include user-friendly call station. The user can view if the
selected outputs are occupied by higher-or-lower priority calls. The operator
shall also have the option of listening to the chime/pre-recorded
announcements via the loudspeaker in the call station.
2.37 The system shall be able to make emergency calls (all calls) even if the
controller failed.
2.38 The system in its complete configuration shall provide at least the following
functions:
a) Routing of audio from any input to any output.

b) Routing of multiple background music sources to different zones or
audio outputs.
c) Monitor the correct operational status of the power amplifiers and
shall change over to the designated spare power amplifier in case of
a fault.
d) All audio inputs and outputs shall be provided with digital parametric
equalizers.
e) Capability to enable and disable any of the inputs and outputs.
TS/38/5 2602542S/EL
2.39 All paging calls made whether in the system from the FCC room should be
monitored by the P.C. located in the FCC room. The call monitoring system
shall be able to provide the following details:
a) Date of call made.

b) Time for start of call.
c) Time for end of call.
d) The paging microphone station identification.
e) The zones called.
3. Equipments
3.1 All equipment such as power amplifiers, and its ancillary equipment shall be
mounted onto a proper equipment rack. All input units shall be of an
interchangeable modular type such that the individual modules can be
mounted in mixer frames, or in mixer power amplifiers. All system and
peripheral units shall be properly matched with the equipment rack and
provide compact and neat installation.
3.2 Ambient Noise Analyzer

Dual channel ambient noise analyzer shall be included in the system and
shall be installed at 24hrs Operation zones at the input stage of the particular
amplifier. The proposed unit shall be equipped with a remote microphone
sensor to pick up and analyze the surround noise level. Location of
microphone shall be determined at site to achieve the best possible sensing
position. In the event where the surrounding ambient noise is greater than
the set threshold, the reaction time shall not be longer than 25 sec to adjust
to the required levels.
a) Number of channels 2 Channel

b) Signal to Noise 60 dB
c) Frequency Response 50 Hz - 18 KHz
d) Balance Input 0 dB
e) Analyzed Bandwidth Noise 160-200 Hz
f) Analyzing Frequencies 187 MHz - 375 MHz - 750 MHz
- 1500 MHz
g) Mic Input Metering LED
h) By-pass Switch Yes
i) On-Off Switch Yes
3.3 The power amplifiers channels shall each be provided with built-in digital
delay unit for the audio outputs. This delay shall be configurable in the
configuration software.
TS/38/6 2602542S/EL
3.4 The technical performance of the equipments for the systems shall comply
with the followings:
a) Controller, power amplifiers and audio expander shall have at least

2x16 LCD display to show their own settings.
b) Perform monitoring of all equipment and cabling. Any faults in the
system shall be reported to the controller.
c) Logging of calls made with date, time, initiating unit, key details
and destination.
d) Capability to set the volume level for the individual zones
e) Provision to allocate multiple pre-recorded messages to a selection
key, together with the outputs and press-to-talk functions.
3.5 Faults in the system shall be acknowledged by muting a sounder connected

to the audible alarm relay. The fault status shall be reset automatically after
the fault had been reset.
4. Main Control/Monitoring System
4.1 The system shall include but not limited to the following :
a) 19 inch rack
b) Display and keyboard card
c) Input card
d) Central processing card
e) Signal generator card
f) Matrix card
g) Tone control card
h) Digital message card
i) Power supply
j) Interconnection board
k) Desktop Computer with 32” LCD monitor, CPU shall have a minimum
Memory of 1 GB (512 MB Minimum), Pentium 4 processor, 2.8 GHz
Clock Speed (2.0 GHz minimum), Hard Drive of 80 GB free hard drive
space (40GB minimum), CD/RW, DVD/RW CD ROM Drive of 32X
performance, USB ports Keyboard, Mouse, LAN communications and
Ethernet communications board. The software to monitoring and
control of the public address and emergency communication system
provided shall be OPC and suitable to link to BAS/IBMS.
l) Dot-matrix printer (min 132 col)
m) Control Relay Card and others
Sufficient quantity of the above items shall be provided to meet the functional
and operational requirements of the complete system installation.
4.2 Central processor card shall be expandable to control a maximum of 16 call

stations, 160 user keys, 1024 matrix points, 128 relays and 8 signal
generators.
TS/38/7 2602542S/EL
4.3 The card shall be able to perform the following functions :
a) Detection of call station user keys.

b) Routing of microphone and attenuation signal tones actuated by the
user keys to loudspeakers located in geographical or functional
zones.
c) User key priority level setting.
d) Coupling of the attenuation signal tone with the user key so that when
the key is pressed, the tone shall broadcast before, or instead of an
announcement.
e) Switching of speaker volume control override circuits via the control
relay card, during an emergency.
f) Checking of the system hardware - continuously scanning the system
hardware to check for errors, malfunction or disconnection. Error
message shall be displayed on the display and keyboard card.
g) Real time clock to display the time, in date and hours and minutes.
Central processor card shall control the operation of the system for example :
detection of the user keys being pressed, routing of the microphone and
attention signal tones, setting of the priority levels and switching of the
loudspeaker volume control override circuits. It shall act as the 'watchdog'
continuously checking the system hardware.
Signal processing card shall be provided for the call system input. The unit
shall comprise one fitter combination audio channel and one
compressor/limiter audio channels.
The compressor/limiter channel shall supply uniform microphone output

levels, compensating for variations in voice volume, irrespective of different
voice strengths and speaking distances. It shall reduce the input peak above
the pre-set threshold and restricting the maximum output level to protect the
amplification equipment from peak overloads.
4.4 Display and keyboard card shall be mounted on the front panel of the rack
frame of the central processor and shall be used for the user programming
and changing of functions of the system.
Display and keyboard card shall have a 24 keys keyboard and a 2 x 40 LCD
character display which show the sequence of the programming.
The keyboard shall be used for selection of call station numbers, user key
number, priority level, attention signal tone and programming. After the
programming, the card shall return to the normal mode without any influence
on the processor, unless the correct password is entered.
4.5 Input card shall provide the interface between the call station and the central
system. Each card shall have audio I/O and shall provide each call station
with phantom powering for the microphone and amplifying the audio signals
and user key detection.
Screwdriver type potentiometer shall be mounted on the card for the

adjustment of each amplifier gain.
TS/38/8 2602542S/EL
4.6 Signal generator card shall be controlled by the central processor and pre-
programmed with 30 different signals, chimes, alarms and test tones.
Any signals may be programmed to precede an announcement from a call

station or be used alone as an alarm or warning tone.
4.7 Matrix card or other electronic devices shall be provided to enable the input of
the system to be routed to the output speaker circuits. Through solid state
crosspoint switches, the isolation between different channels shall be better
than 90 dB. All switching of zones shall be done at the input of amplifiers.
It shall have the mean to prevent switching of more than one input to the
same output simultaneously.
4.8 Tone control card shall be inserted after the music input to allow for
compensation of irregularities in the music source. A separate input/channel
shall be allocated by each music input.
Either an universal pre-amplifier or a tone control card shall also be inserted

before the power amplifier to compensate for the different room acoustic in
each zone.
Each unit shall have independent circuit each having separate bass and
treble amplification and attenuation to a maximum of 10 dB.
Each tone control card shall be provided with 4 inputs.
Splitter input shall be provided to allow inputs to be fed by a single source.
Screwdriver type potentiometer shall be provided to adjust the gain from -10
to +10 dB. The unit shall be able to accept a balanced or unbalanced source
without any loss of sensitivity.
4.9 The system shall include the digital message units, for playback for pre-
recorded emergency messages. Any one (1) or a combination of several
messages, or the same message, to be repeated up to 5 times, can be
selected for playback from any of the user keys on the microphone paging
console. The same should also be played back when triggered by any of the
inputs from the fire alarm system.
Recording time provided shall be a minimum of 600 seconds, which shall

allow up to a minimum 12 different messages to be pre-recorded.
The digital message units shall also be modular card format, similar to the
cards of the control system. The healthiness of these cards shall also be
continuously supervised and reported on the central fault status reporting PC
at FCC room.
TS/38/9 2602542S/EL
4.10 Digital message card shall allow digital recording of up to 7 individual
messages. The maximum recording time per card shall be 120 seconds.
Messages of varying duration shall be able to be recorded. Up to 5 messages
shall be able to be played back simultaneously to the various part of the
buildings. These messages shall be selectable via the user keys on the any
of the zone/call stations. Total messages duration shall be 325 seconds.
The messages shall be remain intact in the memory for up to 30 days when
power is switched off.
Automatic gain and output volume control shall be provided. A limiter shall
ensure the message is recorded at a fairly constant level.
The message shall be easily changed by re-recording simply by plugging in a
microphone.
The message card shall be modular in design and shall allow for easy
expansion by adding of cards.
The card shall be able to be taken out for remote recording. The message
shall be played back either individually preceded by any pre-selected a chime
and a possibility of with/without switching on of the respective microphone for
manual/adhoc announcements.
4.11 Control relay card shall be provided to override the speaker volume control.
4.12 The system shall be able to configured and monitored through the PC. The
software shall allow configuration and monitoring of the system. shall be
equipped with at least 3-level password protection. 10 user-definable
passwords shall be available in each level.
4.13 The fault monitoring P.C. at the FCC room shall be able to perform at least
the following function:
4.13.1 logging of all PA calls, for all local and the central system including
PA call made by fire alarms.
4.13.2 fault status reporting of each control system including each local
message card which shall indicate the malfunctioning / error of each
input and output connection.
4.13.3 fault status reporting of the operational and standby amplifiers in each
system.
4.13.4 fault status reporting of all loudspeaker circuits/zone
4.13.5 fault status reporting of each UPS.
The reporting shall detail the location/description of the device.
TS/38/10 2602542S/EL
5. Microphone Paging Panel System/Call Station
5.1 The station shall be provided with a built-in compressor preamplifier to

eliminate overload distortion. It shall have user programmable functions of
cascade priority and the number of individual paging controls shall be
expandable. Each station shall have both "busy" and "in-used" LED I
ndication. A VU meter for monitoring the output level and a "busy" lamp to
indicate when other microphone having higher priority are in use.
5.2 The station provided shall have 1 all call button, 1 button for each of the
zones and 1 button for user groups served by the system.
The station top paging console shall be located at the Fire Command Centre.
It shall be equipped with a compressed 0dB output and have a built in 1 watt
amplifier and speaker with volume control. It shall come with a
programmable digital chime. The front panel shall have LED monitoring with
0 volt contact switching for zone selection. It shall have button to perform
activation, emergency pre-recorded messages.
5.3 The zone switch for individual zone are latchable type whereas all call and
press to talk switch are non-latchable type.
The microphone system has comprise of two series of four notes electronic
chime when activated.
5.4 The combination of geographic zones linked to the user keys selected, type
of chime signal, priority call etc shall be programmed by the central system.
Reprogrammed of these functions shall be possible at any time, through
system keyboard.
5.5 The technical performance of the microphone shall meet with the following:
5.5.1 Type: condenser (Noise Cancelling Dynamic type)

5.5.2 Polar pattern: Cardioid (Unidirectional)
5.5.3 Output impedance: 200 ohms
5.5.4 Output level at 1 kHz: -- 76dB + 3dB
5.5.5 Frequency range: 100 Hz -- 16 kHz (Frequency response uniform)
5.5.6 Sensitivity : 2.0 mV/Pa + 3 dB
5.5.7 Pre-amplifier Output Level : 0 dB/600 ohms
5.5.8 Amplifier Input Level : 0 dB/600 ohms Transformers Balance
5.5.9 LED Switching : Voltage Free
5.5.10 Distortion: <1%
5.5.11 Signal-to-noise ratio: >55 dB
5.5.12 Chime : Digital Programmable Chime
5.5.13 Material : Metal
TS/38/11 2602542S/EL
6. Amplifier and Supervisory Unit
6.1 The amplifiers used shall be completely solid state. They shall be of such a
design to permit operation in open output circuit without damage to the final
stage. A transistorized protective circuit shall be provided, which shall enable
the amplifier to restore itself to full operation within one millisecond after a
short or overload condition has been removed.
6.2 The Power amplifiers shall be multi-channel type. The power supply of the
power amplifiers shall be of different unit, in order to reduce the electronic
noise and interference.
6.3 An amplifier fail safe monitoring and switch-over system shall be provided for
continuous, monitoring of all the amplifiers. When any of the amplifiers fail,
the system shall instantly route the input and output signals of a faulty
amplifier into the signal lines of the stand-by amplifier automatically within 1
second without human intervention. At the same time, the automatic amplifier
changeover unit shall sound a buzzer to alert the maintenance personnel to
attend to the situation.
A standby amplifier of the same capacity shall be provided for every group of
3 operational amplifiers.
6.4 The standby amplifier shall also be continuously monitored. The amplifiers
must also be provided with facilities for setting of priority levels such that, if
more than one (1) amplifier with a group fail, the standby amplifier will
automatically replace the one with a higher priority.
6.5 In order to prevent overloading on the standby amplifier, due to failure of a

second amplifier, the amplifier supervisory unit shall be equipped with
interlocking protection circuit.
6.6 A transistorized protective circuit shall be provided enabling the amplifier to

restore itself to full operation within one millisecond after a short or overload
condition has been removed.
6.7 A defective amplifier shall be indicated by a visual signal at the control

console.
6.8 The amplifier shall have at least LCD display to be used for status enquiries
and monitoring functions. The display show the VU meter reading when the
audio monitoring mode is selected. The audio output can be monitored by
connecting a headphone to the headphone socket.
6.9 Status changes to the amplifier shall be monitored continuously and reported
to the controller for status/fault reporting.
6.10 Power amplifier shall be designed for rebundant network wiring.
TS/38/12 2602542S/EL
6.11 Faulty amplifiers shall be indicated by visual signals and on audio alarm on
the respective equipment rack, as well as visually display on the central fault
status monitoring PC. The communication between the amplifiers shall have
fail safe monitoring and switch over system should be via RS485. The
monitoring PC at FCC room shall provide also the following details for the
amplifier fault reporting
a) Identification of amplifier
b) Identification of system (the location/system)
6.12 Power Amplifier
The amplifier shall employ solid state devices, fully transistorized type, forced
air cooled, multi-channel and complete with integrated output transformer
designed for distributed speaker system operate on 230V 50 Hz. It shall
come equipped with protection circuitry, built-in VU meter and master volume
control. There shall be automatic self-resetting thermal cut-off protection
circuit if unusual heat built-up is detected in the unit.
The technical performance of the amplifier shall be as follows:
a) Power output: 250W, 480 W

b) Frequency response: 50 -- 20 kHz + 3dB at rated output.
c) THD distortion: Less than 0.5% at 1 kHz at rated output.
d) S+N/N ratio: Better than 90 dB
e) Input sensitivity: 1 volt (2.5mV / 47k ohms, 0.25 mV/220 ohms)
f) Temperature range : 0 degree C to 70 degree C
g) Transformer output : 100V
h) Input Impedance: 100k ohm (Balanced)
i) Output Impedance: 100V; 27.8 ohm
7. Zone Supervisory Unit
7.1 The zone supervisory unit shall employ solid state devices throughout and
operate on 24VDC. It shall be able to indicate open or short circuit conditions
as well as any significant load impedance changes due to partial shorts or
leakages in any one of the zone.
7.2 In the event of the zone speaker line failure, an audio fault signal shall sound
on the ZSV and on LED shall identify the trouble zone. A silence switch shall
be provided to stop the audio fault signal from sounding and reset to indicate
subsequent failure. The LED shall stay on for the duration of the malfunction.
When the failure is rectified, the LED light shall switch off automatically. It
shall be provided with approved means to disconnect the circuit automatically
from the amplifier in the event of a short circuit.
TS/38/13 2602542S/EL
8. Integrated Supervisory Unit
8.1 The unit shall employ solid state devices throughout and shall have individual
LEDs to indicate the open, short circuit and short circuit to ground condition.
8.2 The unit shall include the speaker line surveillance, amplifier fault detection
as well as automatic amplifier changeover functions.
The line monitoring units are employed to monitor all the lines simultaneously
including the branches of speaker line.
8.2.1 The line monitoring unit shall be incorporated in the power amplifier
unit itself to avoid non-monitored parts of the cable.
8.2.2 Speaker line monitoring shall be provided without any additional
wiring
8.2.3 Tone generator for speaker monitoring shall be incorporated in the
amplifier so that a single failure of the tone generator will not affect
the monitoring of other amplifier channels.
8.2.4 Speaker line monitoring can be switched ON/OFF from the
configuration software
8.2.5 Power for the end-of-line monitoring shall be supplied from the power
amplifier.
This method shall eliminate the usage of capacitor on every speaker and end-
of-line (EOL) resistor. The unit shall able to isolate the speaker lines from
amplifier once detected the faulty (Open, Short Circuit and Ground Leak).
The unit shall include a failsafe system for these power amplifiers to perform
continuous fault monitoring on each power amplifier unit.
8.3 In the event of any zone speaker line failure, an audio fault signal shall sound
on the unit and a LED shall indicate the trouble zone. A silence/acknowledge
switch shall be provided to stop the audio fault signal from sounding and
reset to indicate the subsequent failure. The LED shall stay on for the
duration of the malfunction. It shall be provided with approved mean to
disconnect the circuit automatically from the amplifiers in the event of short
circuit.
9. Speakers
9.1 The speakers shall be grouped in zone so that they can be controlled by area,
floor and escape staircases, specific purposes, both selectively and
collectively from the control console at the Fire Command Centre. The zoning
shall be further grouped according to function/user group so that it
shall be possible to make announcement to a functional zone by selection of
one push button at the call station.
9.2 The speech intelligibility shall have a Speech Transmission Index (STI) of
greater than 0.5.
TS/38/14 2602542S/EL
9.3 The allocation of zones to the zone selection button/user key shall be able to
be changed by re-programming without the need for physical rewiring.
9.4 Audio attenuators shall be place strategically in the building. The audio
attenuators chosen shall be equipped with built-in relay emergency overriding
feature. The audio attenuators shall be controlled by a 6 levels continuous
rotary switch, with attenuation in steps of –6dB. It shall be able to be both
flush and surface mounted to the wall (with back box) without any visible
mounting screws.
9.5 The output of any speaker shall not exceed a sound pressure level of 90 dB
at 1 metre from the centre of the speaker and the minimum sound level in the
area covered shall not be less than +10 dB above the ambient noise level
and compliance to the Code requirement. The sound pressure level shall be
at least 85 dB ± 4 dB at the public area/lab/office area and at least 95 dB ± 4
dB at the M&E areas or whichever is better. The SPL variation shall not be
more than 3dB difference.
9.6 Speaker circuits shall be provided with means to disconnect the circuit
automatically from the amplifier in the event of a short circuit and cause a
visual signal at the control console to indicate the defective circuit.
9.7 The amplifiers serving each speaker circuit/zone shall have at least 20%
spare capacity; the specialist shall submit calculations when required to
justify the amplifiers’ selection and quantity.
There shall not be more than 20 speakers per speaker circuit and not more
than 4 speaker circuits per zone.
9.8 Ceiling Speaker
9.8.1 All ceiling speakers shall come complete with matching transformer,
terminal block, mounting ring, baffles, independent support and
necessary mounting brackets. All metal parts shall be protected
against rust and corrosion. All speakers shall be encased in metal
fire dome to prevent fire entering the casing via the speaker. The
front panel shall flush with ceiling. No screws shall be exposed at the
external part of the speaker.
TS/38/15 2602542S/EL
9.8.2 The finishing colour of the ceiling speaker shall be able to match with
the ceiling boards and shall be approved by the S.O.
a) Technical specification of the ceiling speaker (Ceiling up to

4000mm AFFL) as follows:
i) Speaker diameter: 178 mm round type.

ii) Sound pressure level: 98dB max/91 dB at 1 kHz/1W/1m.
iii) Frequency range: 70 Hz - 20 kHz.
iv) Power output at max: 9 watts/100 V (6-3-1.5W).
v) Speaker output impedance: 1.7K, 3.3k and 6.7k.
vi) Opening angle : 180 degrees ( 4 kHz ).
vii) Complete with line matching transformer with multiple tapping
of 6W, 3W and 1.5W.
viii) Safety: Acc. To EN 60065.
9.9 Wall Mounting Box Speaker
a) All wall mounting box speakers shall come complete with matching
transformer, connector and necessary mounting brackets. All metal
parts shall be protected against rust and corrosion.
b) The finishing colour of the box speaker shall be able to match with the
wall and shall be approved by the S.O.
c) Technical performance of the box speaker as follows:
i) Speaker size: 160 mm round type with cabinet.

ii) Sound pressure level: Input 1W, 1m/1kHz : 90dB/101dB.
iii) Coverage angle: 120 degrees.
iv) Frequency response: 130 -- 10 kHz.
v) Power output at max: 6watts/100V (6-3-1.5W).
vi) Safety: Acc. To EN60065.
9.10 Horn Speaker
a) The speakers shall be bi-directional and come complete with

matching transformer, connector and mounting brackets. All metal
parts shall be protected against rust and corrosion. The speaker for
outdoor application type.
TS/38/16 2602542S/EL
b) Technical performance of the speaker as follows:
i) Power output at max: 20W, 30W.

ii) Power Selection: 5W, 10W, 20W (20W type)
7.5W, 15W, 30W (30W type).
iii) Impedance: 0.5k ohms (20W type)
333k ohms (30w type).
iv) Frequency response: 50 Hz – 5 kHz.
v) Output sound pressure level: 110dB minimum/1w/1 metre.
vi) Operating temperature: 10 to 55 degrees C.
vii) IP65 rated.
viii) Safety: Acc. To EN60065. IEC529
ix) Material: Aluminium
10. CD Player
10.1 The player shall employ solid state devices throughout and operate on 230 V
50 Hz. It shall be of heavy duty type, designed for continuous day long
operation.
10.2 It shall be capable of providing 8 hours of continuous playing time with digital
sound quality. It shall be able to accept standard discs.
10.3 Technical performance of the player shall be as follows:-
a) System normal compact disc, 8 cm or 12 cm.

b) Frequency Response: 70 to 11 kHz + 3 dB.
c) Total Harmonic Distortion: less than 1% at 1 KHZ.
d) S+N/N Ratio: better than 70 dB.
e) WOW and Flutter: Unmeasurable limit.
f) Dynamic Range: 100 dB or more.
g) Quantization: 20-bit linear 4 channels.
h) Conversion Rate: 8 time over sampling.
i) Power Supply: 230V 50 Hz.
j) Features: Power ON/OFF, Stop/Play, Pause, skip keys, random play,
track selection.
11. Pre-Amplifier/Line Amplifier
11.1 The universal line/pre-amplifier shall be able to accept and amplify various
audio signals such as microphone, CD player, etc.. The amplifier shall
employ solid state devices throughout and operate on 24V DC.
11.2 It shall contain minimum 5 individual input and output channels and 1 mix
output channel.
11.3 Built-in speech filter shall be provided for base reduction on microphone input
channel.
TS/38/17 2602542S/EL
11.4 Technical performance of the unit shall be as follows:-
a) No. of channel : 5 input, 5 output and 1 mix output.

b) Control provided : per channel, master volume, base, treble and
master output volume.
c) Frequency : 20 to 28 kHz.
d) Power consumption : 20VA.
e) Output signal : 1 volt.
f) Input Sensitivity : -20 dBv.
g) THD distortion : less than 0.3% at 1 kHz.
h) Noise level : -102 dBv.
12. Zone Relay Unit
The unit shall be used as a program selector by allocating one of the input signals to
up to minimum 5 outputs with fire control relays. Both green and red LEDs shall be
provided to enable rapid monitoring of zone selector in use. The unit shall have
remove control capability as well as interdiction function to accept emergency paging.
13. Monitor Panel
A monitor panel shall be provided to indicate audio and visual monitoring of outputs
for up to 10 power amplifiers. It shall have a 5-inch monitor speaker, volume control,
a watt meter and a 11-position selector switch.
The panel shall also be provided with a line voltage selector for monitoring 25V, 50V,
70V and 100V volts line outputs. The panel shall be designed for rack mounting.
14. Microphone Paging Console
The console provided shall have 1 all call button, 1 button for each of the zones and
1 button for user groups served by the system.
The desk top paging console shall be located at the Fire Command Centre. It shall be
equipped with a compressed 0dB output and have a built in 1 watt amplifier and
speaker with volume control. It shall come with a programmable digital chime. The
front panel shall have LED monitoring with 0 volt contact switching for zone selection.
The console shall have button to perform activation, emergency pre-recorded

messages.
TS/38/18 2602542S/EL
A goose neck microphone shall be provided with a standard foam windscreen.
a) Pre-amplifier Output Level: 0 dB/600 ohms.

b) Microphone Type: Condenser / unidirectional.
c) Amplifier Input Level: 0 dB/600 ohms Transformers Balance.
d) LED Switching: Voltage Free.
e) Button Power Capacity: 100 mA.
f) Distortion: <1%.
g) Frequency Response: 200Hz – 16 kHz.
h) Signal-to-noise ratio: >55 dB.
i) Chime: Digital Programmable Chime.
j) Material: Metal.
15. Override Relay System
All emergency override relay system shall provided. The relay system shall be
placed after each amplifier. Relay contacts switches both sides of line. Contact type
cross-bar, gold, platinum or silver redundant contacts are only acceptable. They are
wired in parallel for increased reliability. Diodes are installed across the relay, coil
with revised polarity to prevent ant contact bounce.
16. Volume Control
16.1 Selected areas shall be equipped with volume attenuator. Each unit shall
have a high quality-transformer and a relay for maximum line level restoration
when the attenuator is in "OFF" position. It shall have 6 levels of attenuation
in steps of 6 dB. The unit shall have an OFF position that can be overridden
during emergency paging. A built-in emergency-overriding relay shall be
incorporated into the unit to switch the output level to the maximum during
emergency paging. It shall be able to be both flush and surface mounted to
the wall (with optional back box) without any visible mounting screws. The
Sub-Contractor shall ensure that the capacity of the volume attenuator and
total wattage of the speaker in the specified area are matched.
a) Impedance: >330 ohms and >165 ohms

b) Relay Consumption: 30 mA
c) Attenuator type: Transformer
d) Level restoration: Yes
e) Attenuation steps: 0dB/-6dB /-12dB/-18dB/-24dB/OFF
f) Relay voltage: 24V/DC
g) Maximum insertion loss: -0.5dB
TS/38/19 2602542S/EL
17. Spot Announcing Machine
The automatic spot announcing machine shall be designed to accept any normal
cassette tape, which allows any message to be recorded and played back and to be
located as shown in the drawings.
Unrecorded sound sections necessary for automatic playback shall be easily put onto
the tape. The machine shall have a built-in timer for distributing messages at
intervals of 2.5, 10, 15 or 20 minutes. The message tape shall be played at specific
time intervals by using an external timer. The machine shall include input lacks for a
low impedance microphone or optional remote microphone. the microphone shall be
usable for both recording and instant live announcements. The recording and
announcing sound level shall be kept constant with a built-in AGC circuits.
18. Installation
18.1 All equipment shall be housed in standard 19 inch rack; all interconnections
shall be by means of standard cables and connectors for ease of
serviceability.
18.2 The equipment rack shall be floored mounted type, 19” width and at least 800
mm depth type. The rack cabinet shall be of stamped stainless metal plate or
other approved material of thickness at least 3mm with epoxy coating.
18.3 Forced ventilation using exhaust fan running on 230Vac shall be

incorporated. The Sub-contractor shall be responsible to calculate the
amount of heat generated by all equipments and sized the capacity of the
exhaust fan accordingly.
The perforated panels and blank panels of the equipments rack shall be
same colour as the equipments.
18.4 It shall be of adequate size to house all the necessary equipments. The rack
shall be so arranged that all equipment installed is withdraw able from the
front for servicing and maintenance of all installed equipment. The
arrangement of all the audio equipment in the rack shall be proposed by the
Sub-contractor. The Sub-contractor shall only install the equipments after
consultant approve the proposed equipments rack layout. Interior shall be
dust proof, insect proof and anti-vermin. The whole equipment rack shall be
provided with lockable glass door.
The design of the rack shall be submitted to the Employer’s Representative

for approval prior to fabrication. If the rack is standard prefabricated type,
catalogue shall be submitted together with the tender document.
The Sub-Contactor shall responsible to propose the support bracket (L-

Bracket) for those heavy equipments, such as Power Amplifier, Digital Matrix,
Pre-Amplifier and etc.
TS/38/20 2602542S/EL
The power supply unit which feeds the entire system shall operate from 230V
AC 50 Hz single phase mains with regulation +/- 10V of nominal voltage.
All incoming and outgoing signal sources from equipment racks to Remote
Paging Microphone and Speakers shall be interconnected with approved type
of plugs and sockets.
18.5 All cabling shall be installer-friendly. Cabling between a call station and
central system shall merely comprise a two-core microphone screened cable,
while standard speaker cables shall be used between the power amplifiers
and the speakers.
18.6 Cabling within the central system shall be via termination boards located at
the back of each card cage; and shall be by means of neat ribbon cables and
connectors.
18.7 All cables shall be identified at both end by approved mean of identification.
The power and audio cabling/wiring between the various items of PA

equipments covered by this specification shall be supplied and installed. All
cables shall be of Fire Resistant type.
18.8 Each individual run of cable/wire shall be identified by tags securely fastened
at both ends. The identification number shall be similar to that shown in the
cable schedule which shall be provided by the Sub-contractor. The cable
schedule shall contain the following information concerning the cables: -
a) Function (whether AC power, DC control, line level, microphone or

100V speaker distribution).
b) Origin and destination
TS/38/21 2602542S/EL
19. Power Supply
19.1 A 24 volt/DC power supply shall be included in the system. The unit shall
come with s toroidai transformer for isolation. The unit shall have a regulated
24 volt constant supply. It shall have standard 19 inch rack mount features.
19.1.1 Transformer Type Toroidai

19.1.2 Consumption 5 Amp
19.1.3 Output Voltage 24 Volt/DC
19.1.4 Power Requirement 230 V/AC
19.2 The standby battery supply shall provide sufficient power and enable the fully
loaded system, announcement at the maximum level, to continue operating
without interruption for a minimum duration of 4 hour should mains power fail.
19.3 All equipment shall be mounted into a 19” EIA Standard equipment rack
except microphone console, volume controls and speakers. All equipment,
switchers, etc. shall be clearly labeled for easy identification. All equipment
supplied shall be maintenance free, high quality, up-to-date and elegant in
design. The design concept and layout shall be such that the operation be
failsafe and easy to operate.
19.4 The batteries shall be mounted on a rubber floor mat and completely enclosed
in a metal cabinet. The charging equipment shall be mounted above the
standby batteries and readily accessible.
19.5 The Charger shall be able to provide booster and trickle charging. It shall be
complete with Voltmeter, Ammeter, DC fuse and relays. The Charger shall be
capable of charging the fully discharged batteries within 12 hours, by its
normal charging method to a fully charged condition.
TS/38/22 2602542S/EL
Functional test on the entire EVC/PA system shall be performed following the
completion of the installation. The system functional tests shall include the BGM test,
Paging Test and Evacuation Test. The priority test shall also carry out by the Sub-
contractor and witness by the SO. The Sub-contractor shall provide all equalization
facilities/ test measurement equipments. Records, chart, table and graph of the T&C
shall properly kept and documented as part of the installation documentation.
The electrical Sub-contractor shall provide all the necessary tests equipments as
following:
a) Audio Generator
b) Impedance Meter
c) Multimeter
d) Sound Pressure Level (SPL) Meter
e) Phase Checker
The above mentioned equipments shall be professional equipments. Homebuilt and

DIY type are not acceptable.
The Sub-contractor shall conduct the following measurements and check and all the
tested result shall record in table form as attached sample:
(I) Impedance of each zone before connecting to the Audio Power Amplifier.
This shall equal or greater than the rated impedance. Following is the sample
for the impedance test result record table, and Sub-contractor shall submit
the table as following:
Theoretical T&C
Zone Total Impedance Cable Total Acceptable Measured Diff. Pass Remark
Power (Ohms) Impedance Impedance Tolerance Impedance (%) / Fail
(W) (Ohms) (Ohms) (%) (Ohms)
1 198 50.5 3 53.5 5 55.5 3.9 Pass ok
(II) Speaker cable continuity test. The Sub-contractor shall tests the continuity
from control room to riser, and then follows by tests from riser to first speaker
point. The Sub-contractor shall record all the results and submit the table as
following:
Circuit From To Cable Continuity, Reading Short to Remarks

Ref. Type Pass / Fail (Ohms) earth
Z1-1 P.Amp2 Riser Speaker PASS 3.2 No Ok
(Level Cable
B1)
Z1-2 Riser 1st Speaker PASS 4.0 No Ok
Speaker Cable
in Level
B1
TS/38/23 2602542S/EL
(III) The Sub-contractor shall carry out the Sound Pressure Level (SPL) tests for
each speaker zone and it shall random pick 10 points for each zone. The
Sub-contractor shall propose the 10 points to SO for the approval. All the SPL
results shall record and submit in a table as similar following table:
Noise Cal SPL Test during T&C (dB) Pass

Zone Average
Level SPL P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 / Faill
70
Z1 80dB 78 81 85 78 80 80 81 79 79 82 80.3 Pass
dB
(IV) The Sub-contractor shall carry out the phasing check on every individual
speaker for each speaker zone. The results shall record and submit as similar
to the following table:
Zone – Speaker Phase Check Pass / Fail Remark

Z1 – Spkr 1 Ok Pass Ok
Z1 – Spkr 2 Fail Fail Need to Rectify
(V) Any other tests deemed necessary by the SO.
The T&C shall be conducted by the Sub-contractor in accordance with the

approved test procedures and witness by the SO. All results of the T&C shall
be properly recorded and submitted to the SO.
The Sub-contractor shall be responsible for incorporating and testing any

modification to the design found necessary as a result of tests. However,
after the start of T&C, no design changes or modification can be made
without the approval of SO. If any changes are found to be necessary, the SO
reserves the right to require any completed tests to be re-tested to verify that
no adverse or degraded performance/ effects results from the change.
All results of measurements and checks shall be complied accordingly and

submitted to the SO.
All emergency override relay system shall provided. The relay system shall
be placed after each amplifier. Relay contacts switches both sides of line.
Contact type cross-bar, gold, platinum or silver redundant contacts are only
acceptable. They are wired in parallel for increased reliability. Diodes are
installed across the relay, coil with revised polarity to prevent ant contact
bounce.
The Sub-Contractor shall submit four (04) sets of the floor plan indicating in
the drawings the measured values of the sound level in all areas and rooms
based on the testing of the EVC system. All the drawings and records of the
test results shall be bound together and endorsed by the system engineer
and the Sub-Contractor company management. Sub-contractor shall also
submit all the programming softcopy that being done for the system
TS/38/24 2602542S/EL
21. Interface with SMATV System
Sub-Contractor shall liaise and coordinate with the SMATV system for the provision
of two video channels to the SMATV system. Sub-Contractor shall provide all wiring
from the music inputs up to and including the interfacing box to be located at sub-
central system location.
22. Future Provision
Sufficient spares in the hardware and software shall be provided for future
expansion. Both hardware and software shall therefore, be modular in design.
Expansion of the system shall be carried out by inserting of software cards, additional
wiring for speakers and re-zoning shall be easily done by re-programming via the
keyboard. The performance of the system shall not be degraded by such expansion.
This shall include but not limited to the speed of the central processor and output
sound pressure level.
TS/38/25 2602542S/EL
SECTION 41 - CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM (CCTV)
1. GENERAL
1.1 The CCTV control equipment and devices per sub-system, which
are forming part of the entire integrated system, shall preferably be
produced by the same manufacturer and shall have web-based
capability to view and monitor on the internet through the web
browser.
1.2 The CCTV system proposed shall be an IP based system.
1.3 The PTZ and Fixed cameras shall be of IP type.
1.4 The CCTV control equipment and devices per sub-system, which
are forming part of the entire integrated system, shall preferably be
produced by the same manufacturer and shall have web-based
capability.
1.5 All systems and components shall have been thoroughly tested
and proven in actual use. The systems and camera installed shall
have local support for the replacement or rectification of parts.
1.6 All systems and components shall be provided with the fifteen
months warranty. Any faulty camera during the Defect Liabilities
period shall be replaced within three hours,
1.7 The sub-contractor shall state any additional requirements such as

software licenses, commissioning tools etc. required to hand over
the CCTV system.
1.8 The system shall have open hardware protocol.
1.9 The system shall have ability to plug and play both basic and
analytic software’s.
1.10 All the IP camera, Network Digital Video recorder and system shall
not have any security vulnerability that posed cyber security issue.
1.11 The system shall be protected against all electrical interference.
1.12 The system shall provide maximum operational simplicity to enable

quick and effective use in case of emergency.
1.13 The system shall be modular to facilitate any future expansion.
TS/41/1 2602542S/EL
1.14 The system shall allow for a centralized viewing station to view,
playback and manage all the different NDVR/DVR should there be
more than one.
1.15 The system shall be capable for Integration with NUS Campus
Security Enterprise Command Center System at Prince George
Park HQ.
1.16 The system shall be integrated with the intrusion detection and
door locking system as indicated in the drawings. The cameras
covering the door with magnetic contacts shall enable the guard on
receiving an intrusion alarm to make an immediate verification and
assessment on the intrusion from the video monitor.
1.17 The entire CCTV management system shall be interfaced to the

security management system in which from the security system the
following status/alarm shall be displayed for the CCTV system:
a) Status of any alarm inputs or combination of inputs

b) Status of any control outputs or combination of outputs
c) Video inputs or outputs currently selected
d) Camera failed or loss of video signal
1.18 Codes and standards :
a) The proposed equipment shall be designed in accordance

with all applicable standards and specifications, including at
least one of the following :
1. UL Underwriters Laboratories
2. DIN Deutsche Industrie Norm
3. B.S. British Standard
4. C.S.A. Canadian Standard Association
5. ULC Underwriter Laboratories Canada
b) The video signal produced for the cameras shall be

accordance with EIA standard.
1.19 The power source provided for the entire System is 230 V + 5%, 50
Hz.
1.20 The system designed shall be such that all the camera shall be
externally synchronous.
TS/41/2 2602542S/EL
1.21 The system shall be integrated with the intrusion detection and
door locking system as indicated in the drawings. The cameras
covering the door with magnetic contacts shall enable the guard on
receiving an intrusion alarm to make an immediate verification and
assessment on the intrusion from the video monitor. These
cameras, if they are not switched on shall be activated by the
breaking of the door contacts.
1.22 The camera shall also be able to be triggered by a card activated

signal, such as an invalid access card being used for more than a
certain number of times shall be programmable.
1.23 Equipment associated with the Surveillance Closed Circuit

Television shall be sufficient to meet the requirements as specified
herein.
1.24 The proposed CCTV shall be designed from the latest state-of-the-
art equipment. The control system for the CCTV equipment shall
have flexibility for future expansion.
1.25 All Outdoor IP camera shall be IP66 rated.
2. SYSTEM OVERVIEW
2.1 The system is a digital video surveillance system which provides

video recording, remote viewing, video playback, high availability
and redundant video storage, and virtual network video switching
functions.
2.2 The system shall be based on a uniquely developed platform that

provides IP based digital surveillance system with hybrid
configuration of analog and IP cameras, distributed architecture
and centralized video management system.
2.3 The system shall be highly scalable to handle up to hundreds of

video recorders or thousands of cameras.
2.4 The system shall be highly flexible to simultaneously integrate both

analog and IP cameras in one system simultaneously.
2.5 The network video management system shall be adaptive to use

dual streaming H.264 camera. JPEG, MJPEG, MPEG4, M-JPEG,
Wavelet and other compression codec technology that used high
bandwidth will not be acceptable.
2.6 The system shall provide a user friendly GUI (graphical user
interface) and be simple to operate.
TS/41/3 2602542S/EL
2.7 The system shall maintain all video recordings for a minimum of 30
days storage with RAID 5. All video recordings shall be stored on
hard drives to allow immediate access to playback.
2.8 The system shall record for a minimum of 12.5 fps at 1920x1080
resolutions for 30 days of 24 hours period with RAID 5.
2.9 The system shall allow operators to view live and recorded video
from any camera over the network.
2.10 The system shall be block based designed and provide intelligent
and quick search for both live and recorded video to facilitate
investigation and speed up search time.
2.11 The system shall consist of separate components to comprise a

distributed system which are as follows:
a) Network Video Management System (NVMS)/ Network

Video Recorder (NVR)
The unit to record video images from IP cameras over the
network, and distribute them on demand over LAN/WAN.
b) Command Centre
The security operation station with the capability to output up
to three monitors to provide flexible layout to watch, manage
and control analog and IP cameras through NDVR.
c) Master Core Server /Authentication server

The master core server shall allow user to dynamically
create connections between Encoders and Decoders and
view live or recorded video on the digital monitors (audio,
Video, serial ports and digital I/Os).
d) Review Station /Remote Viewing Station

The review station shall allow the user view live display of
cameras, cameras sequence, control, instant replay,
playback, saving and export of the image, etc. It shall
provide an easy-to-use tool to manage event cases, video
bookmarks and image snapshots. This shall provide
investigators to easily set bookmarks on video time-stamps
and archive video clips in a batch to facilitate case files.
TS/41/4 2602542S/EL
2.12 Security System
The Security System for the surveillance closed circuit television

shall be integrated with the security card access system's security
center.
2.13 System Documentation (in addition to Section 1)
a) Tender stage
1) The tenderer shall adequately and accurately

describe the proposed system(s) and concept(s) at
the time of tendering.
2) The tenderer shall supply a full set of drawings,

specifications and catalogue sheets describing the
various components belonging to the offered system
b) Contract stage
1) The Sub-Contractor shall provide a full set of

documents related to concept, design, installation,
commissioning and maintenance of the entire system
and its components.
2) The following sets of documents are required as a

minimum:
(i) System description and operating principle

(ii) Installation instructions
(iii) Connection diagrams
(iv) Commissioning instruction
(v) Operating instruction
(vi) Maintenance instructions, maintenance schedule
and trouble shooting guide
(vii) Plans showing locations
3) The following drawings are required as a minimum:
(i) System block diagrams

(ii) Cabling and wiring diagrams
(iii) Connection diagrams schedules
(iv) General arrangement plans, layout and outline
drawings of system components.
(v) Position plans and sectional installation details
TS/41/5 2602542S/EL
4) The Sub-Contractor shall submit four (4) copies of his
standardized and comprehensive system operating
and service manuals.
5) The revised and final version of the system

documentation "as built" shall be submitted by the
Sub-Contractor within 2 months after completion,
erection and system trial operation.
3. NETWORK DIGTAL VIDEO RECORDER
3.1. The system described in this section consist of the Network Video
Management System network (IP) based Digital Video Recorder
(NDVR) System.
3.2. The proposed solution shall not require proprietary computer,

server, networks or storage hardware. The system shall house in
the security office at local building Fire Command centre to
monitors all the indoor and external surveillance cameras. All the
new cameras shall be also able interface to existing Network Video
Management software, NUS campus wide graphic user interface
system and remote control from NUS Main Security Command
Centre at S16 Building, COM2 Building, E3A Building, E5 Building
and Office of Campus security at Prince George Park house 17&18
via fiber optic communication.
3.3. The NDVR shall be based on high quality Dual stream H.264 IP
cameras.
3.4. The proposed system shall be of a manufacturer with as minimum

of five (5) years of experience and offerings in the IP network video
software market, the Sub Contractor shall submit the manufacturer
job experience for SO approval.
3.5. The Software shall provide free upgrade and no yearly

maintenance fee is needed to keep software up to date. Software
update shall be zero charge to owner.
3.6. The NVMS database and video storage shall be based on MySQL
or better
a) The Failover directory should be a basic feature of the
NDVR all the related licenses should be included in offer.
b) Redundant recording shall be a basic feature of the NDVR
and should be provided if required.
TS/41/6 2602542S/EL
c) Fail over recording capabilities shall be a basic feature of the
NDVR and should be provided if required.
3.7. The NDVR system shall be based on the latest in software

programming technology Microsoft NET framework.
3.8. The NDVR shall conform, as a minimum, to the following

requirements:
System Features :Network Video Recording (Microsoft

Server)
Image Compression :H.264 compression (wavelet is not

Type acceptable)
Record Resolution :1280x720

:1920x1080
Image Record Rate :Individual camera input shall have minimum

recording frame rate of 12.5 fps
Recording Modes : Continuous, alarm initiated. Time

scheduled, per operator command, post
alarm recording, video motion recording
IP Video Inputs :16 or 32 (Maximum)
Network Interface :Ethernet via TCP/IP
Serial Comms In/Out : 1 (minimum)
Picture Quality :Individual selectable for each camera (any

picture quality at any frame rate)
Video Image export :AVI
Schedulable Events :Start/stop recording, set up parameters

(quality, frame, motion)
Play Back Functions :Play forward/reverse, frame

forward/reverse, jump forward/back
Dimension (w d x h) :19”rack mountable
3.9. The NDVR shall be able to support all cameras at the up to 25

frames per second from CIF up to 2 Mega Pixel resolutions.
TS/41/7 2602542S/EL
3.10. The NDVR should support below video analytics feature.
a) The NDVR shall provide the ability for real time video Color
identification, type of objects identification in with vector
solving kept in metadata in the recording servers for easy
retrieval of data.
b) The NDVR shall provide the ability for Face Recognition

system. The Metadata shall have the ability to classify the
three differences of VIP, wanted and Staff. The Alarm shall
be report via the Client software and not required a
standalone solution
c) The NDVR shall provide the ability for LPR (License Plate
Recognition) integration. The LPR Reader system shall be a
hardware based in a small form capable of installing at the
camera end or at the backup. The LPR Reader shall be in
one or dual channel. The Metadata shall be processed at the
backend and able to classify difference category of wanted,
VIP and Staff.
3.11. Each Camera shall provide dual video streaming technology

providing Independent settings per stream.
a) A viewing stream of up to 25 fps and 1080P25 video

resolution using multicast streaming to send video to multiple
NDVR for recording
b) The NDVR shall allow the user to view live video at High-
resolution 1080P25 on unlimited number of viewing station
using multicast streaming.
c) The NDVR shall have the intelligent to select 2nd stream D1
video when display in multi-screen mode to reduce load of
workstation.
d) The system shall be flexible and allow bandwidth selection
between 64kb to 5Mb per steam.
e) Total bandwidth for dual stream H.264 based Encoders and
cameras both stream shall not exceed 10MBps.
3.12. NDVR shall have a capacity to switch and control all the current
cameras. It should be expandable to unlimited cameras in future.
3.13. The system shall allow the recording, live monitoring, playback of
archived video audio, and data simultaneously.
TS/41/8 2602542S/EL
3.14. The NDVR shall provide file export tool for export the native video
format with all video protections. (e.g. watermark, encryption) and
the ability to play this video on a standard computer with .avi files.
3.15. The native file format video player shall show the status of the
video authentication as available with the original file format.
3.16. The IP Based NDVR shall provide file export tool for export of
single frames of video in J-PEG and PNG file formats and for
export of motion video files in AVI file format for transport and
playback on computers utilizing a Windows environment.
3.17. The Sub-contractor shall provide the required computers for the
NVMS client and servers, these computers shall be of the most
current state of the art technology available at the time of
installation and as minimum shall be better than the minimum
requirements specified by NVMS system manufacturer as well as
tender specifications. Server and PC decoder shall be locally
available. Long lead time imported server and PC decoder will not
be accepted. All the equipments and technical support shall be
locally available without the need of oversea support.
3.18. REMOTE MONITORING
a) The NDVR shall provide at least 96 video streams for

remote monitoring via TCP/IP network with multiple clients.
Licence free Network Viewing Software for Windows shall
be included.
b) The above video streams include both live video streams
and video playback streams.
c) The above benchmark is calculated by video streams in
1280x720 @30fps (NTSC) or 1280x720@25fps (PAL) with
2Mbit/s bit-rate. It’s not limited to 1280x720 resolutions, but
the benchmark will be different when the video stream
comes from Megapixel IP cameras.
d) The network viewer page shall be fully re-sizeable, including
full screen viewing. The digital multiplex recorder shall have
an option to set a password to prevent unauthorised users
viewing live, recorded images, moving telemetry cameras
and viewing hidden cameras over the network.
TS/41/9 2602542S/EL
3.19. ALARM AND SEARCH
a) The system shall be capable of generating an alarm and

alarm recording on the following conditions.
1) Motion detection
2) Video loss
3) Digital input
4) SDK API alarm
c) On alarm activation, NDVR can be configured to notify the

user via email.
d) The NDVR shall also store a complete alarm history for up to
365 days.
e) The NDVR shall provide simple alarm searching by alarm,
camera name, date and time information from any connected
Command Center.
3.20. Fail-Over module
a) The NVR shall provide Fail-Over capability to increase the

redundancy and reliability of the whole system and to sustain
the system with minimum downtime.
b) The fail-over server is also a NVR which will monitor the

status of the other NDVR and backup the lates configurations
of the NVR.
c) The fail-over server shall take over for the failed NVR by
resuming the capability to provide live viewing, video
recording and video playback from the IP cameras which are
configured on the failed NVR. The video streams of IP
cameras shall be redirected automatically from the failed NVR
to the fail-over Server.
d) The fail-over server shall support N+N server-take over

configuration.
TS/41/10 2602542S/EL
3.21. Maintenance and recovery
a) The NVR shall provide export and import functions to backup

and restore configuration data.
b) In case of NVR hardware failure, users can quickly restore the
entire configuration into the spare or replaced unit.
c) The NVR shall provide the following system maintenance
tasks:
1) Report NVR software running status
2) Start/Stop/Restart NVR Software
3) Start/Stop NVR hardware watchdog
4) Upgrade, migrate and restore NVR
5) Backup an restore system configuration data
6) Automatically and periodically create system restore
point for recovery
7) Add and remove references to time synchronization
servers (NTP)
8) Start/Stop/Restart NTP Client and NTP Server
9) Report system statistics and health status, including
from storage, database and hardware video
compression cards
10) Set up system configuration, including network
settings, file sharing settings, date/time and time zone
settings.
3.22. INTEGRATION WITH OTHER SYSTEMS
a) The NVR shall provide the open platform (TCP/IP) application

interface API and Windows SDK to facilitate the integration
with the following systems (but not limited to):
1) Access Control System (ACS)
2) Building Automation System
3) Burglar Alarm System
4) Fire Alarm System
5) Point of Sales System
6) Asset Tracking System
7) Lightning Management System
TS/41/11 2602542S/EL
b) The Windows SDK shall be the ActiveX control with the
following methods:
1) User account authentication and authorization.

2) Get and display live video streams and video
playback streams from any NDVR as source. And
supports video playback control such as seek from
time, pause, stop, fast forward, fast backward, slow
forward, slow backward, step … etc.
3) Control PTZ cameras such as pan/tilte/zoom
operations, focus/iris adjustment, AUX control, dome
menu control … etc.
4) Download video streams and store in video clip files.
3.23. PHYSICAL
a) The NVR shall be capable of being rack mounted in an EIA-

standard 19-inch rack.
b) The NVR shall be equipped with at least Intel P4, 2.8 GHz
processor and RAM of 2GB.
c) The NVR shall keep operating in temperatures between 32°F
to 104°F (0° to 40°C) and humidity up to 80%.
d) The NVR shall provide 12 easy-to-access hard disk drive
cartridges in the front panel, and support 2TB HDD giving the
total storage up to 24TB. The hard disk shall be high duty
cycle for CCTV.
e) The NVR shall support durable system-on-chip technology.
f) The NVR MUST support internal RAID-5 compliant storages.
g) The hard disks shall be hot-swappable, i.e: they can be
replaced whilst the system is running.
h) The NVR shall support dual-power supply.
3.24. Motion detection
a) All camera shall have the motion detector.

b) The detection zone shall be indicated on the display.
c) The system shall have a minimum of one reference zone for
environmental compensation.
TS/41/12 2602542S/EL
d) The system shall constantly compare detection and
reference zones and only if the detection zone varies
compared to the reference zone, an alarm shall be
generated.
e) It shall be possible to adjust the sensitivity for both the
detection and reference zones simultaneously and/or
individually.
f) It shall be possible to define a minimum of 6 alarm zones per
channel.
g) The time, date and camera reference number shall be
indicated simultaneously with every alarm display.
h) Each motion detection point shall have at least two
programmable detection levels.
i) The motion detector shall equip with state-of-the-art
processing to simultaneously analyze all channels, providing
real-time motion analysis and immediate alarm response
4. MASTER CORE SERVER
4.1. The Master Core Server software shall consist of the My-SQL
based Main and Cluster Directory Database Server, Recording
Server for video, Digital Virtual Matrix, Incident Reports, Alarm
Management, and Watchdog modules. All the related software
licenses should be the part of the installed system.
4.2. The proposed Master Core Server shall allow the interfacing to
existing Campus Wide IP CCTV System included any high level
interface and license
4.3. The Master Core Server shall maintain a catalog of settings for all
the client, servers, encoders, decoders and IP cameras in the
system.
a) It shall enable the client to dynamically create connections

between Encoders and Decoders and view live or recorded
video on the digital monitors (audio, Video, serial ports and
digital Inputs/Outputs)
b) The Master Core Server shall provide the client seamless
operation of all Encoders and Decoders available in the
system regardless of the actual connection to different
recording servers.
TS/41/13 2602542S/EL
c) The NVMS Recording Server shall offer the capability to
alert the systems administrator.
4.4. Master server shall support Cluster technologies such that up to 32

master servers can be connected in the network to support multiple
servers fail over redundancy. Using virtual server, mirror, 3rd party
failover software is not allow as this compromise the scalability and
support.
4.5. The NVMS Recording Server shall offer the capability to be

installed multiple servers software on multiple Computer Servers to
enable distributed recording architecture on the LAN or WAN
4.6. The NVMS Recording Server shall support ZERO frame lost
failover and no time lost due to recorder switch over is allowed. No
gaps in the recording file are permitted. Shortlisted companies must
demo this features to be accepted by owner in first interview.
4.7. The NVMS Recording Server shall support SD card recording at

the edge with auto-recovery back to recording server upon network
recovery. The SD card recorder in the Edge device shall be fully
managed by the NVMS with time synchronize, network fail
recording or continuous recording. The SD card recording shall be
100% the same files format as the NVMS and no conversion from
one format to another is accepted. The format shall only be H.264
and must be same file naming as the NVMS recorder Server video
files.
4.8. The NVMS Recording Server shall support 128 camera

connections, through video Encoders or IP cameras on each
Recording server in 4CIF, and 32 Full HD IP cameras in 1080P25
4.9. The NVMS Recording Server, for video and audio, shall support
and manage (32) camera connections from IP cameras and video
Encoders each at 25FPS at 1080P resolution (1920x1080) and
(64) cameras at 25FPS at 720P resolution (1280x720), (128)
cameras at 4CIF resolution (704x576 PAL)
4.10. The Master Core Server shall allow user to manage the camera
recording to which NVMS recorder down to the channel level.
4.11. The Master Core Server shall be able to set each camera frame
rate, bit rate and resolution independently from other cameras in
the system, and altering these settings shall not affect the
recording and display settings of other cameras. The NVMS shall
utilize multicast network communication for video monitoring.
Unicast based equipment will not be accepted.
TS/41/14 2602542S/EL
4.12. The Master Core Server shall be a software-based solution. The
NVMS shall require no proprietary hardware for video and audio
recording servers. Hardware shall come from locally available from
supported computer companies
.
4.13. The Master Core Server shall have a built-in-Digital virtual Video
Matrix Switcher functionality without the need of any additional
software license.
a) The Virtual Matrix Switch shall provide a full matrix operation

of IP Video to digital (computer) screens or HDMI supported
CCTV monitors using hardware Decoders.
b) The Virtual Matrix Switch shall have the capability of creating
camera sequences with the following functionalities.
c) The Virtual Matrix Switch shall have the capacity to interface
with legacy video walls via a CCTV keyboard connected to
Encoder, Decoder or the client PC
4.14. The Master Core Server shall support application clients

connecting to the NVMS system via the Internet. The NVMS shall
support a built-in Watchdog module.
a) The Watchdog shall monitor operation of all services and

automatically restart them if they are malfunctioning.
b) The Watchdog shall be responsible for restarting the
application or in a last resort restart the server in case of
malfunction of software components.
4.15. The Master Core Server shall be based on a true open architecture
that allow for use of non-proprietary PC and storage hardware that
shall not limit the storage capacity and shall allow for gradual
upgrades of recording capacity. The NVMS Server shall be of the
most recent computer technology and shall cover the NVMS
requirements.
4.16. Sub-contractor shall provide an advanced and reliable system, the

operating system shall be latest Windows Server level and other
Window Embedded operating system will not be acceptable.
4.17. The Master Core Server shall support management and control
over unlimited satellite sites.
TS/41/15 2602542S/EL
4.18. The system master core server shall provide alarm management
module without the need of any additional license.
a) The alarm management shall be able to set any monitor or

groups of monitors to automatically display cameras in
response to alarm inputs.
b) The alarm management shall be able to reset automatically

or manually alarmed video.
c) The alarm management shall allow for multiple modes of

alarm handling capability, these modes to be programmed
within the same system.
5. REVIEW CLIENT SYSTEM
5.1. The review client shall consist of Control Centre application, a

Review application, a CMS player application.
5.2. The review client shall perform the following applications

simultaneously without interfering with any of the Recording Server
operations (Recording, Alarms, etc.):
a) Live display of cameras

b) Live display of camera sequences
c) Live display of analytics cameras
d) Control of PTZ cameras
e) Playback of Recorded video and audio
f) Playback of analytics video
g) Export of recorded video and audio
h) Instant Replay of live video and support preset timing
i) Use of graphical controls (maps shall show live video over
the camera ICON)
j) Configuration of system settings
k) Execution of system macros
l) Automap function from the camera
5.3. The review client applications shall support any form of IP network
connectivity, including :LAN, WAN,VPN, Internet, and Wireless
5.4. The review client applications shall support IP Multicast (UDP) and
Unicast (UDP) video and audio streaming.
5.5. The review client application shall automatically adapt to the

network topology and use the best available method to receive
streaming video.
TS/41/16 2602542S/EL
5.6. Client Review Application.
a) The Client Review application shall allow for live monitoring

of video and audio.
1) The Review shall enable view of 1 to 36 video tiles

simultaneously on a single Full HD (1920x1080)
monitor at 25fps per camera in 4 CIF.
2) The Review shall support touch screen and user can
perform PTZ control over the touch screen.
3) The IP Based NVMS shall provide as minimum on
each of the Full HD monitors independently the
following tile views.
Full screen, quad, 3x3, 4x4, 5x5, 6x6, 1+9 (one large and 9
small view), 1+11 (one large and 11 small view), 1+12 (one
large center tile and 12 small view), 1+15 (one large and 15
small view), and any possible combination.
b) The client GUI table display shall be fully programmable so

that users can freely decide or choice on site the camera
tree, monitor tree and function. Users can also change the
color template locally to allow the GUI to go along with the
sites.
c) The NVMS Review application shall allow operators to view

an instant replay of any camera.
1) The operator shall be able to define the amount of

time he wishes to go back from a predefine list or
through a custom set up period.
2) The operator shall be able to control the playback

with play, pause, forward, and speed buttons.
d) The Review Client application shall allow operators to add

bookmarks to recorded clips of video.
e) The operator shall be able to choose and trigger an action

from a list of available actions included but are not limited to:
1) View camera in a video tile

2) View camera on a Decoder (HDMI or/and analog
monitor)
3) View Map or procedure in a video tile
4) Starting /Stopping PTZ pattern
5) Go to PTZ Preset
TS/41/17 2602542S/EL
f) The Review Client application shall display all cameras
attached to the system regardless of their physical location
on the network.
g) The Review Client shall support Automap function, which the

camera will process and stitch a series of pictures to make
one overall Scenery map. Using Scenery map, you can
quickly switch one place to another. By drawing a bow on
the map, PTZ will move to the center of the box as well as
adjust zoom ratio to match the box.
h) The Review Client application shall display all camera

sequences created in the system.
i) The Review Client application shall allow for unlimited

cameras sequences, which can be run independently of
each other on either digital monitor tiles or CCTV monitors.
j) The Review Client application shall allow operators to

control (Pause/Play, skip forwards, skip backwards) Camera
Sequences, without affecting other operators’ ability to view
and control the same sequence
.
k) The Review Client application shall display all cameras,
sequences and CCTV monitors in a logical tree.
l) The Review Client application operators shall be able to

drag and drop a camera from a tree of available cameras
into any video tile or a CCTV monitor icon for live viewing
m) The Review Client application operator shall be able to drag

and drop a camera sequence from a tree of cameras into
any video tile or a CCTV monitor icon for live viewing.
n) The Review Client application shall support Graphical Site

Representation (Maps) functionality, where digital maps are
used to represent the physical location of cameras and other
devices throughout facility.
1) The Review Client Maps shall have the ability to
contain hyperlinks to create a hierarchy of interlinked
maps and goggle map
2) The NVMS Maps shall be able to import maps from
any graphical software supporting BMP, JPEG and /or
GIF image formats or goggle map
TS/41/18 2602542S/EL
o) The Review Client application operator shall be able to drag
and drop a camera from a map into a video tile for live
viewing.
p) The application shall support the procedure functionality,

where procedures can be triggered to appear during a
certain event and can be used to provide detail written or
verbal instructions to the operator as to the actions to be
taken.
q) The Review Client application shall support digital zoom on

a fixed camera’s live and recorded video streams.
r) The Review Client application shall support digital zoom on

a PTZ camera’s live and recorded video streams.
5.7. The Review client shall provide the following video analytics alarm
options:
a) Trigger alarms or events to draw the user attention

b) Provide a meaningful text description of the event.
c) Provide OSD graphics to depict the analytics event,
including the participating objects, event location, motion
directions and more
d) Provide the above OSD graphics on live video, archived
video and JPEG images
e) Support automatic tagging/book-marking of analytics events.
f) Support search of analytics events history.
5.8. System shall allow the security in charge to monitor and record the
actual activities (Replica of operator screens) happening on the
operator monitors through his workstation and monitor.
5.9. The Review Client application shall provide management and

control over the system using a standard PC mouse, keyboard and
IP CCTV keyboard. Standard scroll should be able to move the
camera by merely clicking on the extremes of the picture in all
directions and zoom function by scroll button to avoid the use of
joystick keyboard but maintain the easiness of the control provision
of the PTZ menu on GUI will not be considered as equivalent or
substitute. The Sub-contractor should also provide IP dual joystick
keyboard as an integrated part of the client workstation if they do
not support this feature.
TS/41/19 2602542S/EL
a) The Review client shall be able to use multiple CCTV
keyboards to operate the entire set of cameras throughout
the system, including cameras of various manufacturers’
brands, including their PTZ functionalities (i.e. one keyboard
manufacturer controls other manufacturer’s dome or vice-
versa.)
b) The Review Client shall allow for a CCTV keyboard to be
attachable directly to the network this allow control of the
decoder CCTV monitor, and PC decoder.
c) The CCTV keyboard interface shall provide full PTZ control,
and video playback function.
1) The operator shall be able to control pan-tilt-zoom,

iris, focus, dome relays and dome patterns.
2) The operator will be able to enter the desire time/date,
monitor and camera for video playback from the
NVMS recorder.
3) This shall prioritize which operator has control over a
camera vs. another operator trying to control the
same camera at the same time.
d) The CCTV keyboard interface shall provide full video matrix

operations, it shall have the following features:
1) Keyboard shall have full matrix LCD display

2) Keyboard shall have bright 8 segment LED display for
operation in the all day and night
3) Keyboard shall have IP interface to the system
4) Keyboard shall have dual joystick and joystick is
interchangeable to support left and right hander
5) Keyboard shall be metal chassis and available in
desktop or 19” rack mount
TS/41/20 2602542S/EL
5.10. IP Keyboard Controller
a) The IP keyboard shall come with 6 layer of security protection

with Smartcard login Control.
b) Independent Self Definition Programming
c) Control PTZ camera, NVR & alarm with a single device
d) Control up to 10000 PTZ cameras、100 (NVR) & decoder
e) Durable joystick with 4 axis control and the left and right
joystick control can be interchangeable via programming
f) Dual screen display LCD showing control command,
messages. Main display shows up to 4 lines of 120
characters. Auxiliary display shows up to 8 characters
g) On-line display of Front end equipment
h) On-line display of System function
i) On-Line display of Preset position
j) On-line display of Alarms
k) All aluminium chassis ensure durable usage Back Lit LCD
display ensure clear display of commands
5.11. ALARM MANAGEMENT
a) The IP based NVMS shall provide alarm management and

reporting module
b) The IP based NVMS shall notify a user on any alarm set in the
system.
c) The IP based NVMS shall monitor all the devices and send
alarm to user instantly.
d) The IP based NVMS shall maintain a list of alarm on the list till
the user acknowledge the alarms. The alarms list shall display
the time, device and time of recovery clearly
e) The NVMS user shall be able to support multiple alarms.
f) The NVMS system administrator shall be able to set for each
user the maximum alarms to be viewed at one time.
g) The NVMS alarm management shall keep audit trail of all
alarm and operators related operations in a separated
database.
TS/41/21 2602542S/EL
h) The NVMS alarm database shall provide multi time schedule
support and shall be able to save the alarm database for
different period of time as the recorded video schedule.
6. NOT IN USED
7. COMMAND CENTRE
7.1. GENERAL
a) The contractor shall supply metal console. The CCTV control

center console shall be custom made galvanized metal
epoxy power coated of 2 tiers by 7 cubical for a total of
12 CPU and LCD monitors with 2 spare to suit the
Client's operations. The cubical size shall be 1500mm(L)
x 1000mm (W ) x 2000mm (H). It shall be located at FCC
room. The contractor shall submit the design for SO
approval
b) The Command Centre shall be a PC-based system with (42”
LCD screen) multiple monitors to perform multiple tasks on
each monitor.
c) The Command Center shall use latest Windows as the
operating system.
d) The Command Center shall have the capability to operate
with multiple monitors for the following operations.
1) Monitor shall provide system navigation via camera

tree, site map, alarm list and other management
functions.
2) Monitor shall enable live display and playback of
video recordings.
3) Monitor shall enable live display on multiple display
layout windows (1x1, 2x2, 3x3, and 4x4).
e) All monitors of the Command Center shall be controlled by a

single mouse and keyboard.
f) The Command Center shall provide user authentication and
security protection with multilevel access for operating
functions. Each user account can specify the access rights
for individual operations such as live viewing, video
playback, archive video, PTZ control, D/O control … etc.
TS/41/22 2602542S/EL
g) The Command Center shall provide a camera tree for easy
camera selection. Users can optionally customize the
grouping of camera nodes in the tree.
h) The Command Center shall provide graphical maps which
contain a floor or site map with camera icons on it. Users
can select to view the live video from the camera icons
easily.
i) The CPU shall be backed by the emergency power supply
and UPS. Upon power failure, the data stored in the central
processor unit shall be protected for at least 2 hours with an
internal battery.
7.2. LIVE VIDEO/RECORDED VIDEO DISPLAY
a) The Command Center shall support up to 20 video display

windows with a combination of live and recorded video
display simultaneously.
b) The Command Center shall be capable of viewing any video
at full screen resolution (1280 x 1024).
c) Upon alarm activation, the related video shall be
automatically displayed in full screen.
d) The Command Center shall support frame-by-frame
playback of video recordings in both forward and backward
directions.
e) The Command Center shall support the playback of video
recordings up to 8 times faster than normal viewing speed in
both forward and backward directions.
f) The Command Center shall instantly playback the video
recordings in the live video display window and allow
switching back to the live video display instantly.
g) The Command Center shall display the following information
of recorded video within a search time range in a graphical
form.
1) Display of total video recordings

2) Display of alarm triggered video recordings
3) Display of manual triggered video recordings
TS/41/23 2602542S/EL
h) The operator shall be able to select a section from the
graphical display and:
1) Expand the time range for greater granularity

2) Playback the video recordings of the selected time
range
3) Zoom out the video search time period
i) Live video display shall indicate video loss from any specific
camera.
j) The Command Center shall display video snapshots evenly
distributed among a user specified time range for user to
quickly browse the video activities during the time range. It
can speed-up the video investigation process.
7.3. ALARM OPERATIONS
a) Upon alarm activation, the alarm list shall automatically

display a new entry of alarm instance.
b) An alarm instance will go through 3 states before it is
archived in alarm history.
1) New (when an alarm is activated)

2) In Process (when an authorized operator selects the
alarm instance to view the alarm detail)
3) Acknowledged (when an authorized operator
acknowledge the alarm and send it to alarm history)
c) An operator shall be able to select and view the alarm

recording from alarm detail window.
d) Upon the alarm activation, users have options to configure
whether for auto alarm video pop-up, and auto camera map
pop. Inside the camera map, the camera icon shall indicate
the alarm status with different icon image other than the
normal status.
TS/41/24 2602542S/EL
7.4. OTHER OPERATIONS
a) The Command Center shall provide intuitive GUI (Graphic

User Interface) for easy control and management.
b) The Command Center shall support search for the specific
video by alarm, camera, date and time.
c) The Command Center shall support remote adjustments to
control the brightness, contrast, and color for all cameras
connected to the NDVR.
d) The Command Center shall be capable of exporting
snapshots of video in JPEG format.
e) The Command Center shall provide functions to archive and
export video recordings from any NDVR connected to the
system.
f) The Command Center shall be capable to control digital
Input/output devices connected to NDVR.
g) The Command Center shall provide on-screen overlay icons
and pop-up menu for all the frequently used commands such
as video playback buttons, PTZ OSD control, advanced PTZ
commands menu, archive video menu … etc.
7.5. USER-DEFINED FUNCTIONS
a) The Command Center shall allow users to customize the

camera tree. Each camera node in the tree shall change the
node icon display based on the following camera status:
1) Active or none-active
2) In recording
3) In alarm
4) In video Loss
b) The defined camera tree will help users to drag and drop
cameras to display screen for instant viewing.
c) The Command Center shall allow users to build camera
patterns and camera tours for live viewing.
d) The Command Center shall provide a map module for users
to create maps with camera icons.
e) The user can view live video of a specific camera by drag
and drop the camera icon from the map to the display
window.
TS/41/25 2602542S/EL
7.6. PHYSICAL
a) The Command Center shall be equipped with at least Intel

Quad-core 3.2 GHz processors, VGA card 1GB ram and
dual channel DDR3 RAM of 1GBx4.
b) The Command Center shall keep operating in temperatures
between 32°F to 104°F (0° to 40°C) and humidity up to 80%.
8. NOT IN USED
9. Cameras
9.1. Indoor/outdoor cameras shall be of IP based and Power Over

Ethernet.
9.2. The cameras shall be Internet Protocol (IP) type. Performance

must be guaranteed.
9.3. Unless otherwise stated, all cameras shall be installed with pan/tilt
and zoom capability.
9.4. The wall mounted camera bracket shall be made of non-corrosive

material.
9.5. All indoor pan & tilt camera shall be housed in a 130mm
diameter dome whereas all indoor fixed camera shall be housed in
a dome of less than 100mm diameter.
9.6. Outdoor camera shall be housed in an environment housing and

be mounted on mounted on a 3m hot-dip galvanized tall pole with
pole to be lightning earth bonded to be provided. In the case of
camera mounted on the lamp post, lightning earth bonding need
to be installed
9.7. Video transmission shall be by means of data cables to fibre optic

cable.
9.8. Suitable type of cable shall be use for clear video transmission. For
long distance transmission, single mode fibre optic is to be used.
9.9. Control signal transmission from the control centre to the cameras
shall be by means of fibre optic cable, not combined with video.
TS/41/26 2602542S/EL
9.10. Power to the camera shall be supplied from the central control
system.
9.11. The cameras shall be supplied at 230 VAC + 20%, 50 Hz.
10. OUTDOOR/INDOOR NETWORK FIXED WDR DOME DAY/NIGHT

CAMERA
10.1. The cameras shall be Internet Protocol (IP) type. Performance

must be guaranteed.
10.2. The IP Fixed Dome camera shall use the state of art video
compression engine, real time Full HD video streams of 1080p with
auto focus lens
10.3. The camera shall use triple H/W codec which enables to transmit
max 3 independent steams with different setting for different
requirements. The camera shall combine seamless remote video
monitoring using H.264 with simultaneous transmission of high
quality H.264 to Network video recorder.
10.4. The camera shall support local SD Card backup. Some important
sequence of still images can be stored in SDHC memory card.
This action shall be able to configure to work with pre-post-alarm
event.
10.5. The camera mechanical actuator shall be able to shift infrared (IR)
cut filter to disengage from image path automatically in the low light
environment.
10.6. The camera shall build-in Power over Ethernet (IEEE 802.3af)
compliant or 24VAC or 12VDC.
10.7. The camera shall provide two-way audio support.
10.8. The camera shall support 3 axis mechanism and provide

sophisticated bubble dome design which support wider tilting angle
up to 90 degree.
10.9. All housing shall be withstand rugged environments. The

aluminum die-casting enclosure and Poly Carbonate clear dome
shall enable stable 24 hours security tasks.
10.10. The camera shall support build-in auto-focus features.
TS/41/27 2602542S/EL
10.11. The shall image device shall be 1/2.8“ 2.0M CMOS sensor with
total pixels of 2000(H)X1241(V)
10.12. The aspect ratio shall be HD: 16:9 and SD: 4:3
10.13. The focal length shall be Auto Focus 2.8 -12mm, (103 degree ~ 82
degree)
10.14. Minimum Illuminance Color: 0.01 Lux @ F1.2, 30IRE B/W: 0.001
Lux @ F1.2, 30IRE and 0.0 Lux (IR LED ON) 4pcs IR LED
(Distance : 20m).
10.15. Shutter speed of 1/30sec ~ 1/60000sec and 1/25sec ~ 1/60000sec.
10.16. The camera to provide WDR Wide dynamic range features.
10.17. The camera shall support up to 60fps in 1080P resolution.
10.18. The camera shall support Triple Codec of H.264, MPEG4 and
MJPEG
10.19. Video streaming shall support controllable frame rate and

controllable bandwidth (CBR/VBR)
10.20. All codec shall support 1080p, 720p, D1, CIF and QCIF (MJPEE
mode only)
10.21. The camera shall support max 25fps for 1080p/720p/D1/CIF/QCIF

recording frame rate.
10.22. The audio compression shall comply to two way, G.711 PCM, u-
low 64kbps 8kHz.
10.23. The camera shall support motion detection with FTP, email, alarm
out, JPEG record on local SD notification
10.24. The camera shall support IPv4 protocol: ONVIF, TCP/IP, UDP/IP,
RTP(UDP), RTSP, NTP, HTTP,HTTPS, SSL, DNS, DDNS, DHCP,
FTP, SMTP, ICMP, SNMPv1/v2c/v3(MIB-2)
10.25. The camera shall support IPv6: TCP/IP, HTTP, HTTPS, DHCP
10.26. The camera shall comply to FCC, CE, IP66, ROHS
10.27. The camera shall comply to ONVIF Support (Profile S)
10.28. Operating temperature shall be -10°C ~ 50°C (14°F ~ 122°F)
TS/41/28 2602542S/EL
10.29. These camera shall meet the following minimum specifications:
Imaging Device : 1/2.8” 2.0M CMOS sensor
Resolution : 1920x11080
Lens : Vari-focal- 2.8mm-12mm, F1.2 (wide)

: Removable IR-cut filter for day & night
function
Min. Illumination :Color : 0.01Lux@F1.2 (30IRE)
:B/W : 0.001Lux@F1.2 (30IRE)
Viewing angle : 30X: 59.5° (wide) ~ 2.1° (tele)

(horizontal)
Motion Detection :Off/On (up 4 programmable zones)
Image Setting :Automatic, manual, or scheduled

day/night mode
:BLC (Backlight Compensation)
Shutter time : 1/30sec ~ 1/60000sec

: 1/25sec ~ 1/60000sec
Wide Dynamic Range :On/Off
On board storage :SD/SDHC card slot for video recording

:support max 64GB
IR Illuminators :Built-in IR illuminators, effective up to

15 meters
Security :Multi-level user access with password

protection
:IP address filtering
:HTTPS encrypted data transmission
Application :SDK available for application

development and system integration
Networking :10/100 Mbps Ethernet, RJ-45

:ONVIF support
:Protocols: IPv4, ONVIF, TCP/IP,
UDP/IP, RTP(UDP), RTSP, NTP,
HTTP,HTTPS, SSL, DNS, DDNS,
DHCP, FTP, SMTP, ICMP,
SNMPv1/v2c/v3(MIB-2)
IPv6, TCP/IP, HTTP, HTTPS, DHCP
TS/41/29 2602542S/EL
11. INDOOR/OUTDOOR IP PTZ SPEED DOME CAMERA
11.1 The indoor/outdoor network dome positioning camera shall be a

discreet camera dome system consisting of a dome drive with a
variable speed/high speed pan/tilt drive unit with continuous 360°
rotation up to 400°/sec.
11.2 The indoor/outdoor network dome positioning camera offer multiple

simultaneous video streams with 2.1 megapixel (MPx) 1920 x 1080
resolution, auto iris with 20X or 30X optical, and 12X digital zoom.
11.3 The indoor/outdoor network dome positioning camera shall support

standard IT protocols.
11.4 The indoor/outdoor network dome positioning camera shall be

conformant to the ONVIF Profile S and Profile G and support open
architecture best practices with a published API available to third-
party network video recording and management systems.
11.5 The indoor/outdoor camera dome system shall provide a 100Base-

TX network interface.
11.6 The indoor/outdoor camera Certifications and Ratings shall meet

to:
a) CE Class A, FCC Class A

b) UL/cUL Listed, C-Tick, KC
c) ONVIF Profile S, ONVIF Profile G
d) Cisco® Medianet Media Service Proxy 2.0 compatible
e) Environmental Models Meet NEMA Type 4X and IP66
standards
f) For Environmental models:
IEC 60068-2-1, IEC 60068-2-2, IEC 60068-2-6, IEC 60068-
2-14,IEC 60068-2-27, IEC 60068-2-30, IEC 60068-2-78
g) Environmental Pendant Models:
IEC 60068-2-6, IEC 60068-2-27
11.7 The indoor/outdoor network dome positioning camera shall use a

standard Web browser interface for remote administration and
configuration of camera parameters. The browser interface shall
provide PTZ control including preset and pattern and on-screen
display (OSD) for access to camera programming.

32 window blanks to conceal user-defined privacy areas that
cannot be viewed by an operator.
TS/41/30 2602542S/EL
256 user-programmable presets.

16 user-programmable tours.

proportional pan/tilt functions dependant on the depth of view of the
zoom lens.
11.12 The indoor/outdoor network dome positioning camera shall provide

the ability backup and restore camera settings through an
embedded Web browser.

Wide Dynamic Range (WDR) up to 130dB with selections for on/off
available through the embedded Web browser.

Back Light Compensation with selections for on/off available
through the embedded Web browser.

dynamic White Balance adjustments through the embedded Web
browser for the following modes:
a) Normal mode: Auto white balance with color temperature

range from 7,500k to 2,500k. Properly white balances
scenes illuminated by daylight to warm white sources.
b) Extended mode: Auto white balance with color temperature
range from 7,500k to 2,000k. Properly white balances
scenes illuminated by daylight to warm white sources.
c) Auto Tracking White (ATW) mode: Color temperature range
from 10,000k to 2,000k.
d) Warm White mode: Fixed white balance used for fixed
lighting scenes with warmer (more yellow sources such as
incandescent, tungsten-halogen, warm white compact fl or
LED.
e) Cool White mode (outdoor): Fixed white balance used for
fixed lighting scenes with cooler (more blue) sources such
as true daylight, daylight fluorescent, white light LED’s or
metal halide sources.
f) Manual mode: Fixed white balance used to manually set red
and blue values for color adjustment.
TS/41/31 2602542S/EL
a freeze frame feature that freezes a camera image as a
preprogrammed preset is called, providing a live view once
positioned. Selections for on/off shall be available through the

dynamic focus settings to provide on/off options for Auto Focus and
Focus Trace based on the distance to the ground level targets in a
scene. Focus settings include:
a) Auto Focus: Automatically focuses during runtime operation.

b) Sure Focus: Camera auto focuses when pan, tilt, and zoom
operations are complete or if the IR cut filter changes state.
When auto focus lock is achieved, auto focus is turned off
and the focal position will remain until the next PTZ
operation. If 30 seconds pass without an auto focus lock,
the camera will retain its focal position until the next PTZ
action.
c) Focus Trace: Enables camera to use a focus trace curve
when zooming based on the distance to ground-level targets
in the scene.
11.18 Install Height: Determines the distance between the camera and
ground-level targets for focus trace operations.

Pan and Tilt limit stops with settings available through the

802.1x port security to establish point-to-point access through a
wired or wireless port using Extensible Authentication Protocol
(EAP). Supported EAP methods shall include EAP-MD5, EAP-
TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-PEAP and EAP-FAST.

SNMP v2c and v3.

IPv6 configurations in conjunction with IPv4.

user-selectable configurations for day/night auto mode.
TS/41/32 2602542S/EL
I-Frame interval configuration to increase or decrease the number
of I-Frames per second.

Electronic Image Stabilization (EIS).
11.26 The indoor/outdoor network dome positioning camera shall include

an optional DEFOG feature to make a subject appear clearer when
the surrounding area of the subject is foggy and low contrast.

two simultaneous video streams with up to 8.00 Mbps. The second
stream is variable based on the setup of the primary stream.

Quality of Service (QoS) for different Services Code Point (DSCP):
A mechanism for prioritizing network traffic.

Rate Control:
a) Constant Bit Rate (CBR) streams video at a fixed number of

bits per second.
b) Variable Bit Rate (VBR) reduces or increases bit rates in
response to motion while maintaining high quality video.
c) Constrained Variable Bit Rate (CVBR) provides high quality
video and long recording time of variable bit rate while limiting
variations in recording capacity consumption.

line in/line out audio in accordance with G711 - Alaw / mlaw
encoding.
11.31 The indoor/outdoor network dome positioning network camera shall

provide the ability to run embedded Video analytics.
11.32 Analytic Applications shall be configured and enabled using a

standard Web browser.
TS/41/33 2602542S/EL
11.33 Analytics Applications shall include :
a) Abandoned Object: Detects objects placed in a defined

zone and triggers an alarm if the object remains in the zone
longer than the user-defined time allows. An airport terminal
is a typical installation for this behavior. This behavior can
also detect objects left behind at an ATM, signaling possible
card skimming.
b) Adaptive Motion: Detects and tracks objects that enter a
scene and then triggers an alarm when the objects enter a
user-defined zone. This behavior is primarily used in outdoor
environments with light traffic to reduce the number of false
alarms caused by environmental changes.
c) Auto Tracker: Detects and tracks movement in the
camera’s field of view. When the Auto Tracker behavior is
configured, the system automatically pans and tilts to follow
the moving object until the object stops or disappears from
the monitored area.
d) Camera Sabotage: Detects contrast changes in the field of
view. An alarm is triggered if the lens is obstructed with
spray paint, a cloth, or a lens cap. Any unauthorized
repositioning of the camera also triggers an alarm.
e) Directional Motion: Generates an alarm in a high traffic area
when a person or object moves in a specified direction.
Typical installations for this behavior include an airport gate
or tunnel where cameras can detect objects moving in the
opposite direction of the normal flow of traffic or an
individual entering through an exit door.
f) Loitering Detection: Identifies when people or vehicles
remain in a defined zone longer than the user-defined time
allows. This behavior is effective in real-time notification of
suspicious behavior around ATMs, stairwells, and school
grounds.
g) Object Counting: Counts the number of objects that enter a
defined zone or cross a tripwire. This behavior might be
used to count the number of people at a store entrance/exit
or inside a store where the traffic is light. This behavior is
based on tracking and does not count people in a crowded
setting.
h) Object Removal: Triggers an alarm if an object is removed
from a defined zone. This behavior is ideal for customers
who want to detect the removal of high value objects, such
as a painting from a wall or a statue from a pedestal.
TS/41/34 2602542S/EL
i) Stopped Vehicle: Detects vehicles stopped near a sensitive
area longer than the user-defined time allows. This behavior
is ideal for airport curbside drop-offs, parking enforcement,
suspicious parking, traffic lane breakdowns, and vehicles
waiting at gates.
11.34 Analytic Applications shall be preloaded or configuration and alarm

notification when used with an existing system or a third-party
system that supports Analytics API or (ONVIF G).
11.35 Multiple user-configurable behaviors can be scheduled to work

during a certain time or condition.
11.36 The environmental network dome camera shall provide a 1.5-inch

NPT conduit attachment for pendant mounted applications.
11.37 The environmental network dome camera shall provide a 3/4-inch

NPT conduit attachment in the back box for in-ceiling applications.
11.38 The environmental network dome camera shall be NEMA TYPE

4X, IP66 rated.
11.39 The indoor/outdoor fixed dome system shall meet or exceed the
following design and performance specifications.
11.40 Camera Specifications
a) Sensor Type 1/2.8-inch Type Exmor CMOS

sensor
b) Optical Zoom 20X or 30X
c) Digital Zoom 12X
d) Maximum Resolution 1920 x 1080
e) Frame Rate 60 frames per second (fps)
maximum
f) Lens 30X: f/1.6 ~ f/4.7, (4.3 mm (wide)
~ 129.0 mm tele)
g) Horizontal Angle of View 30X: 59.5° (wide) ~ 2.1° (tele)
h) Aspect Ratio 16:9
i) Light Sensitivity Sensitivity in lux for 90%
reflectance, f/1.6 (wide angle),
43 dB gain at 30 IRE (30%
of signal level) with Sensitivity
Boost OFF; 4X improvement to
sensitivity with Sensitivity
Boost ON
TS/41/35 2602542S/EL
Color (33 ms) 0.20 lux
Color Low Light (33 ms) 0.03 lux
Color (250 ms) 0.025 lux
Color Low Light (250 ms) 0.008 lux
Mono (33 ms) 0.06 lux
Mono Low Light (33 ms) 0.004 lux
Mono (250 ms) 0.008 lux
Mono Low Light (250 ms) 0.001 lux
j) Day/Night Capabilities Yes
k) IR Cut Filter Yes
l) Wide Dynamic Range 130 dB
m) Iris Control Auto iris with manual override
n) Backlight Compensation Yes
o) Automatic Gain Control Yes
p) Active Noise Filtering Yes
q) Electronic Image
Stabilization (EIS) Yes
11.41 Video Specifications
a) Video Encoding H.264 in High, Main, or Base

profiles and MJPEG
b) Video Streams Up to 2 simultaneous streams,
the second stream is variable
based on the setup of the
primary stream
c) H.264 Smart Lowers bandwidth and storage
Compression Technology requirements by up
to 70%, while reducing storage
requirements.
d) Frame Rate Up to 60, 50, 30, 25, 15, 12.5,
10, 8.333, 7.5, 6, 5, 3, 2.5, 2, 1
(depending upon coding,
resolution, and stream
configuration)
TS/41/36 2602542S/EL
e) Available Resolutions
16:9 Aspect Ratio 2.07 MPx (1920 x 1080); 60 ips
max
2.07 MPx (1920 x 1080); 30 ips
max
0.92 MPx (1280 x 720); 30 ips
max
0.36 MPx (800 x 448); 30 ips
max
0.23 MPx (640 x 352); 30 ips
max
f) Supported Protocols TCP/IP, UDP/IP (Unicast,
Multicast IGMP), UPnP, DNS,
DHCP, RTP, RTSP, NTP, IPv4,
IPv6, SNMP v2c/v3, QoS, HTTP,
HTTPS,SSH, SSL, SMTP, FTP,
and 802.1x (EAP)
g) Users Up to 20 simultaneous users
Unicast depending on resolution settings
(2 guaranteed streams)
Multicast Unlimited H.264
h) Security Access Password protected
i) Software Interface Web browser view and setup
j) System Integration Existing Endura 2.0 (or later);
Existing Digital Sentry 7.3 (or
later), IP Video Management
System, Digital Video
Management System
k) Open API Camera API, ONVIF Profile G
and Profile S
l) Mobile Application Integrated to Camera Mobile App
m) Local Storage Up to 32 GB SD Card
n) Alarm recording: Capture 1-5-10 second video
clips on camera sabotage,
motion detection, or alarm input;
Outage recording: record video
continuously in the case of
network outage
o) Continuous recording: initiated by user Access video
through FTP protocol or via
ONVIF Profile G request
TS/41/37 2602542S/EL
p) Minimum PC Requirements
1) Processor Intel® Core™ i3 Processor, 2.4 GHz

2) Operating System Windows® 7 (32-bit and 64-bit)
with DirectX® 11, Windows® 10 DirectX 11,or Mac®
OS X 10.4 (or later). Microsoft Windows Server
3) Web User Interface Requires QuickTime® 7.55 (or
later)
4) Memory 16 GB RAM
5) Network Interface Card 100/1000 Mbps (or greater)
6) Monitor Minimum of 1024 x 768 resolution, 16- or 32-
bit pixel color resolution
7) Web Browser Internet Explorer® 8.0 (or later) or
Firefox 3.5 (or later); Internet Explorer 8.0 (or later) is
for configuring analytics
8) Media Player or QuickTime® 7.6.5 for Windows 7 and
Windows 10; or QuickTime 7.6.4 for Mac OS X 10.4
(or later)
11.42 Electrical Specifications
a) Port RJ-45 connector for 100Base-TX

Auto MDI/MDI-X
Autonegotiate/manual setting
b) Cabling Type Cat5e cable or better for 100Base-TX
c) Input Voltage 18 to 32 VAC; 24 VAC nominal;
22 to 27 VDC; 24 VDC nominal
d) Input Power
1) 24 VAC nominal 24 VA nominal (without heater
and blower); 81 VA nominal
(with heater and blower)
2) 24 VDC nominal 1 A nominal (without heater and
blower); 3 A nominal (with heater
and blower
3) PoE+ 18 W, Environmental models
(with heater on); 15 W, Non-
Environmental (with heater off)
4) HPoE 60 W, Environmental models
(with heater on); 15 W, Non-
Environmental (with heater off)
TS/41/38 2602542S/EL
e) Alarm
1) Unsupervised Detects open or closed alarm

state
2) Supervised Detects open and short alarm
state with external 1-kohm
resistor
3) Input 3.5 VDC maximum, 3.5mA maximum
4) Relay Output ±32 VDC maximum, 150mA maximum
f) Audio
1) Input / Output Line level/external microphone

input; 600-ohm differential, 1 Vp-
p maximum signal level
11.43 Dome Drive Specifications
a) Pan Movement 360º continuous pan rotation

b) Pan Speed Variable between 280º per
second continuous pan to 0.1º
per second
c) Maximum Pan Speed 430º per second
d) Vertical Tilt Unobstructed tilt of +1º to –90º
e) Manual Control Speed Pan speed of 0.1º to 80º per

second; tilt operation shall range
from 0.1º to 45º per second
f) Automatic Preset Speed Pan speed of 280º and a tilt
speed of 160º per second
g) Presets 256 positions
h) Tours 16 tours
i) Preset Accuracy ± 0.1º
j) Proportional Pan Speed decreases in
/Tilt Speed proportion to the increasing
depth of zoom
k) Motor Continuous duty and variable
speed, operating at 18 to 32
VAC, 24 VAC nominal
TS/41/39 2602542S/EL
l) Window Blanking 32 blanked windows
m) Auto Flip Rotates dome 180º at bottom of
tilt travel
n) Dome Drive All dome drives are compatible
Compatibility with all back box configurations
o) Power Nominal 24 VA (without heater
Consumption and blower running
Nominal 81 VA (with heater and
blower running)
11.44 Back box and Lower dome
The black box shall be made of aluminium, Dome Drive made of

aluminum , thermo plastic and Lower Dome of Acrylic. Back box
and lower dome shall meet to follow specifications:
a) Pendant, Environmental
1) Connection Quick, positive mechanical and

to Dome Drive electrical disconnect
2) Installation Quick-mount wall, corner, pole,
parapet, or ceiling adapter
3) Cable Entry Through 1.5-inch NPT fitting
4) Environmental Factory-installed heaters,
Features blowers, and sun shroud
5) Operating 24VAC: Maximum temperature
Temperatures range of –51°C to 60°C
(–60°F to 140°F) for two
hours and a continuous
operating range of –45°C
to 50°C (–50°F to 122°F)
HPoE: Maximum operating
temperature of 60°C
(140°F) for two hours and
a continuous operating
range of –45°C to 50°C (–
50°F to 122°F)
PoE+: Maximum operating
4°F to 122°F)
TS/41/40 2602542S/EL
6) Construction Aluminum
7) Trim Ring 2 screws
Connection
b) Pendant, Standard

4) Environmental Factory-installed blowers
Features
5) Operating Maximum temperature range of
Temperatures 45°C (113°F) for two hours and a
continuous operating range of –
5C° to 35°C (23°F to 95°F)
Connection
c) In-Ceiling, Environmental

2) Installation Hard Ceiling applications
3) Cable Entry 0.75-inch conduit fitting
4) Environmental Factory-installed heaters and
Features blowers
Temperatures range of –51°Cto 60°C (–
60°F to 140°F) for two
hours and a continuous
operating range of –45°C
to 50°C (–50°F to 122°F)
TS/41/41 2602542S/EL
50°F to 122°F)
4°F to 122°F)
Connection
d) In-Ceiling, Interior

2) Installation Hard ceiling applications
3) Cable Entry 0.75-inch conduit fitting
4) Operating Maximum temperature range of
Temperatures 0° to 50°Cx(32°F to 122°F)
Connection
e) Stainless Steel, Environmental

4) Environmental Factory-installed heaters,
Features blowers, and sun shroud
TS/41/42 2602542S/EL
Temperatures range of – 51°C (–60°F to
140°F) for two hours and
50°F to 122°F)
50°F to 122°F)
range of –20°C to 50°C
(–4°F to 122°F)
6) Construction Stainless Steel
Connection
12. Explosion Proof Pan / Tilt and Zoom IP Camera
12.1 The explosion proof camera shall be installed in the high

hazardous are such as chemical store, solvent store, cylinder store
with flammable and explosive area. All outdoor camera shall have
enclosure. Camera installed shall comply to the specification as
specified
12.2 The proposed camera to meet to the following certification:

a) FCC Part 15, CE, UL/cUL Listed, ICES-003, RCM, KC
b) IP66, IP67, and IP68, and Type 4X and Type 6
c) S Mark for Argentina
d) Tamb –60°C to 60°C
e) UL/cUL Hazardous Locations Listed per Zone requirements
f) INMETRO BR-Ex d IIC T6, EAC Ex, CCOE
g) CLASS I, ZONE 1, AEx db op pr IIC T6, AEx db op is op pr
IIC T6, AEx tb op pr IIIC T85°C, AEx tb op is op pr IIIC
T85°C
TS/41/43 2602542S/EL
h) IECEx UL 17.0011X
i) Ex db op pr IIC T6 Gb X, Ex tb op pr IIIC T85°C Db X, Ex db
op is op pr IIC T6 Gb X, Ex tb op is op pr IIIC T85°C Db X
j) DEMKO 17 ATEX 1834X
k) 0539 II 2 G Ex db op pr IIC T6 Gb, II 2 D Ex tb op
pr IIIC T85°C Db, 0539 II 2 G Ex db op is op pr IIC T6
Gb, II 2 D Ex tb op is op pr IIIC T85°C Db, DN
12.3 The system shall offer a 1920 x 1080 maximum resolution

Integrated Camera/Optics Packages, 30X optical zoom, 12X digital
zoom with an infrared cut filter, day/night, and built-in motion
detection.
12.4 The explosion proof pan, tilt and zoom system shall be designed
for hazardous, harsh, and marine environments, and shall be
certified as such.
12.5 The explosion proof pan, tilt and zoom camera system shall
provide up to a 1000Base-T network interface for live streaming to
a standard Web browser or a VMS. The camera shall support
FSFP/SFP modules that are Multi-Source Agreement (MSA)
Compliant, adapting to multiple transmission methods; fiber,
Ethernet-over-Coax, UTP.
12.6 The explosion proof pan, tilt and zoom IP camera system shall
provide auto focus and auto iris with manual override. The camera
system shall be designed to mount upright or inverted. The camera
will automatically re-orient itself for horizontal viewing
12.7 The explosion proof pan motion has continuous 360° operation and
tilt operation has a tilt range from +90° to –90°.
12.8 The explosion proof pan, tilt and zoom IP camera system shall use
a standard Web browser interface for remote administration and
configuration of camera parameters.
12.9 The explosion proof pan, tilt and zoom IP camera system shall be
conformant to ONVIF S, G, and Q and support open architecture
connectivity for third-party software recording solutions allowing
integration into virtually any IP-based system. It shall be compatible
with existing Endura 2.0, Digital Sentry® 7.3, and VideoXpert 1.9 (or
later) video management systems. The IP camera should able to
record, manage, configure, and view multiple live streams.
12.10 The explosion proof pan, tilt and zoom IP camera system shall
include a programmable window wiper and washer/wipe sequence
under a single command.
TS/41/44 2602542S/EL
12.11 The explosion proof pan, tilt and zoom IP camera system shall use
a beltless, gearless, motion control system driven directly from the
shaft of the motor, ensuring accurate and reliable motion. The
camera shall support a direct drive motor control system, which
automatically accommodates for high vibration or windy conditions
and ensures smooth, accurate positioning.
12.12 The camera shall pan and tilt at up to 200º per second.
12.13 The explosion proof IP camera shall support proportional pan/tilt

/zoom functions dependent on the depth of view of the zoom lens.
12.14 The explosion proof IP camera system shall operate in winds up to

112 knots and shall survive winds of up to 130 knots. The IP
camera shall operate between -60ºC and 60°C. and maintain a T6
(<85°C) surface temperature in all operating conditions. It shall
cold-start from >-40ºC
12.15 The explosion proof camera IP system shall support an optional

vari-zoom, infrared illuminator with a range of up to 200 meters,
supporting video in all lighting conditions.
12.16 The explosion proof IP camera system’s optional IR illuminator

shall operate in conjunction with the camera zoom to consistently
light the camera’s field of view.
12.17 The explosion proof IP camera shall support dual cable entry ports
allowing the installer to separate power and data cables or to install
cables flexibly. It shall include a safety attach point.
12.18 The explosion proof IP camera shall include an integrated wiper to

keep the viewing window clean. The camera shall include a sun
shroud, heater, and window defroster, ensuring that the camera
functions and captures video in extreme weather.
12.19 The explosion proof IP camera shall include a heating system to

keep the window free from condensation and fog.
12.20 The explosion proof IP camera shall include an internal micro SD

slot, allowing the camera to record locally.
12.21 The explosion proof IP camera shall be programmable to perform

actions based upon up to four physical alarm triggers.
12.22 The explosion proof IP camera shall have local (on-camera),

hardware (two wires for button in safe room), and software (at
VMS) reset options.
TS/41/45 2602542S/EL
12.23 The explosion proof IP camera shall support 32 window blanks to
conceal user-defined privacy areas that cannot be viewed by an
operator.
12.24 The explosion proof IP camera shall be conformant to the ONVIF

Profile S, G, and Q support open architecture best practices with a
published API available to third-party network video recording and
management systems.
12.25 The explosion proof IP camera shall provide the ability to backup
and restore camera settings through an embedded Web browser.
12.26 The explosion proof IP camera shall provide Wide Dynamic Range
(WDR) up to 130dB with selections for on/off available through the
embedded Web browser. The IP camera shall provide dynamic
White Balance adjustments through the embedded Web browser.
12.27 The explosion proof IP camera shall provide dynamic focus

settings to provide on/off options for Auto Focus and Focus Trace
based on the distance to the ground level targets in a scene.
12.28 The explosion proof IP camera shall provide Pan and Tilt limit
stops with settings available through the embedded Web browser.
12.29 The explosion proof camera shall provide 802.1x port security to
establish point-to-point access through a wired or wireless port
using Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP). Supported EAP
methods shall include EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-
PEAP and EAP-FAST.ds
12.30 The explosion proof IP camera shall support SNMP v2c and v3,
IPv6 configurations in conjunction with IPv4.
12.31 The explosion proof IP camera shall provide user-selectable

configurations for day/night auto mode.
12.32 The explosion proof IP camera shall provide I-Frame interval

configuration to increase or decrease the number of I-Frames per
second.
12.33 The explosion proof IP camera shall provide Smart Compression

capability for enhanced storage optimization.
12.34 The explosion proof IP camera shall provide Electronic Image

Stabilization (EIS).
12.35 The explosion proof IP camera shall include an DEFOG feature to

make a subject appear clearer when the surrounding area of the
subject is foggy and low contrast.
TS/41/46 2602542S/EL
12.36 The explosion proof IP camera shall provide two simultaneous
video streams with up to 8.00 Mbps. The second stream is variable
based on the setup of the primary stream.
12.37 The explosion proof IP camera shall provide Quality of Service

(QoS) for Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP): A
mechanism for prioritizing network traffic.
12.38 The explosion proof IP camera shall provide the ability to run
embedded Video analytics. Analytic application shall be configured
and enabled using a standard Web browser. Analytics for
explosion proof IP camera includes:
a) Abandoned Object – Detects objects placed in a defined
longer than the user-defined time allows.
b) Adaptive Motion – Detects and tracks objects that enter a
c) Auto Tracker – Detects and tracks movement in the
camera’s field of view. When the Auto Tracker behavior is
configured, the system automatically pans and tilts to follow
the moving object until the object stops or disappears from
the monitored area.
d) Camera Sabotage – Detects contrast changes in the field of
e) Directional Motion – Generates an alarm in a high traffic
area when a person or object moves in a specified direction.
Typical installations for this behavior include a tunnel where
cameras can detect objects moving in the opposite direction
of the normal flow of traffic or an individual entering through
an exit door.
f) Loitering Detection – Identifies when people or vehicles
allows.
g) Object Counting – Counts the number of objects that enter a
used to count the number of people at an entrance/exit
where the traffic is light. This behavior is based on tracking
and does not count people in a crowded setting.
h) Object Removal – Triggers an alarm if an object is removed
from a defined zone.
TS/41/47 2602542S/EL
i) Stopped Vehicle – Detects vehicles stopped near a sensitive
is ideal for suspicious parking, traffic lane breakdowns, and
vehicles waiting at gates.
12.39 IP EXPLOSION PROOF PTZ CAMERA SPECIFICATIONS

sensor
b) Optical Zoom 30X
c) Digital Zoom 12X
d) Maximum Resolution 1920 x 1080
maximum
f) Lens 30X f/1.6 ~ f/4.7, (4.3 mm (wide)
~ 129.0 mm tele)
h) Aspect Ratio 16:9 and 4:3

reflectance, f/1.6 (wide angle), 43
dB gain at 30 IRE (30% of signal
level) with Sensitivity Boost OFF;
4X improvement to sensitivity
with Sensitivity Boost ON
j) Color (33 ms) 0.20 lux
k) Color Low Light (33 ms) 0.03 lux
l) Color (250 ms) 0.025 lux
m) Color Low Light (250 ms) 0.008 lux
n) Mono (33 ms) 0.06 lux
o) Mono Low Light (33 ms) 0.004 lux
p) Mono (250 ms) 0.008 lux
q) Mono Low Light (250 ms) 0.001 lux
r) Day/Night Capabilities Yes
s) IR Cut Filter Yes
t) Wide Dynamic Range 130 dB
u) Iris Control Auto iris with manual override
v) Backlight Compensation Yes
TS/41/48 2602542S/EL
w) Automatic Gain Control Yes
x) Active Noise Filtering Yes
y) Electronic Image Stabilization (EIS) Yes
12.40 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS
The explosion proof IP camera shall support independently

configurable primary and secondary streams plus service stream.
The Compression type shall be of H.264 High, Main, or Baseline
profiles; and MJPEG with Smart Compression options.
The Service Stream to be JPEG stream; the JPEGs will be the
same resolution as the primary stream.
Available resolutions (16:9 and 4:3 Aspect Ratio):
MPX Width X Height

1080P 1920 x 1080
720P 1280 x 720
0.36 800 x 448
0.23 640 x 352
Constant bit rate (CBR) and constrained variable bit rate (CVBR).
Frame rate: Up to 60, 50, 30, 25, 20, 15, 12, 10, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2,
1 (depending on the coding, resolution, and stream configuration).
Video streams shall support ONVIF profile S.
a) Storage and Recording
1) The explosion proof IP camera control shall have

onboard micro SD card storage.
2) Card type – micro SD
3) Capacity – addressable to 2TB
4) The local micro SD storage shall have the ability to
be backed up to alternate media without removal of
the micro SD card from the camera.
5) Local recording on the micro SD card shall
commence upon loss of network connectivity, based
on a pre-programmed schedule.
TS/41/49 2602542S/EL
6) The camera shall record video continuously in the
case of network outage.
Alarm recording: The explosion proof camera shall
capture selectable 1, 5, or 10 second video clips on
camera sabotage, motion detection, or alarm input.
7) Video recording and storage shall support ONVIF
profile G.
b) Analytics
1) Analytics shall be configured and enabled using a

2) The explosion proof camera shall have the ability to
detect motion within user defined areas of the video
image.
3) The camera can run two analytic behaviors
simultaneously.
4) Configurable behaviors are:
i) Abandoned Object – Detection of objects

placed in a defined zone and triggers an alarm
if the object remains in the zone longer than
the user-defined time allows.
ii) Adaptive Motion – Detection and tracking of
objects that enter a scene and triggering of an
alarm when the objects enter a user-defined
zone.
iii) Auto Tracker – Detects and tracks objects that
enter a scene and then triggers an alarm when
the objects enter a user-defined zone.
iv) Camera Sabotage – Detection of contrast
changes in the field of view, suitable to detect
lens obstruction or unauthorized repositioning
of the camera.
v) Directional Motion – Detection of person or
object moving in a specified direction.
vi) Loitering Detection – Identification of people or
vehicles remaining in a defined zone longer
than a user-defined time.
vii) Object Counting – Counting the number of
objects that enter a defined zone or cross a
tripwire.
TS/41/50 2602542S/EL
viii) Object Removal – Detection of object is
removed from a defined zone.
ix) Stopped Vehicle – Detection of vehicles
stopped near a sensitive area longer than a
user-defined time.
12.41 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
a) Alarm – The explosion proof camera shall have four

alarm/sensor inputs and one relay output for alarm or control,
and one relay output for external washer.
b) The alarm input shall be able to detect an open or closed
alarm state function in supervised modes.
c) Relay Output –30 VDC maximum, 500 mA maximum
12.42 NETWORK
a) Connectivity
1) Up to 1000 BASE-TX Ethernet with RJ-45 connector.

2) Fiber and Ethernet-over-Coax via SFP MSA
Complaint Transceivers
b) Protocols to be supported
1) Transmission Control Protocol (TCP), Internet

Protocol (IP) v4 and v6, User Datagram Protocol
(UDP)
2) Configuration – Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP)
3) Web services – Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP),
Secure HTTP (HTTPS)
4) Network services – Domain Name System (DNS),
Network Time Protocol (NTP), Internet Control
Message Protocol (ICMP), Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP) v2c/v3, Universal Plug
and Play (UPnP)
5) Media – Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP), Real-
Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP).
6) Multicast – Internet Group Management Protocol
(IGMP)
TS/41/51 2602542S/EL
7) Notifications – File Transfer Protocol (FTP), Simple
Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
8) Remote Access – Secure Shell (SSH)
9) Security – Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), IEEE 802.1x
(EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-PEAP and
EAP-FAST)
10) Quality of Service – IEEE 802.1p Layer 3
Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP)
11) DDNS – The explosion proof camera shall support
DDNS services offered by the Manufacturer and
other publicly available service offerings
c) Security
1) The explosion proof camera shall support IP address

filtering whereby users can enter a list of allowed or
blocked IP addresses for viewing video and
configuring camera settings.
2) The network camera system shall provide three
levels of user access with password protection.
12.43 IP EXPLOSION PROOF CAMERA SOFTWARE
a) General
The explosion proof camera shall have a built-in web server

which supports browser-based configuration. The camera’s
web server shall allow access to camera information and all
primary software functions.
The Manufacturer shall offer video viewer and configuration

to implement the following actions:
1) Camera discovery
2) Live Video
3) Video stream selection
4) Video stream configuration
5) Use preset video setting configurations
6) Configure custom video setting configurations
7) Compression type
8) Resolution
9) Image rate
10) I-frame interval
11) H.264 profile
TS/41/52 2602542S/EL
12) Quality of Service (QoS)
13) Bit rate control
14) Multicast
15) Unicast
16) JPEG frame rate
17) Maximize view area of video to full size of browser
18) Revert to normal view
19) Open stream in new window
20) Capture and save image as .jpg file
21) Resize viewing area
b) Image Settings
1) Image quality
2) Exposure
3) Focus
4) White balance
5) Window blanking
6) Digital zoom
7) Lighting mode
8) Video noise reduction
9) Digital processing (color and detail adjustment)
10) Image enhancement
11) Quick setup preset modes
12) Sharpness
13) Saturation
14) Contrast
15) Brightness
16) Exposure modes
c) Recording
1) Initiate instant record and playback

2) Manage micro SD card storage
TS/41/53 2602542S/EL
d) Events
1) configure event sources:

2) External alarm events
e) Analytic events
1) E-mail setup
2) Define web addresses for notifications
f) Camera network settings
1) Firmware upgrade
2) Reset to factory default (local, hardware remote, and
software remote)
3) Set date, time, and NTP server synchronization
4) User access control
5) View and export camera settings
6) View system logs
g) Minimum System Requirements
1) Processor – Intel® Core™ i3 Processor, 2.4 GHz

2) Acceptable Operating Systems:
3) Microsoft® Windows® 7 (32-bit and 64-bit), or
DirectX® 11, Microsoft Windows Server
4) Windows XP Service Pack 3 with DirectX 9.0c
5) Mac OS X 10.4 (or later)
6) Memory – 4 GB RAM
7) Network Interface Card – 100 megabits (or greater)
8) Monitor – Minimum 1024 x 768 resolution, 16- or 32-
bit pixel color
9) Acceptable Web Browsers:
10) Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 8.0 (or later) for
analytics configuring
11) Mozilla® Firefox® 3.5 (or later)
12) Google Chrome™ (51 or later)
13) Acceptable Media Players:
TS/41/54 2602542S/EL
14) Media Player
15) QuickTime 7.6.5 for Windows 7 or Windows 10,
16) QuickTime 7.6.4 for Mac OS X 10.4 (or later)
17) The Manufacturer shall offer an open API.
h) The IP camera software shall support integrations as follows
1) Existing Video Management: VideoXpert™; Endura®

2.0 (or later); Digital Sentry® 7.3 (or later); Third-party
system through API/SDK, ONVIF Profile S, ONVIF
Profile G, and Profile Q
2) Mobile Application – Camera Mobile
i) Required Systems for Analytics
1) Interface – Advanced System Management Software

or Video management platform system
2) Open API – The API can transmit behavior alarm
data to third party applications
12.44 ELECTRICAL
a) Voltage Input 48 VDC, 2A or 100-240 VAC, 2A

@ 50/60 Hz
b) Voltage Input Range ±10%
c) Power Consumption Maximum 166 VA/166 W
EXP1230-4N
Maximum 183 VA/174 W
EXP1230-7N
Maximum 220 VA/211 W
EXP1230-7M
d) Heater and Defroster Hardware controlled
e) Alarm
1) Unsupervised Detects open or closed alarm
state
2) Supervised Detects open and short alarm
state with external 1-kohm
resistor to detect alarm
tampering
TS/41/55 2602542S/EL
f) Input 3.5 VDC maximum, 3.5 mA
maximum
g) Relay Output 30 VDC, 500 mA maximum
12.45 MECHANICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL
a) General Construction 316L stainless steel

b) Finish Electropolish
c) Viewing Window High transmissivity, glass
d) Operating Temperature –76º to 140ºF (–60º to
60ºC)
e) Cable Entry Dual, 0.75-inch (1.91 cm)
NPT threaded opening
f) Pan Movement 360º continuous pan
rotation
g) Vertical Tilt +90° to -90° from
Horizontal (with automatic re-
alignment when installed
inverted
h) Pan/Tilt Speed 0.05°/sec to 200°/sec with
proportional Preset Accuracy
motion ±0.05°
i) Wind Speeds
1. Full Motion 64 knots (74mph/119kmh)
Control
2. Limited Speed 96 knots (110mph/177kmh)
Control
3. Hold Position 112 knots (129mph/208kmh)
4. Survives 130 knots (150mph/241kmh)
j) Integral Windshield Wiper Programmable with a
washer/wipe sequence
under a single command
TS/41/56 2602542S/EL
12.46 Contractor personnel shall comply with all applicable state and
local licensing requirements
12.47 The network design and configuration shall be verified for

compatibility and performance with the camera(s).
12.48 Network configuration shall be tested and qualified by the

Contractor prior to camera installation
13. EXPLOSION PROOF FIXED IP CAMERA
13.1. The explosion proof fixed IP camera shall be installed in the high
hazardous are such as chemical store, solvent store, cylinder store
with flammable and explosive area. All outdoor camera shall have
enclosure. IP Camera installed shall comply to the specification as
specified
13.2. The proposed camera to meet to the following certification:
a) FCC Part 15, CE, UL/cUL Listed, ICES-003, RCM, KC

b) IP66 and Type IP66, IP67, and IP68, and Type 4X, Type 6,
and Type 6P
c) S Mark for Argentina
d) Vibration: IEC 60068-2-6 Test Fc
e) Tamb –60°C to 60°C
f) UL/cUL Hazardous Locations Listed per NEC Division and
Zone requirement
g) Class I, Groups A, B, C, and D, Class II, Groups E, F, G, T6,
Class I, Zone 1, AEx d IIC, AEx tD 21 T85°C IP66
h) IECEx
i) Ex d IIC T6 Gb, Ex tb IIIC T85°C Db IP66, ATEX Ex tb IIIC
T85°C Db IP66, INMETRO BR-Ex d IIC T6 IP66
j) EAC Ex, CCOE, NTRL, DNV
13.3. The explosion proof fixed IP camera system shall offer a 1920 x
1080 maximum resolution Integrated Camera/Optics Packages,
30X optical zoom, 12X digital zoom with an infrared cut filter,
day/night, and built-in motion detection.
13.4. The explosion proof fixed IP camera system shall be designed for
hazardous, harsh, and marine environments, and shall be certified
as such.
TS/41/57 2602542S/EL
13.5. The explosion proof fixed IP camera system shall provide up to a
1000Base-T network interface for live streaming to a standard Web
browser or a VMS. The camera shall support FSFP/SFP modules
that are Multi-Source Agreement (MSA) Compliant, adapting to
multiple transmission methods; fiber, Ethernet over coax, UTP.
13.6. The explosion proof IP fixed camera system shall provide auto
focus and auto iris with manual override.
13.7. The explosion proof IP camera system shall be designed to mount

upright.
13.8. The explosion proof fixed IP camera system shall use a standard
Web browser interface for remote administration and configuration
of camera parameters.
13.9. The explosion proof fixed IP camera system shall be conformant to

ONVIF S, G, and Q and support open architecture connectivity for
third-party software recording solutions allowing integration into
virtually any IP-based system. It shall compatible with existing IP
Video management system in command centre such as Endura
2.0, Digital Sentry® 7.3, and VideoXpert 1.9 (or later), The IP
camera should able to record, manage, configure, and view
multiple live streams.
13.10. The explosion proof IP fixed camera system shall include a

programmable window wiper and washer/wipe sequence under a
single command.
13.11. The explosion proof camera shall operate between -60C and 60C.
The camera shall maintain a T6 (<85C) surface temperature in all
operating conditions and camera shall be able to cold-start from >-
30º C
13.12. The explosion proof IP camera shall support dual cable entry ports
allowing the installer to separate power and data cables or to install
cables flexibly. The camera shall include a safety attach point.
13.13. The explosion proof IP camera shall include an integrated wiper to

keep the viewing window clean.
13.14. The explosion proof IP camera shall include a sun shroud and
support a heater and window defroster, ensuring that the camera
functions and captures video in extreme weather.
13.15. The explosion proof IP camera shall a heating system to keep the
window ice free from condensation and fog.
13.16. The explosion proof IP camera shall include an internal micro SD

slot, allowing the camera to record locally.
TS/41/58 2602542S/EL
13.17. The explosion proof IP camera shall be programmable to perform
actions based upon up to 4 physical alarm triggers.
13.18. The explosion proof IP camera shall have a local (on-camera),

hardware (two wires for button in safe room), and software (at
VMS) reset options.
13.19. The explosion proof IP camera shall support 32 window blanks to

conceal user-defined privacy areas that cannot be viewed by an
operator.
13.20. The explosion proof IP camera shall be conformant to the ONVIF

Profile S, G, and Q support open architecture best practices with a
published API available to third-party network video recording and
management systems. Ir shall provide the ability backup and
restore camera settings through an embedded Web browser.
13.21. The explosion proof IP camera shall provide Wide Dynamic Range
(WDR) up to 130dB with selections for on/off available through the
embedded Web browser. The camera shall provide dynamic White
Balance adjustments through the embedded Web browser
13.22. The explosion proof IP camera shall provide dynamic focus

settings to provide on/off options for Auto Focus and Focus Trace
based on the distance to the ground level targets in a scene.
13.23. The explosion proof IP camera shall provide 802.1x port security to
establish point-to-point access through a wired or wireless port
using Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP). Supported EAP
methods shall include EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-
PEAP and EAP-FAST.
13.24. The explosion proof IP camera shall support SNMP v2c and v3.
and shall also support IPv6 configurations in conjunction with IPv4.
13.25. The explosion proof IP camera shall provide user-selectable

configurations for day/night auto mode.
13.26. The explosion proof IP camera shall provide I-Frame interval

configuration to increase or decrease the number of I-Frames per
second.
13.27. The explosion proof IP camera shall provide smart compression

capability for enhanced storage optimization. The explosion proof
camera shall provide Electronic Image Stabilization (EIS).
13.28. The explosion proof IP camera shall include an DEFOG feature to

make a subject appear clearer when the surrounding area of the
subject is foggy and low contrast.
TS/41/59 2602542S/EL
13.29. The explosion proof IP camera shall provide two simultaneous
video streams with up to 8.00 Mbps. The second stream is variable
based on the setup of the primary stream.
13.30. The explosion proof IP camera shall provide Quality of Service

(QoS) for different Services Code Point (DSCP): A mechanism for
prioritizing network traffic.
13.31. The explosion proof IP camera shall provide the ability to run
embedded Video analytics. Analytic application shall be configured
and enabled using a standard Web browser. Analytics for
explosion proof IP camera includes:
a) Analytic Applications shall be configured and enabled using

a standard Web browser.
b) Analytics for Enhanced including:
c) Abandoned Object: Detects objects placed in a defined
longer than the user-defined time allows.
d) Adaptive Motion: Detects and tracks objects that enter a
e) Camera Sabotage: Detects contrast changes in the field of
f) Directional Motion: Generates an alarm in a high traffic area
when a person or object moves in a specified direction.
Typical installations for this behavior include an airport gate
or tunnel where cameras can detect objects moving in the
opposite direction of the normal flow of traffic or an
individual entering through an exit door.
g) Loitering Detection: Identifies when people or vehicles
allows.
h) Object Counting: Counts the number of objects that enter a
used to count the number of people at an entrance/exit
where the traffic is light. This behavior is based on tracking
and does not count people in a crowded setting.
TS/41/60 2602542S/EL
i) Object Removal: Triggers an alarm if an object is removed
from a defined zone.
j) Stopped Vehicle: Detects vehicles stopped near a sensitive
is ideal for suspicious parking, traffic lane breakdowns, and
vehicles waiting at gates.
13.32. IP EXPLOSION PROOF CAMERA SPECIFICATIONS

sensor
b) Optical Zoom 30X
c) Digital Zoom 12X
d) Maximum Resolution 1920 x 1080.
maximum
f) Lens 30X: f/1.6 ~ f/4.7, (4.3 mm (wide)
~ 129.0 mm tele)
h) Aspect Ratio 16:9
reflectance, f/1.6 (wide angle), 43
dB gain at 30 IRE (30% of signal
level) with Sensitivity Boost OFF;
4X improvement to sensitivity
with Sensitivity Boost ON
j) Color (33 ms) 0.20 lux
k) Color Low Light (33 ms) 0.03 lux
l) Color (250 ms) 0.025 lux
m) Color Low Light (250 ms) 0.008 lux
n) Mono (33 ms) 0.06 lux
o) Mono Low Light (33 ms) 0.004 lux
p) Mono (250 ms) 0.008 lux
q) Mono Low Light (250 ms) 0.001 lux
r) Day/Night Capabilities Yes
s) IR Cut Filter Yes
TS/41/61 2602542S/EL
t) Wide Dynamic Range 130 dB
u) Iris Control Auto iris with manual
override
v) Backlight Compensation Yes
w) Automatic Gain Control Yes
x) Active Noise Filtering Yes
y) Electronic Image Stabilization (EIS) Yes
13.33. VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS
The explosion proof IP camera shall support independently

configurable primary and secondary streams plus service stream.
The Compression type shall be of H.264 High, Main, or Baseline
profiles; and MJPEG with Smart Compression options
The Service Stream to be of JPEG stream; the JPEGs will be the
same resolution as the primary stream
Available resolutions (16:9 and 4:3 Aspect Ratio):
MPX Width X Height

1080P 1920 x 1080
720P 1280 x 720
0.36 800 x 448
0.23 640 x 352
Constant bit rate (CBR) and constrained variable bit rate (CVBR).
Frame rate: Up to 60, 50, 30, 25, 20, 15, 12, 10, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2,
1 (depending on the coding, resolution, and stream configuration)
Video streams shall support ONVIF profile S.
a) Storage and Recording
1) The explosion proof camera control shall have

onboard micro SD card storage.
a. Card type: micro SD
b. Capacity: addressable to 2 TB
2) The local micro SD storage shall have the ability to
be backed up to alternate media without removal of
the micro SD card from the camera.
TS/41/62 2602542S/EL
3) Local recording on the micro SD card shall
commence upon loss of network connectivity, based
on a pre-programmed schedule.
4) The camera shall record video continuously in the
case of network outage.
5) Alarm recording: The explosion proof camera shall
capture selectable 1, 5, or 10 second video clips on
camera sabotage, motion detection, or alarm input.
6) Video recording and storage shall support ONVIF
profile G.
b) Analytics
1) Analytics shall be configured and enabled using a

2) The explosion proof camera shall have the ability to
detect motion within user defined areas of the video
image.
3) Number of simultaneous running analytic behaviors:
2
4) Configurable behaviors:
a. Abandoned Object - Detection of objects
placed in a defined zone and triggers an alarm
if the object remains in the zone longer than
the user-defined time allows.
b. Adaptive Motion - Detection and tracking of
objects that enter a scene and triggering of an
alarm when the objects enter a user-defined
zone.
c. Camera Sabotage - Detection of contrast
changes in the field of view, suitable to detect
lens obstruction or unauthorized repositioning
of the camera.
d. Directional Motion - Detection of person or
object moving in a specified direction.
e. Loitering Detection – Identification of people or
vehicles remaining in a defined zone longer
than a user-defined time.
TS/41/63 2602542S/EL
f. Object Counting - Counting the number of
objects that enter a defined zone or cross a
tripwire.
g. Object Removal – Detection of object is
removed from a defined zone.
h. Stopped Vehicle – Detection of vehicles
stopped near a sensitive area longer than a
user-defined time.
13.34. ADDITIONAL FEATURES
a) Alarm – The explosion proof camera shall have four

alarm/sensor inputs and one relay output for alarm or control
and one relay output for external washer.
b) The alarm input shall be able to detect an open or closed
alarm state function in supervised modes.
c) Relay Output: 30 VDC maximum, 500 mA maximum
13.35. NETWORK
a) Connectivity:
1) Up to 1000 BASE-TX Ethernet with RJ-45 connector

2) Fiber and Ethernet-over-Coax via SFP MSA
Compliant Transceivers
b) Protocols supported

Protocol (IP) v4 and v6, User Datagram Protocol
(UDP)
2) Configuration: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP)
3) Web services: Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP),
Secure HTTP (HTTPS)
4) Network services: Domain Name System (DNS),
Message Protocol (ICMP), Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP) v2c/v3, Universal Plug
and Play (UPnP)
TS/41/64 2602542S/EL
5) Media: Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP), Real-
Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP)
6) Multicast: Internet Group Management Protocol
(IGMP)
7) Notifications: File Transfer Protocol (FTP), Simple
Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
8) Remote Access: Secure Shell (SSH)
9) Security: Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), IEEE 802.1x
(EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-PEAP and
EAP-FAST)
10) Quality of Service: IEEE 802.1p Layer 3
Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP)
11) DDNS – The explosion proof camera shall support
DDNS services offered by the Manufacturer and
other publicly available service offerings.
c) Security
1) The explosion proof camera shall support IP address

filtering whereby users can enter a list of allowed or
blocked IP addresses for viewing video and
configuring camera settings
2) The network camera system shall provide three
levels of user access with password protection.
13.36. IP EXPLOSION PROOF CAMERA SOFTWARE
a) General
1) The explosion proof IP camera shall have a built-in

web server which supports browser-based
configuration.
2) The camera’s web server shall allow access to
camera information and all primary software functions.
3) The Manufacturer shall offer video viewer and
configuration to implement the following actions:
a. Camera discovery
b. Line Video
c. Video stream selection
TS/41/65 2602542S/EL
d. Video stream configuration
i. Use preset video setting configurations
ii. Configure custom video setting
configurations:
(1) Compression type
(2) Resolution
(3) Image rate
(4) frame interval
(5) H.264 profile
(6) Quality of Service (QoS)
(7) Bit rate control
iii. Multicast
iv. Unicast
v. JPEG frame rate
vi. Maximize view area of video to full size
of browser
vii. Revert to normal view
viii. Open stream in new window
ix. Capture and save image as .jpg file
x. Resize viewing area
b) Image Settings
1) Image quality
2) Exposure
3) Focus
4) White balance
5) Window blanking
6) Digital zoom
7) Lighting mode
8) Video noise reduction
TS/41/66 2602542S/EL
9) Digital processing (color and detail adjustment)
i) Image enhancement
ii) Quick setup preset modes
iii) Sharpness
iv) Saturation
v) Contrast
vi) Brightness
10) Exposure modes
c) Recording
1) Initiate instant record and playback

2) Manage micro SD card storage
d) Events
1) Configure event sources:

i) External alarm events
ii) Analytic events
2) E-mail setup
3) Define web addresses for notifications
e) Camera network settings
1) Firmware upgrade
2) Reset to factory default (local, hardware remote, and
software remote)
3) Set date, time, and NTP server synchronization
4) User access control
5) View and export camera settings
6) View system logs
TS/41/67 2602542S/EL
f) Minimum System Requirements
1) Processor: Intel® Core™ i3 Processor, 2.4 GHz

2) Acceptable Operating Systems:
a. Microsoft® Windows Server
b. Microsoft® Windows® 7 (32-bit and 64-bit), or
DirectX® 11
c. Microsoft® Windows® 10 with (32-bit and 64-
bit), or DirectX® 11
d. Mac OS X 10.4 (or later)
3) Memory: 16 GB RAM
4) Network Interface Card: 100 megabits (or greater)
5) Monitor: Minimum 1024 x 768 resolution, 16- or 32-bit
pixel color
g) Web Browsers:
1) Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 8.0 (or later) for

configuring analytics
2) Mozilla® Firefox® 3.5 (or later)
3) Google Chrome™ (51 or later)
4) Acceptable Media Players:
5) Media Player
6) QuickTime 7.6.5 for Windows 7, Windows 10
7) QuickTime 7.6.4 for Mac OS X 10.4 (or later)
h) The Manufacturer shall offer an open API.
i) The camera software shall support integrations as follows:
1) Existing Video Management: VideoXpert™; Endura®

2.0 (or later); Digital Sentry® 7.3 (or later); Third-party
system through API/SDK, ONVIF Profile S, ONVIF
Profile G, and Profile Q
2) Mobile Application Camera Mobile
TS/41/68 2602542S/EL
j) Required Systems for Analytics
1) Interface: Advanced System Management Software

or Video management platform system
2) Open API: The API can transmit behavior alarm
data to third party
13.37. ELECTRICAL
a) General
1) Voltage Input 48 VDC, 2A, or 100-240

VAC, 2A @ 50/60 Hz
2) Voltage Input Range ±10%
3) Power Consumption Maximum 74VA / 74W
EXF1230-4N
Maximum 85VA / 77W
EXF1230-7N
4) Heater and Defroster Hardware controlled
b) Alarm
1) Unsupervised Detects open or closed

alarm state
2) Supervised Detects open and short
alarm state with external
1-kohm resistor to detect
alarm tampering
3) Input 3.5 VDC maximum, 3.5
mA maximum
4) Relay Output 30 VDC, 500 mA
maximum
TS/41/69 2602542S/EL
13.38. MECHANICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL
a) General Construction 316L stainless steel

b) Finish Electro-polish
c) Viewing Window High transmissivity glass
d) Operating Temperature –76º to 140ºF (–60º to
60ºC)
e) Cable Entry Dual, 0.75-inch (1.91 cm)
NPT threaded opening
f) Effective Projected Area (EPA) 191 square inches (1,232
square cm)
g) Integral Windshield Wiper Programmable with a
washer/wipe sequence
under a single command
14. Explosion Enclosure
All outdoor box IP camera where used to monitor explosive and

hazardous areas shall be of enclosed with Explosion proof aluminum
enclosures. Enclosure shall meets NEMA Type 4X and IP66 Standards
and be designed to meet the rigorous requirements of explosion proof and
dust-ignition proof suitable in hazardous locations. These enclosures are
to be waterproof and dust tight.
The Construction of enclosures shall be able to accommodate camera

and lens with different diameter combinations. Camera mounting sled and
track assembly shall allows fast, easy positioning of the camera and lens
and be securely locked in place. The enclosure shall completed with
explosion proof sealable fittings. Front window of the housing shall be fully
tempered plate glass
The enclosure shall meet the following certification

a) CE
b) UL/cUL
c) Classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as to explosion and
fire hazard
d) Type 4X enclosure for use in hazardous locations
e) Class I, Groups C and D – Class II, Groups E, F, and G
f) Class I, Zone 1, AEx d IIB, Ex d IIB
g) 03 ATEX 0318166U
h) 0539 EX II 2 G EEx d IIB
i) EXII 2 D, IP 66
TS/41/70 2602542S/EL
EDICATED CCTV NETWORK
15.1 The proposed network equipment shall include all centre and edge
switches. The system shall support Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP) for monitoring of devices status, configuration.
15.2 The system shall include structure cabling system complete with all
required fibre optics and UTP LAN cables.
15.3 Network Switch
a) The Network Switch shall be high performance industrial

managed gigabit switch with 24 PoE ports and 4 Shared
SFP ports
b) The network switch shall design for large scale IP
surveillance application and networks.
c) Each PoE ports shall satisfied the high power consumption
requirement of a PoE IP camera with 240W PoE budget
d) All the network switch shall be secure in the junction box for
outdoor installation.
e) The network switch shall support rich network functionalities
such as port mirroring, VLAN, trunking, FastRing, rate
limiting, port security, SNMP etc.
f) The network switch shall include, but not limited to, the
following:
1) 240W PoE budget
2) 4k VLANS and 8k MAC addresses
3) Configurable through web-based or SNMP or CLI
4) Virtual LAN support (Port based VLAN and IEEE
802.1Q)
5) VLAN Q-in-Q support (For VLAN Stacking)
6) Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1W) for
avoidance of network ring and redundancy (recovery
time <2s)
7) Port trunking (Link aggregation) for high-speed
backbone and redundancy (recovery time <10ms)
8) LACP support (Dynamic port trunking or aggregate)
9) QoS (Quality of Service) support (802.1p, DiffServ,
TOS, Port-based, MAC-based)
10) Rate Limiting (Broadcast storm control)
11) Port Mirroring
12) IGMP Snooping and Query functionality
13) Port security
TS/41/71 2602542S/EL
14) Symmetric pause and backpressure flow control
15) Operating temperature of -30°C to 70°C
16) Operating Humidity of 0 to 95% non-condensing
17) MTBF >100,000 Hours
18) 10/100/1000 Electrical RJ45, DCE interface
19) SFP Fiber interface
20) 35.7Mbps @ 64Bytes Throughput
21) 8k Mac address buffer
22) 500kbytes share date buffer
23) 10kbytes Jumbo frame size
24) Store-and-forward Architecture
25) 46Gpps non-blocking fabric
15.4 Thrulink VPN
The ThruLink VPN device shall allows secure communications to

be established over any standard, public or private TCP/IP
network. ThruLink shall performs behind firewalls, NAT devices and
through nearly any other type of network configuration and offers
encrypted communication for all TCP/IP protocols regardless of the
type of traffic. When deployed, ThruLink shall provides a secure
and encrypted tunnel for network communications that will not
affect TTL, UPnP, VLAN information, broadcast, multicast, or any
other traffic.
The Thrulink VPN shall include, but not limited to, the following:
a) Provides secure and encrypted communication via tunnelling
b) Optimized for video
c) “At a Glance” status check display
d) Rack mount style server
e) Easy to use GUI interface
f) Eliminates the need to make network changes
g) Failover functionality
h) Diagnostic tools: network traffic monitoring, basic traceroute
and ping function
i) Can be used for mobile 3G/LTE applications
j) DDNS, DHCP, SNMPv3
k) 250 Mbps unencrypted Bandwidth
l) 200 Mbps encrypted Bandwidth
TS/41/72 2602542S/EL
m) 100 Max No. of Client Connections
n) AES up to 256 bit Encryption
o) Blowfish up to 128 bit Encryption
p) Camellia up to 256 bit Encryption
q) SNMPv3 Management
r) Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) >100,000 Hours
s) It shall be in hardware form and able to work in environment
up to 60 deg C
t) It shall be able to select in bridge or router mode
u) It shall be firmware upgradable via TCP connection
15.5 Centre switch
a) The switch shall come with Power over Ethernet (PoE)

features.
b) The switch shall support QOS with minimum 4 priority
queues. This allows High priority packet stream experiences
less delay inside the switch, which support lower latency for
certain delay-sensitive traffic.
c) The switch shall support port mirroring.
d) The switch shall support IGMP snooping v2/3
e) The switch shall support Broadcast/Multicast/unknown-
Unicast storm control
f) The switch shall support minimum 8 dual media ports for
flexible fiber connection.
g) The switch shall support multicast VLAN Registration (MVR)
to server content provider using multicast for video
streaming application in the network
h) The switch shall have minimum switching capacity as
following;
1) 8 port dual media GbE and 16 port GbE SFP with
non-blocking wisespeed performance
2) 8 K MAC addresses
3) 48Gbps Switch Capacity
4) Supports Jumbo frame support, up to 9K
TS/41/73 2602542S/EL
i) The switch shall support VLAN, Port trunking with 12
trunking group.
j) The switch shall be rack-mounted with minimum MTBF of
10,000 hours.
k) The switch shall support network security as follow;
1) 802.1x access control for port based and MAC based
authentication
2) Management Access Policy Control
3) Access Control List
4) IP-MAC-Port binding
5) SSL/SSH for management
15.6 Edge switch
a) The edge switch shall be scalable and shall provide some

form of redundancy
b) The switch shall be rack-mounted with minimum MTBF of
10,000 hours.
c) The edge switch shall support, but not limit to the following
Layer 2 Access Control Parameters or combination for
security classification of incoming packets.
d) The edge switch shall provide forwarding rate of 3.9Mbps for
24 port model with a forwarding bandwidth of at least
5.2Gbps.
e) The edge switch shall support multicast VLAN configuration
f) The edge switch shall support QoS
g) The edge switch shall support Multicast/Broadcast/U-known
Unicast Storm suppression.
h) The edge switch shall support port-mirroring.
i) The edge switch shall support network security as follow;
1) 802.1x access control for port based and MAC based
authentication
2) Management Access Policy Control
3) Access Control List
4) Static MAC
5) IP-MAC-Port binding
TS/41/74 2602542S/EL
j) The edge switch shall support SNMP v1, V2c Network
management.
k) The edge switch shall support bandwidth control.
l) The edge switch shall support IGMP snooping
15. Mounting and Installation
15.1 General
a) The system shall be installed as specified.
b) The Sub-Contractor shall provide all necessary technical

installation documents, such as situation plans and
diagrams and shall be available for advice.
c) The installation of the system shall be in accordance with

generally accepted standards, such as;
1) NEC USA
2) VDE West Germany
3) DIN West Germany
d) The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the correct

location of all equipment. If there are any discrepancies
between the details in the proposal and the real dimension
of equipment, rooms, buildings etc. they must be reported
immediately upon discovery to the S.O.
e) All elements of the system shall be connected by the Sub-

Contractor or an authorized Sub-Contractor in order to
assure application of all the manufacturers application
guidelines and the high standard of workmanship necessary
in this type of system. The Sub-Contractor shall supervise
and check the performance of such an authorized Sub-
Contractor.
f) The electrical installation shall comply with SS 638 .
g) All circuit works below false ceiling shall be of concealed
conduit.
h) Data transmission cables for the system shall be of a type
recommended by the manufacturer.
i) The Sub-Contractor shall specify type and performance of
any special cables necessary to guarantee proper function
of his equipment. No substitute for these cables shall be
used without written approval by the manufacturer.
TS/41/75 2602542S/EL
16. Commissioning
16.1. General
a) The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the

commissioning of the complete system(s).
b) Prior to commissioning, the Sub-Contractor shall submit a
time schedule for this work.
c) The system commissioning sequence shall include a trial
operation of all main equipment, including respective
software with all necessary adjustment by the Sub-
Contractor to ensure that the system is properly
commissioned.
16.2. Commissioning and start-up
a) A sufficient number of qualified commissioning engineers

shall be provided to ensure timely commissioning and
starting of the system.
b) The Sub-Contractor shall provide commissioning spares in
sufficient quantities. Spare parts marked for maintenance
shall not be used during this period.
c) After satisfactory completion of installation, commissioning
and start-up, the Sub-Contractor shall demonstrate that the
system successfully performs the tasks set forth in the
specification.
d) Tests, commissioning and system trial operations shall be
carried out jointly between the S.O. and the site engineer of
the Sub-Contractor.
e) After successful demonstration, the system shall be handed
over to the Owner's representatives.
TS/41/76 2602542S/EL
17. 360o 12 MEGAPIXEL INDOOR VIDEO CAMERA
17.1. The 360o 12 MP indoor video camera (“360 degree camera”) shall
have no moving parts and be capable of providing 360 degree
surveillance with no blind spots.
17.2. Contractor shall ensure that the installed cameras contain the
latest firmware
17.3. Contractor personnel shall comply with all applicable state and
local licensing requirements.
17.4. Before permanent installation of the system, the Contractor shall

test the system in conditions simulating the final installed
environment , A report indicating successful test results shall be
produced
17.5. The network design and configuration shall be verified for

compatibility and performance with the camera(s).
17.6. Network configuration shall be tested and qualified by the

Contractor prior to camera installation.
17.7. Sub Contractor shall follow all Manufacturer installation instructions

and guidelines.
17.8. The 360 degree camera shall possess the following primary
characteristics:
a) employ a single image sensor capable of providing 4072H x
3046V resolution
b) provide dewarping software to convert the spherical video
image into a continuous flat view
c) H.264 and MJPEG compression
d) 12 fps for maximum resolution, 30 fps for 2MP resolutions and
below
e) unicast support up to 20 simultaneous users depending on the
resolution settings
f) multicast supported for the H.264 main camera stream
g) 0.1 lux minimum illumination, providing clarity in low light
h) local 3D dewarping providing 4x VCams at max 1MP each
i) 10x zoom with 3D client-side dewarping software
j) 10 configurable privacy regions
k) 8 polygonal Video Motion Detection regions
l) local alarm digital input and output
m) audio microphone input
TS/41/77 2602542S/EL
n) built-in SD Card slot. Supports cards up to 128 GB capacity.
Speed class 10 or higher required
o) image snapshot transferred by email
p) operate on an embedded Linux platform
q) include a built-in web server
r) PoE (IEEE standard 802.af) or 12VDC powered
17.9. VIDEO
Imager
a) Sensor: 12.4 MP (approximately) 1/2.3" EXMOR
R CMOS Sensor
b) Minimum illumination: 0.10 lux (50 IRE, F/2.0)
c) Scanning: Progressive
17.10. Image Control Settings
a) Automatic white balance (AWB): 2,500K to 8,000K

(approximately)
b) Privacy zone definition: 10 configurable zones
c) Wide Dynamic Range (WDR): Electronic WDR 60 dB
d) Brightness
e) Sharpness
f) Contrast
g) Saturation
h) Exposure compensation
i) Compression – image quality Multi-levels of
compression and frame rate
adjustment
17.11. Lens: 185o fixed, F/2.0
Angle of view: 180o horizontal, 180o vertical (hemispherical)
TS/41/78 2602542S/EL
17.12. Video Streams
a) The 360 degree camera shall support the transmission of seven

configurable video streams, whose properties are detailed in
Video Stream properties.
b) Available compression types:
i) H.264, available in 6 streams
ii) MJPEG, available in 1 stream
iii) Available resolutions:
1) H.264 compression
a) 3200 x 3000 (9.6 MP)
b) 2528 x 2376 (6 MP)
c) 2080 x 1960 (4 MP)
d) 1472 x 1384 (2 MP)
e) 1056 x 992 (1 MP)
f) 544 x 512 (1/4 MP)
2) MJPEG compression
a) 2080 x 1960 (4 MP)
b) 1472 x 1384 (2 MP)
c) 1056 x 992 (1 MP)
d) 544 x 512 (1/4 MP)
c) Bit rate
i) Range: 0.8 Mbps – 10 Mbps (Constant Bit Rate)

ii) H.264:
1) Constant Bit Rate
2) Fixed Quality
3) GOP length
4) Maximum frames per second
iii) MJPEG :
1) maximum frames per second
2) quality
d) Frame rate: 0-30 fps
TS/41/79 2602542S/EL
e) Presentation: Video views shall be available in both fisheye and
dewarped (flat) views as follows:
i) Fisheye views: 3 streams, one of which shall be

MJPEG
ii) Dewarped views: 4 streams of independent
VCams
f) Video streams shall support ONVIF profile S.
17.13. Video Viewing
Video and snapshots shall be capable of being accessed through

the following means:
a) JPEG images accessible through a web browser

b) Video streaming through an available media player
c) ONVIF driver
d) PSIA driver
17.14. Storage and Recording
The 360 degree camera shall have the facility for onboard SD card
storage.
17.15. Video Motion
a) Video motion analytics shall be pre-loaded in the 360

degree camera.
b) The 360 degree camera shall have the ability to detect
motion within up to 8 user defined areas of the video image.
17.16. Pan Tilt Zoom (PTZ) Functionality - The 360 degree camera shall
support 10x digital zoom with 3D client side dewarping software.
17.17. ADDITIONAL FEATURES
a) Alarm – The 360 degree camera shall have a contact input and
contact output for alarm or control.
TS/41/80 2602542S/EL
17.18. Event management – The 360 degree camera shall perform
selected response actions when triggered by selected inputs as
follows:
a) Response actions:
1) contact output
2) e-mail via SMTP
3) local recording
b) Trigger inputs:
1) motion in a pre-defined area
2) contact input
3) HTTP event
4) network connection lost
17.19. Audio – The 360 degree camera shall have audio capability.
a) Input options:
1) Line level/external microphone input (3.5 mm jack); 600-

ohm differential, 1 V p-p maximum
2) via RTSP using G.711 codec
3) via ONVIF Profile S
17.20. Integrations – The 360 degree camera shall have available an API
and an SDK to support integrations with third party system,
including VMS and network storage providers.
17.21. NETWORK
a) Connectivity: 1000BASE-TX Ethernet with RJ-45 connector

b) Protocols supported
Protocol (IP) v4, User Datagram Protocol (UDP)
2) Configuration: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP)
3) Web services: Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP)
TS/41/81 2602542S/EL
4) Network services: Domain Name System (DNS),
Message Protocol (ICMP), Universal Plug and Play
(UPnP)
5) Media: Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP), Real-
Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP)
6) Multicast: Internet Group Management Protocol
(IGMP)
7) Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
c) Unicast - The 360 degree camera shall support 20

simultaneous users of independent streams.
d) Multicast - The 360 degree camera shall support multicast
for an H.264 main camera stream.
e) Security
The 360 degree camera shall have a user configurable
password feature.
17.22. CAMERA SOFTWARE
The 360 degree camera shall have a built in web server which
supports browser-based configuration of the camera.
The camera’s web server shall allow access to camera information

and all primary software functions to include:
a) Image settings
b) Network settings
c) Alarm settings, triggers, and actions
1) Triggers:
a. motion
b. network connection lost
c. contact input
2) Actions:
a. Email (SMTP)
b. Record to SD card
TS/41/82 2602542S/EL
d) Camera settings
1) Frames per second
2) Quality
3) Bit rate control
4) Compression settings
e) Clock settings
f) Video stream settings
1) Resolution
2) Compression
g) SD card recording settings
h) Factory reset
i) Image regions
i) Privacy zones
ii) Motion detection zones
The camera’s web server shall support up to 20 clients

simultaneously over the network.
17.23. Setup and Maintenance
The contractor shall offer a setup and maintenance software tool to

implement the following actions:
a) Scan local network to discover compatible cameras

b) Remotely change and configure camera settings, including
network settings
c) Remotely import or export network settings
d) Upgrade camera firmware
e) Remotely send commands to camera
TS/41/83 2602542S/EL
17.24. Diagnostics
a) The 360 degree camera shall have a self-monitoring function

which automatically resets the camera in the event of
malfunction.
b) The 360 degree camera shall have a diagnostics tool to test
hardware functionality, accumulate statistics, and diagnose
hardware faults.
c) The 360 degree camera’s SD card shall allow the creation and
storage of a boot-up function for diagnostics and fault finding.
17.25. ELECTRICAL
a) Power
i) Source Options
1) 12 VDC
2) PoE (IEEE standard 802.3af) – 48 VDC nominal
ii) Power Consumption (maximum):
1) 12 VDC: 7.32 W
2) POE: 8.4 W
b) Connectors
i) Ethernet: RJ-45 connector
ii) External power (12 VDC): 2.1 mm input jack
iii) External input/output: 6-pin 1.5 mm Phoenix
style connector
iv) Analog video: BNC test port for
production, not
available for normal
operation
TS/41/84 2602542S/EL
17.26. MECHANICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL
a) Housing Material: Polymer

b) Anti-tamper: Torx security locking screw
c) Dimensions: (179 mm(L) x 160 mm(W) x 70
mm)(H)
d) Temperature : 0° C to 40° C
(operating and storage)
e) Relative Humidity: 0 – 98% non-condensing
17.27. Video Stream Properties
The camera shall have the following video stream properties:
Video Stream 1 Codec : H.264 in 9.6 MP, 6 MP, 4 MP, 2 MP
Video Stream 1 Multi-levels of compression and frame rate

:
Compression Level adjustment
Fisheyes at: 2 MP (1472 x 1384),4 MP (2080 x
Video Stream 1 Pixel
: 1960), 6 MP (2528 x 2376), 9.6 MP (3200 x
Resolution
3000)
Video Stream 2 Codec : H.264 in 4 MP, 2 MP, 1 MP and ¼ MP

:
Video Stream 2 Pixel Fisheyes at: ¼ MP (544 x 512), 1 MP (1056 x
:
Resolution 992), 2 MP (1472 x 1384), 4 MP (2080 x 1960)
Video Stream 3 Codec : MJPEG in 4 MP, 2 MP, 1 MP and 1/4 MP

:
Fisheyes at: ¼ MP (544 x 512), 1 MP (1056 x
Video Stream 3 Pixel
: 992) , 2 MP (1472 x 1384), 4 MP (2080 x
Resolution
1960)
Vcam Stream 4, 5, 6, 7
: H.264
Codec
Vcam Stream 4, 5, 6, 7 Multi-levels of compression and frame rate
:
Vcam Stream 4, 5, 6, 7 4x independent onboard dewarped VCams at
:
Pixel Resolution ¼ MP (640 x 480) and 1 MP(1280 x 720)
TS/41/85 2602542S/EL
Maximum Frame Rate : 30 fps
Settings include brightness / contrast /
saturation / exposure compensation,
Image Control :
compression quality and wall / ceiling / table
mount
Image Enhancement : Electronic WDR 60 dB

10x zoom with 3D client-side dewarping
PTZ Functionality :
software
Able to support existing NUS OCS and other
VMS / NVR Supported :
VMS / NDVR/ NVR platform
Internet Explorer 9 and above , Edge 25,

Web Browser Compatibility : Firefox 23 and Chrome 29 or above.
Plug-in required for full functionality
Up to 20 simultaneous users depending on the
Unicast :
resolutions settings
Multicast : Supported for H.264 main camera stream
Include Constant Bit Rate Control and
Bit Rate Control :
Constant Quality Control
18. INDOOR / OUTDOOR IP PANORAMIC NETWORK CAMERAS
19.1. Equipment and materials used shall be standard components that

are manufactured and available for purchase as standard
replacement parts as long as the product is commercially available
from the manufacturer
19.2. All manufactured products shall be thoroughly tested and proven in

actual use
19.3. The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system shall

transparently integrate video across all sensor’s in the camera
presenting a seamless fully stitched and blended total resolution of
12 megapixel (MPx), 2048 x 1536 x 4.
19.4. The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system

technology shall include options for 180º, 270º and 360º camera
functionality as well as provide pan and tilt adjustment of the
camera module for 180º degree models and pan for 270º and 360º
modules.
TS/41/86 2602542S/EL
19.5. In conjunction with a Video Management System “VMS” that shall
integrates the Panoramic software and any toolkit, the camera shall
be able to support seamless panoramic views and simultaneous
Immersive Views that allow for the pan, tilt and zoom in, across the
entire field of view.
19.6. The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera system

housing technology shall meet the IK10 impact specification as well
as standard mounting hardware capabilities that would include but
not be limited to Pendant, Surface, and Ceiling mount hardware.

provide advance technology that seamlessly delivers extended
True Wide Dynamic Range (WDR), low-light performance, and anti-
bloom technology, operating in a simultaneous mode of operation.
these shall include 3D noise filtering, smooth response to
illumination changes, and improved tone mapping to retain color
accuracy and overall image contrast. The technology shall delivers
the best possible image when a single scene contains bright areas,
shaded areas, and intense light, better than the human eye.

provide a slot for a removable, local storage medium (Micro SD) to
capture video clips of varying lengths in accordance with the
ONVIF G Profile. Any Video Management System “VMS” that is
conformant to this standard can initiate storage and retrieval of
video, for instance to safeguard against network failure.

provide a service video stream in addition to and independent of
the video streams.

provide advanced low-light capabilities for day/night models with
sensitivity down to 0.03 lux for the 180º and 0.05 lux in the 270º
and 360º models respectively while in night mode.

support industry standard Power over Ethernet Plus (PoE+) IEEE
802.3at, Class4 to supply power to the camera over the network.

provide options for clear and smoked lower domes.

provide Wide Dynamic Range (WDR) up to 120 dB with dynamic
adjustments through the User Interface across the cameras field of
view.
TS/41/87 2602542S/EL
have a mechanical IR cut filter mechanism for increased sensitivity
in low-light installations. Set points for the IR cut filter feature shall
be configurable through an embedded Web browser.

support H.264 High, Main or Base profiles, using constrained
variable bit rate (CVBR) as the default, variable bit rate (VBR), or
constant bit rate (CBR) with target range.
19.16. The system shall deploy smart Compression Technology lowers

bandwidth and storage requirements by up to 70%. It shall allows
the user to make intelligent decisions regarding storage savings
and image quality.

provide 802.1x port security to establish point-to-point access
through a wired or wireless port using Extensible Authentication
Protocol (EAP).

conform to the ONVIF Profile S and Profile G, and support open
architecture best practices with a published API available to third-
party network video recording and management systems. A
Panoramic SDK that would enable Video Management Systems to
d-warp the streams from this camera into panoramic and
Immersive Views shall be made available.

support SNMP v2c and v3.

support IPv6 configurations in conjunction with IPv4.

provide Auto or Manual exposure settings for adjusting the amount
of light detected by the camera sensor.

provide user-selectable configurations for day/night auto mode.
Transitional levels shall be used to set the desired light level for
transitioning to night mode. Transition detect time shall control the
length of time that the camera is exposed to a light level before
changing to color or monochrome mode.

be factory focused, requiring no manual adjustment of focus in the
field.
TS/41/88 2602542S/EL
provide User and Group settings to assign permissions and access
levels to the camera.

be based on a 1/3.2-inch high resolution CMOS sensor and
includes four of them in the cameras standard configuration.
19.26. The IP Panoramic indoor / outdoor network camera system shall

include a camera module, back box, and lower dome.

support standard IT protocols.
19.28. The IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor camera dome

system shall provide a 1000Base-T network interface.

be plenum-rated

be vandal and tamper resistant with an impact resistance of IK10
(20 Joules).

be NEMA-4X, IP66 rated.

provide for a standards based HTML interface.

provide Window Blanking Technology for user defined privacy
areas.

feature open architecture connectivity for third-party software
recording solutions allowing integration into virtually any IP-based
system. It shall compatible with existing NUS, Office of Security
video management systems. Contractor shall include all the
necessary software for the installation

provide integrated video analytics with the ability to provide
hardware and software alarms based on the analytic behaviors
presented.
TS/41/89 2602542S/EL
19.36. Analytics software for the IP Panoramic indoor/outdoor multi-sensor
camera system shall include:
a. Abandoned Object: Detects objects placed in a defined zone

and triggers an alarm if the object remains in the zone longer
than the user-defined time allows. An airport terminal is a
typical installation for this behavior. This behavior can also
detect objects left behind at an ATM, signaling possible card
skimming.
b. Adaptive Motion: Detects and tracks objects that enter a scene
and then triggers an alarm when the objects enter a user-
defined zone. This behavior is primarily used in outdoor
c. Camera Sabotage: Detects contrast changes in the field of
view. An alarm is triggered if the lens is obstructed with spray
paint, a cloth, or a lens cap. Any unauthorized repositioning of
the camera also triggers an alarm.
d. Directional Motion: Generates an alarm in a high traffic area
when a person or object moves in a specified direction. Typical
installations for this behavior include an airport gate or tunnel
where cameras can detect objects moving in the opposite
direction of the normal flow of traffic or an individual entering
through an exit door.
e. Loitering Detection: Identifies when people or vehicles remain
in a defined zone longer than the user-defined time allows. This
behavior is effective in real-time notification of suspicious
behavior around ATMs, stairwells, and school grounds.
f. Object Counting: Counts the number of objects that enter a
defined zone or cross a tripwire. This behavior might be used to
count the number of people at a store entrance/exit or inside a
store where the traffic is light. This behavior is based on
tracking and does not count people in a crowded setting.
g. Object Removal: Triggers an alarm if an object is removed
from a defined zone. This behavior is ideal for customers who
want to detect the removal of high value objects, such as a
painting from a wall or a statue from a pedestal.
h. Stopped Vehicle: Detects vehicles stopped near a sensitive
area longer than the user-defined time allows. This behavior is
ideal for airport curbside drop-offs, parking enforcement,
suspicious parking, traffic lane breakdowns, and vehicles
waiting at gates.
TS/41/90 2602542S/EL
meet or exceed the following design and performance
specifications.
1. Camera Specifications
a. Imaging Device 1/3.2-inch
b. Imager Type CMOS
c. Imager Readout Progressive scan
d. Highest Resolution 12 MP, 2048 x 1536 x 4
e. Signal-to-Noise Ratio >50 db
f. Sensitivity
1. 180º Type f/2.0, 0.3 lux color (33 ms),
0.14 lux mono (33 ms)
2. 270º, 360º Types f/2.5, 0.5 lux color (33 ms),
0.2 lux mono (33 ms)
g. Day/Night Capabilities Yes
h. Mechanical IR Cut Filter Yes, (ON/OFF/AUTO selectable)
with different set points
i. Wide Dynamic Range 120 dB
2. Lens Specifications
a. Length
1. 180º Type f/2.0 ~ 4.8 mm

2. 270º, 360º Type f/2.5 ~ 2.7 mm
b. Field of View
1. 180º Type 180º horizontal, 41º vertical

2. 270º Type 270º horizontal, 73º vertical
3. 360º Type 360º horizontal, 73º vertica
3. Video Specifications
a. Video Streams Set of streams to deliver full

resolution views; secondary
stream that comprises a lower
resolution mosaic of above
streams
b. Frame Rate(s) User selectable up to 12.5
frames per second (fps)
TS/41/91 2602542S/EL
c. Video Encoding H.264 High, Main, or Base
profiles; MJPEG (mosaic stream
only); Smart Compression
Technology
d. Bit Rate Control Default maximum for

Constrained Variable Rate
(CVBR) at maximum resolution
and frame rate 28 Mbps
e. Network
1. Supported Protocols TCP/IP, UDP/IP (Unicast,

Multicast IGMP), UPnP, DNS,
DHCP, RTP, RTSP, NTP, IPv4,
IPv6, SNMP v2c/v3, QoS, HTTP,
HTTPS, SSH, SSL, SMTP, FTP,
ARP, ICMP, and+ 802.1x(EAP)
2. Users
i. Unicast Up to 20 simultaneous
depending on the resolution
settings, and frame rate
ii. Multicast Unlimited H.264
f. Security Access Password protected
g. Software Interface Web browser view and setup
h. System Integration Existing VideoXpert, Digital
Sentry
i. Open API Integration API, Panoramic SDK,
ONVIF Profile S and G
j. Minimum System Requirements
1. Processor Intel® Core™ i3 processor, 2.4
GHz
2. Operating System Microsoft Windows® 10,
Windows® 7 (32- and 64-bit),
linux OS or Mac® OS X
10.9 (or later), Microsoft
Windows Server
3. Memory 16 GB RAM
4. Network Interface 100 Megabyte (or greater)
TS/41/92 2602542S/EL
5. Monitor LCD Minimum of 1024 x 768
resolution, 16- or 32-bit
pixel color resolution
6. Web Browser Internet Explorer® 11.0 (or
latest); Mozilla® Firefox® 35 (or
later); Google® Chrome 40 (or
later)
k. Analytics software
1. Open API The API can transmit behavior
alarm data to third-party
applications
4. Electrical Specifications
a. Network Port RJ-45 connector for 1000Base-T

1 Gigabit/sec Auto MDI/MDI-X
PoE+; Class 4
b. Cabling Type Category 6 or better
c. Input Power PoE+ (IEEE 802.3at, Class 4)
d. Power Consumption
1. Without Heater 17 watts
2. With Heater 23 watts
e. Local Storage Micro SD, SDHC
f. Alarm
1. Unsupervised Detects open or closed alarm
state
2. Supervised Detects open and short alarm
state with external1-kohm
resistor to detect alarm
tampering
3. Input 3.5 VDC maximum, 3.5 mA
maximum
g. Relay Output ±32 VDC maximum, 150 mA
maximum
TS/41/93 2602542S/EL
h. Audio
1. Streaming Bidirectional: full or half duplex
2. Input/Output 600 ohm differential, 1Vp-p max.
signal level
3. Compression G.711 PCM 8 bit, 8 kHz mono at
64 kbit/s
5. Back box and lower dome specifications
a. Indoor Vandal, In-Ceiling
1. Installation Single back box for suspended

or hard ceiling applications
2. Back Box Plenum rated
3. Cable Entry 25 mm conduit attachments on
side and top of back box
4. Operating Temperatures –10º to 50ºC
5. Operating Humidity 15 to 85%, RH non-condensing
6. Impact Resistance IK10
7. Shock and Vibration EN50155 Category 1, Class B;
IEC 60068:2-6 and 2-27, ISTA-
2A, Sequence 5, MIL810G
8. Construction Alodine aluminum
b. Indoor Vandal, Surface Mount
1. Installation Attaches to standard 4-inch

square outlet box and 2-gang
electrical box; or 25 mm conduit
attachments on side back box;
wire entry through grommet
on top of back box
TS/41/94 2602542S/EL
IEC 60068:2-6 and 2-27, ISTA-
c. Indoor Vandal, Pendant
1. Installation 32mm conduit/pipe attachment

IEC 60068:2-6 and 2-27, ISTA-
a. Environmental Vandal, In-Ceiling
1. Installation Single back box for

suspended or hard ceiling
applications
2. Back Box Plenum rated
3. Cable Entry 25 mm conduit
attachments on
side and top of back box
5. Operating Humidity 10 to 95%, RH non-
condensing
7. Shock and Vibration EN50155 Category 1,
Class B; IEC 60068:2-6
and 2-27, ISTA-2A,
Sequence 5, MIL810G
9. Ingress protection IP66
TS/41/95 2602542S/EL
b. Environmental Vandal, Surface Mount
1. Installation Attaches to standard 150mm

square outlet box and 2-gang
electrical box
2. Cable Entry 25 mm conduit attachments on
side and top of back box. Wire
entry through grommet on top of
back box
4. Operating Humidity 10 to 95%, RH condensing
IEC 60068:2-6 and 2-27, ISTA-
c. Environmental Vandal, Pendant
1. Installation 40mm thread for use with wall

mounts
3. Operating Humidity 10 to 95%, RH condensing
IEC 60068:2-6 and 2-27, ISTA-
TS/41/96 2602542S/EL
2. Dome System Specifications
a. Indoor Vandal, In-Ceiling 5.90cm above ceiling,

lower dome 9.85cm below
ceiling, 16.15cm diameter
b. Indoor Vandal, Surface Mount 14.65cm overall length
(including dome) by
15.93cm diameter
c. Indoor Vandal, Pendant 17.80cm overall length
(including dome) by 15.75
cm diameter
d. Environmental Vandal, In-Ceiling 5.90cm above ceiling,
lower dome 9.85cm below
ceiling, 16.15 cm diameter
e. Environmental Vandal, Surface 14.65cm overall length
cm diameter
f. Environmental Vandal, Pendant 17.80cm overall length
cm diameter
3. Mechanical Specifications
a. Dome Attenuation
1. Clear f/0.0 light loss
2. Smoked f/1.0 light loss
b. Pan Adjustable (All Models) 370º
c. Tilt Adjustable (180 Model) 0º - 180º
TS/41/97 2602542S/EL
19.38. Certifications/Ratings
a. CE, Class A
b. FCC, Class A
c. UL/cUL Listed
d. ICES, Class A
e. KCC
f. C-Tick
g. CB Scheme ITE
h. NEMA Type 4X, and IP66 rating (Environmental Vandal)
i. RoHS, Lead Free, REACH
j. MTBF ≥ 200,000 POH (Reporting standard is RELEX Modeling)
19. Training
20.1. The Sub-Contractor shall provide a description of the scope of

recommended system training necessary for the Owner's
representatives.
20.2. The scope of training should include training sequences available

at the Sub-Contractor's and manufacturer's premises and training
sequences on-site as well.
20.3. The number of persons attending the system training courses shall
be determined by the Owner.
20.4. The on-site training provided for the Owner personnel shall
precede the hand-over of the system.
20.5. The Sub-Contractor shall provide technical training and system

operation instructions to the Owner's personnel during the
commissioning phase and performance tests.
20.6. System operating instructions shall be given by an experienced

and competent engineer familiar with the installed system.
TS/41/98 2602542S/EL
20. Maintenance
21.1. General
a) The Sub-Contractor shall provide detailed information

concerning his maintenance organization and after sales
service, the qualifications and size of the staff employed on
these duties.
b) The Sub-Contractor shall submit a proposal for a

comprehensive and non-comprehensive maintenance
contract.
c) The maintenance contract shall include all material and

labour to keep the system in perfect working condition and
to perform the maintenance and test procedures as required
by national and local codes and as recommended in the
Sub-Contractors standard documentation.
d) The quality of the equipment shall be such as to require low

maintenance efforts.
e) The maintenance schedule for the different system parts

offered shall be clearly stated at time of tendering.
21.2. Spare parts
a) The Sub-Contractor shall specify the necessary system

spare parts most likely to be needed for a period of two
years. This list shall show an itemized set of spare parts
and be supplied with the tendering proposal.
b) All spare parts shall be on site when the commissioning

work is completed and shall be handed over to the Owner
with the system.
c) The list of spare parts shall also be included in the proposed

maintenance contract.
21.3. Test equipment
a) The Sub-Contractor shall specify the necessary test

equipment most likely to be needed for correct maintenance
work.
b) The Sub-Contractor shall submit a list of test equipment and

special tools that are necessary to enable the Owner's
personnel to carry out maintenance.
TS/41/99 2602542S/EL
c) The list of test equipment shall also be included in the
proposed maintenance contract.
21. Quality Assurance
22.1 General
a) Upon request, the Sub-Contractor/ the manufacturer shall

provide legally valid copies of certificates necessary to
demonstrate the certification of his equipment.
b) The factory quality assurance concept (programme) shall be

defined in a Quality Manual of similar document in which the
organizational plan, means and procedures are fully
described. These documents should be made available
upon Owner's request.
c) Outdoor equipment must be rated for the following

environmental conditions:
Max. temperature 60oC

Min. temperature 10oC
Max. relative humidity 98%
d) Locations where the Sub-Contractor requires air-

conditioning to be available before he can start his work on
site, should be clearly stated at the time of tender.
e) A provisional system test shall be established showing that

the system is capable of meeting the original Tender
Specifications in terms of:
1) Quantity
2) Functions
3) Design
4) Quality
22.2 Factory tests
a) All system equipment shall be thoroughly inspected and

functionally tested at the manufacturer's factory and facilities
prior to shipment to the site.
b) All system equipment delivered to site shall bear the

manufacturer's identification and any other data that may be
required to identify the materials and equipment.
TS/41/100 2602542S/EL
22.3 Hardware and Software availability
a) The Sub-Contractor/ manufacturer shall guarantee hardware

availability including mechanical components over a period
of 10 years.
b) The Sub-Contractor/ manufacturer shall clearly state the

delivery time for replacement of system components listed
as recommended spare parts.
c) The Sub-Contractor/ manufacturer shall clearly state the

delivery times for replacement of system components which
are not listed as recommended spare parts.
d) The Sub-Contractor/ manufacturer shall clearly state the

delivery times for replacement of recommended system test
equipment.
e) The Sub-Contractor/ manufacturer shall guarantee software

(programme packages) availability including updated
versions(compatible) over a period of 10 years. The Sub-
Contractor is required to work with other NSC for the
integration of the system with other computer system, ie. the
Sub-Contractor shall release their software protocol.
22.4 Guarantee
a) The Sub-Contractor/ manufacturer shall guarantee that the

entire system complies with the major applicable codes and
standards, as well as with the specified and implied
qualities, and that the operation of the system will be proper
and faultless.
b) The Sub-Contractor shall submit with the tender details of

the local representation of his organization.
c) The Sub-Contractor shall provide with the tender details of

the service, maintenance and training facilities available in
Singapore.
d) The Sub-Contractor shall provide full guarantee for all

system components in hard-and software for a period of at
least 15 months.
e) During the stated period of guarantee, the supplier shall

replace free of charge all components failing or
malfunctioning. However, system components damaged or
lost during transport or on site prior or after installation by
negligence of others shall be exempt from guarantee.
TS/41/101 2602542S/EL
22. Signage
The following notice shall be prominently displayed at a suitable internal

location to Architect's and employer acceptance.
Size: 300mm width x 200mm height x 6mm thick
Materials & Design: 6mm thick acrylic with rear-printed silkscreen

graphics with white background
Font: Frutiger 55 Roman and Frutiger 65 Bold
The following notice shall also be prominently displayed at a suitable

external location to Architect's and employer acceptance.
Size: 450mm wide x 600mm high x 3mm thk
Materials & Design: 3mm thick aluminium sign panel with all artwork in
3M diamond grade reflective vinyl sticker; compliant
with LTA Specifications for traffic instructional signs
Font: Frutiger 55 Roman and Frutiger 65 Bold
Fixing Method: As per LTA Drawings LTA/SDRE14/10/SUP 4 to 7

to correspond with size of sign
TS/41/102 2602542S/EL
Upon completion of the underground pipe and cables laying, proper

identification tag with engraved words mounted on RC block of 150mm by
150mm for the particular underground services that being installed. All the
engraved tag, location shall submit for Engineer approval prior to delivery
Marker shall install at every 20m interval straight length, turning, joint pit, draw
pit, angle pit and tee pit
TS/41/103 2602542S/EL
OCS FO OCS FO
CABLES CABLES
1200mm Depth
JOINT PIT
1200mm Depth
OCS FO OCS FO
CABLES CABLES
FO CABLE
1200mm Depth 1200mm Depth
OCS FO
CABLES
DRAW PIT
Sample of the Identification Tag for CCTV Fibre Optic
TS/41/104 2602542S/EL
SECTION 42 - COMPUTER CABLING SYSTEM
1. General
1.1 The cabling system shall support the university long term goal of implementing a
single structured wiring infrastructure to support a complete integrated multi-
media communication networking system, which includes text, graphics,
images, voice and video.
1.2 The cabling schemes to be used at all levels of the network shall be strictly
standard-based, flexible, easily managed and maintained. Ease of expansion
and growth is extremely important. The cabling system must support multi-
vendor network architecture and must provide flexibility for user to easily switch
application when needed.
1.3 The cabling system should enable moves and changes of data and voice
services, equipment or staff to be accommodated at minimum cost without the
need to install additional cables or to re-route existing cables.
1.4 The cabling system shall be expected to have a life span of at least 15 years
and it shall have provision to support future growth requirements and increasing
needs for higher bandwidth.
1.5 The specific requirements of the Employer are stated in the section 16 to 18
after the section 15 on “warranty”.
2. System Standards
2.1 The system offered and quote shall in-corporate all features and facilities listed
in this Specification.
2.2 The system shall :
c) Facilitate expansion from the initial proposed system by only the addition
of modules.
e) Facilitate easy maintenance, change management and future growth.
2.3 The different applications of the system must be documented by the

manufacturer as a guide to the user.
TS/42/1 2602542S/EL
2.4 The computer cabling system including all associated accessories as specified
herein or anywhere in this Specification shall comply in accordance with or
exceed the latest revision of the following recommended standards or any other
Authorities requirements/ standards which may have jurisdiction over the
installation :
ANSI/EIA/TIA 568B Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring

Standard
BS EN 50173 Information technology. Generic cabling systems
BS EN 50174 Information technology. Cabling installation
EIA/TIA-492-AAAB Detail Specification for 50-μm Core

Diameter/125-μm Cladding Diameter Class Ia
Graded-Index Multimode Optical Fibers
EIA/TIA 568C.0 Generic Telecommunications Cabling for

Customer Premises
EIA/TIA 568C.1 Commercial Building Telecommunications

Cabling Standard
EIA/TIA 569-A The Design and Installation Requirements
EIA/TIA 606 Administration Standard for Telecommunications

EIA/TIA 607 Grounding and Bonding Requirements for

ANSI/EIA/TIA TSB-36 Telecommunications System Bulletin -

Additional Specifications for Unshielded Twisted
Pair Cables
ANSI/EIA/TIA TSB-40 Telecommunications System Bulletin - Additional

Specifications for UTP Connecting Hardware
TS/42/2 2602542S/EL
ANSI/EIA/TIA 606 Administration Standard for Telecommunications
ANSI/EIA/TIA 569-A The Design and Installation Requirements
ANSI/EIA/TIA 607 Grounding and Bonding Requirements for

ISO DIS 11801 International Standards Organisation Version of

the Commercial Building Wiring Standard
IEEE 802.3 10BaseT CSMA/CD Specifications
IEEE 802.5 Token Ring Specifications
ANSI X3T9.5 Fiber Distributed Data Interface
IEC 60793-2-10 Optical fibres - Part 2-10: Product specifications -

Sectional specification for category A1 multimode
fibres
2.5 For the telephone wiring system , the Contractor shall comply with the authority
for the activation of all the necessary telephone lines:
3. Characteristics
The computer cabling system shall have the following characteristics:
3.1 Interference
The system shall be made to minimise vulnerability to interference.
3.2 Crosstalk
Crosstalk, also including intermodulation noise shall be nominated especially in

multi-pair bundle.
TS/42/3 2602542S/EL
3.3 Reliability and Voltage Transients
The system shall be able to function reliably even under adverse voltage
transient conditions such as electrical storms, RF emissions, etc..
4. Cable Distribution Subsystem
4.1 General
a) The cable distribution subsystem described herein includes the

computer outlets (RJ45 jacks) in the work area as well as the cables and
transition connectors installed between outlets and RJ45 patch panels in
the Computer Wire Centre. In addition, the cabling system shall be made
up of various modular patch panels, patch cords used to configure
horizontal cable connections in the Computer Wire Centre.
b) The cable distribution subsystem shall consist at a minimum of the

followings :
1) One/two RJ45 Category 6 jack unless otherwise specified

2) One/two 4-pair Category 6 UTP non-plenum cables unless
otherwise specified
3) Cable labelling and identification consistent with ANSI/EIA/TIA
606
4) RJ45 patch panels
5) Category 6 UTP patch cords which shall be factory terminated
and tested
5. Category 6 UTP Cable
5.1 All UTP cables used shall be of Category 6, 4-pair 100 ohm high performance
unshielded twisted pair (UTP). The UTP cable shall be of 24 AWG bare solid
copper conductors insulated with high density polyethylene, jacketed with the
non-halogen compound. The insulated conductors are twisted into pairs. The
cable shall be IEC tested for low smoke and non-halogen emission.
a) All UTP terminations shall be consistent with ANSI/EIA/TIA TSB-40.
b) All UTP cables shall meet the transmission characteristics of Category 6

as specified in ANSI/EIA/TIA 568, TSB-36.
c) All UTP connectors shall meet the transmission characteristics of

Category 6 as defined in TSB-40 and meets the pin/pair assignments of
1-2, 7-8 for ANSI X3T9.5 TP-PMD (FDDI).
TS/42/4 2602542S/EL
d) Apart from above requirements, all Category 6 UTP cable shall also
meet the following near end cross talk (NEXT) and attenuation
requirements :
Frequency (MHz) Next*(min) (dB) Attenuation (max)

(dB)
0.064 - 0.8
0.150 74 -
0.256 - 1.1
0.512 - 1.5
0.772 64 1.8
1.0 62 2.1
4.0 53 4.3
8.0 48 5.9
10.0 47 6.6
16.0 44 8.2
20.0 42 9.2
25.0 41 10.5
31.25 39 11.8
62.5 35 17.1
100.0 32 22.0
Next* : Next (f) ³ Next (0.772) - 15 log(f/0.772)
e) All UTP cables shall meet the requirement specified for current and
emerging standard such as ANSI X3T9.5, TPPMD, 100Mbits ethernet,
ATM 25 Mbps, ATM 155Mbps, CDDI at 100Mbps, ISDN, Data over
RS232, Ethernet over 10 BaseT, Ethernet over 100 BaseT, token ring
and possibility of 622 Mbps transmission and application in future.
f) Each run of cable between the patch panels and the computer outlet
shall be continuous without any joints or splices.
g) The length of each individual run of cable from the patch panels in the
Computer Wire Centre to the computer outlet shall not exceed 90 meter
for error-free transmission at 100 MHz.
TS/42/5 2602542S/EL
h) If the length exceed 90 meter, necessary line driving/boosting devices
shall be provided at the Tenderer's cost to ensure data transmission at
100 MHz to the respective work areas are still error-free.
i) The 4-pair UTP cable shall be Under-writer's Laboratories (UL) listed.
j) The 4 pair UTP cable shall also meet or exceed the following standards:
1) ICEA S80-S76, 9/88
2) Mutual Capacitance 14pf/ft. Low unbalance
3) DC resistance (ohms/1000 feet) : 28.6 Low unbalance
4) Characteristic Impedence (ohms @1 to 100Mhz) : 100 +/- 15%
5) Maximum attenuation 67 dB/1000ft and worst pair-pair NEXT 32

dB at 100 Mhz
6) IEC 60754 part 2, Non-halogen based on pH and Conductivity

Measurements
7) IEC 61034 part 2, smoke emission
8) IEC 60332 part 3, Flammability and Fire retardance
9) NES 713, Toxicity
k) The 4-pair UTP cable shall comply with the EEC (European Economic
Community) 1992 EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) Directive
requirement and the following required standards:
1) Emissions:
i) EN 55 022 radiated emissions

ii) EN 55 022 AC mains conducted emissions
iii) EN 60 555-2 AC mains harmonics emissions
iv) EN 60 555-3 AC mains voltage fluctuations
2) Immunity:
i) IEC 61000-4-2 electrostatic discharge immunity

ii) IEC 6100-4-3 radiated immunity
iii) IEC 61000-4-4 fast transient immunity
l) The 4-pair UTP cable shall support high speed data, voice, image and
single channel video application.
TS/42/6 2602542S/EL
m) The color code shall conform to the following scheme:
pair 1 - White Blue & Blue

pair 2 - White orange & orange
pair 3 - White green & green
pair 4 - White brown & brown
n) All cables, both fiber and copper shall be terminated during the initial
installation build-out.
o) UTP Cable Jacket shall be of LSHF-FR (Low smoke-Halogen Free-

Flame Retardant)
5.2 Fiber Optic Cable
a) All fiber optic cables shall be 62.5/125 microm multi-mode or 9/125

single mode with suitable coating for protection as indicated in the
drawings.
b) All fiber connectors shall be LC-connectors as specified in the drawings.
c) Each fiber shall be buffered with colour-coded PVC for identification for
multi-core fiber optic cables.
d) All fiber optic cables shall be tested by Optical Time Domain

Reflectometer (OTDR).
e) The OTDR used shall be able to provide the following readings at a

minimum :
1) Start Pulse
2) Dead Zone
3) Connector Pair
4) Fusion Splice or Bend Loss
5) Mechanical Splice
6) End of Fiber
7) Termination Point
8) Fiber Break
9) Cusor
10) Distance (km)
TS/42/7 2602542S/EL
f) The following multi-mode fiber optic characteristics shall be met:
Characteristics Parameters
Fiber Core 62.6 +/- 3 micron

Cladding Diameter 125 +/- 2 micron
Attenuation Max. 3.75 dB/Km (850nm)
Max. 1.5 dB/Km (1300nm)
Bandwidth Min. 160 MHz/Km
Max. 500 MHz/Km
Core Non-Circularity Less than 6 %
Cladding Non- Less than 2 %
Circularity
Concentricity Error Less than 6 %
Primary Coating UV curable acrylate
Material
Primary Coating Nom. 250 micron
Diameter
g) The Contractor shall provide both printed and electronic copies of OTDR
traces providing proof of a system integrity and performance to the S.O..
A trace of the entire length of fiber, commonly known as "signature
trace" shall be provided.
h) The Contractor shall perform bandwidth testing to ensure all fibers meet
the EIA/TIA-568 specification for 62.5/125 microm fiber : 160 MHz-km at
850 nm and 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm.
i) The optical cable shall have nylon jacket over polyethylene sheath or
equivalent. The fibre cable shall be enclosed by moisture resistant jelly.
j) All fibre optic cables shall be loose tube design.
k) All fibre optic cables shall be armoured type used for outdoor building
application.
TS/42/8 2602542S/EL
5.3 Computer / Telephone Outlet
a) All computer / telephone outlets (except selective are computer fiber

outlets) shall be a universal applications RJ45 type, accepting most data
plugs.
b) All outlets shall be ISDN 8-position/8-conductor standard type and shall

be capable of receiving conventional 4, 6 and 8 pins jack/plug of 24
AWG solid wire.
c) The computer / telephone outlet shall be either surface or flush

mounted.
d) The outlet shall be multi-vendor supportive and shall be able to

reconfigure to different applications as and when required.
e) The outlet shall be able to support 100Mbps and ATM 155 applications
in the near future.
f) The outlet shall be Under-writer's laboratories (UL) listed, Canadian

Standard Organisation (CSA) certified and must comply with FCC part
68.
g) The outlet shall be made from high-impact, flame-retardant, UL-rated

94V-0 thermoplastic.
h) The outlet shall meet EIA/TIA TSB 40 category 5 requirements and shall
fully support proposed 100 MBPS TP-PMD data rate @ 100 meters over
UTP as per ANSI X3T9.5 standard (or ATM 155 Mbps).
i) The outlet shall apply the cross-over lead concept uses crosstalk
cancellation techniques to provide superior Near End Crosstalk (NEXT)
performance without the need for printed wiring boards or other
additional components.
j) The outlet shall be insulation displacement connector wiring termination.
k) The RJ45 jack wire shall contain copper alloy, 50 micro-inch lubricated
gold plating over 100 micro-inch nickel underplate.
l) The insulation displacement connectors of the outlet shall accept 22 to

26 AWG insulated wire.
m) The RJ45 jack shall conform to EIA-T568B wiring schemes.
n) The outlet shall meet the following electrical performance:
1) Dielectric withstand voltage: 1000 VAC RMS, 60Hz minimum,

contact-to-contact and 1500 VAC RMS, 60 Hz minimum to
exposed conductive surface
TS/42/9 2602542S/EL
2) Insulation resistance of 500 mohms minimum
3) Contact resistance of 20 mohms maximum
4) Current rating of 1.5A at 68 deg. F (20 deg. C) per IEC

Publication 60512-3, Test 5b.
o) The outlet shall meet the following mechanical performance:
1) Insertion life of 750 cycles minimum.

2) Plug/Jack contact force : 100 grams minimum per contact using
FCC-approved plug.
3) Plug retention force : 30 lb (133 N) minimum.
4) Temperature range : -40 to 150 deg. F
5.4 RJ45 Patch Panel
a) The RJ45 patch panel provided in the Computer Wire Centres, shall
have RJ45 jack termination in the front and punch down termination
block at the rear. It shall be able to be housed in a standard 19" rack.
b) The wiring block shall be fire-retardant, moulded plastic blocks, UL94

VO rated, consisting of horizontal index strips for terminating 25 pairs of
conductor each. It should consist of color index or label strips to be used
to identify the data points and high teeth to separate the tip and ring.
c) The patch panel shall be able to accommodate over 500 repeated

insertion without incurring permanent deformation and it shall pass the
reliability test of no more than one contact fails in 10000 connections.
d) The patch panels must be able to support 100Mbps and ATM 155
applications, Category 6 compliance.
e) The wiring block shall be able to accommodate 22-26 AWG cable

conductors. The patch panel shall be quiet front without any contact
element exposed.
f) The patch panels shall cater to data, image and video applications.
g) The components of the patch panel shall meet or exceed the following
required standards:
1) National Electric Code (NEC), ANSI/NFPA 70, National Fire

Protection Association.
2) UL 1863 first edition.
3) CSA Standard C22.2
4) FCC Part 15, electro-magnetic compatibility
5) FCC Part 68, Connection of Terminal Equipment to Telephone
Network.
h) Additional patch panels shall be installed for the proposed new computer
ports.
TS/42/10 2602542S/EL
5.5 Category 6 UTP Patch Cord
a) Patch cord shall be provided for cross-connection to facilitate changes

and movement. It shall be able to support up to Category 6 application.
Air-tight and gold plated connection shall be provided to prevent
oxidation.
b) The patch cord (factory assembled plug-ended jumpers) shall be

supplied for patch panel terminal blocks.
c) The patch cord shall be available in 1, 2, 3 and 4 pairs versions with

lengths of 2 through 14 feet.
d) The patch cord shall have built-in exclusion features to prevent

accidental polarity reversals and split pairs.
e) The patch cord shall provide air-tight connection for cross-connection

and shall comply with Category 6 requirement.
f) The patch cord contact element shall be Phosphor Bronze, 0.406 mm,
with 0.128 um Gold Plate over 1.91 um minimum Nickel Plate.
g) UTP jumper cords with both ends terminated with RJ-45 plugs for
connecting the computer equipment at the user areas to the network
access points shall be provided. The length is 3 metres and the quantity
shall depend on the total number of UTP access points in the project.
h) The patch cord shall be able to support Category 6 applications to

provide error free transmission up to 100 Mbps and ATM 155. It shall
also have the following characteristics and minimum performance at 20
deg C :
1) Conductors : Annealed copper - 24 AWG Stranded
2) Nominal
Impedance : 100 ohms +/- 15%
(at 1-16 MHz)
3) Mutual
Capacitance : 16 pF/ft (max)
4) Minimum Bending
Radius : 10 x outside diameter of cable
5) Maximum DC
resistance : 93.8 ohms/km
TS/42/11 2602542S/EL
6) Attenuation and Crosstalk :
Frequency/MHz Attenuation Near-End Crosstalk

dB/305m dB/305m
0.512 4.5 -
0.772 5.5 64
1.0 6.3 62
4.0 13.0 53
8.0 18.0 48
10.0 20.0 47
16.0 25.0 44
Fiber Patch Panel
i) Each unit of the fiber patch panel shall be of multi-port type with a
minimum of containing 24-port.
j) Coupling shall be arranged in a matrix of a minimum of 12-port and pre-

installed in the fiber patch panel.
k) Fiber patch panel shall be designed to be wall mountable or rack

mountable on the standard 19" rack.
l) The material of the fiber patch panel shall be made of aluminium. The
surface finish shall be of powder coated to prevent corrosion and
scratches, and shall be black in colour.
m) All ports housed in the fiber patch panel shall be front accessible.
TS/42/12 2602542S/EL
5.6 Duplex Fiber Patch Cord
a) The duplex fiber patch cord shall comply with the same standards, and
have the same characteristics as that for the fiber optic cables.
b) The duplex fiber patch cord shall be supplied in length of 3 meter. Both
ends of the patch cord shall be terminated with LC/LC.
c) The LC connectors shall have the following optical and mechanical

characteristics.
1) Optical Characteristics
i) Increase in insertion loss after 500

matings <= 0.2 dB
ii) Max. insertion loss 0.4 dB
iii) Optical return loss

after 500 matings >= 50 dB
2) Mechanical Characteristics
i) Connection Durability 500 matings
ii) Pull Out Strength >= 90 N
6. Racks and Cable Management
All racks, in the Computer Wire Centre should employ the use of 19 inch racking
products. In all cases the backbone cabling sub-system shall be terminated into rack
mounted panels and presented as LC fibre connectors or RJ45 Cat5 UTP connectors as
shown in the drawings.
Cable management is a mandatory requirement in keeping the patching facility tidy and
manageable. Horizontal management panels should be installed for every 2RU of patch
panel, with each panel having sufficient capacity for at least 50 patch leads.
Together with the vertical management side rings they provide an environment for
ongoing maintenance of all future client patching and enable moves and changes to be
handled easily.
All cables shall be supported at minimum intervals of 300 mm, on cable trays mounted
vertically in the riser space. Care should be taken to taken to ensure that undue strain
is not applied to the cables to tie wrap tension.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all records and labelling of the rack mounted
panels, both fibre and Cat 6 UTP, to the convention provided by the client.
TS/42/13 2602542S/EL
7. Computer Wire Centre Equipment
7.1 The computer wire centre equipment described herein includes all the racks
needed to fit all the termination blocks and patch panels.
7.2 The Contractor shall provide sufficient number of 19" cabinets for cabling and
networking equipment installation as indicated in the drawings. The rack shall be
of size 46U X 800 (W) X 800 (D).
7.3 Standard 19-inch racks are required for the installation of modular terminal patch
panels and all the intelligent network hubs needed.
7.4 The racks shall meet the following general requirements:
a) Each rack shall have a swing frame to accommodate 19" width

equipment and patch panels. It shall be designed to take the entire
weight of equipment mounted onto it.
The degree of swing to open position shall be such that works can be
carried out for connection and checking.
b) The racks shall be used for all data cabling and equipment.
c) Each rack shall have two (2) rows of 8-way UK 13A 3-pin power bar c/w
RCD (Residual-Current Device) to supply UPS-conditioned power to the
rack. Each power bar shall be connected to the manual bypass switch
directly instead of the UPS.
d) Each rack shall be provided with a 32-Amp Cee-form plug socket

complete with cabling.
e) Each rack shall be capable of joining together as one single cabinet.
f) The Top Cover shall be raised to provide an opening for heat

dissipation.
g) The Top Cover shall be provided with opening for cable entry.
h) Adjustable feet shall provide for height adjustment and for levelling on
uneven floors.
i) The rack shall be powder coated and the colour shall be subject to
S.O.'s approval.
j) The design of the rack shall conform to IEC 60297-3, DIN 41494-7 and
BS 5954-2.
k) The racks shall have sturdy brackets for physical cable management to
allow easy access to each modular connectors and punch-down block
connectors.
l) The cabinets shall have lockable swinging tamper glass panels in the
front.
TS/42/14 2602542S/EL
m) The cabinets shall have lockable swinging metal doors in the rear.
n) The cabinets shall have fan coil units for ventilation at the top of the
cabinets.
o) The racks shall have metallic bar strap for grounding purpose.
p) The cabinet shall be supplied fully assembled.
q) The racks shall have heavy duty castor wheels.
7.5 The Contractor shall provide all the cross-connect blocks for fiber optic cable
termination and all the necessary fiber optic patch cords. All cables shall be
factory terminated and tested with LC connectors.
7.6 The metallic grounding bar strap provided in the racks shall be connected to the
earthing bar for building grounding.
8. Grounding Requirements
8.1 The Contractor shall ensure that the grounding system conforms to NEC,
ANSI/TIA/EIA-607, local and other latest relevant requirements.
8.2 The Contractor shall ensure and substantiate that the grounding system for the
entire telecommunication system is continuous throughout. All grounding cables
from each 19" rack cabinets shall be terminated in the main copper earthing bar
in each computer wire centre.
9. Installation Requirements
Apart from complying to the standards as spelled out in Clause 2.4, the installation of
the computer cabling system shall also comply to the installation guidelines as
recommended by the cable manufacturer.
10. Testing And Commissioning
10.1 All cables shall be tested by the Contractor and conformed to the requirements
as specified in the Specification.
10.2 All the connections, Category 6 UTP cables, fiber optic cables shall be
individually tested by the Contractor after installation. The Contractor shall
make accurate records of all tests and shall furnish test certificates and a
schedule of the test results in an approved form. One copy of such record and
of each test certificate shall be submitted to the S.O. for review.
10.3 All materials, devices and equipment supplied or erected under this Contract
which fail the tests shall be replaced or rectified at once by the Contractor
without additional cost to the Employer and the tests shall be repeated.
However, the decision whether to replace or rectify the defective part or parts or
the whole of the equipment/system shall rest with the Employer.
TS/42/15 2602542S/EL
10.4 All test shall be conducted in the presence of, and to the satisfaction of the S.O..
The Contractor shall supply all necessary instruments, apparatus, connections
and skilled labour required for the tests to be carried out to the satisfaction of
the S.O., without separate charge to the Employer.
11. Maintenance and Spares
11.1 The Contractor shall provide an inventory of all spare components proposed
including but not limited to the followings:
a) LC multi-mode patch cords

b) 24,32 or 48 ports RJ45 patch panels
c) Category 6 RJ45 and 110 patch cords
d) Faceplates with 2 x RJ45 outlets
e) Multi-mode Couplers
f) Surface mount outlets
g) LC Connectors
11.2 The Contractor shall provide on-site warranty for fifteen (15) month for the
Computer Cabling systems from the certified substantial completion date of the
Contract.
12. Documentation/Labelling
12.1 The Contractor shall comply to EIA/TIA 606 for documentation. The
documentation (in MS Windows Format) of the Computer Cabling System shall
include, but not limit to the following details:
a) Overall schematic diagram and overview of the Computer Cabling

System;
b) Computer Cabling design adopted for this development;
c) Description of products used in the Structured Cabling and PABX

Systems;
d) Layout plans and sections of the Computer Wire Centre, 19" rack
cabinet, etc.;
e) Labelling plan and its color coding scheme;
f) Records of numbering plan and its location;
g) Floor plan of room showing all the hardware and their location;
h) Catalogues and technical literatures of every component used in the

Computer Cabling System.
12.2 The Contractor shall systematically and clearly label each port on the punch
down termination block, patch panel, cabling, computer outlet and etc.
TS/42/16 2602542S/EL
13. Training
13.1 The Contractor shall provide sufficient sessions of comprehensive training and
training materials in the proper and effective use, operation and maintenance of
the Computer Cabling System.
13.2 The syllabus of each training session shall include, but not limited to the
following topics:
a) Overview of computer cabling systems;
b) Computer cabling design adopted for this development;
c) Description of products used in the computer cabling system;
d) Layout of Computer Wire Centres, 19" rack cabinet, etc.;
e) Labelling plan and color coding scheme;
f) Fault management
14. Technical Support Staff and Experience
14.1 The Contractor shall provide a list of their technical support staff, together with
working experience.
14.2 The Contractor shall also state the nearest location of their principal's support
centre. This centre shall have permanently stationed staff who are capable of
providing technical support if required.
15. Warranty
The Contractor shall provide a 12 year passive product warranty for the Structured
Cabling System backed by the Manufacturer, and a 12-year application assurance on
the application described in this Specification, from the date of Certified Substantial
Completion of the Contract.
16. Network Wiring Requirements
16.1 There shall be three types of network access points at the user areas of either
UTP/FTP or Fibre. UTP/FTP access points shall be terminated with RJ-45 jacks
while fibre access points shall be terminated with SC connectors. A star
topology is adopted for all the network connection.
16.2 The faceplates for the UTP/FTP of Fibre access points at the user areas shall
be wall-mounted with durable shutter for dust proof. The label or the jack itself
on faceplate shall be of blue colour in order to make distinction from the other
types of UTP/FTP access points.
TS/42/17 2602542S/EL
16.3 Wireless base stations shall be using FTP (Foiled-shield twisted pair) cables.
Each wireless base station shall have two FTP cables.
16.4 The UTP/FTP wiring, termination and connection shall strictly conform or exceed
the Category 6 transmission requirements in ISO/IEC IS11801, CENELEC
EN50173 and EIA/TIA 568A and the respective ratified versions at the time of
installation.
16.5 The pair counts for the UTP/FTP wiring is 4, i.e. 8 wires. The gauge is 24 AWG.
The UTP/FTP cable shall be UL CM rated for horizontal cable and CMR rated
for vertical riser cable.
16.6 The UTP/FTP Category 6 connections and connecting components must be fully
backward compatible with the existing networking equipment and devices that
are qorking on the UTP/FTP Category 5 cable infrastructure.
16.7 There shall be no performance degradation and reliability issues using the
existing networking equipment and devices with the Category 6 cabling
infrastructure.
16.8 All UTP/FTP wiring shall be terminated at RJ-45 patch panels in the wire centre
with proper cable organizers.
16.9 The fibre wiring shall either be of single mode 9/125 micron, wavelength
1310nm or multimode 62.5/125 micron, modal bandwidth 200MHz/km,
wavelength 850nm. All fibre wiring shall terminate with LC connectors at patch
panels in the wire centre with proper cable organizers. For distance more than
150 metres, Single mode shall be used. All fibre optics cables shall be
Armoured.
16.10 Singlemode fibre shall comply with the Bellcore, EIA/TIA & IEEE standards.
16.11 The multimode fibre is of UL rates OFNR. Graded-index fibres shall be used
within the premises and it shall comply with EIA/TIA 492 specifications and IS
11801 standards.
16.12 The Contractor shall be a certified installer by the manufacturer(s) of the

structured cabling system proposed for the UTP/FTP wiring. The same applies
to fibre optic wiring.
16.13 There shall be no mix and match of cables and connecting components from
different manufacturers for all multimode and single mode fibre jobs along the
complete transmission channel from the networking devices to the end users
systems.
different manufacturers for all UTP?FTP Category 6 jobs along the complete
transmission channel from the networking devices to the end user systems.
16.15 All UTP?FTP access points shall be under 15-year warranty or more for system
and applications performance guarantee.
TS/42/18 2602542S/EL
16.16 UTP/FTP Category 6 jumper cords with both ends terminated with RJ-45 plugs
for connecting the computer equipment at the user areas to the network access
points shall be provided. The length is 3 metres and the quantity shall depend
on the total number of UTP/FTP access points in the project.
16.17 UTP/FTP Category 6 patch cords with both ends terminated with RJ-45 plugs for
connecting computer equipment in the wire centres to the UTP/FTP patch
panels shall be provided. The length is 3 metres and the quantity shall depend
on the total number of UTP/FTP access points in the project.
16.18 Fibre jumper cords with both ends terminated in LC for connecting the computer
equipment at the user areas to the fibre access points shall be provided. The
length is 3 metres and the quantity shall depend on the total number of fibre
access points in the project.
16.19 Fibre patch cords with both ends terminated in LC for connecting the computer
equipment in the wire centres to the fibre patch panel shall be provided. The
length is 3 metres and the quantity shall depend on the total number of fibre
cores terminated on the patch panels in the project.
16.20 All horizontal wiring must be run on cable trays above the ceiling or on the
raised floor. The cable trays should be installed without blocking the service
access to other equipment or utility. Also, the cable trays shall not run on top
and across the user’s premises such that additional wiring in future shall not
require to the users’ areas.
16.21 The cable trays shall be white in colour.
16.22 The cable trays shall be installed with bracket support at every one metre
interval. It shall be labelled with “Computer Cables” clearly at every two metre
interval.
16.23 There shall be no underground cables unless prior approval is obtained.
16.24 The quantity of UTP?FTP access points and fibre access points, number of fibre
cores, cable routes and size of cable trays, etc shall be determined on a project
basis.
16.25 The samples of all cable components and hardware shall be submitted for
approval before commencement.
17. Space, Location and Access Requirements of Wire Centres
17.1 The wire centre shall be located in the building so that all network access points
on UTP Category 6 wiring are within the limit of 90 metres from the wire centre,
excluding the patch cords and jumper cords required for the completeness of
the communication channel.
17.2 The wire centre shall not be located near to AHU or high-tension voltage cable
or riser.
TS/42/19 2602542S/EL
17.3 The location shall allow 24 hours access for emergency service without the
needs of accessing other locked rooms and corridors first.
17.4 There shall be NUS Smart card access with fail secure lock to the wire centre.
17.5 The wire centre shall be clearly labelled as “Computer Wire Centre” of size 6cm
(W) x 20cm (L) with room number.
17.6 There shall be raised floor of 15cm high.
17.7 There shall be dedicated riser of size 0.5 (D) x 1.0 (W) m2 for computer wiring
with convenient access. The size of the riser shall cater for growth or the
requirement of additional network access points in future.
17.8 Should there be more than one wire centre per building, all wire centres shall
share the same riser and shall be aligned at the same vertical location at
different levels.
17.9 Two 19” equipment racks of 46u (H) x 800mm (W) x 800mm (D) per wire centre
of size 3 x 3 m2 for a maximum of 200 UTP points are required. One additional
rack is needed for every additional of 100 or less UTP points. The equipment
rack shall be of solid built, good quality and equipped with top cover, rear door,
front Perspex door, removable side cover, 6 power sockets, lock and key, 5 x
550mm metal trays, 50 sets cape nut, cable trays on both sides and cable entry
at the base.
18. Electrical Power and Air-Conditioning Requirements of Wire Centres
18.1 Two air-conditioning units of maximum 18,000 BTU shall be provided for wire
centre of size 3 x 3 m2 . An additional of 10% cooling power shall be provided for
an increase of physical space by every 2 x 2 m2.
18.2 In order to avoid over stressing any particular one of the two air-conditioning
units, the two air-conditioning units shall alternate working automatically and
provide cooling power to the wire centre. Each one shall work for 12 hours
before the other one take over.
18.3 There shall be 32A single phase power supply Cee-form type to each equipment
rack.
18.4 There shall be individual ELCBs for every power socket on the rack for easy
fault isolation of power trip.
18.5 Two units of rack mount type UPS of 5 KVA each or above shall be provided to
every wire centre with floor area of 3 x 3 m2. Two additional UPS of same
capacity shall be provided for every increase of 2 x 2 m2 in floor area. Two units
of rack mount type UPS of 10 KVA each or above shall be provided to every
main wire centre. The UPS shall complete with zero switch-over time in the
event of power failure and be able to protect sensitive computer equipment from
power surge, spikes, blackouts and brownouts.
TS/42/20 2602542S/EL
18.6 There shall be emergency power supply in case of the failure of the main power
supply.
18.7 The wire centre shall be equipped with fire extinguisher and conform to the local
authority standard.
19. Technical Requirements of UPS
19.1 Mandatory Requirements
(a) The UPS shall be rack mountable and shall be available in various
models by VA.
(b) The UPS shall protect computers, network equipment and accessories
against power sags / brownouts, blackout, power surge / spike, over-
voltage and noise.
(c) The UPS can be a common unit in a fixed location supplying emergency
power to more than one piece of network equipment.
(d) The UPS shall allow automatic cutover to emergency power to protected
equipment, even when not fully charged.
(e) The UPS shall be operational to supply emergency power to protected

equipment, even when not fully charged.
(f) The UPS shall be able to recharge itself while supplying power to the
protected networks equipment.
(g) During a power outage, the UPS shall be able to supply power for at
least twenty (20) minutes for continuous normal operations.
(h) The UPS shall preferably be interfaced with the protected network
equipment such that alarms from the UPS can be sent to these pieces
of equipment for them to shutdown gracefully in a power outage.
(i) The UPS shall support full SNMP management. All the SNMP mibs shall
be documented with the latest versions available online via the vendor’s
Web portal.
(j) The UPS system shall include management software and all optional
accessories.
(k) The UPS management software must provide web-based full-

management for all UPSs from any workstation on the network.
(l) The management software must integrate with Ciscoworks 2000 and
launched from Ciscoworks 2000 . The management software must be
certified from Cisco Systems as a “Certified Cisco Management
Connection” product.
TS/42/21 2602542S/EL
(m) The UPS vendor must provide a Web portal for technical support and for
downloading software / firmware, latest updates, technical
documentation, knowledge-base articles, etc.
(n) The UPS system shall provide configurable event logging via Email /
SMTP and SNMP traps.
(o) The UPS system shall log power events with a description and time /
date stamp to enable diagnosis of UPS / power problems and allow
these logs to be consolidated on the Network Management System.
(p) The UPS system must allow for the auto-discovery of all deployed UPS
devices (from the same vendor).
(q) The UPS shall provide full time EMI/RFI noise isolation and surge
suppression.
(r) The UPS shall operate continuously at temperature from 0oC to 45oC
and relative humidity between 0% and 95% non condensing.
(s) The UPS shall provide input line fault protection consistent with safety
standards.
(t) The UPS system shall be manageable via a Web browser, Telnet or
SNMP over the network, providing power monitoring and control. It shall
also be able to remotely reboot via these tools. The Web / SNMP
adapter shall be able to provide logging as well as email support.
(u) The UPS system shall include all necessary management software for
the UPS system.
(v) The UPS shall provide “easy-to-read” front panel LED information
display.
(w) The UPS vendor shall include for rack mountable battery pack.
(x) The UPS system shall enable the monitoring of environmental conditions
from the Network Management System.
19.2 Optional Requirements.
(a) Stackable and expandable battery pack to allow extended power supply.
(b) Capability of power expansion either by adding or removing power

modules.
(c) Able to transfer battery operation automatically in the event of utility

failure.
(d) Able to provide redundancy by allowing at least 1 additional power

module than required power the UPS.
TS/42/22 2602542S/EL
19.3 Rackmount UPS
(a) The UPS must be rack-mountable, shall be available in 2200VA,

3000VA and 5000VA models.
(b) The UPS shall be designed to protect connected networking equipment

from power anomalies including surges, brownouts, spikes and
blackouts.
(c) The UPS must provide “easy-to-read” front panel LED display which
includes information of load, battery capacity, overload indicator, replace
battery indicator, on-battery indicator, voltage correcting indicator.
(d) The UPS shall incorporate a test button on front panel by which the UPS
can simulate a utility voltage blackout and tests the operation of the
UPS.
(e) The UPS shall have an intelligent Battery Management system to

maximise the efficiency of the battery pack. This includes automatic
true-load battery test, redundant overcharging protection and
continuous, non-pulsed charging. The UPS batteries must be able to
charged to 90% of rated capacity within 2 hours.
(f) The UPS shall have the ability to run self tests and to notify users via
network broadcasts, paging and email that the UPS batteries or UPS
need to be services. The UPS shall also have the option of notifying the
user of degraded batteries via the network OS and via SNM.
(g) The UPS shall include a resettable input circuit breaker.
(h) The UPS shall have the ability to silence the alarm once it is sounded.
(i) The UPS shall provide automatic transparent switching between AC and
battery power upon detection of a power shortage, and auto switch back
to the main supply when it is restored. This transfer time shall be no
more than 4 miliseconds.
(j) The UPS shall include power management software and optional
accessories that allow the user to set the output voltage of the
220/230/240 Vac version to 220 Vac (appropriate where either 220 Vac
or 230 Vac utility service exists) 230 Vac or 240 Vac.
(k) The UPS shall provide full time EMI/RFI noise isolation and surge
suppression. When measured using standard tests as detailed in ANSI
C62.41 (IEEE 587) or IEC 61000-4-5, the surge performance shall
provide let through voltage of less than 1% of peak typical.
(l) The UPS shall provide input line fault protection consistent with UL and
CSA standards.
(m) The UPS shall be designed with IEC 60320 C13 receptacles.
TS/42/23 2602542S/EL
(n) The UPS shall operate continuously at temperature from 0oC to 45oC
and relative humidity between 0% and 95% non condensing.
19.4 UPS’s SNMP/Web Management Ability
(a) The UPS must be manageable via a Web browser, Telnet or SNMP over
the network, providing full power monitoring and control. It must also be
able to remotely reboot networking equipment via these tools. The
Web/SNMP adapter must be able to provide logging as well as email
support.
(b) The UPS must be able to monitor temperature and humidity remotely via
Telnet, web-browser or SNMP. It shall have user-selectable temperature
and humidity threshold that will automatically trigger an SNMP trap in
events of potential environmental problems.
(c) The UPS must be able to manage remotely via modem thereby
providing complete UPS information, paging on power problems and
remote safe reboot of networking equipment.
(d) The UPS must provide a software plug-in support CiscoWorks, CA

Unicenter, Tivoli, HP Openview. The software must provide the user a
Graphical User Interface to present data in user friendly format.
(e) The UPS must be able to send 21 different types of traps to Network
Management Console to report alarms, including UPS On battery, UPS
Overload, UPS Self test Fail and UPS Battery Replacement alarms. It
can also detect any unauthorised access for highest security. The
management adapter shall be able to list up to four IP addresses of trap
receivers (NMS).
(f) With the use of power management software, the UPS shall provide the
user event and data logging which keeps a history of power
disturbances.
(g) The UPS must be able to be configured locally via serial connection from
a terminal session.
(h) The UPS must be able to configure remotely using BootP, TFTP or FTP.
It must allow a common configuration file to be downloaded from a
special configuration of the UPSs in all wiring closets.
(i) The UPS must be able to log power events independently (without any
server) as well as provides email notification upon power events.
TS/42/24 2602542S/EL
19.5 UPS Power Management SNMP Software (Plug-in to the NMS)
(a) The UPS shall include power management software which provides a
data log which records the following : minimum and maximum input
voltage, output voltage, battery voltage, load percentage, frequency and
UPS temperature.
(b) The UPS’s power management software should allow scheduling of

periodic UPS self tests to monitor the health of the UPS.
(c) The UPS should provide for actual on-battery simulation of a power
outage in order to obtain a run-time calibration.
(d) The UPS’s power management software should allow administrators to

connect to remote systems and import predefined configurations of
power event actions and scheduled activities such as shutdowns, self-
tests and run-time calibrations.
(e) The UPS monitoring software should provide automatic battery

conservation, turning off the UPSs power outlets in order to conserve
the battery for subsequent power outages.
(f) The UPS’s power management software should be Microsoft BackOffice

certified and shoul be able to perform safe, unattended shut down of all
Microsoft Back Office applications in the event of any power outage.
(Internet information Server, SQL Server, Exchange Server, SMS Server
and SNA Server).
(g) The UPS’s power management software should allow safe, orderly
shutdown of the following web server software; Netscape
Communications Server and Microsoft Information Server.
(h) UPS monitoring software must be available which is integrated in with

standard server management packages such as Compaq Insight
Manager, IBM Netfinity, HP NetServer Assistant, LANDesk Server
Manager and Microsoft SMS.
(i) UPS monitoring software which displays power and diagnostic data
graphically must be available which is integrated in with standard SNMP
management packages, such as CA Unicester TNG, CA Polycenter,
Cabletron Spectrum, HP OpenView, Novell ManageWise, SunNet
Manager and Tivoli Netview.
TS/42/25 2602542S/EL
19.6 UPS Enterprise-wide Inventory Management Software
(a) Software must have the ability to perform scheduled data gathering from
all the UPSs on the network via SNMP.
(b) Software must store the UPS data in an ODBC-compliant database.
(c) Software must have the ability to provide reports on the age of the UPSs
on the network and age of the batteries in these UPSs.
(d) Software must have the ability to provide reports on the age of the UPSs
on the network and age of the batteries in these UPSs.
(e) Software must have the ability to scale to handle up to 10,000 devices.
(f) Software must be able to show real-time status change of all UPSs on
the network.
(g) Software must provide recommend actions on UPS alerts, warnings and
events.
(h) Software should support UPS accessories from the same vendor.
(i) Software must have the ability to provide downtime and on-battery
reports to determine runtime necessary throughout the network.
(j) Software must be able to set threshold on battery age, UPS age,
runtime remaining and load of the UPS for proactive monitoring.
(k) Software must be able to launch a direct interface to each individual

UPS.
TS/42/26 2602542S/EL
19.7 19” Equipment Rack Layout
Ceiling ( Data cable entry) Ceiling ( Data cable entry)
Rack One Rack Two
Fibre Patch Panel

UTP patch panel (48 UTP patch panel (48
ports) ports)
Cable Management Cable Management
Network Switch Network Switch
ports) ports)
ports) ports)
Cable Management
Cable Management
Cable Management
Cable Management
ports) ports)
UTP patch panel (48
ports)
Cable Management
Network Switch
UTP patch panel (48
ports)
Cable Management
Network Switch
UPS UPS
UPS UPS
Raised Floor
Power cable entry Power cable entry
TS/42/27 2602542S/EL
20. Wire centre Layout and Network Labelling Convention
20.1 A new wirecentre must have at least two standard 19” equipment racks
positioned against the inner side of the wall.
20.2 Fibre optics panel must clearly states the source and destination followed by
each port numbers as show in the picture below :
SINGLE MODE FIBRE CABLES FROM AS3-03-CNT TO AS1-03-CNT2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
20.3 UTP/FTP Labelling Convention
Below is a typical network point label at the user end. The network point must
show clearly the cable coming from which wire centre. Label must be light blue
in colour. At the UTP/FTP cable panel in the wire centre, the nos. must be in
running sequence and there must be no duplication of nos.
AS3-03-W / 105
AS3-03-W refers to the name of wire centre connects to the information

outlet, replace -CNT inside the wire centre name with -W
105 refers to the information outlet no
20.4 The wire centre signage must be labelled as shown below:
COMPUTER WIRE CENTRE

AS3-03-CNT
AS3 refers to block no. of the building

03 refers to the level
CNT is our NUS Information Technology network. If there is more than one wire
centre in the same block, the next wire centre shall be known as CNT2. The
first one, shall still be named as CNT
20.5 Summary report of fibre and UTP test results are attached as Appendix A and B
respectively.
TS/42/28 2602542S/EL
Appendix A
ABC Company Pte Ltd
Date :
Faculty : Engineering
Cable : Single-Mode Fibre
ZONE :AKIENG TOTAL FIBER CORES : 12 CORES
TOTAL TERMINATED : 12 CORES
TS/42/29 2602542S/EL
Appendix B
ABC Company Pte Ltd
Faculty :Engineering Date :

Wire centre :E4-CNT Cable : UTP CAT 6
Cable ID Location / Room No Length (m) Results Remarks

01 E4-06-09 39 PASSED
02 E4-06-08 44 PASSED
03 E4-06-06 36 PASSED
04 E4-06-07 42 PASSED
05 E4-06-04 47 PASSED
06 E4-06-03 43 PASSED
07 E4-06-11 50 PASSED
08 E4-06-12 54 PASSED
09 E4-06-18 53 PASSED
10 E4-06-17 62 PASSED
11 E4-06-16 68 PASSED
12 E4-06-23 67 PASSED
13 E4-06-10 70 PASSED
14 E4-06-01 73 PASSED
15 E4-06-20 53 PASSED
16 E4-06-35 54 PASSED
17 E4-06-33 57 PASSED
18 E4-06-31 55 PASSED
19 E4-06-30 62 PASSED
20 E4-06-03 40 PASSED
21 E4-05-02 44 PASSED
22 E4-05-07 41 PASSED
23 E4-05-08 43 PASSED
24 E4-05-09 47 PASSED
25 E4-05-10 42 PASSED
26 E4-05-11 41 PASSED
27 E4-05-12 40 PASSED
28 E4-05-14 47 PASSED
29 E4-05-18 42 PASSED
30 E4-05-19 48 PASSED
31 E4-05-20 43 PASSED
32 E4-04-02 85 PASSED
33 E4-04-01 86 PASSED
34 E4-04-05 87 PASSED
35 E4-04-02 83 PASSED
36 E4-04-07 82 PASSED
37 E4-04-08 87 PASSED
38 E4-04-03 89 PASSED
39 E4-04-08 86 PASSED
40 E4-04-02 83 PASSED
41 E4-04-06 89 PASSED
42 E4-04-10 90 PASSED
43 E4-04-11 83 PASSED
44 E4-04-12 80 PASSED
TS/42/30 2602542S/EL
Upon completion of the underground pipe and cables laying, proper identification tag
with engraved words mounted on RC block of 150mm by 150mm for the particular
underground services that being installed. All the engraved tag, location shall submit for
Engineer approval prior to delivery Marker shall install at every 20m interval straight length,
turning, joint pit, draw pit, angle pit and tee pit
CNT FO CNT FO
CABLES CABLES JOINT
PIT
1200mm Depth
1200mm Depth
CNT FO CNT FO
CABLES CABLES
FO CABLE
1200mm Depth 1200mm Depth
CNT FO
CABLES
DRAW PIT
Sample of the Identification Tag for Computer Data Fibre Optic
TS/42/31 2602542S/EL
Additional Requirement from NUS
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 This document defines the standard M&E requirements for a typical wire centre
in NUS campus providing computer network & IP phone connectivity to users via
UTP (Unshielded-Twisted-Pairs) or fibre cabling.
1.2 Main Wire Centres normally have slightly higher requirements on M&E provision.
NUS Information Technology shall be consulted to identify the Main Wire
Centres (if any) and to confirm the M&E requirements together with the
Consultant.
1.3 NUS Information Technology shall be consulted for any deviation to the
requirements defined in this document.
1.4 NUS Information Technology will make use of the Wire Centre Takeover
Checklist (refer to Appendix F) on the acceptance of the wire centre.
2 SPACE, LOCATION, ACCESS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 The floor area shall be of minimum size 3 x 3 square meters clear internal for a
maximum of 400 UTP points. Any exceeding 400 UTP points shall require an
increase of physical space by 2 x 2 square meters to cater for the increase of
racks.
2.2 Two 19” equipment racks of 45u (H) x 800 mm (W) x 800 mm (D) per wire
centre for a maximum of 400 UTP points are required. Two (2) additional racks
are needed if the total UTP points exceeded 400. These equipment racks shall
only be used to house IT equipment and cables (UTP & Fibre) inclusive panel,
excluding M&E facilities like DB, UPS, Bypass panel, etc. In exceptional case
one (1) additional could be added, to house up to144 additional UTP points.
2.3 The equipment rack shall be of solid built, good quality and equipped with top
cover, removable side cover, lock and key, 5 x 550 mm metal trays, 50 sets
cape nuts and bolts, cable trays on both sides and cable entries at the top and
base.
2.4 The equipment rack shall come without front and rear doors.
2.5 The equipment rack shall come completed with cable management rings
installed at the back of the rack to facilitate cross-rack horizontal patching.
2.6 All supplied racks shall be completed with UPS and both vertical and horizontal
cable management guide (refer to Appendix E).
2.7 The wire centre shall be centrally located in the building such that the wiring for
all UTP Category 6 network information outlets are within the limit of 90 meters
from the wire centre, excluding the patch cords and station cords required for
the completeness of the communication channel.
TS/42/32 2602542S/EL
2.8 The wire centre shall also be placed in locations where the University could
easily add additional UTP points anywhere within the building, without
exceeding the maximum UTP transmission channel distance limit (100 meter).
2.9 If the wire centre need to be placed near water source (e.g. pantry, wash rooms,
etc.) the consultant shall ensure sufficient insulation and protection has been
put in place to prevent water leakage into the wire centre
2.10 The wire centre shall not be located near A.H.U or high-tension voltage cable /
riser.
2.11 The wire centre shall be accessible 24x7 to authorized NUS NUS Information
Technology personnel or appointed vendors through the NUS contact-less
smartcard based door access control system with fail-secure setting.
2.12 The wire centre shall be equipped with class ABC fire extinguisher that would
not leave residue to create possible corrosion after being used. Pipes contained
water shall be prohibited in Wire Centre. If it is unavoidable in sprinkler
buildings, pre-action sprinkler system should be considered as alternatives to
replace the wet sprinkler system
2.13 There shall be raised floor of 15 cm high.
2.14 The wire centre shall have a wall-mounted board indicating the maximum floor
loading within the wire centre.
2.15 There shall be a dedicated, conveniently accessible riser of size 0.5 m (D) x 1.0
m (W) for computer wiring. The size of the riser shall cater for growth for the
requirement of additional network information outlets in future. The riser shall be
clearly labelled as “Computer Riser”. All floor/slab opening in the rise shall have
50% remaining space allowance to allow for future expansion on the day of
acceptance.
2.16 All wire centres in the same building shall share the same riser and be aligned
at the same vertical location at different levels.
2.17 Relevant floor plan, architectural design and sketch diagrams of the wire centres
shall be submitted to NUS Information Technology for approval at least four
week before construction.
2.18 The contractor must make sure sufficient floor loading has been catered to host
all equipment, racks, cables, UPS, etc. inside the wire centre.
2.19 All equipment and connection cable supplied, for e.g., UPS, external bypass,
isolator, rack power distribution bar, connector, UTP cable, Fibre Optics cable
and etc. shall be labelled clearly following NUS labelling standard using durable
labelling material, covering front and rear of the equipment, or near and far end
of the cable.
2.20 One month prior to the completion of the works, the Contractor shall submit to
the satisfaction of the University the following:
(a) Five (5) hard cover bound sets of Comprehensive Operation and
Maintenance Manuals, and Data Sheets published by the
equipment manufacturers
TS/42/33 2602542S/EL
(b) Five (5) hard cover bound sets of "As-Installed" drawings
(c) Five (5) sets of softcopy for Comprehensive Operation and

Maintenance Manuals, and Data Sheets published by the
equipment manufacturers, "As-Installed" drawings in AutoCAD
(latest release), Portable Document Format (PDF) and BIM in
acceptable read-only media like DVD or CD-R
3 NETWORK WIRING REQUIREMENTS
General Requirements
3.1 A star topology shall be proposed for installation of UTP or Fibre Optics cables
from the wire centre to all the information outlets.
3.2 Wherever make economic sense FO cable of the same type and destination
shall be installed as a single bundle instead of multiple bundles with smaller
quantities per bundle.
3.3 The faceplates for the UTP or Fibre information outlets at the user areas shall
be wall-mounted with durable dust proof shutter.
3.4 A transparent plastic label-holder shall be required on the information outlet in

user work area for easy labelling and identification. Labels shall be easily
replaceable from the plastic holder.
3.5 All UTP/Fibre wiring shall be terminated at UTP/Fibre panels in the wire centre
with proper cable organizers. UTP wiring shall be terminated with RJ-45
connectors whereas Fibre wiring shall be terminated with LC connectors
3.6 UTP (RJ45 to RJ45) and fibre (LC to LC) station cords shall be used in Work
Area for cross connecting workstation and information outlets.
3.7 UTP (RJ45 to RJ45) and fibre (LC to LC) patch cords shall be used in the wire
centre for cross connecting and inter-connection of patch panel, fibre
distribution unit and computer equipment.
3.8 The Contractor shall be a certified installer by the manufacturer(s) of the

structured cabling system proposed for the UTP wiring. The same applies to
fibre optic wiring.
different manufacturers for all cables (UTP, Fibre Optics) along the complete
transmission channel.
3.10 All jobs done shall be under one (1) year warranty or more against
manufacturing defects and poor workmanship.
3.11 All UTP information outlets shall be under 15-year warranty or more for system
and applications performance guarantee.
3.12 The Contractor shall supply all necessary station cords, patch cords with 1-
meter to 6-meter length depending on the location of workstation and computer
TS/42/34 2602542S/EL
equipment in each case. The quantity of such station cords, patch cords shall
depend on the total number of UTP/fibre information outlets in the project.
3.13 All patch cords & station cords shall be factory terminated at both ends. Field-
terminated patch cord will not be accepted.
3.14 There shall be no underground cables unless prior approval from NUS
Information Technology is obtained.
3.15 The power and UTP/fibre cables shall be separated horizontally from each other
as much as possible. A typical rack shall have top-entry UTP/fibre cables, and
bottom-entry power cables.
3.16 The quantity of UTP & fibre information outlets, number of backbone fibre cores,
cable routes and size of cable trays, etc. shall be determined on a project basis.
The consultant shall encourage the use of wireless network. As a general
design guideline the number of UTP information outlets installed shall be less
than the number of users expected.
3.17 The samples of all cable components and hardware including labels shall be
submitted to NUS Information Technology for approval before commencing the
job.
3.18 All works related for wire centres, wiring and test results shall be completed and
handed over to NUS Information Technology at least four (4) weeks in advance
before the handing over of building to users. All cable defects shall be cleared
within 1 week from the date of acceptance.
3.19 A detailed design document for the Structured Cabling System shall be
submitted to NUS Information Technology for approval before commencing the
job. The details of the design document shall include:
(a) A soft and hard copy of the layout of the wire centres, rack schematic
diagrams, risers with the cable runs routing, location of the information
outlet points and patch panel configuration;
(b) All the dimension of all devices and equipment proposed;
(c) Details of accommodation requirements including space allocations with

allowance for access for maintenance, floor loading, limitations on the
sitting of individual components in relation to each other, and engineering
storage/work areas;
(d) Sketch diagram for the wiring layout and route;
(e) All structural and electrical requirements indicated.
3.20 Site inspection is required jointly with NUS Information Technology for proper
hand-over for the wire centre and the wiring. Contractor must ensure that all
requirements have been met and completed before calling for inspection. NUS
Information Technology shall not be responsible for the delay in network
provision if it’s due to delay of inspection completion.
TS/42/35 2602542S/EL
3.21 All requests for inspection must be sent through official E-mail.
3.22 The Wire Centre Completion Report (2 hardcopies and 5 softcopy) shall be
submitted to NUS Information Technology upon project completion. The
softcopy shall include all files in their original format (e.g. Visio diagram, JPG
digital images).
3.23 A duplicated copy of all warranty certificates with regards to the Wire Centre
(e.g. warranty for the UPS) shall be submitted to NUS Information Technology in
both hardcopy and scanned format.
3.24 The Contractor is required to update/workout documentation like the Wire

Centre Inventory List, UTP Cable Inventory List, Building F/O Entrance
Schematic and etc.
3.25 The Wire Centre Inventory List document is a central inventory consisting of the
following fields for wire centres:
(a) S/N
(b) Building
(c) Floor
(d) Wire Centre Name
(e) Number of UTP
(f) Number of FO to Main Wire Centre #1
(g) Number of FO to Main Wire Centre #2
(h) Floor Area
(i) UTP Coverage
(j) Incoming Power Capacity
(k) Cooling Capacity
(l) Remark
TS/42/36 2602542S/EL
3.26 The UTP/fibre Cable Inventory List document is a central inventory consisting of
the following fields for wire centres:
(a) Building
(b) Floor
(c) Description & Quantity of Area/Room
(d) Description & Quantity of Equipment (that require power and

UTP/Wireless coverage)
(e) Number of UTP points
(f) Number of Power Points
(g) Number of Wireless AP
(h) Remark
3.27 The Contractor shall ensure observance of the mechanical parameter of the
cable specification, such Minimum Bending Radius, Tensile Strength, etc. to be
within the limit of the specification
3.28 All cable installed shall not have kinks.
3.29 No cable services shall share the same void as a lightning conductor or lift shaft
3.30 Where cables enter ventilation shafts or voids carrying water pipes, they shall
have a fire barrier. Fire barriers shall also be installed whenever cables pass
through 30 –minute fire wall or partitions. When fire stops are damaged during
installation, they shall be replaced.
3.31 All cable ends shall be protected against ingress water and physical damage.
This applies only where external cabling is required.
3.32 For every installed patch panel, there shall be a 1RU plastic cable management
panel install underneath it
3.33 The Contractor shall following the cable management, wiring layout and
labelling conventions from NUS
3.34 The contractor shall ensure tidiness of all working areas, in terms of cable
management as well as general cleanliness, during and after the
implementation phase.
3.35 Attention shall be given to the order in which cables are laid to minimise the
number of crossovers and to maintain a neat and orderly arrangement of
cables.
3.36 The Contractor shall ensure protection of all proposed cables against rodent
attack. The Contractor shall offer all necessary items to provide the protection.
TS/42/37 2602542S/EL
Technical Requirements for UTP
3.37 The UTP wiring, termination and connection shall strictly conform or exceed the
Category 6 transmission requirements in ISO/IEC IS11801, CENELEC EN50173
and EIA/TIA 568A and the respective ratified versions at the time of installation.
In case of conflicting standards, ISO/IEC 11801 shall supersede.
3.38 The CAT6 UTP cable shall have 4 pairs (i.e. 8 wires) of twisted wires with
insulation of PE materials. The UTP cable shall be UL CM rated for horizontal
cable and CMR rated for vertical riser cable. All 4 pairs of cables shall be
terminated. The system shall absolutely avoid any risk of cable pinching, in order
to limit near-end crosstalk at this point. A calibrated spring-and-hook system
should be integrated on the patch panel for retaining each cable to enable an
easy and well-managed system.
3.39 Characteristic Impedance of the CAT6 UTP cable shall be 100 ohms nominal.
Copper conductor shall be AWG24, 0.5mm diameter.
3.40 UTP Cable Jacket shall be of LSHF-FR (Low smoke-Halogen Free-Flame

Retardant) material.
3.41 All CAT6 cable shall have a high grade Polyethylene Central Crosstalk
Cancellation spiral in a form of a cross that maintains constant distance
between all the 4 pairs. This will ensure that even under torsion during
installation, the crosstalk should be constant over the whole cable.
3.42 The CAT6 UTP cable shall conform to Flame retardant test IEC 60332-1 and
IEC 60332-2.
3.43 All UTP Category 6 connections and connecting components must be fully
backward compatible with the existing networking equipment and devices that
are working on the UTP Category 5 cable infrastructure.
3.44 There shall be no performance degradation and reliability issues using the
existing networking equipment and devices with the Category 6 cabling
infrastructure.
3.45 All UTP information outlets shall be terminated with RJ-45 jacks
3.46 At least two UTP information outlets with RJ45 jacks shall be provided for each
wireless base station. Such UTP information outlets shall not be physically
exposed. If the installed UTP information outlet is concealed by false ceiling,
then a red label with the outlet point number shall be provided at the access
panel below the false ceiling for ease of identification.
3.47 The proposed UTP patch panel and cable management panel shall be 1 RU and
19” rack -mountable
TS/42/38 2602542S/EL
Technical Requirements for Fibre Optics
3.48 The fibre wiring shall be of single-mode 9 micron, wavelength 1310nm or

1550nm. All fibre wiring shall be terminated with LC connectors at patch panels
in the wire centre with proper cable organizers. All fibre optics cables shall be
armoured.
3.49 The 1RU Fibre Optic patch panels shall have high density to house up to 24x
Duplex LC Snap-In Adapters (house up to 48x fibre cores) when fully filled. It
shall also be inter-changeable between housing 24 Duplex LC adapters, to 12
Duplex SC adapters, to provide flexibility of connectivity types to use.
3.50 The Fibre Optic patch panel shall be the modular type where the number of
duplex LC Snap-In adapters to be used could be variable depending on the
number of fibre cores being installed, thus prevent wastage.
3.51 The Fibre Optic patch panel shall be designed with a sliding drawer mechanism
enabling front side installation and maintenance work to be carried out without
having to remove the entire panel.
3.52 The Fibre Optic patch panel shall be closed type and shall be metallic in its body
to prevent collection of dust and for better protection of the fibre cables.
3.53 Single-mode fibre shall comply with the Bell core, EIA/TIA & IEEE standards.
3.54 The Contractor shall perform full fibre transmission loss test (using Optical Time
Domain Reflect meter) for all fibre optic cables installed.
3.55 The OTDR used shall be able to provide the following readings:
3.53.1. Start Pulse
3.53.2. Dead Zone
3.53.3. Connector pair
3.53.4. Fusion Splice or Bend Loss
3.53.5. Mechanical Splice
3.53.6. End of fibre
3.53.7. Termination Point
3.53.8. Fibre Break
3.55.9. Cursor and Distance (KM)
3.56 The Contractor shall perform full fibre transmission loss test for all fibre optic
cable installed. NUS acceptable performance criteria are set more stringent as
compared to ISO 11801 standards to ensure consistent quality of systems and
workmanship, as shown below:
TS/42/39 2602542S/EL
Connectivity
FO Cable: Loss / km Loss
Fibre Optic Type 1310 nm 1550 nm (using pigtail
fusion splice)
(in dB)
Single-Mode 0.4 0.25 0.3
3.57 The fibre optic acceptance test shall be based on the following formula:
Acceptable Max Link Loss (dB) = Cable Loss + (Splice Loss x Number of
Splice)
3.58 There shall be no sharing of FO patch panels. For example, a Main Wire Centre
has multiple runs of FO cables pulled from the various Edge Wire Centres within
the same user distribution zone. In this situation, each run of FO cables shall
use a dedicated patch panel for that run. There shall be no sharing even if the
existing patch panels have sufficient space to share.
3.59 The supplier shall comply with the bending radius and pulling strength
requirements of the latest ISO, ANSI and TIA/EIA standards during handling and
installation of FO and copper cables.
3.60 Fibre Optics cables shall be installed to inter-connect the wire centre with a
nearest Main Wire Centre. NUS Information Technology shall be consulted to
identify the nearest Main Wire Centre.
3.61 For every 200 UTP points in the wire centre, the following amount of FO cables
shall be provided from the constructed wire centre to the 2 designated Main
Wire Centres within the same NUSNET user distribution zone.
(a) 24 core single-mode FO in total, with 12 core each running from the
constructed wire centre to one of the two Main Wire Centres via non-
overlapping cable path whenever possible
(b) Such FO cable installation shall be direct-run to the Main Wire Centres
3.62 The proposed fibre route shall be submitted to NUS Information Technology for
endorsement prior to starting work.
3.63 Terminations of fibre optic cable shall be using fusion splicing with LC pigtails.
3.64 The Contractor shall also take care of the protection for these excess fibre optic
cores to retain their usability for future termination work.
TS/42/40 2602542S/EL
4 CABLE SUPPORT SYSTEM
4.1 The building should have two sets of lead-in pipes with vertical risers to
distribute the fibre optic cables into the wire centre in a redundant mode. The
lead-in pipes should have at least 20-meter separation without single point of
failure/overlapping route. Each lead-in pipes shall be connected to one vertical
riser.
4.2 All horizontal wiring must be run on cable trays above the ceiling or below the
raised floor. The cable trays should be installed without blocking the service
access to other equipment or utility. The cable trays shall be run in such a way
that additional wiring in future would not require access to the users' premises.
4.3 The cable trays shall be white in colour. Metal conduits shall painted in white
and labelled.
4.4 The cable trays shall have 50% remaining space allowance for future expansion
on the day of acceptance.
4.5 The cable trays shall be installed with bracket support at every one meter
interval. The label should include at least the following information:
(a) End to end wire centre identification at 3 meter interval
(b) Date of installation
(c) Name of company performing the installation
4.6 Trunkings above ceiling boards shall be comply to specfification in galvanised

steel of 18 gauges with removable cover. All trunkings shall be supported with
suitable mounting brackets or hanging rod that are to be approved by the
Engineer, not exceeding 1 meter apart and anchored to the floor slab above
4.7 Metal conduits or trunkings shall be used between the ceiling board and the
floor. All conduits shall be concealed in the partition, concrete or brickwall.
Where due to site constraints, metal conduits may be mounted on the existing
partition or walls with appropriate wall plugs. All exposed installation shall run
neatly. Where installation work is running in a manner that is not acceptable by
SO or Employer, contractor shall rectify with no cost
4.8 Where trunking passes through walls or partitions, the lid shall be cut both sides
of the obstruction to allow ease of access at later date All penetration shall seal
with fire stop. Where tunking passing from air-conditioning space to non-air-
conditioning space, internal of trunking shall have rockwool of at least 1 meters
both side, and metal conduit junction to fill with rockwool
4.9 Hacking of load bearing walls and other structural changes that affect integrity
shall be kept to a minimum.
4.10 Where hacking of walls is necessary, the Contractor shall either engage a
certified Professional Engineer to approve such works or seek approval from the
site’s architect. The Contractor shall cover additional costs incurred for such
work.
TS/42/41 2602542S/EL
4.11 Prior to such hacking works, the Contractor shall seek written approval from the
relevant department or authorities.
4.12 The Contractor shall touch up and make good any damages in connection to the
cabling installation work.
5 ELECTRICAL & AIR-CONDITIONING
5.1 Power supply to all wire centres should be e-source, i.e., with generator backup.
This includes power supply to the individual air-con units inside the wire centre.
5.2 The power consumption by IT equipment shall be 3 kW (or 4 kVA, assuming 0.8
power efficiency) per rack. Air-conditioning cooling load shall be sized
accordingly. In any one instance, the air-conditioning unit shall not be sized
lower than 24,000 BTU for room size of 3 x 3 meter.
5.3 The 24x7 air-conditioning system shall be capable of achieving operating

temperature: 22 +/- 1 degree C. The room shall be designed to be condensation
free under all operating environment.
5.4 Based on the floor area catered for, the Contractor shall check and ensure
sufficient spare capacity and flexibility has been catered for the provision of wire
centre space, incoming power supply, cooling capacity, etc. to minimise the add-
on modification cost, should additional IT racks become necessary to support
additional demand.
5.5 As a precaution the Contractor shall eliminate the possibility of water dripping /
leakage inside the wire centre.
5.6 There shall be no wet M&E service passing through the wire centre.
5.7 The Contractor shall perform the DB modification with a wall mounted isolator to
interface with the UPS. The Contractor shall also perform the necessary
electrical wiring including trunking, GI conduit pipe, cover, etc. interfacing from
the wall mounted isolator.
5.8 Each rack shall have two (2) rows of 8-way UK 13A 3-pin power bar c/w RCD
(Residual-Current Device) to supply UPS-conditioned power to the rack. Each
power bar shall be connected to the manual bypass switch directly instead of
the UPS.
5.9 The designated RCCB (Residual Current Circuit Breaker) shall be able to take
the surge or current leakage when changing over to UPS, and shall comply with
local code of practice.
5.10 The Manual Bypass Switch shall be of make-before-break type, and shall be
installed in the rack.
5.11 The UPS proposed shall have a battery runtime of at least twenty (20) minutes
based on full load of IT equipment in the wire centre.
TS/42/42 2602542S/EL
5.12 The UPS & Air-Con incoming power supply for Main Wire Centres shall be dual
source to emergency (with generator backup) and normal source. Auto-
Transfer-Switch (ATS) and/or Services Bypass Switch (SBP) shall be deployed
such that upon the failure or deterioration of the normal supply, the wire-centre
UPS & Air-Con will experience no more than one minute power loss without any
human intervention.
5.13 ATS must come with manual bypass in case it fails.
5.14 All ATS, SBP, UPS, etc. must be tested to be fully functional before handing
over to NUS Information Technology. A runtime test and report must be carried
out on the UPS.
5.15 The wire centre shall have a common bonding network such as a signal
reference structure as described in IEEE Standard 1100 for the bonding of IT
equipment. Each rack shall be supplied with its own grounding connection to the
room grounding infrastructure with a minimum of a # 6 AWG copper conductor.
5.16 The proposed air-conditioning system shall be designed in accordance with

N+N redundancy with each unit configured to operate in 12-hour shift mode
automatically. Protective measures shall be taken to ensure at any one time
only up to N units should be running.
5.17 The air-conditioning system shall be linked to central building management

system to automatically notify operation personnel should there be any fault with
any air-conditioning unit or component, or when the room temperature goes
beyond pre-set threshold.
5.18 Thermostats shall be provided for user to adjust the room temperature manually.
A controller shall be in place to reset the temperature back to its design
operating temperature and pre-sets time schedule after 2 hours of manual
setting.
5.19 The consultant is advised to propose any improved solutions in terms of

reliability, economy, effectiveness and efficiency on the provisions stated in the
proposed Wire Centre specifications.
UPS Technical Requirements
5.20 The proposed UPS shall be 5KVA or equivalent in capacity to support up to two
racks’ IT load.
5.21 Each UPS shall be equipped with an external bypass switch via standard based
cee form socket such that the supplied UPS could be replaced or maintained
without causing power disruption to the IT equipment.
5.22 The external bypass switch shall be connected to the Distribution Board via
standard based isolator, wall-mounted preferably. Appropriate electrical wiring
including trunking, metal conduits, cover, clean earth, etc. shall be provided to
interface between the isolator and the external bypass switch.
5.23 The proposed UPS shall be able to support at least one Centralized
Management Software with minimum-ally the following features:
TS/42/43 2602542S/EL
(a) Centralized fault notification of all critical issues of the UPS could be
provided via email/pager or SNMP events.
(b) New UPS could be auto discovered by the Centralized Management

Software.
(c) New UPS could be mass configured together with other existing UPS
managed by the Centralized Management Software.
5.24 Power management software and accessories for the UPS shall be included as
an option.
5.25 The UPS shall automatically affect the continuous supply of electric power to its
load (computers, servers, network equipment and accessories) within specified
tolerances and without interruption upon the failure or deterioration of the normal
A.C. supply even when it is not fully charged.
5.26 The UPS shall be able to protect routers, chassis switches, stackable switches,
hubs, servers and computers.
5.27 The UPS shall maintain a continuous supply of electric power to the load for an
emergency period with the inverter fed by the battery, for up to the specified
maximum time or until restoration of the A.C. supply.
5.28 The UPS shall have support automatic bypass in the event of a UPS system
malfunction whereby the load shall be automatically transferred to the bypass
source through the static bypass switch without any interruption to the supply to
the load. At the same time, an audible alarm, together with an appropriate
visible alarm indication shall be activated.
5.29 The UPS shall be able to recharge itself while supplying power to the protected
network equipment.
5.30 The UPS shall have built-in self-protection for the connected equipment against
over-voltage, power line surges, under-voltage, and over-current introduced by
the primary A.C. source, as well as over-voltage and voltage surges introduced
at the output terminals by paralleled sources, load switching and circuit breaker
operation in the distribution system
5.31 The UPS shall also be self-protected against sudden changes in the output load
and short circuits at the output terminals.
5.32 The UPS shall not incur permanent damage to itself and the connected load
under all predictable types of failure conditions within itself and the connected
load.
5.33 The UPS shall have EMF/RFI filter to prevent line noise from causing data
errors to the connected equipment.
5.34 The UPS shall be integrated with existing IT fault management system for fault
management purpose. Minimally the integration shall be done such that IT fault
management system would have sufficient information to relate incidents and
generate alarms similar to “UPS-<ABC> at <LOCATION> switched to battery
mode at <DD-MMM-YY hh:mm> recovered at <DD-MMM-YY hh:mm>”.
TS/42/44 2602542S/EL
5.35 The UPS shall provide configurable alarms alerts for the following fault
conditions:
(a) Overload
(b) Overload shutdown
(c) Equipment over-temperature
(d) Low battery voltage
(e) Battery Degrade
(f) Input power failure
(g) Inverter output over-voltage / under-voltage
(h) Static bypass inhibited (visual indication only)
5.36 The UPS must be capable of monitoring power failure, room temperature and
humidity.
5.37 The UPS shall support the following alert mechanism:
(a) SNMP v2c or higher
5.38 The UPS shall operate continuously at temperatures from 0 deg. C to 40 deg. C,
and relative humidity between 0% and 90% non-condensing.
5.39 The UPS shall be manageable via a secured Web browser (HTTPS) or SNMP
(ver2c or higher) over the network, providing power monitoring and control. It
shall support remote reboot via these tools. It shall allow a common
configuration file to be downloaded.
5.40 The UPS shall have the capability to send snmp traps to a network management
system.
5.41 The UPS shall provide “easy-to-read” front panel LED information display.
5.42 The UPS shall have the facility to perform self-test on the UPS system through
software or via manual buttons.
5.43 The UPS shall come with a 1-year maintenance contract with 24X7X4 response
time, with all parts and labour inclusive. The maintenance contract shall be
activated prior to handing over to NUS Information Technology. Fault reporting
information (such as service centre contact number) shall be furnished together
with the maintenance contract.
TS/42/45 2602542S/EL
6 WIRE-CENTRE LAYOUT & LABELLING CONVENTION
6.1 A new wire centre must have at least two standard 19” equipment racks
positioned against the inner side of the wall. Below is an illustrative diagram of
the layout.
6.2 Front and rear of each rack must have 800 mm access clearance for IT
equipment servicing.
6.3 Minimum 1.2 meter space between adjacent racks shall be catered if the racks
inside need to be arranged into multiple rows.
6.4 The label for fibre optics panel must clearly state the source and destination
wire centres followed by a unique running sequence number for each core of
fibre. A sample is shown below:
S IN G L E MO D E F IB R E C A B L E S F R O M A S 3 - 0 3 - C N T T O A S 1 - 0 3 - C N T 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
6.5 The label of each port on the UTP patch panel should be identified by a unique
running sequence number for each wire centre. There shall be no duplication to
this unique port identifier in each wire centre.
TS/42/46 2602542S/EL
6.6 Sample wire centre signage must be submitted to NUS Information Technology
for approval before installation. The wire centre signage must be labelled as
shown below:

AS3-03-CNT
AS3 refers to block no. of the building, 03

refers to the level,
CNT refers to NUS Information Technology Network. If there is more than one wire
centre in the same level, the next wire centre shall be known as CNT2. The first one,
shall still be named as CNT
6.7 The wire centre signage shall be of size 6 cm (W) x 20 cm (L) with the room number.
6.8 The label for each information outlet must indicate clearly which wire centre the
information outlet connects to. Each information outlet is identified by a unique
information-outlet-number, which corresponds to the running sequence number at the
wire centre patch panel. Sample label must be submitted to NUS Information
Technology for approval before installation. Shown below is a typical information outlet
label at the user work area:
AS3-03-W / 105
AS3-03-W refers to the name of wire centre connects to the information outlet,
replace -CNT inside the wire centre name with -W
6.9 Sample of summary report of fibre and UTP test results are attached as Appendix A and
B respectively.
TS/42/47 2602542S/EL
6 APPENDIX A: SAMPLE FIBRE TEST RESULT
ABC Company Pte Ltd
Date :
Faculty : Engineering
Cable : Single-Mode Fibre
ZONE :AKIENG TOTAL FIBER CORES : 12 CORES
TOTAL TERMINATED : 12 CORES
A B C D E F G H I
Splice PASSED
Actual Actual Loss(db) Acceptable =
fibre fibre SPEC: x No of maximum (D) ≤ (H)
Core loss distance fibre loss splice link FAILED =
From To ID (db) (km) 0.5db/Km 0.3x2=0.6 loss(db) : (D) > (H)
E2-02-CNTE3-05-CNT 01 0.56 0.14 0.07 0.6 0.67 Passed

E2-02-CNTE3-05-CNT 02 0.60 0.14 0.07 0.6 0.67 Passed
E2-02-CNTE3-05-CNT 03 0.36 0.139 0.0695 0.6 0.6695 Passed
E2-02-CNTE3-05-CNT 04 0.40 0.139 0.0695 0.6 0.6695 Passed
E2-02-CNTE3-05-CNT 05 0.38 0.139 0.0695 0.6 0.6695 Passed
E2-02-CNTE3-05-CNT 06 0.30 0.139 0.0695 0.6 0.6695 Passed
E2-02-CNTE3-05-CNT 07 0.53 0.139 0.0695 0.6 0.6695 Passed
E2-02-CNTE3-05-CNT 08 0.32 0.139 0.0695 0.6 0.6695 Passed
E2-02-CNTE3-05-CNT 09 0.27 0.14 0.07 0.6 0.67 Passed
E2-02-CNTE3-05-CNT 10 0.39 0.14 0.07 0.6 0.67 Passed
TS/42/48 2602542S/EL
APPENDIX B: SAMPLE UTP TEST RESULT
ABC Company Pte Ltd

Faculty :Engineering Date :
Wire centre :E4-05-CNT Cable : UTP CAT 6
Location / Room
Cable No Length (m) Results Remarks
ID
01 E4-06-09 39 PASSED
02 E4-06-08 44 PASSED
03 E4-06-06 36 PASSED
04 E4-06-07 42 PASSED
05 E4-06-04 47 PASSED
06 E4-06-03 43 PASSED
07 E4-06-11 50 PASSED
08 E4-06-12 54 PASSED
09 E4-06-18 53 PASSED
10 E4-06-17 62 PASSED
11 E4-06-16 68 PASSED
12 E4-06-23 67 PASSED
13 E4-06-10 70 PASSED
14 E4-06-01 73 PASSED
15 E4-06-20 53 PASSED
16 E4-06-35 54 PASSED
17 E4-06-33 57 PASSED
18 E4-06-31 55 PASSED
19 E4-06-30 62 PASSED
20 E4-06-03 40 PASSED
21 E4-05-02 44 PASSED
22 E4-05-07 41 PASSED
23 E4-05-08 43 PASSED
24 E4-05-09 47 PASSED
25 E4-05-10 42 PASSED
26 E4-05-11 41 PASSED
27 E4-05-12 40 PASSED
28 E4-05-14 47 PASSED
29 E4-05-18 42 PASSED
30 E4-05-19 48 PASSED
31 E4-05-20 43 PASSED
32 E4-04-02 85 PASSED
33 E4-04-01 86 PASSED
34 E4-04-05 87 PASSED
35 E4-04-02 83 PASSED
36 E4-04-07 82 PASSED
37 E4-04-08 87 PASSED
38 E4-04-03 89 PASSED
39 E4-04-08 86 PASSED
40 E4-04-02 83 PASSED
41 E4-04-06 89 PASSED
42 E4-04-10 90 PASSED
43 E4-04-11 83 PASSED
44 E4-04-12 80 PASSED
TS/42/49 2602542S/EL
7 APPENDIX C: SAMPLE RACK PANEL LAYOUT
TS/42/50 2602542S/EL
8 APPENDIX D: SAMPLE REDUNDANT PATH FOR FO CABLE
ROUTE
TS/42/51 2602542S/EL
9 APPENDIX E: SAMPLE UPS ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
TS/42/52 2602542S/EL
10 APPENDIX F: WIRE CENTRE TAKEOVER CHECKLIST
WIRECENTRE TAKEOVER CHECKLIST
Wire centre NO:

Resident Technical Officer:
M&E Consultant:
S/N Requirements Description Result Remarks
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 This document defines the standard M&E requirements for
a typical wire centre in NUS campus providing computer NA
network & IP phone connectivity to users via UTP
(Unshielded-Twisted-Pairs) or fibre cabling.
1.2 Main Wire Centres normally have slightly higher
requirements on M&E provision. NUS Information
Technology shall be consulted to identify the Main Wire NA
Centres (if any) and to confirm the M&E requirements
together with the Consultant.
1.3 NUS Information Technology shall be consulted for any
deviation to the requirements defined in this document. NA
1.4 NUS Information Technology will make use of the Wire

Centre Takeover Checklist (refer to this document) on the
acceptance of the wire centre. NA
2 SPACE, LOCATION, ACCESS AND GENERAL

REQUIREMENTS
2.1 The floor area shall be of minimum size 3 x 3 square meters
clear internal for a maximum of 400 UTP points. Any
exceeding 400 UTP points shall require an increase of
physical space by 2 x 2 square meters to cater for the
increase of racks.
2.2 Two 19" equipment racks of 45u (H) x 800 mm (W) x 800
mm (D) per wire centre for a maximum of 400 UTP points
are required. Two additional racks are needed if the total
UTP points exceeded 400. These equipment racks shall
only be used to house IT equipment and cables (UTP &
Fibre) inclusive panel, excluding M&E facilities like DB,
UPS, Bypass panel, etc.
2.3 The equipment rack shall be of solid built, good quality and
equipped with top cover, removable side cover, lock and
key, 5 x 550 mm metal trays, 50 sets cape nuts and bolts,
cable trays on both sides and cable entries at the top and
base.
2.4 The equipment rack shall come without front and rear
doors.
TS/42/53 2602542S/EL
The equipment rack shall come completed with cable

2.5
management rings installed at the back of the rack to
facilitate cross-rack horizontal patching.
2.6 All supplied racks shall be completed with UPS and both
vertical and horizontal cable management guide (refer to
Appendix E).
2.7 The wire centre shall be centrally located in the building

such that the wiring for all UTP Category 6 network
information outlets are within the limit of 90 meters from
the wire centre, excluding the patch cords and station cords
required for the completeness of the communication
channel.
2.8 The wire centre shall also be placed in locations where the
University could easily add additional UTP points anywhere
within the building, without exceeding the maximum UTP
transmission channel distance limit (100 meter).
2.9 If the wire centre need to be placed near water source (e.g.
pantry, wash rooms, etc) the consultant shall ensure
sufficient insulation and protection has been put in place to
prevent water leakage into the wire centre
2.10 The wire centre shall not be located near A.H.U or high-
tension voltage cable / riser.
2.11 The wire centre shall be accessible 24x7 to authorized NUS

NUS Information Technology personnel or appointed
vendors through the NUS contact-less smartcard based
door access control system with fail-secure setting.
2.12 The wire centre shall be equipped with class ABC fire
extinguisher that would not leave residue to create
possible corrosion after being used. Pipes contained water
shall be prohibited in Wire Centre. If it is unavoidable in
sprinklered buildings, pre-action sprinkler system should be
considered as alternatives to replace the wet sprinkler
system
2.13 There shall be raised floor of 15 cm high.
2.14 The wire centre shall have a wall-mounted board indicating

the maximum floor loading within the wire centre.
2.15 The wire centre shall be clearly labelled as "Computer Wire

Centre" of size 6 cm (W) x 20 cm (L) with the room
number.
TS/42/54 2602542S/EL
2.16 There shall be a dedicated, conveniently accessible riser of

size 0.5 m (D) x 1.0 m (W) for computer wiring. The size
of the riser shall cater for growth for the requirement of
additional network information outlets in future. The riser
shall be clearly labelled as "Computer Riser". All floor/slab
opening in the rise shall have 50% remaining space
allowance to allow for future expansion on the day of
acceptance.
2.17 All wire centres in the same building shall share the same
riser and be aligned at the same vertical location at
different levels.
2.18 Relevant floor plan, architectural design and sketch

diagrams of the wire centres shall be submitted to NUS
Information Technology for approval at least one week
before publishing the tender.
2.19 The consultant must make sure sufficient floor loading has
been catered to host all equipments, racks, cables, UPS,
etc inside the wire centre.
2.20 All equipment and connection cable supplied, for e.g., UPS,
external bypass, isolator, rack power distribution bar,
connector, UTP cable, Fibre Optics cable and etc shall be
labelled clearly following NUS labelling standard using
durable labelling material, covering front and rear of the
equipment, or near and far end of the cable.
One month prior to the completion of the works, the

2.21 Contractor shall submit to the satisfaction of the University
the following:
three (3) hard cover bound sets of Comprehensive

2.22
Operation and Maintenance Manuals, and Data Sheets
published by the equipment manufacturers;
(a) three (3) hard cover bound sets of "As-Installed"
drawings;
(b) one (1) set of "As-Installed" drawings in polyester film

transparency (intermedites); and
two (2) sets of "As-Installed" drawings in AutoCad (latest

(c)
release) in CD-R media disks and subjected to the
acceptance of the University
TS/42/55 2602542S/EL
NETWORK WIRING REQUIREMENTS
3 General Requirements
3.1 A star topology shall be proposed for installation of UTP or

Fibre Optics cables from the wire centre to all the
information outlets.
3.2 Fibre Optics cables shall be installed to inter-connect the
wire centre with a nearest Main Wire Centre. NUS
Information Technology shall be consulted to identify the
nearest Main Wire Centre.
3.3 For every 200 UTP points in the wire centre, the following
amount of FO cables shall be provided from the
constructed wire centre to the 2 designated Main Wire
Centres within the same NUSNET user distribution zone.
(a) 24 core single-mode FO in total, with 12 core each running

from the constructed wire centre to one of the two Main
Wire Centres via non-overlapping cable path whenever
possible
(b) Such FO cable installation shall be direct-run to the Main

Wire Centres
3.4 The building should have two sets of lead-in pipes with
vertical risers to distribute the fibre optic cables into the
wire centre in a redundant mode. The lead-in pipes should
have at least 20-meter separation without single point of
failure/overlapping route. Each lead-in pipes shall be
connected to one vertical riser.
3.5 The proposed fibre route shall be submitted to Computer
Centre for endorsement prior to starting work.
3.6 Wherever make economical sense FO cable of the same
type and destination shall be installed as a single bundle
instead of multiple bundles with smaller quantities per
bundle.
3.7 The faceplates for the UTP or Fibre information outlets at
the user areas shall be wall-mounted with durable dust
proof shutter.
3.8 A transparent plastic label-holder shall be required on the

information outlet in user work area for easy labelling and
identification. Labels shall be easily replaceable from the
plastic holder.
3.9 All UTP information outlets shall be terminated with RJ-45

jacks
3.10 Terminations of fibre optic cable shall be using fusion

splicing with LC pigtails.
TS/42/56 2602542S/EL
3.11 All UTP/Fibre wiring shall be terminated at UTP/Fibre

panels in the wire centre with proper cable organizers. UTP
wiring shall be terminated with RJ-45 connectors whereas
Fibre wiring shall be terminated with LC connectors
3.12 UTP (RJ45 to RJ45) and fibre (LC to LC) station cords shall
be used in Work Area for cross connecting workstation and
information outlets.
3.13 UTP (RJ45 to RJ45) and fibre (LC to LC) patch cords shall
be used in the wire centre for cross connecting and inter-
connection of patch panel, fibre distribution unit and
computer equipments.
3.14 At least two UTP information outlets with RJ45 jacks shall
be provided for each wireless base station. Such UTP
information outlets shall not be physically exposed. If the
installed UTP information outlet is concealed by false
ceiling, then a red label with the outlet point number shall
be provided at the access panel below the false ceiling for
ease of identification.
3.15 The Contractor shall be a certified installer by the
manufacturer(s) of the structured cabling system proposed
for the UTP wiring. The same applies to fibre optic wiring.
3.16 There shall be no mix and match of cables and connecting

components from different manufacturers for all cables
(UTP, Fibre Optics) along the complete transmission
channel.
3.17 All jobs done shall be under one (1) year warranty or more
against manufacturing defects and poor workmanship.
3.18 All UTP information outlets shall be under 15-year

warranty or more for system and applications performance
guarantee.
3.19 The Contractor shall supply all necessary station cords,

patch cords with 1-meter to 6-meter length depending on
the location of workstation and computer equipments in
each case. The quantity of such station cords, patch cords
shall depend on the total number of UTP/fibre information
outlets in the project.
3.20 All patch cords & station cords shall be factory terminated
at both ends. Field-terminated patch cord will not be
accepted.
TS/42/57 2602542S/EL
3.21 All horizontal wiring must be run on cable trays above the
ceiling or below the raised floor. The cable trays should be
installed without blocking the service access to other
equipment or utility. The cable trays shall be run in such a
way that additional wiring in future would not require
access to the users' premises.
3.22 The cable trays shall be white in colour.
3.23 The cable trays shall have 50% remaining space allowance
for future expansion on the day of acceptance.
3.24 The cable trays shall be installed with bracket support at

every one meter interval. The label should include at
least the following information:
(a) End to end wire centre identification
(b) Date of installation
(c) Name of company performing the installation
3.25 There shall be no underground cables unless prior approval

from NUS Information Technology is obtained.
3.26 The power and UTP cables shall be separated horizontally

from each other as much as possible. A typical rack shall
have top-entry UTP cables, and bottom-entry power
cables.
3.27 The quantity of UTP & fibre information outlets, number of

backbone fibre cores, cable routes and size of cable trays,
etc. shall be determined on a project basis. The consultant
shall encourage the use of wireless network. As a general
design guideline the number of UTP information outlets
installed shall be less than the number of users expected.
3.28 The samples of all cable components and hardware

including labels shall be submitted to NUS Information
Technology for approval before commencing the job.
3.29 Jobs for wire centres, wiring and test results shall be
completed and handed over to NUS Information
Technology at least four (4) weeks in advance before the
handing over of building to users. All cable defects shall be
cleared within 1 week from the date of acceptance.
3.30 A detailed design document for the Structured Cabling
System shall be submitted to NUS Information
Technology for approval before commencing the job.
The details of the design document shall include:
(a) A soft and hard copy of the layout of the wire centres, rack
schematic diagrams, risers with the cable runs routing,
location of the information outlet points and patch panel
configuration;
(b) All the dimension of all devices and equipment proposed;
TS/42/58 2602542S/EL
(c) Details of accommodation requirements including space

allocations with allowance for access for maintenance, floor
loading, limitations on the sitting of individual components
in relation to each other, and engineering storage/work
areas;
(d) Sketch diagram for the wiring layout and route;

(e) All structural and electrical requirements indicated.
3.31 Site inspection is required jointly with NUS Information
Technology for proper hand-over for the wire centre and
the wiring. Consultant must ensure that all requirements
have been met and completed before calling for inspection.
NUS Information Technology shall not be responsible for
the delay in network provision if it's due to delay of
inspection completion.
3.32 All requests for inspection must be sent through official E-
mail.
3.33 The Wire Centre Completion Report (2 hardcopies and 1
softcopy) shall be submitted to NUS Information
Technology upon project completion. The softcopy shall
include all files in their original format (e.g. Visio
diagram, JPG digital images).
3.34 A duplicated copy of all warranty certificates with regards
to the Wire Centre (e.g. warranty for the UPS) shall
be submitted to NUS Information Technology in both
hardcopy and scanned format.
3.35 The Contractor is required to update/workout
documentation like the Wire Centre Inventory List, UTP
Cable Inventory List, Building F/O Entrance Schematic and
etc.
3.36 The Wire Centre Inventory List document is a central
inventory consisting of the following fields for wire centres:
(a) S/N
(b) Building
(c) Floor
(d) Wire Centre Name
(e) Number of UTP
(f) Number of FO to Main Wire Centre #1
(g) Number of FO to Main Wire Centre#2
(h) Floor Area
(i) UTP Coverage
(j) Incoming Power Capacity
(k) Cooling Capacity
(l) Remark
TS/42/59 2602542S/EL
3.37 The UTP Cable Inventory List document is a central
inventory consisting of the following fields for wire
centres:
(a) Building
(b) Floor
(c) Description & Quantity of Area/Room
(d) Description & Quantity of Equipment (that require
power and UTP/Wireless coverage)
(e) Number of UTP points
(f) Number of Power Points
(g) Number of Wireless AP
(g) Remark
Technical Requirements for UTP
3.38 The UTP wiring, termination and connection shall strictly

conform or exceed the Category 6 transmission
requirements in ISO/IEC IS11801, CENELEC EN50173
and EIA/TIA 568A and the respective ratified versions at
the time of installation. In case of conflicting standards,
ISO/IEC 11801 shall supersede.
3.39 The CAT6 UTP cable shall have 4 pairs (i.e. 8 wires) of
twisted wires with insulation of PE materials. The UTP
cable shall be UL CM rated for horizontal cable and
CMR rated for vertical riser cable. All 4 pairs of cables
shall be terminated. The system shall absolutely avoid
any risk of cable pinching, in order to limit near-end
crosstalk at this point. A calibrated spring-and-hook
system should be integrated on the patch panel for
retaining each cable to enable an easy and well-
managed system.
3.40 Characteristic Impedance of the CAT6 UTP cable shall be

100 ohms nominal. Copper conductor shall be AWG24,
0.5mm diameter.
3.41 UTP Cable Jacket shall be of LSHF-FR (Low smoke-

Halogen Free-Flame Retardant) material.
3.42 All CAT6 cable shall have a high grade Polyethylene

Central Crosstalk Cancellation spiral in a form of a cross
that maintains constant distance between all the 4 pairs.
This will ensure that even under torsion during
installation, the crosstalk should be constant over the
whole cable.
TS/42/60 2602542S/EL
3.43 The CAT6 UTP cable shall conform to Flame retardant

test IEC 60332-1 and IEC 60332-2.
3.44 All UTP Category 6 connections and connecting

components must be fully backward compatible with the
existing networking equipment and devices that are
working on the UTP Category 5 cable infrastructure.
3.45 There shall be no performance degradation and

reliability issues using the existing networking
equipment and devices with the Category 6 cabling
infrastructure.
Technical Requirements for Fibre Optics
3.46 The fibre wiring shall be of single-mode 9 micron,

wavelength 1310nm or 1550nm. All fibre wiring shall
be terminated with LC connectors at patch panels in the
wire centre with proper cable organizers. All fibre
optics cables shall be armoured.
3.47 The 1RU Fibre Optic patch panels shall have high density
to house up to 24x Duplex LC Snap-In Adapters (house
up to 48x fibre cores) when fully filled. It shall also be
interchangeable between housing 24 Duplex LC
adapters, to 12 Duplex SC adapters, to provide flexibility
of connectivity types to use.
3.48 The Fibre Optic patch panel shall be the modular type
where the number of duplex LC Snap-In adapters to
be used could be variable depending on the number of
fibre cores being installed, thus prevent wastage.
3.49 The Fibre Optic patch panel shall be designed with a sliding
drawer mechanism enabling front side installation
and maintenance work to be carried out without
having to remove the entire panel.
3.50 The Fibre Optic patch panel shall be closed type and
shall be metallic in its body to prevent collection of dust
and for better protection of the fibre cables.
3.51 Single-mode fibre shall comply with the Bellcore,
EIA/TIA
& IEEE standards.
TS/42/61 2602542S/EL
3.52 The Contractor shall perform full fibre transmission loss

test for all fibre optic cable installed. NUS acceptable
performance criteria are set more stringent as compared
to ISO 11801 standards to ensure consistent quality of
systems and workmanship. For single mode fibre optic
cables, the connectivity loss (using pigtail fusion splice)
shall not be more than 0.3.
3.53 The fibre optic acceptance test shall be based on the

following formula:
Acceptable Max Link Loss (dB) = Cable Loss + (Splice Loss

x Number of Splice)
3.54 There shall be no sharing of FO patch panels. For example,

a Main Wire Centre has multiple runs of FO cables pulled
from the various Edge Wire Centres within the same user
distribution zone. In this situation, each run of FO cables
shall use a dedicated patch panel for that run. There shall
be no sharing even if the existing patch panels have
sufficient space to share.
3.55 The supplier shall comply with the bending radius and
pulling strength requirements of the latest ISO, ANSI and
TIA/EIA standards during handling and installation of FO
and copper cables.
4 ELECTRICAL & AIR-CONDITIONING

4.1 Power supply to all wire centres should be e-source, i.e.,
with generator backup. This includes power supply to the
individual air-con units inside the wire centre.
4.2 The power consumption by IT equipments shall be 3 kW (or

4 kVA, assuming 0.8 power efficiency) per rack. Air-
conditioning cooling load shall be sized accordingly. In any
one instance, the air-conditioning unit shall not be sized
lower than 24,000 BTU for room size of 3 x 3 meter.
4.3 The 24x7 air-conditioning system shall be capable of

achieving operating temperature: 22 +/- 1 degree C. The
room shall be designed to be condensation free under all
operating environment.
TS/42/62 2602542S/EL
4.4 Based on the floor area catered for, the Consultant shall
ensure sufficient spare capacity and flexibility has been
catered for the provision of wire centre space, incoming
power supply, cooling capacity, etc. to minimise the add-
on modification cost, should additional IT racks become
necessary to support additional demand
4.5 As a precaution the Consultant shall eliminate the

possibility of water dripping / leakage inside the wire
centre.
4.6 There shall be no wet M&E service passing through the
wire centre.
4.7 The Contractor shall perform the DB modification with a

wall mounted isolator to interface with the UPS. The
Contractor shall also perform the necessary electrical
wiring including trunking, PVC pipe, cover, etc interfacing
from the wall mounted isolator.
4.8 Each rack shall have two (2) rows of 8-way UK 13A 3-pin
power bar c/w RCD (Residual-Current Device) to supply
UPS-conditioned power to the rack. Each power bar shall be
connected to the manual bypass switch directly instead of
the UPS.
4.9 The designated RCCB (Residual Current Circuit Breaker)
shall be able to take the surge or current leakage when
changing over to UPS, and shall comply with local code of
practice.
4.10 The Manual Bypass Switch shall be of make-before-break

type, and shall be installed in the rack.
4.11 The UPS proposed shall have a battery runtime of at least

1 hr based on full load of IT equipments in the wire centre.
4.12 The UPS & Air-Con incoming power supply for Main Wire
Centres shall be dual source to emergency (with generator
backup) and normal source. Auto-Transfer-Switch (ATS)
and/or Services Bypass Switch (SBP) shall be deployed
such that upon the failure or deterioration of the normal
supply, the wire-centre UPS & Air-Con will experience no
more than one minute power loss without any human
intervention.
4.13 ATS must come with manual bypass in case it fails.
4.14 All ATS, SBP and UPS etc must be tested to be fully
functional before handing over to NUS Information
Technology. A runtime test and report must be carried
out on the UPS.
TS/42/63 2602542S/EL
4.15 The wire centre shall have a common bonding network

such as a signal reference structure as described in IEEE
Standard 1100 for the bonding of IT equipments. Each
rack shall be supplied with its own grounding connection to
the room grounding infrastructure with a minimum of a #
6 AWG copper conductor.
4.16 The proposed air-conditioning system shall be designed in

accordance with N+N redundancy with each unit
configured to operate in 12-hour shift mode automatically.
Protective measures shall be taken to ensure at any one
time only up to N units should be running.
4.17 The air-conditioning system shall be linked to central

building management system to automatically notify
operation personnel should there be any fault with any air-
conditioning unit or component, or when the room
temperature goes beyond preset threshold.
4.18 Thermostats shall be provided for user to adjust the room

temperature manually. A controller shall be in place to
reset the temperature back to its design operating
temperature and preset time schedule after 2 hours of
manual setting.
4.19 The consultant is advised to propose any improved
solutions in terms of reliability, economy, effectiveness and
efficiency on the provisions stated in the proposed Wire
Centre specifications.
UPS Technical Requirements
4.20 The proposed UPS shall be 5KVA or equivalent in capacity

to support up to two racks' IT load.
4.21 Each UPS shall be equipped with an external bypass switch

via standard based cee form socket such that the supplied
UPS could be replaced or maintained without causing
power disruption to the IT equipment.
4.22 The external bypass switch shall be connected to the

Distribution Board via standard based isolator, wall-
mounted preferably. Appropriate electrical wiring including
trunking, GI conduits pipe, cover, clean earth and etc shall
be provided to interface between the isolator and the
external bypass switch.
TS/42/64 2602542S/EL
4.23 The proposed UPS shall be able to support at least

one Centralized Management Software with minimum-
ally the following features:
(a) Centralized fault notification of all critical issues of the
UPS could be provided via email/pager or SNMP
events.
(b) New UPS could be auto discovered by the Centralized
Management Software.
(c) New UPS could be mass configured together with
other existing UPS managed by the Centralized
Management
4.24 Software.
Power management software and accessories for the
UPS shall be included as an option.
4.25 The UPS shall automatically affect the continuous

supply of electric power to its load (computers,
servers, network equipment and accessories) within
specified tolerances and without interruption upon the
failure or deterioration of the normal A.C. supply even
when it is not fully charged.
4.26 The UPS shall be able to protect routers, chassis

switches, stackable switches, hubs, servers and
computers.
4.27 The UPS shall maintain a continuous supply of electric

power to the load for an emergency period with
the inverter fed by the battery, for up to the
specified maximum time or until restoration of
the A.C. supply.
4.28 The UPS shall have support automatic bypass in the

event of a UPS system malfunction whereby the load
shall be automatically transferred to the bypass source
through the static bypass switch without any
interruption to the supply to the load. At the same
time, an audible alarm, together with an appropriate
visible alarm indication shall be activated.
4.29 The UPS shall be able to recharge itself while

supplying power to the protected network equipment
4.30 The UPS shall have built-in self-protection for the

connected equipments against over-voltage, power
line surges, under-voltage, and over-current
introduced by the primary A.C. source, as well as
over-voltage and voltage surges introduced at the
output terminals by paralleled sources, load switching
and circuit breaker operation in the distribution system
TS/42/65 2602542S/EL
4.31 The UPS shall also be self-protected against sudden

changes in the output load and short circuits at
the output terminals.
4.32 The UPS shall not incur permanent damage to

itself and the connected load under all predictable
types of failure conditions within itself and the
connected load.
4.33 The UPS shall have EMF/RFI filter to prevent line
noise from causing data errors to the connected
equipments.
4.34 The UPS shall be integrated with existing IT fault

management system for fault management purpose.
Minimally the integration shall be done such that IT
fault management system would have sufficient
information to relate incidents and generate alarms
similar to "UPS- <ABC> at <LOCATION> switched
to battery mode at <DD- MMM-YY hh:mm>
recovered at <DD-MMM-YY hh:mm>".
4.35 The UPS shall provide configurable alarms alerts for

the following fault conditions:
(a) Overload
(b) Overload shutdown
(c) Equipment over-temperature
(d) Low battery voltage
(e) Battery Degrade
(f) Input power failure
(g) Inverter output over-voltage / under-voltage
(h) Static bypass inhibited (visual indication only)
4.36 The UPS must be capable of monitoring power failure,

room temperature and humidity.
4.37 The UPS shall support the following alert mechanism:
(a) SNMP v2c or higher
4.38 The UPS shall operate continuously at temperatures

from 0 deg. C to 40 deg. C, and relative humidity
between 0%
4.39 and 90%
The non-condensing.
UPS shall be manageable via a secured Web
browser (HTTPS) or SNMP (ver2c or higher) over
the network, providing power monitoring and
control. It shall also be remotely rebootable via
these tools. It shall allow a common configuration
file to be downloaded.
TS/42/66 2602542S/EL
4.40 The UPS shall have the capability to send snmp traps to
a network management system.
4.41 The UPS shall provide "easy-to-read" front panel LED

information display.
4.42 The UPS shall have the facility to perform self-test on

the UPS system through software or via manual
buttons.
4.43 The UPS shall come with a 1-year maintenance

contract with 24X7X4 response time, with all parts
and labour inclusive. The maintenance contract shall
be activated prior to handing over to NUS
Information Technology. Fault reporting information
(such as service centre contact number) shall be
furnished together with the maintenance contract.
5 WIRE-CENTRE LAYOUT & LABELLING

5.1 CONVENTION
A new wire centre must have at least two standard
19" equipment racks positioned against the inner
side of the wall. Below is an illustrative diagram of
the layout.
5.2 Front and rear of each rack must have 800 mm access
clearance for IT equipment servicing.
TS/42/67 2602542S/EL
5.3 Minimum 1.2 meter space between adjacent racks shall
be catered if the racks inside need to be arranged into
multiple rows.
5.4 The label for fibre optics panel must clearly state the
source and destination wire centres followed by a
unique running sequence number for each core of fibre.
A sample is shown below:
5.5 The label of each port on the UTP patch panel should
be identified by a unique running sequence number for
each wire centre. There shall be no duplication to this
unique port identifier in each wire centre.
5.6 The label for each information outlet must indicate
clearly which wire centre the information outlet
connects to. Each information outlet is identified by a
unique information- outlet-number, which corresponds
to the running sequence number at the wire centre
patch panel. Sample label must be submitted to NUS
Information Technology for approval before installation.
Shown below is a typical information outlet label at the
user work area:
AS3-03-W / 105
AS3 refers to block no. of the building,

03 refers to the level,
W refers to NUS Information Technology Network.
5.7 Sample wire centre signage must be submitted to

NUS Information Technology for approval before
installation. The wire centre signage must be labelled
as shown below:

AS3-03-CNT
AS3 refers to block no. of the building,

03 refers to the level,
CNT refers to NUS Information Technology Network. If
there is more than one wire centre in the same block,
the next wire centre shall be known as CNT2.
5.8 Sample of summary report of fibre and UTP test results

are attached as Appendix A and B respectively.
TS/42/68 2602542S/EL
S/N Requirements Description Result Remark
s
6 DOCUMENTATION
6.1 Rack Design layout
MDF, IDF and other Telcom closet cable routing and
6.2 layout
6.3 Information outlet ( in end user area) layout and plan
6.4 LAN distribution table
6.5 UTP/FO cable route plan
6.6 PE Certification Report
(Penetration, Clean Ground)
6.7 Calibration Certificate
(Accredited independent test laboratory not affiliated with
the tester’s manufacturer)
6.8 Specification of Cable

(NVP, Refraction Index, attenuation from
cable manufacturer)
6.9 UTP Summary Report
(Cable ID, Date/Time, Site, Length, Headroom, Summary)
6.10 Detailed Cable Test Report

( ISO/IEC 11801 -Wire Map, Impedance, Resistance,
Attenuation, Return loss, NEXT, NEXT @ Remote,
ACR, ACR @ Remote)
6.11 Detailed Fiber Optic Test Report

( OTDR EIA 526-14 – Power Loss, Splice, distance,
bandwidth at 850nm/1300nm MM and/or
1310nm/1550nm SM )
6.12 Sampling Test Result

(After sampling test)
6.13 List of Exceptions
(Converted Media, Network equipment with > 5
cascaded switches)
Signed & Stamped Maintenance Cert of

6.14 equipment/cables handed over to NUS Information
Technology :
1. Equip S/N, location,
2. Maintenance coverage Start/End date, Service Level
(response/resolution time, 24x7/8x5)
3. Support Hotline number
TS/42/69 2602542S/EL
7 SIGNED-OFF
Checked by:
Date :
Signature:
Verified by:
Date :
Signature:
TS/42/70 2602542S/EL
SECTION 43 - FANS
1 GENERAL
1.1 The work shall include supply, installation, testing and commissioning of a
complete Ceiling Fans and Wall Mounted Fans system with a fifteen (15) months
warranty against manufacturer’s defect as specified. The system shall be installed
at each individual handicapped toilet as specified in the tender drawings.
1.2 The system, wall oscillating fans and ceiling fans installation shall comply to
a) The latest BCA regulation and code.
b) Approved by Singapore third party accredited bodies / test laboratory in

accordance with the latest Singapore standard
c) Latest edition of SS 360: Performance and construction of electric circulating

fans and regulators including amendments or latest version IEC 60879:
Performance and construction of electric circulating fans and regulators ,
d) Singapore Consumer Protection (Safety Requirements) Registration Scheme

(CPS), it must be registered with Singapore third party accredited bodies /
test laboratory and bear the SAFETY Mark.
e) IEC 60335-2-80 Household and similar electrical appliances - Safety - Part 2-

80: Particular requirements for fans
1.3 All items of accessories, fitting, apparatus or labour whether specified in detail or
not but which is necessary for the satisfactory installation and functioning of the
system shall form part of the scope of work.
1.4 All the ceiling fan suspended rod shall be Singapore third party accredited bodies
/ test laboratory tested and label the approved label.
1.5 The entire system shall be fully tropicalised and capable of withstanding
exposure to local climatic conditions and in wet and humid environment such as
toilets. The system shall be operating normally at the ambient temperature range
of 0 C to 45 C and relative humidity of 10% to 100%.
1.6 All wiring shall be of 2.5 mm2 single core PVC cable as specified and shall be run
in concealed hot-dipped galvanised conduits comply to BS 4568, Class 4,
connecting the components .
1.7 A dedicated 13A ceiling rose shall be provided for each of the system to power
up the motor unit.
1.8 All the fan supplied shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
TS/43/1 2602542S/EL
2 CEILING FANS
2.1 Ceiling fans shall be 1.5m sweep complete with approved speed regulator. The
fans shall be able to deliver 270 cu m/min for air at full speed and mounted at
least 2.5m above floor level. Ceiling fans shall operate at 50Hz, 230V single-
phase AC. Motors of ceiling fans shall be of the totally enclosed type. No readily
flammable materials shall be used in the construction of fan and regulator.
Moulded parts of use shall be of such materials as will withstand the maximum
temperature attained to moisture shall be used and the fan shall be capable of
withstanding the moisture proofness test specified in latest edition of SS 360.
Electric fans shall be either of the following two types.
2.2 With functional insulation only; with accessible metal parts designed to be
connected to an earthing terminal or contact.
2.3 With double or reinforced insulation, with the accessible metal parts not designed
to be connected to an earthing terminal or contact.
2.4 The suspension rod of ceiling shall be of adequate strength and shall not be
threaded. The down rod shall be supplied as a complete system from the same
fan supplier, with an adequately strong shackle capable of carrying the fan motor,
blades and canopies where provided. The shackle shall embody a bush or reel of
resilient material. The down rods shall be of a steel tube through which the cable
supplying power to the fans shall be drawn. The wall thickness of the tube shall
not be less than 1.5mm and shall have minimum tensile strength of 10 times the
dead weight of the whole fan assembly. No screwed connections are allowed in
the rod. All surfaces of the assembly and mechanism of both fan and regulator if
any, shall be of corrosion resisting materials or shall be suitably and durably
protected against corrosion. Bolts used for any joint shall be at least SAE grade
E. Bolts used shall have unthreaded portion if they are inside the suspension rod.
All joints shall have the designs as shown in attached sketch. Other type of joint
design shall be submitted for approval.
TS/43/2 2602542S/EL
2.5 The down rods shall be sent to an acceptable test laboratory for batch testing
under this contract. An acceptable test laboratory is Singapore Productivity and
Standards Board and approved labels shall be attached to the rod for all
ceiling fans under this contract. The specification for the batch testing is shown
as below:
Proposal for Batch Inspection of Down Rod used for Electric Circulating
Fans
Sampling Plan
Batch Size Normal Inspection

Sample Size Acceptable No.
1-15 2 0
16-50 3 0
51-150 5 0
151-500 8 0
501-3200 13 0
Note: Sample plan based on SS242 Special inspection level S-3 with no failure
allowed (C=0).
The schedule of tests for the batch inspection are:
1. Holes distance from edges

2. Diameter of holes on, the down rod
3. Diameter of down diameter
4. Thickness of down rod
5. Material used
6. Tensile strength of the down rod to ASTM A370
2.6 All fans shall be provided with safety wires. The safety wire shall be properly
secured onto the motor shaft at one end and the fan hook at the other end. The
safety wire shall be made of stainless steel, preferably stainless steel aircraft
cable and shall have a safety factor of at least 20 times the static load of the fan.
An adequate length of safety wire shall be provided such that failure of the fan
components causing the fan to drop shall be easily observable. Test certificates
issued by independent testing authorities verifying the maximum allowable
loading of the safety wire are to be submitted to the SO. Hook shall be made of
mild steel rod of minimum 1 cm diameter. The hook shall be rigidly embedded
into the ceiling beam, floor slab or clamped to the trusses, wherever applicable. It
shall be so fitting as to securely support the whole weight of the fan even under
adverse operating condition. Supports including additional timber blocks for the
fixing of the hook shall be provided where necessary.
TS/43/3 2602542S/EL
2.7 Regulators shall be capable of reducing the speed of the fan by at least 40% of
the full speed at the test voltage. Fans shall be capable of starting up and
running at any speed step indicated on the regulator at the rated voltage or
voltages within the whole rated voltage range (whichever applicable). The
regulator shall have an ‘OFF’ position next to the slowest speed contact, and
shall be provided with running positions, with the speed steps being equal as far
as possible. Where a regulator is provided with a capacitor not permanently
connected across the motor terminals, provision shall be made so that the
capacitor is discharged when the regulator is in the ‘OFF’ position. The regulator
handle or knob, if of metal shall be adequately insulated electrically and
thermally. The mechanism of the regulator shall be so designed to ensure
positive contact at each speed position.
2.8 In the case of induction type regulators no position of the induction winding can
remain permanently short-circuited in any of the running positions. In the case of
resistance type regulators, the materials used for the casing must be such that it
is capable of withstanding the maximum operating temperature for a continuous
period without discoloration or distortion.
2.9 All ceiling fans installed shall be provided with an approved durable and heavy
duty sticker with the following information :
Date installed :
Company Name :
Company Stamp :
2.10 Contractor is to provide five (5) years guarantee against corrosion for ceiling fans
(whole unit).
2.11 Appropriate length of downrod shall be provided such that the ceiling fan blades
should not be lower than the recessed/ceiling mounted luminaire by 300mm. All
the downrods length shall subject to S.O. approval.
2.12 In the event of any flicking effect caused by light ray blockage by the oscillating
fan blades, the Contractor shall replace the downrod with another rod of
appropriate length at no additional cost. All replaced downrods shall be sent for
batch testing.
TS/43/4 2602542S/EL
3 Guidelines For Installation of Fan Hooks
In general, all ceiling fans shall be secured by using cast-in hooks for both hollow
core slabs and pre-stressed cast in-situ slabs. Contractor shall refer to the
standard installation details for the Cast-in method.
In the event, that the fan hook is required to be surface mounted on ceiling slabs,
anchor bolts shall be used. Methods stated below serve as guidelines for the
various mounting methods. However, the Contractor’s C&S QP shall check the
design and certify that the installation method used is adequate and safe.
i) Hollow Core Slabs
Minimum 4 nos. of approved M8x30 mounted onto base plate of size 100mm
x 100mm x 5mm (thk) are used. The recommended embedment depth is
30mm with hole size of 10mm diameter using electric drill for its installation.
ii) Prestressed/Cast-in Slab
The details for the installation of ceiling fan by means of mounting steel plate
and hook are shown below.
Minimum 4 nos. of approved M8x57 bolts mounted onto base plate

100x100x5t are to be used.
TS/43/5 2602542S/EL
3.1 Pull-Out and Shear Tests for Anchored Fan Hooks
i) Contractor shall engage an approved laboratory to conduct up to 5

random in-situ pull-out tests and shear test each for the anchored ceiling
fan hooks at each of the building blocks.
ii) The anchored fan hooks shall refer only to the fan hooks that are
anchored onto the soffit of existing structure floors or beams.
iii) The design for the anchored ceiling fan hooks shall be carried out by a
P.E. engaged by the contractor.
iv) The pull-out test for the anchored ceiling fan hooks shall be carried out to
1.6 times the working loads of the anchored ceiling fan hook. The shear
test shall be carried out to 2 times the working loads of the anchored
ceiling fan hook.
v) S.O. shall select the positions of the fan hooks for the pull-out tests and
shear test
vi) Contractor shall allow for all costs associated with the pull-out tests and
shear test in the Contract.
vii) The approved laboratory shall test 100% of the anchored fan hooks if any
one anchored fan hook fails the pull-out test and shear test. Failed
anchored fan hooks shall be replaced with new anchored fan hooks
capable of achieving the required carrying capacity.
viii) All additional tests and making good of the anchored fan hooks shall be at
the Contractor’s expense.
The Contractor shall read this clause in conjunction with the relevant sections
in the building legislation and BCA requirements. The more onorous
requirements will apply.
TS/43/6 2602542S/EL
4 WALL & EXHUAST FANS
4.1 The air delivery shall be of 73 cu m/min or above for the 400mm.The noise level
of the wall fan shall be less than 54dB.
4.2 The Contractor, if in doubt, shall consult the S.O. for the exact location and the
mounting height of the fan. Any fan/fans which are installed wrongly in location
and/or height shall be put right by the Contractor at his own expense and shall
install it with prior consultation with the S.O.
4.3 Wall bracket fans shall be of the oscillating type. The metal blade and fan guard
shall be coated with high grade epoxy coating protective. The overall diameter of
the fan blades shall be as shown on the Drawings. The fans shall be installed
generally at a height of approximately 2.5m above floor level and on the columns
of the building or in other areas as shown on the Drawings.
4.4 The heavy duty industrial wall fan must be 500mm diameter complete with 3-
speed with ON/OFF wired push button control. The fan blade and fan guard must
be metal with high grade epoxy coating. The guard must be of close mesh type.
The air delivery shall be of 190 cu m/min or above. The noise level of the wall fan
shall be less than 60dB.
4.5 All the corroded metal part of the fan if found corrosion. The entire fan shall be
replaced without any cost to the employer.
4.6 The wall fan must carries with the Singapore Consumer Protection “Safety Mark”.
4.7 Exhaust fans shall be of the window indented type capable of extracting air at the
rate and size shown in the drawings. A switch complete with pilot light indicator
shall be provided adjacent to the door way. Suitable diaphragm plates with rubber
vibration mountings shall be provided. Noise level of fans shall not exceed 58 dB.
Connection of fan points shall be with a cable outlet connection complete with
clamp.
TS/43/7 2602542S/EL
SECTION 45 EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
1 GENERAL
complete Emergency Call system with a fifteen (15) months warranty against
manufacturer’s defect as specified. The system shall be installed at each
individual handicapped toilet as specified in the tender drawings.
1.2 The system installation shall comply to the latest BCA Code on Barrier-Free
Accessibility in Buildings.
1.3 All items of accessories, fitting, apparatus or labour whether specified in detail or
not but which is necessary for the satisfactory installation and functioning of the
system shall form part of the scope of work.
1.4 The entire system shall be fully tropicalised and capable of withstanding exposure
to local climatic conditions and in wet and humid environment such as toilets. The
system shall be operating normally at the ambient temperature range of 0o C to 45
o
C and relative humidity of 10% to 100%.
1.5 All wiring shall be of 2 .5 mm2 single core PVC cable as specified and shall be
run in concealed hot-dipped galvanised conduits comply to BS 4568, Class 4,
connecting the components such as lamp, buzzer, power supply unit and pull
cord station.
1.6 A dedicated 13A Switched socket outlet shall be provided for each of the
system to power up the power supply unit. Where the toilet abuts service duct,
the socket outlet shall be metal clad type installed within the service duct and
next to the power supply unit. In cases where the service duct does not abut the
toilet, the socket outlet shall be of weatherproof type to minimum IP55 and
mounted at high level and next to the power supply unit.
1.7 The Emergency Call system shall provide remote monitoring at the FCC room
through LCD panel. The system must also provide interfacing with the IBMS
showing the zone, area and location that the bell activated.
TS/45/1 2602542S/EL
2 EQUIPMENT LIST AND FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
The Emergency Call system shall consist of but not limited to the following
components:
2.1 One unit weatherproof pull cord station (IP 65) c/w a minimum1000mm long
robust and water resistant pull cord for call point, 1 unit call assurance LED light
to indicate call has been activated and 1 unit cancel push or touch button to
cancel the call signal generated by the same station. The call assurance LED
light and the cancel button shall be integrated within the same box and wall
mounted within the toilet cubicle at 500mm above floor level. The pull cord
station shall have colour in contrast with the wall. An engraved Perspex
signage stating “Emergency Call” shall be prominently affixed next to each pull
cord station.
2.2 One unit dome/wedge shaped signal lamp terminal c/w built-in buzzer. The
signal lamp terminal shall c/w bright colour glass or impact resistant PVC diffuser
with multiple LED lights or incandescent lamps. The buzzer shall be built in
with the lamp housing and is able to generate an audible alarm at minimum
sound pressure level of 75 dB. Upon activation of the call by pull cord, the
lamp will light up and buzzer will sound. The lamp and buzzer shall be cleared
upon resetting the call by the cancel button. The signal lamp terminal shall be
wall mounted at 2200mm above floor level outside the toilet and along the
corridor. Exact location shall be at the S.O.’s discretion.
2.3 One unit of power supply unit to transform the mains voltage to the required
voltage level for the system to operate and to power up the pull cord station,
the lamp terminal, buzzer and all related control accessories. The power supply
unit shall tap the mains supply from the dedicated 13A Switched socket outlet
provided.
3 SYSTEM TESTING
3.1 The Contractor shall test the system in the presence of the S.O. to show that its
performance satisfies the requirement of this specification. All test equipment
shall be professional and supplied by the Contractor. A sound pressure meter will
be required.
3.2 All tests shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the S.O. and all costs incurred
shall be deemed included in the tender price.
3.3 Intensive training to all users and user’s guides shall be provided. All cost
shall be deemed included in the tender price.
TS/45/2 2602542S/EL
4 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
The following documents shall be submitted before construction and upon

completion of testing and commissioning:
4.1 Shop drawing submission for layout plans indicating the pull cord station, signal
lamp terminal and power supply unit location for all toilets in A1 or A0 plans.
4.2 Shop drawing submission for schematic diagram showing typical system
configuration.
4.3 Catalog submission for complete system and component, product literature, code
compliance and project reference.
4.4 Five complete sets of instruction manuals for the system and
components.
4.5 Five sets of as-built layout plans and system schematic diagram in both paper
format and soft copy in CDROM.
4.6 A statement, duly signed by the Contractor, for the system guarantee of 15
month or until end of DLP, whichever longer is applicable, from the date of
acceptance by the user and the S.O.
TS/45/3 2602542S/EL
SECTION 46 - MOTION SENSOR DETECTION SYSTEM
1 GENERAL
1.1 The work shall include supply, installation, testing and commissioning
of a complete standalone motion sensor system with a fifteen (15)
months warranty against manufacturer’s defect as specified. The
system shall be installed at each individual location as specified in the
tender drawings.
1.2 The electrical contractor shall design the quantity and location of the
motion sensors for the effective performance. No cost shall be claim
from the SO for the additional of the sensor
1.3 All items of accessories, fitting, apparatus or labour whether specified

in detail or not but which is necessary for the satisfactory installation
and functioning of the system shall form part of the scope of work.
1.4 The entire system shall be fully tropicalised and capable of

withstanding exposure to local climatic conditions and in wet and
humid environment such as toilets. The system shall be operating
normally at the ambient temperature range of 0°C to 45°C and relative
humidity of 10% to 100%.
1.5 All wiring shall be of 2.5 mm2 single core PVC cable as specified and
shall be run in concealed hot-dipped galvanised conduits comply to
BS 4568, Class 4, connecting the components such as lighting, control
panel, power supply unit and remote monitoring station.
1.6 A dedicated 13A Switched socket outlet shall be provided for each of
the system to power up the power supply unit. Where the toilet abuts
service duct, the socket outlet shall be metal clad type installed within
the service duct and next to the power supply unit. In cases where the
service duct does not abut the toilet, the socket outlet shall be of
weatherproof type to minimum IP55 and mounted at high level and
next to the power supply unit.
1.7 The standalone motion sensor system shall provide remote monitoring
at the FCC room through LCD panel. The system must also provide
interfacing with the IBMS showing the zone, area and location that the
sensor is activated. Interfacing areas will be at the FCC room.
1.8 The standalone motion sensor system shall provide contacts for the
interfacing of other trade, such as mechanical fans, sensor tap, heater,
AV system etc.
1.9 For EIB system, the motion sensor/presence sensor will be as

specified in that particular section.
TS/46/1 2602542S/EL
2 EQUIPMENT LIST AND FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
Motion detectors are to be provided for auto on/off of the lighting and other
equipments as specified.
2.1 The areas for motion detection system shall deploy in areas that
include seminar rooms, lounge and dining, meeting/conference room,
toilets, staircases, common area and other area as indicated.
2.2 All motion detectors shall operate on a standalone system in all areas.
2.3 Motion detectors in areas shall be linked to the control panel to sense
the mode of occupancy and giving output to trigger the field
equipments. During unoccupied mode, the light will be off for the
energy saving when there it is occupied to on the light to its required
time setting.
2.4 The contractor shall ensure the correct application of motion detection
system shall be used for different types of room.
2.5 The Dual Technology sensor shall be capable of detecting presence

in the control area by detecting doppler shifts in transmitted
ultrasound and passive infrared heat changes.
2.6 Sensor shall utilize Dual Sensing Verification Principle for coordination
between ultrasonic and PIR technologies. Detection verification of
both technologies must occur in order to activate lighting systems.
Upon verification, detection by either shall hold lighting on.
2.7 Sensor shall have a retrigger feature in which detection by either

technology shall retrigger the system on within 5 seconds of being
switched off.
2.8 Ultrasonic sensing shall be volumetric in coverage with a frequency of

40 KHz. It shall utilize Advanced Signal Processing, which
automatically adjusts the detection threshold dynamically to
compensate for constantly changing levels of activity and airflow
throughout controlled space.
2.9 Sensor shall be capable of corner mounting to a wall or ceiling in

order to eliminate detection through open doorways and outside of
controlled area. To provide superior small motion detection and
immediate activation upon entry, coverage of both technologies must
be complete and overlapping throughout the controlled area.
2.10 To avoid false ON activations and to provide immunity to RFI and

EMI, Detection Signature Analysis shall be used to examine the
frequency, duration, and amplitude of a signal, to respond only to
those signals caused by human motion.
TS/46/2 2602542S/EL
2.11 Sensor shall operate at 24 VDC/VAC and halfwave rectified and
utilize a Watt Stopper power pack.
2.12 The PIR technology shall utilize a temperature compensated, dual

element sensor and a multi-element Fresnel lens. The lens shall be
Poly IR4 material to offer superior performance in the infrared
wavelengths and filter short wavelength IR, such as those emitted by
the sun and other visible light sources. The lens shall have grooves
facing in to avoid dust and residue build up which affects IR reception.
2.13 The lens shall cover up to 2000 sq ft for walking motion when
mounted at 10 ft and 1000 sq ft of desktop motion.
2.14 Sensors shall have an additional single-pole, double throw isolated

relay with normally open, normally closed and common outputs. The
isolated relay is for use with HVAC control, data logging, and other
control options. Sensor shall have 8 occupancy logic options for
customized control to meet application needs.
2.15 Sensors shall utilize technology to optimize time delay and sensitivity
settings to fit occupant usage patterns and shall be selectable with a
DIP switch. Sensors shall have a time delay that is adjusted
automatically (with the setting) or shall have a fixed time delay of 5 to
30 minutes, set by DIP switch.
2.16 Sensors shall feature a walk-through mode, where the field system
turn off 3 minutes after the area is initially occupied if no motion is
detected after the first 30 seconds. An override ON function shall be
provided for use in the event of a failure. The sensor shall have
manual on function that is facilitated by installing a momentary switch.
2.17 Sensor shall have a built-in light level sensor that works from 10 to
300 footcandles
2.18 Each sensing technology shall have an LED indicator that remains
active at all times in order to verify detection within the area to be
controlled. The LED can be disabled.
2.19 To ensure quality and reliability, sensor shall be manufactured by an

ISO 9002 certified manufacturing facility and shall have a defect rate
of less than 1/3 of 1%.
2.20 Sensor shall have standard 5-year warranty and shall be UL and CUL
listed.
TS/46/3 2602542S/EL
3 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
The following documents shall be submitted before construction and upon

completion of testing and commissioning:
3.1 Shop drawing submission for layout plans indicating the location
control panel and power supply unit location for all the motion sensor
system in A1 or A0 plans.
3.2 Shop drawing submission for schematic diagram showing typical

system configuration.
3.3 Catalogue submission for complete system and component, product

literature, code compliance and project reference.
3.4 Five complete sets of instruction manuals for the system and
components.
3.5 Five sets of as-built layout plans and system schematic diagram in
both paper format and soft copy in CDROM.
3.6 A statement, duly signed by the Contractor, for the system guarantee
of 15 month or until end of DLP, whichever longer is applicable, from
the date of acceptance by the user and the S.O.
TS/46/4 2602542S/EL
SECTION 58 – HIGH VOLUME LOW SPEED FAN SPECIFICATION
1. General
complete high volume low speed circulation fan system of a big diameter,
multi-blades and ceiling mounted completed with variable speed controller
and a fifteen (15) months warranty against manufacturer’s defect as specified.
The system shall be installed as specified in the tender drawings.
1.2 The system installation shall comply to the latest BCA regulation, code and
approved by Singapore third party accredited bodies / test laboratory in
accordance with the latest standard
1.3 All items of accessories, fitting, apparatus or labour whether specified in detail
or not but which is necessary for the satisfactory installation and functioning
of the system shall form part of the scope of work.
1.4 All the fan suspended rod and structure shall be sized by a professional
Engineer and site tested with Singapore third party accredited bodies / test
laboratory. All welding joint shall be inspected by qualified welding inspector
engaged by contractor.
1.5 The fan shall be certified to ANSI/UL507-2007 or equal.
1.6 The contractor is to select the fan to provide comfort to occupants in

accordance with recommended of ASHRAE Standard 55-1992, Thermal
environmental conditions for human occupancy.
1.7 The fans shall achieve a minimum air velocity (at fans medium speed) of 1
m/sec within the area, up to 3m from the perimeter walls. All measurements
shall be taken at 1m from the floor level. Contractors have to ensure that their
proposed design and selection of fans are able to meet the required fan
performance stated in the specification.
1.8 The entire system shall be fully tropicalised and capable of withstanding
exposure to local climatic conditions and in wet and humid environment such
as toilets. The system shall be operating normally at the ambient temperature
range of 0 C to 45 C and relative humidity of 10% to 100%.
1.9 The fan shall have sound level not exceeding 55 dBA, at 6 meter below the
blades and horizontally from center of fan, at maximum speed.
1.10 All wiring shall comply to latest SS 638 and EMA regulation and shall be run
in concealed hot-dipped galvanised conduits comply to BS 4568, Class 4,
connecting the components. Where three phase supply being used, cable
shall running in trunking. All the control cable for speed regulation shall be
concealed.
1.11 A dedicated Isolator shall be provided for each of the system to power up the
motor unit.
TS/58/1 2602542S/EL
1.12 All the fan supplied shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
1.13 The tender shall verify the result using instrument with calibration prior to the
measurement.
1.14 All the High Volume Low Speed fan shall have a warranty life time of 50,000
hrs operating hours
2. Fan Components
2.1. Fan Blade
2.1.1 The blade shall be of airfoil type, powder coated and fabricated from
aluminium alloy with high performance design for air movement.
2.1.2 Colour of the blade shall subject to S.O. approval.
2.1.3 The blade shall be connected to hub of the fan, and tightened to
provide a balanced blades and hub rotation.
2.1.4 Besides tightening of blades to hub (using bolts and nuts or riveted), a
secondary safety device shall be provided to arrest the blades from
dropping down, should tightening device output shaft failed.
2.2. Fan Hub
The hub shall be fabricated from aluminium alloy, which shall be secured to
output shaft of motor through coupling. The assembly shall be well balance
during rotation.
2.3. Gear Box
The system shall be gearless, silent operation and maintenance free.
2.4. Motor
The motor shall be an AC induction type inverter rated at 230 VAC, 1-Phase.
It shall be totally enclosed, fan cooled with an IP55 NEMA or equal
certification. The motor shall have double baked class F insulation and
capable of continuous operation in 20˚C to 60˚C ambient conditions.
TS/58/2 2602542S/EL
2.5. Control Box
The wall mounted control box shall be remote from fan. It shall have a power
disconnect switch, power on / off switch, LED display, and devices to control
the fan’s direction of rotation, operation and speed. Communication between
the fan driver and controller shall be using CAT-6 Ethernet cable.
Communication to BAS shall be of BacNet or Modbus.
The control box shall include a simple diagnostic programme to identify faults
in the system, with provision for retrieving from operation and fault messages.
The control box shall comply with local codes of practices and regulations.
2.6. Fan Controller
(a) The Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) shall be used. It is pre-wired and
pre-programmed to minimize starting and breaking torques, for
smooth and efficient operation. It has to minimize electromagnetic
interference (EMI) and radio frequency interference (RFI). The
controller shall house in an IP 45 NEMA or equal enclosures.
(b) The VFD shall comply to BS EN 61800-3 Adjustable speed electrical

power drive systems. EMC requirements and specific test methods,
IEC 60034-17 and 60034-25, Rotating electrical machines, AC
electrical machines used in power drive systems, IEC 61000-3-2
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-2: Limits - Limits for
harmonic current emissions (equipment input current ≤ 16 A per
phase), IEC 61000-3-12 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-
12: Limits - Limits for harmonic currents produced by equipment
connected to public low-voltage systems with input current >16 A and
≤ 75 A per phase and EN 55011 Industrial, scientific and medical
equipment. Radio-frequency disturbance characteristics. Limits and
methods of measurement
(c) The VFD shall be include a radio frequency interference (RFI) filter as
part of its design to be in compliance with standard EN55011 Class
1A (150 metres) and Class 1B (50 metres). The RFI filter shall
conform to immunity standard of IEC 61000 parts 2-5 and BS EN
61800-3. Test document and report shall be submitted for on
compliance of cable length distance. Documentation according to IEC
61800-3 shall submit to engineer.
2.7. The High Volume Low Speed fan system shall interface to building fire alarm
system. In case of fire alarm activation, the system shall automatically
shutdown
TS/58/3 2602542S/EL
3. Safety Feature
3.1. The fan shall have (but not limited to) the following basic features:-
3.1.1 Upper safety cables for securing while fan assembly to mounting
structure shall be minimum 8mm thick galvanized steel cable with
cable clamps.
3.1.1 Lower safety cable for securing motor, hub & blades assembly to
supporting brackets (extended from ceiling) shall be minimum 8mm
which galvanized steel cables, with cable clamps.
3.1.2 Safety cables for retaining fan blades shall be able to withstand a
minimum times the maximum centrifugal force generated by the fan.
3.1.3 Retention cables to tie the foils (blades) onto the hub;
3.1.4 Contractor shall submit detail safety features description and

calculation for Engineer approval.
4. Installation
4.1. The installation work shall follow strictly to manufacturer’s instruction.

Qualified Person shall be engaged to design and certify the soundness of the
installation, in accordance with relevant code of practice acceptable to local
authorities.
4.2. Guy wires shall be provided for limiting vibration and lateral movement, to
manufacturer’s details/design requirements.
4.3. The fan shall be secured, by safety cables to the mounting structure, to
prevent falling when supporting members failed.
4.4. Air-foil retention cables shall be provided to secure the fan blades and hubs of
the fan, to prevent fan blades from falling, in addition to manufacturer’s design.
4.5. The lighting level under the fan shall not be reduced. Installer shall relocate
existing lights, provide additional lights (similar to existing) should lighting
level being affected due to installation of fan.
4.6. Installer shall measure the lux level of the premises before and after
installation for verification.
4.7. Anchor Bolts shall be used for the existing R.C. structure. All the anchor bolts
used shall complied with European Technical Approval Guildelines ETAG 001
"Metal Anchors For Use in Concrete" and minimum 2 numbers of test shall be
conduct per school where applicable.
TS/58/4 2602542S/EL
SECTION 60 - LOCALISED LIGHTNING WARNING SYSTEM
1. GENERAL
1.1 This section sets out the requirements for the localized lightning warning
system and associated works.
1.2 The Manufacturer shall have extensive R&D experience in lightning

protection system and equipment. It shall have minimum ten (10) years
track record in applications of lightning warning system for open spaces
such golf courses, sports complexes, schools, parks, etc. locally.
1.3 Tenderer shall submit the proposed system Manufacturer’s supports in

terms of technical, parts and servicing, detailed products specification,
catalogues. past local project reference, and copy of test reports during
tender
1.4 The localised lightning warning system shall comply to following

standards:
a) SS CP 555: Code of Practice for Lightning Protection
b) BS EN / IEC 61000: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).

Limits
c) BS EN / IEC 62305: lightning protection standard part 2
1.5 The system shall consist of but not limited to the following:
a) External Electrostatic Field Sensor
b) Data Acquisition Console
c) Management Software
d) Two hours maintenance free Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
e) Weatherproof sirens with output SPL of 106dB
f) Weatherproof amber strobe lights
g) Complete electrical and communication cabling, wireless set up.

concealed conduits and piping works
h) Mounting concrete plinths, supporting bracket, bolts, nuts, etc.
i) Announcement system
1.6 Interface with public address / emergency voice communication

system.
TS/60/1 2602542S/EL
2. SYSTEM
2.1 System Description
a) The communication of the information and signals shall be by

means of hard cabling transmission. Wireless technology shall not
be considered as an option.
b) External Electrostatic Field Sensor
(i) The external weatherproof (IP65) electronic field sensor

shall be connected to the Data Acquisition Console via
shielded twisted pairs of cables (power and data). The
sensor and support, mounting materials, etc. shall be able to
withstand corrosion and wind speed.
(ii) The sensor shall provide a measurement dynamics ranging

from -100 kV/m to +100 kV/m with a resolution of ±10 V/m.
(iii) The detection range shall be minimum 25 km.
(iv) The sensing unit shall be in compliance with

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Standards.
c) Data Acquisition Console
(i) The console unit shall be of the type designed to control and
configure the parameters of the localized lightning warning
system by means of keyboard.
(ii) The unit shall provide visualizations of the parameter

configurations as well as the variations in electrostatic field
measurement signal in real time.
(iii) The data acquisition console shall incorporate four (4)

voltage free output relays, associated to the three (3) alarm
levels and one (1) error detection relaying.
(iv) The three (3) alarm levels shall permit control of different
warning levels of the impending thunderstorms in relation to
its modifiable electrostatic field threshold parameters.
(v) The relays associated with the alarms shall be capable of

enabling the activation of visual and audio alerts, inform a
system which operates as a central alarm control, activate
systems such as electric generators and isolation of the
installation to be protected.
TS/60/2 2602542S/EL
(vi) The console unit shall have built-in indicator lights and audio
alarm for system power, various alarm status, etc. The
control unit shall be designed to incorporate a self-diagnostic
function to maintain the integrity of the system. In event of
detection of a system error, the error indicator shall light up
to prompt the user, accompanied with an error description
on the screen to facilitate trouble-shooting.
(vii) It shall incorporate a serial communication port RS232 to PC

for real time electrostatic field measurement. It shall also
enable external communication via TCP/IP, modem and
GSM.
(viii) The console unit shall be in compliance with

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Standards.
(ix) The console shall have built in surge and over-voltage

protection.
d) Management Software
(i) The management software come with license shall be

designed to work under the Windows Operating System. It
shall provide storm detection function, visualization functions
and the analysis of the evolution of electrostatic fields.
(ii) The software shall incorporate other functions such as

graphical visualization of the field evolution in real time,
enabling communication from the PC to the detector and
archiving measured data for later analysis.
e) Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
(i) The localized lightning warning system shall come with an

uninterruptible power supply unit to support the complete
operation of the detection and warning system in event of a
power outage or failure.
(ii) The UPS shall have a minimum of 2 hours maintenance-free

lead-acid battery back-up.
2.2 Service Conditions
The entire system shall be fully tropicalised and capable of withstanding

exposure to local climatic conditions in terms of temperature and
humidity level. The operating temperature range should be from -30°C
to 50°C. The system shall be robust and operate on 24 hours 7 days per
week.
TS/60/3 2602542S/EL
2.3 System Performance
a) The localized lightning warning system shall be capable of

analyzing the prevailing atmospheric conditions; to provide an
early warning of the approaching thunderstorms, and to alert users
by activating the alarm levels.
b) Upon switching on the localized lightning warning system, the unit

shall automatically conduct a complete internal test of its operation.
Its self-diagnostic function incorporated in the console shall
perform routine self-checks periodically and prompt the user by
means of an error indication, accompanied with an error
description on display in case of error detections.
c) To achieve optimum performance of the system, the external

electrostatic field sensor shall be mounted such that it is clear from
obstructions to ensure optimum performance of the sensor. In
view of placement topology, a form coefficient shall be
incorporated to correct the measured ambient electrostatic field.
d) In order to track the development of storm activity, the localized

lightning warning system shall provide three (3) levels of alarms,
corresponding to three (3) different warning levels from the
beginning of the storm front to local / overhead formation and to a
strong probability of an eventual lightning strike within the
measured area. As a reference, warning signals shall be activated
when there is electric field rises above 4kV/m. It should be
escalated to alarm when the electric field rises above 7kV/m. All
clear signal can be sent out when there is no activity detected, e.g.
near strike, far strike, low electric field, high electric field within
programmable duration.
e) The respective alarm levels shall activate its corresponding alarm

indicator lights and output relay when the measured field value
surpasses its pre-determined field thresholds.
f) The lightning warning system shall incorporate an internal alerting

feature (buzzer) in event of activation of each alarm level
configured. The alarm shall remain active until the field level falls
to levels below that of the corresponding alarm and a duration
defined by the user.
g) The alarms shall be designed in a way to enable manual

deactivation, which has the effect of stopping the audio alarm
warning, and switching the relays to their normal state. The alarm
indicator light shall remain active while the field measurement is
superior to the corresponding alarm level.
TS/60/4 2602542S/EL
h) The system will transmit audio and visual signals automatically to
the sirens and strobe lights connected to the system console when
the alarm reaches the preset warning stage. The system shall also
transmit signals via relays to the public address/emergency voice
communication system to activate the pre-recorded message to
alert the users to seek shelter in the event of approaching storm or
send out ‘all clear’ message when the electric field is within safe
range.
3. SAMPLE AND SHOP DRAWING
Contractor shall submit the following before any installation work being carry
out
a) Sample of field sensor, siren and strobe light.
b) Detailed system layout plans, connectivity and schematic diagrams.
c) Certificate of Supervision of Lightning Protection System to include

localised lightning warning system as part of lightning protection system
to be endorsed by the Professional Engineer.
d) Method statements for installation.
4. INSTALLATION
a) Field assessment shall be conducted by the Manufacturer

representative to ascertain the sensor, sirens, strobe lights location to
optimize the system performance and coverage prior to commencement
of site work.
b) The electrostatic field sensor shall be positioned such that it is clear

from obstructions to ensure optimum performance of the sensor.
c) Coordination of the equipment with other M&E services, building

elements and architectural finishes for all mounting layout and details.
TS/60/5 2602542S/EL
a) Sub-Contractor shall submit method of statement for the testing and

commissioning for the localised lightning warning system.
b) Sub-Contractor shall submit Certificate of Supervision of Lightning

Protection System to include localised lightning warning system as part
of lightning protection system to be endorsed by the Professional
Engineer
c) All testing and commissioning shall be follow the code requirement and
witness by Engineer and 3 set of testing and commissioning report must
be submitted to Engineer and Superintending Officer,
6. MAINTENANCE
Sub- Contractor shall carry out the defects liability period maintenance. Method
statements for maintenance shall submit to Engineer for approval.
TS/60/6 2602542S/EL
SECTION 64 – INDUCTION LOOP HEARING ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM
1. GENERAL
1.1 This section sets out the requirements for the supply, installation,
testing and commissioning, maintenance and fifteen month defect
liability for induction loop hearing enhancement system and
associated works.
1.2 The system shall comprise of the following:
(1) Induction loop conductor and its system
(2) Loop amplifiers
(3) Loop receiver (for testing)

system
1.3 The works shall be executed by a specialist with past project

experience of successful installation on similar type of system. The
specialist shall be supported by the Manufacturer.
1.4 The proposed design of the loop system for each of the area shall
take into consideration of the following:
(1) Metal structures
(2) Overspill and interferences
(3) Provision of appropriate input audio
(4) Earthing interferences
(5) Position of the microphones
1.5 The system shall comply to the following Standards and Regulations
(1) Latest Code on Accessibility on the Built Environment, Building

and Construction Authority of Singapore
(2) BS 7594: Code of practice for audio-frequency induction-

loop systems.
(3) IEC 60118-4: Electroacoustics - Hearing aids - Part 4:

Induction-loop systems for hearing aid purposes - System
performance requirements.
TS/64/1 2602542S/EL
2. SUBMISSIONS
Sub-contractor shall submit detailed products specifications, catalogues,

Certificate of Conformity, schematic diagrams, system layout plans, all
samples including loop wire and tele-loop amplifier and method statement for
installation of the loop wires and details for engineer approval.
3. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
3.1. All necessary loop wires, tele-loop amplifiers, terminations, booster

& loop amplifiers etc to ensure proper matching and performance
of the whole system shall be included.
3.2. All components used shall be of noise reducing type and suitably
matched electrically and mechanically into the distribution to avoid
discontinuities in the transmission.
3.3. All components installed shall be adequately protected from theft.
3.4. The proposed complete system shall also have taken into
consideration of the building (metal structures, overspill and
interferences).
3.5. Low Loss and Spill Multi-loop Array (Quadrature) systems shall be
provided for the areas such as function rooms, halls, auditorium,
lecture theatres, seminar rooms, training rooms, meeting rooms,
etc. Each loop shall complete with loop amplifiers.
3.6. Perimeter Multi-turn Loop Array systems complete with boundary

microphone shall be installed for counter areas.
3.7. Loop Amplifiers and Power Supply Unit
(1) Power an output of average magnetic field strength of

100mA/m with a coverage area of minimum 600sq.m.
(2) High efficiency class-G amplifier with low heat dissipation.
(3) Frequency range: 60Hz to 10 kHz.
(4) Distortion: <1% @ rated output, 1 kHz.
(5) Bass control: -8/+8 dB @ 100 Hz.
(6) Treble control: -8/+8 dB @ 10 kHz.
(7) Signal to noise ratio:> 63 db.
(8) Current driven design.
TS/64/2 2602542S/EL
(9) Feeds a single turn loop.
(10) Minimum 3 inputs: 1 no. microphone input (balanced XLR

100V input (2 screw terminals) with volume/gain control and
2 nos. Line/Mic level inputs (balanced XLR).
(11) Metal loss corrector.
(12) Nominal level: 1V/1mV RMS switchable per input.
(13) Phantom power: Switchable per mic input.
(14) 1 line output on 1 balanced XLR connector, nominal level:

1V RMS.
(15) Dedicated Master in and slave outputs on unbalanced Tip-

sleeve (TS) Jacks.
(16) 2 slave outputs marked 0o and 90o.
(17) Operates on 230VAC 50 – 60 Hz.
(18) Features:
a. Capability to wire multi-loop system for large areas.

There shall be one switch to set the amplifier to be the
master unit or slave unit.
b. The amplifier shall supervise and monitor the presence

of a 20 kHz pilot tone at the input with the highest
priority.
c. One fault output contact with relay (NO/NC), 24VDC

0.5A on 3 screw terminals.
d. Switch to enable or disable supervision.
e. Separate grounding terminal.
f. One loop output on 2 screw terminals.
g. Dedicated switch to set the frequency range.
h. Selector to select Automatic Gain Control (AGC)

functionality or limiter functionality.
i. A rotary control to set the threshold level of the AGC.
j. Rotary control for metal loss compensation (level

dependent equalization).
TS/64/3 2602542S/EL
k. One switch to set input 1 to Voice Operated Exchange
(VOX) functionality whereby input 2 is muted when
there is a signal present on input 1.
(19) The amplifier shall have the following Indicators:
a. Power indicator and presence of input signal.
b. Volume Unit (VU) meter to indicate the master VU level

before the master volume control. The VU shall come
with LEDs: 0 dB (RED), -6dB (Yellow), -20dB (Yellow)
LEDs.
c. A VU bar to indicate the output loop current from 1 to

10A.
d. Indicator for hearing aid user to see correct functioning

of the Loop Amplifier.
e. Indicator to show presence of output signal on loop.
f. Fault and loop integrity indicators (short circuit,

overload, overheat and loop error).
g. Indicator to show Automatic Gain Control is ON/OFF.
(20) There shall be dedicated volume controls for each inputs 1

and 2 (XLR inputs). The amplifier shall have mixing
functionality between input 1 and 2 unless the VOX switch on
the rear panel is in the ‘on’ position.
(21) There shall be a master volume control and separate high

and low tone controls.
(22) There shall be a headphone output that is dependent on the

loop current (if the loop is disconnected, no signal shall be
present).
(23) The equipment shall be adequately screened from radio

interference caused by other equipment e.g. starters, etc and
shall be enclosed in weatherproof and tamper-proof sheet
metal housing.
3.8. No components shall be operated above the manufacturer's

recommended rating.
3.9. The external characteristics, frequency response and input and

output characteristics and impedances of the amplifier shall be
submitted. A standby amplifier shall be provided and installed.
3.10. All equipment must be perfectly matched.
TS/64/4 2602542S/EL
3.11. All necessary accessories for the proper functioning of the
amplifiers shall be supplied and installed. Dedicated 13A switched
socket outlet to supply the amplifier shall be provided.
3.12. Provision of 2U 19-inch rack complete with brackets.
3.13. Induction Loop Conductor
(1) DC resistance between 0.5 ohm to 3 ohms.
(2) Capability to deliver full rated current at minimum 1.6kHz.
(3) Minimum cross sectional area of the conductor > 0.01sq.mm

per metre run.
3.14. Boundary Microphone
(1) Frequency response: 80Hz to 15 kHz
(2) Polar pattern: half Cardioid
(3) Clipping level: > 125dB SPL (1% THD)
(4) Sensitivity: 25mV/Pascal
4. INSTALLATION
4.1. All the screws and washers used to mount the tee, splitter,
trunking and outlet boxes shall be of brass type or of equivalent
that do not corrode easily.
4.2. Sub-contractor shall provide and design all the necessary power
supply units, Voltage regulators, surge arrestors, switch socket outlet,
cables and accessories etc. for the operation of the equipment,
functioning and performance of the system.
4.3. To provide and display signage showing the international symbol of

access for hearing loss according to the local code requirements at
areas provided with this system shall be provided
Sub-Contractor shall submit the necessary method statement for testing

and commissioning the entire system to the engineer. Signal measurement
shall be conducted to manufacturer’s recommendation and signal test
reports and layout drawing showing the measured value (signal strength
and frequency) shall be submitted.
TS/64/5 2602542S/EL
6. CERTIFICATION OF SYSTEM
Sub-Contractor shall engage the supplier or the manufacturer to Inspect

and certify the system to comply fully with the specification and other
requirements in the Code on Accessibility for the Hearing Enhancement
System. This shall include certificate of test and conformity required for the
Authorities’ submission, conduct tests to assist in Authority’s inspection
and clearance for the application of TOP. Certificate of Conformity shall be
submitted to engineer.
7. MAINTENANCE
Sub-Contractor shall conduct the maintenance schedule as recommended

by the manufacturer, inclusive but not limited to the following tasks which
shall be carried out at the intervals shown below:
7.1. Quarterly
Use a loop detector to listen to the area covered and check that
the audio signal is audible and not distorted.
7.2. Yearly
Conduct functional test on loop amplifier and use field strength

meter to measure loop field strength.
TS/64/6 2602542S/EL
Signage for Access for Hearing Loss
Signage for Access for Hearing Loss Using Induction Loop Support
TS/64/7 2602542S/EL
SECTION 65 - COMPUTER CABLINGS (CAT 6A / CLASS EA – UTP) COPPER
AND OM3/OS2 FIBRE SYSTEM
1. GENERAL
1.1. This section sets out the requirements for supply, install, testing and
commissioning and defects liability for CAT 6A / CLASS EA Unshielded
Twisted Pair (UTP) computer structured cabling system and associated
works.
1.2. The cabling system shall support implementing a single structured wiring
infrastructure and complete integrated multi-media communication
networking system, which includes text, graphics, images, voice and video.
1.3. The system shall:
c) Facilitate expansion from the initial proposed system by only the


growth.
1.4. The cabling system shall be expected to have a life span of at least 25
years and it shall have provision to support future growth requirements and
increasing needs for higher bandwidth.
1.5. The cables and installation shall meets to the standards and regulations :
d) BS EN 50174-1: Information technology. Cabling installation.

Installation specification and quality assurance
e) BS EN 50174-2: Installation technology. Cabling installation.

Installation planning and practices inside buildings
TS/65/1 2602542S/EL
f) BS EN 50174-3: Installation technology. Cabling installation.
Installation planning and practices outside buildings
g) EIA/TIA-492-AAAB: Detail Specification for 50-µm Core

Diameter/125-µm Cladding Diameter Class Ia Graded-Index
Multimode Optical Fibers
h) ANSI/TIA 568-C.0: Generic Telecommunications Cabling for

Customer Premises
i) ANSI/TIA 568-C.1: Commercial Building Telecommunications

Cabling Standard
j) ANSI/TIA-568-C.2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunication

Cabling and Components Standard
k) ANSI/TIA-568-C.3: Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard
l) ANSI/TIA 569: Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces
m) ANSI/TIA-606: Administration Standard for Telecommunications

Infrastructure
n) EIA/TIA 607: Grounding and Bonding Requirements for

o) IEC 60793-2-10:Optical fibres - Part 2-10: Product specifications -

Sectional specification for category A1 multimode fibres
p) IEEE 802.3: IEEE Standard for Ethernet
q) IEEE 802.5: IEEE Standard for Local Area Networks: Token Ring
r) ISO/IEC 11801: 2nd Edition, Amendment 2 International Standards.

Information technology – Generic cabling for customer premises
1.6. The manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 Quality Management

System in the design, manufacture and assembly of the structured cabling
system.
TS/65/2 2602542S/EL
2. SUBMISSIONS
2.1 Sub-Contractor shall submit all the necessary documents and sample for
approval by engineer before carry out the installation
a) Detailed products specification. Conformity and test reports.
b) Certificate of Approved/Certified Installer granted by the manufacturer.
c) Samples of cables, patch cords, connectors, patch panels, power

bars, cable management.
d) Statement of Method of Work. Schedule of execution with the

expected start and end dates.
e) Detailed layout plans, schematic diagrams, LAN Room layout,

rack/cabinet mounting details, details of rack system complete with
patch panels, cable management, power bars, earth bars, etc.
2.2 Sub-Contractor shall submit all the necessary documents, drawing and
operation manual after the work completion
a) Installation details.
b) Testing and commissioning procedures.
c) Proposed numbering and labelling scheme.
d) Certification file.
e) As-built plans and test reports.
2.3 Warranty
a) A 25 year passive product warranty for the Structured Cabling

System backed by the Manufacturer and a 25-year application
assurance on the application described in this Technical
Specification, from the date of Certified Practical Completion of the
Contract.
b) The following copper and fibre sub-system warranties apply to both

standard and intelligent products.
(1) Copper and fibre patch cords are considered as replaceable

items and are specifically excluded from the 25 year product
guarantee due to the normal wear and tear that can occur.
TS/65/3 2602542S/EL
(2) Copper sub-system
a. The manufacturer must guarantee that the products

referenced within the specific Warranty Modules (Class
EA System) when correctly installed in accordance
with installation guidelines:
i) Will be free from product defects in materials and

workmanship
ii) Are guaranteed to exceed:

· Class EA Channel and Permanent Link as
specified in ISO/IEC 11801:2002/A1:2008 and
A2:2010
· Augmented Cat 6A Link and Channel
requirements as specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA-
568-C.2:2009
iii) Supports the following application (not limited):

· 10baseT Ethernet
· 100baseTX Fast Ethernet
· 1000baseTX Gigabit Ethernet
· 10G base-T Ethernet IEEE 802.3an
· 155Mbit ATM
· 1.2Gbit ATM
iv) For a duration of 25 years
b. All components including the Cat6A patch cords have

to be produced by the same cabling system
manufacturer to ensure warranted performances and
applications against the standards.
TS/65/4 2602542S/EL
3. MATERIALS AND SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
3.1. Cable Distribution Subsystem
(1) The cable distribution subsystem described herein includes

the computer outlets (RJ45 jacks) in the work area as well as
the cables and transition connectors installed between
outlets and RJ45 patch panels in the LAN Room. In addition,
the cabling system shall be made up of various modular
patch panels, patch cords used to configure horizontal cable
connections in the LAN Room.
(2) The cable distribution subsystem shall consist at a minimum

of the following:
i) RJ45 Cat 6A jacks and outlets.
ii) 4-pair Cat 6A UTP non-plenum cables.
iii) Cable labelling and identification consistent with

ANSI/EIA/TIA 606.
iv) RJ45 patch panels.
v) Fibre Patch Panel.
vi) 3 metre length Cat 6A UTP patch cords complete with

RJ45 jack at both ends which shall be factory
terminated and tested.
3.2. Copper Sub-system
a) This specification covers the design, supply, installation, testing and

commissioning of a Category 6A cabling system.
b) The Category 6A universal cabling system shall function for voice,

data and LAN communications, for video applications etc.
c) The cabling system is also open to new applications which require

a Class EA / Cat 6A cabling system as defined in the latest editions
of the standards: ISO/IEC11801:2002/A1: 2008 and A2:2010 and
EIA/TIA 568-C2.
d) The terminology and references in this document as well as the

Link/Channel Performance figures for Class EA are based on
ISO/IEC 11801:2002/A1:2008 and EIA/TIA 568-C2.
e) All proposed components including the patch cords have to be

produced by the same manufacturer.
TS/65/5 2602542S/EL
3.3. System Performance
a) Horizontal Cabling
(1) Horizontal distribution cable
a. The horizontal 4 pair cable shall be Category 6A UTP

to meet the quality and performance criteria necessary
to ensure correct operation of the installation for
frequencies up to 500 MHz and to ensure the
compliance with the warranty.
b. The installation design and routing of all cables shall

take account of the manufacturer limits for the
continued performance of the cables and the
c. The cable shall be a 4 twisted pair cable with AWG 23

conductors. Having an external sheathing in a material
that does not give off toxic fumes (Zero Halogen) in
case of fire and offer flame propagation retardant
properties. The cable shall be compliant to the IEC
60332-1 standard.
d. Traceability numbers should accompany the cable

supplied from the manufacturers packaging to assist in
quality validation of the installed cable.
e. Independent certification shall be provided by the

manufacturer to show compliance to ISO/IEC
11801:2002/ A1 2008 and A2/2010 or EIA/TIA 568-C2
Channel headroom requirements for both Alien NEXT
(A-NEXT) and Alien FEXT (A-FEXT) parameters.
f. All pairs must have a fitted impedance of 100 Ohms,

with a tolerance of +/- 5 Ohms.
g. Conductor pairs shall be identified by insulation

utilising standardised colour code (Blue/White,
Orange/White, Green/White, Brown/White).
(2) Modular RJ45 Jack
a. The connector shall be fully compliant to the IEC

60603-7-41 standard that defines the Cat.6A connector
to be used to form a Class EA channel as specified in
the ISO/IEC 11801 standard.
b. Independent certification shall be provided by the

manufacturer to demonstrate full compliance to the
IEC 60603-7-41 standard.
TS/65/6 2602542S/EL
c. The connector shall support PoE (IEEE 802.3af) and
PoE Plus (IEEE 802.3at – 15 Watts per pair)
applications and shall pass all the tests for PoE Plus
requirements according to IEC 60512-99-001 Ed.1).
d. Each connector shall provide both T568A and T568B

colour code identification for the IDC contacts at the
rear of the connector. Termination is to be in
accordance with the T568B colour code.
Reassignment of pairs is forbidden.
e. All conductors from the 4 pair cable are to be

terminated on the respective contacts.
f. To avoid installation errors, pair assignment in the wire

organiser of the Snap-In jack must be identified using
colours which match the cable pairs.
g. The Snap-In format of the connector shall make it

compatible with the whole range of modular structural
hardware including patch panels, outlets and
Consolidation Point boxes.
h. In the case of a 3 or 4 connector Channel with

Consolidation Point (CP), a specific version of
connector having IDC contacts suitable for the
termination of stranded cable shall be used at the
Telecom Outlet / Computer Outlet and/or at the
presentation panel.
(3) Telecom Outlet and Computer Outlet
a. UK format 86x86mm cover plate shall be proposed.

Angled (45x45) faceplate outlet modules are fitted with
removable shutters, which can be replaced by colour-
coded shutters (red, green, blue, yellow) available from
the manufacturer standard product range.
b. The presentation of the outlet shall provide for labelling

and identification. A transparent window shall protect
the labelling tag.
c. The choice between single and dual RJ45 outlet

modules shall be provided.
TS/65/7 2602542S/EL
(4) 24 port modular copper Patch Panels
a. Patch panels must have 19" equipment practice

dimensions to permit mounting in standard cabinets,
racks or bays.
b. Unloaded angled 24 port Snap-in format (Modular)

patch panels in white colour fitted with white shutters to
protect the RJ45 ports shall be used.
c. Optional coloured shutters need to be available to

easily indicate different services when required.
d. The panels features a screen printed numbering

systems for labelling.
e. Each patch panel shall provide a means to locate and

clamp the incoming cables without causing damage to
the cable or affecting the performance of the Link.
f. The installer must avoid any risk of cable compression

during the installation or termination of the cables.
g. The dimensions of the patch panel shall be 19" 1 U

high.
(5) Patch cords
a. The cable used for the patch cords shall be Category

6A LSZH UTP patch cable. To achieve a Class EA
Channel performance all data patch cords shall be
Category 6A rated.
b. The patch cord cable shall be made from LSZH

material with a print legend indicating type of cable,
brand name, production code and metre mark.
c. All patch cords shall be compliant to the IEC 60332-1

standard to offer flame propagation retardant
properties.
d. The standard colours offered for the LSZH flame

retardant jacket shall be orange and dark grey.
e. Red, Blue, Green and Yellow colours shall also be

available on demand.
TS/65/8 2602542S/EL
f. The default lengths available from stock shall be 1, 2,
3, 5, 10 and 20m. Other lengths shall be made
g. The patch cords feature a slim over-moulded boot

which is kept inside the RJ45 boundaries to enable
High Density Patching with 48 cords in 1 height unit.
h. They should also come with a ‘replaceable’ black Latch

Protector, which can be used for colour coding of
different services.
i. The coloured retrofit latch protectors shall be available

as accessory in 8 colours for colour coding of different
services.
j. The cords shall be fitted with Category 6A RJ45 plugs,

with a Self-latching, high reliable RJ45 connector. All
pairs must have an impedance of 100 Ohms. The
characteristic impedance of the pairs must be identical
to that of the horizontal cables. The patch cords shall
have a guaranteed performance level of greater than
750 insertions without degradation to the performance
level of the solution.
k. Traceability numbers should accompany the cables

supplied from the manufacturers packaging to assist in
quality validation of the installed cable.
(6) Link and Channel performance
a. Manufacturer shall demonstrate guaranteed minimum

worst-case (4-connector Link) performance to be
compliant with class EA link and channel performance
according to the ISO/IEC 11801:2002/A1:2008 and
A2/2010 and EIA/TIA 568-C2.
b. Components used must be compliant with the

Category 6A standards mentioned above.
c. The system supplier must be able to demonstrate in

house design and manufacturing expertise for all
components used (e.g. cables, outlets, panels and
cords) in order to ensure compatibility of system
elements.
TS/65/9 2602542S/EL
d. The performance of both the components and the link
and channel should show stable performance up to
500MHz in order to allow for possible future
applications requiring crosstalk cancellation up to
500MHz.
b) Building Backbone Cabling
(1) Data Backbone
This backbone will link the Switches located in the Floor

Distributors (FD) to the Data Centre switches through the
Building Distributor (BD).
4. EXECUTION
4.1. Installation
a) Apart from complying to the standards as specified, the installation

of the computer cabling system shall also comply to the installation
guidelines as recommended by the cable manufacturer.
b) The installation of the cabling system shall comply with the

following requirements:
(1) All cable pairs shall be tested end to end to ensure continuity
and absence of tip/ring reversals, as well as cable pair fault
clearance prior to installation. These test results shall be
provided in traceable format and submitted as certifications
of tests performed on the systems.
(2) No cable joints are allowed
(3) All cables shall be installed such that they are not bent
through radii, less than a minimum bending radii specified by
the manufacturer.
c) All the components have to be installed according to the

procedures prescribed by the cabling systems manufacturer.
d) The installer has to closely follow the local regulations concerning

fire protection. The integrity of the fire barrier has to be maintained
or restored.
e) For the earthing of all the proposed products, the installer has to
closely follow the related recommendations of the supplier, in
accordance with local regulations. The earthing procedure that has
to be followed shall be put at the disposal by the supplier under an
official document.
TS/65/10 2602542S/EL
f) The grounding system shall conform to ANSI/TIA/EIA-607, local
and other latest relevant requirements.
g) The grounding system for the entire telecommunication system

shall be continuous throughout. All grounding cables from each
19" (480 mm) rack cabinets shall be terminated in the main copper
earthing bar in each LAN Room.
4.2. Cabinet and Cable Management in LAN Rooms
a) The metal cabinets shall have a footprint of 600x800 mm unless

otherwise specified. In the frames 19” components can be
mounted by means of the standard cage nuts. The front door
consists of a metal framework with hinges and a central security
glass. Front and rear doors shall be equipped with a lock system.
The side panels have to be equipped with a hinge on the left or the
right side in order to facilitate the access to the equipment. A 42 U
cabinet shall be provided unless otherwise specified, providing
enough space for active equipment.
b) The front and rear 19” frames shall not be painted as the frames
will be used to earth the network. Both frames can be installed in
three different positions to increase the free space between the
doors and the equipment front plates when necessary.
c) For an orderly cord storage and easy to manage installation, the

following accessories have to be used:
(1) Closed 1 or 2 U patch guides between the patch panels;
(2) Lateral cable rings installed at both sides of the frames. The
patch rings can be removed very easily by rotation and have
to be located on the front rails of the 19" frames in the
cabinets.
d) The cabinets shall be able to host all standard types of edge

switches and passive equipment and provide facilities for
extension to form a suite of cabinets with no modification to the
structure.
e) The rack shall have a fan tray on the top with at least four AC
powered blowout fans.
f) Cable management is a mandatory requirement in keeping the

patching facility tidy and manageable. Horizontal management
panels should be installed for every 2RU of patch panel, with each
panel having sufficient capacity for at least 50 patch leads.
g) Together with the vertical management side rings they provide an

environment for ongoing maintenance of all future patching and
enable moves and changes to be handled easily.
TS/65/11 2602542S/EL
h) Care should be taken to taken to ensure that undue strain is not
applied to the cables to tie wrap tension.
i) The racks shall meet the following general requirements:
(1) Each rack shall have a swing frame to accommodate 19"

width equipment and patch panels. It shall be designed with
the structure to take the entire weight of equipment/server
units mounted onto it. (Minimum weight: 1000 kg).
(2) The degree of swing to open position shall be such that

works can be carried out for connection and checking.
(3) The racks shall be used for all data cabling and equipment.
(4) Each rack shall have two (2) rows of 16-way UK 13A 3-pin
power bar for drawing power from the UPS.
(5) Each rack shall be capable of joining together as one single

cabinet.
(6) The Top Cover shall be raised to provide an opening for heat
dissipation.
(7) The Top Cover shall be provided with opening for cable
entry.
(8) Adjustable feet shall provide for height adjustment and for
levelling on uneven floors.
(9) The entire rack shall be powder coated to white colour.
(10) The design of the rack shall conform to IEC 297-2, DIN
41494-7 and BS 5954-2.
(11) There shall be individual ELCBs for every power socket on

the rack for easy fault isolation of power trip.
(12) The racks shall have sturdy brackets for physical cable
management to allow easy access to each modular
connectors and punch-down block connectors.
(13) The cabinets shall have lockable swinging with minimum

80% perforation metal door (Front and back). The door
thickness shall be minimum 2mm thick.
(14) The racks shall have metallic bar strap for grounding
purpose.
(15) The cabinet shall be supplied fully assembled.
(16) The racks shall have heavy duty castor wheels.
TS/65/12 2602542S/EL
j) Trunk cross-connect and distribution cross-connect including the
termination to the intelligent hub in the LAN Room shall be
provided.
k) All cross-connect blocks for fibre optic cable termination and all the
necessary fibre optic patch cords shall be provided. All cables shall
be factory terminated and tested with LC connectors.
l) The metallic grounding bar strap provided in the racks shall be

connected to the earthing bar for building grounding.
4.3 Labelling and Identification
Labelling shall be done for the rack mounted panels, both fibre and Cat
6A UTP, to the approved convention.
5. TESTING AND COMMISIONING
5.1. Site Acceptance Test
a) The manufacturer of the cabling system shall provide copper (Data)

and optical fibre testing procedures that clearly describes the tools
and settings to be used to ensure correct measurements of the
system.
b) All cables shall be tested and conformed to the requirements as

specified in the Specification.
c) All the connections, Cat 6A UTP cables, fibre optic cables shall be
individually tested after installation. Accurate records of all tests
shall be made, test certificates and a schedule of the test results in
an approved form shall be furnished. One copy of such record and
of each test certificate shall be submitted for review.
d) All materials, devices and equipment supplied or erected which

failed the tests shall be replaced or rectified at once without
additional cost to the Employer and the tests shall be repeated.
(1) Data Copper Testing
a. 100 % of the installed horizontal links have to be

tested. The installation has to comply with the ISO/IEC
11801 or EIA/TIA 568-C2, and be in accordance with
the field testing procedure of the manufacturer.
b. Link testing is required in accordance with the updated

EN 50174 cabling standard.
TS/65/13 2602542S/EL
c. Channel testing is only permitted if the actual cords
used to create the channel are used and installed in
the as-built configuration.
d. The cabling system shall to be tested against ISO

Class EA link limits.
e. The measurements shall be done using Level IV

testing equipment.
f. The testing equipment must be yearly calibrated by the

manufacturer and the copy of the calibration certificate
must be included in the warranty request.
g. The following parameters have to be tested:
(A) Wire-map
(B) Continuity
(C) Signal conductors
(D) Short circuits
(E) Open circuits
(F) Length
(G) Internal transmission return loss
(H) Insertion loss
(I) Pair-to-pair NEXT
(J) PSNEXT
(K) Pair-to-pair ACR-N
(L) PSACR-N
(M) Pair-to-pair SCR-F
(N) PSACR-F
(O) Direct current (d.c) loop resistance
(P) Propagation delay
(Q) Delay skew
h. The complete test results of all the installed channels

have to be collected in a certification file and in
electronic format to facilitate the certification
procedure.
i. Apart from all the test results mentioned above, a few

more documents have to be added to the file: a list of
material used for the project, a design of the network, a
cable schedule per distributor and finally all the
necessary contact details of the persons responsible
for the project.
TS/65/14 2602542S/EL
6. DOCUMENTATION
The sub contractor shall engage the manufacturer/supplier and submit all the
certificate of the installation on the installed system, testing and commissioning report
on the optic fibre.
7. TRAINING
7.1. The sub contractor shall provide sufficient sessions of comprehensive

training and training materials in the proper and effective use, operation
and maintenance of the Computer Cabling System.
7.2. The syllabus of each training session shall include, but not limited to the
following topics:
a) Overview of computer cabling systems
b) Computer cabling design adopted for this development
c) Description of products used in the computer cabling system
d) Layout of LAN Room, 19" (480 mm) rack cabinet, etc.
e) Labelling plan and colour coding scheme
f) Fault management
TS/65/15 2602542S/EL
SECTION 66 - COMPUTER CABLINGS (CAT 6A / CLASS EA – F/FTP) COPPER
1. GENERAL
1.1. This section sets out the requirements for supply, install, testing and
commissioning and defects liability for CAT 6A / CLASS EA Foil Shielded
Twisted Pair (F/FTP) computer structured cabling system and associated
works.
1.2. The cabling system shall support implementing a single structured wiring
infrastructure and complete integrated multi-media communication networking
system, which includes text, graphics, images, voice and video.
1.3. The system shall:
c) Facilitate expansion from the initial proposed system by only the


growth.
1.4. The cabling system shall be expected to have a life span of at least 25 years
and it shall have provision to support future growth requirements and
increasing needs for higher bandwidth.
1.5. The cables and installation shall meets to the standards and regulations :
d) BS EN 50174-1: Information technology. Cabling installation.

Installation specification and quality assurance
e) BS EN 50174-3: Installation technology. Cabling installation.

Installation planning and practices outside buildings
f) EIA/TIA-492-AAAB: Detail Specification for 50-µm Core

Diameter/125-µm Cladding Diameter Class Ia Graded-Index
Multimode Optical Fibers
TS/66/1 2602542S/EL
g) EIA/TIA 568C.0: Generic Telecommunications Cabling for
Customer Premises
h) EIA/TIA 568C.1: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

Standard
i) EIA/TIA 569-A: The Design and Installation Requirements
j) EIA/TIA 606: Administration Standard for Telecommunications

k) EIA/TIA 607: Grounding and Bonding Requirements for

l) IEC 60793-2-10:Optical fibres - Part 2-10: Product specifications -

Sectional specification for category A1 multimode fibres
m) IEEE 802.3: IEEE Standard for Ethernet
n) IEEE 802.5: IEEE Standard for Local Area Networks: Token Ring
o) ISO/IEC 11801: 2nd Edition, Amendment 2 International Standards.

Information technology – Generic cabling for customer premises
1.6. The manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 Quality Management System
in the design, manufacture and assembly of the structured cabling system.
2. SUBMISSIONS
2.1 Sub-Contractor shall submit all the necessary documents and sample for
approval by engineer before carry out the installation
a) Detailed products specification. Conformity and test reports.
b) Certificate of Approved/Certified Installer granted by the manufacturer.
c) Samples of cables, patch cords, connectors, patch panels, power

bars, cable management.
d) Statement of Method of Work. Schedule of execution with the

expected start and end dates.
e) Detailed layout plans, schematic diagrams, LAN Room layout,

rack/cabinet mounting details, details of rack system complete with
patch panels, cable management, power bars, earth bars, etc.
2.2 Sub-Contractor shall submit all the necessary documents, drawing and
operation manual after the work completion
TS/66/2 2602542S/EL
a) Installation details.
b) Testing and commissioning procedures.
c) Proposed numbering and labelling scheme.
d) Certification file.
e) As-built plans and test reports.
2.3 Warranty
a) A 25 year passive product warranty for the Structured Cabling

System backed by the Manufacturer and a 25-year application
assurance on the application described in this Technical
Specification, from the date of Certified Practical Completion of the
Contract.
b) The following copper and fibre sub-system warranties apply to

both standard and intelligent products.
(1) Copper and fibre patch cords are considered as replaceable

items and are specifically excluded from the 25 year product
guarantee due to the normal wear and tear that can occur.
(2) Copper sub-system
a. The manufacturer must guarantee that the products

referenced within the specific Warranty Modules (Class
EA System) when correctly installed in accordance
with installation guidelines:
i) Will be free from product defects in materials and

workmanship.
ii) Are guaranteed to exceed
· Class EA Channel and Permanent Link as
specified in ISO/IEC 11801:2002/A1:2008 and
A2:2010
· Augmented Cat 6 Link and Channel
requirements as specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA-
568-C.2:2009
iii) Supports the following application (not limited):
· 10baseT Ethernet
· 100baseTX Fast Ethernet
· 1000baseTX Gigabit Ethernet
· 10G base-T Ethernet IEEE 802.3an
· 155Mbit ATM
· 1.2Gbit ATM
TS/66/3 2602542S/EL
iv) For a duration of 25 years.
v) Provide a guaranteed headroom

· of at least 10 dB on A-NEXT
· of at least 15 dB on A-ELFEXT
b. All components including the Cat6A patch cords have

to be produced by the same cabling system
manufacturer to ensure warranted performances and
applications against the standards.
3. MATERIALS AND SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
3.1. Cable Distribution Subsystem
a) The cable distribution subsystem described herein includes the

computer outlets (RJ45 jacks) in the work area as well as the
cables and transition connectors installed between outlets and
RJ45 patch panels in the LAN Room. In addition, the cabling
system shall be made up of various modular patch panels, patch
cords used to configure horizontal cable connections in the LAN
Room.
b) The cable distribution subsystem shall consist at a minimum of the

following:
i) RJ45 Cat 6A jacks and outlets unless otherwise specified
ii) 4-pair Cat 6A F/FTP non-plenum cables unless otherwise

specified
iii) 12 core multi-mode non-plenum fibre optic cables
iv) Cable labelling and identification consistent with

ANSI/EIA/TIA 606
v) RJ45 patch panels
vi) Fibre Patch Panel
vii) 3 metre length Cat 6A U/FTP patch cords complete with

RJ45 jack at both ends which shall be factory terminated
and tested
TS/66/4 2602542S/EL
3.2. Copper Sub-system
a) This specification covers the design, supply, installation, testing and

commissioning of a Category 6A cabling system.
b) The Category 6A universal cabling system shall function for voice,

data and LAN communications, for video applications etc.
c) The cabling system is also open to new applications which require

a Class EA / Cat 6A cabling system as defined in the latest editions
of the standards: ISO/IEC11801:2002/A1: 2008 and A2:2010 and
EIA/TIA 568-C2.
d) The terminology and references in this document as well as the

Link/Channel Performance figures for Class EA are based on
ISO/IEC 11801:2002/A1:2008 and EIA/TIA 568-C2.
e) All proposed components including the patch cords have to be

produced by the same manufacturer.
3.3. System Performance
a) Horizontal Cabling
(1) Horizontal distribution cable
a. The horizontal 4 pair cable shall be Category 6A F/FTP

to meet the quality and performance criteria necessary
to ensure correct operation of the installation for
frequencies up to 500 MHz and to ensure the
b. The installation design and routing of all cables shall

take account of the manufacturer limits for the
continued performance of the cables and the
c. The cable shall be a 4 twisted pair cable with AWG 23

conductors. Having an external sheathing in a material
that does not give off toxic fumes (Zero Halogen) in
case of fire and offer flame propagation retardant
properties. The cable shall be compliant to the IEC
60332-1 standard.
d. Traceability numbers should accompany the cable

supplied from the manufacturers packaging to
assist in quality validation of the installed cable.
e. In order to provide alien cross-talk (AXT) immunity

for 10 GBASE-T Ethernet transmission, the use of
screened cable is mandatory.
TS/66/5 2602542S/EL
f. Independent certification shall be provided by the
manufacturer to show compliance to ISO/IEC
11801:2002/ A1 2008 and A2/2010 or EIA/TIA
568-C2 Channel headroom requirements for both
Alien NEXT (A-NEXT) and Alien FEXT (A-FEXT)
parameters.
g. This high performance cable shall have an

individual and a common screen construction to
ensure immunity from Alien Crosstalk and other
external interference up to 500 MHz.
h. All four pairs shall be individually screened with an

aluminium foil.
i. The overall cable shall be screened with a

complementary aluminium foil.
j. All pairs must have a fitted impedance of 100

Ohms, with a tolerance of +/- 5 Ohms.
k. Conductor pairs shall be identified by insulation

utilising standardised colour code (Blue/White,
Orange/White, Green/White, Brown/White).
l. The Cat.6A cable shall comply to the following

electrical performances.
m. Maximum and Minimum values shall be warranted

by the manufacturer.
Electrical Performance Cat.6A F/FTP cable

Att PS ACR-F PS ANEXT PS AACR-F
Frequency n NEXT (dB) PSNEXT (dB) ACR-F (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) RL (dB)
MHz Max Typ Min. Typ. Min. Typ. Min. Typ. Min. Typ. Min. Typ. Min. Typ. Min. Typ.
1 2.1 2.1 74.3 104.3 72.3 102.3 67.8 92.8 64.8 >60 67.0 90.0 67.0 87.9 20.0 26.0
4 3.8 3.8 65.3 95.3 63.3 93.3 55.8 80.8 52.8 57.2 67.0 90.0 66.2 75.9 23.0 29.0
10 5.9 5.9 59.3 89.3 57.3 87.3 47.8 72.8 44.8 49.3 67.0 87.0 58.2 67.9 25.0 31.0
16 7.5 7.5 56.2 86.2 54.2 84.2 43.7 68.7 40.7 45.2 67.0 85.0 54.1 63.8 25.0 31.0
20 8.4 8.4 54.8 84.8 52.8 82.8 41.8 66.8 38.8 43.2 67.0 84.0 52.2 61.9 25.0 31.0
31.25 10.5 10.5 51.9 81.9 49.9 79.9 37.9 62.9 34.9 39.4 67.0 82.1 48.3 58.0 23.6 29.6
62.5 15.0 15.0 47.4 77.4 45.4 75.4 31.9 56.9 28.9 33.3 65.6 79.0 42.3 52.0 21.5 27.5
100 19.1 19.1 44.3 74.3 42.3 72.3 27.8 52.8 24.8 29.3 62.5 77.0 38.2 47.9 20.1 26.1
155 24.1 24.1 41.4 71.4 39.4 69.4 24.0 49.0 21.0 25.5 59.6 74.1 34.4 44.1 18.8 24.8
200 27.6 27.6 39.8 69.8 37.8 67.8 21.8 46.8 18.8 23.2 58.0 72.5 32.2 41.9 18.0 24.0
250 31.1 31.1 38.3 68.3 36.3 66.3 19.8 44.8 16.8 21.3 56.5 71.0 30.2 39.9 17.3 23.3
300 34.3 34.3 37.1 67.1 35.1 65.1 18.3 43.3 15.3 19.7 55.3 69.8 28.7 38.4 16.8 22.8
500 45.3 45.3 33.8 63.8 31.8 61.8 13.8 38.8 10.8 15.3 52.0 66.5 24.2 33.9 15.2 21.2
(2) Modular RJ45 Jack
a. The RJ45 snap-in connector shall be fully screened to

ensure protection against EMI and for Alien cross-talk
compliance. Connectors shall also provide termination
facilities for the drain wire of some screened cable.
b. The connector shall be fully compliant to the IEC

60603-7-51 standard that defines the Cat.6A connector
to be used to form a Class EA channel as specified in
the ISO/IEC 11801:2002/A2:2010 standard.
TS/66/6 2602542S/EL
c. Independent certification shall be provided by the
manufacturer to demonstrate full compliance to the
IEC 60603-7-51 standard.
d. Each connector shall provide both T568A and T568B

colour code identification for the IDC contacts at the
rear of the connector. Termination is to be in
accordance with the T568B colour code.
Reassignment of pairs is forbidden.
e. All conductors from the 4 pair cable are to be

terminated on the respective contacts.
f. To avoid installation errors, pair assignment in the wire

organiser of the Snap-In jack must be identified using
colours which match the cable pairs.
g. The Snap-In format of the connector shall make it

compatible with the whole range of modular structural
hardware including patch panels, outlets and CP
boxes.
h. All RJ45 connectors shall be reusable. When the RJ45

connectors are to be reused, this shall be done in a
safe and reliable way. For this reason, a tool specially
developed by the manufacturer shall be used.
i. In the case of a 3 or 4 connector Channel with

Consolidation Point (CP), a specific version of
connector having IDC contacts suitable for the
termination of stranded cable shall be used at the TO
and/or at the presentation panel.
(3) Telecom Outlet and Computer Outlet
a. UK format 86x86mm cover plate shall be proposed.

Angled (45x45) faceplate outlet modules are fitted with
removable shutters, which can be replaced by colour-
coded shutters (red, green, blue, yellow) available from
the manufacturer standard product range.
b. The presentation of the outlet shall provide for labelling

and identification. A transparent window shall protect
the labelling tag.
c. The choice between single and dual RJ45 outlet

modules shall be provided.
(4) 24 port modular copper Patch Panels
a. Patch panels must have 19" equipment practice

dimensions to permit mounting in standard cabinets,
racks or bays.
TS/66/7 2602542S/EL
b. Angled patch panels have been selected to eliminate
the need for additional cable management and support
high density patching.
c. Unloaded angled 24 port Snap-in format (Modular)

patch panels in white colour fitted with white shutters to
protect the RJ45 ports shall be used.
d. Optional coloured shutters need to be available to

easily indicate different services when required.
e. The panels features a screen printed numbering

systems for labelling.
f. Each patch panel shall provide a means to locate and

clamp the incoming cables without causing damage to
the cable or affecting the performance of the Link. The
snap-in mechanism shall also ensure the automatic
earthing of the screened connectors.
g. The installer must avoid any risk of cable compression

during the installation or termination of the cables.
h. The dimensions of the patch panel shall be 19" 1 U

high, depth 75mm.
(5) Patch cords
a. To achieve a Class EA Channel performance all data

patch cords shall be Category 6A rated.
b. The patch cord cable shall be made from LSZH

material with a print legend indicating type of cable,
brand name, production code and metre mark.
c. All patch cords shall be compliant to the IEC 60332-1

standard to offer flame propagation retardant
properties.
d. All data patch cords shall be fully screened.
e. The standard colours offered for the LSZH flame

retardant jacket shall be orange and dark grey.
f. Red, Blue, Green and Yellow colours shall also be

g. The default lengths available from stock shall be 1, 2,

3, 5, 10 and 20m. in order to ensure quick delivery of
the cords on site. Other lengths shall be available on
demand.
TS/66/8 2602542S/EL
h. The patch cords feature a slim over-moulded boot
which is kept inside the RJ45 boundaries to enable
High Density Patching with 48 cords in 1 height unit.
i. They also come with a ‘Replaceable’ black Latch

Protector, which can be used for colour coding of
different services.
j. The coloured retrofit latch protectors shall be available

as accessory in 8 colours for colour coding of different
services.
k. The cords shall be fitted with Category 6A RJ45

screened plugs, with a Self-latching, high reliable RJ45
(ISO 8877) connector. All pairs must have an
impedance of 100 Ohms. The characteristic
impedance of the pairs must be identical to that of the
horizontal cables. The patch cords shall have a
guaranteed performance level of greater than 750
insertions without degradation to the performance level
of the solution.
l. The cable used for the patch cords shall be Category

6A LSZH U/FTP patch cable. The cable shall be a 4
twisted pair cable with individually screened stranded
conductors. Traceability numbers should accompany
the cables supplied from the manufacturers packaging
to assist in quality validation of the installed cable.
m. When used with the LANmark-6 system, Cat 6/Class E

channel performance complies with the channel limits
of TIA/EIA-568-C2 and ISO/IEC 11801:2002/A2:21010
and it exceeds the requirements of the ISO/IEC 4-
connector model.
(6) Link and Channel performance
a. Manufacturer shall demonstrate guaranteed minimum

worst-case (4-connector Link) performance to be
compliant with class EA link and channel performance
according to the ISO/IEC 11801:2002/A1:2008 and
A2/2010 and EIA/TIA 568-C2.
b. Components used must be compliant with the

Category 6A standards mentioned above and the
manufacturer has to demonstrate independent Delta
verification.
c. The system supplier must be able to demonstrate in

house design and manufacturing expertise for all
components used (e.g. cables, outlets, panels and
cords) in order to ensure compatibility of system
elements.
TS/66/9 2602542S/EL
d. Regarding short links, the standard channel
performance shall be warranted for a 10 meters / 3
connectors link with 5 meters of cable length for both
patch panel to Consolidation Point and Consolidation
Point to Terminal Outlet segments.
e. When using the best grade of Cat.6A patch cords

available from the cabling system manufacturer, the
latter must guarantee an additional minimum channel
margin of +2dB NEXT (4 connector channel
configuration).
f. The Cat.6A channel shall comply to the following

electrical performances.
TS/66/10 2602542S/EL
g. Maximum and Minimum values shall be warranted by
the manufacturer.
Electrical Performance Cat.6A - 4 Connector Channel - Part 1

Frequency Attn NEXT (dB) PSNEXT (dB) ACR-F (dB)
MHz Max Typ Std Min Typ Std Min Typ Std Typ
1 <4 4.0 65.0 67.0 85.0 62.0 64.0 74.8 63.3 69.9
4 4.1 4.1 63.0 65.0 72.9 60.5 62.5 65.0 51.2 57.9
10 6.4 6.3 56.6 58.6 65.0 54.0 56.0 58.5 43.3 49.9
16 8.1 8.0 53.2 55.2 60.9 50.6 52.6 55.1 39.2 45.9
20 9.1 9.0 51.6 53.6 59.0 49.0 51.0 53.5 37.2 43.9
31.25 11.4 11.2 48.4 50.4 55.1 45.7 47.7 50.2 33.4 40.0
62.5 16.3 15.9 43.4 45.4 49.1 40.6 42.6 45.1 27.3 34.0
100 20.8 20.2 39.9 41.9 45.0 37.1 39.1 41.6 23.3 29.9
155 26.2 25.4 36.7 38.7 41.2 33.8 35.8 38.3 19.5 26.1
200 30.0 28.9 34.8 36.8 39.0 31.9 33.9 36.4 17.2 23.9
250 33.8 32.5 33.1 35.1 37.0 30.2 32.2 34.7 15.3 22.0
300 37.3 35.7 31.7 33.7 35.4 28.8 30.8 33.3 13.7 20.4
500 49.3 46.7 27.9 29.9 31.0 24.8 26.8 24.9 9.3 16.0
h. All values are based on Worst Case 4 Connector

Channel configurations according to ISO11801:2002/
A1:2008.
i. Standard values are based on ISO11801:2002/A1:

2008 Class EA.
j. Minimal and maximum values represent guaranteed

channel performance.
Electrical Performance Cat.6A - 4 Connector Channel - Part 2

Frequency PS ACR-F (DB) PS ANEXT (dB) PS AACR-F (dB) RL (dB)
MHz Std Typ Std Min Typ Std Min Typ Std Min Typ
1 60.3 66.9 80.0 90.0 92.0 77.0 92.0 94.0 19.0 21.0 21.0
4 48.2 54.9 74.0 89.0 91.0 65.0 80.0 82.0 19.0 21.0 32.0
10 40.3 46.9 70.0 85.0 87.0 57.0 72.0 74.0 19.0 21.0 28.0
16 36.2 42.9 68.0 83.0 85.0 52.9 67.9 69.9 18.0 20.0 26.0
20 34.2 40.9 67.0 82.0 84.0 51.0 66.0 68.0 17.5 19.5 25.0
31.25 30.4 37.0 65.1 80.1 82.1 47.1 62.1 64.1 16.5 18.5 23.1
62.5 24.3 31.0 62.0 77.0 79.0 41.1 56.1 58.1 14.0 16.0 20.0
100 20.3 26.9 60.0 75.0 77.0 37.0 52.0 54.0 12.0 14.0 18.0
155 16.5 23.1 57.1 72.1 74.1 33.2 48.2 50.2 10.1 12.1 16.1
200 14.2 20.9 55.5 70.5 72.5 31.0 46.0 48.0 9.0 11.0 15.0
250 12.3 19.0 54.0 69.0 71.0 29.0 44.0 46.0 8.0 10.0 14.0
300 10.7 17.4 52.8 67.8 69.8 27.5 42.5 44.5 8.0 10.0 13.2
500 6.3 13.0 49.5 64.5 66.5 23.0 38.0 40.0 8.0 10.0 11.0
TS/66/11 2602542S/EL
4. EXECUTION
4.1. Installation
a) Apart from complying to the standards as specified, the installation

of the computer cabling system shall also comply to the installation
guidelines as recommended by the cable manufacturer.
b) The installation of the cabling system shall comply with the

following requirements:
(1) All cable pairs shall be tested end to end to ensure continuity
and absence of tip/ring reversals, as well as cable pair fault
clearance prior to installation. These test results shall be
provided in traceable format and submitted as certifications
of tests performed on the systems.
(2) No cable joints are allowed
(3) All cables shall be installed such that they are not bent
through radii, less than a minimum bending radii specified by
the manufacturer.
c) All the components have to be installed according to the

procedures prescribed by the cabling systems manufacturer.
d) The installer has to closely follow the local regulations concerning

fire protection. The integrity of the fire barrier has to be maintained
or restored.
e) For the earthing of all the proposed products, the installer has to
closely follow the related recommendations of the supplier, in
accordance with local regulations. The earthing procedure that has
to be followed shall be put at the disposal by the supplier under an
official document.
f) The grounding system shall conform to NEC, ANSI/TIA/EIA-607,

local and other latest relevant requirements.
g) The grounding system for the entire telecommunication system

shall be continuous throughout. All grounding cables from each
19" (480 mm) rack cabinets shall be terminated in the main copper
earthing bar in each LAN Room.
4.2. Cabinet and Cable Management in LAN Rooms
a) The metal cabinets shall have a footprint of 800x800 mm. In the

frames 19” components can be mounted by means of the standard
cage nuts. The front door consists of a metal framework with
hinges and a central security glass. Front and rear doors shall be
equipped with a lock system. The side panels have to be equipped
with a hinge on the left or the right side in order to facilitate the
access to the equipment. A 42 U cabinet is requested providing
enough space for active equipment.
TS/66/12 2602542S/EL
b) The front and rear 19” frames shall not be painted as the frames
will be used to earth the network. Both frames can be installed in
three different positions to increase the free space between the
doors and the equipment front plates when necessary.
c) For an orderly cord storage and easy to manage installation, the

following accessories have to be used:
(1) Closed 1 or 2 U patch guides between the patch panels;
(2) Lateral cable rings installed at both sides of the frames. The
patch rings can be removed very easily by rotation and have
to be located on the front rails of the 19" frames in the
cabinets.
d) The cabinets shall be able to host all standard types of edge

switches and passive equipment and provide facilities for
extension to form a suite of cabinets with no modification to the
structure.
e) Optionally, the cabinets can be supplied with up to 8 fans (240VAC)

for expelling air, approximately 220W each.
f) Cable management is a mandatory requirement in keeping the

patching facility tidy and manageable. Horizontal management
panels should be installed for every 2RU of patch panel, with each
panel having sufficient capacity for at least 50 patch leads.
g) Together with the vertical management side rings they provide an

environment for ongoing maintenance of all future patching and
enable moves and changes to be handled easily.
h) All cables shall be supported at minimum intervals of 300 mm, on

cable trays mounted vertically in the riser space. Care should be
taken to taken to ensure that undue strain is not applied to the
cables to tie wrap tension.
i) The racks shall meet the following general requirements:
(1) Each rack shall have a swing frame to accommodate 19"

width equipment and patch panels. It shall be designed with
the structure to take the entire weight of equipment/server
units mounted onto it. (Minimum weight: 1000 kg).
(2) The degree of swing to open position shall be such that

works can be carried out for connection and checking.
(3) The racks shall be used for all data cabling and equipment.
(4) Each rack shall be provided with 2 nos. 32-Amp DP isolators

complete with cabling.
TS/66/13 2602542S/EL
(5) Each rack shall have two (2) rows of 16-way UK 13A 3-pin
power bar for drawing power from the UPS.
(6) Each rack shall be capable of joining together as one single

cabinet.
(7) The Top Cover shall be raised to provide an opening for heat
dissipation.
(8) The Top Cover shall be provided with opening for cable
entry.
(9) Adjustable feet shall provide for height adjustment and for
levelling on uneven floors.
(10) The entire rack shall be powder coated to white colour.
(11) The design of the rack shall conform to IEC 297-2, DIN
41494-7 and BS 5954-2.
(12) There shall be individual ELCBs for every power socket on

the rack for easy fault isolation of power trip.
(13) The racks shall have sturdy brackets for physical cable
management to allow easy access to each modular
connectors and punch-down block connectors.
(14) The cabinets shall have lockable swinging with minimum

80% perforation metal door (Front and back). The door
thickness shall be minimum 2mm thick.
(15) The racks shall have metallic bar strap for grounding
purpose.
(16) The cabinet shall be supplied fully assembled.
(17) The racks shall have heavy duty castor wheels.
j) Trunk cross-connect and distribution cross-connect including the

termination to the intelligent hub in the LAN Room shall be
provided.
k) All cross-connect blocks for fibre optic cable termination and all the
necessary fibre optic patch cords shall be provided. All cables shall
be factory terminated and tested with ST connectors.
l) The metallic grounding bar strap provided in the racks shall be

connected to the earthing bar for building grounding.
4.3. Labelling and Identification
Labelling shall be done for the rack mounted panels, both fibre and Cat
6A F/FTP, to the approved convention.
TS/66/14 2602542S/EL
5. TESTING AND COMMISIONING
5.1. Site Acceptance Test
a) The manufacturer of the cabling system shall provide copper (Data)

and optical fibre testing procedures that clearly describes the tools
and settings to be used to ensure correct measurements of the
system.
b) All cables shall be tested and conformed to the requirements as

specified in the Specification.
c) All the connections, Cat 6A F/FTP cables, fibre optic cables shall
be individually tested after installation. Accurate records of all tests
shall be made, test certificates and a schedule of the test results in
an approved form shall be furnished. One copy of such record and
of each test certificate shall be submitted for review.
d) All materials, devices and equipment supplied or erected which

failed the tests shall be replaced or rectified at once without
additional cost to the Employer and the tests shall be repeated.
(1) Data Copper Testing
a. 100 % of the installed horizontal links have to be

tested. The installation has to comply with the ISO/IEC
11801:2002/A1:2008 and A2:2010 or EIA/TIA 568-C2,
and be in accordance with the field testing procedure
of the manufacturer.
b. Link testing is required in accordance with the updated

EN 50174:2010 cabling standard.
c. Channel testing is only permitted if the actual cords

used to create the channel are used and installed in
the as-built configuration.
d. The cabling system shall to be tested against ISO

Class EA link limits.
e. The measurements shall be done using Level IV

testing equipment.
f. The testing equipment must be yearly calibrated by the

manufacturer and the copy of the calibration certificate
must be included in the warranty request.
TS/66/15 2602542S/EL
g. The following parameters have to be tested:
A) Wire-map
B) Continuity
C) Signal conductors
D) Screen conductors (if present)
E) Short circuits
F) Open circuits
G) Length
H) Internal transmission return loss
I) Insertion loss
J) Pair-to-pair NEXT
K) PSNEXT
L) Pair-to-pair ACR-N
M) PSACR-N
N) Pair-to-pair SCR-F
O) PSACR-F
P) Direct current (d.c) loop resistance
Q) Propagation delay
R) Delay skew
h. The PSANEXT, PSANEXTavg, PSAACR-F, and

PSAACR-Favg (A-NEXT and A-ELFEXT) may not
require to be tested for screened cabling systems. The
conformance to those Alien crosstalk parameters is
met by design for screened systems in accordance
with ISO11801:2002:A2/2010.
i. The complete test results of all the installed channels

have to be collected in a certification file and in
electronic format to facilitate the certification
procedure.
j. Apart from all the test results mentioned above, a few

more documents have to be added to the file: a list of
material used for the project, a design of the network, a
cable schedule per distributor and finally all the
necessary contact details of the persons responsible
for the project.
6. DOCUMENTATION
The sub contractor shall engage the manufacturer/supplier and submit all the
certificate of the installation on the installed system, testing and commissioning report
on the optic fibre.
TS/66/16 2602542S/EL
7. TRAINING
7.1. The sub contractor shall provide sufficient sessions of comprehensive

training and training materials in the proper and effective use, operation
and maintenance of the Computer Cabling System.
7.2. The syllabus of each training session shall include, but not limited to the
following topics:
a) Overview of computer cabling systems
b) Computer cabling design adopted for this development
c) Description of products used in the computer cabling system
d) Layout of LAN Room, 19" (480 mm) rack cabinet, etc.
e) Labelling plan and colour coding scheme
f) Fault management
TS/66/17 2602542S/EL
SECTION 67 – LIGHTING AND ROOM MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
1. General
1.1 The Sub-contractor shall engage a Specialist for this part of the works i.e.
to design, supply, install, test and commission the complete Lighting
Control System, Power monitoring and status monitoring of switchboards,
distribution board, generator and Handicap call bell as per but not limited to
this Technical Specifications, Design Parameters and Tender Drawings.
1.2 This Section of the Sub-contract includes complete Specialist Design,

Supply, Delivery, Termination, Testing and Commissioning of the Lighting
Control System’s devices and Control Schedules necessary for the proper
installation and functioning of the Lighting Control System in this part of the
sub-contract.
1.3 The Sub-contractor shall engage a Specialist for this part of the works and
submit the name of the Specialist in the tender for S.O.’s approval.
1.4 The required and accepted Lighting Control System shall be strictly
configured as per but not limited to this Technical Specifications, Design
Parameters and Tender Drawings. Any alternative proposed and offered is
not acceptable unless otherwise approved by the S.O.
1.5 The Building shall be equipped with a lighting management system and
room management system providing flexible and efficient control and
management of the whole lighting and HVAC installation from a centralized
location.
1.6 The system shall separated into two (2) system, lighting management
system and room management system with different server, monitor,
control, mobile phone application and software.
1.7 All devices connected to the system, such as switches, sensors, actuators,
displays, control units, dimmers etc. can exchange information via this
system. All devices shall be able to select freely and are interactive
between one another. These devices shall be able to be programmed to
perform its present specific tasks as required by the project and with the
flexibilities in changing its desired tasks to meet the End Users’
requirement at any time in the future.
1.8 All devices shall be able to being programmed to any specific tasks or
different loads and also provide flexibility in changing its tasks or loads at
any time.
1.9 The entire system shall be able to control and monitoring through a third
party mobile phone application.
TS/67/1 2602542S/EL
1.10 It should be a non-proprietary open protocol system with distributed
intelligent or multi processor system with micro-processor on each control
device. If a device should fail, only the functions associated with that device
may be lost while other devices on the system are not affected.
1.11 The system shall allow any brand of Internet of Things and Artificial
Intelligent to be interfaced without the need to expand any of the system or
add -in controller.
1.12 The lighting and power circuits should be wired in a topology that meets the
wiring regulation for a conventional ON/OFF switching control and also to
be automation ready using a non-proprietary protocol system.
1.13 The system shall be expandable and not limited or having constraint to
specific lighting fixtures or type of lamps. Switching actuator shall be
suitable and rated for inductive lamp load switching. Design of by-pass
and/or isolation switching shall be stipulated in the proposal
1.14 The system shall use advanced graphical programming software

compatible with Microsoft Windows OS to enable the lighting operations to
be centrally programmed and adapted, with local controls available from
local wall switches. The entire system shall be centrally controlled and
monitored in real time. Lighting layouts shall detail the active status of each
relay.
1.15 The system shall be of IP web base access that can be easily interfaced
with third party and shall have gateway/bridges interfaces (BACNET, OPC)
for connectivity to other control LAN networks such as Integrated Building
Management/Automation System, Facility Booking System, Internet or
Intranet System.
1.16 The system shall not be based on a single centralized room-control unit.
Each device shall be able to perform the required functions directly in order
to prevent the global shutdown of the room in case of damage of single
unit.
1.17 The system shall compiled to SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) and should
consist of a dedicated 2-wire twisted pair 24VDC control cable (KNX/EIB
bus line), shielded from interference, with rated insulation voltage required
to meet the wiring regulation. Approved system should be KNX/EIB or
equivalent, which should be an open and non-proprietary system having
structure able to connect and operate compatible bus devices.
1.18 It should be a decentralized multi-master system with distributed

intelligence in all bus devices. The system shall not require a PC or any
other special control unit after testing and commissioning.
TS/67/2 2602542S/EL
1.19 The system shall be based on flush mounting and modular devices
aesthetically coordinate with wiring devices. These devices shall be
equipped with integrated bus interface for easy and fast installation, free
inputs and relay outputs in order to reduce the need for additional
terminals.
1.20 The backbone protocol of the system should be based on the KNX/EIB
system. The system shall be able to detect and control via wireless mobile
application
1.21 The system shall able improve for measuring, controlling, monitoring and
signaling all building services functions locally and remotely.
1.22 The control network system shall be able to tailor in order to suit the
modern electrical wiring system.
1.23 The system integrators should have support by the supplier and receive
training from certified training centre.
1.24 In the event of network failure, the sensor shall continue to works on the
last setting. The light shall be 100% turned up during any power failure to
controller or sensor
1.25 Sub-Contractor to have pre-installation mock up and demonstration the on

the system installation. It shall also demonstrate every level of work
involved include integration, connection, controller coding, decoding,
scanning, proper wiring connection method, self-connectivity check with
instrument and visual observation
1.26 The system shall be based on S-Mode KNX technology (international

standard for Home and Building Automation systems) in order to have:
(a) Interoperability with different brands
(b) Integration with other systems (for example HVAC systems)
(c) Easy modification of the system functions and products (from

different contractors with different brands) and easy extension of
installations
(d) maintenance over the years
(e) different kinds of cabling topologies (tree/star/mixed)
TS/67/3 2602542S/EL
2. Data Transmission and Communication
2.1 The data transmission rate should be least 9.6 Kbps and testing and
commissioning shall be through USB interface.
2.2 The system data rate shall be maximized up to 10/100 BaseT networks
compliant to IEEE802.3 using line or area couplers.
2.3 The transmission should be through a decentralized bus access CSMA/CA,

where in an event of collision detection or resolution there would be no loss
of telegrams.
2.4 The data communication should be based on the OSI (Open System
Interconnection) reference model.
3. Bus Cable
3.1 The insulation voltage of the bus cable with the system shall have
adequate protection to meet overvoltage requirement of the wiring
requirement.
3.2 The size of the bus cable should be 2X2X0.8 mm diameter with screen, J-
Y(st)Y 2x2x0.8. each able to withstand 2.5KV and 4KV insulation
respectively of the type of Bus Cable used.
3.3 Bus Cable shall be run in dedicated conduit or as specified. Sharing of

conduit with LV electrical circuits is not allowed.
3.4 The twisted pair bus cable should link all input devices such as switches,
push button, touch panels, motion sensors, light sensor, dimmers, shutter
switches, transponder card readers, brightness and temperature sensors,
movement detectors etc. and be connected to output devices such as
actuators (relays, lighting control devices, shutter motors etc ) switch
actuators, dimmer, brightness controllers, etc.
3.5 The bus cable should be able to handle information, data exchange and
supply 24 VDC power to all devices on the bus.
3.6 The topology should be linear, multi-point star or ring in structure.
TS/67/4 2602542S/EL
3.7 The basic installations shall include the following items:
(a) Room Touch Screen Control Panels
(b) Supervisory Touch Screen Control Panels
(c) System components and accessories. E.g. Data rails, Data

connector, IP Router, Power Supply, Data rail cover and Bus
connecting blocks.
(d) Switch Actuators and dimmer actuator for all kinds of lighting such
LED lighting, fluorescent lighting, incandescent lighting and halogen
lighting.
(e) Programmable touch screen panel switches with positive on and off
status indicators by LED lights. The configuration of switches varies
from 1-gang, 2-gang, 4-gang and 8-gang. A maximum of 5 switches
can be mounted into a single frame. These switch can be program
for the switching of other equipments such as HVAC, motorised
curtain etc.
(f) Control cable (2x2x0.8 mm, with adequate insulation) for signal
transmission.
(g) Scene/Mood Control programmable switch, shall be also configure
4. System Applications
4.1 Parameter lights along the glass façade shall be equipped with
daylight/presence sensor. These sensors should be able to achieve dual
functions of presence sensing and constant light level control. The sensor
can be used to measure the brightness level in rooms to achieve constant
lux level controls. They shall be switched off or dimmed if sufficient natural
light is enough to maintain the lux level or when no presence is detected.
4.2 Every light fixture shall be grouped with the sensor and generate a zoning
and address.
4.3 Microwave Presence sensors & motion sensors for control of Lights at all
Toilets as specified.
4.4 Daylight sensors for dimming control of Lights at Building’s Common

Corridors, Staircases, areas close to windows and as specified.
TS/67/5 2602542S/EL
4.5 Office shall be equipped with presence sensors with dimming controls. The
switches in the office shall be able to activate/ deactivate the presence
sensor. The switches shall be able to activate scenes or on/off/dim the
lights.
4.6 Open Laboratories shall be equipped with presence/daylight sensors with

dimming controls. The switches in the laboratories shall be able to activate/
deactivate the presence/daylight sensor. The switches shall be able to
activate scenes or on/off/dim the lights. When the brightness detected by
the sensors exceeds the predetermined Upper Threshold level, “Off” or
“Dim Down” Control Command shall be sent to the Switch Actuators or
Switch/-Dim Actuators respectively to manage the Lights in these areas
accordingly. Contrary, when the brightness detected falls below the Lower
Threshold, Lights are “On” or “Dim Up” accordingly. During off-peak hours,
the Presence Sensors start functioning, Lights shall be “On” throughout so
4.7 For Multi Purpose Rooms, the system shall be able to use the same control
switch to control individual partition of the room or all at once depending on
the partition condition as close or open between rooms. Dimming Controls
shall be provided for the Multi Purpose Room.
4.8 Lecture Theatres, Auditorium, Tutorial Rooms, Meeting Rooms,

Video/Presentation Conferencing Rooms and College/Seminar Rooms
shall be provided with dimming controls. The switches shall be able to
activate scenes or on/off/dim the lights. Wireless touch panels shall be
integrated with the lighting controls with the all the necessary controller to
interface to AV systems, Motorised Curtain/Blind systems, Motorized
Projector Screens, Security functions, Temperature sensors and many
more and not limited to only Lighting Control, thus providing End Users with
further flexibilities and possibilities of adding this requirement and functions
into the existing Control System at any time in the future.
4.9 Timer Control and motion microwave control for control of lights at External
Areas (eg. Landscape areas, pole light, bollard light), building common
areas, loading/unloading Bay, meeting rooms, Lecture Theaters, Seminar
rooms, Tutorial Rooms, College Rooms, Landscapes and as specified.
4.10 Room control of lights, switches, fan coil units, thermostat controller,
power, television, water heater presence / motion sensor, scenario, roller
shutter, curtain, and other power saving equipments.
TS/67/6 2602542S/EL
4.11 There shall be a main centralized control system capable of displaying,
monitoring and control.
4.12 The system should be able to incorporate energy saving features through
the use of timers, motion detectors, light sensors etc so that unnecessary
turning on of loads can be minimized.
4.13 The system devices should be able to communicate or control/monitor via

the existing Local Area Network (LAN), no need to install an additional
dedicated LAN.
4.14 The system should have rated actuators to facilitate the use of energy
saving bulbs or florescent tubes.
4.15 Time Schedules by the Lighting Management Station shall be set for Lights
at Building’s Common Areas, Landscapes and other areas as determined
by S.O. and End Users that requires “Time Control” to be “On” and “Off”
respectively as needed.
4.16 Programmable Switches with Scenes-Effecting type shall be provided at

each Seminar room/ LT and other locations as determined by the S.O. and
End Users to control On/Off/Dim the Lights in these areas and alternatively,
Light Scenes or Preset.
4.17 Dimming can be programmed as needed for easier and convenient control
of lights.
4.18 Microwave sensors shall be provided for all Toilets and to be only
effectively sensing for moments after peak hours of the building operation
whereby, the Lighting Management Station shall sends a Time Schedule
Control Command to enable and disable these presence sensors from
functioning.
4.19 During peak hours, Lights in the Toilets shall always be “On” and when the
microwave Sensors start functioning, Lights shall be “On” throughout so
4.20 Building’s Common Corridors with ample natural lights and other areas as
determined by the S.O. and End Users shall be provided with Daylight
Sensor control. When the brightness detected by the sensors exceeds the
predetermined Upper Threshold level, “Off” or “Dim Down” Control
Command shall be sent to the Switch Actuators or Switch/-Dim Actuators
respectively to manage the Lights in these areas accordingly. Contrary,
when the brightness detected falls below the Lower Threshold, Lights are
“On” or “Dim Up” accordingly.
TS/67/7 2602542S/EL
4.21 Smart Plug Load monitoring and control. Base on wireless Mesh network
to enable the communication between a Mobile application or Laptop with
the Plug Load for the control, setting, collect of data with built in calendar,
power meter and with cut out function to the power supply.
4.22 Microwave sensor for car park lighting and monitoring.
4.23 Technology applications for Human or equipment tracking, Location Way

finding, public transport location, Car position tracing where applicable.
4.24 The system shall be capable to integrate with other new application in the
future.
5. Modular Bus Devices
5.1 All bus devices should be made according to DIN EN 50022 and suitable
for mounting on 35-mm DIN-rail mounting rail.
5.2 Each bus device should have a built-in micro-controller with programmable
Physical Address. The Physical Address should have the capability to be
re-programmable.
5.3 The bus lines should be able to incorporate up to 64 bus devices

connected and these lines should be able to be grouped up to 12 lines
together via line couplers to form an area.
5.4 The switch actuator for lighting control should have a rating of 16AX and
16A AC3 or AC5a utilization category with individual mechanical bypass
switch built into the actuator for each channel.
5.5 Switch actuator shall at each channel be able to feedback the status of the
contact and load.
5.6 The Switch Actuators shall have up to 400,000 times of switching operation
for each channel/output at rated current and up to 1,000,000 times without
load. Verification Report and Certification from manufacturer shall be
provided upon request by the S.O. prior to approval.
5.7 No special digital addressable electronic ballast is needed for all the light
fittings. The switch actuator should be able to control the conventional
electro magnetic ballast or electronic ballast.
TS/67/8 2602542S/EL
5.8 Device for switching and dimming of eight independent groups of
luminaries with LED driver, electronic ballasts, dimmers or transformers
with 1 – 10 V control input. The dimming control per outputs carried out
with two control wires. Maximum control load per channel is 100 mA. The
Switch/Dim Actuator needs only EIB / KNX bus voltage for normal function.
With eight potential free relays the supply voltage of the ballasts and
consequently the luminaries can be switched on and off over or manually
without any auxiliary supply. Contact position is displayed.
The following functions can be set separately for each channel:
- switching and dimming of lighting
- feedback of switching state and brightness value
- different adjustable dimming speeds for dimming and setting brightness
- adjustable upper and lower dimming limits
- recall and set of up to 18 light scenes (8-bit commands) per channel
- 4 presets (1-bit commands) per channel
- integration in constant lighting control (“slave mode”)
- forced operation with higher priority
- staircase lighting function with adjustable staircase lighting time and

warning before switching off
- disable function to prevent unauthorised operation
- characteristic curve adjustment to adapt ballast brightness characteristic
5.9 When combined with the light sensor, the device shall be able to perform
constant light control for the parameter lighting
5.10 Light sensor shall be able to perform constant light level control with
dimmer (ON/OFF switching of lighting circuit and step function control are
not allow). Sensor shall be able to send brightness value to all dimmer in
the system for share sensor function.
TS/67/9 2602542S/EL
5.11 The presence sensor shall control lighting as a function of the brightness
and/or movement. It is designed for ceiling installation and can be both
flush mounted and surface mounted. It should have high sensitivity
sensors/ lens system and depending on the application chosen, different
functions which can be varied via the software. There shall be 4 sensors
with lens in each presence sensor.
5.12 The cable used for connecting the actuator to load should be of a single
core PVC insulated cable.
5.13 No additional power supply is needed for individual bus devices; they
should be powered by the power supply transmitting through the bus line.
6. Programmable lighting controls
6.1 All the lighting circuitries shall be able to being addressable or

programmable at any time. Any areas with more than 2 lighting circuits
shall have a switch to be able to program with a spare rocker for central
control such as ON/OFF or dimming etc.
6.2 The system shall able to incorporate group controls and scenes without
any additional control items and all shall be able to achieve by means of
programming on the actuators and switches.
6.3 Dimming Actuators
(a) For dimming lighting shall be very flexible in planning for changing
the dimming actuator to different loads such as : LED lighting,
Fluorescent lighting with 1-10V control signal, LV Halogen
(Electronic / Conventional transformer), 230VAC Halogen and
230VAC Incandescent.
(b) If higher wattage is required like >1KW… 5KW, additional dimming

amplifier can be extended from the existing dimming actuator,
without any modification at the above ceiling, only affected at the
control panel.
(c) The dimming function shall able provide 1% - 100% dimming

control. While switching function shall be like ON/OFF (Full
brightness/Total darkness) control.
(d) The system shall also able to dim and control numerous/groups of
lighting without much changes to the initial configuration such as
without physical hacking of wall for re-wiring. The changes will be
very minimum only require some software programming.
TS/67/10 2602542S/EL
(e) The system shall allow dimming control points and switching points
to be combined into scene function, and it can be easily
retrieve/recall and store at any programmable switches, touch panel
and any PC at FCC room or other terminal.
(f) These Switch/-Dim Actuators shall have built-in manual overriding

switch for each channel/output for manual switching of the Lighting
State in the event of device or channel/output failure.
6.4 Switching Actuators
(a) The switching actuators can be changed according to different

loads such as different ampere rating e.g. 6A, 10A etc.
(b) The switching actuator receives telegrams from sensors or other

controls via the KNX / EIB and switches electrical consumers by
means of its relay contacts which are independent of one another.
Each switching output has a separate bistable switching relay so
that the states of the switching contacts are safely maintained even
in case of bus voltage failure. The switching contacts are especially
designed for capacitive loads and therefore suited for relatively high
inrush currents.
(c) The actuators shall have the slide switches on the device front
panel, the relays can be switched on and off by hand parallel to the
KNX / EIB even without bus voltage or in a non-programmed state.
This shall be able to permit fast checking of connected consumers
for proper functioning.
(d) There shall be incorporated with logic function individual for each
output, disabling function, timing functions (ON-delay, OFF-delay,
staircase lighting timer, also with early-warning function) , timing
functions (ON-delay, OFF-delay, staircase lighting timer, also with
early-warning function) and light-scenes: up to 8 internal scenes
parameterize as per output.
(e) The actuators shall be able to provide measurement for the

operating hours counter can be activated independently for each
output.
(f) The current measurement for each output can be monitor and
transmission of measured current intensity to the bus via
independent communication objects (transmission in the event of
value changes or additionally in fixed cycles). A load monitoring
function (overload / under load) with predefined load limits (teach-in
or parameter setting) can be optionally activated with separately
parameterize message telegrams. Input monitoring for cyclical
updates with safety circuit.
TS/67/11 2602542S/EL
(g) The specified Switch/-Dim Actuators for dimming a circuit shall
strictly be de-rated by 40% for each channel/output and then
configures accordingly to suite each respective load and
(h) The Switch circuit and not basing on the full capacity of the dimmer
rating, i.e. at all time each channel/output of a Switch/-Dim Actuator
shall strictly have 40% tolerance.
(i) The Switch Actuators for On/Off Lighting Control shall strictly be AX
rated type as shown in the Tender Drawings that supports full load
without having to de-rate when connected with light fixtures with
high peak in-rush switching current such as Fluorescent and
PLC/Compact Fluorescent lamps and according to EN 60669.
(j) Actuators shall strictly be capable of monitoring the state of the

circuitry and report the state of failures with Alarm Alerts. It shall
have built-in Active Current Sensors for every channel/output to
feedback the Load/Current Situation. Load Current threshold can be
set for detecting the MCB and/or RCCB/ELCB trip, no load, partially
lost of load or any fault on the circuitry.
Following functions shall strictly be available with any proposed

Switch Actuators.
(i) Load Current Recognition, Load Current Value Send and

Reaction to Current Threshold Values;
(ii) Time functions and Delay On/Off;
(iii) Forced Control and Safety functions (Overriding Control

during Critical Situations);
(iv) Reaction to Upper and Lower Threshold Values;
(v) Preferred State for Lights on Bus Voltage Failure and

Recovery.
The Dimming Actuators for other lamps such as 230VAC Halogen

LED Lamps, Low-Voltage Halogen LED Lamps and etc. shall be
universal and Modular Din-Rail Component (MDRC) type that works
on all kinds of transformers or directly without transformer. It shall
supports minimum load of 500W/VA in a single circuit connections
and expandable by End Users by only having to add Capacity
Boosters gradually to the existing dimmers and up to a maximum
load of 3000W/VA for the same dimming circuit.
TS/67/12 2602542S/EL
(k) The specified Universal Dimmer for a dimming circuit shall strictly
be de-rated by 40% for each channel/output and then configures
accordingly to suite each respective load and circuit and not basing
on the full capacity of the dimmer, i.e. at all time each
channel/output of a Universal Dimmer shall strictly have 40%
tolerance.
6.5 DALI Interface Gateway
(a) The DALI Gateway shall be able to interface between a KNX/EIB

installation and a digital DALI (Digital Addressable Lighting
Interface) lighting system. The DALI Gateway allows the switching
and dimming of a maximum of 64 lamps including DALI device (e.g.
LED driver, electronic ballast). Each DALI lamp can be assigned up
to 32 different lighting groups that are controlled via the KNX/EIB.
This permits the integration of a room-specific light control of, for
example, offices, multi-purpose rooms, tutorial rooms and
Laboratories and lecture theatres etc into the higher-level KNX/EIB
building management. In addition, the lighting groups can be
integrated into up to 16 scenes that make it possible to recall pre-
programmed light moods or to save new light scene.
(b) The DALI Gateway shall be able to separate feedback of individual

switching and brightness states of the DALI groups to the KNX/EIB.
In addition, the general DALI operating status can be reported to
the KNX/EIB (error status, short-circuit, status of supply voltage).
(c) The controls at each programmable switches or touch panel / PC

shall permit to manually dim or switch the DALI light groups on and
off in parallel with the KNX / EIB even without bus voltage or in an
non-programmed state (broadcast of all connected DALI lamps).
This feature shall able to quickly test the operability of connected
consumers.
(d) The DALI Gateway is able to check the devices integrated into the
DALI system for integrity. The replacement of a defect electronic
ballast device by a new one, for example, can be detected if the
“Automatic device replacement” has been activated. The decoding
of the parameterized data into the new electronic ballast device is
carried out fully automatic by the Gateway without any special
commissioning. That makes the corrective maintenance of a DALI
system much easier.
(e) The device shall be able can be integrated into scene functions with
different brightness values and centralized switching of all groups is
also possible.
TS/67/13 2602542S/EL
(f) The DALI gateway shall be able to permits the error status
feedback of the connected DALI devices. In case of failure, the
DALI components will send “lamp error” or “Error in device (e.g.
electronic ballast error)”status information to the DALI Gateway
where it will be stored. Furthermore, feedback for DALI short-circuit
shall be also possible to be detected by the DALI gateway.
(g) DALI gateway shall be able to perform central function, defining

brightness value, time delays and scene functions can be
incorporated.
(h) The EIB-DALI Gateway for managing any brand of DALI Ballasts
and Transformers shall have a ready-built Diagnosis Program that
can be installed immediately without any customization into the
Visualization Station for checking various statuses on Lamp/s
Failure, Ballast/s and Transformer/s Failure, 230VAC failure to
Ballast/s and Transformer/s as well as communication failure
between the EIB-DALI Gateway and the DALI Ballast/s and
Transformer/s.
7. IP Router for networking
7.1 The IP router shall be able to interconnect KNX / EIB lines via data
networks using the Internet Protocol (IP). The IP router implements the
EIBnet/IP standard so that it cannot only be used for routing KNX / EIB
telegrams between lines via an IP network, it shall also for accessing to the
bus from a PC or from other DP devices (visualization displays and
applications). The IP router can thus also be used as an IP data interface
for the programming software. By using a LAN modem, the installation can
be remotely accessed even if there is no direct local data network.
7.2 The use of the existing data network for communication between bus lines
in the IP router shall be able to provide: fast communication between KNX /
EIB lines, extending a KNX / EIB system by means of LAN and WAN
beyond a building, direct routing of KNX / EIB data to each network user
(not in bus monitor mode) and KNX / EIB remote configuration from each
network access point.
7.3 In the design capacity as an area/line coupler, the IP router shall be able to
interconnect two KNX / EIB lines to form a logical functional area ensuring
at the same time the electrical separation between these lines. Each bus
line of a KNX / EIB installation is thus electrically independent of other bus
lines.
TS/67/14 2602542S/EL
8. Presence & Motion Sensors
8.1 The Presence Sensors and Motion Sensors proposed shall be KNX/EIB
enabled and integrated type and able to communicate within devices on its
parameter settings that requires no additional cables for power supply and
with the same pair of Bus Cable it shall besides receiving the 24VDC SELV
Bus Voltage also transmit all control functions.
8.2 The Motion Sensors shall be either wall mounted next to the lighting
switches and of the same approved range of switches and sharing the
same frame for the switches and with built-in manual overriding switch or
ceiling mounted with adjustable angle and direction of detections.
8.3 The Wall-Mount Motion Sensors shall have detection of frontier 8m and
side wings (left and right) each 6m and 180 deg. horizontal and downwards
angle of 45 deg. and frontier 16m and side wings (left and right) each 10m
and 220 deg. horizontal and downwards angle of 90 deg. for the long
range, ceiling-mount and weatherproof type.
8.4 The Presence Sensors shall be ceiling-mount type and have possibilities of
controlling lights via sensing of brightness and/or movements. It shall have
high-sensitivity sensors and multi-lens that detect 360 deg. and up to 5m
diameter range at a 2.2m to 3m mounting height.
8.5 The Presence Sensors and Motion Sensors shall besides being able to set
the Lux Intensity and Off Timer via the ETS Program also possible of
setting by the built-in knobs on the devices. It shall also allow for the
adjustment of detection range to the desires of the End Users.
8.6 The Presence Sensors and Motion Sensors shall besides being able to
perform as Lighting Management to achieve energy saving also possible to
act as Security Monitoring to meet the cost saving in materials and
installation as well as maintenance and replacement in the future.
8.7 The Presence Sensors and Motion Sensors shall continues to detect and
send commands to the Visualization Station or BMS/IBMS during its idle
period when lights are not required but security monitoring and protection is
still in need.
8.8 The sensor provided can be used in conjunction with venturi valve /
BMS/IBMS.
8.9 The motion sensor and presence sensor shall be able to be enabled and
disable from the work station.
TS/67/15 2602542S/EL
9. Daylight Sensor
9.1 The desired Brightness Sensor shall be capable of switching Lights and
Other Loads controlled and monitored by the Lighting Control System
depending on the Daylight light intensity. This device shall have the
flexibilities to be programmed as a Twilight Switch detecting 1 to 10 Lux or
a Light Level Switch detecting 100 to 20,000 Lux.
9.2 Upon detecting the brightness exceeds or falls below a specific Threshold,
the Daylight Sensor shall send Control Commands to the Switch Actuators
respectively to control the Lights and Other Loads that are controlled and
monitored by the Lighting Control System.
9.3 The desired Daylight Sensor shall be capable of detecting up to 3 different

Threshold values by a single device.
9.4 The sensor can be used in conjunction with venturi valve / variable air
volume box /Fan Coil unit control via Bus interface to BMS/IBMS.
9.5 Dependent of brightness and motion dependent or motion only dependent

are also possible in terms of software settings.
9.6 Measurement of brightness value can be integrated on the detector device

and enable to feedback to the KNX/EIB bus lines.
9.7 The Daylight sensor level setrpoint shall be able to be adjusted by the user
at the workstation through graphic.
10. Ammonia Gas Sensor
Ammonia gas sensor shall be of electrochemical type with IP65 enclosure,

operating at 12VDC or 24VDC, to detect the Ammonia Gas for urinal cleanliness
for toilet. It shall sense the level of ammonia gas from 0ppm to 100ppm at
operation temperature between 0oC to +40oC and humidity from 5% to 90% RH
non-condensing. The sensor shall transmit to the controller and server. The data
shall be collected and analyzed for preventive and maintenance alert.
11. Methane Gas Sensor
The sensor shall use the Infra red LEL technology with IP65 enclosure, operating
at 12VDC or 24VDC, to detect the Methane Gas level for Kitchen/Laboratory. It
shall sense the level of methane gas from 0% to 100% LEL at operation
condensing. The sensor shall transmit the environment condition to controller and
server The data shall be collected and analyzed for health and safety alert.
TS/67/16 2602542S/EL
12. Carbon Monoxide Sensor
Carbon Monoxide sensor shall be of electrochemical sensing with IP65 enclosure,

operating at 12VDC or 24VDC, for the for the detection of Carbon Monoxide for
enclosed vehicle parking, generator room, gas heater, steam plant room system. .
It shall sense the level of methane gas from 0ppm to 2000ppm at operation
condensing. The data shall be collected and analyzed for health and safety alert
13. Electronic Switches
13.1 The programmable switches shall have its parameters programmed, each
switches transmits telegrams to the KNX / EIB. These can be, for instance,
for switching or momentary-contact control, for dimming or for motorized
blind control. It is also possible to program value transmitter functions such
as dimming value transmitters, light-scene extensions, temperature value
transmitters or brightness value transmitters.
13.2 There shall have some programmable switches can come with a LCD
display to visualize its room temperature value acting with thermo stating
functions.
13.3 The programmable switches shall have long-life LED indicators able to be
programmed to illuminate Red LED indicating lights ‘On’ and Green LED
indicating lights ‘Off’ or vice versa for each switch. The 2 colours LEDs
shall also serve as (Night Light) indicating the Switches locations when
required to facilitate convenient identification in constantly dark
environment.
13.4 Each programmable switch shall be able to be programmed to control

On/Off or On/Off/Dim functions on the switch and each dedicated switch
shall be able to perform multi-functions i.e. On/Off control with Short Push
on either sides of the switch respectively and Dimming control with Long
Push. Performing of On/Off and On/Off/Dim with 1 button or 1 side of a
switch is not acceptable.
13.5 The sensor shall at least come with two status LEDs per control surface.
These status LEDs can be program either be permanently on or off, or
otherwise act as an actuation or status indicator for a key or a rocker. As
an alternative, the LED can also be controlled via separate communication
objects. The status LEDS can then also signal the operating states of room
temperature controllers or indicate the results of logic value comparisons.
Another operation LED can also serve as an orientation light (steady or
also flashing) or be controlled via an independent communication object.
TS/67/17 2602542S/EL
13.6 The programmable switches shall be able inscribed with wordings for easy
identification of its functional purposes.
13.7 The programmable switches shall be of latest state-of-art design and with
Stain-Less coating and tamper and thief proof. The Sub-contractor shall
submit the samples for S.O.’s approval.
14. Multi function Sensor
14.1 The multi function sensor shall be of smart integrated type comprises of
occupancy sensor, photo sensor and thermal sensor. Sensor is to be of
compact size, all in one.
14.2 The applications of the sensors shall include but not limited to lighting
control, HVAC control, Space Analysis, location-based and Security
services.
14.3 Occupancy detection should be of passive infra-red motion sensor. Photo

sensor for Daylight or Ambient light detection and temperature detection
using thermal sensor. Multi function sensor shall be able to interface via
wireless. Sensor shall be of low power consumption.
14.4 Multi function sensor shall be of input voltage of 230VAC and low power
consumption, operation temperature between -35oC to +70oC and humidity
from 20% to 95% RH non-condensing.
14.5 The multi function Sensors shall be ceiling mounted next to the light fixture
with adjustable angle and direction of detections and with manual
overriding switch.
14.6 The multi function sensor height of installation shall able to cater to height
range of 2.5m to 12.5m and the sensor sensing distance shall cover at
least 1m to 8m range.
14.7 The deployment of multi function sensor to the light fixture shall be flexible
in its configuration such that a single sensor can either connect to a group
or a single fixture. The coverage range of sensors shall be arranged in
overlapping manner to avoid functional lapse.
14.8 The multi function sensors shall be able to trigger the artificial light dimming
and mixing of daylight automatically to meet the pre-set lux level in the
space
14.9 The light fixture shall be addressable to the Data Server via the connection
of device controller to each light fixture.
TS/67/18 2602542S/EL
14.10 The multi function sensors shall be able to be paired into different fixture
zones, thereby allowing for zonal control and for multiple fixtures to share
occupancy sensing data and respond simultaneously to occupant motion
patterns in the zones.
14.11 The multi function sensor can be used in conjunction with venturi valve /
BMS/IBMS.
15. Access Control & Card Programming
All device shall have an integrated KNX interface composed by a removable bus
connection terminal for an easy, fast and secure installation.
15.1 The system shall interface with the card access control system based on
single KNX devices.
(a) The system shall allow to access the room and display the
status of the room via the indication of LEDs;
(b) Pocket reader (card holder) to activate the associated loads or

specific scenarios
(c) card programming with USB connection to configure access

permissions through the interfacing of KNX system software
15.2 Access control system shall allow the functions of card recognition and
thereby using the interfacing for electro-mechanical lock opening, service
activation and scenario control. Card readers shall have freely
programmable inputs and outputs in order to make the system really
flexible: these inputs/outputs can be used to control sockets (courtesy
lights, etc.), room service calls, alarms, etc. and energy savings such as
turning off the air-conditioning, television after detecting an open window,
after the leaving of the room, etc.
15.3 Access control devices shall be modular and flush mounting; the devices
shall be aesthetically coordinated with wiring devices: same colours,
shapes, finishings, materials and decorating plates
TS/67/19 2602542S/EL
15.4 Card access reader/ Face recognition reader
Card access or Face recognition reader, enables controlling entry to the

rooms where it is installed externally either through mobile phone
application. The reader shall have two onboard relays in order for the
interfacing to the KNX system to control the door lock, a courtesy light, or
for other uses; the device shall be equipped with two inputs for connecting
electrical equipment of the ON/OFF type (for instance to control the door
open or closed switch, a magnetic contact for signalling an open or closed
window, bathroom ceiling pull-cord alarm, etc.). On the front of the touch
screen panel there shall be LEDs each of which associated with an icon for
signalling the following states:
(a) Access control (entry allowed or entry denied);
(b) Room status (room occupied or do not disturb)
(c) Call status (emergency request with bathroom pull-cord, room

service call, etc.)
(d) Services status
15.5 Card holder
The card holder shall enable checking for the presence in the room of the
visitor or the staff by unambiguously identifying the transponder card
inserted. The pocket reader shall be equipped with two or more relays that
can be configured for managing door locking, controlling a courtesy light,
optimizing energy consumption or for even more uses; the device shall be
equipped with two inputs for connecting electrical equipment of the ON/OFF
type (for instance to control the door open or closed switch, a magnetic
contact for signalling an open or closed window, bathroom emergency pull-
cord alarm, Television and other equipment that have potential of energy
saving without affecting operation etc.).
TS/67/20 2602542S/EL
15.6 Mobile Phone Global Positioning System (GPS) Tracker
The GPS tracker upon sensing the visitor mobile phone location and unique
number using the wireless shall enable checking for the presence in the
room of the visitor or the staff by unambiguously identifying the unique
number that being transmitted. The device controller shall be equipped with
two or more relays that can be configured for managing door locking,
controlling a courtesy light, optimizing energy consumption or for even more
uses; the device shall be equipped with two inputs for connecting electrical
equipment of the ON/OFF type (for instance to control the door open or
closed switch, a magnetic contact for signalling an open or closed window,
bathroom emergency pull-cord alarm, Television and other equipment that
have potential of energy saving without affecting operation etc.).
15.7 Card programmer
(a) Transponder card reader/programmer shall be with vertical pocket in

table mounting box. The device shall enable programming and
coding the transponder cards to use with the external readers and
the card holder
(b) The reader/programmer must be connected to a personal computer

on which the BMS/LMS software must be installed for creating and
managing the necessary data for the configuration of the cards
according to the different requirements.
(c) The device shall be equipped with a cable for connecting the
USB port of the PC and a backlit pocket for signalling card
reading/writing. It shall be installable in table mounting box and it
shall not need any driver.
16. Room Control
16.1 Lighting Control
The ON, OFF or Dimming of lights shall be activated and controlled by:
(a) Supervisor panels
(b) Electronic switches
(c) Scenarios (manually activated with pushbutton or automatically

activated by card insertion into the card-holder)
(d) Supervision software
The Lighting control strategy shall be submitted to Engineer for approval
TS/67/21 2602542S/EL
16.2 Electronic Switches
(a) The electronic switches shall be equipped with independent

buttons, depending on the circuit and scenarios, that can be
used for switching on/ off of general loads, controlling roller
shutters or curtains, adjusting lights (on-off or dimming),
launching scenarios or typical room functions (“do not disturb”)
(b) Electronic switches shall be flush mounted, they shall be

integrated with wiring devices for a perfect aesthetical
coordination with same matching finishes plates and surface
finishing of wiring devices.
(c) The switches shall be completed with button caps that enable
identifying the function of single programmed push button. The
button caps shall be customizable with silk-screened or
engraved text descriptors or custom silk-screened icons that
visually describe the function assigned to the single button.
Each single switch shall work as 2, 4 or 6 independents buttons
by simply replacing related single/double caps and
programming via Engineering Tool Software functions. The
switches shall have 2, 4 or 6 independent LEDs in order to
have better visibility in the darkness
(d) The modular switches shall have an integrated KNX interface

composed by a removable bus connection terminal for an easy,
fast and secure installation; they shall support 8 bit (1byte)
scene control programming.
16.3 Bedside Display Panel
A bedside panel shall be installed on both sides offering the following

functions:
(a) Lighting control
(b) Curtain and/or Blinds control
(c) Temperature control (set-point, display of temperature / relative

humidity and speed of fan coil)
(d) Scenarios control (for example: wake-up; reading)
(e) Room’s functions activation (for example: do not disturb)
TS/67/22 2602542S/EL
The panel shall be flush mounted, it shall be modular with same
matching finishes plate and touch-screen technology. It shall be
integrated with wiring devices for a perfect aesthetical coordination. The
display shall not exceed 2.5” of diagonal.
The panel shall have an integrated KNX interface composed by a

removable bus connection terminal for an easy, fast and secure
installation.
16.4 Supervisor Panel
A supervisor panel shall be installed inside the room and it shall have
the following functions:
(a) Lighting control
(b) Curtain and/or Blinds control
(c) Water heater control (on/off)
(d) Television (on/off)
(e) Temperature control (set-point and speed of fan coil)
(f) Scenarios control (for example: wake-up; reading)
(g) Room’s functions activation (for example: do not disturb)
The panel shall be flush or desk mounted, it shall be modular with

decorating plate and touch-screen technology. It shall be integrated
with wiring devices for a perfect aesthetical coordination. The display
shall not exceed 4.5” of diagonal and it shall be based on TFT
technology with coloured icons and free customizable texts.
The panel shall have an integrated KNX interface composed by a

removable bus connection terminal for an easy, fast and secure
installation.
16.5 Room Temperature Controller
(a) The room shall be equipped with LCD thermostats, conveniently

located for optimal visitor comfort. Thermostat commands shall
include:
(i) Temperature Control
(ii) Fan Speed
(iii) System ON / OFF
TS/67/23 2602542S/EL
(b) This device shall be suitable to control and monitor room
temperature, the thermostat shall be equipped with an ON/OFF
input that can be used for applications such as detecting an
open window or for other general uses. In addition, it shall have
a relay output that can be used to control 2-way modulating
solenoid valve and speed control for a fan-coil. The device shall
be equipped with a display and buttons to control the
temperature set-point and the speed of the fan-coil.
(c) It shall also have an analogue input for connecting of an

external NTC sensor in order to control the temperature of a
second zone. Where required, the external temperature sensor
could be used to calculate the set-point in combination with the
internal sensor of the thermostat to control the room
temperatre. External NTC sensor must be flush mounted and
(d) The thermostat shall be able to directly control the 2-way

modulating solenoid valve for the air-conditioning system
besides turning it off if there is an open window using a
magnetic contact connected to the thermostat input.
(e) The thermostat shall be fully controllable by the supervision

software.
(f) Electronic thermostats shall be flush mounted, they shall be

(g) The thermostat shall have an integrated KNX interface

composed by a removable bus connection terminal for an easy,
fast and secure installation.
16.6 Blinds and Curtains Controller
(a) The room shall be equipped with multiple motorized

Blinds/Curtains with related control switches or touch panels,
conveniently located for optimal visitor comfort
(b) Opening and closing of blind/curtains shall be activated by:
(i) Supervisor panels
(ii) Electronic switches
TS/67/24 2602542S/EL
(iii) Scenarios (manually activated with pushbutton or
automatically activated by card insertion into the card-
holder)
(iv) Supervision software
16.7 Presence/Absence detectors
(a) The primary role of the presence detectors is to save energy in

the common areas like corridors or toilets: they shall be able to
turn on/off the lights or the climate control when a presence is
detected.
(b) These devices, whenever motion is detected, shall send a

message on the KNX Bus turning on the indicator LED
according to the set brightness threshold (lights on/off according
to the brightness in the room). The detector shall be also able to
manage movement signals coming from any other KNX device
in MASTER/SLAVE mode.
(c) Electronic detectors shall be flush mounted., they shall be

integrated with wiring devices for aesthetical coordination with
same matching finishes plates and surface finishing of wiring
devices.
(d) The detector shall have an integrated KNX interface composed

by a removable bus connection terminal for an easy, fast and
secure installation.
16.8 Lighting sensors
The lighting sensor shall be ceiling mounted and able to detect the
brightness in the room and keep the level of brightness in the rooms
constant, combining the natural light and the artificial light, thus
obtaining the greatest savings and optimizing energy consumptions.
It shall be able to detect the degree of brightness and switch lights on
and off in a differentiated manner according to the set threshold
value.
16.9 Lift interfacing
The system shall be able to monitor and send contact to lift call button and
lift floor button. The system shall be able to accept third party interfacing
such as BMS, mobile application and database. System shall call the lift
and by using the mobile application or other third party software.
TS/67/25 2602542S/EL
17. Interface with BMS/IBMS
The Interface gateway with BMS/IBMS shall be located at FCC room’s control
panel. Each gateway can serve up to 15 lines per 1 Area. The transfer of the data
points is in 2-way communications via data exchange of EIS data RS232 format or
BACNET, the group addresses at each point are swiftly appeared at BMS system
panels and it allowed BMS/IBMS to control and monitoring freely at the Lighting
Control system data points.
18. Monitoring & Control at FCC room
18.1 The central control station at FCC room shall have a Lighting Management
software in which embedded used for controlling and monitoring all lighting.
18.2 The Server minimum configuration shall be at least minimum in latest

Microsoft Server OS, in Intel’s Pentium 4 processor running at minimum
3.2GHz, 8GB RAM, 1TB Hard disk, complete with accessories like USB
Optical mouse, keyboard, CDRW drive, 2 nos. RS232 Serial Port, 3 nos
Ethernet card, 4 nos. of USB, 24’’ LCD flat screen monitor in super VGA
graphics card and with adaptor for Ethernet networking with TCP/IP
network protocols. The system shall have 1hour UPS back up
18.3 The Lighting Management System Software shall be a Windows Based

program with interactive and flexible in programming capabilities.
18.4 The software shall be easily configurable and installable, it shall use the
database created with latest Engineering Tool Software by importing the
project directly. It shall be equipped with an intuitive user interface,
graphically appealing and fully customizable.
18.5 The Lighting Management System software shall provide the main
functions :
(a) Password Access – Multi-Level passwords access to enable

various degrees of control to be implemented and the password
level shall dictate the Display Menu options only to the functions
available for that account or areas of expertise in a specific
professional.
(b) Active Status & Control – Visualization of status feedback on all

active status of lighting in the form of graphical layout floor plan and
possible for switching On/Off and performing dimming on dedicated
icons / symbols;
TS/67/26 2602542S/EL
(c) Remote Access and Remote Web Access – Allows up to 20 users
with different user ID and password to access the graphical
software concurrently via the LAN or Campus intranet Infrastructure
with specific settings created by the Network Administrator. The
Remote Computer will connect and interact with the System by
Microsoft Windows Internet Explorer environment without the needs
to download any program or database; Remote desktop type of
access will not be accepted;
(d) Scene management and master controls are provided at the

graphical screen; - a digitalized layout displayed symbolically and
also in icon format with corresponding numerals/words, code, the
percentage of the lighting dimming value, the power consumption
(in Wattage), ambient brightness level, occupancy status and
temperature around the sensor. A customized Dashboard shall be
designed with user friendliness. With the built-in useful artificial
intelligent (AI) perimeter, the user shall be able to set different
profiles for the sensors including minimum light level, maximum
light level, ramp-up time, active motion window, motion sensitivity,
and ambient light sensitivity, trigger points for the HVAC. The
profiles can be set for different times of the day, for weekdays,
weekends and holidays.
(e) Time Schedules – The graphical software shall be able to set time
schedules for all zones of lights with daily and yearly time
schedules as well as holidays and special events;
(f) Logical functions for IF/Then functions for complex programming;
(g) Generating Reports – The Management Software shall be capable

of generating 5 types of customized reports. The contents of these
reports shall reflect all Monitored lamps failure status, Total hours
run per zone of lights, Types of faults detected and etc. or as per
the End Users requirement.
(h) Essential Lighting – Each zone of lights may be programmed via

the graphical software to operate as essential lights whenever
needed to.
(i) Hours-Run Monitoring & Re-Lamping Schedules – The

accumulative of run time of each Light Zone shall be recorded and
logged thus enabling the re-lamping schedules to be displayed and
printed for planning and carrying out the replacement works. The
System shall graphically highlight the Light Zones that have
exceeded the User-Defined percentage of usage.
(j) Graphics showing the line status of EIB and Power meter loops
TS/67/27 2602542S/EL
(k) Monitoring of all power meter functions and history- The energy
savings, usage pattern, artificial information of the entire Smart
system down to each individual fixture/sensor level shall be made
available to the user. The savings in KWh, and cost shall be
available in terms of daily, weekly, monthly and yearly savings, and
all data shall be exportable in portable document format (PDF) and
CSV format for excel spreadsheet.
(l) All switchboards and Generators status as indicated.
(m) Energy Management – Energy saving include artificial light tuning,

day light harvesting, HVAC saving, Occupancy saving. The artificial
light management come with mobile Apps and/or wireless room
control handset to activate scenes of the lights
(n) Space Analysis – Space management include generate Heat map,
Motion path and Space utilization pattern
(o) Facility Booking System – Booking through third party interfacing

with mobile Application for booking of facilities, conference room,
meeting room, break out room etc. with auto notifying of booking to
user after 10 minutes from booked time.
(p) Complementing HVAC System – Real time HVAC data (room

temperature with humidity) can be collected and transmit into the
BMS System to fine-tune the building for optimizing of air
conditioning.
(q) Car Park Management – Basement / indoor car park lighting energy
saving and monitoring system base on microwave sensor with
integrated Smart driver for control and data collection.
18.6 The software shall able to provide with interfacing to mobile phone
application control and monitoring to the following additional function:
(a) Supervise temperatures (set-point/speed of fan coil) , I/O, alarms

(with acoustic pop-up massage), security, lights (on/off and
dimming), Television (on/off), Water heater (on/off) and curtains
(open/close) or blinds (up/down)
(b) Manage Visitors Room Check-in\Check-out with the possibility of

integration with “Property Management System” or similar
(c) Display length of stay, day of departure and other information about
Visitors
(d) Manage Services and Privileges (creation of cards with services

enabling)
TS/67/28 2602542S/EL
(e) Display the room status (reserved, booked, occupied with
identification of guest presence)
(f) Stop access to single rooms
(g) Check and manage transit through common areas
(h) Search and export entry report
(i) Display service requests
(j) Manage the records of the staff and Visitors
(k) Create and manage scenes and commands of virtual devices
18.7 The System Software shall be capable of dynamically generate various

types of reports with data visualization tool as required but not limited to
these reports usage by profile, fixture outage and inventory.
18.8 The data storage within the Centralized Data Platform must be scalable,
down time resilience with redundancy and secured to cater to the growth of
storing of overall data for up to 10 years.
18.9 The Centralized Data Platform shall have the capabilities of performing
data analytics aims to immediately extract knowledgeable information using
data mining techniques that help in making predictions, identifying recent
trends, finding hidden information, and making decisions.
18.10 The Centralized Data Platform shall have data integration capabilities that
can help address issues on storage, processing, data analytics, and
visualization tools. It can also assist in improving collaboration and
communication among various objects in a smart building environment.
18.11 The Centralized System shall enable information sharing across platforms
in a convenient manner. It must provide data redundancy by having at least
3 time replications for its raw data storage and able to scale for further
storage space without powering down the system.
TS/67/29 2602542S/EL
19. Testing & Commissioning
19.1 The complete Lighting Control System shall be fully tested and
commissioned by a Specialist to ensure that the desired performance is
met and that the configuration is as per this Technical Specifications,
Design Parameters and Tender.
19.2 The Sub-contractor shall be further required to liaise with the End Users
on the Lighting Control System controls and to assist and advise them on
the programming on the various required settings as well as train them to
use The System. This cost shall deem to be allowed for in the contract.
20. Documentation and As-built Submission
20.1 Sub-contractor shall submit the as built drawing include the following for
system.
(a) All the devices, controller, gateway, lighting fixture physical address
(MAC), IP address and device address for the entire system in
relationship.
(b) Floor plan showing the devices, controller, gateway, location with all
the necessary address indicated.
(c) Floor plan showing all the lighting fixture with sensor installed with
their physical address
20.2 Sub-Contractor shall compile all the in excel spreadsheet on all the
devices, controller, gateway, lighting fixture physical address (MAC), IP
address and device address that being installed.
20.3 Sub-Contractor shall submit all the system programming, and other
necessary software document for the installed system
20.4 Sub-Contractor shall submit all the final as-built program (3 set) after all the
adjustment during Defect Liability Period.
TS/67/30 2602542S/EL
SECTION 73 - PAINTING
1. General
1.1 The work to be painted shall include all equipment, duct work, piping,
fittings, valves, hangers, conduits, frameworks, switchboard, electrical
trunking, machinery, water tank, etc. and all work exposed to view. All
paints, enamel, etc. shall be approved brand of best quality and shall be
delivered to the site in the maker's containers with seal, etc., unbroken
and are clearly marked with the maker's name or trademark and a
description of the contents and colour.
1.2 The paints used in the works must be suitable for use in tropical climates,
with an addition of anti-fungus nature.
1.3 All materials for multiple coat work e.g. primers, undercoatings and
finishing coats, shall be obtained from the same manufacturer and shall
be those recommended by the manufacturer as suitable for application
together and for the type and duty of surfaces concerned.
1.4 No painting on exterior work to be done during wet weather, or upon

surfaces that are not thoroughly clean and dry.
1.5 During the execution of Painter's work the Sub-Contractor is held

responsible for taking all precautions necessary for the health and safety
of his workmen.
1.6 The paint shall be kept stirred during use and when more than one coat is
specified, subsequent coats shall not be applied until preceding coats
have thoroughly hardened.
1.7 All painting shall be carried out within seven (7) days of delivery and
erection on site. This requirement shall be strictly complied with.
2. Metal Surface
Primer for metal surfaces shall be red lead or chromate metal primer or other
approved equivalent. If the primer has thoroughly dried, apply one undercoat of
appropriate shade, allow at least 24 hours drying time under normal weather
conditions before application of each subsequent finishing coat. All galvanised
steel surfaces shall be primed with zinc chromate before application of the
finishing coats (minimum two coats).
3. Protection of Finishes
All polished or chromium plated iron or steel work shall have at least one coat of
protective finish at the manufacturers works and the Sub-Contractor shall
maintain this preservation until the work is finally painted or put into use.
TS/73/1 2602542S/EL
4. Painting and Protection
4.1 The following items shall be painted to colours approved by the S.O.:
a) Sleeves and sheet metal casings
b) All pipe work including pipe fittings
c) All duct work
d) All metal work, hangers, conduits
e) Screw heads and means of fixing
f) Suppliers items
g) Galvanised steel
h) All work exposed to view
4.2 Before any painting is carried out the Sub-Contractor shall ensure that the
surface to be painted is clean, free of grease and rust as recommended
by the paint manufacturer. If necessary, degreasing and de-rusting shall
be employed.
4.3 Each coat of paint shall be applied by brush and when thoroughly dry,
smoothed with suitable abrasive paper or cloth before the next coat is
applied.
4.4 No painting or drying should be carried out in direct sunlight and due care
shall be taken during dusty or wet conditions.
4.5 All items subjected to corrosive air or other hazardous conditions shall be
specially treated and painted with suitable anti-corrosive paint as
recommended by the manufacturers.
4.6 Should any corrosion, or signs of faulty painting techniques become

apparent during the maintenance period, the Sub-Contractor will be
required to remove the defective paint work or component part at his own
cost and retreat and/or repaint it as directed and to the satisfaction of the
4.7 All floors, ceilings, walls, fittings etc shall be protected by proper painters'
sheet and all paint spots and splashes be removed.
TS/73/2 2602542S/EL
4.8 The painting shall be carried out as follows:
a) All pipe work and associated hangers, brackets, supports,

sleeves, etc shall be painted as follows :
1 coat - degreasing coat

1 coat - primer coat
1 coat - undercoat
2 coats - top coat hard matt finish paint
The first finishing coat shall be of a lighter shade of the final

finishing coat.
The finishing coats for all metal surfaces exposed to weather shall
be epoxy paints.
b) The direction of flow shall be indicated by an arrow stenciled in

black/white paint on the pipe.
c) All screw heads, wing nuts and other means of fixing shall be
painted at the time of installation and re-finished after the final
testing and commissioning is completed.
d) All manufactured items that are delivered in a painted condition

whether under or finish coated shall be prepared as mentioned
above and then re-painted as before. Special care shall be taken
with the painting of the underside of pumps, bases, etc. A layer of
bituminous material or roofing felt shall be laid on the base before
the item is installed and then trimmed to size.
e) All cut ends of galvanised steel and sheet metal work shall be
prepared as mentioned above and painted two coats of zinc
chromate paint.
f) All items that are considered liable to oil or grease splashes shall
be finished painted using two coats of the appropriate oil proof
paint.
TS/73/3 2602542S/EL
5. Identification of Pipelines
5.1 The direction of flow shall be indicated by an arrow pencilled in

black/white paint on the pipe. The length of the arrow shall be :
a) For pipes 50 mm internal diameter and under, the arrow shall be

75 mm.
b) For pipes exceeding over 50 mm internal diameter and over, the

arrow shall be 150 mm.
5.2 All pipelines shall be identified to BS 1710.
PIPE
other 150mm 150mm 150mm other

approved approved
decorative A B C decorative
colour colour
Pipe A B C
1. Chilled water Green White emerald Green

green and white
2. Condenser water Green White Green
3. Drainage Black Black Black
4. Cold Water Light Blue White Light Blue
5. Soil, Waste Black White Black

and Vent
6. Refrigerant Yellow Sea Green Yellow
5.3 Permanent labels eg "CHS", "CHR", "CNS", "CWS" "BAS", "Elect",

“ACMV-ELECT”, "TAS", "CCTV", etc shall be provided for the
identification of all pipes, trunking, etc. The labels shall be painted at
every 5 metres interval.
TS/73/4 2602542S/EL
6. Colour Scheme
6.1 All pipe work and equipment installed under this Sub-Contract shall be
painted in accordance with the following colour scheme:
Pipeline/Equipment Colour
Cold water service pipe Blue
Cold water rising main Blue
Hot water service pipe Insulation with Red and blue band
Gas pipe Yellow
Soil, waste & vent pipe Bituminous paint or as directed by

S.O..
Electrical Services Orange
Fire services and associated

equipment and pipe work Signal Red
Chilled water pipe Dark Green (Return line) and Light

Green (Supply line)
Condenser water pipe Dark Blue (Return line) and Light

Blue (supply line)
BAS services White
Control panels Light Grey
Duct work Beige
6.2 On completion, the Sub-Contractor shall make good all painting works
which have been damaged during the progress of works for the handing
over.
TS/73/5 2602542S/EL
7. Directional Flow
When it is necessary to know the direction of flow of the fluid, this should be
indicated by an arrow as illustrated hereunder :
300mm 150mm
50mm
For pipes 150mm diameter For pipes under 150mm

& above including insulation diameter including
if used insulation if used
(a) Arrows shall be painted black.
(b) Arrows shall be readable from floor.
(c) Arrows shall be marked for every 5 m (15 feet).
8. Galvanising
8.1 All metals to be galvanised shall be of the full dimensions shown or

specified, and all punching, cutting, drilling, screw tapping and the
removal of burrs shall be completed before the galvanising process
commences.
8.2 All galvanising shall be done by the hot dip process with spelter not less
than 98 per cent of which shall be pure zinc. No alternative process may
be used without the approval of the S.O.. No components shall be
galvanised which are likely to come into subsequent contact with oil.
8.3 The galvanising shall be uniform, clean, smooth and as free from spangle
as possible. In the case of component parts the galvanizing shall not be
less than 85 microns in thickness.
8.4 All galvanised parts shall be protected from injury due to electrolytic
action, white rust and abrasion during the periods of transit, storage and
erection. Damaged area of the coating shall be touched up with an
approved zinc rich paint or other approved metallic compound.
8.5 Galvanising shall conform to BS 729.
TS/73/6 2602542S/EL
SECTION 74- DOCUMENTS
1. General
The Sub-Contractor shall supply all the draft copies of design note, circuit
diagrams, application software source code listings and documentation during the
various stages of design and development work. The final documentation shall be
compiled and cared from all the previously submitted drafted copies.
Three sets of such final documentation shall be submitted within one month from
the date of satisfactory field of the related equipment. One set shall be kept at the
Master Station and updated by the Sub-Contractor as and when there are any
changes during the maintenance period.
The Sub-Contractor shall supply all the operational manuals, system Programmer's
manuals and technical manuals for all the hardware, software and equipment.
Such manuals documentation supplied by the Sub-Contractor shall contain
sufficient information for any system programmer to carry out the design of this
system, and for the maintenance engineer to carry out future system maintenance
and modification work. Such manuals shall be supplied at the first stage of the
system design work.
Any part of a proprietary software which is modified to suit this system shall be
treated as application software. The Employer shall have all the rights to all the
application software in this system.
The Sub-Contractor shall guarantee the support for any proprietary software for
unlimited period of time. The complete program source code in both hard copy and
magnetic tape of all the proprietary software shall be lodged with an appointed
party approved by the S.O.. Should the Sub-Contractor go into liquidation, or is
unable to provide further support to the system software, this copy of source code
shall become the property of the Employer.
The Sub-Contractor shall supply the following hardware and software

documentation:
1.1 Application Software Documentation shall include :
a) General system introduction to all programs including software

organisation with drawing if possible :
For each program:
General description of the program function, method of operation

and full accounts of the facilities provided;
Specification of performance with all its interfaces especially where

the program share data with other programs;
Block Diagram and flow charts;
TS/74/1 2602542S/EL
b) A complete source listing of all the application software programs.
Comments in the listing shall describe the operational work the
instruction is performing. The Sub-Contractor shall also provide the
source programme in transportable format (e.g. CD/Harddisk,
Magnetic Tape).
Memory maps for the CPU's internal storage, and for the disks. The
maps shall show the numbered locations of core memory.
A programming guide showing how to run and operate the program

and described the way the data or code has been laid out for
modification, conversion or expansion in future.
1.2 Hardware Documentation shall include :
a) General system introduction to the hardware.
b) Detailed description of structure, information code formats,

message structure and message security.
c) General Assembly Drawings showing the layout of equipment in

cubicles together with details of modules.
d) Site installation manuals and drawings.
e) For each module :
- Introduction
- Specification
- Detailed description of module operation and circuit
- Detailed description of all the circuit options by jumpers
- Module functional block diagram
- Module circuit diagram
- Detailed component part list
TS/74/2 2602542S/EL
SECTION 75 - MAINTENANCE DURING DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD (DLP)
1. General
1.1 This section of the Technical Specifications sets out the Sub-Contractor Works
on maintenance and responsibility of the Sub-Contractor during the Defects
Liability Period (DLP).
"Maintenance" shall mean the combination of all technical and associated

administrative actions intended to retain an item in, or restore it to, a state in
which it can perform its required function and within its designed operation limits
and tolerances in accordance with good Engineering practise, relevant
Standards/Codes of Practice and Manufacturer's Specifications. It shall include
the replacement of elements or parts to match its original material for works
where repairs are not practical.
1.2 This section covers the work involved in the regular servicing and
maintenance schedule and/or breakdown service of the systems and
equipment, etc., installed under other sections of the Specifications.
1.3 The Sub-Contractor shall provide free Comprehensive Maintenance for the
entire Sub-Contract Works during the Defects Liability Period (DLP).
1.4 The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for all damages caused to the
installation or the Employer property through the act of negligence of their
workmen except where it can be proven that it is no fault of theirs.
1.5 The Tenderer shall submit letters of commitment by each of the equipment /
system specialists / suppliers who will undertake the post Defects Liability
Period servicing and maintenance. The letters of commitment shall commit
these specialists / suppliers to maintain the prices stated herein in accordance
with the terms and Conditions of the Sub-Contract and the Specifications of
the Sub-Contract.
1.6 At the completion of the Maintenance period the Sub-Contractor shall hand
over the entire Sub-Contract Works to the Employer or its appointed agent in
first class order.
TS/75/1 2602542S/EL
2 Requirements
General
2.1 It is the responsibility of the Sub-Contractor to maintain the systems in first

class running condition.
2.2 The Maintenance period shall cover all parts and labour etc. The cost of any
repairs or replacement of parts shall be borne by the Sub-Contractor with the
exception of repair or replacement of parts made necessary as a result of an
act of vandalism or an act of God. The onus of proving the cause of any
repairs or replacement of parts lies with the Sub-Contractor. In the event of
dispute, the decision of the S.O. shall be final and binding.
2.3 Maintenance service shall include inspection, lubrication, running adjustments

and the keeping of the interior of the installation and equipment in a clean
condition. The service shall also include the immediate attention at any time to
any defects.
2.4 The schedule on the maintenance and other requirements of the following
systems shall also refer to the Maintenance Standard and Schedule in the
Appendix.
a) Security Card Access System.

b) Security Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) System.
c) High Tension Switchgear System.
d) Emergency Generator and underground fuel storage systems.
e) Un-interruptible Power Supply (UPS) Systems.
f) Emergency Voice Communication System
g) Main Switch Board and Emergency Main Switch Board
h) Lighting Management System
i) Power Monitoring System
2.5 The Sub-Contractor shall carry out regular maintenance to the systems and
equipment including cleaning, etc. at monthly intervals in accordance with the
maintenance responsibilities outlined hereinafter or as indicated within other
sections of the Specifications. Allowance shall be made in the Tender price for
any cost incurred by complying with this requirement.
2.6 The Sub-Contractor shall replace all faulty or damaged parts with new ones
during the warranty period at no expense to the Employer or its appointed
agent. This clause shall override any standard warranty conditions of the Sub-
Contractor or his supplier of equipment. Allowance shall be made here for any
cost incurred by complying with this requirement.
TS/75/2 2602542S/EL
2.7 The Sub-Contractor shall submit to the Employer or its appointed agent a
monthly report in such form as may be approved by the Employer or its
appointed agent containing details of the periodic inspection and servicing
including all rectification work executed by him. The monthly report shall
include a log showing the time when a report of a fault is received and the
time when rectification work commences. The nature of a fault and the actual
time taken for the necessary adjustments or repairs shall be signed by the
User/Department and submitted to the Employer or its appointed agent within
the first week of the following month.
2.8 The Sub-Contractor shall also inform the Employer or its appointed agent
within the last week of every month, the date and time scheduled for the
servicing and maintenance of the system in the next month.
2.9 Routine servicing and maintenance to the system is to be carried out during
normal working hours unless it is otherwise specified elsewhere in the
Specifications.
2.10 During the Maintenance Period, the Sub-Contractor shall attend to any
complaint promptly at no expense to the Employer or its agent.
2.11 Where it is required for any system operating on 24 hour basis, the Sub-
Contractor shall ensure that his workshop can provide 24 hour service.
2.12 After the attendance of complaint and completion of the repair work, a copy of
the report or service chit duly signed by the Employer or its appointed agent
shall be forwarded to the S.O. for information and record.
2.13 The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the conduct and behaviour of his
workmen. Upon arrival at the premises for servicing or repair works, the
workmen are required to inform the officer-in-charge in the premises the
purpose of their visit. The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that minimal
inconvenience is caused to the Employer or its appointed agent.
2.14 The Sub-Contractor shall be required to replace or otherwise make good at

his own expense, any part or parts which may be of faulty design, construction
or material. This responsibility shall include provision of labour and all
incidental costs necessary for the removal of defective parts or components,
and of installing replacements.
2.15 All tests, observations, readings and rectification works shall be fully recorded
in a log book provided in the Maintenance Office and signed and
acknowledged by the Employer or its appointed agent.
2.16 Any replacement of any item or any repair work to breakdown in the Systems
shall only be carried out by the Sub-Contractor with the consent of the
Employer or its appointed agent.
TS/75/3 2602542S/EL
2.17 The Sub-Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Sub-Contract the
rates or charges or prices for all the necessary costs incurred in providing
temporary and similar systems to the Employer or its appointed agent’s use
during the period of repair or replacement, so as to enable the Employer or its
appointed agent to continue working/operations without any disruption or
stoppage.
2.18 The Sub-Contractor shall keep adequate spare parts for the systems under
his maintenance to ensure that the machine down-time in the event of
breakdowns will be minimised.
2.19 The Sub-Contractor shall warrant that any repair or replacement works shall
be free from any defect in workmanship and/or materials. The Sub-Contractor
shall further warrant that he has exercised all care and skill in carrying out the
repair and replacement works.
3. Workmanship and Materials
3.1 All work described herein shall be perform by workmen skilled in the service,
maintenance and repair of and the installation and shall be executed in
accordance with the best commercial practice.
3.2 All materials to be supplied in connection with works shall be new and unused
and shall generally be of the best quality as regards manufacture and
performance. Replacement of parts and accessories shall be of the original
manufacture, make and model. Any deviation shall be approved by the S.O.
4. Liquidated Damages
4.1 Response Time/Service
a) Response Time
The response time is the time period allowed within which the Sub-
Contractor's suitably qualified maintenance personnel are required to
arrive at the site and start maintenance work from the time the fault
condition has been reported to the Sub-Contractor by any means such
as pager, telephone, telex facsimile, mail, agent or other means of
communication.
b) Maintenance
The Sub-Contractor shall at no additional cost to the Employer or its

appointed agent in carrying out the necessary repairs, whether major
or minor, including adjustments of all Systems installed under this Sub-
Contract or such further extended time, as deemed necessary by the
Employer or its appointed agent.
TS/75/4 2602542S/EL
Should the Sub-Contractor fail to attend within the response time, the
Employer or its appointed agent reserves the right to appoint other
party or parties to execute such works and all costs incurred plus
charges shall be recovered by the Employer or its appointed agent
from the Sub-Contractor by deduction(s) from any money due or that
shall become due to the Sub-Contractor, or payable direct from the
Sub-Contractor to the Employer or its appointed agent PROVIDED that
and without prejudice to any other remedies for breach contained in
the Maintenance during the Defects Liability Period the Employer or its
appointed agent shall in addition to recover under this paragraph
whatsoever that may result as a consequence of the Employer or its
appointed agent having to resort to the provisions of this paragraph.
The Sub-Contractor shall employ a supervisor who shall be equipped

with a mobile telephone with SMS. Should the supervisor fail to
respond within one hour after being paged it shall be deemed that the
Sub-Contractor has failed to make himself available in which case the
paragraph above shall apply.
In the event this clause becomes inoperable for any reason, then the
Employer or its appointed agent shall be at liberty to recover such
damages for breach of contract as the Employer or its appointed agent
can prove arising from the Sub-Contractor's failure to carry out the
maintenance.
c) Agreed Damages for Failure to Respond Within the Response Time
Response time for attending to breakdown of Systems shall not

exceed the time stated hereinafter. Agreed damages shall be imposed
should the response time be exceeded or in the event the Sub-
Contractor fails to rectify the breakdown within the specified hours or
such further extended time deemed necessary by the Employer or its
appointed agent.
Any Time during the 24 hours of the day
Response time allowed: less than 2 hours
Liquidated Damages for every late response: S$50.00 per hour
For any occasion where the response time is exceeded, the Sub-
Contractor shall be given an opportunity to explain. The Employer or
its appointed agent may waive the Liquidated Damages if the
explanation is acceptable.
TS/75/5 2602542S/EL
5. Statutory Tests
The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all the statutory tests
required, such as no-load tests, full-load tests, thermal scanning to comply with the
Authorities. The Sub-Contractor is deemed to have included the costs for all such
tests in his Tender Offer for the Maintenance during the Defects Liability Period.
TS/75/6 2602542S/EL

Nus Spec

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Nus Spec

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TENDER DOCUMENT

PROPOSED ADDITION AND ALTERATION TO EXISTING 4-STOREY

TENDER REFERENCE NO : NUSDEP/OED/

EMPLOYER NATIONAL UNIVERSITY OF SINGAPORE

SUPERINTENDING OFFICER, CPG CONSULTANTS PTE LTD

CIVIL & STRUCTURAL ECAS CONSULTANTS PTE LTD

MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL WSP CONSULTANCY PTE LTD

QUANTITY SURVEYOR CPG CONSULTANTS PTE LTD

PART IV-1 : TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 1 : GENERAL PS/M/S1/1 to

SECTION 2 : NOT USED -

SECTION 3 : NOT USED -

SECTION 4 : NOT USED -

SECTION 5 : NOT USED -

SECTION 6 : NOT USED -

SECTION 7 : NOT USED -

SECTION 8 : NOT USED -

SECTION 9 : NOT USED -

SECTION 10 : NOT USED -

SECTION 11 : DUCKWORK TS/M/S11/1 to

SECTION 12 : AIR DIFFUSING EQUIPEMNT AND DAMPER TS/M/S12/1 to

SECTION 13 : AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHU) AND FILTERS TS/M/S13/1 to

SECTION 14 : FAN COIL UNITS (FCUS) TS/M/S14/1 to

SECTION 15 : AIR FILTERS TS/M/S15/1 to

SECTION 16 : CONTROLS TS/M/S16/1 to

SECTION 17 : PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROL SYSTEM TS/M/S17/1 to

SECTION 18 : AUTOMATION & MONITORING SYSTEM TS/M/S18/1 to

SECTION 19 : INSTRUMENTATION & SENSOR SYSTEM TS/M/S19/1 to

SECTION 20 : VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE (VSD) TS/M/S20/1 to

SECTION 21 : ELECTRONIC CONTROL SOFT STARTER TS/M/S21/1 to

SECTION 23 : 100% FRESH AIR BUILD UP AIR HANDLING UNITS TS/M/S23/1 to

SECTION 24 : 100% FRESH AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHU) AND TS/M/S24/1 to

SECTION 25 : NOT USED -

SECTION 26 : MECHANICAL VENTILATION AND FANS TS/M/S26/1 to

SECTION 27 : NOT USED -

SECTION 28 : NOT USED -

SECTION 29 : NOT USED -

SECTION 30 : PIPE AND FITTINGS TS/M/S30/1 to

SECTION 31 : NOT USED -

SECTION 32 : NOT USED -

SECTION 33 : NOT USED -

SECTION 34 : NOT USED -

SECTION 35 : NOT USED -

SECTION 36 : NOT USED -

SECTION 37 : NOT USED -

SECTION 38 : NOT USED -

SECTION 40 : WATER DETECTION SYSTEM TS/M/S40/1 to

SECTION 41 : NOT USED -

SECTION 42 : AIR-COOLED MULTI-SPLIT VRV UNITS TS/M/S42/1 to

SECTION 43 : NOT USED -

SECTION 44 : AIR-COOLED MULTI-SPLIT VRV UNITS TS/M/S44/1 to

SECTION 45 : NOT USED -

SECTION 46 : NOT USED -

SECTION 47 : NOT USED -

SECTION 48 : ULTRA VIOLET EMITTER TS/M/S48/1 to

SECTION 49 : VIBRATION ISOLATION AND NOISE CONTROL TS/M/S49/1 to

SECTION 50 : WATER FLOW METER AND BTU METER TS/M/S50/1 to

SECTION 51 : DIGITAL POWER METER TS/M/S51/1 to

SECTION 52 : NOT USED -

SECTION 53 : NOT USED -

SECTION 54 : NOT USED -

SECTION 55 : DEHUMIDIFIER HEAT PIPES TS/M/S55/1 to

SECTION 56 : FIRE RESISTANT SYSTEM TS/M/S56/1 to